Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
Dick Miller Inc; 2015-07-31; PWS15-71UTIL
c -----------~·~-- CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT San Diego County California CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, GENERAL PROVISIONS, SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS, AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR TRI-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 (REBID) CONTRACT NO. 50081 BID NO. PWS15-71UTIL ft \.1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 1 of 173 Pages TABLE OF CONTENTS Item Page Notice Inviting Bids................................................................................................................... 10 Contractor's Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Equipment Questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Bid Security Form . .. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . . .. . . ............ .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . . . 23 Bidder's Bond to Accompany Proposal..................................................................................... 24 Guide for Completing the "Designation Of Subcontractors" Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 26 Designation of Subcontractor and Amount of Subcontractor's Bid Items . ..... .. . .. . . . . . .. .. . . . ... . .. . . . .. 28 Bidder's Statement of Technical Ability and Experience............................................................ 29 Bidder's Certificate of Insurance for General Liability, Employers' Liability, Automotive Liability and Workers' Compensation........................................................................................ 30 Bidder's Statement Re Debarment........................................................................................... 31 Bidder's Disclosure of Discipline Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Noncollusion Declaration to Be Executed by Bidder and Submitted with Bid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Contract Public Works.............................................................................................................. 35 Labor and Materials Bond......................................................................................................... 41 Faithful Performance/Warranty Bond........................................................................................ 43 Optional Escrow Agreement for Surety Deposits in Lieu of Retention....................................... 44 ft "' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 2 of 173 Pages Section 1 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 Section 2 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-11 Section 3 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 Section 4 4-1 4-2 Section 5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 Section 6 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 6-5 6-6 6-7 6-8 6-9 6-10 GENERAL PROVISIONS Terms, Definitions Abbreviations and Symbols Terms............................................................................................................... 48 Definitions.................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Abbreviations............................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Units of Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Scope and Control of The Work Award and Execution of Contract................. ..................................................... 58 Assignment.................................................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Subcontracts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Contract Bonds............................................ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 Plans and Specifications.............................. ..................................................... 60 Work to be Done.......................................... ..................................................... 64 Subsurface Data.......................................... ..................................................... 64 Right-of-Way ............................................... ..................................................... 64 Surveying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Authority of Board and Engineer.................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Inspection.................................................... ..................................................... 68 Changes in Work Changes Requested by the Contractor........ .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 68 Changes Initiated by the Agency .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 68 Extra Work................................................... .... .. . .. . . .. ... . . ... . . . . ... . . . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. 70 Changed Conditions . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 72 Disputed Work............................................. ..................................................... 73 Control of Materials Materials and Workmanship........................ ..................................................... 76 Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage................................................ 80 Utilities Location....................................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Protection .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. 81 Removal........................................................................................................... 81 Relocation .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 82 Delays.............................................................................................................. 82 Cooperation .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. .. . .. . .. .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 83 Prosecution, Progress and Acceptance of the Work Construction Schedule and Commencement of Work........................................ 83 Prosecution of Work.................................... ..................................................... 87 Suspension of Work..................................... . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . 87 Default by Contractor................................... .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. 88 Termination of Contract . . . . .. . . . . . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. . .. .. . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . 88 Delays and Extensions of Time .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 88 Time of Completion .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. . .. 88 Completion, Acceptance, and Warranty....... ..................................................... 89 Liquidated Damages.................................... ..................................................... 90 Use of Improvement During Construction .. .. .. .... .............. .... .. .. .... .. .. .... .. .. .. .. .. .. . 90 ft {.~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 3 of 173 Pages Section 7 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-5 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-14 Section 9 9-1 9-2 9-3 9-4 Responsibilities of the Contractor Contractor's Equipment and Facilities.......... ..................................................... 91 Labor................................................................................................................ 91 Liability Insurance........................................ ..................................................... 91 Workers' Compensation Insurance.............. ..................................................... 92 Permits............................................................................................................. 92 The Contractor's Representative................. ..................................................... 92 Cooperation and Collateral Work................. .. ..... .. . ... . .. .. ... .. . . .. . .. .. ... .. .. . . . .... .. .. . .. 93 Project Site Maintenance............................. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements........................................ 95 Public Convenience and Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Patent Fees or Royalties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 02 Advertising................................................... ......... ................................. ........... 102 Laws to be Observed................................... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 02 Antitrust Claims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 02 Measurement and Payment Measurement of Quantities for Unit Price Work................................................. 103 Lump Sum Work............................................................................................... 103 Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 03 Bid Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 06 ~ ~1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 4 of 173 Pages TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS DIVISION 01 -GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01015 01200 01300 01380 01400 01610 01611 01615 01620 01630 01650 Project Requirements Measurement and Payment Submittals Construction DVDs and Photographs Quality Control General Equipment Stipulations Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria Equipment and Valve Identification Equipment Schedule Pipeline Schedule Startup Requirements DIVISION 02 -SITE WORK 02050 02223 02512 02900 Demolition Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting Asphaltic Concrete Paving Hydroseeding DIVISION 03-CONCRETE 03000 03480 03600 Cast-in-Place Concrete Precast Concrete Vault Grout DIVISION 05-METALS 05500 05990 Anchorage in Concrete Structural and Miscellaneous Metals DIVISION 09-FINISHES 09870 09902 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 09900 Painting and Coating Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating DIVISION 11 -EQUIPMENT 11185 Submersible Sump and Sewage Pump DIVISION 13-SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13500 13570 Instrumentation and Control Systems Panels, Consoles, and Appurtenances DIVISION 15-MECHANICAL 15000 15010 15020 15041 15044 15050 15057 15061 15064 General Piping System and Appurtenances Valve Installation Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation Disinfection of Piping Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines Basic Mechanical Building Systems Materials and Methods Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Stainless Steel Pipe ft ~' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 5 of 173 Pages 15067 15068 15074 15098 15099 15100 15102 15108 15112 15140 15500 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing and Accessories High Density Polyethylene (PE 3408) Pipe Blowoff Assemblies Pressure Reducing Valves Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) Butterfly Valves (BFV's) Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve and Combination Air Valve Assemblies Backflow Prevention Assemblies Pipe Supports Ventilation DIVISION 16-ELECTRICAL 16050 16100 16640 Electrical Electrical Equipment Installation Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes ft ~., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 6 of 173 Pages SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO PART 2, 3 AND 6 OF THE SSPWC Part 2 Section 200 200-1 200-2 Section 201 201-1 201-3 Section 203 203-6 Section 204 204-1 Section 206 206-8 206-7 206-9 Section 207 207-2 207-9 207-10 207-25 Section 210 210-1 210-3 Section 212 212-1 212-2 212-3 Section 213 213-2 213-3 Section 214 214-5 Section 215 215-1 ~ Construction Materials Rock Materials Rock Products ................................................................................................ .. Untreated Base Materials ............................................................................... .. Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials Portland Cement Concrete ............................................................................ .. Expansion Joint Filler and Joint Sealants ......................................................... . Bituminous Materials Asphalt Concrete .. .. .. . .. . . . . . . . .. . . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .................................................. .. Lumber and Treatment with Preservatives Lumber and Plywood ...................................................................................... .. Miscellaneous Metal Items Light Gage Steel Tubing and Connectors ........................................................ . Traffic Signals ................................................................................................ .. Portable Changeable Message Sign ............................................................... .. Pipe Reinforced Concrete Pipe .............................................................................. .. Iron Pipe & Fittings .......................................................................................... . Steel Pipe ........................................................................................................ . Underground Utility Marking Tape ................................................................... . Paint and Protective Coatings Paint ................................................................................................................ . Galvanizing ...................................................................................................... . Landscape and Irrigation Materials Landscape Materials ........................................................................................ . Irrigation System Materials . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .................................................. . Electrical Materials .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. . . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .................................................. . Engineering Fabrics Geotextiles ..................................................................................................... .. Erosion Control Specialties ............................................................................. .. Pavement Markers Reflective Pavement Markers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ................................................... . Fencing Environmental Fencing .................................................................................... . 107 108 109 111 112 113 114 116 117 118 118 119 119 131 131 132 136 138 139 140 140 141 "~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 7 of 173 Pages '~. Part 3 Section 300 300-1 300-2 300-3 300-9 300-13 Section 301 301-1 Section 302 302-5 302-11 Section 303 303-1 303-5 303-6 Section 304 304-3 Section 306 306-1 306-5 Section 307 Section 308 308-2 308-4 308-5 308-6 308-7 308-8 Section 310 310-5 Section 312 312-1 Section 313 313-1 313-3 313-4 Part 6 600-3 Construction Methods Earthwork Clearing and Grubbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Unclassified Excavation..................................................................................... 144 Structure Excavation and Backfill....................................................................... 144 Geotextiles for Erosion Control and Water Pollution Control.............................. 145 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan.............................................................. 146 Treated Soil, Subgrade Preparation and Placement of Base Materials Subgrade Preparation........................................................................................ 149 Roadway Surfacing Asphalt Concrete Pavement.............................................................................. 151 Asphalt Pavement Repairs and Remediation..................................................... 152 Concrete and Masonry Construction. Concrete Structures........................................................................................... 153 Concrete Curbs, Walks, Gutters, Cross Gutters, Alley Intersections, Access Ramps, And Driveways . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Stamped Concrete............................................................................................. 154 Metal Fabrication and Construction Chain Link Fence............................................................................................... 154 Underground Conduit Construction Open Trench Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Abandonment of Conduits and Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 158 Street Lighting and Traffic Signals........................................................... 158 Landscape and Irrigation Installation Earthwork and Topsoil Placement..................................................................... 158 Planting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Irrigation System Installation.............................................................................. 162 Maintenance and Plant Establishment............................................................... 164 Guarantee ... .... .. . ......... .... ... .. ... . . . . .. ... .... ... . ...... .. .. ... .. .. . .. ....... .. ..... ........... ..... .. .. . .. 164 Measurement and Payment............................................................................... 167 Painting Painting Various Surfaces ................................................................................. 167 Pavement Marker Placement and Removal Placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Temporary Traffic Control Devices Temporary Traffic Pavement Markers................................................................ 169 Temporary Railing (Type K) and Crash Cushions ............................................. 170 Measurement and Payment............................................................................... 172 Modified Asphalts, Pavements and Processes Rubberized Emulsion -Aggregate Slurry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 8 of 173 Pages Appendix A Pertinent City of Carlsbad & Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Drawings Appendix B Example Resident Notification Door Hanger Appendix C City of Oceanside Standard Figures Appendix D San Diego County Water Authority Standard Drawings ft ~' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 9 of 173 Pages CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT, CALIFORNIA NOTICE INVITING BIDS UNTIL 2:00 PM ON APRIL 21, 2015, the Carlsbad Municipal Water District (District) shall accept sealed bids, clearly marked as such, at the Faraday Center, 1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, CA 92008-7314, Attn: Purchasing Officer, by mail, delivery service or by deposit in the Bid Box located in the first floor lobby, at which time they will be opened and read, for performing the work as follows: construction of approximately 1 ,860-feet of 18-inch potable water steel pipe and pressure reducing station. TRI-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 BID NO. PWS15-71UTIL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS AND BID REQUIREMENTS This bid and the terms of the Contract Documents and General Provisions constitute an irrevocable offer that shall remain valid and in full force for a period of 90 days and such additional time as may be mutually agreed upon by the Carlsbad Municipal Water District and the Bidder. No bid will be received unless it is made on a proposal form furnished by the Purchasing Department. Each bid must be accompanied by security in a form and amount required by law. The bidder's security of the second and third next lowest responsive bidders may be withheld until the Contract has been fully executed. The security submitted by all other unsuccessful bidders shall be returned to them, or deemed void, within ten (10) days after the Contract is awarded. Pursuant to the provisions of law (Public Contract Code section 1 0263), appropriate securities may be substituted for any obligation required by this notice or for any monies withheld by the District to ensure performance under this Contract. Section 1 0263 of the Public Contract Code requires monies or securities to be deposited with the District or a state or federally chartered bank in California as the escrow agent. The escrow agent shall maintain insurance to cover negligent acts and omissions of the agent in connection with the handling of retentions under this section in an amount not less than $100,000 per contract. The Carlsbad Municipal Water District may disqualify a contractor or subcontractor from participating in bidding when a contractor or subcontractor has been debarred by the Carlsbad Municipal Water District or another jurisdiction in the State of California as an irresponsible bidder. The work shall be performed in strict conformity with the plans, provisions, and specifications as ap- proved by the City Council of the City of Carlsbad on file with the (Engineering) Department. The spec- ifications for the work include City of Carlsbad Technical Specifications and the Standard Specifica- tions for Public Works Construction. Parts 2 & 3. current edition at time of bid opening and the supplements thereto as published by the "Green book" Committee of Public Works Standards, Inc., all hereinafter designated "SSPWC", as amended. Specification Reference is hereby made to the plans and specifications for full particulars and description of the work. The General Provisions (Part 1) to the SSPWC do not apply. The Carlsbad Municipal Water District encourages the participation of minority and women-owned businesses. The Carlsbad Municipal Water District encourages all bidders, suppliers, manufacturers, fabricators and contractors to utilize recycled and recyclable materials when available, appropriate and approved by the Engineer. 1\ • ., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 1 0 of 173 Pages BID DOCUMENTS The bid documents comprise the following documents which must be completed and properly exe- cuted including notarization, where indicated. 1. Contractor's Proposal 2. Equipment Questionnaire 3. Bidder's Bond 4. Noncollusion Declaration 5. Designation of Subcontractor and Amount of Subcontractor's Bid 6. Bidder's Statement of Technical Ability and Experience 7. Acknowledgement of Addendum( a) 8. Certificate of Insurance. The riders covering the City, its officials, employees and volunteers may be omitted at the time of bid submittal but shall be provided by the Bidder prior to award of this contract. 9. Bidder's Statement Re Debarment 10. Bidder's Disclosure Of Discipline Record 11. Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits -(optional, must be completed if the Bidder wishes to use the Escrow Agreement for Security) ENGINEER'S ESTIMATE: All bids will be compared on the basis of the Engineer's Estimate. The estimated quantities are ap- proximate and serve solely as a basis for the comparison of bids. The Engineer's Estimate is $1.200,000. TIME OF COMPLETION: The contractor shall complete the Work within the time set in the contract as defined in the General Provisions Section 6-7. SPECIALTY CONTRACTORS: ACCEPTABLE LICENSE TYPES Except as provided herein a bid submitted to the District by a Contractor who is not licensed as a contractor pursuant to the Business and Professions Code shall be considered nonresponsive and shall be rejected by the District. In all contracts where federal funds are involved, no bid submitted shall be invalidated by the failure of the bidder to be licensed in accordance with California law. Where federal funds are involved the contractor shall be properly licensed at the time the contract is awarded. In all other cases the contractor shall state their license number, expiration date and classification in the proposal, under penalty of perjury. This invitation to bid does not involve federal funds. The only classifications acceptable for this contract is a Class "A" General Engineering. ESCROW AGREEMENT If the Contractor intends to utilize the escrow agreement included in the contract documents in lieu of the usual 1 0% retention from each payment, these documents must be completed and submitted with the signed contract. The escrow agreement may not be substituted at a later date. OBTAINING PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Sets of plans, various supplemental provisions, and Contract documents may be obtained at the Cash- ier's Counter of the Faraday Center located at 1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, California 92008- 7314, for a non-refundable fee of $50 per set. If plans and specifications are to be mailed, the cost for postage should be added . . , \.., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 11 of 173 Pages INTENT OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Any prospective bidder who is in doubt as to the intended meaning of any part of the drawings, spec- ifications or other contract documents, or finds discrepancies in or omissions from the drawings and specifications may submit to the Engineer a written request for clarification or correction. Any response will be made only by a written addendum duly issued by the Engineer a copy of which will be mailed or delivered to each person receiving a set of the contract documents. No oral response will be made to such inquiry. Prior to the award of the contract, no addition to, modification of or interpreta- tion of any provision in the contract documents will be given by any agent, employee or con- tractor of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District except as hereinbefore specified. No bidder may rely on directions given by any agent, employee or contractor of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District except as hereinbefore specified. REJECTION OF BIDS The Carlsbad Municipal Water District reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any minor irregularity or informality in such bids. PREVAILING WAGE TO BE PAID The general prevailing rate of wages for each craft or type of worker needed to execute the Contract shall be those as determined by the Director of Industrial Relations pursuant to the sections 1770, 1773, and 1773.1 of the Labor Code. Pursuant to section 1773.2 of the Labor Code, a current copy of applicable wage rates is on file in the Office of the City Engineer. The Contractor to whom the Contract is awarded shall not pay less than the said specified prevailing rates of wages to all workers employed by him or her in the execution of the Contract. The Prime Contractor shall be responsible for insuring compliance with provisions of section 1777.5 of the Labor Code and section 4100 et seq. of the Public Contracts Code, "Subletting and Subcon- tracting Fair Practices Act." The City Engineer is the District's "duly authorized officer" for the purposes of section 4107 and 4107.5. The provisions of Part 7, Chapter 1, of the Labor Code commencing with section 1720 shall apply to the Contract for work. SB 854: PREVALING WAGE COMPLIANCE MONITORING Senate Bill 854 created a major change in the way the Department of Industrial Relations (DIR) mon- itors prevailing wage requirements. All contractors and subcontractors must be registered with the DIR prior to bidding. Registration must be done online and includes a registration fee. All contractors must electronically submit all certified payrolls records to DIR. PRE BID MEETING A pre-bid meeting and tour of the project site will not be held. UNIT PRICES AND COMPUTATION OF BIDS All bids are to be computed on the basis of the given estimated quantities of work, as indicated in this proposal, times the unit price as submitted by the bidder. In case of a discrepancy between words and figures, the words shall prevail. In case of an error in the extension of a unit price, the corrected extension shall be calculated and the bids will be computed as indicated above and compared on the basis of the corrected totals. All prices must be in ink or typewritten. Changes or corrections may be crossed out and typed or written in with ink and must be initialed in ink by a person authorized to sign for the Contractor. ADDENDUMS Bidders are advised to verify the issuance of all addenda and receipt thereof one day prior to bidding. Submission of bids without acknowledgment of addenda may be cause of rejection of bid. I\ •f' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 12 of 173 Pages BOND AND INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS The Contractor shall provide bonds to secure faithful performance and warranty of the work in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price on this project. The Contractor shall provide bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers, in an amount equal to one hundred percent ( 1 00%) of the total amount payable by the terms of the contract. These bonds shall be kept in full force and effect during the course of this project, and shall extend in full force and effect and be retained by the District until they are released as stated in the General Provisions section of this contract. All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to be accompanied by the following documents: 1) An original, or a certified copy, of the unrevoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so. 2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance commissioner. If the bid is accepted, the District may require copies of the insurer's most recent annual statement and quarterly statement filed with the Department of Insurance pursuant to Article 10 (commencing with section 900) of Chapter 1 of Part 2 of Division 1 of the Insurance Code, within 10 calendar days of the insurer's receipt of a request to submit the statements. Insurance is to be placed with insurers that: 1) Have a rating in the most recent Best's Key Rating Guide of at least A-:VII 2) Are admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in the State of California by the Insurance Commissioner. Auto policies offered to meet the specification of this contract must: 1) Meet the conditions stated above for all insurance companies. 2) Cover any vehicle used in the performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. Workers' compensation insurance required under this contract must be offered by a company meeting the above standards with the exception that the Best's rating condition is waived. The District does accept policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meeting the requirement for workers' com- pensation insurance. The Contractor shall be required to maintain insurance as specified in the Contract. Any additional cost of said insurance shall be included in the bid price. The award of the contract by the District is contingent upon the Contractor submitting the required bonds and insurance, as described in the contract, within twenty days of bid opening. If the Contractor fails to comply with these requirements, the District may award the contract to the second or third lowest bidder and the bid security of the lowest bidder may be forfeited. BUSINESS LICENSE The prime contractor and all subcontractors are required to have and maintain a valid City of Carlsbad Business License for the duration of the contract. Approved by the Board of Directors of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, California, by Resolution No. 1506, adopted on the 18th day of November, 2014. . · March 12,2015 .J ~ ~ Date ~ l' •+' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 13 of 173 Pages ·-... ... CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 CONTRACTOR•s PROPOSAL Board of Directors Carlsbad Municipal Water District 1200 Carlsbad Village Drive Carlsbad, California 92008 OPEflED, WITNESSED AND RECO~OED: . ~~~\5 aJ;: __ The undersigned declares he/she has carefully' examined the location of the work, read the Notice Inviting Bids, examined the Plans, Specifications, General Provisions, Contract Documents, and ad- denda thereto, and hereby proposes to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, transportation, and services required to do all the work to complete Contract No. 50081 in accordance with the Plans, Specifications, General Provisions, Contract Documents, and addenda thereto and that he/she will take in full payment therefore the following unit prices for each item complete, to wit: SCHEDULE"A"ROADIMPROVEMENTS Approximate Item Quantity Unit Price Total Amount No. Description And Unit (Figures} (Figures} A-1 Mobilization at Not to $ 118,000.00 $ 118,000.00 ONE HUNDRED EIGHTEEN THOUSAND Exceed DOLLARS $150,000 (Price in Words) A-2 Water Pollution Control lnclud-LS $ 20,000.00 $ 20,000.00 ing Daily Street Sweeping TWENTY THOUSAND DOLLARS (Lump Sum Price in Words) A-3 Traffic Control at LS $ 43,834.00 $ 43,834.00 FORTY THREE THOUSAND EIGHT RO~DRED I RIR I Y FOOR DOC[]!;RS (Lump Sum Price in Words) A-4 Protection of Existing Utilities LS $ 8,100.00 $ 8,100.00 at EIGHT THOUSAND ONE HUNDRED 00[[]!;RS (Lump Sum Price in Words) A-5 Construction schedule at $10,000 ~10,000 ~10,000 Ten Thousand Dollars Stipulated Amount (Price in Words) ft ~l RPvic:Prl 1/~0/1 ~ r.nntr::~~t Nn &;OOA1 P::~nA 14 nf 17~ P::~nAc: Approximate Item Quantity Unit Price Total Amount No. Description And Unit {Figures} (Figures} A-15 Pressure Reducing Station LS $ 66,000.00 $ 66,000.00 SIXTY SIX THOUSAND DOLLARS (Lump Sum Price in Words) A-16 Electrical LS $ 23,700.00 $ 23,700.00 TWENTY THREE THOUSAND SEVEN ROf\JOR!::O OOECARS (Lump Sum Price in Words) A-17 Instrumentation & Control LS $ 7,900.00 $ 7,900.00 SEVEN THOUSAND NINE HUNDRED 00[LARS (Lump Sum Price in Words) A-18 Cathodic Protection LS $ 24,000.00 $ 24,000.00 TWENTY FOUR THOUSAND DOLLARS (Lump Sum Price in Words) A-19 4" Potable Water Bypass Sys-LS $ 29,300.00 $ 29,300.00 \ •.. tem TWENTY NINE THOUSAND THREE ROI"lDRED DOCCU:RS (Lump Sum Price in Words) A-20 Remove and Replace Con-120 SF $ 11.00 $ 1,320.00 crete Driveway Sta 235+50 ELEVEN DOLLARS (Unit Price in Words) A-21 Remove and Replace Con-250SF $ 11.00 $ 2,750.00 crete Driveway Sta 246+30 ELEVEN DOLLARS (Unit Price in Words) A-22 Remove and Replace Curb 50 LF and Gutter $ 33.00 $ 1,650.00 THIRTY THREE DOLLARS (Unit Price in Words) A-23 Remove and Replace Con-150 SF $ 8.00 $ 1,200.00 crete Sidewalk EIGHT DOLLARS (Unit Price in Words) ft ~~ Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 16 of 173 Pages :heck A License -License Detail -Contractors State License Board Page 2 of: !Policy Number:RWCC48121664 I !Effective Date: 10/01/2014 I [Expire Date: 10/01/2015 i VJ_g~~~!:_~·_gome~'!~ii!!~~--His!_o_ry _________________________________________ ----------------------------------------__________ __j Miscellaneous Information 06/20/1995-LICENSE REISSUED TO ANOTHER ENTITY 1ttps://www2.cslb.ca.gov/onlineservices/checklicenseii/LicenseDetail.aspx?Lic... 4/21/201: IFA SOLE OWNER OR SOLE CONTRACTOR SIGN HERE: (1) Name under which business is conducted (2) Signature (given and surname) of proprietor {3) Place of Business (Street and Number) City and State---------------------------- (4) Zip Code ________ Telephone No. ____________ _ (5) E-Mail ___________________ _ IF A PARTNERSHIP. SIGN HERE: (1) Name under which business is conducted _________________ _ (2) Signature (given and surname and character of partner) (Note: Signature must be made by a general partner) (3) Place of Business------------------------- (Street and Number) City and State-------------------------- (4) Zip Code ________ Telephone No. _____________ _ {5) E-Mail ___________________ _ ft ~., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Paae 19 of 173 PaoP.s List below names of president, vice president, secretary and assistant secretary, if a corporation; if a ,.,, partnership, list names of all general partners, and managing partners: GLEN BULLOCK, PRESIDENT GLEN BULLOCK, VICE PRESIDENT GLEN BULLOCK, SECRETARY ft ~.,Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 21 of 173 Pages EQUIPMENT QUESTIONNAIRE (To Accompany Proposal) TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 The Contractor shall enter in the spaces provided the names of the manufacturers of equipment which the Contractor proposes to furnish, and shall submit this Equipment Questionnaire with its Bid. The District will review and evaluate the information before award of the Contract. Only one manufacturer's name shall be listed for each item of equipment. Upon award of a contract, the named equipment shall be furnished. Substitutions will be permitted only if named equipment does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents, the manufacturer is unable to meet the delivery requirements of the construction schedule, or the manufacturer is dilatory in complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Substitutions shall be subject to concurrence of the District and shall be confirmed by Change Order. Preliminary acceptance of equipment listed by manufacturer's name shall not in any way constitute a waiver of the specifications covering such equipment; final acceptance will be based on full conformity with the Contract Documents. Failure to furnish all information requested or entering more than one manufacturer's name for any item in this Equipment Questionnaire may be cause for rejection of the Bid. Item Section Equipment Manufacturer 1 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials NORTHWEST PIPE COMPANY 2 15098 Pressure Reducing Valves CLAVAL 3 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) CRISTIN K-FLO ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 22 of 173 Pages BID SECURITY FORM (Check to Accompany Bid) TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 (NOTE: The following form shall be used if check accompanies bid.) Accompanying this proposal is a *Certified *Cashiers check payable to the order of CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT, in the sum of ________________ _ _____________________ dollars($ ), this amount being ten percent (1 0%) of the total amount of the bid. The proceeds of this check shall become the property of the District, provided this proposal shall be accepted by the District through action of its legally constituted contracting authorities and the undersigned shall fail to execute a con- tract and furnish the required Performance, Warranty and Payment Bonds and proof of insurance coverage within the stipulated time; otherwise, the check shall be returned to the undersigned. The proceeds of this check shall also become the property of the District if the undersigned shall withdraw his or her bid within the period of fifteen ( 15) days after the date set for the opening thereof, unless otherwise required by law, and notwithstanding the award of the contract to another bidder. BIDDER *Delete the inapplicable word. (NOTE: If the Bidder desires to use a bond instead of check, the Bid Bond form on the following pages shall be executed--the sum of this bond shall be not less than ten percent (1 0%) of the total amount of the bid.) ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 23 of 173 Pages BIDDER'S BOND TO ACCOMPANY PROPOSAL TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Dick Miller, Inc., dba DMI , as Principal, and The Ohio Casualty Insurance Company as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, California, in an amount as follows: (must be at least ten percent (10%) of the bid amount) Ten Percent of Amount Bid (10% of Bid Amount) for WhiCh payment, WeiJ and truly made, We bind OUrselVeS, OUr heirS, executors and administrators, successors or assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH that if the proposal of the above- bounden Principal for: TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 In the City of Carlsbad, is accepted by the Board of Directors, and if the Principal shall duly enter into and execute a Contract including required bonds and insurance policies within twenty (20) days from the date of award of Contract by the Board of Directors of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District of the City of Carlsbad, being duly notified of said award, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect, and the amount specified herein shall be forfeited to the said District. In the event Principal executed this bond as an individual, it Is agreed that the death of Principal shall GUIDE FOR COMPLETING THE "DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS" FORM REFERENCES Prior to preparation of the following "Subcontractor Disclosure Form" Bidders are urged to review the definitions in section 1-2 of the General Provisions to this Contract, especially, "Bid", "Bidder", "Contract", "Contractor'', "Contract Price", "Contract Unit Price", "Engineer'', "Own Or- ganization", "Subcontractor'', and "Work". Bidders are further urged to review sections 2-3 SUBCONTRACTS of the General Provisions. CAUTIONS This form will be used by the Agency to determine the percentage of work that the Bidder proposes to perform. Bidders are cautioned that failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Any bid that proposes performance of more than 50 percent of the work by subcontractors or otherwise to be performed by forces other than the Bid- der's own organization will be rejected as non-responsive. Specialty items of work that may be so designated by the Engineer on the "Contractor's Proposal" are not included in computing the percent- age of work proposed to be performed by the Bidder. INSTRUCTIONS The Bidder shall set forth the name and location of business of each and every subcontractor whom the Bidder proposes to perform work or labor or render service in or about the work or improvement, and every subcontractor licensed as a contractor by the State of California whom the Bidder proposes to specially fabricate and install any portion of the work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder's total bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets and highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) or ten thousand dollars ($1 0,000) whichever is greater. Said name(s) and location(s) of business of subcontractor(s) shall be set forth and included as an integral part of the bid offer. The Designation of Subcontractors form must be submitted as a part of the Bidder's sealed bid. Failure to provide complete and correct information may result in rejection of the bid as non-responsive. Suppliers of materials from sources outside the limits of work are not subcontractors. The value of materials and transport of materials from sources outside the limits of work, as shown on the plans, shall be assigned to the Contractor or the Subcontractor as the case may be, that the Bidder proposes as installer of said materials. The value of material incorporated in any Subcontractor-installed bid item that is supplied by the Bidder shall be included as a part of the work that the Bidder proposes to be performed by the Subcontractor installing said item. When a Subcontractor has a Carlsbad business license, the number must be entered on the proper form. If the Subcontractor does not have a valid business license, enter "NONE" in the appropriate space. When the Bidder proposes using a Subcontractor to construct or install less than 1 00 percent of a bid item, the Bidder shall attach an explanation sheet to the Designation of Subcontractor form. The ex- planation sheet shall clearly apprise the District of the specific facts that show the Bidder proposes to perform no less than fifty percent (50%) of the work with its own forces. ~ ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Paoe 26 of 173 Paoes Determination of the subcontract amounts for purposes of award of the contract shall be determined by the Board of Directors in conformance with the provisions of the contract documents and the various supplemental provisions. The decision of the Board of Directors shall be final. Contractor is prohibited from performing any work on this project with a subcontractor who is ineligible to perform work on a public works project pursuant to Labor Code Sections 1771.1 or 1777.7. Bidders shall make any additional copies of the disclosure forms as may be necessary to provide the required information. The page number and total number of additional form pages shall be entered in the location provided on each type of form so duplicated. ft ~1 Revised 1/30113 Contract No. 50081 Page 27 of 173 Pages DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTOR AND AMOUNT OF SUBCONTRACTOR•s BID ITEMS (To Accompany Proposal) TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 The Bidder certifies that it has used the sub-bid of the following listed subcontractors in preparing this bid for the Work and that the listed subcontractors will be used to perform the portions of the Work as designated in this list in accordance with applicable provisions of the specifications and section 41 00 et seq. of the Public Contract Code, "Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act." The Bidder further certifies that no additional subcontractor will be allowed to perform any portion of the Work in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) of the Bidder's total bid, or in the case of bids or offers for construction of streets and highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent (0.5%) or ten thousand dollars ($1 0,000), whichever is greater, and that no changes in the subcontractors listed work will be made except upon the prior approval of the Agency. SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID ITEMS Amount of Subcontractor's Work by Sub- Subcontractor Name and License No. and contractor in Portion of Work Location of Business Classification* Dollars* ELECTRICAL CACY ELECTRIC 780158 C-10 $22,563.00 ELCAJON, CA -·---·-··-------------·---· Page _1_ of _1_ pages of this Subcontractor Designation form • Pursuant to section 4104 (a)(2)(A) California Public Contract Code, receipt of the information preceded by an asterisk may be submitted by the Bidder up to 24 hours after the deadline for submitting bids contained in the "Notice Inviting Bids." 0 RP\/iC::Prl 1/~0/1 ~ r:nntr::.r.t Nn 'iOOR1 P::.nP ?R nf 17~ PRnP.s - BIDDER•s STATEMENT OF TECHNICAL ABILITY AND EXPERIENCE {To Accompany Proposal) TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 The Bidder is required to state what work of a similar character to that included in the proposed Con- tract he/she has successfully performed and give references, with telephone numbers, which will en- able the City to judge his/her responsibility, experience and skill. An attachment can be used. Date Amount Contract Name and Address of Name and Phone No. of Type of Work of Completed the Employer Person to Contract Contract SEE ATTACHED CO i!IPLETED MAJOR JOBS LIST BIDDER'S CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE FOR ft {..,Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 29 of 173 Pages ....... DMI COMPLETED MAJOR PROJECTS 1. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: AWARDS: 2. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 3. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: AWARDS: 4. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 5. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: HILLERY DRIVE IMPROVEMENTS HILLERY DRIVE & BLACK MOUNTAIN ROAD, SAN DIEGO DRAINAGE, CMU WALL & ROADWAY IMPROVEMENTS 66 WORKING DAYS CITY OF SAN DIEGO 9485 AERO DRIVE, SAN DIEGO LISA ADAMS 858-537-2564 Ell GUERRERO, RESIDENT ENG. 858-537-2564 SAME AS ABOVE COMPLETION 11/30/14 $1,398,224.00 APWA PROJECT OF THE YEAR RAINBOW SLOPE & DRAINAGE PROJECT RAINBOW HEIGHTS & RAINBOW CREST, FALLBROOK 100 WORKING DAYS COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO 5500 OVERLAND AVENUE, SUITE 310, SAN DIEGO BEN MEHTLAN 858-537-2564 BEN MEHTLAN, RESIDENT ENGINEER 858-537-2564 SAME AS ABOVE COMPLETION 1/31/15 $995,000.00 CITY OF SOLANA BEACH HIGHWAY 101 WESTSIDE IMPROVEMENTS STREETSCAPE & ROADWAY IMPROVEMENTS 220 WORKING DAYS CITY OF SOLANA BEACH 635 SOUTH HIGHWAY 101, SOLANA BEACH, CA 92075-2215 MOSAMMAK 858-720-2473 DAN GOLDBERG, CITY CIVIL ENGINEER 858-720-2474 SAME AS ABOVE SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 11/15/13 $6,376,000.00 APWA-CONTRACTOR OF THE YEAR MARYLAND DRIVE STREET IMPROVEMENTS-PHASE II MARYLAND DRIVE & ROSE DRIVE, VISTA 12 MONTHS CITY OF VISTA 200 CIVIC CENTER DRIVE, VISTA, CA 92084-6275 JASON CHRISTMAN 760-760-1340 EXT. 1264 SAME AS ABOVE SAME SAME MAY2012 $732,729.00 BARHAM DRIVE URBAN TRAIL IMPROVEMENTS BARHAM DRIVE & S. TWIN OAKS VALLEY RD, SAN MARCOS 4 MONTHS CITY OF SAN MARCOS 1 CIVIC CENTER DRIVE, SAN MARCOS, CA 92069 1 of 3 DMI COMPLETED MAJOR PROJECTS OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 6. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 7. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 8. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 9. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: RYAN BISHOP 760-7 44-1 050 SAME AS ABOVE SAME SAME DECEMBER 2011 $1,040,752.00 POINSETTIA & LA MIRADA IMPROVEMENTS POINSETTIA AVE. & LA MIRADA DR., SAN MARCOS CITY STREET INFRASTRUCTURE IMPROVEMENTS 6 MONTHS CITY OF SAN MARCOS 1 CIVIC CENTER DRIVE, SAN MARCOS, CA 92069 RYAN BISHOP 760-7 44-1 050 SAME AS ABOVE SAME SAME JULY 2011 $1,559,494.00 MERCADO & GRAND LIGHTING MERCADO DRIVE & GRAND AVENUE, ESCONDIDO CITY STREET INFRASTRUCTURE & LIGHTING IMPVTS 9 MONTHS CITY OF ESCONDIDO 201 N. BROADWAY, ESCONDIDO, CA 92025 SAM COTTRELL 760-839-4651 SAME AS ABOVE SAME SAME JULY2011 $2,266,000.00 FOOTHILL DRIVE RECONSTRUCTION FOOTHILL DRIVE, VISTA CITY STREET INFRASTRUCTURE IMPROVEMENTS ?MONTHS CITY OF VISTA 200 CIVIC CENTER DRIVE, VISTA, CA 92084 GREG MAYER 760-726-1340 CITY OF VISTA SAME SAME NOVEMBER 2010 $1,601,000.00 SANTEE TOWN CENTER COMMUNITY PARK MISSION GORGE ROAD, SANTEE RETAINING WALLS AND FOOTINGS (SUBCONTRACTOR) 10 MONTHS WESTERN RIM CONSTRUCTORS, INC. 912 S. ANDREASON DRIVE, SUITE 108, ESCONDIDO, CA 92029 RAY BYROM 760-489-4328 UNKNOWN UNKNOWN UNKNOWN 2 of 3 DMI COMPLETED MAJOR PROJECTS DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 10. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 11. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 12. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: 13. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: DATE COMPLETED (NOC): VALUE OF WORK: MAY2010 $840,000.00 PEPPER PARK COMFORT STATION RELOCATION 300 GOESNO PLACE, NATIONAL CITY CITY STREET INFRASTRUCTURE IMPROVEMENTS 6 MONTHS SAN DIEGO UNFIED PORT DISTRICT 3165 PACIFIC HIGHWAY, SAN DIEGO, CA 92101 YESHITLA MULUGETA 619-686-6250 SAME AS ABOVE SAME SAME JANUARY 2010 $480,000.00 TULIP STREET IMPROVEMENTS TULIP STREET, ESCONDIDO CITY STREET INFRASTRUCTURE IMPROVEMENTS 5 MONTHS CITY OF ESCONDIDO 201 N. BROADWAY, ESCONDIDO, CA 92025 SAM COTTRELL 760-839-4651 SAME AS ABOVE SAME SAME OCTOBER 2009 $941,000.00 CORONADO ROTARY PLAZA ROTARY PLAZA, CORONADO, CA 92118 CITY STREET INFRASTRUCTURE IMPROVEMENTS 10 MONTHS CITY OF CORONADO 1825 STRAND WAY, CORONADO, CA 92118 NGYRA STEBBINS 619-522-2423 SAME AS ABOVE SAME SAME AUGUST2009 $1,200,000.00 QUAIL BOTANICAL GARDENS CHILDREN'S EXPANSION QUAIL DRIVE, ENCINITAS, CA GRADING, UNDERGROUND UTIL TITlES, RETAINING WALLS 5MONTHS QUAIL BOTANICAL GARDENS I JRS CONSTRUCTION MGMT P.O. BOX 597, LA MESA, CA 91944 RUDY STUBER 619-466-7783 CITY OF ENCINTIAS 760-633-2770 ENCINITAS, CA JUNE 2009 $1,068,000.00 3 of 3 DMI CURRENT MAJOR PROJECTS 1. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: PLANNED COMPLETION: VALUE OF WORK: 2. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: PLANNED COMPLETION: VALUE OF WORK: 3. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: PLANNED COMPLETION: VALUE OF WORK: 4. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: PLANNED COMPLETION: VALUE OF WORK: 5. NAME & DESCRIPTION: ADDRESS: DESCRIPTION OF WORK: PROJECT DURATION: OWNER'S NAME: OWNER'S ADDRESS: OWNER CONTACT PERSON: CONTACT PERSON PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER: ENGINEER'S PHONE NUMBER: ENGINEER ADDRESS: PLANNED COMPLETION: VALUE OF WORK: DOWNTOWN VILLAGE STREETSCAPE IMPROVEMENTS LA MESA BLVD, LA MESA DEMO, GRADING, CONCRETE, AC, DRAINAGE, SILVA CELLS 320 WORKING DAYS CITY OF LA MESA 8130 ALLISON AVENUE, LA MESA HAMED HASHEMIAN, P.E. 619-667-1153 HAMED HASHEMIAN, P.E. 619-667-1153 SAME AS ABOVE JANUARY 2015 $5,857.758.00 MONTGOMERY MIDDLE SCHOOL JOINT USE PARK FULTON & COMSTOCK, SAN DIEGO GRADING, UTILITIES, LANDSCAPING, CONCRETE & ASPHALT 140 WORKING DAYS CITY OF SAN DIEGO 9485 AERO DRIVE, SAN DIEGO SERGIO INIGUEZ 858-495-4720 SERGIO INIGUEZ 858-495-4 720 SAME AS ABOVE OCTOBER 2015 $850,000.00 WEGEFORTH ELEMENTARY SCHOOL JOINT USE PARK 3443 EDIWHAR AVE., SAN DIEGO 286 WORKING DAYS DEMO, GRADING, STORM DRAIN, CONCRETE, AC, LANDSCAPING CITY OF SAN DIEGO 9485 AERO DRIVE, SAN DIEGO ED FORDAN 619-533-3481 ED FORDAN 619-533-3481 9485 AERO DRIVE, SAN DIEGO DECEMBER 2015 $1,933,522.00 JUAN STREET CONCRETE IMPROVEMENTS JUAN STREET & TAYLOR STREET, SAN DIEGO DEMO, GRADING, CONCRETE, WET UTILITIES 220 WORKING DAYS CITY OF SAN DIEGO 9485 AERO DRIVE, SAN DIEGO WAYNE JARRELL 858-495-4711 SAME AS ABOVE SAME AS ABOVE SAME AS ABOVE FEBRUARY 2016 $5,000,000.00 SOUTH SANTA FE STREETSCAPE SOUTH SANTA FE & MAIN STREET, VISTA DEMO, GRADING, UTILITIES, CONCRETE, AC & LANDSCAPING 180 WORKING DAYS CITY OF VISTA 200 CIVIC CENTER DRIVE, VISTA CA 92084 PAUL MOCHEL 858-444-6804 PAUL MOCHEL 858-444-6804 SAME AS ABOVE DECEMBER 2015 $4,700,000.00 1 of 1 Policy Number: AES 1 024806 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 33 07 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED-OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS-AUTOMATIC STATUS WHEN REQUIRED IN CONSTRUCTION AGREEMENT WITH YOU This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART A. Section II -Who Is An Insured is amended to indude as an additional insured any person or or- ganization for whom you are performing opera- tions when you and such person or organization have agreed in writing in a contract or agreement that such person or organization be added as an additional insured on your policy. Such person or organization is an additional insured only with re- spect to liability for "bodily injury", "property dam- age" or "personal and advertising injury" caused, in whole or in part, by: 1. Your acts or omissions; or 2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your behalf; in the performance of your ongoing operations for the additional insured. A person's or organization's status as an addi- tional insured under this endorsement ends when your operations for that additional insured are completed. B. With respect to the insurance afforded to these additional insureds, the following additional exclu- sions apply: This insurance does not apply to: 1. "Bodily injury", "property damage" or "personal and advertising injury" arising out of the ren- dering of, or the failure to render, any profes- sional architectural, engineering or surveying services, including: a. The preparing, approving, or failing to pre- pare or approve, maps, shop drawings, opinions, reports, surveys, field orders, change orders or drawings and specifica- tions; or b. Supervisory, inspection, architectural or engineering activities. 2. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" occurring after. a. All work, including materials, parts or equipment furnished in connection with such work, on the project (other than ser- vice, maintenance or repairs) to be per- formed by or on behalf of the additional in- sured(s) at the location of the covered operations has been completed; or b. That portion of "your work" out of which the injury or damage arises has been put to its intended use by any person or organization other than another contractor or subcon- tractor engaged in performing operations for a principal as a part of the same project. CG 20 33 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 D POLICY NUMBER: AES1024806 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 20 37 07 04 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. ADDITIONAL INSURED-OWNERS, LESSEES OR CONTRACTORS-COMPLETED OPERATIONS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Additional Insured Person(s) Location And Description Of Completed Opera- Or Organization(s): tions All persons or organizations where written contract with This form does not apply to your work on 'residential the named insured requires an additional insured with property' completed operations. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. Section II -Who Is An Insured is amended to include as an additional insured the person(s) or organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only with respect to liability for "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused, in whole or in part, by "your work" at the location designated and described in the schedule of this endorsement performed for that additional insured and included in the "products- completed operations hazard". CG 20 37 07 04 ©ISO Properties, Inc., 2004 Page 1 of 1 D POLICY NUMBER: AES1024806 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY NX GL 009 08 09 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. PRIMARY AND NON-CONTRIBUTING INSURANCE (THIRD-PARTY) This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Third Party: As required by written contract (Absence of a specifically named Third Party above means that the provisions of this endorsement apply as required by written contractual agreement with any Third Party for whom you are performing work.) Paragraph 4. of SECTION IV. COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CONDITIONS is replaced by the following: 4. Other Insurance: With respect to the Third Party shown above, this insurance is primary and non-contributing. Any and all other valid and collectable insurance available to such Third Party in respect of work performed by you under written contractual agreements with said Third Party for loss covered by this policy, shall in no instance be considered as primary, co-insurance, or contributing insurance. Rather, any such other insurance shall be considered excess over and above the insurance provided by this policy. NX GL 009 08 09 Page 1 of 1 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission POLICY NUMBER: AES1024806 COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CG 24 04 05 09 WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SCHEDULE Name Of Person Or Organization: ALL PERSONS OR ORGANIZATIONS WHERE REQUIRED BY WRITTEN CONTRACT WITH THE NAMED INSURED. Information required to complete this Schedule, if not shown above, will be shown in the Declarations. The following is added to Paragraph 8. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us of Section IV-Conditions: We waive any right of recovery we may have against the person or organization shown in the Schedule above because of payments we make for injury or damage arising out of your ongoing operations or """""' "your work" done under a contract with that person or organization and included in the "products- completed operations hazard". This waiver applies only to the person or organization shown in the Schedule above. CG 24 04 05 09 ©Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2008 Page 1 of 1 D ---= === === ~ = ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; ::i ~ :g -= -= -= -;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; -§ === 8 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; - Policy Number: BAA56331886 COMMERCIAL AUTO CA8810 0113 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE ENHANCEMENT ENDORSEMENT This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESS AUTO COVERAGE FORM With respect to coverage afforded by this endorsement, the provisions of the policy apply unless modified by the endorsement. COVERAGE INDEX SUBJECT ADDITIONAL INSURED BY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PERMIT ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT OR LOSS AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION AUDIO, VISUAL AND DATA ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COVERAGE BROAD FORM INSURED BODILY INJURY REDEFINED EMPLOYEES AS INSUREDS (including employee hired auto) EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION EXTRA EXPENSE -BROADENED COVERAGE GLASS REPAIR-WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE (including employee hired auto and loss of use) HIRED AUTO COVERAGE TERRITORY LOAN I LEASE GAP PARKED AUTO COLLISION COVERAGE (WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE) PERSONAL EFFECTS COVERAGE PHYSICAL DAMAGE -ADDITIONAL TRANSPORTATION EXPENSE COVERAGE RENTAL REIMBURSEMENT SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS TOWING AND LABOR TWO OR MORE DEDUCTIBLES UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US SECTION II-LIABILITY COVERAGE is amended as follows: 1. BROADFORMINSURED PROVISION NUMBER 3 12 19 5 13 1 22 2 23 10 15 6 20 14 16 11 8 9 4 7 17 18 20 SECTION II-LIABILITY COVERAGE, paragraph A.1.-WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include the following as an insured: d. Any legally incorporated entity of which you own more than 50 percent of the voting stock during the policy period. However, "insured" does not include any organization that: (1) Is a partnership or joint venture; or (2) Is an insured under any other automobile policy; or (3) Has exhausted its Limit of Insurance under any other automobile policy. Paragraph d. (2) of this provision does not apply to a policy written to apply specifically in excess of this policy. e. Any organization you newly acquire or form, other than a partnership or joint venture, of which you own more than 50 percent of the voting stock. This automatic coverage is afforded only for 180 days from the date of acquisition or formation. However, coverage under this provision does not apply: (1) If there is similar insurance or a self-insured retention plan available to that organization; ® 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CA 88 10 01 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 1 of 7 15 Policy Number: BAA56331886 (2) If the Limits of Insurance of any other insurance policy have been exhausted; or (3) To "bodily injury" or "property damage" that occurred before you acquired or formed the organization. 2. EMPLOYEES AS INSUREDS SECTION II-LIABILITY COVERAGE, paragraph A.1.-WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include the following as an insured: f. Any "employee" of yours while using a covered "auto" you do not own, hire or borrow, but only for acts within the scope of their employment by you. Insurance provided by this endorse- ment is excess over any other insurance available to any "employee". g. An "employee" of yours while operating an "auto" hired or borrowed under a written contract or agreement in that "employee's" name, with your permission, while performing duties re- lated to the conduct of your business and within the scope of their employment. Insurance provided by this endorsement is excess over any other insurance available to the "employee". 3. ADDITIONAL INSURED BY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PERMIT SECTION II-LIABILITY COVERAGE, paragraph A.1.-WHO IS AN INSURED is amended to include the following as an insured: h. Any person or organization with respect to the operation, maintenance or use of a covered "auto", provided that you and such person or organization have agreed in a written contract, agreement, or permit issued to you by governmental or public authority, to add such person, or organization, or governmental or public authority to this policy as an "insured". However, such person or organization is an "insured": (1) Only with respect to the operation, maintenance or use of a covered "auto"; (2) Only for "bodily injury" or "property damage" caused by an "accident" which takes place after you executed the written contract or agreement, or the permit has been issued to you; and (3) Only for the duration of that contract, agreement or permit 4. SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS SECTION II -LIABILITY COVERAGE, Coverage Extensions, 2.a. Supplementary Payments, para- graphs (2) and (4) are replaced by the following: (2) Up to $3,000 for cost of bail bonds (including bonds for related traffic violations ) required because of an "accident" we cover. We do not have to furnish these bonds. (4) All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at our request, including actual loss of earn- ings up to $500 a day because of time off from work. 5. AMENDED FELLOW EMPLOYEE EXCLUSION In those jurisdictions where, by law, fellow employees are not entitled to the protection afforded to the employer by the workers compensation exclusivity rule, or similar protection, the following provision is added: SECTION II -LIABILITY, exclusion 8.5. FELLOW EMPLOYEE does not apply if the "bodily injury" results from the use of a covered "auto" you own or hire. SECTION Ill-PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended as follows: 6. HIRED AUTO PHYSICAL DAMAGE Paragraph A.4. Coverage Extensions of SECTION Ill-PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, is amended by adding the following: If hired "autos" are covered "autos" for Liability Coverage, and if Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss or Collision coverage are provided under the Business Auto Coverage Form for any "auto" you own, then the Physical Damage coverages provided are extended to "autos": a. You hire, rent or borrow; or ® 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CA 88 10 0113 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 2 of 7 = ---= -= = ==== = --==== Policy Number: BAA56331886 b. Your "employee" hires or rents under a written contract or agreement in that "employee's" name, but only if the damage occurs while the vehicle is being used in the conduct of your business, subject to the following limit and deductible: A. The most we will pay for "loss" in any one "accident" or "loss" is the smallest of: (1) $50,000; or (2) The actual cash value of the damaged or stolen property as of the time of the "loss"; or (3) The cost of repairing or replacing the damaged or stolen property with other property of like kind and quality, minus a deductible. B. The deductible will be equal to the largest deductible applicable to any owned "auto" for that coverage. C. Subject to the limit, deductible and excess provisions described in this provision, we will provide coverage equal to the broadest coverage applicable to any covered "auto" you own. D. Subject to a maximum of $1,000 per "accident", we will also cover the actual loss of use of the hired "auto" if it results from an "accident", you are legally liable and the lessor incurs an actual financial loss. E. This coverage extension does not apply to: (1) Any "auto" that is hired, rented or borrowed with a driver; or (2) Any "auto" that is hired, rented or borrowed from your "employee". For the purposes of this provision, SECTION V-DEFINITIONS is amended by adding the following: "Total loss" means a "loss" in which the cost of repairs plus the salvage value exceeds the actual cash value. 7. TOWING AND LABOR SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, paragraph A.2. Towing, is amended by the addition of the following: We will pay towing and labor costs incurred, up to the limits shown below, each time a covered "auto" classified and rated as a private passenger type, "light truck" or "medium truck" is dis- abled: a. For private passenger type vehicles, we will pay up to $50 per disablement. b. For "light trucks", we will pay up to $50 per disablement. "Light trucks" are trucks that have a gross vehicle weight (GVW) of 10,000 pounds or less. c. For "medium trucks" , we will pay up to $150 per disablement. "Medium trucks" are trucks that have a gross vehicle weight (GVW) of 10,001 -20,000 pounds. However, the labor must be performed at the place of disablement. 8. PHYSICAL DAMAGE ·ADDITIONAL TRANSPORTATION EXPENSE COVERAGE Paragraph A.4.a., Coverage Extension of SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, is amend- ed to provide a limit of $50 per day and a maximum limit of $1,500 ® 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CA 88 10 0113 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 3 of 7 Policy Number: BAA56331886 9. RENTAL REIMBURSEMENT SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. COVERAGE, is amended by adding the following: a. We will pay up to $75 per day for rental reimbursement expenses incurred by you for the rental of an "auto" because of "accident" or "loss", to an "auto" for which we also pay a "loss" under Comprehensive, Specified Causes of Loss or Collision Coverages. We will pay only for those expenses incurred after the first 24 hours following the "accident" or "loss" to the covered "auto." b. Rental Reimbursement will be based on the rental of a comparable vehicle, which in many cases may be substantially less than $75 per day, and will only be allowed for the period of time it should take to repair or replace the vehicle with reasonable speed and similar quality, up to a maximum of 30 days. c. We will also pay up to $500 for reasonable and necessary expenses incurred by you to remove and replace your tools and equipment from the covered "auto". d. This coverage does not apply unless you have a business necessity that other "autos" avail- able for your use and operation cannot fill. e. If "loss" results from the total theft of a covered "auto" of the private passenger type, we will pay under this coverage only that amount of your rental reimbursement expenses which is not already provided under Paragraph 4. Coverage Extension. f. No deductible applies to this coverage. For the purposes of this endorsement provision, materials and equipment do not include "personal effects" as defined in provision 11. 10. EXTRA EXPENSE-BROADENED COVERAGE Under SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. COVERAGE, we will pay for the expense of returning a stolen covered "auto" to you. The maximum amount we will pay is $1,000. 11. PERSONAL EFFECTS COVERAGE A. SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, A. COVERAGE, is amended by adding the following: If you have purchased Comprehensive Coverage on this policy for an "auto" you own and that "auto" is stolen, we will pay, without application of a deductible, up to $600 for "personal effects" stolen with the "auto." The insurance provided under this provision is excess over any other collectible insurance. B. SECTION V-DEFINITIONS is amended by adding the following: For the purposes of this provision, "personal effects" mean tangible property that is worn or carried by an insured." "Personal effects" does not include tools, equipment, jewelry, money or securities. 12. ACCIDENTAL AIRBAG DEPLOYMENT SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, B. E~CLUSIONS is amended by adding the follow- ing: If you have purchased Comprehensive or Collision Coverage under this policy, the exclusion for "loss" relating to mechanical breakdown does not apply to the accidental discharge of an airbag. Any insurance we provide shall be excess over any other collectible insurance or reimbursement by manufacturer's warranty. However, we agree to pay any deductible applicable to the other cov- erage or warranty. 13. AUDIO, VISUAL AND DATA ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT COVERAGE SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, B. EXCLUSIONS, exception paragraph a. to exclu- sions 4.c. and 4.d. is deleted and replaced with the following: ® 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CA 88 10 01 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 4 of 7 ~ = -= -= --=== ==== ~ -;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; ::i == ill -= ==== = --==== ~ ==== 0 ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; ~ c = ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; ~ Policy Number: BAA56331886 Exclusion 4.c. and 4.d. do not apply to: 14. a. Electronic equipment that receives or transmits audio, visual or data signals, whether or not designed solely for the reproduction of sound, if the equipment is permanently installed in the covered "auto" at the time of the "loss" and such equipment is designed to be solely operated by use of the power from the "auto's" electrical system, in or upon the covered "auto" and physical damage coverages are provided for the covered "auto"; or If the "loss" occurs solely to audio, visual or data electronic equipment or accessories used with this equipment, then our obligation to pay for, repair, return or replace damaged or stolen property will be reduced by a $1 00 deductible. LOAN/LEASEGAPCOVERAGE A. Paragraph C., LIMIT OF INSURANCE of SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended by adding the following: The most we will pay for a "total loss" to a covered "auto" owned by or leased to you in any one "accident" is the greater of the: 1. Balance due under the terms of the loan or lease to which the damaged covered "auto" is subject at the time of the "loss" less the amount of: a. Overdue payments and financial penalties associated with those payments as of the date of the "loss", b. Financial penalties imposed under a lease due to high mileage, excessive use or ab- normal wear and tear, c. Costs for extended warranties, Credit Life Insurance, Health, Accident or Disability Insurance purchased with the loan or lease, d. Transfer or rollover balances from previous loans or leases, e. Final payment due under a "Balloon Loan", f. The dollar amount of any unrepaired damage which occurred prior to the "total loss" of a covered "auto", g. Security deposits not refunded by a lessor, h. All refunds payable or paid to you as a result of the early termination of a lease agreement or as a result of the early termination of any warranty or extended service agreement on a covered "auto", i. Any amount representing taxes, j. Loan or lease termination fees; or 2. The actual cash value of the damage or stolen property as of the time of the "loss". An adjustment for depreciation and physical condition will be made in determining the actual cash value at the time of the "loss". This adjustment is not applicable in Texas. B. ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS This coverage applies only to the original loan for which the covered "auto" that incurred the loss serves as collateral, or lease written on the covered "auto" that incurred the loss. C. SECTION V-DEFINTIONS is changed by adding the following: As used in this endorsement provision, the following definitions apply: "Total loss" means a "loss" in which the cost of repairs plus the salvage value exceeds the actual cash value. A "balloon loan" is one with periodic payments that are insufficient to repay the balance over the term of the loan, thereby requiring a large final payment. ® 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CA 88 10 01 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 5 of 7 Policy Number: BAA56331886 15. GLASS REPAIR-WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE Paragraph D. Deductible of SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended by the addition of the following: No deductible applies to glass damage if the glass is repaired rather than replaced. 16. PARKED AUTO COLLISION COVERAGE (WAIVER OF DEDUCTIBLE) Paragraph D. Deductible of SECTION Ill -PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE is amended by the addition of the following: The deductible does not apply to "loss" caused by collision to such covered "auto" of the private passenger type or light weight truck with a gross vehicle weight of 10,000 lbs. or less as defined by the manufacturer as maximum loaded weight the "auto" is designed to carry while it is: a. In the charge of an "insured"; b. Legally parked; and c. Unoccupied. The "loss" must be reported to the police authorities within 24 hours of known damage. The total amount of the damage to the covered "auto" must exceed the deductible shown in the Declarations. This provision does not apply to any "loss" if the covered "auto" is in the charge of any person or organization engaged in the automobile business. 17. TWO OR MORE DEDUCTIBLES Under SECTION Ill PHYSICAL DAMAGE COVERAGE, if two or more company policies or coverage forms apply to the same accident, the following applies to paragraph D. Deductible: a. If the applicable Business Auto deductible is the smaller (or smallest) deductible it will be waived; or b. If the applicable Business Auto deductible is not the smaller (or smallest) deductible it will be reduced by the amount of the smaller (or smallest) deductible; or c. If the loss involves two or more Business Auto coverage forms or policies the smaller (or smallest) deductible will be waived. For the purpose of this endorsement company means any company that is part of the Liberty Mutual Group. SECTION IV -BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS is amended as follows: 18. UNINTENTIONAL FAILURE TO DISCLOSE HAZARDS SECTION IV-BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, Paragraph B.2. is amended by adding the following: If you unintentionally fail to disclose any hazards, exposures or material facts existing as of the inception date or renewal date of the Business Auto Coverage Form, the coverage afforded by this policy will not be prejudiced. However, you must report the undisclosed hazard of exposure as soon as practicable after its discovery, and we have the right to collect additional premium for any such hazard or exposure. 19. AMENDED DUTIES IN THE EVENT OF ACCIDENT, CLAIM, SUIT, OR LOSS SECTION IV -BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, paragraph A.2.a. is replaced in its entirety by the following: a. In the event of "accident", claim, "suit" or "loss", you must promptly notify us when it is known to: 1. You, if you are an individual; 2. A partner, if you are a partnership; 3. Member, if you are a limited liability company; 4. An executive officer or the "employee" designated by the Named Insured to give such notice, if you are a corporation. ® 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CA 88 10 01 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 6 of 7 = ==== = - ~------8- Policy Number: BAA56331886 To the extent possible, notice to us should include: (1) How, when and where the "accident" or "loss" took place; (2) The "insureds" name and address; and (3) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses. 20. WAIVER OF TRANSFER OF RIGHTS OF RECOVERY AGAINST OTHERS TO US SECTION IV -BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, paragraph A.5., Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others to Us, is amended by the addition of the following: If the person or organization has waived those rights before an "accident" or "loss", our rights are waived also. 21. HIRED AUTO COVERAGE TERRITORY SECTION IV-BUSINESS AUTO CONDITIONS, paragraph 8.7., Policy Period, Coverage Territory, is amended by the addition of the following: f. For "autos" hired 30 days or less, the coverage territory is anywhere in the world, provided that the insured's responsibility to pay for damages is determined in a "suit", on the merits, in the United States, the territories and possessions of the United States of America, Puerto Rico or Canada or in a settlement we agree to. This extension of coverage does not apply to an "auto" hired, leased, rented or borrowed with a driver. SECTION V -DEFINITIONS is amended as follows: 22. BODILY INJURY REDEFINED Under SECTION V-DEFINTIONS, definition C. is replaced by the following: "Bodily injury" means physical injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including mental anguish, mental injury, shock, fright or death resulting from any of these at any time. COMMMON POLICY CONDITIONS 23. EXTENDED CANCELLATION CONDITION COMMON POLICY CONDITIONS, paragraph A.-CANCELLATION condition applies except as fol- lows: If we cancel for any reason other than nonpayment of premium, we will mail to the first Named Insured written notice of cancellation at least 60 days before the effective date of cancellation. This provision does not apply in those states which require more than 60 days prior notice of cancella- tion. ® 2013 Liberty Mutual Insurance CA 88 10 01 13 Includes copyrighted material of Insurance Services Office, Inc., with its permission. Page 7 of 7 ~ ACORD~ \. ~ CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE (MM/DD/YYYY) 7/7/2015 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND ORAL TER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE IY""'NG INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. J.. IMlS"ORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGRA TION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER OnPoint Underwriting Inc. CONTACT NAME: Steven McComb 8390 E Crescent Pkwy, Suite 200 PHONE (A/C, No Ext): (360) 828-0644 FAX (A/C, NO): (360) 828-0699 Greenwood Village, CO 80111 EMAIL ADDRESS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC# INSURER A: ACE American Insurance Company 22667 INSURED INSURERS: Barrett Business Services, Inc. UC/F INSURERC: DICK MILLER, INC. INSURERD: 930 BOARDWALK, SUITE H INSURER E: SAN MARCOS, CA 92078 INSURERF: .. COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: REVISION NUMBER: THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUES OR MAY PERTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL SUBR POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF POLICYEXP LIMITS LTR INSR WVD (MMIDDIYYYY) (MMIDDIYYYY) GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $ I--COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea $ I CLAIMS-MADE D OCCUR occurence) MED EXP (Any one person) $ PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ " GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: GENERAL AGGREGATE $ nPOLICY n~~~J-nLOC PRODUCTS • COMPIOP AGG $ $ AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT $ I--(Ea accident) ANY AUTO I--ALL OWNED AUTOS B SCHEDULED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ I--HIRED AUTOS NON-OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ I--PROPERTY DAMAGE $ I--$ UMBRELLA LIAB HOCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ I--EXCESS LIAB OCCUR AGGREGATE $ -OED I RETENTION$ $ A WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' RWC 10/01/14 10/01/2015 ,.,.IWCSTATU-I I~TH-LIABILITY YIN C48121664 TORY LIMITS ER ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/ EXECUTIVE ~ N/A E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $2,000.000 OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? Covered states: E.L. DISEASE • EA EMPLOYEE $2,000,000 (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under CA DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below E.L. DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT $2.000,000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space is required) In the event of any payment under this policy for a Loss for which the named insured has waived the right of recovery in a written contract entered into prior to the Loss, insurer hereby agrees to also waive our right of recovery but only with respect to such Loss. CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION City of Carlsbad Public Works Purchasing Dept. SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATA THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 1 P • Faraday Ave AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE c!~;':Sbad Ca 920087314 ~~ Richard Poling c) 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All nghts reserved. ACORD 25 (2010/05) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD. BIDDER•s STATEMENT RE DEBARMENT (To Accompany Proposal} TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 1) Have you or any of your subcontractors ever been debarred as an irresponsible bidder by another jurisdiction in the State of California? [l] yes no 2) If yes, what was/were the name(s) of the agency(ies) and what was/were the period(s) of debar- ment(s)? Attach additional copies of this page to accommodate more than two debarments. party debarred agency period of debarment BY CONTRACTOR: DICK MILLER INC. (name of Contractor) sy: __ -....A...A... _ _;:__,_c_._~------ (sign here) GLEN BULLOCK, PRESIDENT (print name/title) party debarred agency period of debarment Page _1 __ of _1 __ pages of this Re Debarment form ft ~., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 31 of 173 Pages BIDDER'S DISCLOSURE OF DISCIPLINE RECORD (CONTINUED) (To Accompany Proposal) TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 6) If the answer to either of 2. or 4. above is yes fully identify, in each and every case, the party who's discipline was stayed, the date of the violation that the disciplinary action pertains to, describe the nature of the violation and the condition (if any) upon which the disciplinary action was stayed. (If needed attach additional sheets to provide full disclosure.) BY CONTRACTOR: DICK MILLER INC. (name of Contractor) By: ____t~::.::::::....:..__:::........:..;--_:.· -~~\ d:=.=::::::=----- (sign here) GLEN BULLOCK, PRESIDENT (print name/title} Page _1 __ of _1 __ pages of this Disclosure of Discipline form ft {.1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 33 of 173 Pages CONTRACT PUBLIC WORKS This agreement is made this ~ J.5t day of .:Tv~ , 2015, by and between the Carlsbad Municipal Water District of the City OCarlsbad, California, a municipal corporation, (hereinafter called "District"), and Dick Miller Inc., a California corporation whose principal place of business is 930 Boardwalk Suite H, San Marcos, CA 92078 (hereinafter called "Contractor"). District and Contractor agree as follows: 1. Description of Work. Contractor shall perform all work specified in the Contract documents for: TRI-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2-PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 (hereinafter called "project") 2. Provisions of Labor and Materials. Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, tools, equip- ment, and personnel to perform the work specified by the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Documents. The Contract Documents consist of this Contract, Notice Inviting Bids, Contractor's Proposal, Bidder's Bond, Noncollusion Declaration, Designation of Subcontractors, Tech- nical Ability and Experience, Bidder's Statement Re Debarment, Escrow Agreement, Release Form, the Plans and Specifications, the General Provisions, addendum(s) to said Plans and Specifications and General Provisions, and all proper amendments and changes made thereto in accordance with this Contract or the Plans and Specifications, and all bonds for the project; all of which are incorporated herein by this reference. Contractor, her/his subcontractors, and materials suppliers shall provide and install the work as indi- cated, specified, and implied by the Contract Documents. Any items of work not indicated or specified, but which are essential to the completion of the work, shall be provided at the Contractor's expense to fulfill the intent of said documents. In all instances through the life of the Contract, the District will be the interpreter of the intent of the Contract Documents, and the District's decision relative to said intent will be final and binding. Failure of the Contractor to apprise subcontractors and materials sup- pliers of this condition of the Contract will not relieve responsibility of compliance. 4. Payment. For all compensation for Contractor's performance of work under this Contract, District shall make payment to the Contractor per section 9-3 PAYMENT of the General Provisions section of this contract. The Engineer will close the estimate of work completed for progress payments on the last working day of each month. The District shall withhold retention as required by Public Contract Code Section 9203. 5. Independent Investigation. Contractor has made an independent investigation of the jobsite, the soil conditions at the jobsite, and all other conditions that might affect the progress of the work, and is aware of those conditions. The Contract price includes payment for all work that may be done by Contractor, whether anticipated or not, in order to overcome underground conditions. Any infor- mation that may have been furnished to Contractor by District about underground conditions or other job conditions is for Contractor's convenience only, and District does not warrant that the conditions are as thus indicated. Contractor is satisfied with all job conditions, including underground conditions and has not relied on information furnished by District. {'\ • ., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 35 of 173 Pages 6. Hazardous Waste or Other Unusual Conditions. If the contract involves digging trenches or other excavations that extend deeper than four feet below the surface Contractor shall promptly, and before the following conditions are disturbed, notify District, in writing, of any: A. Hazardous Waste. Material that Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste, as defined in section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code, that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class Ill disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law. B. Differing Conditions. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those indicated. C. Unknown Physical Conditions. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the contract. District shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do materially so differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in contractor's costs of, or the time required for, performance of any part of the work shall issue a change order under the proce- dures described in this contract. In the event that a dispute arises between District and Contractor whether the conditions materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the work, contractor shall not be excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the contract, but shall proceed with all work to be performed under the contract. Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the contracting parties. 7. Immigration Reform and Control Act. Contractor certifies it is aware of the requirements of the Immigration Reform and Control Act of 1986 (8 USC sections 1101-1525) and has complied and will comply with these requirements, including, but not limited to, verifying the eligibility for employment of all agents, employees, subcontractors, and consultants that are included in this Contract. 8. Prevailing Wage. Pursuant to the California Labor Code, the director of the Department of Industrial Relations has determined the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in accordance with California Labor Code, section 1773 and a copy of a schedule of said general prevailing wage rates is on file in the office of the City Engineer, and is incorporated by reference herein. Pursuant to Cali- fornia Labor Code, section 1775, Contractor shall pay prevailing wages. Contractor shall post copies of all applicable prevailing wages on the job site. 9. Indemnification. Contractor shall assume the defense of, pay all expenses of defense, and indemnify and hold harmless the District, and its officers and employees, from all claims, loss, damage, injury and liability of every kind, nature and description, directly or indirectly arising from or in connec- tion with the performance of the Contract or work; or from any failure or alleged failure of Contractor to comply with any applicable law, rules or regulations including those relating to safety and health; and from any and all claims, loss, damages, injury and liability, howsoever the same may be caused, resulting directly or indirectly from the nature of the work covered by the Contract, except for loss or damage caused by the sole or active negligence or willful misconduct of the District. The expenses of defense include all costs and expenses including attorneys' fees for litigation, arbitration, or other dispute resolution method. l' •tf Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 36 of 173 Pages c Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the District against any challenges to the award of the contract to Contractor, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the District. De- fense costs include the cost of separate counsel for District, if District requests separate counsel. Contractor shall also defend and indemnify the District against any challenges to the award of the contract to Contractor, arising in whole or in part from alleged inaccuracies or misrepresentation by the Contractor, whether intentional or otherwise, and Contractor will pay all costs, including defense costs for the District. Defense costs include the cost of separate counsel for District, if District requests separate counsel. 10. Insurance. Contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of the contract insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damage to property which may arise from or in connection with the performance of the work hereunder by the Contractor, his or her agents, representatives, employees or subcontractors. Said insurance shall meet the City of Carlsbad's policy for insurance as stated in City Council Policy# 70. (A) Coverages And Limits Contractor shall maintain the types of coverages and minimum limits indicted herein: a. Commercial General Liability Insurance: $1,000,000 combined single limit per occurrence for bodily injury and property damage. If the policy has an aggregate limit, a separate aggregate in the amounts specified shall be established for the risks for which the District or its agents, officers or employees are additional insured. b. Business Automobile Liability Insurance: $1 ,000,000 combined single limit per accident for bodily injury and property damage. In addition, the auto policy must cover any vehicle used in the performance of the contract, used onsite or offsite, whether owned, non-owned or hired, and whether scheduled or non-scheduled. c. Workers' Compensation and Employers' Liability Insurance: Workers' compensation limits as required by the Labor Code of the State of California. Workers' compensation offered by the State Compensation Insurance Fund is acceptable to the District. (B) Additional Provisions: Contractor shall ensure that the policies of insurance required under this agreement with the exception of Workers' Compensation and Business Automobile Liability Insurance contain, or are endorsed to contain, the following provisions. a. The District, its officials, employees and volunteers are to be covered as additional insured as respects: liability arising out of activities performed by or on behalf of the Contractor; products and completed operations of the contractor; premises owned, leased, hired or borrowed by the contractor. The coverage shall contain no special limitations on the scope of protection afforded to the District, its officials, employees or volunteers. All additional insured endorsements must be evidenced using sep- arate documents attached to the certificate of insurance; one for each company affording general liability, and employers' liability coverage. b. The Contractor's insurance coverage shall be primary insurance as respects the District, its offi- cials, employees and volunteers. Any insurance or self-insurance maintained by the District, its offi- cials, employees or volunteers shall be in excess of the contractor's insurance and shall not contribute with it. c. Any failure to comply with reporting provisions of the policies shall not affect coverage provided to the District, its officials, employees or volunteers. d. Coverage shall state that the contractor's insurance shall apply separately to each insured against whom claim is made or suit is brought, except with respect to the limits of the insurer's liability. {"\ • ., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 37 of 173 Pages c (C) Notice Of Cancellation. Each insurance policy required by this agreement shall be endorsed to state that coverage shall not be nonrenewed, suspended, voided, canceled, or reduced in coverage or limits except after ten (1 0) days' prior written notice has been sent to the District by certified mail, return receipt requested. (D) Deductibles And Self-Insured Retention (S.I.R.) Levels. Any deductibles or self-insured reten- tion levels must be declared to and approved by the District. At the option of the District, either: the insurer shall reduce or eliminate such deductibles or self-insured retention levels as respects the Dis- trict, its officials and employees; or the contractor shall procure a bond guaranteeing payment of losses and related investigation, claim administration and defense expenses. (E) Waiver Of Subrogation. All policies of insurance required under this agreement shall contain a waiver of all rights of subrogation the insurer may have or may acquire against the District or any of its officials or employees. (F) Subcontractors. Contractor shall include all subcontractors as insured under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates and endorsements for each subcontractor. Coverages for subcontractors shall be subject to all of the requirements stated herein. (G) Acceptability Of Insurers. Insurance is to be placed with insurers that have a rating in Best's Key Rating Guide of at least A-:VII. Insurers must also be authorized to transact the business of in- surance by the State of California Insurance Commissioner as admitted carriers as evidenced by a listing in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California and/or under the standards specified by City Council Policy# 70. (H) Verification Of Coverage. Contractor shall furnish the District with certificates of insurance and original endorsements affecting coverage required by this clause. The certificates and endorsements for each insurance policy are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind coverage on its behalf. The certificates and endorsements are to be in forms approved by the District and are to be received and approved by the District before the Contract is executed by the District. (I) Cost Of Insurance. The Cost of all insurance required under this agreement shall be included in the Contractor's bid. 11. Claims and Lawsuits. All claims by contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in ac- cordance with the provisions in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5 (commencing with section 20104) which are incorporated by reference. A copy of Article 1.5 is in- cluded in Section 3 of the General Provisions. The contractor shall initially submit all claims over $375,000 to the City using the informal dispute resolution process described in Public Contract Code subsections 201 04.2(a), (c), (d). Notwithstanding the provisions of this section of the contract, all claims shall comply with the Government Tort Claim Act (section 900 et seq., of the California Gov- ernment Code) for any claim or cause of action for money or damages prior to filing any lawsuit for breach of this agreement. (A) Assertion of Claims. Contractor hereby agrees that any contract claim submitted to the District must be asserted as part of the contract process as set forth in this agreement and not in anticipation of litigation or in conjunction with litigation. (B) False Claims. Contractor acknowledges that if a false claim is submitted to the District, it may be considered fraud and the Contractor may be subject to criminal prosecution. (C) Government Code. Contractor acknowledges that California Government Code sections 12650 et seq., the False Claims Act, provides for civil penalties where a person knowingly submits a false claim to a public entity. These provisions include false claims made with deliberate ignorance of the false information or in reckless disregard of the truth or falsity of the information. ('\ •+' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 38 of 173 Pages (D) Penalty Recovery. If the Carlsbad Municipal Water District seeks to recover penalties pursuant to the False Claims Act, it is entitled to recover its litigation costs, including attorney's fees. (E) Debarment for False Claims. Contractor hereby acknowledges that the filing of a false claim may subject the Contractor to an administrative debarment proceeding wherein the Contractor may be prevented from further bidding on public contracts for a period of up to five years. (F) Carlsbad Municipal Code. The provisions of Carlsbad Municipal Code sections 3.32.025, 3.32.026, 3.32.027 and 3.32.028 pertaining to false claims are incorporated herein by reference. (G) Debarment from Other Jurisdictions. Contractor hereby acknowledges that debarment by an- other jurisdiction is grounds for the Board of Directors of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District of the City of Carlsbad to disqualify the Contractor or subcontractor from participating in future contract bid- ding. (H) Jurisdiction. Contractor agrees and hereby stipulates that the proper venue and jurisdiction for resolution of any disputes between the parties arising out of this agreement is San Diego County, California. I have read and understand all provisions of Section 11 above. e init @ in it 12. Maintenance of Records. Contractor shall maintain and make available at no cost to the Dis- trict, upon request, records in accordance with sections 1776 and 1812 of Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 2, of the Labor Code. If the Contractor does not maintain the records at Contractor's principal place of business as specified above, Contractor shall so inform the District by certified letter accompanying the return of this Contract. Contractor shall notify the District by certified mail of any change of address of such records. 13. Labor Code Provisions. The provisions of Part 7, Chapter 1, commencing with section 1720 of the Labor Code are incorporated herein by reference. 14. Security. Securities in the form of cash, cashier's check, or certified check may be substituted for any monies withheld by the District to secure performance of this contract for any obligation estab- lished by this contract. Any other security that is mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the District may be substituted for monies withheld to ensure performance under this Contract. 15. Unfair Business Practices. In entering into a public works contract or a subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials pursuant to a public works contract, the contractor or subcontractor offers and agrees to assign to the awarding body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec. 15) or under the Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 16700) of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, services, or materials pursuant to the public works contract or the subcontract. This assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the awarding body tenders final payment to the contractor, without further acknowledgment by the parties. 16. Provisions Required by Law Deemed Inserted. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this Contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and in- cluded herein, and if, through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or is not cor- rectly inserted, then upon application of either party, the Contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion or correction. l' •ii' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 39 of 173 Pages GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR TAl-AGENCIES WATER TRANSMISSION PIPELINES REACH 2 -PHASE 1 CONTRACT NO. 50081 CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT BIDDERS ARE ADVISED THAT THIS SECTION REPLACES PART 1, GENERAL PROVISIONS, OF THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION SECTION 1 --TERMS, DEFINITIONS ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 1-1 TERMS-Unless otherwise stated, the words directed, required, permitted, ordered, in- structed, designated, considered necessary, prescribed, approved, acceptable, satisfactory, or words of like meaning, refer to actions, expressions, and prerogatives of the Engineer. 1-1.1 Reference to Drawings. Where words "shown", "indicated", "detailed", "noted", "sched- uled", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that reference is made to the plans accompanying these provisions, unless stated otherwise. 1-1.2 Directions. Where words "directed", "designated", "selected", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, designation or selection of the Engineer is intended, unless stated otherwise. The word "required" and words of similar import shall be un- derstood to mean "as required to properly complete the work as required and as approved by the Engineer," unless stated otherwise. 1-1.3 Equals and Approvals. Where the words "equal", "approved equal", "equivalent", and such words of similar import are used, it shall be understood such words are followed by the expression "in the opinion of the Engineer", unless otherwise stated. Where the words "ap- proved", "approval", "acceptance", or words of similar import are used, it shall be understood that the approval, acceptance, or similar import of the Engineer is intended. 1-1.4 Perform. The word "perform" shall be understood to mean that the Contractor, at its ex- pense, shall perform all operations, labor, tools and equipment, and further, including the furnish- ing and installing of materials that are indicated, specified or required to mean that the Contractor, at its expense, shall furnish and install the work, complete in place and ready to use, including furnishing of necessary labor, materials, tools, equipment, and transportation. ~ ~., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 48 of 173 Pages 1-2 Definitions. The following words, or groups of words, shall be exclusively defined by the definitions assigned to them herein. Addendum-Written or graphic instrument issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarifies, corrects, or changes the bidding or Contract Documents. The term Addendum shall include bul- letins and all other types of written notices issued to potential bidders prior to opening of Bids. Agency-the Carlsbad Municipal Water District. Agreement-See Contract. Assessment Act Contract -A Contract financed by special assessments authorized under a State Act or procedural ordinance of a City or County. Base-A layer of specified material of planned thickness placed immediately below the pavement or surfacing. Bid -The offer or proposal of the Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the Work. Bidder-Any individual, firm, partnership, corporation, or combination thereof, submitting a Bid for the Work, acting directly or through a duly authorized representative. Board -The officer or body constituting the awarding authority of the Agency, the Board of Di- rectors of Carlsbad Municipal Water District. Bond-Bid, performance, and payment bond or other instrument of security. Cash Contract -A Contract financed by means other than special assessments. Change Order -A written order to the Contractor signed by the Agency directing an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract time issued after the effective date of the Contract. A Change Order may or may not also be signed by the Contractor. Code-The terms Government Code, Labor Code, etc., refer to codes of the State of California. Construction Manager-the Project Inspector's immediate supervisor and first level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. Contract-The written agreement between the Agency and the Contractor covering the Work. Contract Documents -Including but not limited to; the Contract, any Addendum (which pertain to the contract documents), Notice Inviting Bids, Instructions to Bidders; Bid (including documen- tation accompanying the Bid and any post-bid documentation submitted prior to the Notice of Award) when attached as an exhibit to the Contract, the Bonds, the General Provisions, permits from other agencies, the Technical Specifications, the Supplemental Provisions, the Plans, Stand- ard Plans, Standard Specifications, Reference Specifications, and all Modifications issued after the execution of the Contract. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 49 of 173 Pages Contractor-The individual, partnership, corporation, joint venture, or other legal entity having a Contract with the Agency to perform the Work. In the case of work being done under permit issued by the Agency, the permittee shall be constructed to be the Contractor. The term "prime contrac- tor'' shall mean Contractor. Contract Price-The total amount of money for which the Contract is awarded. Contract Unit Price -The amount stated in the Bid for a single unit of an item of work. County Sealer-The Sealer of Weights and Measures of the county in which the Contract is let. Days-Days shall mean consecutive calendar's days unless otherwise specified. Deputy City Engineer, Construction Management & Inspection -The Construction Manager's immediate supervisor and second level of appeal for· informal dispute resolution. Dispute Board -persons designated by the City Manager of the City of Carlsbad or Executive Manager of the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, to hear and advise the City Manager on claims submitted by the Contractor. The City Manager for the City of Carlsbad or the Executive Manager for the Carlsbad Municipal Water District is the last appeal level for informal dispute resolution. Electrolier-Street light assembly complete, including foundation, standard, luminaire arm, lumi- naire, etc. Engineer -the City Engineer of the City of Carlsbad or his/her approved representative. The Engineer is the third level of appeal for informal dispute resolution. Geotextile -Synthetic fiber used in civil engineering applications, serving the primary functions of separation and filtration. House Connection Sewer-A sewer, within a public street or right-of-way, proposed to connect any parcel, lot, or part of a lot with a mainline sewer. House Sewer-A sewer, wholly within private property, proposed to connect any building to a house connection sewer. Luminaire-The lamp housing including the optical and socket assemblies (and ballast if so specified). Luminaire Arm-The structural member, bracket, or mast arm, which, mounted on the standard, supports the luminaire. Minor Bid Item-a single contract item constituting less than 10 percent (10%) of the original Contract Price bid. Modification -Includes Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements. A Modification may only be used after the effective date of the Contract. Notice of Award -The written notice by the Agency to the successful Bidder stating that upon compliance by it with the required conditions, the Agency will execute the Contract. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 50 of 173 Pages Notice to Proceed -A written notice given by the Agency to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract time will start. Own Organization -When used in Section 2-3.1 -Employees of the Contractor who are hired, directed, supervised and paid by the Contractor to accomplish the completion of the Work. Fur- ther, such employees have their employment taxes, State disability insurance payments, State and Federal income taxes paid and administered, as applicable, by the Contractor. When used in Section 2-3.1 "own organization" means construction equipment that the Contractor owns or leases and uses to accomplish the Work. Equipment that is owner operated or leased equipment with an operator is not part of the Contractor's Own Organization and will not be included for the purpose of compliance with Section 2-3.1. Person -Any individual, firm, association, partnership, corporation, trust, joint venture, or other legal entity. Plans-The drawings, profiles, cross sections, working drawings, and supplemental drawings, or reproductions thereof, approved by the Engineer, which show the location, character, dimensions, or details of the Work. Private Contract-Work subject to Agency inspection, control, and approval, involving private funds, not administered by the Agency. Project Inspector-the Engineer's designated representative for inspection, contract administra- tion and first level for informal dispute resolution. Proposal -See Bid. Reference Specifications-Those bulletins, standards, rules, methods of analysis or test, codes, and specifications of other agencies, engineering societies, or industrial associations referred to in the Contract Documents. These refer to the latest edition, including amendments in effect and published at the time of advertising the project or issuing the permit, unless specifically referred to by edition, volume, or date. Roadway -The portion of a street reserved for vehicular use. Service Connection-Service connections are all or any portion of the conduit, cable, or duct, including meter, between a utility distribution line and an individual consumer. Sewer -Any conduit intended for the reception and transfer of sewage and fluid industrial waste. Specifications-General Provisions, Standard Specifications, Technical Specifications, Refer- ence Specifications, Supplemental Provisions, and specifications in Supplemental Agreements between the Contractor and the Board. Standard -The shaft or pole used to support street lighting luminaire, traffic signal heads, mast arms, etc. Standard Plans -Details of standard structures, devices, or instructions referred to on the Plans or in Specifications by title or number. ft ~.,Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 51 of 173 Pages Standard Specifications -The Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC), the "Greenbook". State -State of California. Storm Drain-Any conduit and appurtenances intended for the reception and transfer of storm water. Street-Any road, highway, parkway, freeway, alley, walk, or way. Subbase -A layer of specified material of planned thickness between a base and the subgrade. Subcontractor -An individual, firm, or corporation having a direct contract with the Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work. Subgrade-For roadways, that portion of the roadbed on which pavement, surfacing, base, sub- base, or a layer of other material is placed. For structures, the soil prepared to support a structure. Supervision -Supervision, where used to indicate supervision by the Engineer, shall mean the performance of obligations, and the exercise of rights, specifically imposed upon and granted to the Agency in becoming a party to the Contract. Except as specifically stated herein, supervision by the Agency shall not mean active and direct superintendence of details of the Work. Supplemental Agreement-A written amendment of the Contract Documents signed by both parties. Supplemental Provisions -Additions and revisions to the Standard Specifications setting forth conditions and requirements peculiar to the work. Surety-Any individual, firm, or corporation, bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable performance, execution, and completion of the Work, and for the satisfaction of all obligations incurred. Tonne-Also referred to as "metric ton". Represents a unit of measure in the International System of Units equal to 1 ,000 kilograms. Utility-Tracks, overhead or underground wires, pipeline, conduits, ducts, or structures, sewers, or storm drains owned, operated, or maintained in or across a public right of way or private ease- ment. Work-That which is proposed to be constructed or done under the Contract or permit, including the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services. --"''Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 52 of 173 Pages 1-3 ABBREVIATIONS 1-3.1 General. The abbreviation herein, together with others in general use, are applicable to these Standard Specifications and to project Plans or other Contract Documents. All abbreviations and symbols used on Plans for structural steel construction shall conform to those given by the "Manual of Steel Construction" published by the American Institute of Steel Construction, Inc. 1-3.2 Common Usage Abbreviation Word or Words ABAN ............................................................. Abandon CONC ............................................................ Concrete ABAND ...................................................... Abandoned CONN ........................................................ Connection ABS ....................... Acrylonitrile -butadiene -styrene CONST ................................... Construct, Construction AC ..................................................... Asphalt Concrete COORD ...................................................... Coordinate ACP .......................................... Asbestos cement pipe CSP ........................................... Corrugated steel pipe ACWS ..................... Asphalt concrete wearing surface CSD ................................ Carlsbad Standard Drawings ALT ................................................................ Alternate CTB ............................................ Cement treated base APTS ................................. Apartment and Apartments CV ............................................................. Check valve AMER STD .................................... American Standard CY ............................................................... Cubic yard AWG ............... American Wire Gage (nonferrous wire) D ............................................................... Load of pipe BC ................................................... Beginning of curve dB ................................................................... Decibels BCR ....................................... Beginning of curb return DBL. .................................................................. Double BDRY ............................................................ Boundary DF ............................................................... Douglas fir BF ..................................................... Bottom of footing DIA ................................................................. Diameter BLDG ........................................ Building and Buildings DIP ...................................................... Ductile iron pipe BM ............................................................ Bench mark DL ................................................................ Dead load BVC ................................... Beginning of vertical curve DR ..................................................... Dimension Ratio B/W ........................................................... Back of wall DT ................................................................. Drain Tile C/C ..................................................... Center to center DWG ............................................................... Drawing CAB ...................................... Crushed aggregate base DWY .............................................................. Driveway CAUOSHA ........... California Occupational Safety and DWY APPR ., ................................. Driveway approach Health Administration E ....................................................................... Eiectric CaiTrans ........ California Department of Transportation EA ........................................................................ Each CAP ................................... Corrugated aluminum pipe EC ............................................................ End of curve CB ............................................................. Catch Basin ECR ................................................. End of curb return Cb ........................................................................ Curb EF ................................................................ Each face CBP ............................... Catch Basin Connection Pipe EG ......................................................... Edge of gutter CBR ........................................ California Bearing Ratio EGL ................................................. Energy grade line CCR ............................. California Code of Regulations EI ................................................................... Eievation CCTV ............................................... Closed Circuit TV ELC ...................................... Eiectrolier lighting conduit CES .......................... Carlsbad Engineering Standards EL T ........................................................ Extra long ton CF ................................................................. Curb face ENGR ....................................... Engineer, Engineering CF ................................................................ Cubic foot EP ................................................... Edge of pavement C&G .................................................... Curb and gutter ESMT ........................................................... Easement CFR ................................ Code of Federal Regulations ETB ........................................... Emulsion-treated base CFS ......................................... Cubic Feet per Second EVC ............................................... End of vertical curb CIP ......................................................... Cast iron pipe EWA .............................. Encina Wastewater Authority CIPP ................................................ Cast-in place pipe EXC ............................................................ Excavation CL ............................................. Clearance, center line EXP JT ................................................ Expansion joint CLF ..................................................... Chain link fence EXST ............................................................... Existing CMB ............................... Crushed miscellaneous base F ................................................................. Fahrenheit CMC ......................................... Cement mortar-coated F&C .................................................. Frame and cover CML ............................................. Cement mortar-lined F&l .................................................. Furnish and install CMWD .................... Carlsbad Municipal Water District FAB ............................................................... Fabricate CO ................................................... Cleanout (Sewer) FAS ............................................... Flashing arrow sign COL ................................................................. Column FD ............................................................... Floor drain COMM ...................................................... Commercial FDN ........................................................... Foundation ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 53 of 173 Pages FED SPEC .................................. Federal Specification FG ......................................................... Finished grade FH ............................................................. Fire hydrant FL .................................................................. Flow line FS ...................................................... Finished surface FT-LB ......................................................... Foot-pound FTG ................................................................. Footing FW ............................................................ Face of wall G ............................................................................ Gas GA ..................................................................... Gauge GAL ............................................... Gallon and Gallons GAL V ......................................................... Galvanized GAR ............................................ Garage and Garages GIP .............................................. Galvanized iron pipe GL ......................................... Ground line or grade line GM ............................................................... Gas meter GNV ............................................... Ground Not Visible GP ................................................................. Guy pole GPM ............................................... gallons per minute GR ..................................................................... Grade GRTG ............................................................... Grating GSP ........................................... Galvanized steel pipe H ............................................................ High or height HB .................................................................. Hose bib HC ................................................... House connection HOWL ............................................................ Headwall HGL .............................................. Hydraulic grade line HORIZ ......................................................... Horizontal HP ............................................................. Horsepower HPG ................................................ High pressure gas HPS ............................... High pressure sodium (Light} HYDR ........................................................... Hydraulic IE ......................................................... Invert Elevation 10 ......................................................... Inside diameter INCL .............................................................. Including INSP ............................................................ Inspection INV ...................................................................... Invert IP ................................................................... Iron pipe JC .................................................... Junction chamber JCT ................................................................. Junction JS .................................................... Junction structure JT .......................................................................... Joint L. ....................................................................... Length LAB ............................................................. Laboratory LAT ................................................................... Lateral LB ...................................................................... Pound LD ..................................................... Local depression LF ............................................................... Linear foot LH ................................................................ Lamp hole LL. .................................................................. Live load LOL ............................................................. Layout line LONG ....................................................... Longitudinal LP ................................................................ Lamp post LPS ................................. Low pressure sodium (Light} LS ................................................................ Lump sum L TS .................................................... Lime treated soil LWD ............................... Leucadia Wastewater District MAINT ..................................................... Maintenance MAX .............................................................. Maximum MCR ........................................... Middle of curb return MEAS ............................................................ Measure MH ................................... Manhole, maintenance hole MIL SPEC .................................... Military specification MISC ...................................................... Miscellaneous ft MOD .................................................. Modified, modify MON ........................................................... Monument MSL .. Mean Sea Level (Reg. Standard Drawing M-12) MTBM ......................... Microtunneling Boring Machine MUL T ............................................................... Multiple MUTCD ..... Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices MVL ............................................... Mercury vapor light NCTD .............................. North County Transit District NRCP ............................. Nonreinforced concrete pipe OBS ............................................................... Obsolete OC ................................................................ On center OD .................................................... Outside diameter OE ............................................................. Outer edge OHE ................................................. Overhead Electric OMWD .................. Oiivenhain Municipal Water District OPP ............................................................... Opposite ORIG ............................................................... Original PB .................................................................... Pull box PC .................................................... Point of curvature PCC ........................ Portland cement concrete or point of compound curvature PCVC ....................... Point of compound vertical curve PE ............................................................ Polyethylene PI .................................................. Point of intersection PL ............................................................ Property line PMB ............................ Processed miscellaneous base POC ...................................................... Point on curve POT ................................................... Point on tangent pp .............................................................. Power pole PAC .......................................... Point of reverse curve PRVC ............................ Point of reverse vertical curve PSI .......................................... Pounds per square inch PT ..................................................... Point of tangency PVC .................................................. Polyvinyl chloride PVMT ........................................................... Pavement PVT R/W ....................................... Private right-of-way Q ......................... Rate of flow in cubic feet per second QUAD ....................................... Quadrangle, Quadrant R ....................................................................... Radius R&O .......................................................... Rock and oil R/W .......................................................... Right-of-way RA ....................................................... Recycling agent RAC ................................... Recycled asphalt concrete RAP ............................... Reclaimed asphalt pavement RBAC .............................. Rubberized asphalt concrete RC ............................................... Reinforced concrete RCB ....................................... Reinforced concrete box RCE ...................................... Registered civil engineer RCP ...................................... Reinforced concrete pipe RCV ............................................ Remote control valve REF ............................................................. Reference REINF .............................. Reinforced or reinforcement RES .............................................................. Reservoir RGE ........................ Registered geotechnical engineer ROW ....................................................... Right-of-Way RR .................................................................. Railroad RSE ............................. Registered structural engineer ATE ................................... Registered traffic engineer S ................................... Sewer or Slope, as applicable SCCP ............................... Steel cylinder concrete pipe SO .............................................................. Storm drain SDNR ............................. San Diego Northern Railway SDR ........ Standard thermoplastic pipe dimension ratio (ratio of pipe 0.0. to minimum wall thickness) SDRSD ......... San Diego Regional Standard Drawings ~., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 54 of 173 Pages SE ...................................................... Sand Equivalent TOPO ....................................................... Topography SEC ................................................................. Section TR ........................................................................ Tract SF .............................................................. Square foot TRANS ......................................................... Transition SFM ................................................ Sewer Force Main TS ......................... Traffic signal or transition structure Sl ...................... International System of Units (Metric) TSC ............................................ Traffic signal conduit SPEC ..................................................... Specifications TSS ........................................... Traffic signal standard SPPWC .......................................... Standard Plans for TW .............................................................. Top of wall Public Works Construction SSPWC ............................. Standard Specifications for TYP ................................................................... Typical UE ............................................... Underground Electric Public Works Construction USA ................................... Underground Service Alert ST HWY ................................................. State highway VAR .................................................... Varies, Variable STA ................................................................... Station VB ................................................................. Valve box STD ............................................................... Standard VC ........................................................... Vertical curve STR ................................................................. Straight VCP .................................................. Vitrified clay pipe STR GR ................................................. Straight grade VERT ............................................................... Vertical STRUC ......................................... Structural/Structure VOL ................................................................. Volume SW ................................................................. Sidewalk VWD ....................................... Vallecitos Water District SWD ..................................................... Sidewalk drain W ....................... Water, Wider or Width, as applicable SY ............................................................. Square yard WATCH .............. Work Area Traffic Control Handbook T ................................................................. Telephone WI ............................................................ Wrought iron TAN ................................................................ Tangent WM ........................................................... Water meter TC .............................................................. Top of curb WPJ ........................................... Weakened plane joint TEL ............................................................. Telephone XCONN ............................................. Cross connection TF .......................................................... Top of footing XSEC ...................................................... Cross section 1-3.3 Institutions. Abbreviation Word or Words AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AISC ................................................................... American Institute of Steel Construction ~ ANSI ...................................................................... American National Standards Institute API ...................................................................................... American Petroleum Institute AREA ............................................................. American Railway Engineering Association ASTM ............................................................. American Society for Testing and Materials AWPA ................................................................. American Wood Preservers Association AWS ......................................................................................... American Welding Society AWWA ...................................................................... American Water Works Association FHWA ............................................................................. Federal Highway Administration GRI ................................................................................. Geosynthetic Research Institute NEMA ........................................................ National Electrical Manufacturers Association NOAA ................ National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (Dept. of Commerce) UL ..................................................................................... Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. USGS ............................................................................. United States Geological Survey ~ '-., Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 55 of 173 Pages 1-4 UNITS OF MEASURE. 1-4.1 General. U.S. Standard Measures, also called U.S. Customary System, are the principal measurement system in these specifications. However, certain material specifications and test re- quirements contained herein use Sl units specifically and conversions to U.S. Standard Measures may or may not have been included in these circumstances. When U.S. Standard Measures are not included in parenthesis, then the Sl units shall control. S.l. units and U.S. Standard Measures in parenthesis may or may not be exactly equivalent. Reference is also made to ASTM E 380 for definitions of various units of the Sl system and a more extensive set of conversion factors. 1-4.2 Units of Measure and Their Abbreviations. U.S. Customarv Unit (Equal To) Sl Unit (Abbreviations) CAbbrev1at1ons) 1 mil (=0.001 in) ................................................................................... 25.4 micrometer (!lm) 1 inch (in) .............................................................................................. 25.4 millimeter (mm) 1 inch (in) .............................................................................................. 2.54 centimeter (em) 1 foot (ft) ............................................................................................... 0.3048 meter (m) 1 yard (yd) ............................................................................................ 0.9144 meter (m) 1 mile (mi) ............................................................................................. 1.6093 kilometer (km) 1 square foot (ft2} .............•......••.......•.....•.....•.••...•......•...........•..•...•••..... 0.0929 square meter (m2) 1 square yard (yd2) ...•.••..•.••.....•.............•.....•..........•.....•....................... 0.8361 square meter (m2) 1 cubic foot (ft3) ............................................................................•....... 0.0283 cubic meter (m3) 1 cubic yard (yd3} ................................................................................. 0.7646 cubic meter (m3) 1 acre ................................................................................................... 0.4047 hectare (ha) 1 U.S. gallon (gal) ................................................................................. 3.7854 Liter (L) 1 fluid ounce (fl. oz.) ............................................................................. 29.5735 millileter (ml) 1 pound mass (lb) (avoirdupois) ........................................................... 0.4536 kilogram (kg) 1 ounce mass (oz) ................................................................................ 0.02835 kilogram (kg) 1 Ton (=2000 lb avoirdupois) ............................................................... 0.9072 Tonne(= 907 kg) 1 Poise ................................................................................................. 0.1 pascal· second (Pa · s) 1 centistoke (cs) ................................................................................... 1 square millimeters per 1 pound force (lbf) ................................................................................ 4~:.fg~~~~~s(N) 1 pounds per square inch (psi) ............................................................. 6.8948 Kilopascal (kPa) 1 pound force per foot (lbf/ft) ................................................................ 1.4594 Newton per meter (N/m) 1 foot-pound force (ft-lbf) ...................................................................... 1.3558 Joules (J) 1 foot-pound force per second ([ft-lbf]/s) .............................................. 1.3558 Watt (W) 1 part per million (ppm) ........................................................................ 1 milligram/liter (mg/L) Temperature Units and Abbreviations Degree Fahrenheit (°F): ....................................................................... Degree Celsius (0C}: °F = (1.8 X 0C} + 32 .............................................................................. oc = (°F-32)/1.8 1 Ampere (A) 1 Volt (V) 1 Candela (cd) 1 Lumen (lm) 1 second (s) 0 Revised 1/30/13 Sl Units (abbreviation) Commonly Used in Both Systems Contract No. 50081 Page 56 of 173 Pages ~ L % ' " I 0 PL CL SL Delta, the central angle or angle between tangents Angle Percent Feet or minutes Inches or seconds Number per or (between words) Degree Property line Centerline Survey line or station line ~ ~1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 57 of 173 Pages SECTION 2-SCOPE AND CONTROL OF WORK 2-1 AWARD AND EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. Award and execution of Contract will be as pro- vided for in the Specifications, Instruction to Bidders, or Notice Inviting Bids. 2-2 ASSIGNMENT. No Contract or portion thereof may be assigned without consent of the Board, except that the Contractor may assign money due or which will accrue to it under the Contract. If given written notice, such assignment will be recognized by the Board to the extent permitted by law. Any assignment of money shall be subject to all proper withholdings in favor of the Agency and to all deductions provided for in the Contract. All money withheld, whether assigned or not, shall be subject to being used by the Agency for completion of the Work, should the Contractor be in default. 2-3 SUBCONTRACTS. 2-3.1 General. Each Bidder shall comply with the Chapter of the Public Contract Code including Sections 4100 through 4113. The following excerpts or summaries of some of the requirements of this Chapter are included below for information: The Bidder shall set forth in the Bid, as provided in 4104: "(a) The name and location of the place of business of each subcontractor who will perform work or labor or render service to the prime contractor in or about the construction of the work or improve- ments, or a subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the prime contractor, specially fabricates and installs a portion of the work or improvement according to de- tailed drawings contained in the plans and specifications, in an amount in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid, or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the prime contractor's total bid or ten thousand dollars ($1 0,000), whichever is greater." "(b) The portion of the work which will be done by each such subcontractor under this act. The prime contractor shall list only one subcontractor for each such portion as is defined by the prime contractor in his bid." If the Contractor fails to specify a Subcontractor, or specifies more than one Subcontractor for the same portion of the work to be performed under the Contract (in excess of one-half of 1 percent of the Contractor's total Bid), the Contractor shall be qualified to perform that portion itself, and shall perform that portion itself, except as otherwise provided in the Code. As provided in Section 41 07, no Contractor whose Bid is accepted shall substitute any person as Subcontractor in place of the Subcontractor listed in the original Bid, except for causes and by proce- dures established in Section 4107.5. This section provides procedures to correct a clerical error in the listing of a Subcontractor. Section 411 0 provides that a Contractor violating any of the provisions of the Chapter violates the Contract and the Board may exercise the option either to cancel the Contract or assess the Contractor a penalty in an amount of not more than 10 percent of the subcontract involved, after a public hearing. ft "\.1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 58 of 173 Pages Should the Contractor fail to adhere to the provisions requiring the Contractor to complete 50 percent of the contract price with its own organization, the Agency may at its sole discretion elect to cancel the contract or deduct an amount equal to 1 0 percent of the value of the work performed in excess of 50 percent of the contract price by other than the Contractor's own organization. The Board shall be the sole body for determination of a violation of these provisions. In any proceedings under this section, the prime contractor shall be entitled to a public hearing before the Board and shall be notified ten (1 0) days in advance of the time and location of said hearing. The determination of the Board shall be final. 2-3.2 Additional Responsibility. The Contractor shall give personal attention to the fulfillment of the Contract and shall keep the Work under its control. The Contractor shall perform, with its own organization, Contract work amounting to at least 50 percent of the Contract Price except that any designated "Specialty Items" may be performed by subcontract, and the amount of any such "Specialty Items" so performed may be deducted from the Contract Price before computing the amount required to be performed by the Contractor with its own organization. "Specialty Items" will be identified by the Agency in the Bid or Proposal. Where an entire item is sub- contracted, the value of work subcontracted will be based on the Contract Unit Price. When a portion of an item is subcontracted, the value of work subcontracted will be based on the estimated percent- age of the Contract Unit Price. This will be determined from information submitted by the Contractor, and subject to approval by the Engineer. Before the work of any Subcontractor is started, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for ap- proval a written statement showing the work to be subcontracted giving the name and business of each Subcontractor and description and value of each portion of the work to be so subcontracted. 2-3.3 Status of Subcontractors. Subcontractors shall be considered employees of the Contractor, ·~ and the Contractor shall be responsible for their work. 2-4 CONTRACT BONDS. Before execution of the Contract, the Bidder shall file surety bonds with the Agency to be approved by the Board in the amounts and for the purposes noted below. Bonds issued by a surety, who is authorized to issue bonds in California, and whose bonding limitation shown in said circular is sufficient to provide bonds in the amount required by the Contract shall be deemed to be approved unless specifically rejected by the Agency. Bonds from all other sureties shall be ac- companied by all of the documents enumerated in Code of Civil Procedure 995.660 (a). The Bidder shall pay all bond premiums, costs, and incidentals. Each bond shall incorporate, by reference, the Contract and be signed by both the Bidder and Surety and the signature of the authorized agent of the Surety shall be notarized. The Contractor shall provide a faithful performance/warranty bond and payment bond (labor and ma- terials bond) for this contract. The faithful performance/warranty bond shall be in a sum not less than one hundred percent of the total amount payable by the terms of this contract. The Contractor shall provide bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers in a sum not less than one hun- dred percent of the total amount payable by the terms of this contract. Both bonds shall extend in full force and effect and be retained by the Agency during this project until they are released according to the provisions of this section. The faithful performance/warranty bond will be reduced to 25 percent of the original amount 30 days after recordation of the Notice of Completion and will remain in full force and effect for the one year o warranty period and until all warranty repairs are completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The · . #'t ~~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 bonds to secure payment of laborers and materials suppliers shall be released six months plus 30 days after recordation of the Notice of Completion if all claims have been paid. All bonds are to be placed with a surety insurance carrier admitted and authorized to transact the business of insurance in California and whose assets exceed their liabilities in an amount equal to or in excess of the amount of the bond. The bonds are to contain the following documents: 1) An original, or a certified copy, of the un-revoked appointment, power of attorney, by laws, or other instrument entitling or authorizing the person who executed the bond to do so. 2) A certified copy of the certificate of authority of the insurer issued by the insurance commissioner. If the bid is accepted, the Agency may require a financial statement of the assets and liabilities of the insurer at the end of the quarter calendar year prior to 30 days next preceding the date of the execution of the bond. The financial statement shall be made by an officer's certificate as defined in Section 173 of the Corporations Code. In the case of a foreign insurer, the financial statement may be verified by the oath of the principal officer or manager residing within the United States. Should any bond become insufficient, the Contractor shall renew the bond within 1 0 days after receiv- ing notice from the Agency. Should any Surety at any time be unsatisfactory to the Board, notice will be given the Contractor to that effect. No further payments shall be deemed due or will be made under the contract until a new Surety shall qualify and be accepted by the Board. Changes in the Work or extensions of time, made pursuant to the Contract, shall in no way release the Contractor or Surety from its obligations. Notice of such changes or extensions shall be waived by the Surety. 2-5 PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 2-5.1 General. The Contractor shall keep at the Work site a copy of the Plans and Specifications, to which the Engineer shall have access at all times. The specifications for the work include the General Provisions, project technical specifications, Carls- bad Engineering Standards (CES), Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, (SSPWC), Part 2 & 3, and the latest supplements thereto, current edition at the time of bid opening as published by the "Greenbook" Committee of Public Works Standards, Inc., hereinafter designated "SSPWC", as amended. The construction plans are designated as City of Carlsbad Drawing No. 479-7 and consists of 21 sheets. The standard drawings used for this project are the latest edition of the City of Carlsbad Engineering Standards and Carlsbad Standard Drawings, as issued by the City of Carlsbad and the Carlsbad Municipal Water District, hereinafter designated as CES and CSD, respectively. Copies of some of the pertinent standard drawings are enclosed as an appendix to these General Provisions. The Plans, Specifications, and other Contract Documents shall govern the Work. The Contract Docu- ments are intended to be complementary and cooperative. Anything specified in the Specifications and not shown on the Plans, or shown on the Plans and not specified in the Specifications, shall be as though shown on or specified in both. The Plans shall be supplemented by such working drawings and shop drawings as are necessary to adequately control the Work. The Contractor shall ascertain the existence of any conditions affecting the cost of the Work through a reasonable examination of the Work site prior to submitting the Bid. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 60 of 173 Pages Existing improvements visible at the Work site, for which no specific disposition is made on the Plans, but which interfere with the completion of the Work, shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. The Contractor shall, upon discovering any error or omission in the Plans or Specifications, immedi- ately call it to the attention of the Engineer. 2-5.2 Precedence of Contract Documents. If there is a conflict between Contract Documents, the document highest in precedence shall control. The precedence shall be the most recent edition of the following documents listed in order of highest to lowest precedence: 1) Permits from other agencies as may be required by law. 2) Change orders, whichever occurs last. 3) Contract addenda, whichever occurs last. 4) Contract. 5) Carlsbad General Provisions, Technical Specifications, and Supplemental Provisions. 6) Plans. 7) Standards plans. a) City of Carlsbad Standard Drawings. b) Carlsbad Municipal Water District Standard Drawings. c) City of Carlsbad modifications to the San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings. d) San Diego Area Regional Standard Drawings. e) Traffic Signal Design Guidelines and Standards. ~ f) State of California Department of Transportation Standard Plans. ...._; g) State of California Department of Transportation Standard Specifications. h) California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (CA MUTCD). 8) Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, as amended. 9) Reference Specifications. 1 0) Manufacturer's Installation Recommendations. Detail drawings shall take precedence over general drawings. Change Orders, Supplemental Agreements and approved revisions to Plans and Specifications will take precedence over items 2) through 9) above. Detailed plans and plan views shall have prece- dence over general plans. 2-5.3 Submittals. 2-5.3.1 General. Submittals shall be provided, at the Contractor's expense, as required in 2-5.3.2, 2- 5.3.3 and 2-5.3.4, when required by the Plans or Special Provisions, or when requested by the Engi- neer. Materials shall neither be furnished nor fabricated, nor shall any work for which submittals are required by performed, before the required submittals have been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer. Neither review nor acceptance of submittals by the Engineer shall relieve the Contractor from respon- sibility for errors, omissions, or deviations from the Contract Documents, unless such deviations were specifically called to the attention of the Engineer in the letter of transmittal. The Contractor shall be ~ responsible for the correctness of the submittals. .......1 The Contractor shall allow a minimum of 20 working days for review of submittals unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a letter of transmittal. Each submittal shall be consecutively numbered. Resubmittals shall be labeled with the number of the original submittal followed by an ascending alphabetical designation (e.g. the label '4-C' would indicate the third instance that the fourth submittal had been given to the Engineer). Each sheet of each submittal shall be consecutively numbered. Each set of shop drawings and submittals shall be ac- companied by a letter of transmittal on the Contractor's letterhead. The Letter of transmittal shall contain the following: 1) Project title and Agency contract number. 2) Number of complete sets. 3) Contractor's certification statement. 4) Specification section number(s) pertaining to material submitted for review. 5) Submittal number (Submittal numbers shall be consecutive including subsequent submittals for the same materials.) 6) Description of the contents of the submittal. 7) Identification of deviations from the contract documents. When submitted for the Engineer's review, Shop Drawings shall bear the Contractor's certification that the Contractor has reviewed, checked, and approved the Shop Drawings and that they are in con- formance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall subscribe to and shall place the following certification on all submittals: "I hereby certify that the (equipment, material) shown and marked in this submittal is that proposed to be incorporated into this Project, is in compliance with the Contract Documents, can be installed in the allocated spaces, and is submitted for approval." By: ----------------------------Title: ____________ _ Date: ___________ _ Company Name: ______________ ~--------------- ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 62 of 173 Pages 2-5.3.2 Working Drawings. Working drawings are drawings showing details not shown on the Plans which are required to be designed by the Contractor. Working drawings shall be of a size and scale to clearly show all necessary details. Six copies and one reproducible shall be submitted. If no revisions are required, three of the copies will be returned to the Contractor. If revisions are required, the Engineer will return one copy along with the reproducible for resubmission. Upon acceptance, the Engineer will return two of the copies to the Contractor and retain the remaining copies and the reproducible. Working drawings are required in the following sections: TABLE 2-5.3.2 {A} Item Section Number Title Subject 1 7-10.4.1 Safety Orders Trench Shoring 2 207-2.5 Joints Reinforced Concrete Pipe 3 207-8.4 Joints Vitrified Clay Pipe 4 207-10.2.1 General Fabricated Steel Pipe 5 300-3.2 Cofferdams Structure Excavation & Backfill 6 303-1.6.1 General Falsework 7 303-1.7.1 General Placing Reinforcement 8 303-3.1 General Prestressed Concrete Construction 9 304-1.1.1 Shop Drawings Structural Steel 10 304-1.1.2 Falsework Plans Structural Steel 11 304-2.1 General Metal Hand Railings 12 306-2.1 General Jacking Operations 13 306-3.1 General Tunneling Operations 14 306-3.4 Tunnel Supports Tunneling Operations 15 306-6 Remodeling Existing Sewer Facilities Polyethylene Liner Installation 16 306-8 Microtunneling Microtunneling Operations 17 307-4.3 Controller Cabinet Wiring Diagrams Traffic Signal Construction Working drawings listed above as Items 5, 6, 8, 9, 10, 12, 13, 14 and 16 shall be prepared by a Civil or Structural Engineer registered by the State of California. 2-5.3.3 Shop Drawings. Shop drawings are drawings showing details of manufactured or assembled products proposed to be incorporated into the Work. Shop drawings required shall be as specified in the Special Provisions. 2-5.3.4 Supporting Information. Supporting information is information required by the Specifications for the purposes of administration of the Contract, analysis for verification of conformance with the Specifications, the operation and maintenance of a manufactured product or system to be constructed as part of the Work, and other information as may be required by the Engineer. Six copies of the supporting information shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to the start of the Work unless other- wise specified in the Special Provisions or directed by the Engineer. Supporting information for sys- tems shall be bound together and include all manufactured items for the system. If resubmittal is not required, three copies will be returned to the Contractor. Supporting information shall consist of the following and is required unless otherwise specified in the Special Provisions: 1) List of Subcontractors per 2-3.2. 2 3 ) List of Materials per 4-1.4. ) Certifications per 4-1.5. 6 4 5 l Construction Schedule per 6-1 . Confined Space Entry Program per 7-10.4.4. Concrete mix designs per 201-1.1. 7) Asphalt concrete mix designs per 203-6.1. ft ~~ Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Paae 63 of 173 Paaes ~ ,....,~ 8) Data, including, but not limited to, catalog sheets, manufacturer's brochures, technical bulle- tins, specifications, diagrams, product samples, and other information necessary to describe a system, product or item. This information is required for irrigation systems, street lighting sys- tems, and traffic signals, and may also be required for any product, manufactured item, or system. 2-5.4 RECORD DRAWINGS. The Contractor shall provide and keep up-to-date a complete "as-built" record set of blue-line prints, which shall be corrected in red daily and show every change from the original drawings and specifications and the exact "as-built" locations, sizes and kinds of equipment, underground piping, valves, and all other work not visible at surface grade. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Agency at cost. This set of drawings shall be kept on the job and shall be used only as a record set and shall be delivered to the Engineer within ten (1 0) days of completion of the work. Payment for performing the work required by Section 2-5.4 shall be included in the various bid items and no additional payment will be made therefore. 2-6 WORK TO BE DONE. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to complete the Con- tract in a satisfactory manner. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall furnish all materials, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals necessary to complete the Work. 2-7 SUBSURFACE DATA. All soil and test hole data, water table elevations, and soil analyses shown on the drawings or included in the Specifications apply only at the location of the test holes and to the depths indicated. Soil test reports for test holes which have been drilled are available for inspec- tion at the office of the Engineer. Any additional subsurface exploration shall be done by Bidders or the Contractor at their own expense. The indicated elevation of the water table is that which existed on the date when test hole data was determined. It is the Contractor's responsibility to determine and allow for the elevation of groundwater at the date of project construction. A difference in elevation between groundwater shown in soil boring logs and groundwater actually encountered during construction will not be considered as a basis for extra work. 2-8 RIGHT-OF-WAY. Rights-of-way, easements, or rights-of-entry for the Work will be provided by the Agency. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements, pay for, and assume all responsibility for acquiring, using, and disposing of additional work areas and facilities temporarily required. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Agency harmless from all claims for damages caused by such actions. 2-9 SURVEYING. 2-9.1 Permanent Survey Markers. The Contractor shall not cover or disturb permanent survey monuments or benchmarks without the consent of the Engineer. Where the Engineer concurs, in writing, with the Contractor that protecting an existing monument in place is impractical, the Contractor shall employ a licensed land surveyor or a registered civil engineer authorized to practice land survey- ing within the State of California, hereinafter Surveyor, to establish the location of the monument be- fore it is disturbed. The Contractor shall have the monument replaced by the Surveyor no later than thirty {30) days after construction at the site of the replacement is completed. The Surveyor shall file corner record(s) as required by§§ 8772 and 8773, et seq. of the California Business and Professions Code. When a change is made in the finished elevation of the pavement of any roadway in which a perma- nent survey monument is located, the Contractor shall adjust the monument frame and cover to the new grade within 7 days of paving unless the Engineer shall approve otherwise. Monument frames and covers shall be protected during street sealing or painting projects or be cleaned to the satisfaction of the Engineer. ft ·~'Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 64 of 173 Pages 2-9.2 Survey Service. The Contractor shall hire and pay for the services of a Surveyor, hereinafter Surveyor to perform all work necessary for establishing control, construction staking, records research and all other surveying work necessary to construct the work, provide surveying services as required herein and provide surveying, drafting and other professional services required to satisfy the require- ments of the Land Surveyors Act. Surveyor shall be resident on the site during all surveying operations and shall personally supervise and certify the surveying work. 2-9.2.1 Submittal of Surveying Data, All surveying data submittals shall conform to the requirements of Section 2-5.3.3, "Submittals", herein. The Contractor shall submit grade sheets to the Engineer before commencing work in the area affected by the grade sheets. The Contractor shall submit field notes for all surveying required herein to the Engineer within ten days of performing the survey. All surveying field notes, wade sheets and survey calculations shall be submitted in bound form on 215mm by 280 mm (8 H' by 11 ") paper. The field notes, calculations and supporting data shall be clear and complete. Supporting data shall include all maps, affidavits, plats, field notes from earlier surveys and all other evidence used by the Surveyor to determine the location of the monuments set. The field notes and calculations will be labeled with name of the Surveyor, the party chief, the field crewmembers and the author of the field notes or calculations. They shall be annotated with the date of observation or calculation, be numbered with consecutive page numbers and shall be readable without resort to any electronic aid, computer program or documentation for any computer program. The field notes shall be prepared in conformance with the CAL TRANS "Surveys Manual". The Con- tractor shall have a Record of Survey prepared by the Surveyor and file it in conformance with §§ 8700 -8805 of the State of California Business and Professions Code when the Surveyor performs any surveying that such map is required under§§ 8762 of the State of California Business and Professions Code and whenever the Surveyor shall establish, set or construct any permanent survey monument. SDRS drawing M-10 type monuments, bolts, spikes, leaded tacks and nails (when set in concrete), iron pipes, reinforcing steel and all monuments and marks that are at, or accessory to, property corners and street centerlines are permanent survey monuments. The Record of Survey shall show all mon- uments set, control monuments used, the basis of bearings and all other data needed to determine the procedure of survey and the degree of accuracy attained by the field surveying including the un-:) adjusted ratio of closure. The unadjusted ratio of closure shall not exceed 1 part in 40,000. The record . · of survey shall show the location and justification of location of all permanent monuments set and their relation to the street right-of-way. Record(s) of Survey(s) shall be submitted for the Engineer's review and approval before submittal to the County Surveyor and before submittal to the County Recorder. 2-9.2.2 Survey Requirements, Stakes shall be set at offsets approved by the Engineer at no greater intervals than specified in TABLE 2-9.2.2(A) as measured along the project stationing. Stakes shall be set to show the location and grade of future curbs adjacent to traffic signal locations where the curb is not being built as a part of this contract. Staking and marking shall be completed by the Surveyor and inspected and approved by the Engineer before the start of construction in the area marked. Center- line monument shall have the disk stamped with the date the monument was set and the registration number of the Surveyor. Habitat mitigation sites and other areas to be preserved that are shown on the plans shall be staked and flagged prior to the start of any other activities within the limits of the work. When curb and gutter does not exist and is not being installed as a part of the project the location of adjacent facilities being constructed as a part of the contract the Contractor shall place stakes de- fining the horizontal and vertical location of such adjacent utility vaults, poles or other facilities that are being installed as parts of, or adjunct to, the project either by the Contractor and/or those noted on the plans as to be installed by others. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 PaQe 65 of 173 PaQes TABLE 2-9.2.2(A) Survey Requirements for Construction Staking Feature Staked Stake De-Centerline or Parallel to Centerline Spac-Lateral Spac-Setting Tolerance scription CV ing®,® ing a>,® (Within) Street Centerline SDRS M-10 :;:;1000', Street Intersections, Begin and end of on street cen-0.02' Monument curves, only when shown on the plans terline Horizontal, also see Section 2-9.2.1 herein Final Grade (in-RP +Marker :;:; 50' on tangents & curves when R~ 1 000' & :;:;22' 3fs" Horizontal & W' eludes top of: Stake, Blue-:;:; 25' on curves when R :;:; 1000' Vertical Basement soil, top in grading subbase and area base) Asphalt Pavement RP, paint on :;:; 25' or as per the intersection grid points edge of pave-3fa" Horizontal & 114'' Finish Course previous shown on the plan whichever provides the ment, paving Vertical course denser information pass width, crown line & grade breaks Drainage Struc-RP +Marker intervisible & :;:; 25', beginning and end, BC & as appropriate 3fs" Horizontal & 114" tures, Pipes & sim-Stake EC of facilities, Grade breaks, Alignment Vertical ilar Facilities@, (f) breaks, Junctions, Inlets & similar facilities, Risers & similar facilities (except plumbing), Skewed cut-off lines Curb RP +Marker :;:; 25', BC & EC, at 14d, 1hd & .,.d on curb re-( constant off-3fs" Horizontal & 114'' Stake turns & at beginning & end set) Vertical Minor Structure CD RP +Marker for catch basins: at centerline of box, ends of as appropriate 3fs" Horizontal & 114'' Stake+ Line box & wings & at each end of the local de-Vertical (when vertical Stake pression® data needed) Miscellaneous G> Contour Grading RP +Marker :;;50' along contour 0.1' Vertical & Horizon- CD Stake line tal Utilities CD, (f) RP +Marker :;:; 50' on tangents & curves when R~ 1 000' & as appropriate 3fs" Horizontal & W' Stake :;:; 25' on curves when R :;:; 1 000' or where Vertical grade < 0.30% Channels, Dikes RP +Marker intervisible & :;:; 1 00', BC & EC of facilities, as appropriate 0.1' Horizontal & 1u• & Ditches CD Stake Grade breaks, Alignment breaks, Junctions, Vertical Inlets & similar facilities Markers CD RP +Marker for asphalt street surfacing :;:; 50' on tangents At marker loca-1/4" Horizontal Stake & curves when R~ 1000' & :;:; 25' on curves tion(s) when R ~ 1000'. Pavement Mark-RP 200' on tangents, 50' on curves when at pavement 1/4'' Horizontal ersCD R ~ 1000' & 25' on curves when R :;:; 1 000'. marker loca- For PCC surfaced streets lane cold joints will tion(s) suffice CD Stakmg for feature may be om1tted when adjacent marker stakes reference the offset and elevation of those features and the accuracy requirements of the RP meet the requirements for the feature @ Reference points shall be sufficiently durable and set securely enough to survive with accuracy intact throughout the installation & inspection of the features or adjacent facilities for which they provide control. RP means reference point for the purposes of this table @ Perpendicular to centerline. ® Some features are not necessarily parallel to centerline but are referenced thereto ® Multi-plane surfaced features shall be staked so as to provide line & grade information for each plane of the feature ® ~ means greater than, or equal to, the number following the symbol. :;:; means less than, or equal to, the number fol- lowing the symbol. (f) The cut datum for storm drainage & sanitary sewer pipes & similar structures shall be their invert. The cut datum for all other utilities shall be the top of their pipe or conduit. All guard stakes, line stakes and lath shall be flagged. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer flagging, paint and marking cards shall be the color specified in TABLE 2-9.2.2(8) ft "' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 66 of 173 Pages TABLE 2-9.2.2(B) Survey Stake Color Code for Construction Staking Type of Stake Description Color* Horizontal Control Coordinated control points, control lines, control reference points, centerline, White/Red alignments, etc. Vertical Control Bench marks White/Or- ange Clearing Limits of clearing_ Yellow/Black Grading Slope, intermediate slope, abutment fill, rough grade, contour grading, final Yellow grade, etc. Structure Bridges, sound and retaining walls, box culverts, etc. White Drainage, Sewer, Curb Pipe culverts, junction boxes, drop inlets, headwalls, sewer lines, storm Blue drains, slope protection, curbs, gutters, etc. Right-of-Way Fences, R/ W lines, easements, property monuments, etc. White/Yellow Miscellaneous Signs, railings, barriers, lighting, etc. Orange * Flaggmg and markmg cards, 1f used. 2-9.2.3 Payment for Survey, Payment for work performed to satisfy the requirements of Sections 2- 9.1 through 2-9.2.2 shall be included in the actual bid items requiring the survey work and no additional payment will be made. Extension of unit prices for extra work shall include full compensation for attendant survey work and no additional payment will be made. Payment for the replacement of dis- turbed monuments and the filing of records of survey and/or corner records, including filing fees, shall be incidental to the work necessitating the disturbance of said monuments and no additional payment will be made. 2-9.3 Private Engineers. Surveying by private engineers on the Work shall conform to the quality ~ and practice required by the Engineer. ""-"' 2-9.4 Line and Grade. All work shall conform to the lines, elevations, and grades shown on the Plans. Three consecutive points set on the same slope shall be used together so that any variation from a straight grade can be detected. Any such variation shall be reported to the Engineer. In the absence of such report, the Contractor shall be responsible for any error in the grade of the finished work. Grades for underground conduits will be set at the surface of the ground. The Contractor shall transfer them to the bottom of the trench. 2-10 AUTHORITY OF BOARD AND ENGINEER. The Board has the final authority in all matters affecting the Work. Within the scope of the Contract, the Engineer has the authority to enforce com- pliance with the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall promptly comply with instructions from the Engineer or an authorized representative. The decision of the Engineer is final and binding on all questions relating to: quantities; acceptability of material, equipment, or work; execution, progress or sequence of work; and interpretation of the Plans, Specifications, or other drawings. This shall be precedent to any payment under the Contract, unless otherwise ordered by the Board. 2-10.1 Availability of Records, The Contractor shall, at no charge to the Agency, provide copies of all records in the Contractor's or subcontractor's possession pertaining to the work that the Engineer~ may request. ......1 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 67 of 173 Pages 2-10.2 Audit and Inspection, Contractor agrees to maintain and/or make available, to the Engineer, within San Diego County, accurate books and accounting records relative to all its activities and to contractually require all subcontractors to this Contract to do the same. The Engineer shall have the right to monitor, assess, and evaluate Contractor's and its subcontractors performance pursuant to this Agreement, said monitoring, assessments, and evaluations to include, but not be limited to, audits, inspection of premises, reports, contracts, subcontracts and interviews of Contractor's staff and the staff of all subcontractors to this contract. At any time during normal business hours and as often as the Engineer may deem necessary, upon reasonable advance notice, Contractor shall make available to the Engineer for examination, all of its, and all subcontractors to this contract, records with respect to all matters covered by this Contract and will permit the Engineer to audit, examine, copy and make excerpts or transcripts from such data and records, and to make audits of all invoices, materials, pay- rolls, records of personnel, and other data relating to all matters covered by this Contract. However, any such activities shall be carried out in a manner so as to not unreasonably interfere with Contrac- tor's ongoing business operations. Contractor and all subcontractors to this contract shall maintain such data and records for as long as may be required by applicable laws and regulations. 2-11 INSPECTION. The Work is subject to inspection and approval by the Engineer. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer before noon of the working day before inspection is required. Work shall be done only in the presence of the Engineer, unless otherwise authorized. Any work done without proper inspection will be subject to rejection. The Engineer and any authorized representatives shall at all times have access to the Work during its construction at shops and yards as well as the project site. The Contractor shall provide every reasonable facility for ascertaining that the materials and work- manship are in accordance with these specifications. Inspection of the Work shall not relieve the Con- tractor of the obligation to fulfill all conditions of the Contract. SECTION 3 -CHANGES IN WORK 3-1 CHANGES REQUESTED BY THE CONTRACTOR. 3-1.1 General. Changes in the Plans and Specifications, requested in writing by the Contractor, which do not materially affect the Work and which are not detrimental to the Work or to the interests of the Agency, may be granted by the Engineer. Nothing herein shall be construed as granting a right to the Contractor to demand acceptance of such changes. 3-1.2 Payment for Changes Requested by the Contractor. If such changes are granted, they shall be made at a reduction in cost or no additional cost to the Agency. 3-2 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY. 3-2.1 General. The Agency may change the Plans, Specifications, character of the work, or quantity of work provided the total arithmetic dollar value of all such changes, both additive and deductive, does not exceed 25 percent of the Contract Price. Should it become necessary to exceed this limita- tion, the change shall be by written Supplemental Agreement between the Contractor and Agency, unless both parties agree to proceed with the change by Change Order. Change Orders shall be in writing and state the dollar value of the change or established method of payment, any adjustment in contract time of completion, and when negotiated prices are involved, shall provide for the Contractor's signature indicating acceptance. ft '-'Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 68 of 173 Pages 3-2.2 Payment. 3-2.2.1 Contract Unit Prices. If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and such change does not involve substantial change in character of the work from that shown on the Plans or specified in the Specifications, then an adjustment in payment will be made. This adjustment will be based upon the increase or decrease in quantity and the Contract Unit Price. If the actual quantity of an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price and constructed in conform- ance with the Plans and Specifications varies from the Bid quantity by 50 percent or less, payment will be made at the Contract Unit Price. If the actual quantity of said item of work varies from the Bid quantity by more than 50 percent, payment will be made per Section 3-2.2.2 or 3-2.2.3 as appropriate. If a change is ordered in an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and such change does involve a substantial change in the character of the work from that shown on the Plans or specified in the Specifications, an adjustment in payment will be made per Section 3-2.4. 3-2.2.2 Increases of More Than 50 Percent. Should the actual quantity of an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, exceed the Bid quantity by more than 50 percent, payment for the quantity in excess of 125 percent of the Bid quantity will be made on the basis of an adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Extra Work per Section 3-3. The Extra Work per Section 3-3, basis of payment, shall not include fixed costs. Fixed costs shall be deemed to have been recovered by the Contractor through payment for 150 percent of the Bid quantity at the Contract Unit Price. 3-2.2.3 Decreases of More Than 50 Percent. Should the actual quantity of an item of work covered by a Contract Unit Price, and constructed in conformance with the Plans and Specifications, be less ~ than 50 percent of the Bid quantity, an adjustment in payment will not be made unless so requested ,...,/ in writing by the Contractor. If the Contractor so requests, payment will be made on the basis of an adjustment in the Contract Unit Price mutually agreed to by the Contractor and the Agency, or at the option of the Engineer, on the basis of Extra Work per Section 3-3; however, in no case will payment be less than would be made for the actual quantity at the Contract Unit Price nor more than would be made for 50 percent of the Bid quantity at the Contract Unit Price. 3-2.3 Stipulated Unit Prices. Stipulated Unit Prices are unit prices established by the Agency in the Contract Documents as distinguished from Contract Unit Prices submitted by the Contractor. Stipu- lated Unit Prices may be used for the adjustment of Contract changes when so specified in the Special Provisions. 3-2.4 Agreed Prices. Agreed Prices are prices for new or unforeseen work, or adjustments in Contract Unit Prices per Section 3-2.2, established by mutual agreement between the Contractor and the Agency. If mutual agreement cannot be reached, the Engineer may direct the Contractor to proceed on the basis of Extra Work in accordance per Section 3-3, except as otherwise specified in Sections 3-2.2.2 and 3-2.2.3. 3.2.4.1 Schedule of Values. Prior to construction, Contractor shall provide a schedule of values for all lump sum bid items that shall be used for the purpose of progress payments. The prices shall be valid for the purpose of change orders to the project. 3.2.5 Eliminated Items. Should any Bid item be eliminated in its entirety, payment will be made to the Contractor for its actual costs incurred in connection with the eliminated item prior to notification in ~ ft '-J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 69 of 173 Pages writing from the Engineer so stating its elimination. If material conforming to the Plans and Specifica- tions is ordered by the Contractor for use in the eliminated item prior to the date of notification of elimination by the Engineer, and if the order for that material cannot be canceled, payment will be made to the Contractor for the actual cost of the material. In this case, the material shall become the property of the Agency. Payment will be made to the Contractor for its actual costs for any further handling. If the material is returnable, the material shall be returned and payment will be made to the Contractor for the actual cost of charges made by the supplier for returning the material and for han- dling by the Contractor. Actual costs, as used herein, shall be computed on the basis of Extra Work per Section 3-3. 3-3 EXTRA WORK. 3-3.1 General. New or unforeseen work will be classified as "extra work" when the Engineer deter- mines that it is not covered by Contract Unit Prices or stipulated unit prices. 3-3.2 Payment. 3-3.2.1 General. When the price for the extra work cannot be agreed upon, the Agency will pay for the extra work based on the accumulation of costs as provided herein. 3-3.2.2 Basis for Establishing Costs. (a) Labor. The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages of workers performing the extra work at the time the extra work is done, plus employer payments of payroll taxes, workers compensation insurance, liability insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs, resulting from Federal, State, or local laws, as well as assessments or benefits required by lawful collective bargaining agreements. The use of a labor classification which would increase the extra work cost will not be permitted unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such additional costs. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs are not included in the invoice for equipment rental. The labor cost for foremen shall be proportioned to all of their assigned work and only that applicable to extra work will be paid. Nondirect labor costs, including superintendence, shall be considered part of the markup of Section 3-3.2.3 (a). (b) Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be at invoice or lowest current price at which such materials are locally available and delivered to the job site in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight, and delivery. The Agency reserves the right to approve materials and sources of supply, or to supply materials to the Contractor if necessary for the progress of the Work. No markup shall be applied to any material provided by the Agency. (c) Tool and Equipment Rental. No payment will be made for the use of tools which have a replace- ment value of $200 or less. Regardless of ownership, the rates and right-of-way delay factors to be used in determining rental and delay costs shall be the edition of the, "Labor Surcharge and Equipment Rental Rates" published by CALTRANS, current at the time of the actual use of the tool or equipment. The right-of-way delay factors therein shall be used as multipliers of the rental rates for determining the value of costs for ft ~1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 70 of 173 Pages delay to the Contractor and subcontractors, if any. The labor surcharge rates published therein are not a part of this contract. The rental rates paid shall include the cost of fuel, oil, lubrication, supplies, small tools, necessary attachments, repairs and maintenance of any kind, depreciation, storage, insurance, and all inciden- tals. Necessary loading and transportation costs for equipment used on the extra work shall be in- cluded. If equipment is used intermittently and, when not in use, could be returned to its rental source at less expense to the Agency than holding it at the Work site, it shall be returned, unless the Contractor elects to keep it at the Work site, at no expense to the Agency. All equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer, in good working condition, and suitable for the purpose for which it is to be used. Manufacturer's ratings and approved modifications shall be used to classify equipment and it shall be powered by a unit of at least the minimum rating recommended by the manufacturer. The reported rental time for equipment already at the Work site shall be the duration of its use on the extra work. This time begins when equipment is first put into actual operation on the extra work, plus the time required to move it from its previous site and back, or to a closer site. (d) Other Items. The Agency may authorize other items which may be required on the extra work, including labor, services, material, and equipment. These items must be different in their nature from those required for the Work, and be of a type not ordinarily available from the Contractor or Subcon- tractors. Invoices covering all such items in detail shall be submitted with the request for payment. (e) Invoices. Vendors' invoices for material, equipment rental and other expenditures shall be sub- mitted with the request for payment. If the request for payment is not substantiated by invoices or other documentation, the Agency may establish the cost of the item involved at the lowest price which was current at the time of the report. 3-3.2.3 Markup. (a) Work by Contractor. The following percentages shall be added to the Contractor's costs and shall constitute the markup for all overhead and profits: 1) Labor ................................... 20 2) Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 3) Equipment Rental ................... 15 4) Other Items and Expenditures .. 15 To the sum of the costs and markups provided for in this section, one percent shall be added as compensation for bonding. (b) Work by Subcontractor. When all or any part of the extra work is performed by a Subcon- tractor, the markup established in Section 3-3.2.3(a) shall be applied to the Subcontractor's actual cost of such work. A markup of 1 0 percent on the first $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work and a markup of 5 percent on work added in excess of $5,000 of the subcontracted portion of the extra work may be added by the Contractor. 3-3.3 Daily Reports by Contractor. When the price for the extra work cannot be agreed upon, the ·0 Contractor shall submit a daily report to the Engineer on forms approved by the Agency. Included are ~ "'Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Paqe 71 of 173 Paaes applicable delivery tickets, listing all labor, materials, and equipment involved for that day, and other services and expenditures when authorized. Payment for extra work will not be made until such time that the Contractor submits completed daily reports and all supporting documents to the Engineer. Failure to submit the daily report by the close of the next working day may waive any rights for that day. An attempt shall be made to reconcile the report daily, and it shall be signed by the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement, pertinent notes shall be entered by each party to explain points which cannot be resolved immediately. Each party shall retain a signed copy of the report. Reports by Subcontractors or others shall be submitted through the Contractor. The report shall: 1. Show names of workers, classifications, and hours worked. 2. Describe and list quantities of materials used. 3. Show type of equipment, size, identification number, and hours of operation, including loading and transportation, if applicable. 4. Describe other services and expenditures in such detail as the Agency may require. 3-4 CHANGED CONDITIONS. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Engineer of the following Work site conditions (hereinafter called changed conditions), in writing, upon their discovery and be- fore they are disturbed: 1. Subsurface or latent physical conditions differing materially from those represented in the Con- tract; 2. Unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature differing materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character being performed; and 3. Material differing from that represented in the Contract which the Contractor believes may be hazardous waste, as defined in Section 25117 of the Health and Safety Code that is required to be removed to a Class I, Class II, or Class Ill disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law. The Engineer will promptly investigate conditions which appear to be changed conditions. If the Engi- neer determines that conditions are changed conditions and they will materially affect performance time, the Contractor, upon submitting a written request, will be granted an extension of time subject to the provisions of 6-6. If the Engineer determines that the conditions do not justify an adjustment in compensation, the Con- tractor will be notified in writing. This notice will also advise the Contractor of its obligation to notify the Engineer in writing if the Contractor disagrees. The Contractor's failure to give notice of changed conditions promptly upon their discovery and before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith. The Contractor shall not be entitled to the payment of any additional compensation for any act, or failure to act, by the Engineer, including failure or refusal to issue a change order, or for the happening of any event, thing, occurrence, or other cause, unless the Contractor shall have first given the Engi- neer due written notice of potential claim as hereinafter specified. Compliance with this section shall not be required as a prerequisite to notice provisions in Section 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, nor 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 72 of 173 Pages to any claim that is based on differences in measurement or errors of computation as to contract quantities. The written notice of potential claim for changed conditions shall be submitted by the Con- tractor to the Engineer upon their discovery and prior to the time that the Contractor performs the work giving rise to the potential claim. The Contractor's failure to give written notice of potential claim for changed conditions to the agency upon their discovery and before they are disturbed shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith. The Contractor shall provide the District with a written document containing a description of the par- ticular circumstances giving rise to the potential claim, the reasons for which the Contractor believes additional compensation may be due and nature of any and all costs involved within 20 working days of the date of service of the written notice of potential claim for changed conditions. Verbal notifications are disallowed. The potential claim shall include the following certification relative to the California False Claims Act, Government Code Sections 12650-12655. "The undersigned certifies that the above statements are made in full cognizance of the California False Claims Act, Government Code Sections 12650-12655. The undersigned further understands and agrees that this potential claim, unless resolved, must be restated as a claim in response to the City's proposed final estimate in order for it to be further considered." By: ----------------------------Title: _______________________ _ Date: __________________________ __ Company Name: ____________________________________________________ __ The Contractor's estimate of costs may be updated when actual costs are known. The Contractor shall submit substantiation of its actual costs to the Engineer within 20 working days after the affected work is completed. Failure to do so shall be sufficient cause for denial of any claim subsequently filed on the basis of said notice of potential claim. It is the intention of this section that differences between the parties arising under and by virtue of the contract be brought to the attention of the Engineer at the earliest possible time in order that such matters be settled, if possible, or other appropriate action promptly taken. 3-5 DISPUTED WORK. The Contractor shall give the agency written notice of potential claim prior to commencing any disputed work. Failure to give said notice shall constitute a waiver of all claims in connection therewith. If the contractor and the agency are unable to reach agreement on disputed work, the Agency may direct the contractor to proceed with the work. Prior to proceeding with dispute resolution pursuant to Public Contract Code provisions specified here- inafter, the contractor shall attempt to resolve all disputes informally through the following dispute resolution chain of command: 1. Project Inspector 2. Construction Manager 3. Deputy City Engineer, Construction Management & Inspection 4. City Engineer 5. General Manager ~ "J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 73 of 173 Pages The Contractor shall submit a complete report within 20 working days after completion of the disputed >c. work stating its position on the claim, the contractual basis for the claim, along with all documentation supporting the costs and all other evidentiary materials. At each level of claim or appeal of claim the District will, within 10 working days of receipt of said claim or appeal of claim, review the Contractor's report and respond with a position, request additional information or request that the Contractor meet and present its report. When additional information or a meeting is requested the District will provide its position within 1 0 working days of receipt of said additional information or Contractor's presentation of its report. The Contractor may appeal each level's position up to the General Manager after which the Contractor may proceed under the provisions of the Public Contract Code. The authority within the dispute resolution chain of command is limited to recommending a resolution to a claim to the General Manager. Actual approval of the claim is subject to the change order provi- sions in the contract. All claims by the contractor for $375,000 or less shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures in the Public Contract Code, Division 2, Part 3, Chapter 1, Article 1.5 (commencing with Section 20104) which is set forth below: ARTICLE 1.5 RESOLUTION OF CONSTRUCTION CLAIMS 20104. (a)(1) This article applies to all public works claims of three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000) or less which arise between a contractor and a local agency. (2) This article shall not apply to any claims resulting from a contract between a contractor and a public agency when the public agency has elected to resolve any disputes pursuant to Article 7.1 (commenc- ing with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2. (b)(1) "Public work" has the same meaning as in Sections 3100 and 3106 of the Civil Code, except that "public work" does not include any work or improvement contracted for by the state or the Regents of the University of California. (2) "Claim" means a separate demand by the contractor for (A) a time extension, (B) payment of money or damages arising from work done by, or on behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the contract for a public work and payment of which is not otherwise expressly provided for or the claimant is not otherwise entitled to, or (C) an amount the payment of which is disputed by the local agency. (c) The provisions of this article or a summary thereof shall be set forth in the plans or specifications for any work which may give rise to a claim under this article. (d) This article applies only to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 1991. 201 04.2. For any claim subject to this article, the following requirements apply: (a) The claim shall be in writing and include the documents necessary to substantiate the claim. Claims must be filed on or before the date of final payment. Nothing in this subdivision is intended to extend the time limit or supersede notice requirements otherwise provided by contract for the filing of claims. (b)(1) For claims of less than fifty thousand dollars ($50,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to any written claim within 45 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant. (3) The local agency's written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 15 days after receipt of the further documentation or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information, whichever is greater. (c)(1) For claims of over fifty thousand dollars ($50,000) and less than or equal to three hundred seventy-five thousand dollars ($375,000), the local agency shall respond in writing to all written claims within 60 days of receipt of the claim, or may request, in writing, within 30 days of receipt of the claim, any additional documentation supporting the claim or relating to defenses to the claim the local agency may have against the claimant. (2) If additional information is thereafter required, it shall be requested and provided pursuant to this subdivision, upon mutual agreement of the local agency and the claimant. (3) The local agency's written response to the claim, as further documented, shall be submitted to the claimant within 30 days after receipt of the further documentation, or within a period of time no greater than that taken by the claimant in producing the additional information or requested documentation, whichever is greater. (d) If the claimant disputes the local agency's written response, or the local agency fails to respond within the time prescribed, the claimant may so notify the local agency, in writing, either within 15 days of receipt of the local agency's response or within 15 days of the local agency's failure to respond within the time prescribed, respectively, and demand an informal conference to meet and confer for settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon a demand, the local agency shall schedule a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute. (e) Following the meet and confer conference, if the claim or any portion remains in dispute, the claim- ant may file a claim as provided in Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (com- mencing with Section 91 O) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. For purposes of those provisions, the running of the period of time within which a claim must be filed shall be tolled from the time the claimant submits his or her written claim pursuant to subdivision (a) until the time that claim is denied as a result of the meet and confer process, including any period of time utilized by the meet and confer process. (f) This article does not apply to tort claims and nothing in this article is intended nor shall be construed to change the time periods for filing tort claims or actions specified by Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 900) and Chapter 2 (commencing with Section 91 0) of Part 3 of Division 3.6 of Title 1 of the Government Code. 201 04.4. The following procedures are established for all civil actions filed to resolve claims subject ~ to this article: ,.._, (a) Within 60 days, but no earlier than 30 days, following the filing or responsive pleadings, the court shall submit the matter to non-binding mediation unless waived by mutual stipulation of both parties. The mediation process shall provide for the selection within 15 days by both parties of a disinterested third person as mediator, shall be commenced within 30 days of the submittal, and shall be concluded within 15 days from the commencement of the mediation unless a time requirement is extended upon a good cause showing to the court or by stipulation of both parties. If the parties fail to select a mediator within the 15-day period, any party may petition the court to appoint the mediator. (b)(1) If the matter remains in dispute, the case shall be submitted to judicial arbitration pursuant to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.1 0) of Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, notwithstanding Section 1141 .11 of that code. The Civil Discovery Act of 1986 (Article 3 (commencing with Section 2016) of Chapter 3 of Title 3 of Part 4 of the Code of Civil procedure) shall apply to any proceeding brought under the subdivision consistent with the rules pertaining to judicial arbitration. (2) Notwithstanding any other provision of law, upon stipulation of the parties, arbitrators appointed for purposes of this article shall be experienced in construction law, and, upon stipulation of the parties, mediators and arbitrators shall be paid necessary and reasonable hourly rates of pay not to exceed their customary rate, and such fees and expenses shall be paid equally by the parties, except in the case of arbitration where the arbitrator, for good cause, determines a different division. In no event shall these fees or expenses be paid by state or county funds. (3) In addition to Chapter 2.5 (commencing with Section 1141.1 0) Title 3 of Part 3 of the Code of Civil Procedure, any party who after receiving an arbitration award requests a trial de novo but does not obtain a more favorable judgment shall, in addition to payment of costs and fees under that chapter, pay the attorney's fees of the other party arising out of the trial de novo. (c)b!he_ court may, upon request by any party, order any witnesses to participate in the mediation or ·~. ar 1trat1on process. ....,_; ft Q Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 75 of 173 Pages 20104.6. (a) No local agency shall fail to pay money as to any portion of a claim which is undisputed except as otherwise provided in the contract. (b) In any suit filed under Section 20104.4, the local agency shall pay interest at the legal rate on any arbitration award or judgment. The interest shall begin to accrue on the date the suit is filed in a court of law. Although not to be construed as proceeding under extra work provisions, the Contractor shall keep and furnish records of disputed work in accordance with Section 3-3. SECTION 4-CONTROL OF MATERIALS 4-1 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP. 4-1.1. General. All materials, parts, and equipment furnished by the Contractor in the Work shall be new, high grade, and free from defects. Quality of work shall be in accordance with the generally accepted standards. Material and work quality shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. Materials and work quality not conforming to the requirements of the Specifications shall be consid- ered defective and will be subject to rejection. Defective work or material, whether in place or not, shall be removed immediately from the site by the Contractor, at its expense, when so directed by the Engineer. If the Contractor fails to replace any defective or damaged work or material after reasonable notice, the Engineer may cause such work or materials to be replaced. The replacement expense will be deducted from the amount to be paid to the Contractor. Used or secondhand materials, parts, and equipment may be used only if permitted by the Specifica- tions. 4-1.2 Protection of Work and Materials. The Contractor shall provide and maintain storage facili- ties and employ such measures as will preserve the specified quality and fitness of materials to be used in the Work. Stored materials shall be reasonably accessible for inspection. The Contractor shall also adequately protect new and existing work and all items of equipment for the duration of the Con- tract. The Contractor shall not, without the Agency's consent, assign, sell, mortgage, hypothecate, or re- move equipment or materials which have been installed or delivered and which may be necessary for the completion of the Contract. 4-1.3 Inspection Requirements. 4-1.3.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, inspection is required at the source for such typical ma- terials and fabricated items as bituminous paving mixtures, structural concrete, metal fabrication, metal casting, welding, concrete pipe manufacture, protective coating application, and similar shop or plant operations. Steel pipe in sizes less than 18 inches and vitrified clay and cast iron pipe in all sizes are acceptable upon certification as to compliance with the Specifications, subject to sampling and testing by the Agency. Standard items of equipment such as electric motors, conveyors, elevators, plumbing fixtures, etc., are subject to inspection at the job site only. Special items of equipment such as designed elec- trical panel boards, large pumps, sewage plant equipment, etc., are subject to inspection at the source, ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 76 of 173 Pages normally only for performance testing. The Specifications may require inspection at the source for other items not typical of those listed in this section. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer free and safe access to any and all parts of work at any time. Such free and safe access shall include means of safe access and egress, ventilation, lighting, shoring, dewatering and all elements pertaining to the safety of persons as contained in the State of California, California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Industrial Relations, Chapter 4, Division of Industrial Safety, Subchapter 4, Construction Safety Orders and such other safety regulations as may apply. Contractor shall furnish Engineer with such information as may be necessary to keep the Engineer fully informed regarding progress and manner of work and character of materials. Inspection or testing of the whole or any portion of the work or materials incorporated in the work shall not relieve Contractor from any obligation to fulfill this Contract. 4-1.3.2 Inspection of Materials Not Locally Produced. When the Contractor intends to purchase materials, fabricated products, or equipment from sources located more than 50 miles outside the geographical limits of the Agency, an inspector or accredited testing laboratory (approved by the En- gineer), shall be engaged by the Contractor at its expense, to inspect the materials, equipment or process. This approval shall be obtained before producing any material or equipment. The inspector or representative of the testing laboratory shall judge the materials by the requirements of the Plans and Specifications. The Contractor shall forward reports required by the Engineer. No material or equipment shall be shipped nor shall any processing, fabrication or treatment of such materials be done without proper inspection by the approved agent. Approval by said agent shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for complying with the Contract requirements. 4-1.3.3 Inspection by the Agency. The Agency will provide all inspection and testing laboratory ser-~ vices within 50 miles of the geographical limits of the Agency. For private contracts, all costs of in-......,; spection at the source, including salaries and mileage costs, shall be paid by the permittee. 4-1.4 Test of Material. Before incorporation in the Work, the Contractor shall submit samples of materials, as the Engineer may require, at no cost to the Agency. The Contractor, at its expense, shall deliver the materials for testing to the place and at the time designated by the Engineer. Unless oth- erwise provided, all initial testing will be performed under the direction of the Engineer, and at no expense to the Contractor. If the Contractor is to provide and pay for testing, it will be stated in the Specifications. For private contracts, the testing expense shall be borne by the permittee. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing, at least 15 days in advance, of its intention to use materials for which tests are specified, to allow sufficient time to perform the tests. The notice shall name the proposed supplier and source of material. If the notice of intent to use is sent before the materials are available for testing or inspection, or is sent so far in advance that the materials on hand at the time will not last but will be replaced by a new lot prior to use on the Work, it will be the Contractor's responsibility to renotify the Engineer when samples which are representative may be obtained. Except as specified in these Provisions, the Agency will bear the cost of testing of locally produced materials and/or on-site workmanship where the results of such tests meet or exceed the requirements indicated in the Standard Specifications, Technical Specification, and any Supplemental Provisions. The cost of all other tests shall be borne by the Contractor. At the option of the Engineer, the source of supply of each of the materials shall be approved by the ~ Engineer before the delivery is started. All materials proposed for use may be inspected or tested at any time during their preparation and use. If, after incorporating such materials into the Work, it is found that sources of supply that have been approved do not furnish a uniform product, or if the prod- uct from any source proves unacceptable at any time, the Contractor shall furnish approved material from other approved sources. If any product proves unacceptable after improper storage, handling or for any other reason it shall be rejected, not incorporated into the work and shall be removed from the project site all at the Contractor's expense. Compaction tests may be made by the Engineer and all costs for tests that meet or exceed the re- quirements of the specifications shall be borne by the Agency. Said tests may be made at any place along the work as deemed necessary by the Engineer. The costs of any retests made necessary by noncompliance with the specifications shall be borne by the Contractor. 4-1.5 Certification. The Engineer may waive materials testing requirements of the Specifications and accept the manufacturer's written certification that the materials to be supplied meet those re- quirements. Material test data may be required as part of the certification. 4-1.6 Trade Names or Equals. The Contractor may supply any of the materials specified or offer an equivalent. The Engineer shall determine whether the material offered is equivalent to that speci- fied. Adequate time shall be allowed for the Engineer to make this determination. Whenever any particular material, process, or equipment is indicated by patent, proprietary or brand name, or by name of manufacturer, such wording is used for the purpose of facilitating its description and shall be deemed to be followed by the words or equal. A listing of materials is not intended to be comprehensive, or in order of preference. The Contractor may offer any material, process, or equip- ment considered to be equivalent to that indicated. The substantiation of offers shall be submitted as provided in the contract documents. The Contractor shall, at its expense, furnish data concerning items offered by it as equivalent to those specified. The Contractor shall have the material tested as required by the Engineer to determine that the quality, strength, physical, chemical, or other characteristics, including durability, finish, efficiency, dimensions, service, and suitability are such that the item will fulfill its intended function. Test methods shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Test results shall be reported promptly to the Engineer, who will evaluate the results and determine if the substitute item is equivalent. The Engineer's findings shall be final. Installation and use of a substitute item shall not be made until approved by the Engineer. If a substitute offered by the Contractor is not found to be equal to the specified material, the Contractor shall furnish and install the specified material. The specified Contract completion time shall not be affected by any circumstance developing from the provisions of this section. The Contractor is responsible for the satisfactory performance of substituted items. If, in the sole opin- ion of the Engineer, the substitution is determined to be unsatisfactory in performance, appearance, durability, compatibility with associated items, availability of repair parts and suitability of application the Contractor shall remove the substituted item and replace it with the originally specified item at no cost to the Agency. 4-1.7 Weighing and Metering Equipment. All scales and metering equipment used for proportion- ing materials shall be inspected for accuracy and certified within the past 12 months by the State of California Bureau of Weights and Measures, by the County Director or Sealer of Weights and Measures, or by a scale mechanic registered with or licensed by the County. The accuracy of the work of a scale service agency, except as stated herein, shall meet the standards of the California Business and Professions Code and the California Code of Regulations pertaining to weighing devices. A certificate of compliance shall be presented, prior to operation, to the Engineer for approval and shall be renewed whenever required by the Engineer at no cost to the Agency. All scales shall be arranged so they may be read easily from the operator's platform or area. They shall indicate the true net weight without the application of any factor. The figures of the scales shall be clearly legible. Scales shall be accurate to within 1 percent when tested with the plant shut down. Weighing equipment shall be so insulated against vibration or moving of other operating equipment in the plant area that the error in weighing with the entire plant running will not exceed 2 percent for any setting nor 1.5 percent for any batch. 4-1.8 Calibration of Testing Equipment. Testing equipment, such as, but not limited to pressure gages, metering devices, hydraulic systems, force (load) measuring instruments, and strain-measur- ing devices shall be calibrated by a testing agency acceptable to the Engineer at intervals not to ex- ceed 12 months and following repairs, modification, or relocation of the equipment. Calibration certifi- cates shall be provided when requested by the Engineer. 4-1.9 Construction Materials Dispute Resolution (Soils, Rock Materials, Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials, Masonry Materials, Bituminous Materials, Rock Products, and Modified As- phalts). In the interest of safety and public value, whenever credible evidence arises to contradict the test values of materials, the Agency and the Contractor will initiate an immediate and cooperative investigation. Test values of materials are results of the materials' tests, as defined by these Specifi- cations or by the special provisions, required to accept the Work. Credible evidence is process obser- vations or test values gathered using industry accepted practices. A contradiction exists whenever test values or process observations of the same or similar materials are diverse enough such that the -~. work acceptance or performance becomes suspect. The investigation shall allow access to all test ..,..,; results, procedures, and facilities relevant to the disputed work and consider all available information and, when necessary, gather new and additional information in an attempt to determine the validity, the cause, and if necessary, the remedy to the contradiction. If the cooperative investigation reaches any resolution mechanism acceptable to both the Agency and the Contractor, the contradiction shall be considered resolved and the cooperative investigation concluded. Whenever the cooperative in- vestigation is unable to reach resolution, the investigation may then either conclude without resolution or continue by written notification of one party to the other requesting the implementation of a resolu- tion process by committee. The continuance of the investigation shall be contingent upon recipient's agreement and acknowledged in writing within 3 calendar days after receiving a request. Without acknowledgement, the investigation shall conclude without resolution. The committee shall consist of three State of California Registered Civil Engineers. Within 7 calendar days after the written request notification, the Agency and the Contractor will each select one engineer. Within 14 calendar days of the written request notification, the two selected engineers will select a third engineer. The goal in selection of the third member is to complement the professional experience of the first two engineers. Should the two engineers fail to select the third engineer, the Agency and the Contractor shall each propose 2 engineers to be the third member within 21 calendar days after the written request notifica- tion. The first two engineers previously selected shall then select one of the four proposed engineers in a blind draw. The committee shall be a continuance of the cooperative investigation and will re- consider all available information and if necessary gather new and additional information to determine the validity, the cause, and if necessary, the remedy to the contradiction. The committee will focus upon the performance adequacy of the material(s) using standard engineering principles and practices and to ensure public value, the committee may provide engineering recommendations as necessary. Unless otherwise agreed, the committee will have 30 calendar days from its formation to complete their review and submit their findings. The final resolution of the committee shall be by majority opinion, o. in writing, stamped and signed. Should the final resolution not be unanimous, the dissenter may attach a written, stamped, and signed minority opinion. Once started, the resolution process by committee shall continue to full conclusion unless: 1. Within 7 days of the formation of the committee, the Agency and the Contractor reach an ac- ceptable resolution mechanism; or 2. Within 14 days of the formation of the committee, the initiating party withdraws its written noti- fication and agrees to bear all investigative related costs thus far incurred; or 3. At any point by the mutual agreement of the Agency and the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed, the Contractor shall bear and maintain a record for all the investigative costs until resolution. Should the investigation discover assignable causes for the contradiction, the as- signable party, the Agency or the Contractor, shall bear all costs associated with the investi- gation. Should assignable causes for the contradiction extended to both parties, the investiga- tion will assign costs cooperatively with each party or when necessary, equally. Should the investigation substantiate a contradiction without assignable cause, the investigation will as- sign costs cooperatively with each party or when necessary, equally. Should the investigation be unable to substantiate a contradiction, the initiator of the investigation shall bear all investi- gative costs. All claim notification requirements of the contract pertaining to the contradiction shall be suspended until the investigation is concluded. 4-2 MATERIALS TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING AND STORAGE. The Contractor shall order, purchase, transport, coordinate delivery, accept delivery, confirm the quan- tity and quality received, prepare storage area(s), store, handle, protect, move, relocate, remove and dispose excess of all materials used to accomplish the Work. Materials shall be delivered to the site of the work only during working hours, as defined in Section 6-7.2, and shall be accompanied by bills of lading that shall clearly state for each delivery: the name of the Contractor as consignee, the project name and number, address of delivery and name of consignor and a description of the material(s) shipped. Prior to storage of any materials which have been shipped to or by the Contractor to any location within the Agency's boundaries the Contractor shall provide the Engineer a copy of lease agreements for each property where such materials are stored. The lease agreement shall clearly state the term of the lease, the description of materials allowed to be stored and shall provide for the removal of the materials and restoration of the storage site within the time allowed for the Work. All such storage shall conform to all laws and ordinances that may pertain to the materials stored and to preparation of the storage site and the location of the site on which the materials are stored. Loss, damage or deterioration of all stored materials shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Conformance to the requirements of this section, both within and outside the limits of work are a part of the Work. The Engineer shall have the right to verify the suitability of materials and their proper storage at any time during the Work. SECTION 5 -UTILITIES 5-1 LOCATION. The Agency and affected utility companies have, by a search of known records, endeavored to locate and indicate on the Plans, all utilities which exist within the limits of the work. However, the accuracy and/or completeness of the nature, size and/or location of utilities indicated on the Plans is not guaranteed. Where underground main distribution conduits such as water, gas, sewer, electric power, telephone, or cable television are shown on the Plans, the Contractor shall assume that every property parcel will be served by a service connection for each type of utility. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 80 of 173 Pages As provided in Section 4216 of the California Government Code, at least 2 working days prior to com- mencing any excavation, the Contractor shall contact the regional notification center (Underground Service Alert of Southern California) and obtain an inquiry identification number. The California Department of Transportation is not required by Section 4216 to become a member of the regional notification center. The Contractor shall contact it for location of its subsurface installa- tions. The Contractor shall determine the location and depth of all utilities, including service connections, which have been marked by the respective owners and which may affect or be affected by its opera- tions. If no pay item is provided in the Contract for this work, full compensation for such work shall be considered as included in the prices bid for other items of work. 5-2 PROTECTION. The Contractor shall not interrupt the service function or disturb the support of any utility without authority from the owner or order from the Agency. All valves, switches, vaults, and meters shall be maintained readily accessible for emergency shutoff. Where protection is required to ensure support of utilities located as shown on the Plans or in accord- ance with Section 5-1, the Contractor shall, unless otherwise provided, furnish and place the neces- sary protection at its expense. Upon learning of the existence and location of any utility omitted from or shown incorrectly on the Plans, the Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer in writing. When authorized by the Engi- neer, support or protection of the utility will be paid for as provided in Section 3-2.2.3 or 3-3. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer and the utility owner if any utility is disturbed or damaged. The Contractor shall bear the costs of repair or replacement of any utility damaged if located ~ as noted in Section 5-1 . """""' When placing concrete around or contiguous to any non-metallic utility installation, the Contractor shall at its expense: 1. Furnish and install a 2 inch cushion of expansion joint material or other similar resilient material; or 2. Provide a sleeve or other opening which will result in a 2 inch minimum-clear annular space between the concrete and the utility; or 3. Provide other acceptable means to prevent embedment in or bonding to the concrete. Where concrete is used for backfill or for structures which would result in embedment, or partial em- bedment, of a metallic utility installation; or where the coating, bedding or other cathodic protection system is exposed or damaged by the Contractor's operations, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer and arrange to secure the advice of the affected utility owner regarding the procedures required to maintain or restore the integrity of the system. 5-3 REMOVAL. Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor shall remove all interfering portions of utilities shown on the Plans or indicated in the Bid documents as "abandoned" or ''to be abandoned in place". Before starting removal operations, the Contractor shall -ascertain from the Agency whether the abandonment is complete, and the costs involved in the removal and disposal shall be included in the Bid for the items of work necessitating such removals. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 81 of 173 Pa es 5·4 RELOCATION. When feasible, the owners responsible for utilities within the area affected by the Work will complete their necessary installations, relocations, repairs, or replacements before com- mencement of work by the Contractor. After award of the Contract, portions of utilities which are found to interfere with the Work will be relocated, altered or reconstructed by the owners, or the Engineer may order changes in the Work to avoid interference. Such changes will be paid for in accordance with Section 3-2. When the Plans or Specifications provide for the Contractor to alter, relocate, or reconstruct a utility, all costs for such work shall be included in the Bid for the items of work necessitating such work. Temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of utilities requested by the Contractor for its conven- ience shall be its responsibility and it shall make all arrangements and bear all costs. The utility owner will relocate service connections as necessary within the limits of the Work or within temporary construction or slope easements. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall ar- range for the relocation of service connections as necessary between the meter and property line, or between a meter and the limits of temporary construction or slope easements. The relocation of such service connections will be paid for in accordance with provisions of Section 3-3. Payment will include the restoration of all existing improvements which may be affected thereby. The Contractor may agree with the owner of any utility to disconnect and reconnect interfering service connections. The Agency will not be involved in any such agreement. In conformance with Section 5-6 the Contractor shall coordinate the work with utility agencies and companies. Prior to the installation of any and all utility structures within the limits of work by any utility agency or company, or its contractor, the Contractor shall place all curb or curb and gutter that is a part of the work and adjacent to the location where such utility structures are shown on the plans and are noted as being located, relocated or are otherwise shown as installed by others. In order to mini- mize delays to the Contractor caused by the failure of other parties to relocate utilities that interfere with the construction, the Contractor, upon the Engineer's approval, may be permitted to temporarily omit the portion of work affected by the utility. If such temporary omission is approved by the Engineer the Contractor shall place survey or other physical control markers sufficient to locate the curb or curb and gutter to the satisfaction of the utility agency or company. Such temporary omission shall be for the Contractor's convenience and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore or for addi- tional work, materials or delay associated with the temporary omission. The portion thus omitted shall be constructed by the Contractor immediately following the relocation of the utility involved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. 5·5 DELAYS. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of its construction schedule insofar as it affects the protection, removal, or relocation of utilities. Said notification shall be included as a part of the construction schedule required in Section 6-1. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing of any subsequent changes in the construction schedule which will affect the time available for pro- tection, removal, or relocation of utilities. The Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment for delays attributable to utility relocations or alterations if correctly located, noted, and completed in accordance with Section 5-1. The Contractor may be given an extension of time for unforeseen delays attributable to unreasonably protracted interference by utilities in performing work correctly shown on the Plans. The Agency will assume responsibility for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of existing main or trunkline utility facilities within the area affected by the Work if such utilities are not identified in the Contract Documents. The Contractor will not be assessed liquidated damages for any delay caused by failure of Agency to provide for the timely removal, relocation, or protection of such existing facilities. If the Contractor sustains loss due to delays attributable to interferences, relocations, or alterations not covered by Section 5-1 , which could not have been avoided by the judicious handling of forces, equipment, or plant, there shall be paid to the Contractor such amount as the Engineer may find to be fair and reasonable compensation for such part of the Contractor's actual loss as was unavoidable and the Contractor may be granted an extension of time. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 82 of 173 Pages 5-6 COOPERATION. When necessary, the Contractor shall so conduct its operations as to permit access to the Work site and provide time for utility work to be accomplished during the progress of the Work. SECTION 6 -PROSECUTION, PROGRESS, AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK 6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF WORK. Except as otherwise provided herein and unless otherwise prohibited by permits from other agencies as may be required by law the Contractor shall begin work within 10 calendar days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed". 6-1.1 Pre-Construction Meeting. After, or upon, notification of contract award, the Engineer will set the time and location for the Preconstruction Meeting. Attendance of the Contractor's management personnel responsible for the management, administration, and execution of the project is mandatory for the meeting to be convened. Failure of the Contractor to have the Contractor's responsible project personnel attend the Preconstruction Meeting will be grounds for default by Contractor per Section 6- 4. No separate payment will be made for the Contractor's attendance at the meeting. The notice to proceed will only be issued on or after the completion of the preconstruction meeting. 6-1.1.1 Baseline Construction Schedule Submittal. The Contractor shall submit the Baseline Con- struction Schedule per the submittal requirements of Section 2-5.3. The submittal of the Baseline Construction Schedule shall include each item and element of Sections 6-1.2 through 6-1.2.9 and shall be on hard (paper) copy and electronic media conforming to Section 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media. 6-1.2 Preparation and Review of the Baseline Construction Schedule. The Contractor shall pre- pare the Baseline Construction Schedule as a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule in the precedence ~ diagram method (activity-on-node) format. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall depict a work-..,.,_; able plan showing the sequence, duration, and interdependence of all activities required to represent the complete performance of all project work as well as periods where work is precluded. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall begin with the projected date of issuance of the notice to proceed and conclude with the date of final completion per the contract duration. The Baseline Construction Sched- ule shall include detail of all project phasing, staging, and sequencing, including all milestones neces- sary to define beginning and ending of each phase or stage. 6-1.2.1 Time-Scaled Network Diagram. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Con- tractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a complete time-scaled network diagram showing all of the activities, logic relationships, and milestones comprising the schedule. 6-1.2.2 Tabular Listing. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a tabular listing of all of the activities, showing for each activity the identi- fication number, the description, the duration, the early start, the early finish, the late start, the late finish, the total float, and all predecessor and successor activities for the activity described. 6-1.2.3 Bar Chart. As a part of the Baseline Construction Schedule the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a chart showing individual tasks and their durations arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path. 6-1.2.4 Schedule Software. The Contractor shall use commercially available software equal to the Windows 2000 compatible "Suretrak'' program by Primavera or "Project'' program by Microsoft Corpo- ration to prepare the Baseline Construction Schedule and all updates thereto. The Contractor shall ~ submit to the Agency a CD-ROM data disk with all network information contained thereon, in a format ......, ft '-1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 83 of 173 Pages readable by a Microsoft Windows 2000 system. The Agency will use a "Suretrak", "Project" or equal software program for review of the Contractor's schedule. Should the Contractor elect to use a sched- uling program other than the "Suretrak" program by Primavera or "Project" program by Microsoft Cor- poration the Contractor shall provide the Engineer three copies of the substituted program that are fully licensed to the Agency and 32 class hours of on-site training by the program publisher for up to eight Agency staff members. The classes shall be presented on Mondays through Thursdays, inclu- sive, between the hours of 8:00a.m. and 5:00p.m. The on-site training shall be held at 1635 Faraday Avenue, Carlsbad, California. The dates and times of the on-site training shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval five working days before the start of the on-site training. The on-site training shall be completed prior to the submittal of the first Baseline Construction Schedule. 6-1.2.5 Schedule Activities. Except for submittal activities, activity durations shall not be shorter than 1 working day nor longer than 15 working days, unless specifically and individually allowed by the Engineer. The Baseline Construction Schedule shall include between 1 00 and 500 activities, in- cluding submittals, interfaces between utility companies and other agencies, project milestones and equipment and material deliveries. The number of activities will be sufficient, in the judgment of the Engineer, to communicate the Contractor's plan for project execution, to accurately describe the pro- ject work, and to allow monitoring and evaluation of progress and of time impacts. Each activity's description shall accurately define the work planned for the activity and each activity shall have rec- ognizable beginning and end points. 6-1.2.6 Float. Float or slack time within the schedule is available without charge or compensation to whatever party or contingency first exhausts it. 6-1.2.7 Restraints to Activities. Any submittals, utility interfaces, or any furnishing of Agency sup- plied materials, equipment, or services, which may impact any activity's construction shall be shown as a restraint to those activities. Time periods to accommodate the review and correction of submittals shall be included in the schedule. 6-1.2.8 Late Completion. A Baseline Construction Schedule showing a project duration longer than the specified contract duration will not be acceptable and will be grounds for determination of default by Contractor, per Section 6-4. 6-1.2.9 Early Completion. The Baseline Construction Schedule will show the Contractor's plan to support and maintain the project for the entire contractual time span of the project. Should the Con- tractor propose a project duration shorter than contract duration, a complete Baseline Construction Schedule must be submitted, reflecting the shorter duration, in complete accordance with all schedule requirements of Section 6-1. The Engineer may choose to accept the Contractor's proposal of a project duration shorter than the duration specified; provided the Agency is satisfied the shortened Baseline Construction Schedule is reasonable and the Agency and all other entities, public and pri- vate, which interface with the project are able to support the provisions of the shortened Baseline Construction Schedule. The Agency's acceptance of a shortened duration project will be confirmed through the execution of a contract change order revising the project duration and implementing all contractual requirements including liquidated damages in accordance with the revised duration. 6-1.2.10 Engineer's Review. The Construction Schedule is subject to the review of the Engineer. The Engineer's determination that the Baseline Construction Schedule proposed by the Contractor com- plies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions shall be a condition precedent to issu- ance of the Notice to Proceed by the Engineer. If the Engineer determines that the Construction Schedule does not meet the requirements of these specifications the Contractor shall correct the Con- struction Schedule to meet these specifications and resubmit it to the Engineer. Failure of the Con- tractor to obtain the Engineer's determination that the initial Construction Schedule proposed by the ft ~'Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 84 of 173 Pages Contractor complies with the requirements of these supplemental provisions within thirty (30) working days after the date of the preconstruction meeting shall be grounds for termination of the contract per Section 6-4. Days used by the Engineer to review the initial Construction Schedule will not be included in the 30 working days. The Engineer will review and return to the Contractor, with any comments, the Baseline Construction Schedule within 15 working days of submittal. The Baseline Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per Sections 6-1.2.1 0.1 through 6-1.2.1 0.3. 6-1.2.10.1 "Accepted." The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the No- tice to Proceed, and will receive payment for the schedule in accordance with Section 6-1 .8.1 . 6-1.2.1 0.2 "Accepted with Comments." The Contractor may proceed with the project work upon issuance of the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the comments prior to receipt of payment per Section 6-1.8.1 . 6-1.2.10.3 "Not Accepted." The Contractor must resubmit the schedule incorporating the corrections and changes of the comments prior to receipt of payment per Section 6-1.8.1. The Notice to Proceed will not be issued by the Engineer if the changes of the comments are not submitted as required hereinbefore and marked "Accepted" or "Accepted with Comments" by the Engineer. The Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer, may be considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of Section 6-4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not sub- mitted as required hereinbefore and marked "Accepted" by the Engineer. 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions. The Contractor shall meet with the Engi- neer during the last week of each month to agree upon each activity's schedule status and shall submit ~.. ,' monthly updates of the Baseline Construction Schedule confirming the agreements no later than the ·.....,/ fifth working day of the following month. The monthly update will be submitted on hard (paper) copy and electronic media conforming to Section 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media per the submittal requirements of Section 2-5.3 and will include each item and element of Sections 6-1.2 through 6-1.2.9 and 6-1.3.1 through 6-1.3.7. 6-1.3.1 Actual Activity Dates. The actual dates each activity was started and/or completed during the month. After first reporting an actual date, the Contractor shall not change that actual date in later updates without specific notification to the Engineer with the update. 6-1.3.2 Activity Percent Complete. For each activity underway at the end of the month, the Con- tractor shall report the percentage determined by the Engineer as complete for the activity. 6-1.3.3 Electronic Media. The schedule data disk shall be a CD-ROM, labeled with the project name and number, the Contractor's name and the date of preparation of the schedule data disk. The sched- ule data disk shall be readable by the software specified in Section 6-1.2.4 "Schedule Software" and shall be free of file locking, encryption or any other protocol that would impede full access of all data stored on it. 6-1.3.4 List of Changes. A list of all changes made to the activities or to the interconnecting logic, with an explanation for each change. 6-1.3.5 Change Orders. Each monthly update will include the addition of the network revisions re- flecting the change orders approved in the previous month. The network revisions will be as agreed upon during the review and acceptance of the Contractor's change orders. ·:) ~ Q Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 85 of 173 Pages 6-1.3.6 Bar Chart. Each monthly update will include a chart showing individual tasks and their dura- tions arranged with the tasks on the vertical axis and duration on the horizontal axis. The bar chart shall use differing texture patterns or distinctive line types to show the critical path. 6-1.4 Engineer's Review of Updated Construction Schedule. The Engineer will review and return the Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working days of submittal. The Updated Construction Schedule will be returned marked as per Sections 6-1.4.1 through 6-1.4.3. Any Updated Construction Schedule marked "Accepted with Comments" or "Not Accepted" by the Engineer will be returned to the Contractor for correction. Upon resubmittal the En- gineer will review and return the resubmitted Updated Construction Schedule to the Contractor, with any comments, within 5 working days. Failure of the Contractor to submit a monthly updated con- struction schedule will invoke the same consequences as the Engineer returning a monthly updated construction schedule marked "Not Accepted". 6-1.4.1 "Accepted." The Contractor may proceed with the project work, and will receive payment for the schedule in accordance with Section 6-1.8.2. 6-1.4.2 "Accepted with Comments." The Contractor may proceed with the project work. The Con- tractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the correc- tions and changes noted in the Engineer's comments prior to receipt of payment per Section 6-1.8.2. 6-1.4.3 "Not Accepted." The Contractor must resubmit the Updated Construction Schedule to the Engineer incorporating the corrections and changes noted in the Engineer's comments prior to receipt of payment per Section 6-1.8.2. The Contractor, at the sole option of the Engineer, may be considered as having defaulted the contract under the provisions of Section 6-4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR if the changes of the comments are not submitted and marked "Accepted" by the Engineer before the last day of the month in which the Updated Construction Schedule is due. If the Contractor fails to submit the corrected Updated Construction Schedule as required herein the Contractor may elect to proceed with the project at its own risk. Should the Contractor elect not to proceed with the project, any resulting delay, impact, or disruption to the project will be the Contractor's responsibility. 6-1.5 Late Completion or Milestone Dates. Should the Schedule Update indicate a completion or contractually required milestone date later than the properly adjusted contract or milestone duration, the Agency may withhold Liquidated Damages for the number of days late. Should a subsequent "Accepted" Schedule Update remove all or a portion of the delay, all or the allocated portion of the previously held Liquidated Damages shall be released in the monthly payment to the Contractor im- mediately following the "Accepted" schedule. 6-1.6 Interim Revisions. Should the actual or projected progress,of the work become substantially different from that depicted in the Project Schedule, independently of and prior to the next monthly update, the Contractor will submit a revised Baseline Construction Schedule, with a list and explana- tion of each change made to the schedule. The Revised Construction Schedule will be submitted per the submittal requirements of Section 2-5.3 and per the schedule review and acceptance requirements of Section 6-1 , including but not limited to the acceptance and payment provisions. As used in this section "substantially differenf' means a time variance greater than 5 percent of the number of days of duration for the project. 6-1.7 Final Schedule Update. The Contractor shall prepare and submit a final schedule update when one hundred percent of the construction work is completed. The Contractor's Final Schedule Update must accurately represent the actual dates for all activities. The final schedule update shall be pre- pared and reviewed per Sections 6-1.3 Preparation of Schedule Updates and Revisions and 6-1 . 4 Engineer's Review of Updated Construction Schedule. Acceptance of the final schedule update is required for completion of the project and release of any and all funds retained per Section 9-3.2. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 86 of 173 Pages 6-1.8 Measurement and Payment of Construction Schedule. The Contractor's preparation, revi- sion and maintenance of the Construction Schedule are incidental to the work and no separate pay- ment will be made therefore. 6-2 PROSECUTION OF WORK. To minimize public inconvenience and possible hazard and to restore street and other work areas to their original condition and state of usefulness as soon as practicable, the Contractor shall diligently prosecute the Work to completion. If the Engineer determines that the Contractor is failing to prosecute the Work to the proper extent, the Contractor shall, upon orders from the Engineer, immediately take steps to remedy the situation. All costs of prosecuting the Work as described herein shall be included in the Contractor's Bid. Should the Contractor fail to take the necessary steps to fully accomplish said purposes, after orders of the Engineer, the Engineer may suspend the work in whole or part, until the Contractor takes said steps. As soon as possible under the provisions of the Specifications, the Contractor shall backfill all exca- vations and restore to usefulness all improvements existing prior to the start of the Work. If Work is suspended through no fault of the Agency, all expenses and losses incurred by the Con- tractor during such suspensions shall be borne by the Contractor. If the Contractor fails to properly provide for public safety, traffic, and protection of the Work during periods of suspension, the Agency may elect to do so, and deduct the cost thereof from monies due the Contractor. Such actions will not relieve the Contractor from liability. 6-2.1 Order of Work. The work to be done shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment and ma- terials, and performing all operations necessary to complete the Project Work as shown on the Pro- ject Plans and as specified in the Specifications. ...,., 6-2.3 Project Meetings. The Engineer will establish the time and location of (weekly) Project Meet- ings. The Contractor's Representative shall attend each Project Meeting. The Project Representative shall be. the individual determined under Section 7-6, ''The Contractor's Representative". No separate payment for attendance of the Contractor, the Contractor's Representative or any other employee or subcontractor or subcontractor's employee at these meetings will be made. 6-3 SUSPENSION OF WORK. 6-3.1 General. The Work may be suspended in whole or in part when determined by the Engineer that the suspension is necessary in the interest of the Agency. The Contractor shall comply immedi- ately with any written order of the Engineer. Such suspension shall be without liability to the Contractor on the part of the Agency except as otherwise specified in Section 6-6.3. 6-3.2 Archaeological and Paleontological Discoveries. If discovery is made of items of archaeo- logical or paleontological interest, the Contractor shall immediately cease excavation in the area of discovery and shall not continue until ordered by the Engineer. When resumed, excavation operations within the area of discovery shall be as directed by the Engineer. Discoveries which may be encountered may include, but not be limited to, dwelling sites, stone imple- ments or other artifacts, animal bones, human bones, and fossils. The Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of time and compensation in accordance with the provisions of Section 6-6. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 87 of 173 Pages 6-4 DEFAULT BY CONTRACTOR. If the Contractor fails to begin delivery of material and equip- ment, to commence the Work within the time specified, to maintain the rate of delivery of material, to execute the Work in the manner and at such locations as specified, or fails to maintain the Work schedule which will insure the Agency's interest, or, if the Contractor is not carrying out the intent of the Contract, the Agency may serve written notice upon the Contractor and the Surety on its Faithful Performance Bond demanding satisfactory compliance with the Contract. The Contract may be canceled by the Board without liability for damage, when in the Board's opinion the Contractor is not complying in good faith, has become insolvent, or has assigned or subcontracted any part of the Work without the Board's consent. In the event of such cancellation, the Contractor will be paid the actual amount due based on Contract Unit Prices or lump sums bid and the quantity of the Work completed at the time of cancellation, less damages caused to the Agency by acts of the Con- tractor. The Contractor, in having tendered a Bid, shall be deemed to have waived any and all claims for damages because of cancellation of Contract for any such reason. If the Agency declares the Contract canceled for any of the above reasons, written notice to that effect shall be served upon the Surety. The Surety shall, within five (5) days, assume control and perform the Work as successor to the Contractor. If the Surety assumes any part of the Work, it shall take the Contractor's place in all respects for that part, and shall be paid by the Agency for all work performed by it in accordance with the Contract. If the Surety assumes the entire Contract, all money due the Contractor at the time of its default shall be payable to the Surety as the Work progresses, subject to the terms of the Contract. If the Surety does not assume control and perform the Work within 5 days after receiving notice of cancellation, or fails to continue to comply, the Agency may exclude the Surety from the premises. The Agency may then take possession of all material and equipment and complete the Work by Agency forces, by letting the unfinished Work to another Contractor, or by a combination of such methods. In any event, the cost of completing the Work shall be charged against the Contractor and its Surety and may be deducted from any money due or becoming due from the Agency. If the sums due under the Contract are insufficient for completion, the Contractor or Surety shall pay to the Agency within 5 days after the completion, all costs in excess of the sums due. The provisions of this section shall be in addition to all other rights and remedies available to the Agency under law. 6-5 TERMINATION OF CONTRACT. The Board may terminate the Contract at its own discretion or when conditions encountered during the Work make it impossible or impracticable to proceed, or when the Agency is prevented from proceeding with the Contract by act of God, by law, or by official action of a public authority. 6-6 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME. 6-6.1 General. If delays are caused by unforeseen events beyond the control of the Contractor, such delays will entitle the Contractor to an extension of time as provided herein, but the Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays, except as provided in 6-6.3. Such unforeseen events may include: war, government regulations, labor disputes, strikes, fires, floods, adverse weather or elements necessitating cessation of work, inability to obtain materials, labor or equipment, required extra work, or other specific events as may be further described in the Specifica- tions. No extension of time will be granted for a delay caused by the Contractor's inability to obtain materials unless the Contractor furnishes to the Engineer documentary proof. The proof must be provided in a n---nn -" .. 7,., n .... ,.. ........ timely manner in accordance with the sequence of the Contractor's operations and the approved con- struction schedule. If delays beyond the Contractor's control are caused by events other than those mentioned above, the Engineer may deem an extension of time to be in the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor will not be entitled to damages or additional payment due to such delays, except as provided in Section 6-6.3. If delays beyond the Contractor's control are caused solely by action or inaction by the Agency, such delays will entitle the Contractor to an extension of time as provided in Section 6-6.2. 6-6.2 Extensions of Time. Extensions of time, when granted, will be based upon the effect of delays to the Work. They will not be granted for noncontrolling delays to minor portions of the Work unless it can be shown that such delays did or will delay the progress of the Work. 6·6.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor. The Contractor will be compensated for damages in- curred due to delays for which the Agency is responsible. Such actual costs will be determined by the Engineer. The Agency will not be liable for damages which the Contractor could have avoided by any reasonable means, such as judicious handling of forces, equipment, or plant. The determination of what damages the Contractor could have avoided will be made by the Engineer. 6-6.4 Written Notice and Report. The Contractor shall provide written notice to the Engineer within two hours of the beginning of any period that the Contractor has placed any workers or equipment on standby for any reason that the Contractor has determined to be caused by the Agency or by any organization that the Agency may otherwise be obligated by. The Contractor shall provide continuing daily written notice to the Engineer, each working day, throughout the duration of such period of delay. The initial and continuing written notices shall include the classification of each workman and super- visor and the make and model of each piece of equipment placed on standby, the cumulative duration of the standby, the Contractor's opinion of the cause of the delay and a cogent explanation of why the Contractor could not avoid the delay by reasonable means. Should the Contractor fail to provide the notice(s) required by this section the Contractor agrees that no delay has occurred and that it will not submit any claim(s) therefore. 6-7 TIME OF COMPLETION. 6-7.1 General. The Contractor shall complete the Work within the time set forth in the Contract. The Contractor shall complete each portion of the Work within such time as set forth in the Contract for such portion. The time of completion of the Contract shall be expressed in working days. The Con- tractor shall diligently prosecute the work to completion within 176 working days after the starting date specified in the Notice to Proceed. 6-7.2 Working Day. A working day is any day within the period between the start of the Contract time as defined in Section 6-1 and the date provided for completion, or upon field acceptance by the Engineer for all work provided for in the Contract, whichever occurs first, other than: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Saturday, Sunday, any day designated as a holiday by the Agency, any other day designated as a holiday in a Master Labor Agreement entered into by the Con- tractor or on behalf of the Contractor as an eligible member of a contractor association, any day the Contractor is prevented from working at the beginning of the workday for cause as defined in Section 6-6.1 , any day the Contractor is prevented from working during the first 5 hours with at least 60 per-~ cent of the normal work force for cause as defined in Section 6-6.1. ....._, ft ~~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 89 of 173 Pages Unless otherwise approved in writing by the Engineer, the hours of work shall be between the hours of 7:00 a.m. and 4:00 p.m. on Mondays through Fridays, excluding Agency holidays. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval of the Engineer if the Contractor desires to work outside said hours or at any time during weekends and/or holidays. This written permission must be obtained at least 48 hours prior to such work The Engineer may approve work outside the hours and/or days stated herein when, in his/her sole opinion, such work conducted by the Contractor is beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. The Contractor shall pay the inspection costs of such work. 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting. The Engineer will make a daily determination of each working day to be charged against the Contract time. These determinations will be discussed and the Con- tractor will be furnished a periodic statement showing allowable number of working days of Contract time, as adjusted, at the beginning of the reporting period. The statement will also indicate the number of working days charged during the reporting period and the number of working days of Contract time remaining. If the Contractor does not agree with the statement, it shall file a written protest within 15 days after receipt, setting forth the facts of the protest. Otherwise, the statement will be deemed to have been accepted. 6-8 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND WARRANTY. The Work will be inspected by the Engi- neer for acceptance upon receipt of the Contractor's written assertion that the Work has been com- pleted. The Engineer will not accept the Work or any portion of the Work before all of the Work is completed and all outstanding deficiencies that may exist are corrected by the Contractor and the Engineer is satisfied that all the materials and workmanship, and all other features of the Work, meet the require- ments of all of the specifications for the Work. Use, temporary, interim or permanent, of all, or portions of, the Work does not constitute acceptance of the Work. If, in the Engineer's judgment, the Work has been completed and is ready for acceptance the Engineer will so certify to the Board. Upon such certification by the Engineer the Board may accept the completed Work. Upon the Board's acceptance of the Work the Engineer will cause a "Notice of Completion" to be filed in the office of the San Diego County Recorder. The date of recordation shall be the date of completion of the Work. All work shall be warranted for one (1) year after recordation of the "Notice of Completion" and any faulty work or materials discovered during the warranty period shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor, at its expense. Twenty-five percent of the faithful performance bond shall be retained as a warranty bond for the one year warranty period. The Contractor shall replace or repair any such defective work in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer, after notice to do so from the Engineer, and within the time specified in the notice. If the Contractor fails to make such replacement or repairs within the time specified in the notice, the Agency may perform this work and the Contractor's sureties shall be liable for the cost thereof. 6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. Failure of the Contractor to complete the Work within the time al- lowed will result in damages being sustained by the Agency. For each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time specified for completion of Work, as adjusted in accordance with Section 6-6, the Contractor shall pay the Agency, or have withheld monies due it, the sum of One Thousand Five Hundred Dollars ($1 ,500.00). Such sum is liquidated damages and shall not be construed as a penalty, and may be deducted from payments due the Contractor if such delay occurs. Execution of the Contract shall constitute agreement by the Agency and Contractor that One Thou- sand Five Hundred Dollars ($1 ,500.00) per day is the minimum value of costs and actual damages caused by the Contractor to complete the Work within the allotted time. Any progress payments made after the specified completion date shall not constitute a waiver of this paragraph or of any damages. 6-10 USE OF IMPROVEMENT DURING CONSTRUCTION. The Agency reserves the right to take over and utilize all or part of any completed facility or appurtenance. The Contractor will be notified in writing in advance of such action. Such action by the Agency will relieve the Contractor of responsibility for injury or damage to said completed portions of the improvement resulting from use by public traffic ft ~.,Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 90 of 173 Pages or from the action of the elements or from any other cause, except Contractor operations or negli- gence. The Contractor will not be required to reclean such portions of the improvement before field acceptance, except for cleanup made necessary by its operations. Nothing in this section shall be construed as relieving the Contractor from full responsibility for correcting defective work or materials. In the event the Agency exercises its right to place into service and utilize all or part of any completed facility or appurtenance, the Agency will assume the responsibility and liability for injury to persons or property resulting from the utilization of the facility or appurtenance so placed into service, except for any such injury to persons or property caused by any willful or negligent act or omission by the Con- tractor, Subcontractor, their officers, employees, or agents. SECTION 7-RESPONSIBILITIES OF THE CONTRACTOR 7-1 CONTRACTOR'S EQUIPMENT AND FACILITIES. The Contractor shall furnish and maintain in good condition all equipment and facilities as required for the proper execution and inspection of the Work. Such equipment and facilities shall meet all requirements of applicable ordinances and laws. 7-2 LABOR. 7-2.1 General. Only competent workers shall be employed on the Work. Any person employed who is found to be incompetent, intemperate, troublesome, disorderly, or otherwise objectionable, or who fails or refuses to perform work properly and acceptably, shall be immediately removed from the Work by the Contractor and not be reemployed on the Work. 7-2.2 Laws. The Contractor, its agents, and employees shall be bound by and comply with applica- ble provisions of the Labor Code and Federal, State, and local laws related to labor. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the provisions of the Labor Code regarding minimum wages; the 8-hour day and 40-hour week; overtime; Saturday, Sunday, and holiday work; and nondiscrimina- tion because of race, color, national origin, sex, or religion. The Contractor shall forfeit to the Agency the penalties prescribed in the Labor Code for violations. In accordance with the Labor Code, the Board has on file and will publish a schedule of prevailing wage rates for the types of work to be done under the Contract. The Contractor shall not pay less than these rates. Each worker shall be paid subsistence and travel as required by the collective bargaining agreement on file with the State of California Department of Industrial Relations. The Contractor's attention is directed to Section 1776 of the Labor Code which imposes responsibility upon the Contractor for the maintenance, certification, and availability for inspection of such records for all persons employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in connection with the project. The Con- tractor shall agree through the Contract to comply with this Section and the remaining provisions of the Labor Code. 7-3 LIABILITY INSURANCE. Insurance shall be required as specified in section 10 of the Public Works Contract. The cost of this insurance shall be included in the Contractor's Bid. ft ~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 91 of 173 Pages 7-4 WORKERS' COMPENSATION INSURANCE. Before execution of the Contract by the Board, the Contractor shall file with the Engineer the following signed certification: "I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for workers' compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this contract." The Contractor shall also comply with Section 3800 of the Labor Code by securing, paying for, and maintaining in full force and effect for the duration of the contract, complete Workers' Compensation Insurance, and shall furnish a Certificate of Insurance to the Engineer before execution of the Contract. The Agency, its officers, or employees, will not be responsible for any claims in law or equity occa- sioned by failure of the Contractor to comply with this paragraph. All compensation insurance policies shall bear an endorsement or shall have attached a rider whereby it is provided that, in the event of expiration or proposed cancellation of such policies for any reason whatsoever, the Agency shall be notified by registered mail not less than 30 days before expiration or cancellation is effective. All insurance is to be placed with insurers that are admitted and authorized to conduct business in the state of California and are listed in the official publication of the Department of Insurance of the State of California. Policies issued by the State Compensation Fund meet the requirement for workers' compensation insurance. 7-5 PERMITS. Except as specified herein the Contractor will obtain, at no cost to the Contractor all City of Carlsbad encroachment, right-of-way, grading and building permits necessary to perform work for this contract on Agency property, streets, or other rights-of-way. Contractor shall not begin work until all permits incidental to the work are obtained. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits for the disposal of all materials removed from the project. The cost of said permit(s) shall be included in the price bid for the appropriate bid item and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all costs incurred for permits necessitated by its operations such as, but not limited to, those permits required for night work, overload, blasting, and demolition. For private contracts, the Contractor shall obtain all permits incidental to the Work or made necessary by its operations, and pay all costs incurred by the permit requirements. The Contractor shall pay all business taxes or license fees that are required for the work. 7-5.1 Resource Agency Permits. 7-6 THE CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE. Before starting work, the Contractor shall desig- nate in writing a representative who shall have complete authority to act for it. An alternative repre- sentative may be designated as well. The representative or alternate shall be present at the Work site whenever work is in progress or whenever actions of the elements necessitate its presence to take measures necessary to protect the Work, persons, or property. Any order or communication given to this representative shall be deemed delivered to the Contractor. A joint venture shall designate only one representative and alternate. In the absence of the Contractor or its representative, instructions or directions may be given by the Engineer to the superintendent or person in charge of the specific work to which the order applies. Such order shall be complied with promptly and referred to the Con- tractor or its representative. In order to communicate with the Agency, the Contractor's representative, superintendent, or person in charge of specific work shall be able to speak, read, and write the English language. ft ~'Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 92 of 173 Pages 7-7 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascer- taining the nature and extent of any simultaneous, collateral, and essential work by others. The Agency, its workers and contractors and others, shall have the right to operate within or adjacent to the Work site during the performance of such work. The Agency, the Contractor, and each of such workers, contractors and others, shall coordinate their operations and cooperate to minimize interference. The Contractor shall include in its Bid all costs involved as a result of coordinating its work with others. The Contractor will not be entitled to additional compensation from the Agency for damages resulting from such simultaneous, collateral, and essential work. If necessary to avoid or minimize such damage or delay, the Contractor shall redeploy its work force to other parts of the Work. Should the Contractor be delayed by the Agency, and such delay could not have been reasonably foreseen or prevented by the Contractor, the Engineer will determine the extent of the delay, the effect on the project, and any extension of time. 7-7.1 Coordination. The Contractor shall coordinate and cooperate with all the utility companies during the relocation or construction of their lines. The Contractor may be granted a time extension if, in the opinion of the Engineer, a delay is caused by the utility company. No additional compensa- tion will be made to the Contractor for any such delay. 7-8 PROJECT SITE MAINTENANCE. 7-8.1 Cleanup and Dust Control. Throughout all phases of construction, including suspension of work, and until the final acceptance, the Contractor shall keep the site clean and free from rubbish and debris. The Contractor shall also abate dust nuisance by cleaning, sweeping and sprinkling with "::) water, or other means as necessary. The use of water resulting in mud on public streets will not be permitted as a substitute for sweeping or other methods. When required by the Plans or Specifications, the Contractor shall furnish and operate a self-loading motor sweeper with spray nozzles at least once each working day for the purpose of keeping paved areas acceptably clean wherever construction, including restoration, is incomplete. Materials and equipment shall be removed from the site as soon as they are no longer necessary. Before the final inspection, the site shall be cleared of equipment, unused materials, and rubbish so as to present a satisfactory clean and neat appearance. All cleanup costs shall be included in the Contractor's Bid. Care shall be taken to prevent spillage on haul routes. Any such spillage shall be removed immediately and the area cleaned. Excess excavation material from catch basins or similar structures shall be removed from the site immediately. Sufficient material may remain for use as backfill if permitted by the Specifications. Forms and form lumber shall be removed from the site as soon as practicable after stripping. Failure of the Contractor to comply with the Engineer's cleanup orders may result in an order to sus- pend work until the condition is corrected. No additional compensation will be allowed as a result of such suspension. Cleanup and dust control required herein shall also be executed on weekends and other non-working ,~ days when needed to preserve the health safety or welfare of the public. The Contractor shall conduct . ...._, ft "' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 93 of 173 Pages effective cleanup and dust control throughout the duration of the Contract. The Engineer may require increased levels of cleanup and dust control that, in his/her sole discretion, are necessary to preserve the health, safety and welfare of the public. Cleanup and dust control shall be considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made therefore. 7-8.2 Air Pollution Control. The Contractor shall not discharge smoke, dust, or any other air con- taminants into the atmosphere in such quantity as will violate the regulations of any legally constituted authority. 7-8.3 Vermin Control. At the time of acceptance, structures entirely constructed under the Contract shall be free of rodents, insects, vermin, and pests. Necessary extermination work shall be arranged and paid for by the Contractor as part of the Work within the Contract time, and shall be performed by a licensed exterminator in accordance with requirements of governing authorities. The Contractor shall be liable for injury to persons or property and responsible for the elimination of offensive odors result- ing from extermination operations. 7-8.4 Sanitation. The Contractor shall provide and maintain enclosed toilets for the use of employ- ees engaged in the Work. These accommodations shall be maintained in a neat and sanitary condi- tion. They shall also comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations pertaining to public health and sanitation of dwellings and camps. Wastewater shall not be interrupted. Should the Contractor disrupt existing sewer facilities, sewage shall be conveyed in closed conduits and disposed of in a sanitary sewer system. Sewage shall not be permitted to flow in trenches or be covered by backfill. 7-8.5 Temporary Light, Power, and Water. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, andre- move all temporary light, power, and water at its own expense. These include piping, wiring, lamps, and other equipment necessary for the Work. The Contractor shall not draw water from any fire hydrant (except to extinguish a fire), without obtaining permission from the water agency concerned. The Contractor shall obtain a construction meter for water used for the construction, plant establishment, maintenance, cleanup, testing and all other work requiring water related to this contract. The Con- tractor shall contact the appropriate water agency for requirements. The Contractor shall pay all costs of temporary light, power and water including hookup, service, meter and any, and all, other charges, deposits and/or fees therefore. Said costs shall be considered incidental to the items of work that they are associated with and no additional payment will be made therefore. 7-8.6 Water Pollution Control. The Contractor shall exercise every reasonable precaution to pro- tect channels, storm drains, and bodies of water from pollution. It shall conduct and schedule opera- tions so as to minimize or avoid muddying and silting of said channels, drains, and waters. Water pollution control work shall consist of constructing those facilities which may be required to provide prevention, control, and abatement of water pollution. The Contractor shall comply with the California State Water Resources Control Board (SWRCB) Or- der Number 99-08-DWQ, National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) General Permit Number CAS000002, Waste Discharge Requirements (WDR's) for Discharges of Stormwater Runoff associated with Construction Activity (General Permit) and subsequent adopted modifications and with all requirements of the Storm Water Pollution Prevention and Monitoring Plans for this project in accordance with these regulations. The Notice of Intent (NOI) shall be filed for the project. The NOI shall be filed by CMWD per require- ments of the latest NPDES Construction Permit before a Notice to Proceed is issued. ft '-'Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 94 of 173 Pages 7-8.7 Drainage Control. The Contractor shall maintain drainage within and through the work areas. Earth dams will not be permitted in paved areas. Temporary dams of sandbags, asphaltic concrete, or other acceptable material will be permitted when necessary. Such dams shall be removed from the site as soon as their use is no longer necessary. 7-8.8 Noise Control. All internal combustion engines used in the construction shall be equipped with mufflers in good repair when in use on the project with special attention to the City Noise Control Ordinance, Carlsbad Municipal Code Chapter 8.48. 7-9 PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING IMPROVEMENTS. The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of public and private property adjacent to the Work and shall exercise due caution to avoid damage to such property. The Contractor shall repair or replace all existing improvements within the right-of-way which are not designated for removal (e.g., curbs, sidewalks, driveways, fences, walls, signs, utility installations, pavement, structures, etc.) which are damaged or removed as a result of its operations. When a por- tion of a sprinkler system within the right-of-way must be removed, the remaining lines shall be capped. Repairs and replacements shall be at least equal to existing improvements and shall match them in finish and dimension. Maintenance of street and traffic signal systems that are damaged, temporarily removed or relocated shall be done in conformance with 307-1.5. Trees, lawns, and shrubbery that are not to be removed shall be protected from damage or injury. If damaged or removed due to Contractor's operations, they shall be restored or replaced in as nearly the original condition and location as is reasonably possible. Lawns shall be reseeded and covered with suitable mulch. ~ The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to occupants or owners of adjacent property to permit ..._,.1 them to salvage or relocate plants, trees, fences, sprinklers, and other improvements, within the right- of-way which are designated for removal and would be destroyed because of the Work. All costs to the Contractor for protecting, removing, and restoring existing improvements shall be in- cluded in the Bid. 7-10 PUBLIC CONVENIENCE AND SAFETY. 7-10.1 Traffic and Access. The Contractor's operations shall cause no unnecessary inconvenience. The access rights of the public shall be considered at all times. Unless otherwise authorized, traffic shall be permitted to pass through the Work, or an approved detour shall be provided. Safe and adequate pedestrian and vehicular access shall be provided and maintained to: fire hydrants; commercial and industrial establishments; churches, schools and parking lots; service stations and motels; hospitals; police and fire stations; and establishments of similar nature. Access to these facil- ities shall be continuous and unobstructed unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Safe and adequate pedestrian zones and public transportation stops, as well as pedestrian crossings of the Work at intervals not exceeding 90 m (300 feet), shall be maintained unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Vehicular access to residential driveways shall be maintained to the property line except when neces- sary construction precludes such access for reasonable periods of time. If backfill has been completed ~ "'Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 95 of 173 Pages to the extent that safe access may be provided, and the street is opened to local traffic, the Contractor shall immediately clear the street and driveways and provide and maintain access. The Contractor shall cooperate with the various parties involved in the delivery of mail and the collec- tion and removal of trash and garbage to maintain existing schedules for these services. Grading operations, roadway excavation and fill construction shall be conducted by the Contractor in a manner to provide a reasonably satisfactory surface for traffic. When rough grading is completed, the roadbed surface shall be brought to a smooth, even condition satisfactory for traffic. Unless otherwise authorized, work shall be performed in only one-half the roadway at one time. One half shall be kept open and unobstructed until the opposite side is ready for use. If one-half a street only is being improved, the other half shall be conditioned and maintained as a detour. The Contractor shall schedule the work so as to prevent damage by all traffic, including but not limited to mail delivery. The Contractor shall not schedule work so as to conflict with trash pickup. The trash hauling schedule can be obtained by calling the City's contracted waste disposal company, Coast Waste Management at 929-9417. During overlay operations, the Contractors schedule for overlay application shall be designated to provide residents and business owners whose streets are to be overlaid sufficient paved parking within an 800 foot distance from their homes or businesses. Seventy-two hours prior to the start of any construction in the public right-of-way that affects vehicular traffic and/or parking or pedestrian routes, the Contractor shall give written notification of the impend- ing disruption. For a full street closure, all residences and/or businesses on the affected street or alley shall be notified. For partial street closures, or curb, sidewalk and driveway repairs, the residences and/or businesses directly affected by the work shall be notified. The notification shall be hand delivered and shall state the date and time the work will begin and its anticipated duration. The notification shall list two telephone numbers that may be called to obtain additional information. One number shall be the Contractor's permanent office or field office and the other number shall be a 24-hour number answered by someone who is knowledgeable about the project. At least one of the phone numbers shall be in the (760) area code. An answering machine shall not be connected to either number. The notification shall also give a brief description of the work and simple instructions to the home or business owner on what they need to do to facilitate the con- struction. The Contractor shall submit the contents of the notification to the Engineer for approval. Notices shall not be distributed until approved by the Engineer. For residences, the notification shall be pre-cut in a manner that enables it to be affixed to a doorknob without adhesives. It shall be a minimum size of 3-1/2 inches by 8-1/2 inches and shall be brightly colored with contrasting printing. The material shall be equivalent in strength and durability to 65 lb. card stock. The printing on the notice shall be no smaller than 12 point. An example of such notice is provided in Appendix "A". In addition to the notifications, the contractor shall post no parking signs 48 hours in advance of the work being performed. The no parking signs shall state the date and time of parking restriction for a duration not to exceed the time necessary to complete the work at that location. Failure of the con- tractor to meet the posted date requires re-posting the no parking signs 48 hours in advance of the rescheduled work. If the work is delayed or rescheduled the no parking signs shall be removed and re-posted 48 hours in advance of the rescheduled work. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 96 of 173 Pages The preparation, materials, printing and distribution of the notifications shall be included in the contract price bid for traffic control and the Contractor will not be entitled to any additional compensation for printing and distributing these notices. The contractor shall replace all street markings and striping damaged by construction activities. The Contractor shall include in its Bid all costs for the above requirements. 7-10.2 Storage of Equipment and Materials in Public Streets. Construction materials shall not be stored in streets, roads, or highways for more than 5 days after unloading. All materials or equipment not installed or used in construction within 5 days after unloading shall be stored elsewhere by the Contractor at its expense unless authorized additional storage time. Construction equipment shall not be stored at the Work site before its actual use on the Work nor for more than 5 days after it is no longer needed. Time necessary for repair or assembly of equipment may be authorized by the Engineer. Excavated material, except that which is to be used as backfill in the adjacent trench, shall not be stored in public streets unless otherwise permitted. After placing backfill, all excess material shall be removed immediately from the site. 7-10.3 Street Closures, Detours, Barricades. The Contractor shall comply with all applicable State, County, and City requirements for closure of streets. The Contractor shall provide barriers, guards, lights, signs, temporary bridges, flag persons, and watchpersons. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with additional public safety requirements which may arise. The Contractor shall furnish and install signs and warning devices and promptly remove them upon completion of the Work. After obtaining the Engineers approval and at least 5 working days before closing, detouring, par- tially closing or reopening any street, alley or other public thoroughfare the Contractor shall notify the following: 1) The Engineer ................................................................................. . 2) Carlsbad Fire Department Dispatch .............................................. .. 3) Carlsbad Police Department Dispatch ........................................... .. 4) Carlsbad Traffic Signals Maintenance (extension 2937) ................. . 5) Carlsbad Traffic Signals Operations ............................................. .. 6) North County Transit District ........................................................ .. 7) Waste Management ....................................................................... . (760) 602-2720 (760) 931-2197 (760) 931-2197 (760) 438-2980 (760) 602-2752 (760) 967-2828 (760) 929-9400 The Contractor shall comply with their requirements. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's writ- ten approval prior to deviating from the requirements of 2) through, and including, 7) above. The Contractor shall obtain the written approval no less than five working days prior to placing any traffic control that affects bus stops. The Contractor shall secure approval, in advance, from authorities concerned for the use of any bridges proposed by it for public use. Temporary bridges shall be clearly posted as to load limit, with signs and posting conforming to current requirements covering "signs" as set forth in the Traffic Manual published by the California Department of Transportation. This manual shall also apply to the street closures, barricades, detours, lights, and other safety devices required. All costs involved shall be included in the Bid. ~ Q Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 97 of 173 Pages Traffic controls shall be in accordance with the plans, The California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (FHWA MUTCD 2003 Revision 1 , as amended for use in California) and these provisions. If any component in the traffic control system is damaged, displaced, or ceases to operate or function as specified, from any cause, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately repair said component to its original condition or replace said component and shall restore the component to its original location. In the event that the Contractor fails to install and/or maintain barricades or such other traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices as may be required herein, the Engineer may, at his/her sole option, install the traffic signs, markings, delineation or devices and charge the Con- tractor twenty dollars ($25.00) per day per traffic sign or device, or the actual cost of providing such traffic control facility, whichever is the greater. 7-10.3.1 Construction Area Signs and Control Devices. All construction traffic signs and control devices shall be maintained throughout the duration of work in good order and according to the ap- proved traffic control plan. All construction area signs shall conform to the provisions of Section 206- 7.2 et seq. All temporary reflective pavement markers shall conform to the provisions of Section 214- 5.1.et seq. All temporary reflective channelizers shall conform to the provisions of Section 214-5.2 et seq. All paint for temporary traffic striping, pavement marking, and curb marking shall conform to the provisions of Section 210-1.6 et seq. except that all temporary paint shall be rapid dry water borne conforming to Section 210-1.6 for materials and Section 310-5 et seq. For workmanship. Warning and advisory signs, lights and devices installed or placed to provide traffic control, direction and/or warning shall be furnished, installed and maintained by the Contractor. Warning and advisory signs, lights and devices shall be promptly removed by the Contractor when no longer required. Warning and advisory signs that remain in place overnight shall be stationary mounted signs. Stationary signs that warn of non-existent conditions shall be removed from the traveled way and from the view of motorists in the traveled way or shielded from the view of the traveling public during such periods that their message does not pertain to existing conditions. Care shall be used in performing excavation for signs in order to protect underground facilities. All excavation required to install stationary construction area signs shall be performed by hand methods without the use of power equipment. Warning and advisory signs that are used only during working hours may be portable signs. Portable signs shall be removed from the traveled way and shielded from the view of the traveling public during non-working hours. During the hours of darkness, as defined in Division 1, Section 280, of the California Vehicle Code, portable signs shall be illuminated or, at the option of the Contractor, shall be in conformance with the provisions in Section 206-7.2 et seq. If illuminated traffic cones rather than post-type delineators are used during the hours of darkness, they shall be affixed or covered with reflective cone sleeves as specified in CAL TRANS "Standard Specifications", except the sleeves shall be 7" long. Personal ve- hicles of the Contractor's employees shall not be parked within the traveled way, including any Section closed to public traffic. Whenever the Contractor's vehicles or equipment are parked on the shoulder within 6' of a traffic lane, the shoulder area shall be closed with fluorescent traffic cones or portable delineators placed on a taper in advance of the parked vehicles or equipment and along the edge of the pavement at not less than 25' intervals to a point not less than 25' past the last vehicle or piece of equipment. A minimum of nine (9) cones or portable delineators shall be used for the taper. A W20- 1 (Road Work Ahead) or C24 (Shoulder Work Ahead) sign shall be mounted, as required herein, on a signpost or telescoping flag tree with flags. The signpost or flag tree shall be placed where directed by the Engineer. 7-10.3.2 Maintaining Traffic. The Contractor's personnel shall not work closer than (insert minimum acceptable lateral safety buffer distance, eg. 1.8 m (6')), nor operate equipment within 0.6 m (2') from any traffic lane occupied by traffic. For equipment the (insert minimum acceptable shy distance, eg. 0.6 m (2')) shall be measured from the closest approach of any part of the equipment as it is operated and/or maneuvered in performing the work. This requirement may be waived when the Engineer has given written authorization to the reduction in clearance that is specific to the time, duration and loca- tion of such waiver, when such reduction is shown on the traffic control plans included in these contract documents, when such reduction is shown on the traffic control plans prepared by the Contractor and ft \.1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 98 of 173 Pages approved by the Engineer or for the work of installing, maintaining and removing traffic control devices. As a condition of such waiver the Engineer may require the Contractor to detour traffic, adjust the width of, or realign the adjacent traffic lane, close the adjacent traffic lane or provide barriers. During the entire construction, a minimum of two paved traffic lanes, not less than (insert appropriate minimum lane widths, e.g. 12') wide, shall be open for use by public traffic in each direction of travel. 7-10.3.3 Traffic Control System for Lane Closure. A traffic control system consists of closing traffic lanes or pedestrian walkways in accordance with the details shown on the plans, California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (FHWA MUTCD 2003 Revision 1, as amended for use in California) and provisions under "Maintaining Traffic" elsewhere in these Provisions. The provisions in this sec- tion will not relieve the Contractor from its responsibility to provide such additional devices or take such measures as may be necessary to maintain public safety. When lanes are closed for only the duration of work periods, all components of the traffic control system, except portable delineators placed along open trenches or excavation adjacent to the traveled way, shall be removed from the traveled way and shoulder at the end work period. If the Contractor so elects, said components may be stored at selected central locations, approved by the Engineer, within the limits of the right-of-way. 7-10.3.4 Traffic Control for Permanent and Temporary Traffic Striping. During traffic stripe oper- ations, traffic shall be controlled with lane closures, as provided for under "Traffic Control System for Lane Closure" of these Supplemental Provisions or by use of an alternative traffic control plan pro- posed by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall not start traffic striping operations using an alternative plan until the Contractor has submitted its plan to the Engineer and has received the Engineer's written approval of said plan. 7-10.3.5 Temporary Pavement Delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be furnished, placed, maintained and removed in accordance with the minimum standards specified in the California Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (FHWA MUTCD 2003 Revision 1, as amended for use in California) published by CAL TRANS. Whenever the work causes obliteration of pavement delineation, temporary or permanent pavement delineation shall be in place prior to opening the traveled way to public traffic. Lane line or centerline pavement delineation shall be provided at all times for traveled ways open to public traffic. All work necessary, including any required lines or marks, to establish the alignment of temporary pavement delineation shall be performed by the Contractor. When temporary pavement delineation is removed, all lines and marks used to establish the alignment of the temporary pavement delineation shall be removed by grinding. Surfaces to receive temporary pavement delineation shall be dry and free of dirt and loose material. Temporary pavement delineation shall not be applied over existing pavement delineation or other tem- porary pavement delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be maintained until superseded or replaced with permanent pavement delineation. Temporary pavement delineation shall be removed when, as determined by the Engineer, the tempo- rary pavement delineation conflicts with the permanent pavement delineation or with a new traffic pattern for the area and is no longer required for the direction of public traffic. When temporary pave- ment delineation is required to be removed, all lines and marks used to establish the alignment of the temporary pavement delineation shall be removed. 7-10.3.6 Preparation of Traffic Control Plan Sheets. No traffic control plans (TCP) or Traffic Control Staging plans (TCP) are included in the project plans. The Contractor shall have such new TCP pre-o pared and submitted as a part of the Work for any and all construction activities that are located within , the traveled way. The Contractor shall have TCP prepared and submitted as a part of the Work for any construction activities that are a part of this project that are not included in the project plans. The Contractor must submit the TCP for the Engineer's review in conformance with the requirements of Section 2-5.3, et seq. and obtain the Engineer's approval of the TCP prior to implementing them. The minimum 20-day review period specified in Section 2-5.3.1 for shop drawings and submittals shall pertain to each submittal of TCP, new, modified or added to, for the Engineer's review. New or revised TCP submittals shall include all TCP needed for the entire duration of the Work. Each phase of the TCP shall be shown in sufficient scale and detail to show the lane widths, transition lengths, curve radii, stationing of features affecting the traffic control plan and the methodology proposed to transition to the subsequent TCP phase. When the vertical alignment of the traveled surface differs from the finished pavement elevation vertical curves must also be shown. Such modification, addition, supple- ment, and/or new design of TCP shall be prepared by a registered professional engineer appropriately registered in the State of California. The Engineer shall be the sole judge of the suitability and quality of any such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to TCP. The Engineer may approve any such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to the TCP when, in the Engineer's sole opinion, such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to the TCP prepared by the registered profes- sional engineer retained by the Contractor will be beneficial to the best interests of the Agency. Such modification, addition, supplement, and/or new design shall not be implemented and no work shall be commenced that is contingent on such approval until the changed TCP are approved by the Engineer. The preparation of such modification, addition, supplement, and/or new designs of TCP shall not pre- suppose their approval or obligate the Agency in any fashion. Submittal and review requirements for such modifications, supplements, and/or new designs to TCP shall conform to the requirements of Section 2-5.3 Shop Drawings and Submittals. 7-10.3.7 Payment. The Contractor shall provide traffic control at the contract lump sum price bid. The contract lump sum price paid for "traffic control" shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor (including flagging costs), materials (including signs), tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in preparation, reproduction and changing of traffic control plans, placing, applying traffic stripes and pavement markers with bituminous adhesive, removing, storing, maintaining, moving to new locations, replacing, and disposing of the components of the traffic control system as shown on the plans and approved additions and modifications, as specified in these supplemental provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. All expenses and time to prepare and review modifications, additions, supplements and/or new TCP designs shall be included in the lump sum bid for traffic control and no additional payment will be made therefore. Flagging costs will be paid for as a part of the Lump Sum Amount for "Traffic Control." The cost of labor and material for portable concrete barriers will be paid for at the unit price bid. When there is no bid item the cost of labor and material for portable concrete barriers they will be paid as an incidental to the work being performed and no additional payment will be made therefore. Progress payments for "Traffic Control" will be based on the percentage of the improvement work completed. 7-10.4 Safety. 7-10.4.1 Safety Orders. The Contractor shall have at the Work site, copies or suitable extracts of: Construction Safety Orders, Tunnel Safety Orders and General Industry Safety Orders issued by the State Division of Industrial Safety. The Contractor shall comply with provisions of these and all other applicable laws, ordinances, and regulations. Before excavating any trench 5 feet or more in depth, the Contractor shall submit a detailed plan to the Agency showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for the workers' protection from the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trench. If the plan ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 1 00 of 173 Pages varies from the shoring system standards, the plan shall be prepared by a registered Civil Engineer. No excavation shall start until the Engineer has accepted the plan and the Contractor has obtained a permit from the State Division of Industrial Safety. A copy of the permit shall be submitted to the Engineer. Payment for performing all work necessary to provide safety measures shall be included in the prices bid for other items of work except where separate bid items for excavation safety are provided, or required by law. 7-10.4.2 Use of Explosives. Explosives may be used only when authorized in writing by the Engi- neer, or as otherwise stated in the Specifications. Explosives shall be handled, used, and stored in accordance with all applicable regulations. The Engineer's approval of the use of explosives shall not relieve the Contractor from liability for claims caused by blasting operations. 7-10.4.3 Special Hazardous Substances and Processes. Materials that contain hazardous sub- stances or mixtures may be required on the Work. A Material Safety Data Sheet as described in Sec- tion 5194 of the California Code of Regulations shall be requested by the Contractor from the manu- facturer of any hazardous products used. Material usage shall be accomplished with strict adherence to California Division of Industrial Safety requirements and all manufacturer warnings and application instructions listed on the Material Safety Data Sheet and on the product container label. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer if a specified product cannot be used under safe conditions. 7-10.4.4 Confined Spaces. (a) Confined Space Entry Program. The Contractor shall be responsible for implementing, administer- ing and maintaining a confined space entry program (CSEP) in accordance with Sections 5156, 5157 and 5158, Title 8, CCR. Prior to starting the Work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit its comprehensive CSEP to the Engineer. The CSEP shall address all potential physical and environmental hazards and contain pro- cedures for safe entry into confined spaces, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Training of personnel 2. Purging and cleaning the space of materials and residue 3. Potential isolation and control of energy and material inflow 4. Controlled access to the space 5. Atmospheric testing of the space 6. Ventilation of the space 7. Special hazards consideration 8. Personal protective equipment 9. Rescue plan provisions The Contractor's submittal shall include the names of its personnel, including subcontractor personnel, assigned to the project who will have CSEP responsibilities, their CSEP training, and their specific assignment and responsibility in carrying out the CSEP. ft ~.,Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Paae 1 01 of 173 Paaes (b) Permit-Required Confined Spaces. Entry into permit-required confined spaces as defined in Sec- tion 5157, Title 8, CCR may be required as a part of the Work. All manholes, tanks, vaults, pipelines, excavations, or other enclosed or partially enclosed spaces shall be considered permit-required con- fined spaces until the pre-entry procedures demonstrate otherwise. The Contractor shall implement a permit space program prior to performing any work in a permit-required confined space. A copy of the permit shall be available at all times for review by Contractor and Agency personnel at the Work site. (c) Payment. Payment for implementing, administering, and providing all equipment and personnel to perform the CSEP shall be included in the bid items for which the CSEP is required. 7-10.4.5 Safety and Protection of Workers and Public. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of employees on the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of Federal, State and Municipal safety laws and building codes to prevent accidents or injury to persons on, about, or adjacent to the premises where the work is being performed. The Contractor shall erect and properly maintain at all times, as required by the conditions and progress of the work, all neces- sary safeguards for the protection of workers and public, and shall use danger signs warning against hazards created by such features of construction as protruding nails, hoists, well holes, and falling materials. 7-11 PATENT FEES OR ROYALTIES. The Contractor shall absorb in its Bid the patent fees or royalties on any patented article or process furnished or used in the Work. The Contractor shall in- demnify and hold the Agency harmless from any legal action that may be brought for infringement of patents. 7-12 ADVERTISING. The names, addresses and specialties of Contractors, Subcontractors, archi- tects, or engineers may be displayed on removable signs. The size and location shall be subject to the Engineer's approval. Commercial advertising matter shall not be attached to or painted on the surfaces of buildings, fences, canopies, or barricades. 7-13 LAWS TO BE OBSERVED. The Contractor shall keep fully informed of State and National laws and County and Municipal ordinances and regulations which in any manner affect those em- ployed in the Work or the materials used in the Work or in any way affect the conduct of the Work. The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with such laws, ordinances, and regulations. Municipal ordinances that affect this work include Chapter 11.06. Excavation and Grading. If this notice specifies locations or possible materials, such as borrow pits or gravel beds, for use in the proposed construction project which would be subject to Section 1601 or Section 1603 of the Fish and Game Code, the conditions established pursuant to Section 1601 et seq. of the Fish and Game Code shall become conditions of the contract. 7-14 ANTITRUST CLAIMS. Section 7103.5 of the Public Contract Code provides: "In entering into a public works contract or a subcontract to supply goods, services, or materials pur- suant to a public works contract, the contractor or subcontractor offers and agrees to assign to the awarding body all rights, title, and interest in and to all causes of action it may have under Section 4 of the Clayton Act (15 U.S.C. Sec 15) or Cartwright Act (Chapter 2 [commencing with Section 16700] of Part 2 of Division 7 of the Business and Professions Code), arising from purchases of goods, ser- vices, or materials pursuant to the public works contract or subcontract. The assignment shall be made and become effective at the time the awarding body tenders final payment to the contractor, without further acknowledgment of the parties." ft '-J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 102 of 173 Pages SECTION 9-MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 9-1 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES FOR UNIT PRICE WORK. 9-1.1 General. Unless otherwise specified, quantities of work shall be determined from measure- ments or dimensions in horizontal planes. However, linear quantities of pipe, piling, fencing and timber shall be considered as being the true length measured along longitudinal axis. Unless otherwise provided in Specifications, volumetric quantities shall be the product of the mean area of vertical or horizontal sections and the intervening horizontal or vertical dimension. The planim- eter shall be considered an instrument of precision adapted to measurement of all areas. 9-1.2 Methods of Measurement. Materials and items of work which are to be paid for on basis of measurement shall be measured in accordance with methods stipulated in the particular sections in- volved. 9-1.3 Certified Weights. When payment is to be made on the basis of weight, the weighing shall be done on certified platform scales or, when approved by the Engineer, on a completely automated weighing and recording system. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with duplicate licensed weighmaster's certificates showing actual net weights. The Agency will accept the certificates as evi- dence of weights delivered. 9-1.4 Units of Measurement. The system of measure for this contract shall be the U.S. Standard Measures. ,..., 9-2 LUMP SUM WORK. Items for which quantities are indicated "Lump Sum", "L.S.", or "Job", ....._-i shall be paid for at the price indicated in the Bid. Such payment shall be full compensation for the items of work and all work appurtenant thereto. When required by the Specifications or requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer within 15 days after award of Contract, a detailed schedule in triplicate, to be used only as a basis for determining progress payments on a lump sum contract or designated lump sum bid item. This schedule shall equal the lump sum bid and shall be in such form and sufficiently detailed as to satisfy the Engineer that it correctly represents a reasonable apportionment of the lump sum. 9-3 PAYMENT 9-3.1 General. The quantities listed in the Bid schedule will not govern final payment. Payment to the Contractor will be made only for actual quantities of Contract items constructed in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. Upon completion of construction, if the actual quantities show either an increase or decrease from the quantities given in the Bid schedule, the Contract Unit Prices will prevail subject to the provisions of Section 3-2.2.1. The unit and lump sum prices to be paid shall be full compensation for the items of work and all appurtenant work, including furnishing all materials, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals. Payment will not be made for materials wasted or disposed of in a manner not called for under the Contract. This includes rejected material not unloaded from vehicles, material rejected after it has been placed, and material placed outside of the Plan lines. No compensation will be allowed for dis- posing of rejected or excess material. Payment for work performed or materials furnished under an Assessment Act Contract will be mad~ as provided in particular proceedings or legislative act under which such contract was awarded. ....._., Whenever any portion of the Work is performed by the Agency at the Contractor's request, the cost thereof shall be charged against the Contractor, and may be deducted from any amount due or be- coming due from the Agency. Whenever immediate action is required to prevent injury, death, or property damage, and precautions which are the Contractor's responsibility have not been taken and are not reasonably expected to be taken, the Agency may, after reasonable attempt to notify the Contractor, cause such precautions to be taken and shall charge the cost thereof against the Contractor, or may deduct such cost from any amount due or becoming due from the Agency. Agency action or inaction under such circumstances shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor or its Surety from liability. Payment shall not relieve the Contractor from its obligations under the Contract; nor shall such pay- ment be construed to be acceptance of any of the Work. Payment shall not be construed as the trans- fer of ownership of any equipment or materials to the Agency. Responsibility of ownership shall remain with the Contractor who shall be obligated to store any fully or partially completed work or structure for which payment has been made; or replace any materials or equipment required to be provided under the Contract which may be damaged, lost, stolen or otherwise degraded in any way prior to acceptance of the Work, except as provided in Section 6-10. Guarantee periods shall not be affected by any payment but shall commence on the date of re- cordation of the "Notice of Completion." If, within the time fixed by law, a properly executed notice to stop payment is filed with the Agency, due to the Contractor's failure to pay for labor or materials used in the Work, all money due for such labor or materials will be withheld from payment to the Contractor in accordance with applicable laws. At the expiration of 35 days from the date of acceptance of the Work by the Board, or as prescribed by law, the amount deducted from the final estimate and retained by the Agency will be paid to the Contractor except such amounts as are required by law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be authorized by the Contract to be further retained. 9-3.2 Partial and Final Payment. The Engineer will, after award of Contract, establish a closure date for the purpose of making monthly progress payments. The Contractor may request in writing that such monthly closure date be changed. The Engineer may approve such request when it is com- patible with the Agency's payment procedure. Each month, the Engineer will make an approximate measurement of the work performed to the clo- sure date as basis for making monthly progress payments. The estimated value will be based on contract unit prices, completed change order work and as provided for in Section 9-2 of these General Provisions. Progress payments shall be made no later than thirty (30) calendar days after the closure date. Five (5) working days following the closure date, the Engineer shall complete the detailed pro- gress pay estimate and submit it to the Contractor for the Contractor's information. Should the Con- tractor assert that additional payment is due, the Contractor shall within ten ( 1 0) days of receipt of the progress estimate, submit a supplemental payment request to the Engineer with adequate justification supporting the amount of supplemental payment request. Upon receipt of the supplemental payment request, the Engineer shall, as soon as practicable after receipt, determine whether the supplemental payment request is a proper payment request. If the Engineer determines that the supplemental pay- ment request is not proper, then the request shall be returned to the Contractor as soon as practicable, but not later than seven (7) days after receipt. The returned request shall be accompanied by a doc- ument setting forth in writing the reasons why the supplemental payment request was not proper. In conformance with Public Contract Code Section 20104.50, the City shall make payments within thirty (30) days after receipt of an undisputed and properly submitted supplemental payment request from the Contractor. If payment of the undisputed supplemental payment request is not made within thirty ft ~1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 104 of 173 Pages (30) days after receipt by the Engineer, then the City shall pay interest tp the Contractor equivalent to the legal rate set forth in subdivision (a) of Section 685.010 of the Code of Civil Procedure. From each progress estimate, 10 percent will be deducted and retained by the Agency, and the re- mainder less the amount of all previous payments will be paid. After 50 percent of the Work has been completed and if progress on the Work is satisfactory, the deduction to be made from remaining pro- gress estimates and from the final estimate may be limited to $500 or 10 percent of the first half of total Contract amount, whichever is greater. No progress payment made to the Contractor or its sureties will constitute a waiver of the liquidated damages under 6-9. As provided in Section 22300 of the California Public Contract Code, the Contractor may substitute securities for any monies withheld by the Agency to ensure performance under the Contract. After final inspection, the Engineer will make a Final Payment Estimate and process a corresponding payment. This estimate will be in writing and shall be for the total amount owed the Contractor as determined by the Engineer and shall be itemized by the contract bid item and change order item with quantities and payment amounts and shall show all deductions made or to be made for prior payments and amounts to be deducted under provisions of the contract. All prior estimates and progress pay- ments shall be subject to correction in the Final Payment Estimate. The Contractor shall have 30 calendar days from receipt of the Final Payment Estimate to make written statement disputing any bid item or change order item quantity or payment amount. The Contractor shall provide all documentation at the time of submitting the statement supporting its position. Should the Contractor fail to submit thhe s:a~~m~n:. a~d supporti~g ~cumentation within the time specified, ~ the Contractor acknowledges t at u an 1na payment as een made for all contract bid items and . ......,. change order items. If the Contractor submits a written statement with documentation in the aforementioned time, the En- gineer will review the disputed item within 30 calendar days and make any appropriate adjustments on the Final Payment. Remaining disputed quantities or amounts not approved by the Engineer will be subject to resolution as specified in Section 3-5, Disputed Work. The written statement filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of said disputed items. The Engineer will consider the merits of the Contractor's claims. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further information and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying payment for the disputed items. 9-3.2.1 Payment for Claims. Except for those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in Section 9-3.2 all claims of any dollar amount shall be submitted in a written statement by the Contractor no later than the date of receipt of the final payment estimate. Those final payment items disputed in the written statement required in Section 9-3.2 shall be submitted no later than 30 days after receipt of the Final Payment estimate. No claim will be considered that was not included in this written statement, nor will any claim be allowed for which written notice or protest is required under any provision of this contract including Sections 3-4 Changed Conditions, 3-5 Disputed Work, 6-6.3 Payment for Delays to Contractor, 6-6.4 Written Notice and Report, or 6-7.3 Contract Time Accounting, unless the Contractor has complied with notice or protest requirements. r.nntr::~l't Nn I'\OOA1 D~no 1 (\I'; nf 17'l D~no" The claims filed by the Contractor shall be in sufficient detail to enable the Engineer to ascertain the basis and amount of said claims. The Engineer will consider and determine the Contractor's claims and it will be the responsibility of the Contractor to furnish within a reasonable time such further infor- mation and details as may be required by the Engineer to determine the facts or contentions involved in its claims. Failure to submit such information and details will be sufficient cause for denying the claims. Payment for claims shall be processed within 30 calendar days of their resolution for those claims approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall proceed with informal dispute resolution under Sec- tion 3-5, Disputed Work, for those claims remaining in dispute. 9-3.3 Delivered Materials. When provided for in the Specifications, and subject to the limitation and conditions therein, the cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into the Work will be included in the progress estimate. 9-3.3.1 Delivered Materials. The cost of materials and equipment delivered but not incorporated into the work will not be included in the progress estimate. 9-3.4 Mobilization. When a bid item is included in the Proposal form for mobilization and subject to the conditions and limitations in the Specifications, the costs of work in advance of construction oper- ations and not directly attributable to any specific bid item will be included in the progress estimate. When no such bid item is provided, payment for such costs will be considered to be included in the other items of work. 9-3.4.1 Mobilization and Preparatory Work. Payment for mobilization and preparatory Work will be made at the stipulated lump-sum price bid therefore in the bid schedule One Hundred Fifty Thousand dollars ($150,000.00), and includes full compensation for furnishing all insurance, bonds, licenses, labor, materials, utilities, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in mobi- lization and preparatory work and operations, including, but not limited to, those necessary for the movement of personnel, equipment, supplies, and incidental to preparing to conduct work on and off the project site and other offsite facilities necessary for work on the project; for all other facilities, sureties, work and operations which must be performed or costs incurred prior to beginning work on various contract items on or off the project site, excepting those specifically paid for under separate sections of these specifications. The Contractor hereby agrees that the stipulated lump sum amount is sufficient for Mobilization and Preparatory Work, as described in this section, and that the Contractor shall have no right to additional compensation for Mobilization and Preparatory Work. Progress payments for Mobilization and Preparatory Work will be made as follows: For the first progress payment (after the issuance of the Notice to Proceed), forty percent (40%) of the amount bid for Mobilization and Preparatory Work will be allowed. For the second progress payment, an additional sixty percent (60%) of the amount bid for mobilization and preparatory work will be al- lowed therefore. 9-4 BID ITEMS. Payment for each Bid Item shall be made at the quantity and type as listed in the Contractor's Proposal. All work shown or mentioned on the plans, in the Contract Documents, General Provisions, or Technical Provisions/Specifications shall be considered as included in the Bid Items, see Section 01200 Measurement and Payment for Bid Item descriptions. Contractor must protect ex- isting utilities, improvements, landscaping, irrigation systems, and vegetation in place. If damaged during the work, Contractor is responsible to repair or replace any utilities, improvements, landscaping, irrigation systems, and vegetation at his expense. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 1 06 of 173 Pages SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 2, CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS SECTION 200-ROCK MATERIALS 200-1 ROCK PRODUCTS Add the following section: 200-1.2.2 Permeable Material. Permeable material shall consist of hard, durable, clean sand, gravel, or crushed stone, and shall be free from organic material, clay balls, or other deleterious substances. Class 1 and Class 2 permeable material shall have a Durability Index of not less than 40. Class 2 Permeable material shall have a Sand Equivalent value of not less than 75. Class 1 permeable ma- terial shall conform to the requirements in this section and Table 200-1.2.2(A). Class 2 permeable material shall conform to the requirements in this section and Table 200-1.2.2(8). When permeable material is required and the class or kind is not specified, Class 1 permeable material shall be used. The alternative gradings within Class 1 permeable material are identified by types. Unless otherwise shown on the plans the Contractor will be permitted to furnish and place any one of the types provided for this class. The percentage composition by mass of permeable material in place shall conform to the gradings in Tables 200-1.2.2(A) and 200-1.2.2(8). Sieve Sizes 50-mm (2") 37.5-mm (1 1h") 19-mm f!'//) 12.5-mm Ch") 9.5-mm (3fa") 4.75-mm (No. 4) 2.36-mm (No. 8) 75-l.lm (no. 200 Sieve Sizes 25-mm (1") 19-mm (3//) 9.5-mm (3/a") 4.75-mm (No.4) 2.36-mm (No. 8) 600-Jlm (No. 30 300-l.lm (No. 50 75-l.lm (no. 200) ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 TABLE 200-1.2.2(A) CLASS 1 PERMEABLE MATERIAL Percentage Passing Type A ------ 100 95-100 70-100 0-55 0-10 0-3 TABLE 200-1.2.2(B) CLASS 2 PERMEABLE MATERIAL Type 8 100 95-100 50-100 --- 15-55 0-25 0-5 0-3 PercentaQe PassinQ 100 90-100 40-100 25-40 18-33 5-15 0-7 0-3 Contract No. 50081 Paae 1 07 of 173 Paaes 200-2 UNTREATED BASE MATERIALS 200-2.1 General. Add the following: Aggregate base shall be Class 2 Aggregate Base per Caltrans Standard Specification, July 1999, Section 26: Aggregate Bases, Subsection 26-1.02A Class 2 Ag- gregate Base and as specified herein. Add the following section: 200-2.7 Class 2 Aggregate Base. Aggregate for Class 2 aggregate base shall be free from organic matter and other deleterious substances, and shall be of such nature that it can be compacted readily under watering and rolling to form a firm, stable base. Aggregate may include material processed from reclaimed asphalt concrete, portland cement concrete, lean concrete base, cement treated base or a combination of any of these materials. Aggregate shall conform to the grading and quality requirements shown in the following tables. At the option of the Contractor, the grading for either the 11 /2-inch maximum or 3/4 inch maximum shall be used, except that once a grading is selected it shall not be changed without the Engineer's written approval. Sieve Sizes 2" ································· 11/2'' ···························· 111 ................................ . 3/4" ······························ No.4 .......................... . No. 30 ......................... . No. 200 ..................... .. AGGREGATE GRADING REQUIREMENTS Percentage Passing 1112" Maximum 3/4" Maximum Operating Range Operating Range 100 90-100 50-85 25-45 10-25 2-9 100 90-100 35-60 10-30 2-9 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Tests Resistance (R-value) Sand Equivalent Durability Index Operating Range 78Min. 25Min. 35Min. The aggregate shall not be treated with lime, cement or other chemical material before the Durability Index test is performed. If the results of either or both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the re- quirements specified for "Operating Range" but meet the "Contract Compliance" requirements, place- ment of the aggregate base may be continued for the remainder of that day. However, another day's work may not be started until tests, or other information, indicate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the next material to be used in the work will comply with the requirements specified for "Operating Range." If the results of either or both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent tests do not meet the re- quirements specified for "Contract Compliance," the aggregate base which is represented by these tests shall be removed. However, if requested by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer, the aggregate base may remain in place and the Contractor shall pay to the City $2.25 per cubic yard for such aggregate base left in place. The City may deduct this amount from any moneys due, or that may become due, the Contractor under the contract. If both the aggregate grading and Sand Equivalent do not conform to the "Contract Compliance" requirements, only one adjustment shall apply. No single aggregate grading or Sand Equivalent test shall represent more than 500 cubic yards or one day's production, whichever is smaller. SECTION 201 -CONCRETE, MORTAR, AND RELATED MATERIALS TABLE 201-1.1.2(A) (3l PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE Type of Construction Concrete Class All Concrete Used Within the Right-of-Way 330-C-23 (560-C-3250) (1l Trench Backfill Slurry 115-E-3 { 190-E-400) Street Light Foundations and Survey Monuments 330-C-23 {560-C-3250) Traffic Signal Foundations 350-C-27 (590-C-3750) Concreted-Rock Erosion Protection 31 0-C-17 (520-C-2500P) Maximum Slump mm (Inches) (2) 200 (8") 100 (4") 100 (4"} per Table 300-11.3.1 (1) Except that concrete requ1red to be of h1gher strength by Table 201-1.1.2{A) SSPWC shall be as per Table 201-1.1.2{A) SSPWC. (2) As per Table 201-1.1.2{A) SSPWC. (3) Portions of Table 201-1.1.2(A) of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction not shown herein as changed are not affected by this table. 201-1.2 Materials. 201-1.2.4(a) Integral Colored Concrete. Add the following: Integral color shall consist of colored admixtures developed for use in ready mixed concrete. The product shall be made of the highest ~ quality pigments, as well as other ingredients designed to enhance the color and improve the pigment ......,/ dispersion, workability and finishing performance of the concrete. Integral color pigments shall meet or exceed ASTM-C-979. The coloring method shall be designed for concrete flatwork applications (salt finished, broom finishes, rotary finishes), as well as vertical surfaces, and other types of architec- tural concrete. Pigment shall be a permanent coloration, uniform throughout the concrete surface and interior, and shall be highly UV and fade resistant. Integral colored concrete shall be cured with QC Color Cure color matched to the concrete (see prod- uct information bulletin). Provide sample panel submittals of all colors to be used in the installation on identical surfaces for approval by Resident Engineer. Contractor shall provide a maintenance sched- ule for integral colored concrete. Admixture for all integral colored concrete paving in medians and other integral colored concrete shall be the following: Color: Curing: match existing Scofield Colorcure Concrete Sealer (or approved equal). See Section 201 of these Supplemental Provisions for Concrete Curing Materials. Manufacturer: Scofield Chromix Admixtures for color-conditioned concrete, or approved equal L.M. Scofield Company 6533 Bandini Boulevard Los Angeles, CA 90040 1-800-800-9900 ~ "'Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 1 09 of 173 Pages Admixture products and procedures for installation shall be in strict accordance with the manufac- turer's specifications and recommendations, and those published by the American Concrete Institute (ACI) and the Portland Cement Association (PCA). 201-1.2.4 Chemical Admixtures. {e) Air-Entraining Admixtures. Substitute the following: The air content shall not deviate from the percentage specified or permitted by more than 1-1/2 percentage points. The air content of freshly mixed concrete will be determined by California Test Method No. 504. Add the following: 201-1.6 Finish: Random stone stamped pattern with heavy sandblast to match existing median paving. Add the following: 201-1.7 Miscellaneous Concrete Finishing Products. 201-1.7.1 Water Base Penetrating Sealer for Integral Colored Concrete. (Scofield Colorcure Concrete Sealer or approved equal) Water base penetrating sealer shall be a sealer designed for the protection of imprinted and natural concrete. Water base penetrating sealer shall be a sealer designed for the protection of imprinted, colored and natural concrete, and other masonry surfaces to preserve the natural appearance of the masonry without darkening or adding gloss to the surface. It shall preserve the natural slip resistance of the concrete, etc. Sealer shall repel spills and soils, minimizing staining and maintenance. Seal shall leave no visible material on the surface and shall be absorbed and locked into the pores of the masonry, repelling liquids and soils but leaving the top surface natural in appearance. Install per manufacturer's directions. Seal shall be compatible with the surfaces and materials which it is applied. Concrete sealer shall conform to the following specifications: Color: Clear, non-yellowing Odor: Mild Flash Point: None (C.O.C. method) Specific Grav: 1.03 Density: 8.6 pounds per gallon Drying Time: 30 minutes to 60 minutes Cure Time: 24 to 48 hours VOC Content: None (0 g/1) excluding water Polymer Type: Proprietary Reactive Resin System Coverages (approximate): Smooth Concrete: 300 to 400 square feet per gallon Rough Concrete: 200 to 300 square feet per gallon Note: Coverages vary depending on porosity and condition of surface and method of application. Method of: Airless sprayer. Application Manufacturer: Scofield Chromix Admixtures for color-conditioned concrete, or approved equal L.M. Scofield Company 6533 Bandini Boulevard Los Angeles, CA 90040 1-800-800-9900 ft Q Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 11 0 of 173 Pages All materials shall be furnished, prepared, applied, cured, and stored according to the product manu- facturer's direction. 201-1.2.4 Chemical Admixtures. (e) Air-entraining Admixtures. Substitute the following: The air content shall not deviate from the percentage specified or permitted by more than 1-1/2 percentage points. The air content of freshly mixed concrete will be determined by California Test Method No. 504. 201-3 EXPANSION JOINT FILLER AND JOINT SEALANTS. 201-3.4 Type "A" Sealant (Two-Part Polyurethane Sealant). Add the following: All finished concrete surfaces shall have a W' continuous expansion joint at locations indicated on the plans and notes and shall be located either parallel to perpendicular to the curb line. When not oth- erwise indicated, all expansion joints located adjacent to colored concrete shall be sealant Type "A" and colored to match the color of the concrete surface. Contractor shall provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and to main- tain watertight and airtight continuous seals without causing staining or deterioration of joint sub- strates. Contractor shall submit product data from the manufacturer of each joint sealant product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. Contractor shall also submit samples for initial selection purposes in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. ~ Samples shall be submitted to Engineer. Submit complete schedule of type (and location where type ..,..J is to be used) of each sealant. Contractor shall engage an experienced installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Provide color selections made by Engineer from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for prod- ucts of type indicated. Sealant color parallel to curbline shall match color of Paving Treatment Type "A" as specified in Section 201-1.2.4(a) of these Special Provisions. Joint sealants shall be multi-component polyurethane sealant. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard, non-modified, 2-or-more-part, polyurethane-based, elastomeric sealant; complying with either ASTM-C-920-87, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, or FS TT-S 0227E Class A, non- sag, Type II. Acceptable Products: "Sonneborn NPII"; Sonneborn Building Products Division; "Scofield Lithoseal Trafficalk 3-G", L.M. Scofield Company; or equivalent, as approved by the Engineer. Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint sub- strates, sealants, primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant 0· manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. Plastic foam joint fillers shall be performed, compressible, resilient, nonstaining, nonwaxing, nonex- truding strips of flexible plastic foam either open-cell polyurethane foam or closed-cell polyethylene foam, subject to approval of sealant manufacturer, for cold-applied sealants only. Polystyrene foam is not acceptable. 201-3.7 Type "D" Joint Sealant. Add the following: Hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be in solid form at room temperature and fluid at an application temperature of 190°C (375°F) to 205°C (400°F). Fumes from the material shall be non-toxic. Sealant shall be suitable for use in both asphalt concrete and portland cement concrete. Performance characteristics of the cured hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be as per Table 201-3.7(A). TABLE 201-3.7(A) CURED HOT-MELT RUBBERIZED ASPHALT Property Measuring Standard (ASTM Results Conditions Designation) Cone Penetration ASTM D 3407, Sec. 5 3.5 mm, max. 25°C, 150Q1 5 S Flow, 60°C ASTM D 3407, Sec. 6 5 mm, max. Resilience ,ASTM D 3407, Sec. 8 25%, min. 25°C Softening Point, ASTM D 36 82 oc, min. Ductility, ASTM D 113 300 mm, min. 25°C, 50 mm/min Flash Point, COC, oc ASTM D 92 288 oc, min. Viscosity, Brookfield ASTM D 4402 2.5-3.5 Pa-s No. 27 Spindle, 20 Thermosel, rpm, 190°C, SECTION 203-BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 203-6 ASPHALT CONCRETE. ADD the following: 203-6.2.1 Acceptance. Wet Mix or Core sampled asphalt concrete will be considered in conformance with the mix design when the Asphalt Binder content is within +/-0.5% of the design mix and the gradation conforms to the grading as shown in Table 203-6.4.3 (A). Deviations in gradation may be considered in conformance with the mix design provided the stability of the completed mix complies with the requirements for Stabilometer Value per Table 203-6.4.3 (A) Plant inspected asphalt concrete will be considered in conformance with the mix design when visually inspected and the combined gradation of the Bin samples show conformance to the grading as shown in Table 203-6.4.3 (A). 203-6.4 Asphalt Concrete Mixtures. Add the following: Conventional Asphalt concrete shall be class C2-PG64-10-RAP for surface course, and B-PG64-10-RAP for base course. Asphalt concrete shall be class D2-PG70-1 0 for dikes and class E-PG70-1 0 ditches. 203-6.4.3 Composition and Grading. Add the following: Evaluation of asphalt concrete shall be de- termined from samples of asphalt concrete taken after completion of all processing (Wet Mix) or by core sample analysis of the in-place asphalt concrete or by direct central plant inspection that confirms the production of a particular mix design and verifies using samples of aggregate taken before the addition of asphalt and mineral filler (Bin). All samples shall be taken in accordance with Calif. Test 125. ft Q Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 112 of 173 Pages SECTION 206-MISCELLANEOUS METAL ITEMS Add the following section: 206-7 TRAFFIC SIGNS. 206-7.1 Roadside Signs. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing roadside signs in accord- ance with details shown on the plans, the California Sign Specifications and these special provisions. Permanent and temporary signs shall be free from blemishes that may affect the serviceability and detract from the general sign color and appearance when viewing during daytime and nighttime from a distance of 25 feet. The face of each finished sign shall be uniform, flat, smooth, and free of defects, scratches, wrinkles, gel, hard spots, streaks, extrusion marks, and air bubbles. The front, back and edges of the sign panels shall be free of router chatter marks, burns, sharp edges, loose rivets, de- laminated skins, excessive adhesive overspray, and aluminum marks. 206-7.1.2 Sign Identification. The following notation shall be placed on the lower right side of the back of each sign where the notation shall not be blocked by the sign post or frame: A. PROPERTY OF THE CITY OF CARLSBAD, B. Name of the sign manufacturer, C. Month and year of fabrication, D. Type of retroreflective sheeting, and E. Manufacturer's identification and lot number of retroreflective sheeting. The above notation shall be applied directly to the aluminum sign panels in 1 /4-inch upper case letters and numerals by die-stamp and applied by similar method to the fiberglass reinforced plastic signs. Painting, screening, or engraving of the notation will not be allowed. The notation shall be applied without damaging the finish of the sign. 206-7.1.3 Drawings. Standard signs shall be as per the most recently approved California Sign Spec- ifications. The date of approval shall be the date most closely preceding the date of manufacture of the sign(s) or the date of the "Notice to Proceed" of this contract, whichever is most recent. 206-7.1.4 Reflective Sheeting. All advisory signs, warning signs and all regulatory signs shall be fabricated with Type IV prismatic sheeting (High Intensity Prismatic or equivalent) or Type IX prismatic cube lens sheeting (Diamond Grade VIP or equivalent) in accordance to ASTM Designation D4956 and conforming to the requirements of these special provisions. 206-7.1.5 Sign Panel. Sign panels shall be fabricated from sheet aluminum in accordance with ASTM Designation 8209. Sheet aluminum shall be pretreated in accordance to ASTM Designation 8449. The surface of sheet aluminum shall be cleaned, deoxidized, and coated with a light and tightly ad- herent chromate conversion coating free of powdery residue. The conversion coating shall be Class 2 with a mass between 1 0 milligrams per square foot. Following the cleaning and coating process, the sheet aluminum shall be protected from exposure to grease, oils, dust, and contaminants. Sheet aluminum shall be free of buckles, warps, dents, cockles, burrs, and defects resulting from fabrication. 206-7.1.6 Mounting Traffic Signs. Traffic signs shall be installed on 10-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts as shown on San Diego Regional Standard drawing M-45 or, when the sign area exceeds the maximum area allowed for on that drawing, on multiple 1 0-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts. The number of posts shall be determined by the parameters in SDRS drawing M-45 or as approved by the Engineer. Traffic signs will be provided with back braces and mounting blocks as approved by the Engineer consisting of 1 0-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing when multiple posts are used. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 114 of 173 Pages 206-7.1.6 Traffic Sign Posts. Posts shall be constructed of 10-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts as shown on San Diego Regional Standard drawing M-45. 206-7.2 Temporary Traffic Signs. Temporary traffic signs shall consist of all signs used for the direction, warning, and regulation of vehicle (including bicycle) and pedestrian traffic during the Con- tractor's performance of the Work. Temporary traffic signs include both stationary and portable signs. 206-7.2.1 General. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing temporary signs in accordance with details shown on the plans, the California Sign Specifications and these special provisions. Per- manent and temporary signs shall be free from blemishes that may affect the serviceability and detract from the general sign color and appearance when viewing during daytime and nighttime from a dis- tance of 25 feet. The face of each finished sign shall be uniform, flat, smooth, and free of defects, scratches, wrinkles, gel, hard spots, streaks, extrusion marks, and air bubbles. The front, back and edges of the sign panels shall be free of router chatter marks, burns, sharp edges, loose rivets, de- laminated skins, excessive adhesive overspray, and aluminum marks. 206-7.2.2 Drawings. Standard signs shall be as per the most recently approved California Sign Spec- ifications. The date of approval shall be the date most closely preceding the date of manufacture of the sign(s) or the date of the "Notice to Proceed" of this contract, whichever is most recent. 206-7.2.3 Reflective Sheeting. All advisory signs, warning signs and all regulatory signs shall be fabricated with Type IV prismatic sheeting (High Intensity Prismatic or equivalent) or Type IX prismatic cube lens sheeting (Diamond Grade VIP or equivalent) in accordance to ASTM Designation D4956 and conforming to the requirements of these special provisions. 206-7.2.4 Sign Panel. Sign panels shall be fabricated from sheet aluminum in accordance with ASTM Designation 8209. Sheet aluminum shall be pretreated in accordance to ASTM Designation 8449. The surface of sheet aluminum shall be cleaned, deoxidized, and coated with a light and tightly ad- herent chromate conversion coating free of powdery residue. The conversion coating shall be Class ~ 2 with a mass between 1 0 milligrams per square foot. Following the cleaning and coating process, .... .; the sheet aluminum shall be protected from exposure to grease, oils, dust, and contaminants. Sheet aluminum shall be free of buckles, warps, dents, cockles, burrs, and defects resulting from fabrication. 206-7.2.5 Stationary Mounted Temporary Traffic Signs. Stationary mounted temporary traffic signs shall be installed on 1 0-gage and 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing posts in the same man- ner shown on the State of California, Department of Transportation Standard Plans RS1, RS2, RS3 and RS4 for installation of roadside signs, except as follows: a) Wood posts shall not be used. b) Back braces and blocks for sign panels will not be required. c) The height to the bottom of the sign panel above the edge of traveled way shall be at least 2.1 m (7'). d) Unless otherwise shown on the plans traffic sign posts shall conform in materials and installation to SDRS drawing M-45 and shall have one post provided for each 0.48 m2 (5 ft2)of sign area, or the signs may be installed on existing lighting standards when approved by the Engineer. e) Sign panels mounted on temporary traffic sign posts shall conform to the requirements of these special provisions. 206-7.2.6 Temporary Traffic Sign Posts. Posts shall be 10-gage or 12-gage cold-rolled steel perfo- rated tubing used for the support and stabilization of stationary mounted temporary signs. Post size and number of posts shall be as shown on the plans, except that when stationary mounted signs are installed and the type of sign installation is not shown on the plans, post size and the number of posts will be determined by the Engineer. Sign panels for stationary mounted signs shall consist of reflective sheeting applied to a sign substrate. 0 l=lauic:oarl 1/~0/1 ~ Contract No. 50081 Page 115 of 173 Pages 206-7.2.7 Portable Temporary Traffic Signs. Each portable temporary traffic sign shall consist of a base, standard or framework and a sign panel. The units shall be capable of being delivered to the site of use and placed in immediate operation. Sign panels for portable signs shall conform to the requirements of these special provisions, or shall be cotton drill fabric, flexible industrial nylon fabric, or other approved fabric. Fabric signs shall not be used during the hours of darkness. Size, color, and legend requirements for portable signs shall be as described for stationary mounted sign panels in section 206-7.2 of these special provisions. The height to the bottom of the sign panel above the edge of traveled way shall be at least 0.3-m (12"). All parts of the sign standard or framework shall be finished with 2 applications of orange enamel which will match the color of the sign panel background. Testing of paint will not be required. Add the following section: 206-8 LIGHT GAGE STEEL TUBING AND CONNECTORS. Add the following section: 206-8.1 General. This Section pertains to 1 0-gage and 12-gage cold-rolled steel perforated tubing used for the support and stabilization of signs. All shapes shall have a galvanized finish and shall be cold-roll-formed steel conforming to ASTM Designation A-446, Grade A. Galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A-525, Designation G-90. Galvanizing shall be performed after all forming and punching oper- ations have been completed. Cold-rolled steel perforated tubing shall be perforated on all four faces with 11mm (7/16"} holes on 25 mm (1") centers. Add the following section: 206-8.2 Tolerances. Wall thickness tolerance shall not exceed +0.28 mm, -0.13 mm (+0.011", -0.005"}. Convexity and concavity measured in the center of the flat side shall not exceed a tolerance of +0.25 mm (+0.01 0") applied to the specific size determined at the corner. Straightness tolerance variation shall not exceed 1.6 mm in 1 m (1/16" in 3'). Tolerance for corner radius is 4.0mm (5/32"), plus or minus 0.40 mm (1/64"). Weld flash on corner-welded square tubing shall permit 3.60 mm (9/64") radius gage to be placed in the corner. Using 1 0-gage or 12-gage square tube, consecutive size tubes shall telescope freely for 3.1 m ( 1 0'). Tolerance on hole size is plus or minus 0.40 mm ( 1 /64") on a size. Tolerance on hole spacing is plus or minus 3.2 mm in 6.1 m (1/8" in 20'). In addition, for the following specific sizes of light gage steel tubing, dimensional tolerances shall not exceed those listed in tables 206-8.2 (A) and 206-8.2(8). TABLE 206-8.2(A) LIGHT GAGE STEEL TUBING SIZE TOLERANCE Nominal Outside Dimensions Outside Tolerance for All Sides at Corners mm (inches) mm (inches) 25x25 (1 X 1 0.13 0.005 32x32 11/4 X 1 /4 0.15 0.006 38x38 11/2X1 1/2 0.15 0.006 44x44 13/4 X P/4 0.20 0.008 51 X 51 (2 x2 0.20 0.008 56x56 (2;j/1s X 2;j/1s) 0.25 0.010 57x57 21/4 X 21/4 0.25 0.010 64x64 21h x21h 0.25 0.010 51 X 76 (2 X 3 0.25 0.010 ft \..,Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 116 of 173 Pages TABLE 206-8.2(B) LIGHT GAGE STEEL TUBING SQUARENESS OF SIDES AND TWIST Nominal Outside Dimension Squareness(1l Twist Permissible in 900 mm (3") mm (Inches) mm (Inches) mm<2l (lnches)<2l 25x25 (1 X 1) 0.15 0.006 1.3 0.050 32 x32 (1-1/4 X 1-1/4) 0.18 0.007 1.3 0.050 38 x38 {1-1/2 X 1-1/2) 0.20 0.009 1.3 0.050 44x44 {1-% X 1-%) 0.25 0.010 1.6 0.062 51 X 51 (2 X 2) 0.30 0.012 1.6 0.062 56 x56 (2-3/16 X 2-3/16) 0.36 0.014 1.6 0.062 57x57 (2-1/4 X 2-1/4) 0.36 1.014 1.6 0.062 64x64 12-1/2 X 2-1/2) 0.38 0.015 1.9 0.075 51 X 76 (2 X 3) 0.46 0.018 1.9 0.075 <1l Tubing may have its sides failing to be 90 degrees to each other by the tolerance listed. <2l Twist is measured by holding down the edge of one end of a square tube on a surface plate with the bottom side of the tube parallel to the surface plate, and noting the height that ei- ther corner on the opposite end of the bottom side is above the surface plate. Add the following section: 206-8.3 Fasteners. Fasteners used to assemble cold-rolled steel perforated tubing shall be steel "pull- through" electrogalvanized rivets with 9.5 mm (3/8") diameter shank, 22 mm (7/8") diameter head, and a grip range of from 5 mm (0.200") to 0.90 mm (0.356"). The fasteners shall conform to ASTM B-633, Type Ill Add the following section: 206-9 PORTABLE CHANGEABLE MESSAGE SIGN Add the following section: 206-9.1 General. Each portable changeable message sign (PCMS) unit shall consist of a controller unit, a power supply, and a structural support system all mounted on a trailer. The PCMS unit shall be assembled to form a complete self-contained portable changeable message sign, which can be delivered to the site of the work and placed in immediate operation. The complete PCMS unit shall be capable of operating in an ambient air temperature range of -20°C {-4°F) to +70°C {158°F) and shall not be affected by unauthorized mobile radio transmissions. The trailer shall be equipped so that it can be leveled and plumbed. Full operation height shall be with the bottom of the sign at least 2.1 m (7') above the ground and the top no more than 4.4 m (14.5') above the ground. After initial placement, PCMS shall be moved from location to location as directed by the Engineer Add the following section: 206-9.2 Message Board. The message displayed on the PCMS shall be visible from a distance of 460 m (1500') and shall be legible from a distance of 230m (750'), at noon on a cloudless day, by persons with vision corrected to 20/20. The sign panel shall be 3-line matrix and shall display not less than 7 characters per line. Sign messages to be displayed shall be as approved by the Engineer. The sign face shall be flat black and shall be protected from glare of the sun by a method which does not interfere with the clarity of the sign message. The sign shall be raised and lowered by means of a power driven lifting mechanism. The matrix sign shall be capable of complete alphanumeric selection. Lamp matrix type signs shall be equipped with an automatic dimming operational mode that automat- ically compensates for the influence of a temporary light source or other abnormal lighting conditions. The sign shall have manual dimming operation modes of 3 or more different lamp intensities. Matrix signs not utilizing lamps shall be either internally or externally illuminated at night. :) ft ~~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Paae 117 of 173 Pa es The controller shall be an all solid-state unit containing all the necessary circuitry for the storage of at least 5 pre-programmed messages. The controller shall be installed in a location allowing the operator to perform all functions from one position. A keyboard entry system shall be provided to allow an operator to generate an infinite number of additional messages over the pre-programmed stored mes- sages. The keyboard shall be equipped with a security lockout feature to prevent unauthorized use of the controller. The controller shall contain a nonvolatile memory to hold the keyboard created mes- sages in memory during periods when the power is not activated. The controller shall provide for a variable message display rate which allows the operator to match the information display to the speed of the approaching traffic. The flashing off time shall be operator adjustable within the control cabinet. Add the following section: 206-9.3 Operation and Maintenance. PCMS shall be furnished, placed, operated, and maintained at locations shown on the plans, specified herein, or designated by the Engineer. The PCMS will be diligently maintained and repaired by the Contractor throughout the project in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. When ownership is transferred to the City (at the end of the job), it must be demonstrated to be in good working condition, and meet the provisions of these specifica- tions, including current registration. Add the following section: 206-9.4 Measurement and Payment. The contract unit price PCMS shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in furnishing, placing, operating, maintaining, repairing, replacing, transporting from location to loca- tion, and delivery of the signs to the City at the completion of the construction, in good working order, and as directed by the Engineer, and no other compensation will be made. SECTION 207 -PIPE 207-2 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE. 207-2.5 Joints. Add the following: When watertight joints are indicated on the plans they shall be of the rubber-gasketed type meeting the requirements of ASTM Standard Specification designations C 361-95 and C 443-94. Pipe designated in the plans as "pressure pipe" or with a 1 00-year hydraulic grade line at or above the soffit shall be bell and groove spigot joint with "0" rings conforming to ASTM C-443 and C-361 for the limits shown on the plans. 207-9 IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 207-9.2.2 Pipe Joints. Unless otherwise shown on the Plans, all joints shall be the push-on type joint. Joints and accessories shall conform to the requirements and dimensions specified in ANSI A21.11, AWWA C111. Rubber gasket material shall conform to 208-1.2 and AWWA C111 and ANSI A21.11- 90. 207-9.2.3 Fittings. Add the following: Ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accord- ance with ANSI 21.50, AWWA C150 and ANSI 21.51, AWWA C151, and shall be of the size and thickness classes shown on the Plans. Unless otherwise specified, size 4-inches through 6-inches DIP shall be thickness Class 52, while size 8-inches and larger shall be thickness Class 50. 207-9.2.4 Lining and Coating. Replace with the following: Unless otherwise specified, all iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with double thickness, cement motor lining with cement conforming to ASTM C150 Type II, AWWA C104/A21.4.90 and outside coating of bituminous coating a minimum of 2 mils. thick in accordance with AWWA C151 or C100. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 118 of 173 Pages 207-10 STEEL PIPE add the following: 207-10.1 General Fabricated Steel Pipe and Fittings shall conform in all respects to Carlsbad Munic- ipal Water District Rules and Regulations for Construction of (Potable or Reclaimed) Water Mains, latest edition. 207-10.1.2 Submittals. The Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with Section 2-5.3, Submittals Shop Drawings. Submittals are required for the following: Shop Drawings Manufacturer's tests Fabrication Details Protective Coatings Layout Drawings Mill Reports or Plant Test Reports Dimensional Checks Welding Procedures/Certification for Field Welding Shop Drawings shall be submitted and approved prior to manufacture of pipe. 207-10.1.3 Quality Assurance. Field welders shall be certified under Section IX, Part A of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or in accordance with AWWA C206, Section 3. Welders shall submit a copy of their certification to the District prior to performing any field welding. Certifications shall be dated within three (3) years of the job to be performed. The top of all pipe and specials shall be clearly identified by marking the top with "T.O.P." for easy identifications in the field. Plainly mark each length of pipe at the bell end to identify the proper location of the pipe item by reference to the layout schedule. 207-10.1.4 Protective Coatings and Linings. All steel pipe and fittings exposed within a vault or ~ above ground shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C205 and C602 and painted ...,.,., in accordance with CMWD Approved Materials List. All steel pipe and fittings for underground service shall be cement-mortar lined, taped wrapped and cement-mortar coated in accordance with AWWA C205, C214 and C602 unless otherwise specified on the Drawings. Add the following section: 207-25 UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE. Add the following section: 207-25.1 Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape: Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape shall have a minimum 0.13 mm (0.005") overall thickness, with no less than a 35 gauge (AWG), 0.14 mm aluminum foil core. The foil must be visible from both sides. The layers shall be laminated together with the extrusion lamination process, not adhesives. No inks or printing shall extend to the edges of the tape. All printing shall be encased to avoid ink rub-off. Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape shall conform to the properties listed in Tables 207-25(A) and 207-25 (B). 0 RAvisP.rl 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 119 of 173 Pages 0 TABLE 207-25.1(A) DETECTABLE UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE PROPERTIES Property Method Value Thickness ASTM 02103 0114 mm (0.0056") Tensile strength ASTM 0882 4500g/cm (25 lbs/inch) (5,500 PSI) Elongation ASTM 0882-88 <50 percent at break Printability ASTM 02578 >50 dynes/square centimeter Flexibili!Y ASTM 0671-81 Pliable hand Inks Manufacturing s_2_ecifications Heat-set Mylex Message repeat Manufacturing s_2_ecifications Every 500 mm(20") Foil Manufacturing specifications Dead soft/annealed Top layer Manufacturing specifications Virgin PET Bottom layer Manufacturing specifications Virgin LOPE Adhesives Manufacturing specifications >30 percent, solid 1.5#/R Bond strength Boiling H20 at 1 00 degrees Celsius Five hours without peel Colors APWACode See Table 207-25.1 (B) TABLE 207-25.1(B) DETECT ABLE UNDERGROUND UTILITY MARKING TAPE COLORS Color Utility Marked Red Electric power, distribution, transmission, and municipal electric systems. Yellow Gas and oil distribution and transmission, dangerous materials, product and steam. Orange Telephone and telegraph systems, golice and fire communications, and cable television. Blue Water systems. Green Sanitary and storm sewer systems, nonpotable. Brown Force mains. Purple Reclaimed water lines. Add the following section: 207-25.2 Materials Approvals. Detectable Underground Utility Marking Tape shall meet the re- quirements of each of the following agency/association publications. A. Department of Transportation, Materials Transportation Bureau, Office of Pipeline Safety. USAS code for pressure piping B31.8, paragraph 192.321 (e). B. National Transportation Safety Board, Washington, DC, Special Study Prevention of Damage to Pipelines. Adopted June 7, 197 4. Report NTSB-PSS-73-1 . C. American Petroleum Institute (API). Recommended practice for marking buried liquid petro- leum pipelines -APR RP 1109. D. General Services Administration, Washington, DC, Public Buildings Service Guide graph 18, Subparagraph 18.1 , Clause 18.1.1 . E. Rural Electrification Authority (REA), U.S. Department of Agriculture, Washington, DC, Na- tional Electrical Safety Code for Underground Construction for remote and immediate hazards. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 120 of 173 Pages SECTION 209 -ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS 209 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS. Modify as follows: Section 86, "Signals, Lighting and Electrical Systems", of the Caltrans Standard Specifications replaces Section 209, "Electrical Components", and Section 307, "Street Lighting and Traffic Signals", of the SSPWC, in all matters pertaining to the spec- ifications for measurement, payment, warranty, materials and methods of construction of street lighting and traffic signals. Section 86 of the Caltrans Standard Specifications is unmodified excepted as specified herein. For electrical components provided and installed in systems NOT including street lighting and traffic signals, Section 209 SSPWC is unmodified except as specified in sections other than Section 209, herein. SECTION 86-SIGNALS, LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 86-2 MATERIALS AND INSTALLATION Replace Section 86-2.02 with the following: 86-2.02 Removing and Replacing Improvements. In addition to the requirements of sections 7-9, "Protection and Restoration of Existing Improvements" and 306-1.5, "Trench Resurfacing", improve- ments such as sidewalks, curbs, gutters, portland cement concrete and asphalt concrete pavement, underlying material, lawns and plants, and any other improvements removed, broken or damaged by the Contractor's operations, shall be replaced or reconstructed with the same kind of material as found on the work or with materials of equal quality. The new work shall be left in a serviceable condition. Whenever a part of a square or slab of existing concrete sidewalk, curb, gutter, or driveway is broken or damaged, the entire square, section or slab shall be removed and the concrete reconstructed as ~ above specified. The outline of all areas to be removed in portland cement concrete sidewalks and .......,/ driveways and in pavements shall be cut to a minimum depth of 0.17 foot (2") with an abrasive type saw prior to removing the sidewalk, driveways and pavement material. Cuts shall be neat and true along score lines, with no shatter outside the removal area. Replace Section 86-2.058 with the following: 86-2.058 Use. Exposed conduit installed on a painted structure shall be painted the same color as the structure. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum metric trade size of conduit shall be: 1) From an electrolier to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 41 (1 1/2" dia). 2) From a pedestrian push button post to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 27 (1" dia). 3) From a signal standard to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 53 (2" dia). 4) From a controller cabinet to the adjacent pull box shall be Size 78 (3" dia). 5) For detector runs shall be Size 78 (3" dial. 6) Not otherwise specified shall be Size 78 (3" dial. Add the following: 86-2.08 Conductors. Signal cable shall be used for all new traffic signal installations. Individual conductors shall not be used. Add the following: 86-2.098 Installation. All conductors shall be pulled directly from the spool into the conduit and shall not be dragged on the ground as to cause damage to the conductors. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 121 of 173 Pages 86-3 CONTROLLER ASSEMBLIES Add the following: 86-3.04A Cabinet Construction. Controller cabinets shall be fabricated from aluminum sheet. Con- troller cabinets shall have a single front door equipped with a Best Company lock core and lock. No other manufacturers shall be accepted. Add the following section: 86-3.05F Document Tray. Controller cabinets shall have a pull-out type document tray. Add the following section: 86-3.05G Uninterruptible Power System. An uninterruptible power system (UPS) shall be installed in each controller cabinet. The UPS shall be Clary SP 1000 series (or approved equal)and shall provide a minimum of eight (8) hours of continuous red flash operation at intersections using red LED signal indications and provide power conditioning to the controller. Batteries for the UPS shall be housed in a NEMA 3R rated cabinet mounted to the side of the Model 332 cabinet per Caltrans specifications. The battery cabinet door shall be equipped with a Best Company lock core and lock. 86-5 DETECTORS Replace Section 86-5.01A(5) with the following: 86-5.01 A(5) Installation Details. Installation and tests shall conform to the details and notes shown on the plans. Unless shown otherwise each loop shall consist of 3 turns of conductor as specified in Section 86-5.01 A(4), "Construction Materials." Slots cut in the pavement shall be washed clean, blown out and thoroughly dried before installing conductors. Residue resulting from slot cutting operations shall not be permitted to flow across shoulders or lanes occupied by public traffic and shall be removed from the pavement surface before any residue flows off of the pavement surface. Residue from slot cutting operations shall be disposed of outside the highway right of way in accordance with Section 7- 8.1 , "Cleanup and Dust Control." After conductors are installed in the slots cut in the pavement, the slots shall be filled with sealant to within 1/a inch of the pavement surface. The sealant shall be at least one inch thick above the top conductor in the saw cut. Before setting, surplus sealant shall be removed from the adjacent road surfaces without the use of solvents. The sealant for filling slots shall conform to the following: Hot-Melt Rubberized Asphalt Sealant. Hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be in solid form at room temperature and fluid at an application temperature of 190°C (375°F) to 205°C (400°F). Fumes from the material shall be non-toxic. Sealant shall be suitable for use in both asphalt concrete and portland cement concrete. Performance characteristics of the cured hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be as follows: Property ASTM Designation Requirement Cone Penetration, 25°C, 150 g, 5 s D 5329, Sec. 6 3.5 mm, max. Flow, 60°C D 5329, Sec. 8 5 mm, max. Resilience, 25°C D 5329, Sec. 12 25%, min. Softening Point D36 82 oc, min. Ductility, 25°C, 50 mm/min D 113 300 mm, min. Flash Point, COG, oc D92 288 oc, min. Viscosity, Brookfield Thermosel, D4402 2.5-3.5 Pa·s No. 27 Spindle, 20 rpm, 190°C The hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be melted in a jacketed, double boiler type melting unit. Tem- perature of the heat transfer medium shall not exceed 245°C (475°F). Application of the hot-melt ft ~~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 122 of 173 Pages sealant shall be made with a pressure feed applicator or pour pot. Sealant shall be applied when the pavement surface temperature is greater than 4°C (40°F). Hot-melt sealant shall be packaged in containers clearly marked "Detector Loop Sealant" and specifying the batch and lot number of the manufacturer. Loop conductors shall be installed without splices and shall terminate in the nearest pull box. The loops shall be joined in the pull box in combination of series and parallel so that optimum sensi- tivity is obtained at the sensor unit. Final splices between loops and lead-in cable shall not be made until the operation of the loops under actual traffic conditions is approved by the Engineer. All loop conductors for each direction of travel for the same phase of a traffic signal system, in the same pull box, shall be spliced to a detector lead-in cable which shall be run from the pull box adjacent to the loop detector to a sensor unit mounted in the controller cabinet. All loop conductors for traffic moni- toring shall terminate in a pull box or terminal strip in the traffic monitor station cabinet when a cabinet of that type is installed. Conductors for inductive loop traffic signal and traffic monitoring installations shall be identified and banded, in pairs, by lane, in the pull box adjacent to the loops and near the termination of the conductors in the controller or traffic monitoring station cabinet. Bands shall conform to the provisions in Section 86-2.09, "Wiring." If asphalt concrete surfacing is to be placed, the loop conductors shall be installed prior to placing the uppermost layer of asphalt concrete. The conductors shall be installed, as shown on the plans, in the compacted layer of asphalt concrete immediately below the uppermost layer. Installation details shall be as shown on the plans, except the sealant shall fill the slot flush to the surface. Add the following section: 86-5.018 Emergency Vehicle Pre-Emption Detector System. Each emergency vehicle ~ pre-emption detector system shall conform to the details shown on the plans and these special ,.,_,; provisions and shall consist of an optical emitter assembly or assemblies located on the appropriate vehicle and an optical detector/discriminator assembly or assemblies located at the traffic signal. Each system shall permit detection of Class II emergency vehicles. Class II emergency vehicles shall be capable of being detected at any range up to 2,500 feet from the optical detector. Add the following section: 86-5.018(1) Optical Emitter Assembly. Each optical emitter assembly shall consist of an emitter unit, an emitter control unit and connecting cables and shall conform to the following: Each optical emitter assembly, including lamp, shall be designed to operate over an ambient temperature range of -34 o C to 7 4 o C at both modulation frequencies and to operate continuously at the higher frequency for a minimum of 3,000 hours at 25 o C ambient before failure of lamp or any other component. Each emitter unit shall be controlled by a single, maintained-contact switch on the respective emitter control unit. The switch shall be capable of being positioned in a readily accessible location to the vehicle driver. The control unit shall contain a pilot light to indicate that the emitter power circuit is energized and shall be capable of generating only Class II modulating code. Functional Requirements. Each emitter unit shall transmit optical energy in one direction only. The signal from each emitter unit shall be capable of being detected at a distance of 2,500 feet when used with a standard optical detection/discriminator assembly. The modulation frequency for Class II signal emitters shall be 14.035 Hz ± 0.003 Hz. The standard optical detection/discriminator assembly to be ~ used in conducting the range tests shall be available from the manufacturer of the system. A certified ·....,./ performance report shall be furnished by the contractor with each assembly. The emitter unit shall be configured with a grating to provide precise directionality control. Electrical Requirements. Each optical emitter assembly shall be capable of providing full light output with input voltages between 10 and 16 volts DC. An optical emitter assembly shall not be damaged by input voltages up to 7.5 volts DC about the supply voltage. The optical emitter assembly shall not generate voltage transient, on the input supply, which exceeds the supply voltage by more than 4 volts. Each optical emitter assembly shall not consume more than 100 watts at 17.5 volts DC and shall have a power input circuit breaker rated at 10 to 12 amperes, 12 volts DC. The design and circuitry of each emitter unit shall permit its use on vehicles with either negative or positive ground without disassembly or rewiring of the unit. Mechanical Requirements. Each emitter unit shall be housed in a weatherproof, corrosion-resistant housing. The housing shall be provided with facilities to permit mounting on various types of vehicles and shall have provision for proper alignment of the emitter unit and for locking of the emitter unit into proper alignment. Each emitter control unit shall be provided with appurtenant hardware to permit its mounting in or on an emergency vehicle or mass transit vehicle. Where required for certain emergency vehicles, the emitter control unit and all exposed controls shall be weatherproof. Each emitter shall include a multi-purpose port compliant with the SAE J 1708 communication standard to enable unit configuration to be set into the emitter and read from the emitter. Add the following section: 86-5.01 8(2) Optical Detection/Discriminator Assembly. Optical detection/discriminator assembly shall consist of one or more optical detectors, connecting cable and a discriminator module and conform to the following: Each such assembly, when used with standard emitters, shall have a range of up to 2,500 feet for Class II signals. Standard emitters for Class II signals shall be available from the manufacturer of the system. Range measurements shall be taken with all range adjustments on the discriminator module set to "maximum". Add the following section: 86-5.01 8(3) Optical Detector. Each optical detector shall be a waterproof unit capable of receiving optical energy from one or two separately aimable directions. The horizontal angle between the two directions shall be variable from 5 degrees to 180 degrees. The reception angle for each photocell assembly shall be a maximum of 8 degrees in all directions about the aiming axis of the assembly. Measurements of reception angle will be taken at a range of 2,500 feet for a Class II emitter. All internal circuitry shall be solid state and electrical power shall be provided by the associated discriminator module. Each optical detector shall be contained in a housing, which shall include one or two rotatable photocell assemblies, an electronic assembly and a base. The base shall have an opening to permit its mounting on a mast arm. Each optical detector shall weigh no more than 2.5 pounds and shall present a maximum wind load area of 36 square inches. The housing shall be provided with weep holes to permit drainage of condensed moisture. Each optical detector shall be installed, wired and aimed as specified by the manufacturer. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 124 of 173 Pages Add the following section: 86-5.01 8(4) Optical Detector Cable. Optical detector cable shall meet the requirements of IPCEA- S-61-402/NEMA WC 5, Section 7.4, 600 volt control cable, 75°C, Type Band the following: The cable shall contain three conductors, each of which shall be AWG #20 (7x28) stranded, tinned copper with low-density polyethylene insulation. Minimum average insulation thickness shall be 25 mils. The insulation of individual conductors shall be color coded as follows: Yellow Blue Orange Bare (Drain) - Detector Signal #1 Detector Signal #2 Power(+) Common or Ground The shield shall be either tinned copper braid or aluminized polyester film with a nominal 20 percent overlap. Where the film is used, an AWG #20 (7x28) standard, tinned, bare drain wire shall be place between the insulated conductors and the shield and in contact with the conductive surface of the shield. The jacket shall be black polyvinyl chloride with a minimum rating of 600 volts and 80 o C and a minimum average thickness of 45 mils. The jacket shall be marked as required by IPCEA/NEMA. The finished outside diameter of the cable shall not exceed 0.3 inches. The capacitance of the optical detector cable, as measured between any conductor and the other conductors and the shield, shall not exceed 14.3 microfarads per 1000 feet. The characteristic impedance of the optical detector cable shall be 0.6 ohms per 1000 feet. Add the following section: 86-5.01 8(5) Discriminator Module. Each discriminator module shall be designed to be compatible and usable with Model 170 controller unit and to be mounted in the input file of a Model 332 controller cabinet, and shall conform to the requirements of Chapter 1 of the State of California, Department of Transportation, "Traffic Signal Control Equipment Specifications", dated January 1989, and to all addenda thereto current at the time of project advertisement. Each discriminator module shall be capable of operating one or two channels and shall be capable of: 1. Receiving Class II signals at a range of up to 2,500 feet. 2. Decoding the signal on the basis of frequency at 14.035 Hz± 0.003 Hz for Class II signals. 3. Establishing the validity of received signals on the basis of frequency and length of time received. A signal shall be considered valid only when received for more than 0.50 seconds. No combination of Class I signals shall be recognized as a Class II signal regardless of the number of signals being received, up to a maximum of ten signals. Once a valid signal has been recognized, its effect shall be held by the module in the event of temporary loss of the signal for a period adjustable from 4.5 seconds to 11 seconds in at least 2 steps at 5 ± 0.5 seconds and 10 ± 0.5 seconds. 4. Providing an output for each channel that will result in "low" or grounded condition of the appropriate input of a Model170 controller unit. For Class II signals the output shall be steady. Each discriminator module shall be powered from 115 volt (95 volts ACto 135 volts AC), 60Hz mains and will contain an internal, regulated power supply that supports up to twelve optical detectors. Electric power, one detector input for each channel and one output for each channel, shall terminate at the printed circuit board edge connector pins listed below. Board edge connector pin assignments ~ shall be as follows: ......,; Pins A D E F H J K L M N Function Ground Channel A primary detector input Detector 24 VDC power output Channel A output, collector ( +) Channel A output, emitter (-) Channel B primary detector input Detector ground Earth ground AC-(in) AC +(in) Pins p R s T u v w X y z Function Not used Detector 24 VDC power output Not used Not used Not used Detector ground Channel B output collector ( +) Channel B output emitter (-) Not used Not used Two auxiliary inputs for each channel shall enter each module through the front panel connector. Pin assignment for the connector shall be as follows: Pins Function 13 Auxiliary detector 2 input, Channel A 14 Auxiliary detector 1 input, Channel B 15 Auxiliary detector 2 input, Channel B 28 Auxiliary detector 1 input, Channel A Each channel output shall be an optically isolated NPN open collector transistor capable of sinking 50 milliamperes at 30 volts and shall be compatible with Model 170 controller unit inputs. Each discriminator module shall be provided with means of preventing transients received by the detector from affecting the Model 170 controller assembly. Each discriminator module shall have a single connector board, shall be capable of being inserted into the input file of a Model 332 cabinet and shall occupy one slot width of the input file. The front panel of each module shall have a handle to facilitate withdrawal and the following controls and indicators for each channel: 1. A Command (High) and Advantage (Low) solid-state LED indicator for each channel to display active calls. 2. A test switch for each channel to test proper operation of Command or Advantage priority. 3. A single confirmation light control output for each channel. These outputs shall be user configurable through software for a variety of confirmation light sequences. The front panel shall be provided with a single circular, bayonet-captured, multi-pin connector for two auxiliary detector inputs for each channel. Connector shall be a mechanical configuration equivalent to a O-Shell 44-Pin front panel. Wiring for a Model 332 cabinet shall conform to the following: Slots 12 and 13 of the input file "J" shall be wired to accept a two-channel module. Field wiring for the primary detectors, except 24-volt DC power, shall terminate on either terminal board TB-9 in the controller cabinet or on the rear of input file "J", depending on cabinet configuration. Where TB-9 is used, position assignments shall be as follows: 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 126 of 173 Pages Position 4 5 7 8 Assignment Channel A detector input, 1st module (Slot J-12) Channel B detector input, 1st module (Slot J-12) Channel A detector input, 2nd module (Slot J-13) Channel B detector input, 2nd module (Slot J-13) The 24 volt cabinet DC power shall be available at Position 1 of terminal board TB-1 in the controller cabinet. All field wiring for the auxiliary detectors shall terminate on terminal board TB-0 in the controller cabinet. Position assignments are as follows: Position 7 8 9 10 11 12 Assignment +24VDC from (J-13E) Detector ground from (J-13K) Channel A auxiliary detector input 1 Channel A auxiliary detector input 2 Channel B auxiliary detector input 1 Channel B auxiliary detector input 2 The contractor shall demonstrate that all of the components of the system will perform satisfactorily as a system. Satisfactory performance shall be determined using the following test procedure: 1. Each system to be used for testing shall consist of an optical emitter assembly, an optical detector, at least 200 feet of optical detector cable and a discriminator module. 2. The discriminator modules shall be installed in the proper input file slot of Model 332 controller ~ cabinet. The controller cabinet, together with a Model 170 controller unit with the appropriate ...,rtllll operating program, a Model 210 monitor unit and 120 volt AC power, will be available as shown on the plans and as indicated elsewhere in these special provisions. 3. One test shall be conducted using a Class II signal emitter and a distance of 2,500 feet between the emitter and the detector. All range adjustments on the module shall be set to "Maximum" for each test. 4. Each test shall be conducted for a period of one hour, during which the emitter shall be operated for 30 cycles, each consisting of a one minute "on" interval and a one minute "off" interval. During the total test period: (A) the emitter signal shall cause the proper response from the Model 170 controller unit during each "on" interval and (B) there shall be no improper operation of either the Model 170 controller unit or the monitor during each "off" interval. Add the following section: 86-5.010 Video Detection System. The video detection system shall consist of one (1) video camera and one (1) video detection processor (VDP) for each vehicle approach. A video monitor and a pointing device shall be housed in the controller cabinet. The system shall include software that detects vehicles in multiple lanes using only the video image. Detection zones shall be defined using only a video menu and a pointing device to place zones on a video image. A minimum of 24 detection zones per camera shall be available. All video detection hardware furnished by the contractor shall be new and video detection software shall be latest available version. Add the following section: 86-5.01 0(1) Functional Requirements. The VDP shall process video from a single source. The source can be a video camera or a video tape player. The video shall be input to the VDP in RS 170 format and shall be digitized and analyzed in real time. The VDP shall detect the presence of vehicles ~· . in up to 24 detection zones per camera. A detection zone shall be approximately the width and length of one car. Detection zones shall be programmed via a menu displayed on a video monitor and a pointing device connected to the VDP. The menu shall facilitate placement of the detection zones and setting of zone parameters. A separate computer shall not be required for programming detection zones or to view system operations. The VDP shall store up to three different detection zone patterns. The VDP shall be able to switch to any one of the three different detection zone patterns within one second of user request via menu selection with the pointing device. The VDP shall detect vehicles in real time as they travel across each detection zone. The VDP shall have an RS-232 port for communications with an external computer. The VDP shall accept new detector patterns from an external computer through the RS-232 port when that computer uses the appropriate communications protocol for downloading detector patterns. The VDP shall send its detector patterns to an external computer through the RS-232 port when requested when that computer uses the appropriate communications protocol for uploading detector patterns. A Windows- based software program designed for local or remote connection and providing video capture, real- time detection indication and detection zone modification capability shall be provided with the system. The camera system shall be able to transmit an NTSC video signal, with minimal signal degradation, up to 300m (1000 ft). The VDP shall default to a safe condition, such as a constant call to each active detection channel, in the event of unacceptable interference in the video signal. The system shall be capable of automatically detecting a low visibility condition such as fog and respond by placing all defined detection zones in a constant call mode. A user-selected output shall be active during the low visibility condition that can be used to modify the controller operation if connected to the appropriate controller input modifier(s). The system shall automatically revert to normal detection mode when the low visibility condition no longer exists. Add the following section: 86-5.01 0(2) Operational Requirements. A minimum of 24 detection zones per camera shall be supported and each detection zone can be sized to suit the conditions and the desired vehicle detection region. A single detection zone shall be capable of replacing multiple loops and the detection zone may be AND'ed or OR'ed together to indicate vehicle presence on a single phase of traffic movement. Placement of detection zones shall be done by using a pointing device and a graphical interface built into the VDP and displayed on a video monitor. No separate computer shall be required to program the detection zones. Up to three detection zone patterns shall be saved within the VDP memory and this memory shall be preserved during power outages. The selection of the detection zone pattern for current use shall be done through a menu system. It shall be possible to activate a detection zone pattern for a camera from VDP memory and have the detection zone pattern displayed within one second of activation. When a vehicle is detected crossing a detection zone, the detection zone will flash a symbol on the screen to confirm the detection of the vehicle. Detection shall be at least 98% accurate in good weather conditions and at least 96% accurate under adverse weather conditions (rain, snow or fog). Detector placement shall not be more distant from the camera than a distance of fifteen times the mounting height of the camera. The VDP shall provide up to eight channels of vehicle presence detection through a NEMA TS1 port. The VDP shall provide dynamic zone reconfiguration (DZR) to enable normal detector operation of existing zones except the one being added or modified during the setup process. The VDP shall output a constant call on any detection channel when the corresponding zone is being modified. Detection zone outputs shall be configurable to allow the selection of presence, pulse, extend and delay outputs. Timing parameters of pulse, extend, and delay outputs shall be user definable between 0.1 and 25.0 seconds. Up to six detection zones shall be capable of counting the number of vehicles detected. The count value shall be internally stored for later retrieval through the RS-232 port. The data collection interval shall be user definable in periods of five, fifteen, thirty or sixty minutes. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 128 of 173 Pages Add the following section: 86-5.01 0(3) Hardware Requirements. The VDP shall be housed in a durable metal enclosure suitable for shelf mounting in the side rails of the controller cabinet. The VDP enclosure shall not exceed 180mm (7.1 in) in length and 157mm (6.2 in) in depth. The VDP shall operate satisfactorily in a temperature range of -34°C to +74°C (-29°F to +165°F) and a humidity range of O%RH to 95% RH, non-condensing. The VDP shall be powered by 24 volts DC. VDP power consumption shall not exceed 1 0 watts. The VDP shall include an RS-232 port for serial communications with a remote computer. This port shall be a 9-pin "D" subminiature connector on the front of the VDP. The front of the VDP shall include one BNC video input connection suitable for RS 170 video inputs. The video input shall include a switch-selectable 75-ohm or high impedance termination to allow camera video to be routed to other devices, as well as input to the VDP for vehicle detection. The front of the VDP shall include one BNC video output providing real time video output that can be routed to other devices. Add the following section: 86-5.01 0(4) Video Detection Camera. The video camera shall be furnished by the VDP supplier and shall be qualified by the supplier to ensure proper system operation. The camera shall produce useable video image of the bodies of vehicles under all roadway lighting conditions, regardless of time of day. The minimum range of scene luminance over which the camera shall produce a useable video image shall be the minimum range of night time to day time but not less than the range of 0.1 lux to 10,000 lux. The camera shall use a CCD sensing element and shall output monochrome video with resolution of not less than 380 lines vertical and 380 lines horizontal. The camera shall include an electronic shutter control based upon average scene luminance and shall be equipped with a factory adjusted manual iris. The camera shall include a variable focal length lens with variable focus that can be adjusted, without opening the camera housing, to suit the site geometry by means of a portable interface device ':) designed for that purpose and manufactured by the detection system supplier. The horizontal field of view shall be adjustable from 8.1 o to 45.9°. A single camera configuration shall be used for all approaches in order to minimize setup time and spares required by the user. The camera electronics shall include AGC to produce a satisfactory image at night. The camera shall be housed in a weather-tight sealed enclosure. The camera enclosure shall be able to rotate to allow proper alignment between the camera and the traveled road surface. The camera enclosure shall be equipped with a sun shield. The sun shield shall include a provision for water diversion to prevent water from flowing in the camera's field of view. The camera enclosure with sun shield shall be less than 170mm (6 in) in diameter, less than 380mm (15 in) long, and shall weigh less than 13.3kg (6 pounds) when the camera and lens are mounted inside the enclosure. The camera enclosure shall include a thermostatically controlled heater to assure proper operation of the lens at low temperatures and to prevent moisture condensation on the optical faceplate of the enclosure. When mounted outdoors in the enclosure, the camera shall operate satisfactorily in a temperature range of -34°C to +60°C (-29°F to +140°F) and a humidity range of 0% RH to 100% RH. The camera shall be powered by 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz. Power consumption shall be 15 watts or less under all conditions. Recommended camera placement height shall be 1Om (33 ft) above the roadway, and over the traveled way on which vehicles are to be detected. For optimum detection, the camera should be centered above the traveled roadway. The camera shall view approaching vehicles at a distance not to exceed 100m (350ft) for reliable detection (height:distance ration of 10:100). Camera placement and field of view shall be unobstructed and as noted in the installation documentation provided by the ~ supplier. -J f'nntral"'t 1\ln J;(lflA1 Pan<> 1 ?0 nf 1 7~ Pan<:>c The camera enclosure shall be equipped with separate, weather-tight connections for power and video cables at the rear of the enclosure. These connections may also allow diagnostic testing and viewing of the video signal at the camera while the camera is installed, using a lens adjustment module supplied by the VDP supplier. Video and power shall not be connected within the same connector. The video signal output by the camera shall be black and white in RS170 or CCIR format. The video signal shall be fully isolated from the camera enclosure and power cabling. Add the following section: 86-5.01 0(5) Installation Requirements. The coaxial cable to be used between the camera and the VDP in the controller cabinet shall be Belden 8281 or a 75 ohm, precision video cable with 20 gauge solid bare copper conductor (9.9 ohms/M), solid polyethylene insulating dielectric, 98% (min) tinned copper double-braided shield and black polyethylene outer covering. The signal attenuation shall not exceed 0.78 dB per 30m (100ft) at 10 MHz. Nominal outside diameter shall be 8mm (0.304 in). The coaxial cable shall be a continuous, unbroken run from the camera to the VDP. This cable shall be suitable for installation in conduit or overhead with appropriate span wire. 75 ohm BNC plug connectors shall be used at both the camera and controller. The coaxial cable, BNC connector and crimping tool shall be approved by the supplier of the video detection system, and the manufacturer's instructions must be followed to ensure proper connection. The power cabling shall be 16 AWG three conductor cable. The cabling shall comply with the National Electric Code, as well as local electrical codes. Cameras may acquire power from the luminaire if necessary. The video detection system shall be installed by supplier factory certified installers and as recommended by the supplier and documented in the installation materials provided by the supplier. Proof of factory certification shall be provided. Add the following section: 86-5.01 0(6) Warranty. The supplier shall provide a limited two year warrant on the video detection system. See supplier's standard warranty included in the Terms and Conditions of Sale documentation. During the warranty period, technical support shall be available from the supplier via telephone within four hours of the time a call is made by the user. This support shall be made available from factory certified personnel or factory certified installers. During the warranty period, updates to the VDP software shall be made available from the supplier without charge. Add the following section: 86-5.01 0(7) Maintenance and Support. The supplier shall maintain an adequate inventory of parts to support maintenance and repair of the video detection system. These parts shall be made available for delivery within 30 days of placement of an acceptable order at the supplier's current pricing and terms of sale for said parts. The supplier shall maintain an ongoing program of technical support for the video detection system. This technical support shall be available via telephone, or via personnel sent to the installation site upon placement of an acceptable order at the supplier's current pricing and terms of sale for on-site technical support services. Installation or training support shall be provided by a factory authorized representative. All product documentation shall be written in the English language. The contractor shall ensure the presence of a factory authorized representative at the time of traffic signal turn-on. ft \.1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 130 of 173 Pages SECTION 210 -PAINT AND PROTECTIVE COATINGS 210-1 PAINT. 210-1.5 Paint Systems. Add the following to Table 21 0-1.5(A) TABLE 210-1.5 CAl Surface to be Painted Pre-Treatment I Surface Prepara-Primer Finish Coats tion Temporary Railing type Abrasive Blast Cleaning to a None Two coats white Acrylic (K) Roughened, Textured Appearance Emulsion Paint (1l .. (1) acrylic emuls1on pamt des1gned for use on extenor masonry. Th1s pa1nt shall comply mall respects to Federal Spec1flcat1on TI-P-19 (latest revision), Paint, Acrylic Emulsion, Exterior. This paint may be tinted by using "universal" or "all purpose" concentrates. 210-1.6 Paint for Traffic Striping, Pavement Marking, and Curb Marking. Modify as follows: Paint for traffic lane lines, turn pocket lines, edge lines, channelizing lines, bike lane lines, chevrons, and curbs shall be rapid dry water borne conforming to CAL TRANS Specification No. PTWB-01. Paint for pavement legends, pavement symbols, pavement arrows, cross walks, parking stall markings and stop bars shall be alkyd thermoplastic conforming to CAL TRANS Specification No. 801 0-19A. Glass beads shall be applied to the surface of the rapid dry water borne paint and the molten thermoplastic material and shall conform to the requirements of CAL TRANS Specification No. 8010-004 (Type II). CAL TRANS Specifications for water borne paint, thermoplastic material and glass beads may be ob- tained from the CAL TRANS Transportation Laboratory, P .0. Box 19128, Sacramento, CA 95819, tel- ephone number (916) 227-7000. 210-3 GALVANIZING. Add the following section: 210-3.6 Galvanizing for Traffic Signal Facilities. The requirements of this section shall pertain only to the preparation and galvanizing of traffic signal facilities. Galvanizing of products fabricated from rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes, plates, bars and strip 3.2 mm (1/8") thick or thicker, shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 123, except that complete seal welding of tightly contacting surfaces of these products prior to galvanizing is required only where seal welding is shown on the plans or specified in these special provisions. Except for pre-galvanized standard pipe, galva- nizing of material 3.2 mm (1/8") thick or thicker shall be performed after fabrication into the largest practical sections. At the option of the Contractor, material thinner than 3.2 mm (1/8") shall be galvanized either before fabrication in conformance with the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 525M, Coating Designation Z600, or after fabrication in conformance with the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 123, except that the weight of zinc coating shall average not less than 365 g per square meter (1.2 oz. per ft2) of actual surface area with no individual specimen having a coating weight of less than 305 g per square meter (1.0 oz. per ft2). Galvanizing of standard pipe shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Designation: A 53. Galvaniz- ing will not be required for stainless steel, monel metal and similar corrosion resistant parts. Fabrication shall include all operations such as shearing, cutting, punching, forming, drilling, milling, bending, welding and riveting. All welded areas shall be thoroughly cleaned prior to galvanizing to remove all ~lab or other m~terial that would !n.terfere with the adherence of the zi~c. When it is neces~~ sary to straighten any sect1ons after galvamz1ng, the work shall be performed Without damage to th~ zinc coating. Galvanizing of iron and steel hardware and nuts and bolts, when specified or shown on the plans, shall conform to the specifications of ASTM Designation: A 153, except whenever threaded studs, bolts, nuts, and washers are specified to conform to ASTM Designation: A 307, A 325, A 325M, A 449, A 563, A 563M, or F 436 and zinc coating is required, they shall be hot-dip zinc coated or mechanically zinc coated in accordance with the requirements of the ASTM Designations. Unless otherwise speci- fied, galvanizing shall be performed after fabrication. Components of bolted assemblies shall be gal- vanized separately before assembly. Tapping of nuts or other internally threaded parts to be used with zinc coated bolts, anchor bars or studs shall be done after galvanizing and shall conform to the re- quirements for thread dimensions and overtapping allowances in ASTM Designation: A 563 or A 563M. When specified, painting of zinc coated surfaces shall be in accordance with the procedures in Section 210.1 "Paint". Galvanized surfaces that are abraded or damaged at any time after the appli- cation of the zinc coating shall be repaired by thoroughly wire brushing the damaged areas and re- moving all loose and cracked coating, after which the cleaned areas shall be painted with two appli- cations of unthinned zinc-rich primer (organic vehicle type) conforming to the provisions in Section 210-3.5, "Repair of Damaged Zinc Coating." Aerosol cans shall not be used. SECTION 212-LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION MATERIALS 212-1 LANDSCAPE MATERIALS. 212-1.2.3 Commercial Fertilizer. add the following: Preplant fertilizer shall be granular commercial fertilizer 7-7-7 or approved equal. Postplant fertilizer shall be 12-4-6 or approved equal with Ca, Fe, Zn, and Mn and with the majority of nitrogen in nonammoniac form to prevent acidification of soil. Planting tablets shall be compressed fertilizer tablets with a 20-1 0-5 analysis. 212-1.2.4 Organic Soil Amendment. Add the following: For all types of Organic Soil Amendment mulch materials produced from pine trees grown in Alameda, Monterey, Santa Clara, Santa Cruz or San Mateo Counties shall not be used in the Work. Type 1A Organic Soil Amendment shall conform to the requirements for type 1 Organic Soil Amendment except as modified hereinafter. Type 1 A Or- ganic Soil Amendment shall be a wood or rice residual product derived from the bark of pine, white fir, or red fir or cedar or redwood shavings or rice hulls. Type 1 A Organic Soil Amendment shall be manufactured from clean wood, free from clods coarse objects and rocks and shall conform to the properties shown in Table 212-1.2.4(8): Table 212-1.2.4(8) SOIL AMENDMENT PROPERTIES Property Minimum Maximum Dry Weight Nitrogen (1) (1) Dry Weight Passing 25 mm. (1 ") Sieve 100% 100% Dry Weight Passing #4 Sieve 95% 100% Dry Weight Passing #16 Sieve 45% 65% Dry Weight Passing #30 Sieve 30% 40% Dry Weight Passing #50 Sieve 0% 10% Dry Weight Passing #1 00 Sieve 0% 2% Salinity (1) l1l Iron (Dilute acid soluble on dry weight basis) 0.08% --- Ash (d_ry weight basis) 0% 6.0% pH 6.0 7.0 Wettability (1) (1) (1) (As Requ1red by Table 212-1.2.4(A) SSPWC) r"''.-__ .. nn -L .. ""7n n---- For all types of Organic Soil Amendment the Contractor shall supply the Engineer a sample of the proposed amendment accompanied by an analytical analysis from a qualified agricultural laboratory certifying compliance to the requirements herein. Qualified agricultural laboratories shall have an on- going quality assurance program that fulfills the requirements of the most recent version of the 'West- ern States Laboratory Proficiency Testing Program Soil and Plant Analytical Methods". Certificates of compliance shall contain a statement attesting that the organic soil amendment meets the require- ments of these specifications and that the testing agricultural laboratory does fulfill the requirements of "Western States Laboratory Proficiency Testing Program Soil and Plant Analytical Methods". Said submittal shall be in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3. 212-1.2.5 Mulch for Hydraulic Method Seed Lawn Planting. Add the following: The terms Hy- droseeding and Hydroseed shall be synonymous with Hydraulic for the purposes of Section 212. Dis- turbed Areas planting areas shall be mulched, fertilized and seeded using method B. Mulch shall be manufactured from virgin wood cellulose fiber mulch and shall not contain growth or germination in- hibitors. When mixed with water, the mulch shall remain in uniform suspension and when blended with the seed, fertilizer, and other approved additives, shall form a homogeneous slurry. When ap- plied, the fibers shall form a moisture absorbing membrane with adequate percolation properties suf- ficient to allow one hundred percent of water applied at the rate of 3.1 liters per minute per square meter (0.075 gallons per minute per square foot) onto a surface inclined at a 2:1 (horizontal: vertical) slope to pass through the membrane. A non-phyto-toxic wetting agent shall be added to the slurry mixture. A water soluble, non-toxic green dye shall be added in sufficient quantity to clearly delineate the planted areas. When required, binder shall be added to the slurry mixture and shall be "CPA 4000", "AZTAC", "Ecology Control", "M-Binder", or approved equal. Add the following section: 212-1.2.5.1 Disturbed Area Mulch Fertilizer and Additives. In addition to the seed mix shown in the ~ table for Disturbed Areas the slurry mixture shall be applied at the rates shown in Table 212-1.2.5.1 (A) ,...,; Table 212-1.2.5.1(A) DISTURBED AREA MULCH FERTILIZER AND ADDITIVES Component Application Rate grams per sq. meter (pounds per acre) Virgin Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch 225 (2000) Binder (1) 7 (60) Fertilizer (16-20-0) Ammonium Phos-35 (300) phate Sulfate, Plus 15% Soil Sulfur Wetting Agent Per Mfg. Recommendation Green Colorant Per Mfg. Recommendation (1) Requ1red to be Incorporated only when apphed between the months of Nov. through Feb. Add the following section: 212-1.2.6 Herbicides and Pesticides. Shall be used in their appropriate applications with strict ad- herence to manufacturer's specifications and instructions. Postemergent herbicide for all areas shall be Glyphosate, N-(phosphonomethyl) glycine, in the form of its isopropylamine salt such as Roundup Pro, Diquat, Montar, or approved equal. Preemergent herbicide for shrubs and groundcover areas planted from flats shall be Treflan, Surflan, Eptan, or approved equal. Add the following section: 212-1.2.7 General Soil Conditioners. Agricultural-grade gypsum shall be a calcium sulfate (CaS04 ·O H20) product-94.3 percent. 90 percent shall pass a 50-mesh screen. Control of dust during application is mandatory. Iron Sulfate shall be ferrous sulfate in pelletized or granular form containing not less than 20.0 percent iron expressed as metallic iron. Iron Sulfate pellets shall be of size and gradation such that 98 percent is retained on a 10-mesh screen. Add the following section: 212-1.2.8 Stabilizing Emulsion. Stabilizing emulsion shall be a concentrated liquid chemical that forms a plastic film upon drying and allows water and air to penetrate. The film shall be nonflammable and shall have an effective life of at least one year. Stabilizing emulsion shall be nontoxic to plant and animal life and nonthinking to concrete or painted surfaces. In the cured state the stabilizing emulsion shall not be re-emulsifiable. The material shall be registered with, and licensed by the California, Department of Food and Agriculture, as an "auxiliary soil chemical". Stabilizing emulsion shall be miscible with water at time of mixing and application. 212-1.3 Seed. Add following: The quantity of pure live seed supplied shall meet or exceed the quantity shown in the specified mixes. Seed shall not contain more than 0.5 percent weed seed by volume Seed types shall be as specified on the plans and planting legends, and shall be applied at the rates indicated. All brand-name, patented seed must be received by Contractor in original manufacturer's bag. Seed shall be received by Contractor in separate containers specifying kind, quantity, purity, and germina- tion. Contractor shall provide the Engineer with each seed bag label used in the Work. Add the following section: 212-1.3.1 Seed for Disturbed Areas. Hydroseeding mix for Disturbed Areas shall consist of no less than the seed varieties shown in Table 212-1.3.1 (A). Table 212-1.3.1(A) SEED FOR DISTURBED AREAS Seed Variety Application Rate grams _Q_er sq. meter (pounds per acre) Rose Clover 2.5 20(1) Festuca Megalura, Zorro Fescue 2.5 20 Eschscholzia Californica 0.35 3 Achillea Millefolia 0.45 4 Alyssum (Carpet Of Snow) 0.35 3 Dimorpholeca 0.25 2 .. (1) Rose Clover shall be Inoculated w1th a mtrogen f1x1ng bactena and be apphed dry either by drilling or broadcasting immediately before hydraulic application of the remaining seed mix and mulch. Add the following section: 212-1.3.2 Seed for Southern Willow Scrub and Riparian Scrub Areas. Hydroseeding mix for the Southern Willow Scrub and Riparian Scrub area shall consist of no less than the seed varieties shown in Table 212-1.3.2(A). 212-1.4.1 General. Add the following: Plants shall be the variety and size shown on the plans or in the special provisions and shall conform to the requirements of these specifications. Contractor shall notify the Engineer 48 hours before each plant delivery so that the Engineer can inspect the plants. The sci- entific and common names of plants herein specified shall conform to the approved names given in "A Checklist of Woody Ornamental Plants in California, Oregon and Washington" published by the Univer- sity of California, Division of Agriculture Sciences, Publication 4091 (1979). Each group of plant materials delivered on site shall be labeled clearly as to species and variety. All patented plants (cultivars) required by the plant list shall be delivered with a proper plant patent attached. The Contractor shall obtain clear- ance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, as required by law, before planting plants delivered ft ~1 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 134 of 173 Pages from outside the County in which they are to be planted. Evidence that clearance has been obtained shall be filed with the Engineer. All plants furnished by the Contractor shall be true to type or name as shown on the plans and shall be tagged identifying the plants by species or variety; however, determi- nation of plant species or variety will be made by the Engineer and the Engineer's decision shall be final. Plants shall be individually tagged or tagged in groups by species or variety. Carpobrotus cuttings need not be tagged. All plants shall comply with Federal and State laws requiring inspection for plant diseases and infestations. Inspection certificates required by law shall accompany each shipment of plants, and certificates shall be delivered to the Engineer. Plants furnished by the Contractor shall be healthy, shapely, and well-rooted, and roots shall show no evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any time. Plants shall be well-grown, free from insect pests and disease, and shall be grown in nurseries which have been inspected by the State Department of Food and Agriculture and have complied with the regulations thereof. The Engineer is the sole judge as to acceptability of each plant. Vigorous, healthy, well-proportioned plants are the intent of this specification. Plants which are even moderately "overgrown", or are show- ing signs of decline or lack of vigor, are subject to rejection. The size of the plants will be as shown on the plans. Plants larger in size than specified may be used with the approval of the Engineer, but the use of larger plants will make no change in contract price. If the use of larger plants is approved, soil amendments shall be increased proportionately. All plants not conforming to the requirements herein specified shall be considered defective and such plants, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected, and immediately removed from the site and replaced with new plants by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. The Engineer reserves the right to change the species, variety, and/or sizes of plant material to be furnished, provided that the cost of such plant changes do not exceed the cost of plants in the original bid, and with the provision that the Contractor shall be notified in writing, at least 60 days before the planting operation has commenced. No plant shall be transported to the planting area that is not thoroughly wet throughout the ball of earth surrounding the roots. Any plant that, in the opinion of the Engineer, has a damaged root ball or is dry or in a wilted condition when delivered to the planting area will not be accepted, and shall be replaced by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Each plant shall be handled and packed in the ap- proved manner for that species or variety, and all necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that the plants will arrive at the site of the work in proper condition for successful growth. Trucks used for transporting plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants from windburn. Root condition of plants furnished by the Contractor in containers will be determined by removal of earth from the roots of not less than 2 plants nor more than 2 percent of the total number of plants of each species or variety, except when container-grown plants are from several sources, the roots of not less than 2 plants of each species or variety from each source will be inspected by the Engineer. In case the sample plants inspected are found to be defective, the Agency reserves the right to reject the entire lot or lots of plants represented by the defective samples. Any plants rendered unsuitable for planting because of this inspection will be considered as samples and will not be paid for. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when plants are to be shipped to the project site. The notifi- cation shall be given not less than 1 0 days prior to the actual shipment date. Carpobrotus cuttings shall be 250 mm ( 1 0") or more in length and shall not be rooted. Delosperma cuttings shall be 150 mm (6") or more in length and shall not be rooted. Cuttings shall be tip cuttings from healthy, vigorous and strong-growing plants and shall be insect and disease free. Mature or brown-colored stem growths or cuttings which have been trimmed will not be accepted. Cuttings shall ~. . be planted not more than 2 days after cutting and shall not be allowed to dry or wither. ......,/ -- Carpobrotus cuttings shall not be taken from any plants that indicate the presence of ice plant scale (Pulvinaria species). The Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the location where cuttings are to be taken at least 1 0 days prior to taking the cuttings and shall be responsible for all permit and inspection fees involved in ob- taining cuttings. 212-1.5.3 Tree Stakes. Modify as follows: Tree stakes shall be 50mm (2") diameter turned lodgepole pine, pointed on their driven end. Add the following section: 212-1.6 Erosion Control Matting. Erosion control matting shall be made of 100-percent-biodegrada- ble, weed-free wheat straw of thickness and density yielding 270 grams per square meter (0.50 lb./sy) with photodegradable polypropylene netting with a density of 0.89 grams per square meter (1.64 lb/1 000 sy) having an approximate mesh interval of 50 mm x 50 mm (2" x 2"} on each face of the straw mat. The straw mat shall be sewn together with unidirectional lines of cotton or polypropylene thread spaced approximately 50 mm (2") apart. Erosion control matting shall be "North American Green, DS150", "BonTerra S2", or approved equal. Add the following section: 212-1.7 Erosion Control Mat Staples. Erosion control mat staples shall be 25 mm x 150 mm (1" x 6"), U-shaped 11-gauge mild steel staples. Add the following section: 212-1.8 Root Barriers. Root barriers shall be no less than 1m (39"} in width. Root barriers shall be "Biobarrier'', as manufactured by Reemay, Inc., 70 Old Hickory Boulevard, Old Hickory, TN 97138, Phone 615-84 7-7000, no substitutes will be accepted. 212·21RRIGATION SYSTEM MATERIALS. 212-2.1.3 Plastic Pipe for Use with Solvent Weld Socket or Threaded Fittings, add the following: Except as provided in this section, all buried piping in the irrigation system shall be installed with underground utility marking tape conforming to the requirements of section 207-21 and identifying it as reclaimed water. Intermittent pressure lines (lines on the downstream side of a controller valve that will not be subject to constant pressure) will not require underground utility marking tape. All PVC pipe used for irrigation systems shall be colored purple by the addition of a dye integral to the PVC. Painted pipe will not be accepted. Pressure mainline piping for sizes 50 mm (2"} and larger shall be PVC having a pressure rating of 2170 kPa (315 PSI), S.D. A. 13.5. Stenciled pipe is required for all irrigation system piping including portions not required to be marked with underground utility marking tape. All pipe shall have stenciling appearing on both sides of the pipe with the marking "Reclaimed Water'' in 16 mm (5/a") high letters repeated every 300 mm (12"). PVC non-pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC Schedule 40. Add the following section: 212-2.1.7 Brass Pipe and Fittings. Brass pipe shall be IPS standard weight 125 LB 85 percent copper and 15 percent zinc, trade designation seamless red brass pipe conforming to the require- ments of ASTM B43-91. Brass pipe fittings and connections shall be Standard 125 LB class 85 per- cent red brass fittings and connections. 0 Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 136 of 173 Pages 212-2.2.7 Valve Boxes. Add the following: All valve boxes shall be marked "RCV", "BV" or "QC", "PB" respectively. Remote control valves shall be marked with station numbers embossed on the valve cover with a brass tag. (RCV boxes shall have locking covers.) Other boxes such as pull boxes, etc., shall be marked with appropriate identification. Add the following section: 212-2.2.8 Ball Valves. Ball valves shall have bottom-loaded pressure-retaining stems, glass-rein- forced seats, and reinforced TFE stem packing seals. Valves sizes 13 mm (W') to 50 mm (2") shall be pressure rated at 4140 kPa (600 PSI) WOG and 1030 kPa (150-PSI) saturated steam. Each valve shall be tested, air under water, in the opened and closed position by the manufacturer. Ball valve must conform to Federal Specification WW-V-35B, Type II, Class A, Style 3, End Connection A or C. Add the following section: 212-2.2.9 Pressure Regulator Valve. Pressure regulator valve shall be bronze body with screw fitting. Add the following section: 212-2.2.9 Wye Strainers. Wye strainers shall have a cast iron or all-bronze body with a removable stainless steel or monel strainer. Wye strainers shall be capable of withstanding a cold water working pressure of 1034 kPa (150 psi). Wye strainers at backflow preventer assemblies shall be equipped with a gate valve at the outlet. All other wye strainers shall be equipped with a garden valve at the outlet. The strainer screen for the wye strainer in a backflow preventer assembly shall have an open area equal to at least 3 times the cross-sectional area of the pipe based on an iron pipe size and shall be woven wire fabric with 850-l..lm mesh or perforated sheet with 1.14 mm (0.045") diameter holes. All other wye strainers shall be equipped with 425-l..lm strainer screens. 212-2.4 Sprinkler Equipment. Add the following: All sprinkler heads are to have factory built-in check valves or a check valve under each head. Drip assemblies shall meet the following requirements: The drip emitter shall be Pepco Quadra or Rainbird XERI-Bird-8 or approved equal as called on draw- ings, with four ports. Drip tubing for emitter outlets shall be Rainbird (RBT-160V), Salce, or approved equal. Drip tubing stakes shall be Rainbird No. RS-13, Salce, or approved equal. Bug cap for drip tubing shall be manufactured by Rainbird, Pepco, or approved equal. The drip pressure regulator shall be Rainbird, Netafim PVR, or approved equal. Drip emitter filter shall be Amiad, Rainbird, or approved equal. Drip emitter access boxes shall be Rainbird No. SEB-6X, Salce Subterranean Emitter Box, or approved equal. Check valves shall be of heavy-duty virgin PVC construction with FIP thread inlet and outlet. Internal parts shall be stainless steel and neoprene. Antidrain valves shall be field adjustable against drain out from 1.5 m to 12m (5' to 40') of head. All sprinkler heads that are without valves in the heads are to have an antidrain valve feature and shall have an excess flow feature, which will automatically stop the flow of water when it exceeds the GPM preset by the manufacturer. Check valves shall be King Bros., Rainbird, or approved equal. 212-2.3 Backflow Preventer Assembly. Add the following: Backflow preventers shall be one of the approved reduced pressure principle devices listed by the California Department of Health Services, Division of Drinking Water and Environmental Management, 601 North 7th Street, Mailing Station (MS) 92, P.O. Box 942732, Sacramento, CA 94234-7320. Backflow preventers shall be factory assembled and shall include 2 check valves, one pressure dif- ferential relief valve, 2 shut-off valves and 4 test cocks. Backflow preventer and valves shall be the same size as the pipeline in which they are installed, unless otherwise shown on the plans. Backflow ~ preventer shut-off valves shall be manufactured from iron or bronze and shall be either resilient """"" 0 RAvi!':Arl 1/::10/1 ::1 r.ontr::~r.t No !'\OOR1 Add the following section. 212-3.41rrigation Electrical Service Equipment and Enclosures. Electrical service equipment shall incorporate the following elements: 1. One 1 00-amp, 120/240-volt, single-phase load center, as approved by the Engineer; 2. One 1 00-amp rated commercial meter socket suitable for the San Diego Gas and Electric Com- pany meter, with provision for test block bypass having a UL listing and EUSERC approval; 3. One 15-amp circuit breaker for each irrigation controller energized by the service; 4. One 20-amp circuit breaker for the duplex receptacle. 5. The design, assembly, grounding, wiring, and components of the irrigation electrical service equipment and enclosure shall meet the requirements of the 1996 edition of the National Electri- cal Code. 6. Electrical service equipment shall be enclosed in a cabinet constructed entirely of 14-gage, or heavier, 304 stainless steel. The cabinet shall be of welded construction with a brushed finish; anchoring points shall be inside the enclosure. 7. The cabinet shall be HYDROSAFE Model No. HS9, Strong Box, or approved equal. 8. The cabinet shall have a 304 stainless steel interior bulkhead separating the 120/240-volt electri- cal service section from the irrigation controller section. 9. No wood components shall be used in the enclosure. 10. Each section of the cabinet shall have full front opening doors with piano hinges, integral keylock and hasp and staple, or other provision, for padlock. 11. The cabinet shall be provided with cross-flow ventilation. Ventilation openings shall be located and designed to preclude rain, irrigation splash, vermin, and insects from entering the cabinet. 12. The controller side door shall have provision for mounting control schematics without the use of adhesives or fasteners. The service side door shall have a clear acrylic plastic window to allow the electrical meter to be read. 13. The cabinet shall have a duplex 15-amp, 120-volt receptacle with ground fault interrupter protec- tion mounted on the interior service side. ~ 14. Concrete footings and pads supporting the Electrical service equipment shall be 560-C-3250 and .._.,1 shall be no less than 150 mm ( 6") thick. 15. Anchor bolts to secure the service equipment to the concrete pad shall be 10 mm (318") diameter by 150 mm (6") long hot dip galvanized or stainless steel headed bolts with washers, without sleeves, conforming to section 304-1.7. Anchor bolts to secure the service equipment to the concrete pad shall be embedded in the concrete slab between 65 mm and 100 mm (2W' and 4"). SECTION 213-ENGINEERING FABRICS 213-2 GEOTEXTILES. 213-2.1 General. Add the following: Geotextile types shall be used for the applications listed in Table 213-2.1(A) Application of Geotextile Table 213-2.1{A) GEOTEXTILE APPLICATIONS Separation of Soil and Street Structural Section Separation of Soil and Subsurface Aggregate Drain Reinforcement of Street Structural Section Remediation and Separation of Soil Reinforcement of Soil Drainage at the Interface of Soil Structures DrainaQe at the Interface of Soil and Structures Rock Slope Protection Fabric for Rock Sizes Below 225 kg ("!4 Ton) Rock Slope Protection Fabric for Rock Sizes Including and Above 225 kg ("!4 Ton) Plant Protection Covering Type Designation 90WS 180N 200WS 270WS 270WS N/A N/A 180N 250N 90N The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a Certificate of Compliance in accordance with the provisions of Section 2-5.3.3 "Submittals". Said certificate shall certify that the permanent reflective channelizers comply with the plans and specifications and conform to the prequalified design and material requirements approved by the engineer and were manufactured in accordance with the ap- proved quality control program. SECTION 215 -FENCING Add the following section: 215-1 ENVIRONMENTAL FENCING Add the following section: 215-1.1 Materials. Environmental fence shall be minimum 4' high, orange colored plastic construction fencing installed prior to performing any work. Environmental fence shall be constructed of non-toxic, non-conductive polyethylene capable of withstanding temperatures from -58F degrees to 194F de- grees. Color shall be non-fading. Posts shall be 6' -6" long, shall be spaced no more than 1 0' -0" apart and buried portion shall be no less than 2'-6" deep. Used materials may be installed providing the used materials are good, sound, and are suitable for the purpose intended, as determined by the Engineer. Materials may be commercial quality providing the dimensions and sizes of the materials are equal to, or greater than, the dimensions and sizes specified herein. Posts shall be either metal or wood at the Contractor's option. Galvanizing and painting of steel items will not be required. Treating wood with wood preservatives will not be required. Concrete footings for metal posts will not be re- quired. ft ~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 141 of 173 Pages SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 3, CONSTRUCTION METHODS SECTION 300 -EARTHWORK 300-1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING. 300-1.1 General. add the following to the third paragraph: During surface clearing operations, the Contractor shall not cover or bury any plant growth or other objectionable materials. If the Contractor cannot successfully separate the plant growth from the surface soil and advertently or inadvertently mixes organic or other objectionable materials with the soil, the soil so contaminated shall be removed from the site by the Contractor. All costs, if any, associated with removing the soil mixed with organic or other objectionable materials and importing soil to replace said contaminated soil shall be borne by the Contractor and no additional payment therefore shall be made to the Contractor. 300-1.3 Removal and Disposal of Materials. add the following: Also included in clearing and grub- bing shall be removal and disposal of existing street poles and lights, metal guard rail, fences, asphalt concrete and aggregate base, concrete curb and gutter, concrete sidewalk, existing gate, existing headwalls, rip-rap, traffic signs, and other existing features which interfere with the work. Whether or not such items are shown on the plans they shall be removed as a part of clearing and grubbing. Existing underground pipes and conduits that are shown on the plans and designated to be removed shall be removed by the Contractor as a part of clearing and grubbing. 300-1.4 Payment. modify as follows: Payment for clearing and grubbing shall be made at the contract lump sum price for clearing and grubbing within the project limits and at stockpile locations and no other payments will be made. Unless otherwise noted on plans, the Contractor shall remove all existing abandoned pipelines and conduits of any type, or use, and pipelines and conduits of any type, or use, that are abandoned during the course of the work and shall replace said pipelines and conduits with properly compacted soils. Payment for removal and disposal of abandoned utilities shall be included in the lump-sum bid for Clearing and Grubbing, and no additional payment will be made. 300-2 UNCLASSIFIED EXCAVATION. 300-2.1 General. add the following: Unclassified excavation shall include removal and stockpile of suitable material, recompaction, mixing, grading for mitigation work, trenching and backfilling of storm drains, sewers, other utilities, disposal of unsuitable materials not included in the bid item for clearing and grubbing, all cut and fill including removal and recompaction of unsuitable soil, salvaging clean excavated material and filling areas to the required grades and cross section. Unclassified excavation shall be utilized onsite to make all fills shown on the plans. Unclassified excavation shall also include scarification and moisture adjustment and compaction of the top 300 mm (1 ') of the subgrade in the roadway prism in cut areas to 95 percent relative compaction, wetland mitigation grading and at- tendant work, export of remaining excess material to a disposal site or spoil area acquired by the Contractor and pumping and disposal of storm and ground water. 300-2.2.1 General. add the following: Alluvial and colluvial removal and recompaction shall consist of excavating, blending and recompacting loose soils in areas that are designated to receive fills. The existing loose soils shall be removed by the Contractor until a firm unyielding surface is exposed or to a depth determined by the Engineer. If the excavated material contains 4%, or more, water than the optimum moisture content the Contractor shall blend the wet soil with soils having a lower moisture content and/or spread the excavated material in a manner that enables the material to dry to optimum moisture content. The cost of spreading and/or drying shall be included in the contract unit price for removal and recompaction. The excavated material shall be placed and compacted in accordance with section 300-4 of the specifications except that section 300-4.9, Measurement and Payment, shall not apply. 300-2.2.1 General. add the following to the first paragraph: Such direction may include, but is not limited to, directing the Contractor to blend, adjust moisture content of, rework, and place unsuitable soils at specific locations or elevations on the site. Add the following section: 300-2.2.3 Compressible Soil. Compressible soils such as existing uncontrolled or unacceptable fill, alluvium, and colluvium may exist within portions of the Project site. Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall remove such compressible soils from areas to receive fill or from areas upon which surface improvements are to be placed. The removal and disposal of such compressible soils shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for unclassified excavation unless it is considered otherwise unsuitable by the Engineer in which case it may be paid for in accordance with section 300-2.2.1. 300-2.2.4 Instability of Cuts. Add the following: The Contractor shall remove additional material as directed by the Engineer to improve the stability of excavated cuts. The removal of such excavated material shall be paid for at the Contract Unit Price for unclassified excavation unless it is considered otherwise unsuitable by the Engineer, in which case it will be paid for in accordance with Subsection 300-2.2.1. 300-2.5 Slopes. add the following: The hinge points (the top and bottom) of slopes shall be located within 75 mm (0.25'} of the locations shown on the plans. 300-2.5 Slopes. add the following: after the first sentence of the first paragraph: A slope shall be defined as any area steeper than three horizontal to one vertical. 300-2.6 Surplus Material. add the following: The Contractor shall haul and dispose of all surplus material from the project. The Contractor shall utilize highway legal haul trucks for this export of material from the project site and to a site secured by the Contractor. No earth moving equipment or special construction equipment, as defined in section 565 of the California Vehicle Code, will be al- lowed for hauling material on public streets. 300-2.8 Measurement. delete the second paragraph relating to materials removed from stockpiles and add the following: Unclassified Excavation shall be measured based on the volume it occupies in its original position before excavating. The measurement shall be from the original ground contours after clearing and grubbing and the bottom of areas of excavation to the design elevations shown on the plans or actual ground contours existing in borrow sites after excavation or those for removal and recompaction of alluvial and colluvial materials or those for materials excavated to improve the stability of cuts, whichever is lower in elevation. No excavated material which is re-excavated will be measured for payment. Materials excavated or otherwise removed as all or part of any other bid item shall not be measured as Unclassified Excavation. f'nntr<~l"t 1\ln l:;flfiA1 O!lno. 1 A'l n.f 17'l Oo:1no.~ 300-2.9 Payment. add the following: Payment for work performed under sections 300-2.2.1, 300-2.2.2, 300-2.2.3 and 300-2.2.4, when the Engineer determines that the soils are unsuitable, shall be made for the actual labor, materials and equipment used to accomplish the work as per section 3- 3 EXTRA WORK of the specifications. Add the following section: 300-2.10 Grading Tolerance. The Contractor shall finish excavated areas other than slopes and subgrade below structures, within the roadway and sidewalk areas within 30 mm (0.1 ') of the grades shown on the plans. Subgrade tolerances shall conform to the requirements of section 301-1.4 SSPWC. 300-3 STRUCTURE EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL 300-3.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall excavate to the lines and levels required and/or shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, cribbing, pumping, and planking required. The Contractor shall excavate and maintain the bottom of all trenches in a condition that is level, firm, clean and free from all debris or foreign matter. Excavations shall be kept free from water at all times. The Contractor shall remove any unsuitable material encountered below grade as directed by the Engineer 300-3.6 Payment. add the following: Dewatering shall be paid for as an incidental to structure exca- vation and backfill and no additional compensation will be made therefore. 300-4 UNCLASSIFIED FILL 300-4.2 Preparation of Fill Areas. add the following: Except as provided in section 300-4.7, "Com- paction", areas proposed for improvements all fill (including backfill and scarified ground surfaces) shall be compacted by the Contractor to no less than 90 percent of maximum dry density as deter- mined in accordance with ASTM Test Procedure D1557-91. 300-4.5 Placing Materials for Fills. add the following: The Contractor shall perform grading such that the upper 900 mm (3') of fill placed in the roadway pavement area is composed of properly compacted low expansive soils. The more highly expansive soils shall be placed in the deeper fill areas and properly compacted or exported from the site. Low expansive soils are defined as those soils that have an Expansion Index of 50 or less when tested in accordance with 1994 USC Standard 18-2 as pub- lished by the International Conference of Building Officials. Should insufficient soils meeting there- quirement of an expansion index of 50 or less be present within the limits of work, soils of the least expansion index that are available within the limits of work shall be incorporated in the upper 900 mm {3') of fill placed in the roadway. The Contractor shall break rock encountered in the excavation into particles of less than 75 mm (3"). Particles with dimensions greater than 75 mm (3") shall be uniformly distributed over the area to be filled so that construction equipment can be operated in such a manner that the larger pieces will be broken into smaller particles and become incorporated with the other materials in the layer. This requirement for particle size reduction does not apply to cobbles, small boulders, and small hard rocks found within the surface soils and formational materials. Rocks having any dimension greater than 460mm (18") shall not be incorporated into the fill. Rock exceeding 150 mm (6") in diameter shall not be placed in the upper 900 mm (3') of any fill. When there are large quantities of rock to be placed in the fill, rocks shall not be nested, but shall be spread with sufficient room between them so that inter- vening voids can be adequately filled with fine material to form a dense, compact mass. Oversize material which cannot be utilized for erosion mitigation or landscaping onsite shall be broken to ac- ceptable sizes or removed from the site by the Contractor. If disposed of within the City of Carlsbad, ft ~~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 144 of 173 Pages a separate grading permit will be required for disposal of rock. 300-4.6 Application of Water. add the following: The Contractor shall place all fill soil at a moisture content no less than one (1) percent below optimum moisture as determined by ASTM test D-1557- 91. 300-4.7 Compaction. add the following: The Contractor shall compact all fill soils placed within the top 1 m (3') of roadway subgrade to a minimum of 95 percent relative compaction. On all areas to receive planting, the top 150 mm (6") shall be compacted to 85%, +2% -5%, to allow for plant growth. 300-4.8 Slopes. add the following: Feathering of fill over the tops of slopes will not be permitted. The Contractor shall compact the faces of fill slopes with a sheep's foot roller at vertical intervals no greater than 600 mm (2') or shall be built and cut back to finish grade. In addition, if not over built and cut back, the face of the slope shall be track walked upon completion. 300-4.9 Measurement and Payment. delete and substitute the following: Unclassified fill, grading, shaping, compacting or consolidating, slope rounding, construction of transitions and all work included in and incidental to Section 300-4, "Unclassified Fill" will be paid for as a part of unclassified excava- tion, and no additional payment will be made therefore. 300-5 BORROW EXCAVATION. Add the following section: 300-5.2.1 Imported Borrow Properties. The Contractor shall provide imported borrow that is clean well graded soil consisting of material conforming to all of the requirements in Table 300-5.2.1 (A) and the following requirements. Rock included in the top 1 m (3') of imported borrow shall be particles of less than 75 mm (3"). Rock included below the top 1 m (3') of imported borrow shall be particles of ~ less than 150 mm (6"). ....., Tests R-Value Expansion Index Plasticity Index Sieve Analysis TABLE 300-5.2.1{A) IMPORTED BORROW PROPERTIES Test Method No. Requirements Calif. 301 40 Min. UBC Standard 18-2 10 Max. ASTM 0424 4Max. ASTM 0422 Percent Passing 75J..L (No. 200) 15 Max. 300-9 GEOTEXTILES FOR EROSION CONTROL. Modify as follows: 300-9 GEOTEXTILES FOR EROSION CONTROL AND WATER POLLUTION CONTROL. Add the following section: 300-9.2 General. The Contractor shall provide erosion control and water pollution control conforming to the requirements shown on the plans, as specified herein, and as elsewhere required by the Con- tract Documents. Erosion control and water pollution control shall include the work specified herein, and such additional measures, as may be directed by the Engineer, to meet Best Management Prac- tices, as defined herein, and to properly control erosion and storm water damage of the limits of work and construction impacts upon areas receiving drainage flows from within the limits of work. #1t ~' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 145 of 173 Pages Add the following section: 300-9.2.1 Grading Controls. The Contractor shall protect all areas that have been graded and/or cleared and grubbed as well as areas that have not been graded and/or cleared and grubbed within the limits of work from erosion. The Contractor shall provide temporary earth berms, gravel bags, silt fences, stabilized construction entrances and similar measures, coordinated with its construction pro- cedures, as necessary and as shown on the plans to control on site and off site erosion during the construction period. The Contractor will be required to protect areas which have been cleared and grubbed prior to excavation or embankment operations, and which are subject to runoff during the duration of the contract. The criteria used to determine the appropriate erosion control measures shall be the "Best Management Practices", hereinafter BMP, defined and described in the, "Storm Water Best Management Practices Handbook, Construction", January 2003 edition as published by the Cal- ifornia Storm Water Quality Association. The Contractor shall maintain a copy of the "Storm Water Best Management Practices Handbook, Construction", January 2003 edition on the project site and shall conduct its operations in conformity to said Handbook. Temporary erosion control measures provided by the Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, the following: a) Embankment areas, while being brought up to grade and during periods of completion prior to final roadbed construction, shall be graded so as to direct runoff into impoundment areas within the limits of work where such runoff shall have pollutants removed by BMP methods . b) The Contractor shall provide protection by BMP measures to eliminate erosion and the siltation of downstream facilities and adjacent areas. These measures shall include, but shall not be limited to: temporary down drains, either in the form of pipes or paved ditches with protected outfall berms; graded berms around areas to eliminate erosion of embankment slopes by surface runoff; confined ponding areas to desilt runoff; and to desilt runoff. c) Excavation areas, while being brought to grade, shall be protected from erosion and the resulting siltation of downstream facilities and adjacent areas by the use of BMP measures. These measures shall include, but shall not be limited to, methods shown on the plans and described herein. Add the following section: 300-9.2.2 Payment. Full compensation for performing erosion control and water pollution control, con- forming to the operational requirements herein, of the BMP and conforming to the requirements of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, including the latest amendments thereto, which is not a part of the planned permanent work or included as a separate bid item shall be considered as included in the contract price bid for unclassified excavation, and no additional compensation will be allowed there- fore. 300-13STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN Add the following section: 300-13.1 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan. As part of the storm water pollution prevention work, the Contractor shall prepare and submit Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan, hereafter re- ferred to as the "SWPPP". The SWPPP shall conform to the requirements of the "Greenbook" Stand- ard Specifications for Public Works Construction, the requirements in the California Storm Water Qual- ity Association, Storm Water Best Management Practice Handbook, Construction ("Handbook''), the requirements of the Permit, the requirements in the plans and these supplemental provisions. 300-13.1.1 SWPPP Document Within 15 calendar days after the execution of the contract, the Contractor shall submit 3 copies of the SWPPP to the Engineer, in accordance with Section 2-5.3.3 of these Special Provisions. Contractor will be provided the digital format for SWPPP to complete required sections. If revisions are required, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor shall revise and resubmit the SWPPP within 15 days ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 146 of 173 Pages of receipt of the Engineer's comments and shall allow 5 days for the Engineer to review the revisions. Upon the Engineer's acceptance of the SWPPP, 3 additional copies of the SWPPP, incorporating the required changes, shall be submitted to the Engineer. In order to allow construction activities to pro- ceed, the Engineer may conditionally approve the SWPPP while minor revisions are being completed. The objectives of the SWPPP shall be to identify pollution sources that may adversely affect the quality of storm water discharges associated with the project and to identify, construct, implement and main- tain storm water pollution prevention measures, hereafter referred to as control measures, to reduce to the extent feasible pollutants in storm water discharges from the construction site both during and after construction is completed under this contract. The SWPPP shall incorporate control measures in the following categories: 1 . Soil stabilization practices; 2. Sediment control practices; 3. Wind erosion control practices; and 4. Non-storm water management and waste management and disposal control practices. Specific objectives and minimum requirements for each category of control measures are contained in the Handbook. The Contractor shall designate a Water Pollution Control Manager who will have the responsibilities outlined in the SWPPP. The SWPPP shall include, but not be limited to, the following items as described in the SWPPP: 1. Source Identification; 2. Erosion and Sediment Controls; 3. Non-Storm Water Management; 4. Waste Management and Disposal; 5. Maintenance, Inspection and Repair; 6. Training; 7. List of Contractors and Subcontractors; 8. Post-Construction Storm Water Management; 9. Preparer; 10. Copy of the local permit; 11. BMP Consideration Checklist; 12. SWPPP Checklist; 13. Schedule of Values; and 14. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Drawings. The Contractor shall amend the SWPPP, graphically and in narrative form, whenever there is a change in construction activities or operations which may affect the discharge of significant quantities of pol- lutants to surface waters, ground waters, municipal storm drain systems, or when deemed necessary by the Engineer. The SWPPP shall also be amended if it is in violation of any condition of the Permit, or has not effectively achieved the objective of reducing pollutants in storm water discharges. Amend- ments shall show additional control measures or revised operations, including those in areas not shown in the initially accepted SWPPP, which are required on the project to control water pollution effectively. Amendments to the SWPPP shall be submitted for review and acceptance by the Engineer in the same manner specified for the initially accepted SWPPP. Accepted amendments shall be dated and logged in the SWPPP. Upon acceptance of the amendment, the Contractor shall implement the additional control measures or revised operations. The Contractor shall keep a copy of the accepted SWPPP and accepted amendments at the project site. The SWPPP shall be made available upon request of a representative of the Regional Water Quality Control Board, State Water Resources Control Board, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or local storm water management agency. Requests by the public shall be directed to the Engineer. By June 15 of each year, the Contractor shall submit an annual certification to the Engineer stating compliance with the requirements governing the Permit. If the project is in non-compliance at any time, the Contractor shall make a written report to the Engineer within 15 days of identification of non- compliance. Add the following section: 300-13-1.2 Availability of SWPPP template. A site-specific draft document intended for use as a template for the required SWPPP document will be made available for use at the Contractor's option, at no cost to the Contractor. The document is available for review in Appendix B. The Contractor shall review the template and modify it as necessary to reflect the Contractor's operations. Add the following section: 300-13.1.3 Payment. Preparation, implementation and management of SWPPP shall be considered incidental to the items of work and no additional payment will be made therefore. Add the following section: 300-13.1.4 SWPPP Implementation. Upon acceptance of the SWPPP, the Contractor shall be re- sponsible throughout the duration of the project for installing, constructing, inspecting and maintaining the control measures included in the SWPPP and any amendments thereto and for removing and disposing of temporary control measures. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or specified in these supplemental provisions, the Contractor's responsibility for SWPPP implementation shall con- tinue throughout any temporary suspension of work ordered in accordance with Section 6-3, "Suspen- sion of Work". Requirements for installation, construction, inspection, maintenance, removal and dis- posal of control measures are specified in the "Handbook" and these supplemental provisions. Soil stabilization practices and sediment control measures, including minimum requirements, shall be provided throughout the winter season, defined as between October 1 and April30. Implementation of soil stabilization practices and sediment control measures for soil-disturbed areas of the project site shall be completed, except as provided for below, no later than 20 days prior to the beginning of the winter season or upon start of applicable construction activities for projects which begin either during or within 20 days of the winter season. The Contractor shall implement, year-round and throughout the duration of the project, control measures included in the SWPPP for sediment tracking, wind erosion, non-storm water management and waste management and disposal. The Engineer may order the suspension of construction operations, at the Contractor's cost, which create water pollution if the Contractor fails to conform to the requirements of this section as deter- mined by the Engineer. Add the following section: 300-13.1.5 Maintenance. To ensure the proper implementation and functioning of control measures, the Contractor shall regularly inspect and maintain the construction site for the control measures iden- tified in the SWPPP. The Contractor shall identify corrective actions and time frames to address any damaged measures or reinitiate any measures that have been discontinued. The construction site inspection checklist provided in the "Handbook" shall be used to ensure that the necessary measures are being properly implemented, and to ensure that the control measures are functioning adequately. The Contractor shall submit one copy of each site inspection record to the Engineer, within two days of the inspection. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 148 of 173 Pages During the winter season, inspections of the construction site shall be conducted by the Contractor to identify deficient measures, as follows: 1. When the five-day rain probability forecast exceeds forty percent (40%). 2. After any precipitation which causes runoff capable of carrying sediment from the construction site; 3. At 24 hour intervals during extended precipitation events; and 4. Routinely, at a minimum of once every week. If the Contractor or the Engineer identifies a deficiency in the deployment or functioning of an identi- fied control measure, the deficiency shall be corrected by the Contractor immediately, or by a later date and time if requested by the Contractor and accepted by the Engineer in writing, but not later than the onset of subsequent precipitation events. The correction of deficiencies shall be at no addi- tional cost to the City. SECTION 301 -TREATED SOIL, SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND PLACEMENT OF BASE MATERIALS 301-1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION. 301-1.2 Preparation of Subgrade. Modify the second and third paragraphs as follows: Change each instance reading "150mm (6 inches)" to "300 mm (12")". 301-1.3 Relative Compaction. Delete the first paragraph and substitute the following: The Contractor shall compact the upper 300 mm ( 12") of subgrade beneath areas to be paved, have base or subbase material placed on them, or curb, gutter, curb and gutter, alley pavement, driveway or sidewalk con- structed over them to no less than 95 percent maximum dry density as determined by ASTM test D~ 1557-91. ,...., 301-1.7 Payment. Modify the first paragraph as follows: Payment for subgrade preparation shall be included in the contract bid price for which the subgrade is prepared and shall include all labor, mate- rials; including water, operations and equipment to scarify, adjust moisture, compact or recompact the subgrade, both in cut areas and in fill areas, and no further compensation will be allowed. SECTION 302-ROADWAY SURFACING Add the following: The Contractor shall be responsible for tree trimming along the curb line as noted in Section 300-1 Clearing and Grubbing -so as to provide a clear travel way during the construction of the roadway resurfacing. The Contractor shall treat all vegetation within the limits of the paved area to be surfaced with a post emergent herbicide. Herbicide shall be applied at least 2 (two) working days prior to surfacing the street. Allowance for the two day period shall be shown in the schedule required per section 6-1. Payment for pavement surfacing shall include tree trimming and post emergent herbicide treatment of the areas to be surfaced and no extra payment will be made therefore. Public Convenience and Traffic Control. The Contractor shall schedule the work so as to prevent damage by all traffic. The Contractor shall not schedule work so as to conflict with trash pickup. The trash hauling schedule can be obtained by calling Coast Waste Management at (760) 929-9400. At least two weeks prior to work, Contractor shall send, by first class mail, notification letters to all property addresses within 500' of the work. Obtaining the appropriate addresses shall be the contrac- tor's responsibility. Letters shall be as shown in bold type as follows, with the appropriate informatio~ specific to the work inserted at the locations indicated in the brackets and italicized. ·......,/ During operations, the Contractor's schedule for resurfacing shall be designed to provide residents and business owners' sufficient paved parking within an 800 foot distance from their homes or busi- nesses. Seventy two hours prior to the start of any construction in the public right-of-way that affects vehicular traffic and/or parking or pedestrian routes, the Contractor shall give written notification of the impend- ing disruption. For a full street closure, all residences and/or businesses on the affected street or alley shall be notified. For partial street closures, or curb, sidewalk and driveway repairs, the residences and/or businesses directly affected by the work shall be notified. The Contractor shall deliver the notification which shall state the date and time the work will begin and its anticipated duration. The notification shall list two telephone numbers that may be called to obtain additional information. One number shall be the Contractor's permanent office or field office and the other number shall be a 24 hour number answered by a representative of the Contractor who is knowl- edgeable about the project. At least one of the phone numbers shall be in the {760) area code. An answering machine shall not be connected to either number. The notification shall also give a brief description of the work and simple instructions to the home or business owner on what they need to do to facilitate the construction. The Contractor shall submit the contents of the notification to the Engineer for approval. Notices shall not be distributed until approved by the Engineer. For door hangers, the notification shall be pre-cut in a manner that enables it to be affixed to a door- knob without adhesives. It shall be a minimum size of 3-1/2 inches by 8-1/2 inches and shall be brightly colored with contrasting printing. The material shall be equivalent in strength and durability to 65 lb. card stock. The printing on the notice shall be no smaller than 12 point. The precut notices shall be as shown on the example provided in Appendix "A", with the day of the week circled and appropriate information specific to the work inserted at the locations indicated in the italicized font. The preparation, materials, printing and distribution of the notifications shall be included in the contract price bid for Traffic Control and the Contractor will not be entitled to any additional compensation for printing and distributing these notices. 302-5 ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT. Add the following: 302-5.2 Pavement Transitions. The Contractor shall ramp the approaches and termini to all struc- tures and vertical joints in the cold-milled area which are transverse to through traffic with temporary asphalt concrete pavement as specified in section 306-1.5.1. Ramps shall be constructed the same day as cold milling and removed the same day as permanent paving. Ramp dimensions and com- paction shall be as approved by the Engineer. 302-5.6.1 General. modify as follows: Second paragraph, Part (2), add: Pinched joint rolling proce- dures shall be required, and vibratory rollers shall be limited to breakdown, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. modify as follows: After last paragraph, add: Unless directed otherwise by the Engineer, the initial breakdown rolling shall be followed by a pneumatic-tired roller as described in this section. 302-5.8 Manholes (and other structures). delete the first paragraph and replace with the following: When placing the overlay the Contractor shall pave over appurtenances in the roadway which includes sanitary and storm access covers, water valve boxes, air vents, sewer dead end boxes and survey monument boxes. Each appurtenance shall be treated or covered to prevent adhesion of the overlay. Each appurtenance shall be located immediately after the overlay is placed and shall be thoroughly ~ cleaned of any and all construction debris which may have entered due to the Contractor's operation. ·......,/ ft ~~ l=l"'vic::"'rl 1/~0/1 ~ r.ontr;:u~t No fi00fl1 The contractor shall adjust all CMWD water valve boxes per CMWD Standard Drawing No. W11 or CMWD Standard Drawing No. W13. All City of Carlsbad sanitary sewer access covers shall be ad- justed per CMWD Drawing No. S1. All storm sewer access covers shall be adjusted per SDRSD D- 1 0. Riser rings or extensions shall not be used for the adjustment of these appurtenances. Raising and adjusting to grade all appurtenances in the roadway shall be paid for at the contract unit price per each as shown in the Bid. Such price shall constitute full compensation for all labor, materi- als, and equipment necessary for completing the work as described in these specifications and plans. 302-5.9 Measurement and Payment. add the following: Payment for asphalt concrete shall be at the unit price bid per ton. No additional payment shall be made for any tack coat or sand blotter. Add the following section: 302-11 ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIRS AND REMEDIATION Add the following section. 302-11.1 General. Asphalt pavement Repairs and Remediation shall consist of the repair and resto- ration of existing asphalt pavement. Repair of asphalt pavement shall consist of the saw cutting, re- moval and disposal of existing asphalt pavement in conformance with section 300-1 .3, compaction of existing subgrade in conformance with section 301-1, grading and compaction of base material in conformance with section 301-2, application of grade SS-1h emulsified asphalt and the placement of asphalt concrete base and wearing courses as specified herein Add the following section. 302-11.2 Full Depth Asphalt Concrete Patch. Full depth asphalt concrete patch shall consist of removing asphalt concrete and/or aggregate base/subgrade to 300 mm (1 ') below existing asphalt surface and placing replacing the material so removed with asphalt concrete. The area shown on the plans or set forth in the bid item are for estimating purposes only, final quantity will be as measured in the field. The Engineer will designate and mark the final limits of the asphalt patch area by outlining the area to be patched. The Contractor shall cut such areas to straight lines in square or rectangular areas as marked. The area so cut shall have two of the sides at right angles to the direction of traffic. The excavated faces of the base/subgrade shall be straight and vertical. The Contractor shall compact the upper 300mm {1') of subgrade to 95% relative compaction. A tack coat of SS-1h emulsified asphalt shall be applied uniformly to all asphalt to asphalt contact surfaces at a rate of 0.25 Um2 to 0.45 Um2 (0.05 to 0.1 Ogallons per square yard) in accordance with subsection 302-5.4, SSPWC. The Contractor shall fill and compact areas designated to be removed with 300 mm {1.0') full depth asphalt concrete. Asphalt concrete for full depth asphalt concrete patch shall be B-AR-4000. The asphalt concrete so constructed shall have a finish surface and density conforming to subsection 302-5.6.2 SSPWC. Add the following section. 302-11.3 Crack Sealing The Contractor shall wash, blow out and thoroughly dry all cracks designated to be sealed before installing hot poured rubber-asphalt joint sealant material. The sealant shall con- form to the requirements of ASTM D1190. The Contractor shall dispose debris from crack cleaning outside the public way in accordance with Section 7-8.1, "Cleanup and Dust Control." The hot-melt rubberized asphalt shall be melted in a jacketed, double boiler type melting unit. Temperature of the heat transfer medium shall not exceed 245°C (475°F). Application of the hot-melt sealant shall be made with a pressure feed applicator or pour pot. Sealant shall be applied when the pavement surface temperature is greater than 4°C {40°F). Containers of hot-melt sealant shall be delivered to the job- site in unopened containers that are clearly marked with data showing the manufacturer's name, the product designation and the manufacturer's batch number and lot numbers. The level of the sealant shall be flush with the surface of the existing pavement. All excess sealant shall be removed from the crack with a minimum overlap onto adjacent pavement. ft ~~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 152 of 173 Pages Add the following section: 302-11.4. Measurement and Payment. Quantities of full depth asphalt concrete patch and crack sealing set forth in the bid item are for estimating purposes only, final quantity will be as designated and measured in the field. The Engineer will designate and mark the limits of the Full depth asphalt concrete patch and crack sealant application areas. Payment for resurfacing shall include post emer- gent herbicide treatment. Full compensation for conforming to the requirements of constructing full depth asphalt concrete patch shall include but not be limited to: furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for doing the work including, saw cutting and removing and disposing 300 mm (1') thick section of existing asphalt concrete, aggregate base/subbase and basement soil as desig- nated by the engineer, placement of asphalt concrete, compaction of subbase and asphalt concrete, placement of SS-1 h asphalt emulsion and all other work incidental to full depth asphalt concrete patch shall be considered as included in the contract unit price bid for full depth asphalt concrete patch and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. Full compensation for conforming to the require- ments of crack sealing shall include but not be limited to, furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equip- ment, and incidentals necessary to do the work. Crack cleaning, roadway clean up, application of sealant, removal of excess sealant and all other work incidental to crack sealing shall be considered as included in the contract unit price bid and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. SECTION 303 CONCRETE AND MASONRY CONSTRUCTION 303-1 CONCRETE STRUCTURES 303-1.6.2 Falsework Design. add the following: The Contractor shall provide all temporary bracing necessary to withstand all imposed loads during erection, construction, and removal of any falsework. The Contractor shall provide falsework drawings and calculations prepared by a registered profes- sional engineer, civil or structural, that show provisions for resolution of all loads that may be imposed ~ upon the falsework. Such plans and calculations shall include: ....,.; 1 . Resolution of all live, dead, wind, construction and impact loads that may be imposed on the false- work. 2. Temporary bracing or methods to be used during each phase of erection and removal of the false- work. 3. Concrete placement sequence. 4. Erection and removal sequence. 5. Deflection values for the falsework that include recommended methods to compensate for false- work deflections, vertical alignment, and anticipated falsework deflection. 303-2 AIR-PLACED CONCRETE. 303-2.1.1 General. add the following: Modify Regional Standard Drawing D-75 as follows: replace stucco netting with 150mm x 150mm (6" x 6") by No. 10 by No. 10 welded wire mesh. Add the following section: ft ~.,Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 153 of 173 Pages Add the following section: 306-1.1.7.1 Requirements for Use. Alternate construction methods that avoid the use of steel plate bridging shall be used by the Contractor unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. It is recognized that to accommodate excavation work, steel plate bridging may be necessary. All conditions for use of steel plate bridging set forth in the following requirements must be fulfilled as conditions of approval of the use of steel plate bridging. Consideration of steel plate bridging in the review process will take into account the following factors: 1. Traffic volume and composition. 2. Duration of use of the steel plate bridging. 3. Size of the proposed excavation. 4. Weather conditions. The following formula shall be used to score the permitted use of steel plate bridging: PS = [ ADT + EWL +DAYS+ 10 X WEEKEND+ 5 X NIGHTS+ 20 X WEATHER+ SPEED (kmh) +SLOPE X 100] X LANES 1000 8 PS = [ ADT + EWL +DAYS+ 10 X WEEKEND+ 5 X NIGHTS+ 20 X WEATHER+ SPEED (mph)+ SLOPE X 100] X LANES 1000 5 where: PS ADT EWL = DAYS WEEKEND NIGHTS WEATHER SPEED SLOPE LANES = = = = = = = = plate score. average daily traffic as defined in the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Man- ual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) 2003 Edition as amended by the MUTCD 2003 California Supplement. equivalent wheel loads as defined in the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Man-~ ual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) 2003 Edition as amended by the """'""' MUTCD 2003 California Supplement. total number of 24 hour periods during which the plates will be utilized at the site being considered. total number of Saturdays, Sundays and holidays that the plates will be utilized at the site being considered. total number of overnight periods that the plates will be in place, exclusive of Saturday, Sunday and holiday nights. total number of 24-hour periods that the plates will be utilized at the site being considered when the possibility of rain exceeds 40 percent. the design speed in kilometers per hour or miles per hour, as applicable in the formulae above, of the street where the plates are to be installed. This number shall not be reduced for construction zone speed reductions. the quotient of the vertical differential divided by the horizontal distance. The vertical and horizontal dimensions shall be measured at the locations spanning a distance of 15 m (50') up and downstream of the position of the proposed steel plate bridging. = the number of lanes where plates will be used. When the computed value of the plate score exceeds 50, steel plate bridging shall not be used unless, and at the sole discretion of the Engineer, the Engineer determines that no alternative method of construction is possible in lieu of using steel plate bridging or that other overriding considerations make the use of steel plate bridging acceptable. Alternatives considered to bridging shall include, but not be limited to, detouring traffic, construction detour routes, tunneling, boring and other methods of ~ trenchless construction. Unless specifically noted in the provisions of the Engineer's approval, the . ...._, use of steel plate bridging at each location so approved shall not exceed four (4) consecutive working days in any given week. Add the following section: 306-1.1.7.2 Additional Requirements. In all cases when the depth of the trench exceeds the width of the steel plate bridging resting on each side of the pavement adjacent to the trench, safety regula- tions require or the Engineer determines that shoring is necessary to protect the health or safety of workers or the public the Contractor shall install shoring conforming to Section 7-10.4.1 of the Stand- ard Specifications. The trench shoring shall be designed and installed to support the steel plate bridg- ing and traffic loads. All approvals for design, substitution of materials or methods shall be submitted by the Contractor in accordance with all provisions of section 2-5.3 Shop Drawings and Submittals. The Contractor shall backfill and resurface excavations in accordance with section 306-1.5. Add the following section: 306-1.1.7.3 Installation. When backfilling operations of an excavation in the traveled way, whether transverse or longitudinal cannot be properly completed within a work day, steel plate bridging with a non-skid surface and shoring may be required to preserve unobstructed traffic flow. In such cases, the following conditions shall apply: a) Steel plate bridging when the plate score exceeds 50 is not allowed except when, at the sole discretion of the Engineer, it is approved as specified hereinbefore. b) Steel plates used for bridging must extend a minimum of 610 mm (2') beyond the edges of the trench. c) Steel plate bridging shall be installed to operate with minimum noise. When the use of steel plate bridging and shoring is approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall install using either Method (1) or (2) depending on the design speed of the portion of street where the steel plate bridging is proposed for use. Method 1 [For speeds more than 70 Km/hr (45 MPH)]: The pavement shall be cold planed to a depth equal to the thickness of the plate and to a width and length equal to the dimensions of the plate. The cold milling shall produce a flat surface that the plate shall rest on with no horizontal or vertical move- ment. Horizontal gaps between the unmilled pavement and the plate shall not exceed 25 mm (1") and shall be filled with elastomeric sealant material which may, at the contractor's option, be mixed with no more that 50%, by volume, of Type I aggregate conforming to the requirements of tables 203-5.2(8) and 203-5.3(A). Method 2 [For speeds 70 Km/hr (45 MPH) or less]: Approach plate(s) and ending plate (if longitudinal placement) shall be attached to the roadway and shall be secured against displacement by using two adjustable cleats that are no less than 50 mm (2") shorter than the width of the trench bolted to the underside of each plate and located within 150 mm (6") of the beginning and end of the trench for plates at the beginning and end of the trench, a minimum of two 300 mm long by 19 mm diameter ( 12" x %")steel bolts placed through the plate and driven into holes drilled 300 mm (12") into the pavement section, or other devices approved by the Engineer. Subsequent plates shall be butted to each other. Fine graded asphalt concrete shall be compacted to form ramps, maximum slope 8.5% with a mini- mum 300 mm (12") taper to cover all edges of the steel plates. When steel plates are removed, the dowel holes in the pavement section shall be completely filled with elastomeric sealant material. At the Contractor's option, the methods required for Method 1 may be used. If the Contractor so elects, all requirements of Method 1 shall be used. The Contractor shall maintain the steel plates, shoring, and asphalt concrete ramps and maintain and restore the street surface during and after their use. Add the following section: 306-1.1.7.4 Materials. The minimal thickness of steel plate bridging shall be as shown in Table 306- 1.1.7.4(A) TABLE 306-1.1.7.4(A) REQUIRED PLATE THICKNESS FOR A GIVEN TRENCH WIDTH Maximum Trench Width Pl Minimum Plate Thickness 0.3m 10" 13mm 1/2" 0.6m 23" 19mm r'd// o.am 31" 22mm '' Ia" 1.0m 41" 25mm 1" 1.6 m 63" 32 mm (1 W') ' .. (1) For spans greater than 1.6 m (5 ), a structural des1gn shall be prepared by a reg1stered c1v1l eng1neer and subm1tted to the Engineer for review and approval in accordance with section 2-5.3. Steel plate bridging shall be steel plate designed to support the HS20-44 truck loading per CAL TRANS Bridge Design Specifications Manual. The Contractor shall maintain a non-skid surface on the steel plate with no less than a coefficient of friction of 0.35 as determined by California Test Method 342. If a different test method is used, the Contractor may utilize standard test plates with known coefficients of friction available from the CAL TRANS District 11 Materials Engineer to correlate skid resistance results to California Test Method 342. In addition to all other required construction signing, the Con- tractor shall install Rough Road (W33) sign with black lettering on an orange background in advance of steel plate bridging. Add the following section: ~ 306-1.1.7.5 Measurement and Payment. Steel plate bridge materials including, but not limited to: ,.,.,.; steel plates, anchoring devices, cold milling, elastomeric sealant material, asphalt ramping and pad- ding, signage, placing, installation, removal, relocation, preparation and processing of shop drawings and submittals to support the use of steel plate bridging and all other materials, labor, supervision, overhead of any type or description will be paid for as an incidental to the work that the bridging is installed to facilitate. No separate payment for steel plate bridging will be made. No extension to contract time will be allowed for, or because of, the use of steel plate bridging. 306-1.2.1 Bedding. All installation of, and bedding for recycled water, or potable water mains shall conform to Carlsbad Municipal Water District Rules and Regulations for the Construction of (Potable or Reclaimed) Water Mains, latest edition. 306-1.2.4 Field Jointing of Reinforced Concrete Pipe. add the following: The Contractor shall pro- vide Gasket-type joints for reinforced concrete pipe (watertight joints) where indicated on plans. 306-1.3.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall install detectable underground utility mark- ing tape 230 mm x75 mm (9" x 3") above each or, in the case of bundled underground conduit of the same type, the upper underground conduit being installed by the open trench method. The type and color of detectable underground utility marking tape shall conform to the requirements of section 207- 25 et seq. 306-1.3.4 Compaction Requirements. delete Section 306-1.3.4 and replace with the following: The Contractor shall density trench backfill to a minimum of 90 percent relative compaction except that in the top 300 mm (12") of the street right-of-way, compaction shall be 95 percent. 306-1.5 Trench Resurfacing. 306-1.5.1 Temporary Resurfacing. Delete the fourth and fifth paragraphs and substitute the follow- ing: Temporary bituminous resurfacing materials which are placed by the Contractor are for its con- venience and shall be at no cost to the Agency. Temporary bituminous resurfacing materials shall be used in lieu of permanent resurfacing only when approved by the Engineer. When temporary bitumi- nous resurfacing materials are used in lieu of permanent resurfacing it shall be removed and replaced with permanent resurfacing within 7 days of placement. No additional payment will be made for tem- porary bituminous resurfacing materials. The price bid for the associated conduit or structure shall include full compensation for furnishing, placing, maintaining, removing, and disposing of such tem- porary resurfacing materials. 306-1.5.2 Permanent Resurfacing. Add the following: Except as provided in section 306-1.5.1, "Temporary Resurfacing," the Contractor shall perform permanent trench resurfacing within 24 hours after the completion of backfill and densification of backfill and aggregate base materials. 306-1.6 Basis of Payment for Open Trench Installation. add the following: Payment for utilities undergrounding which includes the utility trench for CATV and SDG&E and conduit for SDG&E's electric conversion shall be made on the basis of contract lump sum price for utilities undergrounding and no other payments will be made. Cox Cable will supply and deliver conduits and fittings to be installed by the Contractor. Cox Cable will install enclosures. The Contractor will furnish and install 6.4 mm (W') nylon pull ropes in all conduit. 306-5 ABANDONMENT OF CONDUITS AND STRUCTURES. Add the following: Unless otherwise noted on plans, the Contractor shall remove all existing abandoned pipelines and conduits of any type, or use, and pipelines and conduits of any type, or use, that are abandoned during the course of the work and shall replace said pipelines and conduits with properly compacted soils. Payment for re- moval and disposal of abandoned utilities shall be included in the lump-sum bid for Clearing and Grub- bing, and no additional payment will be made. SECTION 307 -STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS 307 STREET LIGHTING AND TRAFFIC SIGNALS. Modify as follows: Section 86, "Signals, Light- ing and Electrical Systems", of the Caltrans Standard Specifications replaces Section 209, "Electrical Components", and Section 307, "Street Lighting and Traffic Signals", of the SSPWC, in all matters pertaining to the specifications for measurement, payment, warranty, materials and methods of con- struction of street lighting and traffic signals. SECTION 308 LANDSCAPE AND IRRIGATION INSTALLATION 308-2 EARTHWORK AND TOPSOIL PLACEMENT 308-2.3.2 Fertilization and Conditioning Procedures. add the following: The Contractor shall cul- tivate the surface of all areas to be planted or hydroseeded by discing, ripping or scarifying the finish grade. After cultivation the Contractor shall clear the planting areas of stones to the depth of cultivation and shall be rake the planting areas to a smooth friable and plantable surface. The Contractor shall cultivate all planting areas, except slopes steeper than 3-1/2:1 (horizontal to vertical), to a depth of 300 mm ( 12"). The planting areas that are slopes steeper than 3-1/2:1 , shall be cultivated to a depth of 150 mm (6"). After cultivation, the soil amendments shown in table 308-2.3.2(A) shall be thoroughly blended 150 mm (6") deep in all planting areas. Except for planting pits the cultivation depths are designated as the root area. Backfill for planting pits shall conform to the requirements of section 308- 4.5. After surface preparation and application of the soil amendments shown in Table 308-2.3.2(A) the Contractor shall obtain a minimum of one test for each soil property listed in Tables 308-2.3.2(8) ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 158 of 173 Pages 308-2.4 Finish Grading. add following: The Contractor shall prepare the finish grade in hydroseed slope areas with a moderately rough texture to provide a suitable surface for adherence of the hy- droseed mix. 308-4 PLANTING. 308-4.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall perform actual planting during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable and in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practice and as approved by the Engineer. No planting shall be done in any area until it has been satisfactorily prepared in accordance with these specifications. Soil moisture level prior to planting shall be no less than 75 percent of field capacity. The Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of planting pits before planting operations begin. For pit planted vegetation when the soil moisture level is found to be insufficient for planting, the Contractor shall fill the planting pits with water and allow them to drain before starting planting operations. No more plants shall be distributed in the planting area on any day than can be planted and watered on that day. The Contractor shall plant and water all plants as herein specified immediately after removal from their containers. Containers shall not be cut prior to placing the plants in the planting area. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide continuous horticultural services and temporary and/or permanent irrigation to all planted and hydroseeded areas so that the planted and hydroseeded vegetation is 1 00 percent healthy and thriving prior to, and throughout the, landscape maintenance period. 308-4.2 Protection and Storage. add the following: The Contractor shall submit a sheltered and secure location for on-site plant storage area for the Engineer's approval prior to the delivery of any plant materials. Any plant determined by the Engineer to be wilted, broken, or otherwise damaged shall be rejected at any time during the project, whether in the ground or not. All plants shall be handled by their containers. Any plant that has been handled by its trunk or stem shall be rejected. All rejected plants shall be removed from the site immediately. 308-4.3 Layout and Plant Location. modify as follows: Planting areas shall be staked by the Con- tractor and the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of the planting layout before planting operations begin. 308-4.5 Tree and Shrub Planting. add the following: The Contractor shall amend the backfill for planting holes to a thoroughly blended mixture of clean loamy soil meeting the requirements of Ta- bles 308-2.3.2(8) and 308-2.3.2(C) and then blend the amendments listed in Table 308-4.5(A) into the backfill for planting holes. TABLE 308-4.5(A) BACKFILL AND AMENDMENTS FOR TREE AND SHRUB PLANTING Soil Amendment Metric Application Rate Approx. U.S. Application Rate Agricultural Gypsum 18 kg per cubic meter 30 lbs. per cubic yard I ron Sulfate 600 g per cubic meter 1 lb. per cubic yard Calcium Carbonate Lime 6 kg per cubic meter 1 0 lbs. per cubic yard Organic Soil Amendment 0.67 cubic meters per cubic meter 2/3 cubic yards per cubic yard Planting Tablets 1 1 per 1 00 mm dia. pot container 1 per 4" dia. pot container PlantinQ Tablets 1 2 per 19 liter container 2 per 5 gal. container Planting Tablets 1 1 per each 50 mm width of each box-1 per each 2" width of each size container box-size container 1 Plantmg tablet requirements are not cumulative and apply to the s1ze conta1ner md1cated Pruning shall be limited to the minimum necessary to remove injured twigs and branches, and to compensate for loss of roots during transplanting, but never to exceed one-tenth the branching struc- ture. Pruning may be done only with the approval of, and in the presence of, the Engineer. Cuts over 19 mm (%") shall be painted with an approved tree wound paint. Add the following section: 308-4.5.1 Root Barriers. Root barriers shall conform to section 212-1.8, Root Barriers. The Contractor shall install root barriers continuously at the edges of all median planter areas. The top of the root barrier shall be 25 mm (1") below the finish grade of the planted area. The bottom of the root barrier shall be installed 520 mm (201h") below the finish grade of the planted area. Install as indicated on the plans, eliminating any breaks in the barrier by providing at least 150 mm (6") of overlap at splices or damaged areas. Splices and repair patches shall be stitched to the root barrier material by a run- ning stitch of no less than 6 6 1 stitches per 25 mm (1"). 308-4.6 Plant Staking and Guying. add the following: The Contractor shall install all boxed trees per drawings L-1 and L-2 of the San Diego Regional Standard Drawings unless details shown on the project plans differ therefrom. 308-4.8.2(b) Method B. add the following: The Contractor shall prepare hydroseeding slurry on the job site. Slurry additives shall arrive at the site in bags sealed and properly identified by the manufacturer. All specified additives and water shall be added on the job site at the rates specified and shall be thoroughly mixed at the job site. The Contractor shall add seed to the slurry after the fiber mulch has been thoroughly incorporated. The Contractor shall spray all areas with a uniform, visible coat using the green color of the mulch as a guide. The Contractor shall apply the slurry in a sweeping motion, in an arched stream so as to fall .~ like rain allowing the mulch fibers to build on each other until a good coat is achieved and the material "'uttl is spread, evenly, at the required rate per area. The Contractor shall use care not to drag spray hoses over container planted material and shall attempt to spray from the edges of the planting areas wher- ever possible. Any slurry mixture which has not been applied to the planting areas within four (4) hours after mixing is be rejected and removed from the project at the Contractor's expense. Any slurry spilled into areas outside the limits of work shall be cleaned up at the Contractor's expense to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall assure that the site is properly prepared. The Contractor shall repair all tire ruts created by the equipment. Areas needing grading repair prior to hydroseeding shall be blended and floated to match surrounding grades. Areas having less than 80% plant coverage within thirty (30) days after the initial application shall be reseeded every twenty (20) days until 80% of the ground surface is evenly covered by hydroseeded or subsequently reseeded growth. Add the following section: 308-4.8.3.1 Weed Eradication. The Contractor shall water all irrigated areas to be hydroseeded for three (3) weeks prior to hydroseeding to allow for germination of the weed seeds. The Contractor shall spray all weeds with a post emergent herbicide immediately after the completion of the three week irrigation period. After two (2) weeks, the Contractor shall again eradicate the weeds and complete the preparation of the soil prior to the application of the hydroseed mixes. Add the following section, 308-4.10 Erosion Control Matting Installation Add the following section, 308-4.10.1 General. Before installation of erosion control matting the Contractor shall complete all ~ soil preparation, fine grading, and hydroseeding of the areas to receive erosion control matting. Add the following section: 308-4.10.2 Coordination with Hydroseeding. Erosion control matting shall be installed by the Contractor immediately after the first application of hydroseed materials. In all cases the Contractor shall place the erosion control matting within three days after the first hydroseed material application. Should any seed in the hydroseed materials begin to germinate within the three-day period after ap- plication or before the installation of the erosion control matting, the installation of the erosion control matting shall be considered as late and the Contractor shall disc the hydroseed materials into the top 100m (4") of the underlying soil, condition the soil for hydroseeding, apply hydroseeding materials at the rates and of the type specified and then install the erosion control matting. No additional payment will be made for second or subsequent hydroseed applications resulting from late installation of ero- sion control matting. Add the following section: 308-4.1 0.3 Installation. The Contractor shall install erosion control matting using the following tech- niques: 1. Begin at the top of the slope by placing the erosion control matting into a 150 mm (6") wide by 150 mm (6") deep trench with the end of the matting laid flat in the bottom of the trench 2. Anchor the end of the erosion control matting with erosion control mat staples spaced no more than 300 mm (12"} on centers placed at the intersection of the bottom and the downhill vertical face of the trench. 3. Roll the erosion control matting down the slope. 4. Staple the erosion control matting on an alternating grid consisting of three across and two across lines of staples in horizontal lines spaced 900mm (3') on centers. 5. Erosion control mat so stapled shall be spaced such that no less than 1 % staples per square meter (1 Y2 staples per square yard) are provided to anchor the erosion control matting. 6. Start the adjacent erosion control mat as in Item 1 of this section, overlapping the previously placed mat by no less than 50 mm (2"}. 7. Staple placement may be such as to use the staples used to secure the adjacent mat to secure both mats along their edges. 308-51RRIGATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION. 308-5.1 General. add the following: The Contractor shall apply irrigation water as often and in suffi- cient amounts, as conditions may require, to germinate and establish the seed and keep the container plants healthy and growing. The Contractor shall lay out lines, valves, and other underground utilities and receive the approval of the Engineer before digging trenches. The Contractor shall be responsible for damages caused by its operations. Connections shall be made at approximately the locations shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall be responsible for unapproved changes. Permission to shut off any existing in-use water lines must be obtained 48 hours in advance, as to the date, time and exact length of time of each shut-off. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the entire irrigation system is under full automatic operation for a period of seven days prior to any planting. 308-5.2 Irrigation Pipeline Installation. add the following: The Contractor shall install all pressure main line piping from the irrigation system so as to maintain 3.1 m (1 0') minimum horizontal separation from all potable water piping. Where reclaimed and potable water pressure mainline piping cross, the reclaimed water piping shall be installed below the potable water piping, sleeved in a pressure rating of 200 PSI SDR 21 "Aiertline" PVC sleeve which extends a minimum of 3.1 m (10') on either side of the potable water piping and be located to provide a minimum vertical clearance of 300 mm (12") between the reclaimed and potable water lines. Conventional (white) PVC pipe Schedule 40 may be used for sleeving material if it is taped along its entire length with 75 mm (3") wide purple warning tape which reads "Caution Reclaimed Water''. For trenching through areas where topsoil has been spread, the Contractor shall deposit topsoil on one side of trench and subsoil on opposite side. Subsoil shall be free of all rocks 13 mm (W') in diameter or larger, debris, and litter, prior to use as backfill. The Contractor shall repair any leaks and replace all defective pipe or fittings until lines meet test requirements. The Contractor shall not cover any lines until they have been inspected and approved by the Engineer for tightness, quality of work- manship, and materials. The Contractor shall not be backfill trenches until all required tests and ob- servations are performed. Observations include sprinkler heads, all fittings, lateral and mainline pipe, valves, and direct burial wire. 308-5.2.3 Plastic Pipeline. add the following: The Contractor shall store all pipe and fittings under cover until used, and all pipe and fittings shall transported in a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the length of pipe to lay flat so as not to be subjected to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Pipe ends and fittings shall be wiped with MEK, or equal, before welding solvent is applied. Welded joints shall be given a minimum of 15 minutes to set before moving or handling. All field cuts shall be beveled to remove burrs and excess before fitting and gluing together. The Contractor shall center load pipe with small amount of backfill to prevent arching and slipping under pressure. Joints shall be exposed for inspection during testing. Plastic-to-plastic joints shall be solvent-welded, using only solvent recommended by pipe manufacturer. Add the following section: 308-5.2.61nstallation of Brass Pipe. The Contractor shall cut brass piping by power hacksaw, circu- lar cutting machine using an abrasive wheel, or hand hacksaw. No piping shall be cut with metallic wheel cutter of any description. The Contractor shall ream and remove rough edges or burrs on all pipe so that smooth and unobstructed flow is obtained, place Teflon tape, Teflon dope, or approved equal on male threads only, and tighten to prevent any leakage. The Contractor shall tighten screwed joints with tongs or wrenches. Caulking is not permitted. Add the following section: 308-5.3.1 Valves. add the following: The Contractor shall install each control valve in a separate valve box with a minimum of 300 mm (12") separation between valves and 150 mm (6") from any fixed object or structure. Add the following section 308-5.3.2 Valve Boxes. The Contractor shall install no more than one valve per box. All boxes are to be marked as to the type of valve. Remote control valve boxes shall also indicate control station num- ber. Add the following section: 308-5.3.3 Backflow Preventer. The Contractor shall install backflow preventer assembly in accord- ance with manufacturer's specifications and as directed on drawings. Exact location and positioning shall be verified on the site by the Engineer. 308-5.4.4 Sprinkler Head Adjustment. add the following: The Contractor shall flush and adjust all irrigation heads and valves for optimum performance and to prevent overspray onto walks, roadways buildings, walls, and other structures. Add the following section: 308-5.4.5 Drip Assembly. The Contractor shall install drip emitter filter on the supply side of all electric pressure regulating control valve for all emitter systems. The Contractor shall install a flush valve on the discharge side of all drip laterals. 308-5.5 Automatic Control System Installation. add the following: The Contractor shall install all portions of the electrical installation with materials and methods conforming to the requirements of the 1996 National Electrical Code. The Contractor shall provide no less than one control wire and one common ground wire to service each valve in system. 308-5.6.3 Sprinkler Coverage Test. add the following: This test shall be accomplished before any ground cover is planted. 308-6 MAINTENANCE AND PLANT ESTABLISHMENT. add the following: For hydroseeded areas, median planting and mitigation area, The Contractor shall maintain said areas for period of no less than 120 days or until final acceptance of the project, whichever is the greater. Mowing is not required for hydroseeded areas. The Contractor shall provide complete landscape maintenance of all planted areas. The work shall include, but not be limited to, watering, litter control, weed control, stake repair, cultivating, supplementary fertilization, repair of irrigation systems, and control of diseases and pests. The Contractor shall submit a written plan to control weeds, disease, and pest infestations in the planting areas. The submittal shall conform to the requirements for shop drawings as specified in section 2-5.3 et seq. of the specifications. The Engineer shall approve all methods and materials for such control. Upon approval, the Contractor shall implement the control measures, exercising extreme caution in using pesticides and taking all steps to ensure the safety of the public. Only licensed personnel will be permitted to perform toxic spraying work. During the plant establishment period, the Contractor shall furnish sufficient workers and equipment on a daily basis to perform the work required by this section. Any day when the Contractor fails to adequately carry out specified maintenance work, as determined necessary by the Engineer, will not be credited as one of the plant establishment days. All planting areas which are damaged by con- struction shall be repaired by the Contractor within twenty {20) days following completion of construction in such. The Contractor shall repair such damaged areas. The repair shall consist of bringing the dam- aged area back to final grade, preparing the soil, replanting the area with the same vegetation as originally specified, and maintaining the area to achieve acceptable plant establishment. The Contractor shall provide temporary irrigation for hydroseeded areas for a minimum of 120 days to ensure adequate plant establishment. Towards the end of the maintenance period, the Contractor shall gradually reduce the amount of irrigation to allow plant adaptation to non-irrigated conditions. Upon the approval of the engineer, the temporary irrigation system shall be shut off at the end of the maintenance period. The hydroseeded areas must have their growth of 80% established and the coverage must be evenly successful over the entire hydroseeded area and adequate to prevent erosion no less than 30 days before the end of the maintenance period. Should the coverage not be achieved the maintenance period shall be extended until the required coverage is achieved plus an additional 30 day period. The Contractor shall call for a final inspection 30 days before the end of the maintenance period and at the end of the maintenance period. Failure to pass inspection will result in an extension of the maintenance period. The Contractor shall continue to provide maintenance for such time necessary to obtain con- formance to the specifications. 308-7 GUARANTEE. add following: The Contractor shall guarantee all 600 mm (24") box trees installed under the contract to live and grow for one year from the day of final acceptance of the contract work. The Contractor shall guarantee all other plant material, including ground covers to live and grow for a period of 30 days from the last day of the maintenance period or final acceptance of the contract work, whichever is the later. The Contractor shall replace, at its expense, all plant material found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during the maintenance period within 5 days of discovery of such plant material. The Engineer shall be the sole judge as to the condition of the plant material. Plant material found to be dead or in poor condition within the guarantee period shall be replaced by the Contractor, at its expense, within 15 days of written notification. Replacements shall be made to the same specifications required for the original plantings. ft "'' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 164 of 173 Pages The Contractor shall submit written vegetation, planting and irrigation guarantee in approved form that all work showing defects in materials or workmanship will be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Engineer for a period of one year from the date of acceptance by the Engineer. The Guarantee form shall be retyped on the Contractor's letterhead and contain the following verbiage: "Guarantee For Vegetation, Planting and Irrigation System for (Project Name)" We hereby guarantee that the vegetation, planting and irrigation system we have furnished and in- stalled for (project name) is free from defects in materials and workmanship, and the work has been completed in accordance with the drawings and specifications. We agree to repair or replace any defect in vegetation, material or workmanship, including that due to ordinary wear and tear, which may develop during the periods specified in section 308-7 of the Standard Specifications and the Special Provisions of said project from date of completion of the Work or termination of any maintenance period, whichever is the later, and also to repair or replace any damage resulting from the repairing or replacing of such defects at no additional cost to the Agency. This guarantee does not extend to unusual abuse or neglect that may occur subsequent to the date of completion of the Work or termination of any maintenance period, whichever is the later. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as determined by the Engineer, after receipt of written notice. In the event of failure to make such repairs or replacements within a reason- able time after receipt of written notice from the Engineer, we authorize the Engineer to proceed to have said repairs or replacements made at our expense, and we will pay the costs and charges there- fore upon demand. Project: (Project Name) Location: (Legal Description of Project Property) Name of Contractor: Address: (Of Contractor) Telephone: (Of Contractor) By: (Typed or printed names of signing Officer(s) of the Contractor authorized to bind the Contractor in legal matters) Title: (Of said officer(s)) Signature(s) Date of Execution:" Add the following section: 308-7.1 Record Drawings. In addition to the requirements of section 2-5.4, herein, the Contractor shall prepare record drawings that show all changes in the work constituting departures from the original contract drawings, including those involving both constant-pressure and intermittent-pressure lines and appurtenances. The Contractor shall accurately record, on a daily basis, on one set of blue line prints of the irrigation drawings, all changes in work constituting departures from the original contract drawings, including changes in both pressure and nonpressure line. The Contractor shall post information on record drawings no later than the next working day after the work is installed. The Contractor shall record changes and dimensions in a legible and professional manner. When the drawings are approved by the Engineer the Contractor shall transfer all information to a set of reproducible photo mylar drawings. Items required to be shown shall be dimensioned by the Contractor from two permanent points of reference (buildings, monuments, sidewalks, curbs, pavement). The accuracy of location of all items to be shown on the drawings shall be 150 mm (6") in both the vertical and horizontal planes. All text and numerals placed on drawings shall be 0.30 mm Cia") in size. Facilities and items to be located in their horizontal and vertical positions and shown on the record drawings include all: a) Point(s) of connection, for water and electrical services b) Routing of irrigation pressure mainlines c) Backflow preventors d) Ball, gate and check valves e) Irrigation control valves. f) Quick coupler valves g) Routing of service wires h) Routing of control wires i) Electrical service equipment j) Electrical junction boxes k) Irrigation controllers I) Sleeves for future connections m) Other equipment of a similar nature (as directed by the Engineer). The Contractor shall keep the blue print drawings available for the Engineer's inspection at any time. The Contractor shall make all changes to reproducible drawings in waterproof black ink (no ball point pen). Changes in dimensions shall be recorded in a legible and professional manner. Record construction drawings shall be maintained at the job site during construction. The Contractor shall provide one set of mylar "record" drawings to the Engineer after submitting blueline prints of the proposed "record" drawings for, and obtaining their approval by, the Engineer. Add the following section: 308-7.2 Controller Chart. The Contractor shall prepare record drawings which shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval by the Engineer before charts are prepared. The Contractor shall provide one controller chart of the maximum size the controller doorwill allow, for each controller supplied, showing the area covered by that automatic controller. The chart shall be a reduction of the actual record system drawing with a legend to explain all symbols. If the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, The Contractor shall enlarge it to a size that will be readable when reduced. The Contractor shall photocopy the chart, with a pastel transparent color used to show area of coverage for each station. When completed and approved, the Contractor shall hermetically seal the chart between two pieces of plastic, each piece being a minimum 20 mils thick. The Contractor shall complete the charts and obtain the Engineers approval prior to final inspection of the irrigation system. Add the following section: 308-7.3 Operation and Maintenance Manuals. The Contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engi- neer, within 10 calendar days prior to completion of construction, all required and necessary descrip- tive material in complete detail and sufficient quantity, properly prepared in four individual bound cop- ies. The descriptive material shall describe the material installed in sufficient detail to permit qualified operating personnel to understand, operate, and maintain all equipment. The Contractor shall include spare parts list and related manufacturer information for each equipment item installed. Each manual shall include the following: a) Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number. b) Duration of Guarantee period. c) List of equipment, with names and addresses of manufacturer's local representative. d) Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. e) In addition to the maintenance manuals, the Contractor shall provide the agency maintenance personnel with instructions for major equipment, and show written evidence to the Engineer at the conclusion of the work that this service has been rendered. ft ~' Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 166 of 173 Pages Add the following section: 308-7.4 Check List. The Contractor shall complete and forward signed and dated checklist to the Engineer before final acceptance of project. The following checklist at the end of the project, using the format shown: a) Plumbing permits (if none required, so note) b) Materials approval c) Pressure mainline test (by whom, and date) d) Record drawings completed (received by, and date) e) Controller chart completed (received by, and date) f) Materials furnished (received by, and date) g) Operation and maintenance manuals furnished (received by, and date) h) System and equipment operation instructions (received by, and date) i) Manufacturer warranties (received by, and date) j) Written guarantee by Contractor (received by, and date) 308-8 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. add the following: The lump-sum or unit prices set forth in the contract documents shall include, but not be limited to, full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, and equipment and performing all work necessary to complete, maintain, and guar- antee the planting and irrigation work described or specified in the contract documents, including soils testing and recommended soil amendments, seed and hydroseed slurry, tree stakes, bark mulch, erosion control matting, plant materials, temporary irrigation and permanent irrigation, including re- duced-pressure back-flow preventer, ball valves, drip valve assembly, electric control valves, quick couplers, control wires, pull boxes, valve boxes, all piping and sleeves, electrical conduits, irrigation heads, drip emitters, bubblers, drip irrigation equipment, connection from electrical service to irrigation electrical meter, connection from meter to irrigation controller(s), installation of controller enclosure, :)· concrete pads, preparation, correction, reproduction and lamination of "as-built" drawings, controller charts, assembly and submittal of the check list and operation and maintenance manuals and all ap- purtenances to the aforementioned items, as well as 120 days' maintenance and project guarantees. SECTION 310-PAINTING 310-5 PAINTING VARIOUS SURFACES. 310-5.6 Painting Traffic Striping, Pavement Markings and Curb Markings. Modify the fifth para- graph as follows: The Contractor shall furnish all equipment, materials, labor, and supervision neces- sary for painting traffic lanes, directional arrows, guidelines, curbs, parking lines, crosswalks, and other designated markings in accordance with the Plans, or for approved temporary detours essential for safe control of traffic through and around the construction site. The Contractor shall remove by wet grinding all existing or temporary traffic markings and lines that may confuse the public. When tem- porary detour striping or markings are no longer required, they shall be removed prior to painting the new traffic stripes or markings. 310-5.6.3 Equipment. Delete the ninth paragraph and substitute the following: The Contractor shall provide a wet grinding machine with sufficient capacity to completely remove all existing or temporary traffic striping or markings that conflict with the striping plan, or are contrary to the Traffic Manual, or that may be confusing to the public. The surface produced by grinding the existing or temporary traffic striping or markings on pavement shall not exceed variations from a uniform plane more than 3 mm Cia") in 3m (10') when measured parallel to the centerline of the street or more than 6 mm CU') in 3 m (1 0') when measured perpendicular to the centerline of the street. The use of any equipment that leaves ridges, indentations or other objectionable marks in the pavement shall be discontinued, and equipment capable of providing acceptable surface shall be furnished by the Contractor. This equip- ment shall meet all requirements of the air pollution control district having jurisdiction. ft ~~Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Paae 167 of 173 Paaes 310-5.6.6 Preparation of Existing Surfaces. Modify the first paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall remove all existing markings and striping, either permanent or temporary, which are to be aban- doned, obliterated or that conflict with the plans by wet grinding methods. Removal of striping by high velocity water jet may be permitted when there is neither potential of the water and detritus from the high velocity water jetting to damage vehicles or private property nor to flow from the street into any storm drain or water course and when approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall vacuum all water and detritus resulting from high velocity water jet striping removal from the pavement immedi- ately after the water jetting and shall not allow such materials to flow in the gutter, enter the storm drain system or to leave the pavement surface. Surface variation limitations for high velocity water jet striping removal shall be the same as for grinding. The Contractor shall not use dry or wet sandblasting in any areas. Alternate methods of paint removal require prior approval of the Engineer. Obliteration of traffic striping with black paint, light emulsion oil or any other masking method other than a minimum 30mm (0.1 0') thick asphalt concrete overlay is not permitted. 310-5.6.7 Layout, Alignment, and Spotting. Modify the first paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall establish the necessary control points for all required pavement striping and markings by survey- ing methods. No layout of traffic striping shall be performed by the Contractor before establishment of the necessary control points. The Contractor shall establish all traffic striping between these points by string line or other method to provide striping that will vary less than 80mm per 100m (1/2 inch in 50 feet) from the specified alignment. The Contractor shall obliterate, straight stripes deviating more than 80mm per 100mm (1/ 2 inch in 50 feet) by wet grinding, and then correcting the markings. The Contractor shall lay out (cat track) immediately behind installation of surface course asphalt and as the work progresses. 310-5.6.8 Application of Paint. Modify the second paragraph as follows: The Contractor shall apply the first coat of paint immediately upon approval of striping layout by the Engineer. The Contractor shall paint the ends of each median nose yellow. Add the following to the eighth paragraph: The Contractor shall apply temporary traffic stripes in one coat. Temporary traffic stripes shall be maintained by the Contractor so that the stripes are clearly visible both day and night. 310-5.6.10 Measurement and Payment. Modify the first paragraph as follows: Final and temporary traffic striping, curb markings and pavement markings as shown on the plans and required by the specifications shall be included in the lump-sum price bid for temporary and final traffic striping, and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore. Reapplication of temporary stripes and markings shall be repainted at the Contractor's expense, and no additional compensation will be allowed there- fore. The lump sum prices bid and shall include all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals for doing all work in installing the final and temporary traffic striping. Add the following Section: 310-7 PERMANENT SIGNING Add the following Section: 310-7.1 General. Add the following section: The Contractor shall provide and install all permanent traffic control signs at locations shown on plans and as specified herein. Add the following section: 310-7.2 Measurement And Payment. Permanent signing and appurtenances thereto shown on the plans or required in the specifications are a part of the lump-sum item for permanent signing and payment therefore shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in supplying and installing permanent signing and appurtenances, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specification and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. SECTION 312-PAVEMENT MARKER PLACEMENT AND REMOVAL 312-1 PLACEMENT. Add the following to the third paragraph: 4) When being installed on asphalt concrete pavement sooner than 14 days after placement of the asphalt concrete pavement course on which the pavement markers are to be placed. Add the following section: 312-1.1 Reflective Channelizer Placement and Removal. The Contractor shall place and remove reflective channelizers the same as for pavement marker placement and removal. The Contractor shall place the channelizers uniformly, straight on tangent alignment and on a true arc on curved alignment to the same tolerances of position as for application of paint in section 31 0-5.6.8. The Con- tractor shall perform all layout work necessary to place the channelizers to the proper alignment. If the channelizers are displaced or fail to remain in an upright position, from any cause, the channelizers shall immediately be replaced or restored to their original location, by the Contractor. When reflective channelizers are removed the pavement surface shall be restored to the same color and surface finish as the adjacent pavement. SECTION 313-TEMPORARY TRAFFIC CONTROL DEVICES Add the following section: 313-1 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC PAVEMENT MARKERS. Add the following section: :) 313-1.1 General. The Contractor shall supply and install temporary traffic pavement markers, chan--.... nelizers, signing, railing (type K), crash cushions and appurtenances at the locations shown on the plans and as required in the specifications, complete in place prior to opening the traveled way served by said final and temporary traffic pavement markers, signing, railing (type K) and appurtenances to public traffic. 313-1.2 Temporary Pavement Markers. Temporary reflective raised pavement markers shall be placed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Temporary reflective raised pavement markers shall be cemented to the surfacing with the adhesive recommended by the manufacturer, except epoxy adhesive shall not be used to place temporary reflective raised pavement markers in areas where removal of the markers will be required. Pavement striping, legends and markers which conflict with any traffic pattern shall be removed by grinding as determined by the Engineer. The Contractor shall use temporary reflective raised pavement markers for temporary pavement marking, except when the temporary pavement markers are used to replace patterns of temporary traffic stripe that will be in place for less than 30 days. Reflective pavement markers used in place of the remova- ble-type pavement markers shall conform to the section 312 "Pavement Marker Placement and Re- moval", except the 14-day waiting period before placing the pavement markers on new asphalt con- crete surfacing as specified in section 312-1 "Placement", shall not apply; and epoxy adhesive shall not be used to place pavement markers in areas where removal of the markers will be required. Add the following section: 313-1.3 Channelizers. Channelizers shall be new surface-mounted type and shall be furnished, placed, and maintained at the locations shown on the plans. Channelizer posts shall be orange in color. Channelizers shall have affixed white reflective sheeting as specified in the special provisions. O The reflective sheeting shall be 75 mm x 300 mm (3" x 12"} in size. The reflective sheeting shall be visible at 300 m (1000') at night under illumination of legal high beam headlights, by persons with vision of or corrected to 20/20. The channelizer bases shall be cemented to the pavement in the same manner as provided for cementing pavement markers to pavement in section 312-1 , "Placement." Channelizers shall be applied only on a clean, dry surface. Channelizers shall be placed on the align- ment and location shown on the plans and as directed by the Engineer. The channelizers shall be placed uniformly, straight on tangent alignment and on a true arc on curved alignment. All layout work necessary to place the channelizers to the proper alignment shall be performed by the Contractor. If the channelizers are displaced or fail to remain in an upright position, from any cause, the channelizers shall immediately be replaced or restored to their original location, by the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a Certificate of Compliance in accordance with the provisions of section 4-1.5, "Certification". Said certificate shall certify that the channelizers comply with the plans and spec- ifications and conform to the prequalified design and material requirements approved by the Engineer and were manufactured in accordance with a quality control program approved by the Engineer. Add the following section: 313-2 TEMPORARY TRAFFIC SIGNING. Add the following section: 313-2.1 General. The Contractor shall provide and install all temporary traffic control signs, markers, markings, and delineators at locations shown on plans and specified herein. Add the following section: 313-2.2 Maintenance of Temporary Traffic Signs. If temporary traffic signs are displaced or over- turned, from any cause, during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall immediately replace the signs in their original approved locations. The Contractor shall maintain all temporary traffic signs used in the Work in a clean, reflective and readable condition. The Contractor shall replace or restore graffiti marked temporary traffic signs and posts used in the Work within 18 hours of such marking being discovered during non-working hours or, when the marking is discovered during working hours, within 2 hours of such discovery of marking. Add the following section: 313-3 TEMPORARY RAILING (TYPE K) AND CRASH CUSHIONS. Add the following section: 313-3.1 Temporary Railing and Crash Cushions. Temporary railing (Type K) shall consist of inter- connected new or undamaged used precast concrete barrier units as shown on the plans. Temporary sand-filled crash cushions shall consist of new or undamaged used temporary sand-filled crash cush- ions units as shown on the plans. 313-3.1.1 Appearance. Exposed surfaces of new and used units of Temporary railing (Type K) shall be freshly coated with a white color paint prior to their first use on the project. The paint shall conform to the provisions in sections 210-1.5 "Paint Systems" and 310 "Painting". Contractor shall be respon- sible for the removal and cleanup or painting over the graffiti from the K-Rails within 48 hours. The Contractor Shall replace or repaint units of Temporary railing (Type K) or shall remove graffiti, tire or vehicle marks, dirt or any and all materials such that said marks or discoloration mar the appearance of said units when ordered by the Engineer after the units are in place. Add the following section. 313-3.1.2 Manufacture of Temporary Railing. In addition to the requirements herein the temporary railing (Type K) shall be manufactured per CAL TRANS Standard Drawing T3. Concrete used to man- ufacture Temporary railing (Type K) shall conform to the provisions in sections 201-1, "Portland Ce- ment Concrete" and 303-1 "Concrete Structures"." Load tickets and a Certificate of Compliance will not be required. Reinforcing steel shall conform to the provisions sections 201-1, "Portland Cement Concrete" and 303-1 "Concrete Structures". Steel bars to receive bolts at ends of concrete panels shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 36/A 36M. The bolts shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 307. A round bar of the same diameter may be substituted for the end-connecting bolt shown on the plans. The bar shall conform to ASTM Designation: A 36/A 36M, shall have a minimum length of 660 mm and shall have a 75 mm (3") diameter by 9 mm (%") thick plate welded on the upper end with a 5-mm e/16") fillet weld. The final surface finish of temporary railings (Type K) shall conform to the provisions in section 303-1.9.2 "Ordinary Surface Finish." Exposed surfaces of concrete elements shall be cured by the water method, the forms-in-place method, or the pigmented curing compound method. The pigmented curing compound shall be type 2 curing compound. Temporary railing (Type K) may have the Contractor's name or logo on each panel. The name or logo shall not be more than 1 00 mm in height and shall be located not more than 300 mm above the bottom of the rail panel. Add the following section. 313-3.1.3 Installation of Temporary Railing. In addition to the requirements herein the temporary railing (Type K) shall be installed per CAL TRANS Standard Drawing T3. Temporary railing (Type K) shall be set on firm, stable foundation. The foundation shall be graded to provide a uniform bearing throughout the entire length of the railing. Abutting ends of precast concrete units shall be placed and maintained in alignment without substantial offset to each other. The precast concrete units shall be positioned straight on tangent alignment and on a true arc on curved alignment. Each rail unit placed within 3 m (1 0') of a traffic lane shall have a reflector installed on top of the rail as directed by the Engineer. Reflectors and adhesive will be furnished by the Contractor. A Type P marker panel con- forming to the requirements of the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) 2003 Edition as amended by the MUTCD 2003 California Supplement shall also be installed at each end of railing installed adjacent to a two-lane, two-way highway and at the end facing traffic of railing installed adjacent to a one-way roadbed. If the railing is placed on a skew, the marker shall be installed at the end of the skew nearest the traveled way. Type P marker panels shall conform to the provisions of section 206-7.2, ''Temporary Traffic Signs". Where shown on the plans, threaded rods or dowels shall be bonded in holes drilled in existing concrete. When temporary railings (Type K) are removed, any area where temporary excavation or embankment was used to accommodate the temporary railing shall be restored to its previous condition, or constructed to its planned condition. Add the following section: 313-3.2 Temporary Sand-Filled Crash Cushions. Temporary sand-filled crash cushion units shall ·~ be "Energite Ill" manufactured by Energy Absorption Systems, "Fitch Inertial Barrier System Modules" """""" manufactured by Roadway Safety Service, or equal. Features required to determine equivalence of any other temporary sand-filled crash cushion units shall be approval of the system by CAL TRANS and that the temporary sand-filled crash cushion units meet NCHRP 350 standards. Other features will be suitability to application, operational characteristics, durability and other such characteristics that the Engineer shall determine. Temporary sand-filled crash cushions (TSFCC) shall be of the type and array configurations shown on plans, and installed at every end of, or gap in, the temporary railing (Type K) whenever the closest point of approach of traffic, regardless of direction, is 4.6 m (15') or less to the end of the temporary railing (Type K) being considered. The TSFCC shall be installed per CAL TRANS Standard Drawings T1 and T2 for approach speeds no less than the posted speed of the street prior to construction or 55 kilometers per hour (35 mph), whichever is the greater. The TSFCC array shall be appropriate to the application as shown on said standard drawings. A Type J and/or P marker panel conforming to the requirements of the Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) 2003 Edition as amended by the MUTCD 2003 California Supplement shall also be installed at each TSFCC array as shown in CAL TRANS Standard Draw- ings T1 and T2. Particular care shall be taken to assure that crash cushions are installed with the soil supporting them and the adjacent soil leveled to match the elevation of the bottom of the temporary railing immediately adjacent to the crash cushion. All routes of approach to the TSCFF array shall be graded such that any vehicle diverging from the travelled way to strike the TSCFF will travel on a vertical alignment parallel to the segment of the travel lane that it departed from. Add the following section: 313-4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT. Temporary traffic pavement markers, temporary channel- izers, temporary signing, temporary railing (type K), temporary crash cushions and temporary appur- tenances thereto shown on the plans or required in the specifications are a part of the lump-sum item for traffic control and payment therefore shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, mate- rials, tools, equipment, and incidentals and for doing all the work involved in applying, installing, main- taining, and removing temporary traffic pavement markers, channelizers, signing, railing (type K), crash cushions and appurtenances, complete in place, as shown on the plans, as specified in the Standard Specification and these special provisions, and as directed by the Engineer. Payment for temporary crash cushions, concrete barriers and the signs and reflectors marking them shall include the installation, grading for installation, grading for the approach path, maintenance, painting andre- painting, replacement of damaged units and removal and shall also be included in the lump-sum price bid for traffic control. Payment for installation and/or relocation of K-rails and crash cushions when not shown on the plans and requested by the Engineer shall be made per section 3-3, Extra Work, SSPWC. ft ~J Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Page 172 of 173 Pages SUPPLEMENTAL PROVISIONS TO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONSTRUCTION PART 6, MODIFIED ASPHALTS, PAVEMENTS AND PROCESSES 600-3 Rubberized Emulsion -Aggregate Slurry 600-3.2 Materials add the following: Aggregate for Rubberized Emulsion-Aggregate Slurry shall be Type I Slurry Aggregate. 600-3.4 Application of REAS add to the first paragraphs: No slurry shall be applied until the provi- sions of subsection 212-1.2.6, Herbicide Application, Section 302-11 Asphalt Concrete Pavement Crack Filling and Sealing, Section 312-3 Pavement Marker Removal have all been satisfied. The Contractor shall remove all existing markings, legends and striping, either permanent or tempo- rary in those areas to be slurried. Removal of striping by high velocity water jet may be permitted when there is neither potential of the water and detritus from the high velocity water jetting to damage vehicles or private property nor to flow from the street into any storm drain or water course and when approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall vacuum all water and detritus resulting from high velocity water jet striping removal from the pavement immediately after the water jetting and shall not allow such materials to flow in the gutter, enter the storm drain system or to leave the pavement surface. Surface variation limitations for high velocity water jet striping removal shall be the same as ~ for grinding. The Contractor shall not use dry or wet sandblasting in any areas. -....,# All cracks and areas between existing curb and gutter and edge of pavement that contain weeds or plant growth of any kind shall be treated with herbicides. Herbicides shall be applied at least 2(two) working days prior to sealing of street. Allowance for the two day period shall be shown in the schedule required per section 6-1 . Contractor shall remove any visible plant growth prior to placement of Herb- icide. Full compensation for removal of striping and herbicide application shall include but not be limited to: furnishing all labor, tools, equipment, and materials necessary for doing the work and shall be consid- ered as included in the contract unit price bid for Rubberized Emulsion Aggregate Slurry and no addi- tional compensation will be allowed therefore. 600-3.6 Public Convenience and Traffic Control modify the first line with the following: Public Con- venience and traffic control shall conform to 302-4.4.4. There shall be no stockpiling of material al- lowed on City right-of-way. ~ Q Revised 1/30/13 Contract No. 50081 Paae 173 of 173 Paaes Section 01015 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS 1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK. The Work to be performed under these Contract Documents is generally described as follows: Installation of approximately 1 ,860 If of 18-inch diameter welded steel pipe, 60 If of 14-inch diameter welded steel pipe, a pressure reducing station including HVAC, sump pump, electrical and I&C, and demolition of the existing pipeline and pressure reducing station. 2. OFFSITE STORAGE. Offsite storage arrangements shall be approved by Owner for all materials and equipment not incorporated into the Work but included in Applications for Payment. Such offsite storage arrangements shall be presented in writing and shall afford adequate and satisfactory security and protection. Offsite storage facilities shall be accessible to Owner and Engineer. 3. SALVAGE OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT. Existing materials and equipment removed and not reused as a part of the Work shall become Contractor's property. 4. EASEMENTS AND RIGHTS-OF-WAY. The easements and rights-of-way for the pipelines will be provided by Owner. Contractor shall confine its construction operations within the limits indicated on the Drawings. Contractor shall use due care in placing construction tools, equipment, excavated materials, and pipeline materials and supplies in order to avoid damage to property and interference with traffic. 5. NOTICES TO OWNERS AND AUTHORITIES. Contractor shall, as provided in the General Provisions, notify owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect them. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access to property, or when any utility service connection must be interrupted, Contractor shall give notices sufficiently in advance to enable the affected persons to provide for their needs. Notices shall conform to any applicable local ordinance and, whether delivered orally or in writing, shall include appropriate information concerning the interruption and instructions on how to limit inconvenience caused thereby. Utilities and other concerned agencies shall be notified at least 24 hours prior to cutting or closing streets or other traffic areas or excavating near underground utilities or pole lines. JULY 2014 1 of4 SECTION 01015 Project Requirements 6. CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING FACILITIES. Unless otherwise specified or indicated, Contractor shall make all necessary connections to existing facilities, including structures, drain lines, and utilities such as water, sewer, gas, telephone, and electric. In each case, Contractor shall receive permission from Owner or the owning utility prior to undertaking connections. Contractor shall protect facilities against deleterious substances and damage. Connections to existing facilities which are in service shall be thoroughly planned in advance, and all required equipment, materials, and labor shall be on hand at the time of undertaking the connections. Work shall proceed continuously (around the clock) if necessary to complete connections in the minimum time. Operation of valves or other appurtenances on existing utilities, when required, shall be by or under the direct supervision of the owning utility. 7. UNFAVORABLE CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS. During unfavorable weather, wet ground, or other unsuitable construction conditions, Contractor shall confine its operations to work which will not be affected adversely by such conditions. No portion of the Work shall be constructed under conditions which would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof, unless special means or precautions are taken by Contractor to perform the Work in a proper and satisfactory manner. 8. CUTIING AND PATCHING. As provided in General Provisions, Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for the Work and as may be necessary in connection with uncovering Work for inspection or for the correction of defective Work. Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for and in connection with the Work, including but not limited to the following: Removal of improperly timed Work. Removal of samples of installed materials for testing. Installation of new Work in existing facilities. Contractor shall provide all shoring, bracing, supports, and protective devices necessary to safeguard all Work and existing facilities during cutting and patching operations. Contractor shall not undertake any cutting or demolition which may affect the structural stability of the Work or existing facilities without Engineer's concurrence. Materials shall be cut and removed to the extent indicated on the Drawings or as required to complete the Work. Materials shall be removed in a careful manner, with no damage to adjacent facilities or materials. Materials which are not salvable shall be removed from the site by Contractor. JULY 2014 2 of4 SECTION 01015 Project Requirements All Work and existing facilities affected by cutting operations shall be restored with new materials, or with salvaged materials acceptable to Engineer, to obtain a finished installation with the strength, appearance, and functional capacity required. If necessary, entire surfaces shall be patched and refinished. 9. HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE. No Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site in areas that will be affected by the Work are known to the Owner. 9.01. Previously Unidentified Hazardous Environmental Conditions. If, during the progress of the Work, previously unidentified Hazardous Environmental Conditions are identified, Contractor shall stop work in the affected area and immediately notify the Owner and Engineer in accordance with the requirements in the General Conditions. At the Owner's discretion, the Owner may instruct the Contractor to engage an abatement Subcontractor qualified to perform abatement of the suspected Hazardous Environmental Condition identified, to verify the materials and, if necessary, encapsulate, enclose, or remove and dispose of all ACM, Metal Bearing Protective Coatings, Paints, and Linings, Contaminated Environmental Media, and/or other Hazardous Substances in accordance with current regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency and the U.S. Department of Labor-Occupational Safety and Health Administration, the applicable state regulating agency, and any local government agency. Payment for such work will be made by Change Order. 9.02. Subcontractor's Qualifications. The Subcontractor for removal/abatement of Hazardous Environmental Conditions shall be regularly engaged in this type of activity and shall be familiar with the regulations which govern this work. The Subcontractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of Owner that it has successfully completed removal/abatement projects of similar nature and extent, that it has the necessary staff and equipment to perform the work, and that it has an approved site for disposal of waste materials. Liability insurance covering the Hazardous Environmental Condition removal/abatement work shall be provided as specified in the Supplementary Conditions. 9.03. Removal/Abatement Methods. The Hazardous Environmental Condition removal/abatement Subcontractor shall visit the site of the Work to determine the equipment required for completion of the work, and shall submit a work plan of its proposed removal/abatement procedure to Owner before beginning work and shall certify that the methods are in full compliance with the governing regulations. The work plan shall cover all aspects of the removal/abatement, including health and safety of construction site and owner employees, hygiene facilities, employee certification, clearance criteria, transportation and disposal, enclosure techniques, and other techniques appropriate for the proposed work. JULY 2014 3 of4 SECTION 01015 Project Requirements For abatement of ACM, the Contractor shall retain an independent third party air monitoring firm to conduct air monitoring as required to demonstrate the effectiveness of the dust containment system. The air quality testing firm shall submit a report documenting the results of the air monitoring. The air monitoring firm shall have at least 5 years of experience in air monitoring for ACM removal. 10. APPLICABLE CODES. References in the Contract Documents to local codes mean the following: Other standard codes which apply to the Work are designated in the Specifications. 11. REFERENCE STANDARDS. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to the laws or regulations of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual, code, or laws or regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the effective date of the Contract or Agreement if there were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard, specification, manual, or code, or any instruction of a Supplier, shall be effective to change the duties or responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer, or any of their subcontractors, consultants, agents, or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents, nor shall any such provision or instruction be effective to assign to Owner, Engineer or any of Engineer's CONSULTANTS, agents, or employees, any duty or authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the Contract Documents. End of Section JULY 2014 4 of4 SECTION 01015 Project Requirements 2 3 4 5 6 JULY 2014 Water Pollution Control Including Daily Street Sweeping -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment and incidentals, for water pollution prevention including daily street sweeping during construction activities, control, and monitoring and for doing all the work throughout the duration of construction activities to keep the project in compliance with all local, state and federal regulations. Street sweeping equipment shall be vacuum style street sweeper and in no instances shall be bobcat sweeper be used at any time. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Water Pollution Control Including Daily Street Sweeping which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Traffic Control -The contract lump sum price shall include providing complete traffic control including permits, providing traffic handling/stage construction, and furnishing, installing, maintaining traffic control during all stages of construction, removing traffic control devices when they are no longer needed, and temporary street striping. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Traffic Control which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Protection of Existing Utilities -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work, and all other work under Protection of Existing Utilities which is not already included in another bid item, involved in protection and restoration or relocation of the existing improvements and utilities damaged or removed during construction including but not limited to potable water, recycled water, irrigation, fire water, sewer, storm drain, and gas pipelines, as well as electric, telephone, and cable television lines and their appurtenances, curb, gutter, fence and sidewalk protection, and installation, maintenance and removal of temporary by-pass piping of utility required due to construction. Construction Schedule -The contract lump sum price shall include the development and updates to the Construction Schedule in accordance with Section 6-1 of the General Provisions. Potholing -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in performing exploratory excavation at utility connections and crossings and at connections prior to construction, including but not limited to excavating, backfilling, pavement restoration, traffic control, and permitting. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Potholing which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum $10,000 Unit Price 30 Each Page 2 of 8 SECTION 01200 Measurement and Pavment 7 8 9 10 JULY 2014 Construction of 18-inch Steel Pipe -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all work involved in constructing the new 18-inch 0.25 inch thick cement mortar lined and tape coated welded steel pipeline, including excavation, placement of bedding, backfill and compaction, and disposal of excess materials, dewatering if necessary, pipe installation, welding, pressure testing, disinfection, restoration of AC pavement within the trench limits, and street improvements. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Construction of 18-inch Steel Pipe which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Construction of 14-inch Steel Pipe-The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all work involved in constructing the new 14-inch 0.25 inch thick cement mortar lined and tape coated welded steel pipeline, including excavation, placement of bedding, backfill and compaction, and disposal of excess materials, dewatering if necessary, pipe installation, welding, pressure testing, disinfection, restoration of AC pavement within the trench limits, and street improvements. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Construction of 14-inch Steel Pipe which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Connection at Sta 230+50 -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work, and all other work under Connection at Sta 230+50 which is not already included in another bid item, involved in constructing the connection to the existing 21-inch steel pipe at Sta 230+50 including trenching, bedding, backfill and compaction, removal and disposal of excess excavated material, dewatering if necessary, removal and disposal of existing pipe, installation of new flange and butt strap, repair of steel pipe lining and coatings, and restoration of ground surface within trench limits. Connection at Sta 249+08 -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work, and all other work under Connection at Sta 249+08 which is not already included in another bid item, involved in constructing the connection to the existing 21-inch steel pipe at Sta 249+08 including trenching, bedding, backfill and compaction, removal and disposal of excess excavated material, dewatering if necessary, removal and disposal of existing pipe, installation of butt strap, repair of steel pipe lining and coatings, and restoration of ground surface within trench limits. 1,860 LF 60 LF Lump Sum Lump Sum Page 3 of 8 SECTION 01200 .. ,. ___ ..... ----~ --...1 n-··---~ 11 12 13 14 6" Blow off Assembly -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, including excavation, assembly, placement of bedding, backfill and compaction, and disposal of excess materials and for doing all the work involved in providing and installing the 6" blow off assemblies as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under 6" Blow off Assembly which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, _Qians and as directed by the Engineer. 2" Combination AirNacuum Valves -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, including excavation, assembly, placement of bedding, backfill and compaction, and disposal of excess materials and for doing all the work involved in providing and installing the 2" combination air/vacuum valves as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under 2" Combination AirNacuum Valves which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. 14" Class 250 Butterfly Valves -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing and installing the 14" butterfly valves as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under 14" Class 250 Butterfly Valves which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. 18" Class 250 Butterfly Valve -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing and installing the 18" butterfly valve as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under 18" Class 250 Butterfly Valve which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. 2EA 2 EA 3EA 1 EA JULY 2014 Page 4 of 8 SECTION 01200 MeasurAmAnt anrl Pavm,::mt 15 16 17 18 JULY 2014 Pressure Reducing Station -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, including excavation, placement of bedding, backfill and compaction, disposal of excess materials for the precast concrete vault, assembly, pressure reducing valve, couplings, galvanized steel ladder, sump, sump pump, ventilation, wall sleeves, and access hatch, and for doing all the work involved in providing, and installing the Pressure Reducing Station as shown on the contract drawings. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Pressure Reducing Station which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Electrical -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing, and installing all electrical equipment for the Pressure Reducing Station as shown on the contract drawings. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Electrical which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Instrumentation & Control (I&C)-The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing, and installing all I&C equipment for the Pressure Reducing Station as shown on the contract drawings. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under I&C which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Cathodic Protection -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, including excavation, placement of bedding, backfill and compaction, and disposal of excess materials and for doing all the work involved in providing, and installing all Cathodic Protection as shown on the contract drawings. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Cathodic Protection which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Page 5 of 8 SECTION 01200 Measurement and Payment 19 20 21 22 23 JULY 2014 4" Potable Water Bypass System -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing, installing and maintaining the 4-inch potable water bypass system throughout construction activities. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under 4" Potable Water Bypass System which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Enqineer. Remove and Replace Concrete Driveway Sta 235+50 -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in demolishing, removing, disposing and replacing the concrete driveway at Pirgos Way near St 235+50 as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Remove and Replace Concrete Driveway which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Enqineer. Remove and Replace Concrete Driveway Sta 246+30 -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in demolishing, removing, disposing and replacing the concrete driveway at Pirgos Way near St 246+35 as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Remove and Replace Concrete Driveway which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Remove and Replace Curb and Gutter -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in demolishing, removing, disposing and replacing the concrete curb and gutter as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Remove and Replace Curb and Gutter which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Enqineer. Remove and Replace Concrete Sidewalk -The contract unit price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in demolishing, removing, disposing and replacing the concrete sidewalk on Cannon Road as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Remove and Replace Concrete Sidewalk which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Enqineer. Lump Sum 120 SF 250SF 50 LF 150SF Page 6 of 8 SECTION 01200 Measurement and Pavment 24 25 26 27 JULY 2014 Remove and Replace Stamped Concrete Median -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in demolishing, removing, disposing and replacing the stamped concrete median shown on the contract drawings. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Remove and Replace Stamped Concrete Median which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Demolish and Abandon in Place Existing 21" PCC Pipe-The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in removing and disposing the 21" PCC Pipe and appurtenances and abandoning in place the 21" PCC pipe as shown on the contract drawings. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Demolish and Abandon in Place Existing 21" PCC Pipe which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Demolish Existing Pressure Reducing Station -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, including excavation, removal, disposal, backfill to match existing grades and for doing all the work involved in demolishing, removing and disposing of the existing pressure reducing station and unclassified fill as shown on the contract drawings. The contract lump sum price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Demolish Existing Pressure Reducing Station which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Standard Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Remove and Dispose of Blowoff Assembly Concrete Manhole -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, including excavation, removal, disposal, and imported backfill material and for doing all the work involved in demolishing, removing, disposing of the concrete manhole, as shown on the contract drawings. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Remove and Dispose of Blow off Assembly Concrete Manhole which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Lump Sum Page 7 of 8 SECTION 01200 28 29 JULY 2014 Reset Street Survey Monument per SDRSD M-10-The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in providing and resetting, the street survey monuments per SDRSD M-10. The contract unit price paid shall be considered full compensation for furnishing all materials, labor, tools, equipment, and all incidentals, necessary to complete the work, and all other work under Reset Street Survey Monument per SDRSD M-10 which is not already included in another bid item, in accordance with the General Provisions, the Special Provisions, Specifications, plans and as directed by the Engineer. Excavation Safety Measures -The contract lump sum price shall include full compensation for furnishing all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and incidentals, and for doing all the work involved in installation of all temporary sheeting, shoring, bracing and safety required by the Contract Documents and/or site conditions where not previously referenced in other bid items. Sheeting, shoring, bracing and safety shall include all planning, design, engineering fees (including design, inspection and certification installation) furnishing and construction, removal and disposal of such temporary sheeting, shoring and bracing, complete as required under the provisions of any permits and in accordance with the requirements of CAL-OSHA and the Construction Safety Orders of the State. END OF SECTION Lump Sum Lump Sum Page 8 of 8 SECTION 01200 Measurement and Pavment Section 01300 SUBMITTALS 1. SHOP DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING DATA. 1.01. General. Shop Drawings and engineering data (submittals) covering all equipment and all fabricated components and building materials which will become a permanent part of the Work under this Contract shall be submitted to Engineer for review, as required. Submittals shall verify compliance with the Contract Documents, and shall include drawings and descriptive information in sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and the operation of component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and supports required; the performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for installation and correlation with other materials and equipment. Each submittal shall cover items from only one section of the specification unless the item consists of components from several sources. Contractor shall submit a complete initial submittal including all components. When an item consists of components from several sources, Contractor's initial submittal shall be complete including all components. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be approved by Contractor and clearly identified with the name and number of this Contract, Contractor's name, and references to applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. Each copy of all submittals, regardless of origin, shall be stamped or affixed with an approval statement of Contractor. Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified and inapplicable data crossed out. The current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and other descriptive data. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the completeness of each submittal. Contractor's stamp or affixed approval statement of a submittal, per Figure 1- 01300, is a representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that Contractor has reviewed and coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified as deviations on each submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal using Figure 2-01300. Such submittals shall, as pertinent to the deviation, indicate essential details of all changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications JULY 2014 1 of6 SECTION 01300 Submittals to other facilities that may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams. For electronic submittals, drawings and the necessary data shall be submitted electronically to Engineer as specified below. Submittal documents shall be in black and white unless color is required for the review of the submittal. All electronic files shall be in Portable Document Format (PDF) as generated by Adobe Acrobat Professional Version 7.0 or higher. The PDF file(s) shall be fully indexed using the Table of Contents, searchable with thumbnails generated. PDF images must be at a readable resolution. For most documents, they should be scanned or generated at 300 dots per inch (dpi). Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture must be performed on these images so that text can be searched, selected and copied from the generated PDF file. The PDF documents shall have a bookmark created in the navigation frame for each major entry ("Section" or "Chapter") in the Table of Contents. Thumbnails shall be generated for each page or graphic in the PDF file. The opening view for each PDF document shall be as follows: Initial View: Bookmarks and Page Magnification: Fit In Window The file shall open to the Contractor's transmittal letter, with bookmarks to the left. The first bookmark shall be linked to the Table of Contents. PDF document properties shall include the submittal number for the document title and the Contractor's name for the author. Electronic submittal file sizes shall be limited to 10 MB. When multiple files are required for a submittal the least number of files possible shall be created. The contractor shall post submittals and retrieve the Engineer's submittal review comments through the Engineer's project website accessible through the Internet. Instruction on procedures for posting and retrieving submittals will be provided after award of the Contract. Facsimiles (fax) will not be acceptable. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals shall be consecutively numbered in direct sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades. 1.02. Engineer's Review of Submittals. Engineer's review of submittals covers only general conformity to the Drawings and Specifications, external connections, and dimensions that affect the layout; it does not indicate thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, and details of the material, equipment, device, or item ~ covered. Engineer's review shall not relieve Contractor of sole responsibility for ......I JULY 2014 2 of6 SECTION 01300 Submittals errors, omissions, or deviations in the drawings and data, nor of Contractor's sole responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. Engineer's submittal review period shall be 20 consecutive calendar days and shall commence on the first calendar day following receipt of the submittal or resubmittal in Engineer's office. The time required to mail the submittal or resubmittal back to Contractor shall not be considered a part of the submittal review period. When the drawings and data are returned with review status "REJECTED/RESUBMIT" or "AMEND AND RESUBMIT", the corrections shall be made as instructed by Engineer. If submittals are made electronically, the corrected drawings and data shall be resubmitted through the project website. When the drawings and data are returned with review status "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" or "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN", no additional copies need be furnished unless specifically requested by Engineer . 1.03. Resubmittal of Drawings and Data. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each resubmittal. Contractor shall verify that all corrected data and additional information previously requested by Engineer are provided on the resubmittal. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall direct specific attention to all revisions in writing and shall list separately any revisions made other than those called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Requirements specified for initial submittals shall also apply to resubmittals. Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter (A, B, etc.) or a unique identification that indicates the initial submittal and correct sequence of each resubmittal. If more than one resubmittal is required because of failure of Contractor to provide all previously requested corrected data or additional information, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmittals. This does not include initial submittal data such as shop tests and field tests that are submitted after initial submittal. Resubmittals shall be made within 30 days of the date of the letter returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within 14 days Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed within that time. The need for more than one resubmittal, or any other delay in obtaining Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the Contract Times unless delay of the Work is the direct result of a change in the Work authorized by a Change Order or failure of Engineer to review and return any submittal to Contractor within the specified review period. JULY 2014 3 of6 SECTION 01300 Submittals 1.04. Color Selection. Contractor shall submit samples of colors and finishes for all accepted products before Engineer will coordinate the selection of colors and finishes with Owner. Engineer will prepare a schedule of finishes that includes the colors and finishes selected for both manufactured products and for surfaces to be field painted or finished and will furnish this schedule to Contractor within 60 days after the date of acceptance of the last color or finish sample. 2. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA AND MANUALS. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied for all equipment requiring maintenance or other attention. The equipment Supplier shall prepare a project specific operation and maintenance manual for each type of equipment indicated in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule. Parts lists and operating and maintenance instructions shall be furnished for other equipment not listed in the individual equipment sections or the equipment schedule. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include the following: a. Equipment function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions. b. Assembly, installation, alignment, adjustment, and checking instructions. c. Operating instructions for startup, routine and normal operation, regulation and control, shutdown, and emergency conditions. d. Lubrication and maintenance instructions. e. Guide to troubleshooting. f. Parts lists and predicted life of parts subject to wear. g. Outline, cross section, and assembly drawings; engineering data; and wiring diagrams. h. Test data and performance curves, where applicable. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered, or which may be required by Contractor. JULY 2014 4 of6 SECTION 01300 Submittals Manuals shall be submitted in electronic format to the Engineer prior to the date of shipment of the equipment. The manuals shall be submitted and the Engineer's review comments retrieved, through the project website accessible through the Internet. Instruction on procedures for posting and retrieving O&M submittals and review comments will be provided after award of the Contract. When the O&M manuals are reviewed "AMEND AND RESUBMIT", the corrections shall be made as instructed by the Engineer, and corrected manuals resubmitted to the Engineer. When review by the Engineer is complete, three copies of each electronic O&M manual shall be delivered on CD-ROM to the Engineer . Each CD shall contain only one copy of one manual. Delivery of the final O&M shall be made 30 days prior to placing the equipment in operation. All material shall be marked with project identification, and inapplicable information shall be marked out or deleted. Shipment of equipment will not be considered complete until all required manuals and data have been received. 2.01. Electronic Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Electronic manuals shall be in Adobe Acrobat's Portable Document Format (PDF), and shall be prepared at a resolution between 300 and 600 dots per inch ( dpi), depending on document type. Optical Character Recognition (OCR) capture shall be performed on these documents. OCR settings shall be performed with the "original image with hidden text" option in Adobe Acrobat Exchange. File size shall be limited to 1 0 MB. When multiple files are required the least number of files possible shall be created. File names shall be in the format OMXXXXX-YYYZ-V.pdf, where XXXXX is the five digit number corresponding to the specification section, YYY is a three digit O&M manual number, e.g. 001, Z is the letter signifying a resubmittal, A, B, C, etc, and V is a number used only when more than one 10 MB file is required for an O&M manual. Documents prepared in PDF format shall be processed as follows: 1. Pages shall be searchable (processed for optical character recognition) and indexed when multiple files are required. 2. Pages shall be rotated for viewing in proper orientation. 3. A bookmark shall be provided in the navigation frame for each entry in the Table of Contents. 4. Embedded thumbnails shall be generated for each completed PDF file. 5. The opening view for PDF files shall be as follows: JULY 2014 Initial View: Bookmarks and Page Page Number: Title Page (usually Page 1) Magnification: Set to Fit in Window Page: Single Page 5 of6 SECTION 01300 Submittals 6. Where the bookmark structure is longer than one page the bookmarks shall be collapsed to show the chapter headings only. 7. When multiple files are required the first file of the series (the parent file) shall list every major topic in the Table of Contents. The parent file shall also include minor headings bookmarked based on the Table of Contents. Major headings, whose content is contained in subsequent files (children) shall be linked to be called from the parent to the specific location in the child file. The child file shall contain bookmark entries for both major and minor headings contained in the child file. The first bookmark of any child file shall link back to the parent file and shall read as follows "Return to the Equipment Name Table of Contents", e.g. Return to the Polymer Feed System Table of Contents. 8. Drawings shall be bookmarked individually. 9. Files shall be delivered without security settings to permit editing, insertion and deletion of material to update the manual provided by the manufacturer. 2.02. Labeling. As a minimum, the following information shall be included on all final O&M manual materials, including CD-ROM disks, jewel cases, and hard copy manuals: Equipment name and/or O&M title spelled out in complete words. Tri-Agencies Water Transmission Pipelines Reach 2 -Phase 1. City ProjecUContract Number. Specification Section Number. Example: "Section 15500" Manufacturer's name. File Name and Date. For example: Pressure Reducing Valves Tri-Agencies Water Transmission Pipelines Reach 2 -Phase 1 ProjecUContract No. __ Specification Section 15098 Manufacturer OM15098-001.pdf, 5/05/14 End of Section JULY 2014 6 of6 SECTION 01300 Submittals SUBMITTAL No. ___ _ SECTION _____ _ Do not combine multiple sections together unless required by specifications. DATE: (Contractor's Letterhead) SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION & CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL STATEMENT COPIES ____ _ DRAWING SHEET NO. __ _ Description submittal contents: -------------------- Location: Manufacturer ----------------------------- Subcontractor or Supplier (Optional)------------------- REMARKS: CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL ( Construction Company ) has reviewed and coordinated the submitted documentation and verifies that the equipment and material meet the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. We accept sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data contained in the submittal as required by the Contract Documents. Deviations: o None D Yes (See attached Figure 2-01300 for written description) Approved By: ________ _ Date: This approval does not release subcontractor I vendor from the contractual responsibilities. JULY 2014 1 of 2 Figure 1 -01300 Submittals DATE: (Contractor's Letterhead) SUBMITTAL No. ___ _ SECTION _____ _ Do not combine multiple sections together unless required by specifications. SUBMITTAL IDENTIFICATION & CONTRACTOR'S APPROVAL STATEMENT COPIES ____ _ ORA WING SHEET NO. __ _ Description submittal contents: ------------------- Location: Manufacturer ________________________ _ Subcontractor or Supplier (Optional)----------------- DEVIATIONS JULY 2014 2 of 2 Figure 2 -01300 Submittals Section 01380 CONSTRUCTION DVDS AND PHOTOGRAPHS PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. Work of This Section. The Contractor shall video tape pre-construction site conditions, take pre-construction photographs, and take post-construction photographs, as specified. The Contractor shall retain a professional photographer and/or videographer to perform the specified services or provide evidence to the Owner of staff's ability to perform some or all of the services specified. The Owner shall have the final determination and discretion as to the suitability of the photographer. The Contractor shall obtain the Owner's approval prior to taking the first series of photographs or video tapes of each specified type. 1-2. Submittals. Submit video operator qualifications and three references for the Owner's review. Submit DVDs and photographs as specified and according to Submittals section. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. Video Taping Equipment. The Contractor's video capability, equipment, and operators shall conform to the following minimum criteria: a. High resolution and clarity shall be provided by a process such as utilizing digital video camera recording equipment and provide as a digital DVD. b. Video camera recording shall be automatically dated and timed. c. The video camera shall be equipped with a zoom lens. d. The system shall have cataloging and storage capacity. e. The system shall have on and off-road mobility. f. The video operator subcontracted or provided by the Contractor shall have at least one (1) year of professional industrial televising experience. 2-2. Pre-Construction Photographic Equipment. The Contractor's photographic capability, equipment, and operators shall conform to the following minimum criteria: JULY2014 1 of4 SECTION 01380 Construction DVDs and Photographs a. The camera shall be a single lens reflex type and shall be digital. b. The camera shall utilize an automatic focus, f-stop, and flash system with manual override to promote quality photography. c. The camera shall be capable of including an inalterable date on the digital photo. d. The photographer subcontracted or provided by the Contractor shall have at least one (1) year of professional industrial photographic experience. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. Video Taping Of Pre-Construction Conditions. The Contractor shall video tape all Project existing surface conditions prior to the start of any construction activities. Important Project aspects that shall be video camera recorded and shall include but are not limited to: a. Property lines. b. Right-of-way and easement conditions. c. Utility markings. d. Survey conditions. e. Pavement conditions. f. Adjacent property conditions. g. Sidewalk, median, curb, and gutter conditions. h. Landscaping, planting, and irrigation conditions. i. Safety conditions. j. Other unusual conditions or equipment/facility installations. All video camera recording of pre-existing surface conditions shall be performed in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for video camera recording, including coordination with the Owner. The Contractor shall transmit all video camera recording to the Owner ~ "'"" immediately after video camera recording. Digital DVDs shall be submitted to the ~ Owner no later than thirty (30) days after issuance of Notice to Proceed, and no .._) construction Work shall commence prior to the Owner's acceptance. JULY2014 2 of4 SECTION 01380 Construction DVDs and Photographs The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional Working days due to video camera recording activities, including securing video camera recording services, taping and editing activities, or submitting digital DVDs to and obtaining acceptance from the Owner. 3-2. Pre-Construction Photographs. 3-2.01 General. The Contractor shall take a sufficient number (200 photographs minimum; complex projects may require additional photographs) of pre-construction photographs necessary to resolve any disputes that may arise regarding the considerations prior to and subsequent to construction. Photographs of the same general types of Project aspects as described under Video Taping of Pre-Construction Conditions shall be taken. All photographs shall include an unalterable date designation. If a dispute arises where no pre-construction photographs were taken, the disputed area shall be restored to the extent directed by the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Contractor shall furnish one set of the pre-construction photographs in digital format to the Owner, and shall make other photographs available for review in settling any disputes that may arise. The Owner may, at his option, take additional pre-construction photographs that may be used to settle disputes, but will not be required to make these photographs available to the Contractor. All photographs of pre-construction surface conditions shall be performed in the presence of the Owner. The Contractor shall make all arrangements for pre-construction photographs including coordination with the Owner. The Contractor shall transmit all prints of pre-construction photographs to the Owner immediately after photographing. Pre-construction digital photographs shall be submitted to the Owner no later than thirty (30) days after issuance of Notice to Proceed, and no construction Work shall commence prior to the Owner's acceptance of the pre-construction photographs. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional Working days due to pre- construction photographing activities, including securing photographic services, photographic copying services, or submitting pre-construction photographs to and obtaining acceptance from the Owner. 3-2.02. Prints. Provide high-quality 4-inch by 6-inch minimum print size photographs in digital format. All photographs shall include an unalterable date designation. JULY 2014 3 of4 SECTION 01380 Construction DVDs and Photographs Contractor shall record the following information for each digital photograph and provide to the Owner: a. Project title. b. Date taken. c. Photograph number. d. Description of view shown in photograph. e. Names of any persons in the view. f. Photographer's name and current contact information. 3-3. Digital Construction Photographs. The Contractor shall provide continuing digital photographs illustrating all aspects of Project progress throughout the Project duration. The appropriate number of digital photographs (minimum of 500) should be submitted to document construction progress. The Contractor shall take photographs at the camera's maximum resolution in sufficient quantity prior to each Project progress meeting. The Owner shall approve the views to be taken and the time which they are to be taken. The Contractor shall record the following information for each photograph taken: a. Project title. b. Date taken. c. Photograph number. d. Description of view shown in photograph. e. Names of any persons in the view. f. Photographer's name and current contact information. The Contractor shall submit a DVD provided by the Contractor of the pictures taken during the previous progress period to the Owner at the regularly scheduled Project progress meetings. End of Section JULY 2014 4of4 SECTION 01380 Construction DVDs and Photographs Section 01400 QUALITY CONTROL 1. TESTING SERVICES. Testing services shall be provided in accordance with Paragraph 4-1.4 of the General Conditions. All tests to determine compliance with the Contract Documents shall be performed by an independent commercial testing firm acceptable to Owner. The testing firm's laboratory shall be staffed with experienced technicians, properly equipped and fully qualified to perform the tests in accordance with the specified standards. Testing services provided by Owner are for the sole benefit of Owner; however, test results shall be available to Contractor. Testing necessary to satisfy Contractor's internal quality control procedures shall be the sole responsibility of Contractor. 1-1. Testing Services Provided by Contractor. Not used. 1-2. Testing Services provided by Owner. Unless otherwise specified, Owner shall provide for tests made on the following materials and equipment: Welding Moisture-density and relative density tests on embedment, fill, and backfill materials. In-place field density tests on embedments, fills, and backfill. Other materials and equipment at the discretion of Owner. Testing, including samplihg, will be performed by Owner or the testing firm's laboratory personnel, in the general manner indicated in the Specifications. Owner shall determine the exact time, location, and number of tests, including samples. Arrangements for delivery of samples and test specimens to the testing firm's laboratory will be made by Owner. The testing firm's laboratory shall perform all laboratory tests within a reasonable time consistent with the specified standards and shall furnish a written report of each test. Contractor shall furnish all sample materials and cooperate in the testing activities, including sampling. Contractor shall interrupt the Work when necessary to allow testing, including sampling, to be performed. Contractor shall have no Claim for an increase in Contract Price or Contract Times due to such interruption. When testing activities, including sampling, are performed in the JULY2014 1 of3 SECTION 01400 Quality Control field by Owner or laboratory personnel, Contractor shall furnish personnel and facilities to assist in the activities. 1-3. Transmittal of Test Reports. Written reports of tests and engineering data furnished by Contractor for Owner's review of materials and equipment proposed to be used in the Work shall be submitted as specified for Shop Drawings. The laboratory retained by Owner will furnish six copies of a written report of each test. Five copies of each test report will be transmitted to the Resident Project Representative, and one copy to Contractor, within 3 days after each test is completed. 2. SPECIAL INSPECTIONS. A Special Inspector or Inspector or Inspectors will be provided by Owner to perform Special Inspections in accordance with the requirements of the requirements listed in the 2007 CBC, and as described below for welding and soils. Welding inspections shall be as described in specification section 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials. Soils: Verify materials below footings are adequate to achieve the design bearing capacity. Verify excavations are extended to proper depth and have reached proper material. Perform classification and testing of controlled fill materials. Verify use of proper materials, densities and lift thicknesses during placement and compaction of controlled fill. Prior to placement of controlled fill, observe subgrade and verify that site has been prepared properly. 3. OFFSITE INSPECTION. Owner may select to inspect materials or equipment during the production, manufacturing, or fabricating process, or before shipment. Owner may send a representative, at Owner's cost, to the factory or shop to review the assembly and witness the factory testing and performance of the followi ng: Pressure Reducir}g Valves Resilient Seated Gate Valves AWWA Butterfly_ Valves Air Valves JULY2014 Section 15098 Section 151 00 Section 151 02 Section 15108 2 of3 SECTION 01400 Quality Control Contractor shall give appropriate written notice to Owner not less than 1 0 days before offsite inspection services are required, and shall provide for the producer, manufacturer, or fabricator to furnish safe access and proper facilities and to cooperate with inspecting personnel in the performance of their duties. The inspection representative will submit a written report to Owner, with a copy to Contractor, at least once each week. 4. MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES. Manufacturer's field services shall be as specified herein except as specifically specified in the respective equipment sections. 4-1. Services Furnished Under This Contract. An experienced, competent, and authorized representative of the manufacturer of each item of equipment for which field services are indicated in the respective equipment section or in the equipment schedule section shall visit the Site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the equipment installation. In each case, the manufacturer's representative shall be present when the equipment is placed in operation. The manufacturer's representative shall revisit the jobsite as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected and the equipment installation and operation are satisfactory in the opinion of Owner. Each manufacturer's representative shall furnish to Owner, a written report certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated; is in accurate alignment; is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or anchor bolts; and has been operated under full load conditions and that it operated satisfactorily. All costs for these services shall be included in the Contract Price. End of Section JULY 2014 3 of3 SECTION 01400 Quality Control Section 01610 GENERAL EQUIPMENT STIPULATIONS 1. SCOPE. When an equipment specification section in this Contract references this section, the equipment shall conform to the general stipulations set forth in this section, except as otherwise specified in other sections. 2. COORDINATION. Contractor shall coordinate all details of the equipment with other related parts of the Work, including verification that all structures, piping, wiring, and equipment components are compatible. Contractor shall be responsible for all structural and other alterations in the Work required to accommodate equipment differing in dimensions or other characteristics from that contemplated in the Drawings or Specifications. 3. MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE. Unless specifically named in the Specifications, a manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years. 4. WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS. Contractor shall guarantee all equipment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop practice. Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except as required by tests. Except where otherwise specified, structural and miscellaneous fabricated steel used in equipment shall conform to AISC standards. All structural members shall be designed for shock or vibratory loads. When dissimilar metal components are used, consideration shall be given to prevention of galvanic corrosion. 5. STRUCTURAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. All equipment, including non- structural components and non-building structures as defined in ASCE 7, and their anchorage, shall be designed and detailed in accordance with the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 6. ELEVATION. The elevation of the site shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. All equipment furnished JULY 2014 1 of3 SECTION 01610 General Equipment Stipulations shall be designed to meet stipulated conditions and to operate satisfactorily at the specified elevation. 7. ANCHOR BOLTS. Equipment suppliers shall furnish suitable anchor bolts for each item of equipment. Anchor bolts, together with templates or setting drawings, shall be delivered sufficiently early to permit setting the anchor bolts when the structural concrete is placed. Anchor bolt materials shall comply with the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section, and sleeves shall be provided as indicated on the drawings. Unless otherwise specified, anchor bolts shall be at least 3/4 inch [19 mm] in diameter. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, anchor bolts for items of equipment mounted on baseplates shall be long enough to permit 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] of grout beneath the baseplate and to provide adequate anchorage into structural concrete. 8. SPECIAL TOOLS AND ACCESSORIES. Equipment requiring periodic repair and adjustment shall be furnished complete with all special tools, instruments, and accessories required for proper maintenance. Equipment requiring special devices for lifting or handling shall be furnished complete with those devices. 9. SHOP PAINTING. All iron and steel surfaces of the equipment shall be protected with suitable protective coatings applied in the shop. Surfaces of the equipment that will be inaccessible after assembly shall be protected for the life of the equipment. Coatings shall be suitable for the environment where the equipment is installed. Exposed surfaces shall be finished, thoroughly cleaned, and filled as necessary to provide a smooth, uniform base for painting. Electric motors, speed reducers, starters, and other self-contained or enclosed components shall be shop primed or finished with an epoxy or polyurethane enamel or universal type primer suitable for top coating in the field with a universal primer and aliphatic polyurethane system. Surfaces to be coated after installation shall be prepared for painting as recommended by the paint manufacturer for the intended service, and then shop painted with one or more coats of a universal primer. Machined, polished, and nonferrous surfaces which are not to be painted shall be coated with rust-preventive compound as recommended by the equipment manufacturer . . 10. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. Equipment shall be prepared for shipment as specified in the General Provisions paragragh 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage. JULY 2014 2 of3 SECTION 01610 General Equipment Stipulations 11. STORAGE. Handling and storage of equipment shall be as specified in the General Provisions paragragh 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage. 12. JNSTALLA TION AND OPERATION. Installation and operation shall be as specified in respective equipment sections and the Startup Requirements section. End of Section JULY 2014 3of3 SECTION 01610 General Equipment Stipulations Section 01611 METEOROLOGICAL AND SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA 1. SCOPE. Buildings, non-structural components and non-building structures shall be designed in accordance with this section. In the event of conflict with requirements in other sections, the more stringent criteria shall be followed. 2. DESIGN CRITERIA. Non-structural components, non-building structures including anchorage of such items, shall be designed in accordance with the following criteria. General Design Data: Building code and references Site elevation, above mean sea level Design flood elevation, DFE Design groundwater elevation Wind Design Data: Basic wind speed, V Exposure category Importance factor (wind loads), I Seismic Design Data for Non-structural Components: CBC 2013, IBC 2012, ASCE 7-10 "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures", AISC 360 "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings", AISC 341 "Seismic Provisions for Structural Steel Buildings" 375 to 470 ft NA ft NA ft 100 mph c 1.0 Design short period spectral response acceleration, Sos 0.755 Component importance factor, lp JULY 2014 1 of4 As indicated in the Non- Structural Component Schedule SECTION 01611 Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria Seismic Design Category Seismic Design Data for Non-building Structures ' Risk Category Design short period spectral response acceleration, Sos Design one second period spectral response acceleration, So1 Mapped MCE one second period spectral response acceleration, S1 Importance factor, I IV 0.755 0.432 0.407 As indicated in the Non- Building Structure Schedule or in the applicable reference documents, whichever is greater. 3. WIND ANCHORAGE. Equipment that is to be located outdoors shall have anchor bolts designed for the effects of wind forces, as determined in accordance with ASCE 7, Chapter 6. Shop drawings shall include full anchor bolt details, and shall be sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state of the project. Calculations shall be furnished when requested by Engineer. 4. SEISMIC DESIGN. 4-1. General. Structural systems shall provide continuous load paths, with adequate strength and stiffness to transfer all seismic forces from the point of application to the point of final resistance. 4-2. Pre-Engineered Buildings. Not used. 4-3. Non-Structural Components. Non-structural components are architectural, mechanical, and electrical items that are permanently attached to and supported by a structure but are not part of the structural system, as indicated in Chapter 13 of ASCE 7, and in the Non-Structural Components Schedule. The Non-Structural Components Schedule identifies the components that require some level of seismic design. The requirements of this paragraph are applicable only to the items listed in the Non-Structural Components Schedule. All components, and the anchorage of those components to the main structure, shall be shown on construction documents prepared and sealed by a registered design professional that is licensed in the state of the project. The construction documents shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittal Procedures JULY2014 2 of4 SECTION 01611 Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. When required by ASCE 7, Appendix 11A, the construction documents shall include a quality assurance plan. Structural calculations shall be submitted when requested by Engineer. Design of non-structural components shall be in accordance with all applicable provisions of ASCE 7, Chapter 13. Non-structural components shall have sufficient strength and ductility to resist the specified seismic effects, and shall meet all of the design, proportioning, detailing, inspection, and quality assurance provisions of the specified building code and other referenced codes. Non-structural components shall be attached so that seismic forces are transferred to the structural system. These attachments shall be bolted, welded, or otherwise positively fastened. Frictional resistance due to gravity shall not be considered in evaluating the required resistance to seismic forces. Non-structural components shall be designed to be operable during and following a design level seismic event, without collapsing or breaking away from supports, and remain intact to the extent that they do not create an ignition hazard or release hazardous materials. Components that contain contents that are hazardous (flammable, explosive, corrosive, acidic, caustic, toxic, or that otherwise present a danger to the general public if released) shall maintain containment of those contents following the design level earthquake. 'Wp" shall include the total operating weight of the component or system, including, but not limited to, any insulation, fluids, and concentrated loads such as valves, condensate traps, and similar components. Seismic effects that shall be analyzed in the design of piping systems include the dynamic effects of the piping system, contents, and supports. The interaction between piping systems and the supporting structures, including other mechanical and electrical equipment, shall also be considered. Where pipe supports are to be designed by Contractor, as required by the Pipe Supports section, both the piping and support systems shall be designed to meet the applicable requirements of ASCE 7, Chapter 13. 4-4. Non-Building Structures. Non-building structures are the items described as such in Chapter 15 of ASCE 7, and indicated in the Non-Building Structures Schedule. The Non-Building Structures Schedule identifies the items that require seismic design. All seismic force resisting elements shall be shown on construction documents prepared and sealed by a registered design professional that is licensed in the state of the project. The construction documents shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittal Procedures section. JULY2014 3of4 SECTION 01611 Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria Design of non-building structures shall be in accordance with all applicable provisions of ASCE 7, Chapter 15. Non-building structures shall provide sufficient strength and ductility to resist the specified seismic effects, and shall meet all of the design, proportioning, detailing, inspection, and quality assurance provisions of the specified building code and other referenced codes. The seismic design of non-building structures shall provide sufficient stiffness, strength and ductility to resist the effects of seismic ground motions during the design level earthquake. Non-building structures shall be designed to be operable during and following a design level seismic event, without collapsing or breaking away from supports, and remain intact to the extent that they do not create an ignition hazard or release hazardous materials. Non-building structures that contain contents that are hazardous (flammable, explosive, corrosive, acidic, caustic, toxic, or that otherwise present a danger to the general public if released) shall maintain containment of those contents following the design level earthquake. "W" for non-building structures shall include the total dead load and shall also include all normal operating contents of tanks, vessels, bins, and piping. End of Section JULY2014 4of4 SECTION 01611 Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria Section 01615 EQUIPMENT AND VALVE IDENTIFICATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of nameplates and tags for identification of equipment, valves, panels, and instruments. 1-2. GENERAL. Except as otherwise specified in equipment, valve, and instrumentation sections, nameplates and tags shall be as specified herein. Nameplates or tags shall be provided for all equipment, valves, operator interfaces, control and electrical panels, cabinets, instruments, and instrument racks that have been named and/or tagged on the Drawings. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Drawings and data shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Submittals section for each type of tag provided including materials, colors, sizes, letter sizes, and installation instructions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. EQUIPMENT NUMBER PLATES. All equipment tagged on the drawings, except for submerged equipment shall be provided with number plates bearing the equipment tag number identified on the Drawings. Number plates shall be bevelled, 1/8th inch [3 mm] thick laminated black phenolic plastic engraving stock with white core. Lettering on number plates shall be capitalized block letters% inch [20 mm] high. Number plate height shall be twice the letter height. Number plate length shall be as needed, with suitable margins all around. Lettering shall be placed in one row where practicable; however, where necessary due to excessive length, lettering shall be placed on more than one row and centered. Number plates shall be attached with stainless steel panhead screws, rivets, or drive screws. When a number plate cannot be installed due to the physical size, space, or mounting surface geometry of the equipment, the Contractor shall provide a 12 gauge [2 mm] stainless steel tag with engraved or imprinted equipment tag number. Lettering on tags shall beY. inch [6.5 mm] high. Tags shall be rectangular with smooth edges, and shall be fastened to the equipment with stainless steel mechanical fasteners or with a stainless steel chain. 2-2. EQUIPMENT INFORMATION PLATES. Equipment shall be provided with engraved or stamped equipment information plates securely affixed with mechanical fasteners to the equipment in an accessible and visible location. Equipment information plates shall be in addition to the number plates specified. JULY2014 1 of3 SECTION 01615 Equipment and Valve Identification Equipment information plates shall indicate the manufacturer's name, address, product name, catalog number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and any other pertinent design data. Equipment information plates listing the distributing agent only will not be acceptable. 2-3. VALVE AND GATE TAGS. 2-3.01. Temporary Tags. Each valve with an identifying number indicated on the Drawings or listed in the valve schedule, shall be tagged or marked in the factory with the identifying number. 2-3.02. Permanent Tags. All valves, except buried or submerged valves, that have been assigned a number on the Drawings or in the valve schedule, shall be provided with a permanent number plate. Tags shall be permanently attached to valves with stainless steel mechanical fasteners or with stainless steel chains. Numerals shall be % inch [20 mm] high and shall be black baked enamel on an anodized aluminum plate. All buried valves shall be tagged with a brass plate cast into a 6-inch by 6 inch [150 mm by 150 mm] concrete pad at grade next to the valve box. The valve number shall be engraved in the brass plate with lettering and numerals at least ~ 1 inch [25 mm] high. ...,.,.) 2-4. PANEL NAMEPLATES. Nameplates shall be provided on the face of each panel and cabinet. Panel identification nameplates shall be mounted at the top of the panel shall include the panel descriptive name and tag number as indicated on the Drawings, in two or three lines of text. Lettering shall be % inch [20 mm] high. Nameplates for devices mounted on or in the panel shall be inscribed with the text as indicated on the Drawings. Where nameplate information is not indicated on the Drawings, inscriptions shall be in accordance with information in the supplier's submittal drawings as guided by information in the relevant specification section. Panel device nameplates shall have engraved letters 3/16 inch [5 mm] high. Nameplate material and size shall be as specified above for equipment number plates. Nameplates shall be secured to the panel with stainless steel panhead screws. 2-5. INSTRUMENT TAGS. 2-5.01. Temporary Tags. Where instruments are not provided with permanent tags furnished from the factory, instruments shall be tagged or marked in the factory with the instrument tag number indicated on the Drawings. JULY2014 2 of3 SECTION 01615 Equipment and Valve Identification 2-5.02. Permanent Tags. Instruments shall be tagged with the instrument tag number indicated on the Drawings. Tags shall be 12 gauge [2 mm] stainless steel with engraved or imprinted symbols. Lettering on tags shall be '!4 inch [6.5 mm] high. Tags shall be rectangular with smooth edges, and shall be fastened to the instrument with stainless steel mechanical fasteners or with a stainless steel chain. PART 3-EXECUTION Not used. JULY 2014 End of Section 3 of3 SECTION 01615 Equipment and Valve Identification Section 01620 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE 1. SCOPE. This section consists of an equipment schedule for items for which a basic level of manufacturer's field services or operation and maintenance manuals are required, but not covered in other sections. When other sections indicate that manufacturer's field services and operation and maintenance manuals are required, the requirements shall be as specified in the other sections. Specific requirements for manufacturer's field services are covered in the Quality Control section and the equipment specifications. Specific requirements for operation and maintenance manuals are covered in the Submittals section and the equipment specifications. 2. SCHEDULE. Manufacturer's field services, including equipment installation checks and training, and operation and maintenance manuals shall be provided for the items of equipment indicated in the following schedule: Spec Section Type of Equipment 13500 Instrumentation and Control 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valve (RWGV's) 15098 Pressure Reducing Valve 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies 15500 Ventilation End of Section JULY2014 1 of 1 Mfr's. Field Services - - Yes - - - O&M Manual Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes SECTION 01620 Equipment Schedule Section 01630 PIPELINE SCHEDULE 1. SCOPE. This section consists of a schedule of 4 inch [100 mm] and larger pipelines indicating the type of pipe to be used. Pipe materials, installation, testing, and disinfection, when specified, are covered in other sections. Piping smaller than 4 inches [1 00 mm] is covered in the various miscellaneous piping sections. Piping for plumbing, heating and air conditioning systems is covered in other sections. Piping to be furnished with equipment is covered in the applicable equipment section. 2. ALTERNATIVE PIPE TYPES. Where more than one type of pipe is indicated in the schedule, the type of pipe material to be installed may be selected by Contractor. The details on the drawings cover only one type of pipe for each line. If a different material is selected by Contractor, all details of connections, jointing, wall fittings, support, anchorage, and harnesses shall be modified as necessary to produce an equivalent design acceptable to the Owner. 3. WALL FITTINGS. A wall pipe or sleeve will be required for all pipe passing through concrete or masonry block walls. Wall fittings and sleeves shall be as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the applicable piping section. 4. SCHEDULE INDEX. Pipe material abbreviations and their applicable specification section number are as indicated: Abbreviation Pipe Material Section No. HOPE High Density Polyethylene (PE 3408) Pipe CML&TC Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials 15068 15061 5. SCHEDULE. Pipe materials shall conform to Schedule 01630-S01. All pipelines indicated on the drawings and all pipelines required for proper operation of the equipment furnished shall be provided whether listed in the schedule or not. End of Section JULY2014 1 of 1 SECTION 01630 Pipeline Schedule Schedule 01630-S01 Pipeline Schedule 1.000 General 1.010 Specification Section 01630 2.000 Requirements Nominal Size (ID) Description Service Material Thickness in. CML&TC Potable 18 Water Water Steel Y." Pipeline CML&TC Water 14 Pipeline Potable Steel Y." (Bypass Line Water and Piping Inside Vault) 6 Blowoff Valve Potable Steel Y." Piping Water 6 HVAC Piping Air Steel 0.1406" (10 GA) Temporary Potable 4 High -Lining Water HOPE DR? Piping_ End of Schedule JULY2014 1 of 1 Design Field Pressure Test (psi) Pressure (psi) 265 400 265 400 265 400 ---- 265 400 SECTION 01630-S01 Pipeline Schedule Section 01650 STARTUP REQUIREMENTS 1. SCOPE. This section includes the requirements for startup and testing all items of equipment and systems that form a part of this Contract. The purpose of this section is to define the requirements for bringing individual equipment, systems, and facilities online and for proving proper operation and performance of that Work. Contractor is required to develop, submit, and maintain detailed plans, including designation of management and staff, for these activities as specified herein. Additional requirements such as disinfection and training are specified in other sections. The startup, testing, and commissioning services referenced or specified herein include the following: Startup and Testing Startup checks Functional testing Functional acceptance testing Performance testing 1.01. Definitions. Startup and Testing is the transitional phase between completion of construction and start of commissioning and includes the following: • Pre-Startup Activities and Checks-Inspections, tests and other activities necessary to determine that equipment, systems and subsystems have been properly manufactured and installed. Pre-startup activities shall include an audit of all factory testing of equipment and compiling the results for comparison to startup and commissioning testing. • Functional Testing -Initial limited operation of equipment, to demonstrate capability of installed components to perform their intended functions, respond to controls, and safely interface with external systems, followed by operation of individual systems in manual and automatic mode to test full functionality of individual systems. • Performance testing-When specified, continuous testing in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 2. GENERAL. The Contractor shall be responsible for and furnish all labor, materials, instruments, incidentals, and equipment required for startup, testing, and commissioning. Temporary facilities required to carry out the specified testing, including temporary pipe, pumps, and other appurtenances, shall be JULY 2014 1 of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements furnished and installed, and removed when no longer required for startup, testing, and commissioning. Refer to the Temporary Facilities section for requirements concerning water and power for startup and testing. Chemicals required for startup and testing will be provided by the Owner. Contractor shall give the Owner 21 day notice before chemicals are required except as otherwise specified herein. Test water that cannot be delivered to the system for any reason, shall be disposed of at the expense of the Contractor, in a manner acceptable to the Owner, and in accordance with all laws, regulations, and permits. Startup and testing shall be conducted during normal working hours during the workweek of Monday through Friday, unless otherwise approved by the Owner. Where continuous long-term testing is required, testing may continue over the weekends and holidays with prior approval from the Owner. 2.01. Constraints. Startup and testing shall be conducted in a manner that does not compromise operation of the existing facilities or the quality of treated water. The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor to the extent possible, but will have sole authority in decisions affecting existing operations. 3. Manufacturer's Field Services Representative. The manufacturers shall provide a technically qualified field-service representative for the installation, startup, and testing of equipment furnished, as specified in the equipment sections. The manufacturer shall submit qualifications and experience records for all key personnel to be involved in startup activities. The manufacturer's field services representative shall be employed full-time in installation, startup, and testing of similar equipment and work directly for the manufacturer. The representative shall have conducted startup activities similar to those required herein on at least two other projects of similar complexity. The Owner or Engineer shall have the right to reject the manufacturer's field services representative at any time, for immediate replacement by the manufacturer, if the accepted qualifications are not representative of the actual experience or abilities of the representative, as determined by the Owner or Engineer. 4. SUBMITTALS. Contractor shall submit the following information in accordance with the requirements of the Submittals section. Manufacturers' field services representative's qualifications and past project experience including contact names, addresses and current telephone numbers that can be used to verify the accuracy of the information. Qualification submittals shall be made 3 weeks before the manufacturer's representative is scheduled to be on Site. JULY2014 2 of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements Manufacturer's certification of proper installation of all equipment as specified in the equipment sections. Equipment and system startup, testing, and commissioning plans and schedule in accordance with the requirements of this section. Contractor shall coordinate with Subcontractors and include their information in the startup and testing plan. Unless otherwise specified in the equipment sections, preliminary copies of field calibration results. Submittal shall be made prior to the start of each test for associated systems. Daily logs. 5. STARTUP AND TESTING REQUIREMENTS. 5.01. Startup Checks. Prior to field testing of all equipment, the Contractor shall perform the following: Inspect and clean equipment, devices, and connected piping so they are free of foreign material. Lubricate equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Tum rotating equipment by hand. Open and close valves by hand and operate other devices to check for binding, interference, or improper functioning. Test and commission related electrical system components in accordance with the requirements specified in the Electrical sections. Calibrate all instruments associated with the equipment. Check for proper rotation, adjustment, alignment, balancing, mechanical and electrical connections, and any other conditions that may damage or impair equipment from functioning properly. Inspect and verify proper anchorage. Obtain manufacturer's certification of proper installation where specified in the equipment sections. All equipment shall be confirmed ready to test by the Engineer based on the following: JULY2014 3 of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements Acceptance of Contractor's startup and testing plan. Notification in writing by the Contractor that each piece of equipment or system is ready for testing. Verification by the Engineer and Owner that all lubricants, tools, maintenance equipment, spare parts and approved equipment operation and maintenance manuals have been furnished as specified. Cleanliness of equipment, devices, and connected work. Adequate completion of work adjacent to or interfacing with equipment to be tested. Confirmation of manufacturer's representative's availability to assist with testing, where specified, and satisfactory fulfillment of all other manufacturers' responsibilities as specified. Engineer's inspection of all related civil construction, mechanical, and electrical installations. Confirmation of completion of acceptable testing of all adjacent piping, duct work and other affected Work. 5.02. Functional Testing. All startup checks shall be completed prior to functional testing. Functional testing shall be in accordance with relevant standards and in accordance with instructions of the manufacturers. Ancillary and/or temporary facilities necessary to recycle, control, or discharge water, from facilities being tested, shall be operational. Functional testing shall include the functional operation of each piece of equipment. All moving parts of equipment shall be tested and adjusted so that they move freely and function satisfactorily. Functional testing shall demonstrate correct operation of all hardwired interlocks and controls. Functional testing of power actuated valves shall include at least 4 full open- close operations. Testing shall demonstrate the maximum number of operations per hour as recommended by the actuator manufacturer without overheating. Once functional testing of individual equipment is completed, individual systems functional testing shall commence. Individual system functional testing shall include startup of the complete system of mechanical, electrical, and instrumentation and control equipment as a functional process system. Field JULY 2014 4 of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements inspection prior to startup shall be completed before commencement of individual system functional testing. Individual system functional testing shall include operation in manual and automatic modes, startup operation, and shutdown in normal and emergency modes. Individual systems shall be tested over their entire operating range and for sufficient time to demonstrate the intended functionality of each piece of equipment and the system. If any part of a system shows evidence of unsatisfactory or improper operation during the test period, correction or repairs shall be made and the functional testing shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. Functional testing of all pumping equipment and drive motors, shall be in accordance with the appropriate and approved test codes, such as those specified by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, Hydraulic Institute Standards, and IEEE. Qualified personnel from the electrical and mechanical trades responsible for installation of the equipment, shall be available during functional testing involving electrically operated equipment. Where appropriate, a representative of the Instrumentation and Control System Supplier shall also be available. 5.03. Functional Acceptance Testing. Once the Contractor's functional testing is complete and associated documentation has been submitted and accepted by the Engineer, the Contractor shall conduct functional acceptance testing of each system. Acceptance testing shall include the successful demonstration of all operating functions and conditions that are specified for the equipment, system, and controls. The manufacturer's representative shall be on Site during acceptance testing when specified in the equipment specifications. The Functional Acceptance Testing shall include the following submissions prior to commencement: Prerequisite checklist, to be acknowledged by the Engineer prior to initiating the test, that demonstrates that all testing and other Work required to be completed prior to the test is complete. A listing of Contractor's personnel designated to supervise and direct the Owner's operators as required herein. Listing of standby personnel, equipment, and materials that will be available if needed during the test period. JULY2014 5 of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements Step-by-step procedures for operation of the facility showing how local and remote control of equipment will be demonstrated. Description of all data and other information to be reported in support of the completed test. Include any blank data logs that may be used for recording results. Descriptions of all necessary calculations that must be completed to verify the specified results are being achieved, including formulas. Blank sign-off form for the test acknowledging the Contractor's, Engineer's, Owner's, and the equipment manufacturer's acceptance of the test. Contractor shall provide Owner and Engineer 14 day notice prior to testing of any individual system. Individual system acceptance testing shall continue for 48 hours without interruption for each system, and all parts shall operate satisfactorily in all respects under a range of conditions to simulate the full operating range of the system. train. If any part of a system shows evidence of unsatisfactory or improper operation during the testing period, correction or repairs shall be made and the test repeated until the test is successfully completed. During this testing period the Contractor shall operate all equipment. 6. COMMISSIONING. Not used. 7. OPERATION ACCEPTANCE TESTING. Not used. 8. PERFORMANCE TESTING. Performance testing shall be conducted in accordance with requirements specified in the Submersible Sump and Sewage Pump section. The Owner will provide chemicals, water, and power required during performance testing of the new facilities. Contractor shall fum ish all chemicals necessary to complete the test. 9. STARTUP SCHEDULE AND STARTUP AND COMMISSIONING PLANS. Plans and schedules shall be developed to facilitate coordinated and efficient startup, testing, and commissioning of the Project equipment. The Contractor shall submit a startup, testing, and commissioning plan and schedule to the Engineer no later than 45 calendar days prior to the commencement of startup and testing. A minimum of 21 days shall be allowed for review by Engineer and Owner. The schedule and plan must be accepted a JULY2014 6of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements minimum of 30 days prior to commencement of startup and testing. The schedule and plan shall include sections for startup checks, functional testing, functional acceptance testing, commissioning, and performance testing. Forms for startup and testing shall include identification of equipment, startup/test date, nature of startup/test, startup/test objectives, startup/test prerequisites, startup/test results, instruments employed for the startup/test and signature spaces for the Engineer's witness (where applicable) and the Contractor's startup person. 9.01 Startup Schedule. A startup schedule that provides an overall sequence and duration for all startup, testing and commissioning activities, shall be prepared and maintained. This schedule shall serve as a companion to but shall not be a replacement for the startup plan. The startup schedule described in this section shall be integrated into the overall Progress Schedule and shall be prepared as specified for the Progress Schedule in the General Provisions. The Startup Schedule shall be updated weekly to during the startup, testing, and commissioning period. 9.02. Startup Plan. The Startup Plan shall include the following: Introduction with a narrative description of the overall testing and startup program. The description shall include all contractual or regulatory treatment requirements to be demonstrated. A summary of the objectives and approach for startup checks, functional testing, functional acceptance testing, commissioning, and Performance Testing. List of the instruments and equipmentthat will undergo startup and testing with references to the appropriate PIDs, equipment tags/identification numbers, Specification number and standards for testing procedures. Schedule for startup and field testing for each instrument, piece of equipment (including redundant equipment), and system. Safety and emergency response plan including a list of emergency and non-emergency contacts (email and phone). Organization chart for Contractor's startup and testing personnel with assigned responsibilities for each. Startup and testing record keeping plan. JUL Y2014 7 of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements Plan for reuse and disposal of water from startup, testing, commissioning including information on any required regulatory permits/approvals. Description of temporary facilities that will be provided. List of chemicals to be provided by the Contractor. Within 7 to 14 days of initial submittal of the startup plan, the Contractor shall schedule a workshop with the Owner and Engineer to present the plan. The Contactor shall submit minutes of the workshop, including action items and a schedule for updating the startup plan, to the Engineer within 3 days of the workshop. Individual plans for each phase of startup, testing, and commissioning can be assembled as chapters in the startup plan or submitted as individual documents but should be correlated to ensure there is not disagreement between chapters or separate documents. 9.02.01 Startup Checks Plan. The startup checks plan shall be subdivided into plans for each system and major component. Each systemcomponent plan shall include but not be limited to the following: Identification of information for each component or piece of equipment to be inspected as part of the system. All applicable tag numbers shall be included. Specific activities to be completed on each component, piece of equipment, as required to demonstrate proper installation and connection. A tracking checklist of prerequisites for the checks and each step of the checking procedure, including any temporary facilities or utility requirements. Listing of manufacturer's representative(s) to be on site during the check. Sign off forms for the Contractor's person. 9.02.02 Functional Testing and Functional Acceptance Testing Plans. The functional testing plan shall include procedures and reporting for functional testing. The functional testing plan shall be subdivided into testing plans for each system. Each system test plan shall include but not be limited to the following: A narrative description of the purpose and goals of the test for each component, piece of equipment, which should include all activities (including JULY2014 8 of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements those required by vendors/suppliers) necessary to verify proper equipment and system functionality. Identification of each component or piece of equipment to be tested as part of the system. All applicable tag numbers shall be included. Schedule and duration for the tests. Prerequisites for each test, including any temporary facilities or utility requirements. Pass/fail criteria for the test. A checklist for tracking testing progress which includes prerequisites for the test and each step of the testing procedure. The check list shall include specified performance criteria that are to be met. A description of test apparatus required to conduct the test. Identification of all temporary facilities and chemicals require during startup. Listing of manufacturer's representative(s) to be on site during the test. Certificates of proper installation, as applicable to the test. Step-by-step detailed procedure of the test. The level of detail shall be sufficient for a witness to be able to follow the steps during the test and be confident that the test is being performed as planned. All steps required to proceed through the test in an orderly manner are considered significant and each of these steps shall be included in the procedure. Copies of the data recording forms that will be used during the test. Calculation methodologies to be used to evaluate the data and/or test criteria for the test. Sample computations or analyses for the test with results in the same format as the final report. This item is intended to demonstrate how data collected will be used to generate final results. A sample shall be included for each type of computation required for the test and analysis of results. Blank sign-off forms for the test acknowledging the startup manager's, Engineer's, Owner's, and equipment manufacturer's acceptance of the test where applicable. JULY2014 9of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements 10. REPORTS AND RECORDS. Records of all startup and testing shall be compiled by the Contractor and submitted to the Engineer. Prior to being submitted to the Engineer, the Contractor shall certify that the results recorded and the tested systems comply with the Contract requirements. Records shall include all documentation assembled for each piece of equipment or system involved in the startup and testing, including all certifications, forms, and check lists completed during the startup and test, and sign-off forms. Records of all startup and testing shall be compiled as separate documents for each system tested, and shall be submitted within 48 hours of completion of the startup and testing for each system. Testing samples that require analysis periods greater than 48 hours shall be clearly defined in the startup plan but shall not preclude delivery of the balance of the records within the 48 hour timeframe. The Contractor shall provide formal reporting and documentation of failures, malfunctions or defects, and repairs made during the startup and/or testing activities. A "System Problem Report" form is included at the end of this section, and shall be used by the Contractor to document problems that arise during these tests and their resolution. Records submitted shall include "System Problem Report" forms completed during testing. End of Section JULY2014 10 of 11 SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements SYSTEM PROBLEM REPORT Project Name: Tri-Agencies Water Transmission Pipelines Reach 2 -Phase 1 Test Name: Test Number: Problem Type: Hardware Software SYMPTOMS: Description: Can problem be reproduced at will? DIAGNOSIS: Description: CORRECTION: Description: FINAL SIGN OFF JULY 2014 Documentation Unknown Time: Date: y I N Time: Date: Time: Date: Time: Date: 11 of 11 Other By: By: By: By: SECTION 01650 Startup Requirements \ ' Section 02050 DEMOLITION PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the demolition of existing structures, piping, equipment, and sitework and the salvage of existing materials and equipment as indicated on the Drawings. 1-2. GENERAL. Contractor shall be responsible for all work under this section. Contractor shall provide 7 days written notice prior to beginning demolition activities. Demolition and salvage work shall create minimum interference with Owner's operations and minimum inconvenience to Owner. Contractor shall provide protection and safety of all roadways, sidewalks, and all accessible areas during demolition activities. Blasting will not be permitted. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. DEMOLITION. Removal of equipment or facilities shall include removal of all accessories, piping, wiring, supports, associated electrical starters and devices, baseplates and frames, and all other appurtenances, unless otherwise directed. Existing materials and equipment removed, and not indicated to be reused as a part of the Work, shall become Contractor's property unless otherwise specified, and shall be removed from the Site. Contractor shall conduct demolition activities in a manner that prevents damage to existing facilities which are indicated to remain and shall provide all necessary protection for existing facilities. Any remaining facilities damaged during demolition shall be repaired by Contractor to a condition equal to or better than the original condition. When demolition is complete, all debris shall be removed from the Site and the Site graded to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. JULY 2014 1 of 2 SECTION 02050 Demolition 3-1.01. Structure Demolition. The following structures shall be demolished, and the debris shall be removed from the jobsite. • Pressure Reducing Station with the following external dimensions: Length: 17.5 ft Width: 9.5 ft Height: 8.5 ft 3-1.02. Piping and Equipment Demolition. The following piping and equipment shall be removed and shall become the property of Contractor. All such items shall be promptly removed from the jobsite. • 21" Prestressed Concrete Cylinder Pipe (PCCP) and all associated piping equipment within the limits indicated on the Drawings • 16" Steel Bypass Pipe and all associated piping equipment within the limits indicated on the Drawings • 12" Pressure Relief Valve • 16" Butterfly Valves • 2" Air Vacuum Assembly • Pressure Gauge • Steel Ladder • Telco Junction Box 3-1.03. Sitework Demolition. Sitework demolition shall include the following: JULY 2014 • Removal of nonreinforced concrete drives, pavement, sidewalks, curb, and slabs on grade within the limits indicated on the Drawings. • Removal of asphaltic concrete pavement within the limits indicated on the Drawings. • Removal of existing fencing within the limits indicated on the Drawings. End of Section 2 of2 SECTION 02050 Demolition SECTION 02223 TRENCHING, EXCAVATION, BACKFILLING, AND COMPACTING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing, and installation for trench excavation, backfill, and compaction of piping, conduit, manholes, and vaults. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. ASTM C 117 ASTM C 131 ASTM C 135 ASTM C 150 ASTM D 75 ASTM 1556 ASTM D 1557 ASTM D 2419 ASTM D 2434 ASTM D 3017 ASTM D 3776 ASTM D4253 ASTM D4254 ASTM D4632 ASTM D4751 CAL-OSHA -Test Method for Materials Finer than 75-I..Jm (No. 200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing -Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small-Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the los Angeles Machine -Test Method for True Specific Gravity of Refractory Materials by Water Immersion -Portland Cement -Practice for Sampling Aggregates -Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone method -Test Method for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils Using a Modified Effort -Test Method for Sand Equivalent Values of Soil and Fine Aggregate -Test Method for Permeability of Granular Soils -Test Method for Water Content of Soil and Rock in Place by Nuclear Methods -Test Method for Mass Per Unit Area (Weight) of Woven Fabric -Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory P5-late -Test Methods for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils and Calculation of Relative Density -Test Method for Grab Breaking load and Elongation of Geotextiles -Test Method for Determining the Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile -Title 8 General Industry Safety Orders 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Specifications 15000, 15043, 15044, 15061, 15064, and 15068 1.4 GEOTECHNICAL TESTING The Developer or Contractor shall engage the services of a geotechnical engineering firm or individual licensed in the State of California to monitor soil conditions during earthwork, trenching, bedding, backfill, and compaction operations. Sampling and testing procedures shall be performed in accordance with the Reference Standards and as follows: A. The soils technician shall be present at the site during all backfill and compaction operations. Failure to have the soils technician present will subject such operations to rejection. JULY 2014 Page 1 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting B. Density and optimum moisture content of soil shall be determined by the use of the sand cone method, ASTM D 1556, or nuclear density gauge method, ASTM D 2922 & D 3017. Since the composition of the pipe and the walls of the trench have an effect on the nuclear density gauge output, a minimum of 25% of the density and optimum moisture tests shall be made using the sand cone method. C. Determine laboratory moisture-density relations of existing soil by ASTM D 1557, Method C and/or D. D. Determine the relative compaction of less soils by ASTM D 1557, Method C and/or D. E. Sample backfill material by ASTM D 75. F. Express "relative compaction" as a percentage of the ratio of the in-place dry density to the laboratory maximum dry density. A report of all soils tests performed shall be stamped and signed by the soils firm or individual and shall be submitted by the Contractor prior to the filling of the Notice of Completion by the City. The report shall document the sampling and testing of materials, the location and results of all tests performed, and shall certify that materials and work are in compliance with this specification. 1.5 PIPE ZONE The pipe zone includes the full-width of the trench from 6-inches below the bottom of the pipe to 12-inches above the top of the pipe and extends into manhole or vault excavations to the point of connection to or penetration of such structure. 1.6 TRENCH ZONE The trench zone includes the portion of the trench from the top of the pipe zone to the bottom of the pavement zone in paved areas, or to the existing surface in unpaved areas, and extends into manhole or vault excavations above the pipe zone. 1.7 PAVEMENT ZONE The pavement zone includes the concrete or asphalt concrete pavement and aggregate base section placed over the trench zone and extends into manhole or vault excavations above the trench zone. 1.8 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES AND FACILITIES The Contractor shall be responsible for the care and protection of all existing utilities, facilities, and structures that may be encountered in or near the area of the work. 1.9 PROTECTION OF EXISTING LANDSCAPING The Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of all the trees, shrubs, fences, and other landscape items adjacent to or within the work area. JULY2014 Page 2 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting 1.10 ACCESS The Contractor shall provide continuous, unobstructed access to all driveways, water valves, hydrants, or other property or facilities within or adjacent to the work areas. 1.11 SAFETY A. Protection of workers within trenches shall be as required by the California Labor Code. B. All excavations shall be performed in a safe manner and shall be protected and supported in accordance with CAL-OSHA regulations. C. Barriers and traffic delineators shall be placed in accordance with the requirements of the agency having jurisdiction. 1.12 BLASTING Blasting for excavation shall not be performed without the written perm1ss1on of the City Procedures and methods of blasting shall conform to all Federal, State, and local laws and ordinances. 1.13 PIPE JACKING Pipe jacking may be permitted in accordance with Section 15125. City approval is required in advance of such operations. 1.14 EXCESS EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall remove and legally dispose of all excess excavated material and demolition debris. B. It is the intent of these specifications that all surplus material shall be legally disposed of by the Contractor. Before acceptance of the work by City, the Contractor shall provide the City with written releases signed by all property owners with whom the Contractor has entered into agreements for disposing of excess excavated material, absolving the City from any liability connected therewith. 1.15 CHANGES IN LINE AND GRADE In the event obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, and which will require alterations to the plans, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order the necessary deviation from the line and grade. The Contractor shall not deviate from the specified line and grade without prior written approval by the City. 1.16 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Pre-testing of the piping system may be performed for the Contractor's convenience at any time. However, the final hydrostatic pressure test, as described in Sections 15043 and 15044, shall be performed following the completion of all backfilling and trench zone compaction with a minimum of 2.5-feet of material over the pipe. JULY 2014 Page 3 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting 2.4 TRENCH PLUGS Trench plugs consisting of compacted Imported Granular Material or sand cement slurry shall be installed on piping systems that are backfilled with crushed rock. 2. 5 EARTH BACKFILL MATERIAL-TRENCH ZONE A. Earth backfill is defined as materials removed from the required excavations and used as backfill of earth fill. Earth backfill that meets the requirements specified herein may be used for all backfill or fill, except where imported materials are shown on the Plans or specified herein. Do not use stockpiled topsoil for backfill or fill. B. Earth backfill shall be excavated materials that is free from organic matter, roots, debris, and rocks larger then 4 inches in the greatest dimension. C. Earth backfill used in the trench zone shall be native granular materials free from roots, debris, biodegradable matter, hazardous substance, and organic matter and shall contain less than 40 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and more than 40 percent passing the No. 4 sieve and rock particles with a maximum dimension no greater than 4 inches. If the fill material contains rocks or hard lumps, at least 70 percent (by weight) of its particles shall pass a % inch sieve. The expansion index of the fill material shall be less than 50 and the material shall be free of expansive clay. D. Where the onsite materials are determined by the Engineer to be unsuitable, imported fill shall be provide by the Contractor. 2.6 SAND-CEMENT SLURRY Sand-cement slurry shall consist of two sacks, 188 pounds, of Portland cement per cubic yard of sand and sufficient moisture for workability. City approval is required for use of slurry as a backfill material. 2. 7 FILTER FABRIC Filter fabric shall be manufactured from polyester, nylon, or polypropylene. Material shall be of non-woven construction and shall meet the following requirements: Grab tensile strength (ASTM D 4632): Weight (ASTM D 3776): Apparent opening size (ASTM D 4751 ): PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 120 lbs., minimum average roll value 4.2 oz./yd2), minimum average roll value 70, US Std Sieve Size A. Areas where work is to be performed shall be cleared of all trees, shrubs, rubbish, and other objectionable material of any kind, which, if left in place, would interfere with the proper performance or completion of the completed work, would impair its subsequent use, or would form obstructions therein. JULY 2014 Page 5 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting B. Organic material from clearing and grubbing operations will not be incorporated in the trench backfill and shall be removed from the project site or retained and incorporated into the topsoil. 3.2 PAVEMENT, CURB, AND SIDEWALK REMOVAL Bituminous or concrete pavements, curbs, and sidewalks shall be removed and replaced in accordance with the requirements of the agency having jurisdiction. 3.3 DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at all times during construction ample means and devices to promptly remove and dispose of all water from any source entering excavations or other parts of the work. Dewatering shall be performed by methods that will ensure a dry excavation and preservation of the final lines and grades of the bottoms of excavations. Dewatering methods may include well points, sump points, suitable rock or gravel placed as pipe bedding for drainage and pumping, temporary pipelines, or other means, all subject to the approval of the City. The cost of all dewatering activities shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Sewer systems shall not be used as drains for dewatering trenches or excavations, nor for disposal of collected or accumulated groundcover, without the approval of the agency of jurisdiction. c. Concrete shall not be poured in water, nor shall water be allowed to rise around concrete or mortar until it has set at least four hours. D. The Contractor is responsible for meeting all Federal, State, and local laws, rules, and regulations regarding the treatment and disposal of water from dewatering operations at the construction site. 3.4 SHORING AND SHIELDING A. The Contractor's design and installation of shoring shall Qe consistent with the rules, orders, and regulations of CAL-OSHA. B. Excavations shall be shored, sheeted, and supported such that the walls of the excavation will not slide or settle and all existing improvements of any kind, either on public or private property, will be fully protected from damage. C. The sheeting and shoring shall be arranged so as not to place any stress on portions of the completed work until the general construction has proceeded far enough to provide ample strength. D. Care shall be exercised in the moving or removal of trench shields, sheeting, and shoring to prevent the caving or collapse of the excavation faces being supported. 3.5 CORRECTION OF OVEREXCAVATION Over-excavations shall be corrected by backfilling with approved imported granular material or crushed rock, compacted to 90% relative compaction, as directed by the City. :) JULY 2014 Page 6 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting 3.6 FOUNDATION STABILIZATION A. When unsuitable soil materials are encountered, the unsuitable material shall be removed to the depth determined necessary in the field by the Soils Technician, and as acceptable to the City. The sub-grade shall be restored with compacted Imported Granular Material or crushed rock as recommended by the Soils Technician. Place the appropriate bedding or base material on this restored foundation. B. When rock encroachment is encountered, the rock shall be removed to a point below the intended trench or excavation sub-grade as determined necessary in the field by the Soils Technician, and as acceptable to the City. The sub-grade shall be restored with compacted Imported Granular Material as recommended by the Soils Technician. Place the appropriate bedding or base material on this restored foundation. C. When excessively wet, soft, spongy, or similarly unstable material is encountered at the surface upon which the bedding or base material is to be placed, the unsuitable material shall be removed to the depth determined necessary in the field by the Soils Technician, and as acceptable to the City. Restore the trench with crushed rock enclosed in filter fabric as directed by the Engineer. Larger size rocks, up to 3-inches, with appropriate gradation, may be used if recommended by the Soils Technician. Place the appropriate bedding or base material on this restored foundation. 3.7 TRENCH EXCAVATION AND PLACEMENT OF BEDDING A. Excavate the trench to the lines and grades shown on the drawings with allowance for 6-inches of pipe bedding material. The trench section shall be as shown on the Standard Drawings. B. The maximum length of open trench shall be 500-feet except by permission of the City, City, or County. The distance is the collective length at any location, including open excavation and pipe laying, which has not been backfilled to the elevation of the surrounding gate. C. Trench walls shall be sloped or shored per the requirements of CAL-OSHA. D. The trench bottom shall be graded to provide a smooth, firm, and stable foundation that is free from rocks and other obstructions. E. Place the specified thickness of bedding material over the full width of the trench. Grade the top of the pipe base ahead of the pipe laying to provide a firm, uniform support along the full length of pipe. F. Excavate bell holes at each joint to permit proper assembly and inspection of the entire joint. G. Trenches for main pipelines and all appurtenances shall be backfilled with the materials and methods as specified for the Pipe Zone, Trench Zone, and Pavement Zone. H. Trench widths shall be in accordance with the Standard Drawings. JULY 2014 Page 7 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting I. Trench depth shall be as required to install pipelines in accordance with the Approved Plans and these Standard Specifications. Unless shown otherwise in the Approved Plans, the minimum cover for pipelines shall be as follows: . ··· ·· Pil)tUne· AQi)l~qltion .. · Minimum.Coor R•Ciuired Potable Water 36-inches Recycled Water 48-inches Sewer 60-inches 3.8 MANHOLE AND VAULTS A. The Contractor shall prepare an excavation large enough to accommodate the structure and permit grouting of openings and backfilling operations. The walls of the excavation shall be sloped or shored per the requirements of CAL-OSHA. B. Manholes and vaults shall be placed at the location and elevation shown on the plans, on undisturbed soil with 6-inches of compacted crushed rock base. C. Above the geotextile wrapped crushed rock the manhole and vault excavations shall be backfilled with the materials and methods as specified for the Trench Zone, and Pavement Zone. 3.9 COMPACTION REQUIREMENTS A. B. Compaction shall be accomplished by mechanical means. Consolidation by water settling methods such as jetting or flooding is prohibited. If the backfill fails to meet the specified relative compaction requirements, the backfill shall be reworked until the requirements are met. All necessary excavations for density tests shall be made as directed by the Soils Technician, and as acceptable to the Engineer. The requirements of the Agency having jurisdiction shall prevail on all public roads. C. Compaction tests shall be performed at random depths, and at random intervals not to exceed 150-feet, as directed by the Soils Technician or City. D. Relative compaction shall be determined by the impact or field compaction test made in accordance with ASTM D 1557 Procedure C. E. Unless otherwise shown on the plans, standard drawings or otherwise described in the specifications for the particular type of pipe installed, relative compaction in pipe trenches shall be as follows: 1. Pipe zone-90% relative compaction. 2. Trench zone -95%, relative compaction in paved areas; 90% relative compaction elsewhere. 3. 4. JULY 2014 Structural section in paved areas - per agency requirements, 95% minimum. Imported Granular Material for over excavation or foundation stabilization -90% relative compaction. Page 8 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting F. All fills are subject to compaction tests. 3.10 TRENCH PLUGS Trench plugs shall be installed at 200-foot intervals along the entire length of piping systems. Trench plugs shall be 1 0-feet in length and shall encompass the entire pipe zone. Additional trench plugs may be required as directed by the Engineer. 3.11 PIPE ZONE BACKFILL A. Care shall be taken in placing the imported pipe zone material simultaneously around the main pipeline and appurtenance pipes so that the pipe barrel is completely supported and that no voids or uncompacted areas are left beneath the pipe or on the sides of the pipe. Care shall be taken to place material simultaneously on both sides of the pipe to prevent lateral movement. This area shall be mechanically compacted to attain 90% relative density. Care shall be taken when compacting appurtenance laterals 2-inches and smaller to prevent the crushing or denting of the copper lateral. Additional lifts of 12-inches or less thickness may be required on 16-inch or larger diameter pipe to attain complete support of the haunch area. Soils tests shall be taken on this layer or backfill. B. After the backfill to the pipe spring line has been approved by the Soils Technician, backfill of the remainder of the Pipe Zone may proceed. Do not drop sharp, heavy pieces of material directly onto the pipe or the tamped material around the pipe. C. Place and compact the imported pipe zone material at a maximum of 6-inch lifts. Compact all material placed in the Pipe Zone by mechanical methods. Sand cone tests shall be taken on this layer of backfill. D. The use of a backhoe mounted compaction wheel is prohibited within the pipe zone to 12-inches above the top of the pipe. E. Under no circumstances shall consolidation by water settling or water-setting methods (i.e., jetting, diking, etc.) be permitted. 3.12 TRENCH ZONE BACKFILL A. After the Pipe Zone material has been placed, compacted, approved by the Soil Technician, and accepted by the City, backfill in the Trench Zone may proceed. B. Compaction using vibratory equipment, tamping rollers, pneumatic tire rollers, or other mechanical tampers shall be performed with the type and size of equipment necessary to accomplish the work without damaging the pipe. The backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers of such depths as are considered proper for the type of compacting equipment being used in relation to the backfill material being placed. Each layer shall be evenly spread, properly moistened, and compacted to the specified relative density. Moisture-condition backfill within 2 percent of the optimum moisture content per ASTM D1557. The Contractor shall repair or replace any pipe, fitting, manhole, or structure damaged by the installation operations as directed by the City. 3.13 PAVEMENT ZONE BACKFILL AND RESTORATION A. After the Trench Zone material has been placed, compacted, approved by the Soil Technician, and accepted by the City, backfill in the Pavement Zone may proceed as necessary in accordance with the requirements of the agency having jurisdiction. JULY2014 Page 9 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting B. Replace bituminous and concrete pavement, curbs, and sidewalks removed or damaged during construction in accordance with the requirements of the agency having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION JULY2014 Page 10 of 10 SECTION 02223 Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting Section 02512 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of labor, materials and equipment for the construction of asphaltic concrete base or binding course, bituminous tack coat, and asphaltic concrete surface or wearing course for the roadway, driveways and parking area as indicated on the Drawings. Subgrade preparation shall be as indicated in the Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting section, unless otherwise specified in the governing standards or herein. Asphaltic concrete paving shall be constructed to the lines, grades, and cross sections indicated on the drawings. Type of construction shall be as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1-2. GENERAL. 1-2.01. Governing Standards. Except as otherwise specified or indicated, materials, equipment, details, and construction methods shall comply with the applicable "Greenbook" Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (SSPWC}, and City of Oceanside Standard Drawings. 1-2.02. Coordination. Contractor shall coordinate the construction of asphaltic concrete paving with the excavation, the construction of concrete curb and gutters and other construction. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. All submittals of design mix reports including design mix test results and other data, shall be in accordance with the Submittals section. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. The sources of materials shall be acceptable to Engineer. Except as modified herein, materials shall conform to the requirements of the governing standards. Delivery tickets for all materials delivered to the site shall be submitted to Engineer at the end of each day during the progress of the work. JULY 2014 1 of 5 SECTION 02512 Asphaltic Concrete Paving Asphaltic concrete materials shall be as follows: Base. Aggregate Base per SSPWC Subsection 200-2 Surface. Asphalt concrete mix designation per SSPWC Subsection 400-4 Asphalt binder. Designation per SSPWC Subsection 203-1 Tack coat. Designation per SSPWC Subsection 302-5.4 Rate C2 PG-64-16 SS-1 h emulsified asphalt 0.15 gallon/ square yard 2-2. DESIGN MIXES. A design mix for the asphalt base course and for the surface course, based upon the aggregates to be furnished, shall be determined by an independent testing laboratory at the expense of Contractor and shall be submitted to Engineer for review. The design mixes, upon acceptance by Engineer, shall be the basis for the mixes to be used in asphaltic concrete pavement construction PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. EQUIPMENT. Equipment and facilities for storage, measuring, mixing, heating, transporting, spreading, compacting, and other operations shall be in accordance with the applicable requirements of the governing standards. Improved or modernized equipment which will produce results equal in quality to those which would result from the specified equipment will be considered for use. All equipment and facilities shall be acceptable to Engineer. 3-2. SUBGRADE PREPARATION. As a minimum, the top 12 inches of the subgrade shall be compacted to 95 percent of standard proctor density at optimum moisture content as determined by governing standards. In addition, the stability of subgrades shall be such that when materials for construction are deposited on the subgrade no rutting or displacement of the subgrade by JULY 2014 2 of5 SECTION 02512 Asphaltic Concrete Paving material hauling vehicles will occur. No materials shall be placed on subgrades which are muddy, frozen, or have frost, snow, or water thereon. Subgrades shall be thoroughly compacted and properly shaped before any surfacing materials are placed. All subgrade and surfacing shall be sloped toward drains or outer edges. 3-3. PAVEMENTS. Unless otherwise specified, the new pavements to be constructed shall consist of an asphaltic concrete base course and an asphaltic concrete surface course, each of the thickness indicated on the Drawings. Asphaltic concrete base course shall be placed in compacted lifts no greater than 4 inches. Asphaltic concrete surface course shall be placed in compacted lifts no greater than 2 inches. Grade control shall be maintained by Contractor by means of automatic screed controls on the paving machine and by use of erected and mobile string lines as applicable. The use of the automatically controlled paver may be waived by Engineer on irregular sections. Finished surfaces shall conform to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. Asphaltic concrete pavements shall be constructed on previously prepared subgrades in accordance with the sections, in compliance with the governing standards. Asphalt mixtures may be spread and finished by hand methods only where machine methods are impractical as determined by Engineer. Hand placed mixtures shall not be cast or otherwise manipulated in such manner that segregation occurs. Minimum temperatures under which asphaltic concrete pavements may be constructed shall be as stipulated in the governing standards. 3-4. REPAIR OF DEFECTS. Contractor shall remove and replace defective areas by cutting to the full depth of the course. Cuts shall be made perpendicular and parallel to the direction of traffic with edges vertical. A tack coat shall be applied to all exposed surfaces. The area shall be filled with fresh hot asphaltic concrete mix in lifts of the same depths as the adjacent area, then compacted by rolling to specified surface density and smoothness. 3-5. CLEANING. After completion of paving operation, all areas shall be cleaned of excess spilled asphalt materials to the satisfaction of Engineer. 3-6. PROTECTION. In addition to the requirements for protection stipulated in the governing standards, Contractor shall protect all adjacent concrete and masonry so that no damage will occur as the result of subsequent construction operations. All damage or discoloration shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer before finai acceptance by Owner. JULY 2014 3 of 5 SECTION 02512 Asphaltic Concrete Paving Special care shall be taken to prevent tack or other asphalt materials from spraying or splashing. Adjacent construction shall be protected by covering with suitable fabric or paper. 3-7. CUTTING AND RESTORING EXISTING PAVEMENT. 3-7.01. Street surfacing destroyed in connection with performing the work required under the contract shall be replaced with the same kind or better by the Contractor in accordance with the latest specifications, rules, and regulations, and subject the inspection of the agency having jurisdiction. If a strip of existing pavement less than 4 feet is left between a trench and a gutter or edge of pavement, it shall be removed and new pavement replaced in its stead. In cutting or breaking up street surfacing, the Contractor shall not use equipment which will damage the adjacent pavement. All concrete pavement surfaces shall be scored with concrete sawing equipment provided that any Portland cement concrete base under an asphaltic mix surface will not be required to be scored by sawing. Asphaltic-concrete pavement shall be removed to clean, straight lines by saw cutting. 3-7.02. Temporary roadway repair shall be in accordance with City of Oceanside Standard Drawing M-2 for roads within City limits. 3-7.03. All permanent asphalt paving shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the City of Oceanside, including Standard Drawings M-3A and M-3C. 3-8. TRAFFIC STRIPING AND PAVEMENT MARKINGS. 3-8.01. Painted traffic striping and pavement markings shall be completed as called for in 310-5.6 of SSPWC. 3-8.02. Crosswalks and legends shall be replaced in their entirety or as called for by the City of Oceanside to assure consistency of appearance of specific locations along the project route. 3-8.03. Contractor shall maintain traffic striping and pavement markings throughout the duration of the project. 3-9. COMPACTION TESTS. 3-9.01. Compaction requirements specified are the dry density expressed as a percentage of the laboratory standard dry density using methods developed by the California Department of Transportation (California Test) as shown below. The location and frequency of field tests shall be at the discretion of the City of Oceanside. JULY 2014 4 of5 SECTION 02512 Asphaltic Concrete Paving PROPERTY Maximum Density Relative Compaction Resistance (R-value) CALIFORNIA TEST 304,308 216 or 231 (as allowed by the Engineer) 301 Any layer, or portion thereof, which does not meet density or resistance requirements shall be reworked and re-compacted until it meets the specified requirement as determined by the City of Oceanside. End of Section JULY 2014 5 of5 SECTION 02512 Asphaltic Concrete Paving Section 02900 HYDROSEEDING PART 1-GENERAL 1-1. GENERAL PROVISIONS. The General Provisions and Special Provisions are a part of this section and the contract for this work shall apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein. 1-2. SUMMARY. The work includes all services, labor, materials, transportation and equipment necessary to perform the work as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Prior to beginning work, Contractor shall submit the following for approval: 1-3.01 List of seed to be provided with quantities of each and sources indicated no later than 60 calendar days after Notice to Proceed. Indicate that the material specified will be available at the anticipated installation date. 1-3.02 Seed bag certification tags and a signed certificate listing the quantity and ~. type of seed. Tags shall include seed type (genus and species), quantity ""~ (weight), analysis, name of supplier, seed purity percentage, seed germination percentage, weed seed content, and date seed was tested. 1-3.03 Contractor shall submit certifications, letters and/or purchase orders from product manufacturer or vendor verifying products to be used on project. Products shall be approved prior to Work. Letter or purchase orders shall verify materials including wood fiber mulch. 1-3.04 Samples of two ounces of each individual species seed, drawn at the time of each seed delivery to the site. 1-3.05 Reports on the status of revegetation activities. Status reports shall be submitted with the Contractors scheduled work reports. 1-3.06 Certifications of the soil testing laboratory. The soil-testing laboratory shall be approved by the Owner. 1-3.07 The Contractor shall take soils tests after the grading operation and a minimum of four weeks prior to hydroseeding. The Contractor shall submit the results of the soils tests and the soils labs recommendations for soil amendments and fertilizers a minimum of two weeks prior to hydroseeding operation. JULY 2014 1 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding 1-3.08 Prior to beginning revegetation work, the Contractor shall submit a list of soil amendments and fertilizers with quantities of each to the Owner for approval. 1-4. GUARANTEES AND REPLACEMENTS. The Contractor shall guarantee plants to be in a healthy, thriving condition for the following durations beginning after written acceptance by the Owner of the installation. Groundcover: 90 DAYS. 1-4.01. All plants found to be dead and all plants not in a vigorous condition noted within the Guarantee Period shall be replaced within (14) days. 1-4.02. Plants used for replacement shall be the same kind and size as specified in the plant list. They shall be furnished, planted and fertilized as originally specified. 1-5. QUALITY ASSURANCE. The Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of seeding in all revegetation areas according to the plans and specifications provided for each area to be seeded. The Contractor's responsibilities for establishment and maintenance of the seeded areas shall cease at the end of the 120 day Maintenance period, if the Owner approves in writing that the revegetation has been established in substantial compliance with the plans and specifications. 1-5.01 The Contractor shall have the following minimum qualifications: 1. C-27 California Landscape Contractor's License. 2. Certified as a California Pest Control Applicator. 3. The hydroseeding work shall be performed by a competently trained individual or hydroseeding company in accordance with the best standards and practices related to the profession. 1-6. REJECTION AND SUBSTITUTION. 1-6.01 Plants, seed and other revegetation materials not conforming to the requirements specified herein shall be considered defective, and such materials, whether in place or not, shall be marked as rejected, removed from the site, and replaced from the site and replaced with acceptable materials. 1-6.02 Make no substitutions from seed or other specified revegetation materials without written approval of the Owner. All requests for substitute materials shall be submitted to the Owner a minimum of 30 calendar days prior to the scheduled seed application date. JULY 2014 2 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding 1-7. SEQUENCING AND SITE CONDITIONS. 1-7.01 Prior to the start of Work, examine site conditions and locate all environmentally sensitive areas and other features, so that precautions may be taken not to damage such areas. In the event of conflicts between environmentally sensitive areas and the Work of this Section, promptly notify the Owner. Provide for the protection of environmentally sensitive species and habitats within and adjacent to the Work areas at all times. 1-7.02 With the exception of surveying and collection of seeds, no construction or other disruptive activities (including soil testing or other forms of surface disturbance) may occur in or adjacent to environmentally sensitive without prior written approval from the Owner. 1-7.03 Seeding shall not start in any area prior to site observation and approval of site preparation work, which includes topsoil replacement, weed control and soil preparation. 1-7.04 The Contractor shall examine substrates and conditions where materials are to be applied. Do not proceed with installation until satisfactory conditions are corrected. Only apply product to geotechnically stable slopes that have been designed and built to divert the water shed away from the face of the slope, therefore eliminating surface flow energy from above from damaging the slope ~ face. If there is a conflict, notify the Owner's Respresentative immediately. ...,._, 1-8. SITE OBSERVATION VISITS BY THE OWNER. Site observation visits herein specified shall be made by the Owner. The Contractor shall request site observation in advance of the time observation is required. 1-8.01 Site observation will be required for the following parts of the work: 1. Commencement of work for verification of existing conditions and locations of environmentally sensitive areas. 2. Completion of backfilling and grading. 3. Incorporation of soil amendments into the soil. 4. Upon the completion of hydroseeding. 5. Pre-maintenance site visit: When planting and all other indicated or specified work has been completed, acceptance and written approval shall establish the beginning of the Maintenance Period. 6. Final maintenance site visit: The final site observation visit shall be made at the completion of the one hundred and twenty (120) day Maintenance JULY 2014 3 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding Period. This site observation visit shall establish the beginning date for the guarantee period of the plant material. 1-8.02 Acceptance: Upon completion of the final site observation visit and the work of this section, the Contractor will be notified in writing by the Owner (1) whether the work is acceptable; (2) of any requirements necessary for completion and acceptance. 1-8.03 This Contractor or his authorized representative shall be on the site at the time of each site observation visit by the Owner. 1-9. ESTABLISHMENT MAINTENANCE. 1-9.01 The establishment program shall consist of methods to facilitate the revegetation effort. Proper watering, weed abatement, site cleanup and general care during germination and establishment of all planting materials shall be performed. The 120 day maintenance period shall begin on the first day after all seeding work on the site is completed, checked and approved in writing by the Owner. The 120 day maintenance period shall continue thereafter for no less than 120 consecutive calendar days or until the hydroseed is successfully germinated and container planting and irrigation work are in substantial compliance with the drawings. The plant establishment period will begin upon acceptance of the 120 day maintenance period and continue until revegetation is established. 1-9.02 The following general requirements shall be followed to ensure a successful establishment program: 1-9.02.01 Maintain all plants in a vigorous, thriving condition by watering, cultivating, or other necessary operations during the entire period of installation and until acceptance and approval by the Owner. 1-9.02.02 Improper maintenance, which may cause the planted material to be in poor condition at the termination of the scheduled contract period, shall cause postponement of the final approval of Work. Maintenance of all areas shall continue at no additional cost to the Owner until all Work is approved, except for damage caused by vandalism or natural disaster. The Contractor shall be liable for any damaged vegetation outside the limits of Work, including, but not limited to, design and replacement of vegetation, and fines levied by agencies. 1-9.02.03 All areas shall be kept free of debris, and all areas shall be weeded and cultivated at intervals of not more than ten days after any planting area has been completed. JULY 2014 4 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding 1-9.02.04 The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining adequate protection of all areas in revegetated areas. The Contractor shall repair damaged areas immediately. 1-9.02.05 Report damage caused by animals and inform the Owner of such damage. Remedial action may include fencing. 1-9.02.06 Post-planting fertilization of planting areas shall not occur, unless called for by a soils laboratory and the Owner after a review of soils tests taken at the site after the grading operation and prior to planting. 1-9.02.07 All weeds shall be removed by hand after watering to assist in root removal. No pre-emergent herbicide shall be applied. 1-9.02.08 Train personnel to be knowledgeable in the identification of weed species and desirable seeded and planted species to ensure only the removal of weed species. 1-9.03 General Care: The Contractor shall make periodic close inspections to ensure that seeded and planted areas are free from pest and disease, and alert the Owner should problems occur. Biological control agents, such as insect predators, will be used whenever possible. Plants that are severely diseased will be removed and replaced, to prevent the spread of the disease and insects. Pesticides will be avoided, unless directed by the Owner and acceptable to appropriate agencies with no secondary poisoning effect. 1-9.04 The Contractor shall be responsible for continuously protecting areas included in the contract, such as all plant materials, seeded materials, fences, supports, etc. until the acceptance and approval by the Owner. 1-10. WEED CONTROL 1-10.01 Control noxious and annual weeds in all areas to be planted and hydroseeded during construction and throughout the establishment maintenance period. Within 10 days prior to initiating seeding and planting operations, perform weed eradication. Noxious and annual weeds are identified as follows: 1-10.02 Noxious weeds are perennial weeds that pose a threat to establishment of revegetation areas and resprout from underground roots. A general list of noxious weeds targeted for control include Artichoke thistle (Cynara cardunculus), Fennel (Foeniculum vulgare), Castor bean (Ricinus communis), Tree tobacco (Nicotiana glauca), Pampas grass (Cortaderia spp.), Bermuda grass (Cynodon dactylon), Tamarisk (Tamarix spp.), Eucalyptus (Eucalyptus spp.), Acacia (Acacia spp.), Hottentot fig (Carpobrotus spp.), palms (Phoenix spp. and Washingtonia spp.), Gazania (Gazania spp.), and Giant reed (Arundo ~ donax). ,.,.J JULY 2014 5 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding 1-10.03 Annual weeds are those that pose a threat to establishment of revegetation areas due to vigorous, competitive growth habits. A general list of annual weeds targeted for control include tall annual grasses of various species. Mustard (Brassica spp.), Russian thistle (Salsola australis), Medic (Medicago spp.), Sweet-clover (Melilotus spp.), Wild radish (Raphanus spp.), Tocalote (Cenaurea melitensis), Garland chrysanthemum (Chrysanthemum coronarium), and Cocklebur (Xanthium spinosum and X strumarium). 1-10.04 Other weeds may be identified for control by the Owner during the establishment and maintenance period. 1-10.05 All areas shall be weeded prior to the weeds reaching 12 inches in height or before ripening of seed. 1-10.06 Leaf and branch drop, and other organic debris of species not identified as weeds may be left in place. 1-11. CLEAN UP. Site Cleanup and Maintenance: 1-11.01 The site shall be kept clean, neat and orderly at all times. Immediately upon completion of Work in the area, all trash, debris and rubbish resulting from Revegetation efforts shall be removed and properly disposed of. The Contractor shall also be responsible for removing any plants that germinate, that are not specified for the project. 1-12. SOILS TEST. Soil samples shall be taken by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner for approval. 1-12.01 After rough grading is completed and at a minimum of four weeds prior to hydroseeding and planting, soil samples shall be taken by the Contractor to represent an adequate cross section of site soil conditions. 1-12.02 The approved soil testing laboratory shall perform the soils tests and provide the results prior to work specified in this section. 1-12.03 Contractor shall coordinate and notify Owner of the sampling date, time and locations. A minimum of three representative samples shall be taken from random and varied locations of the project site that will receive landscaping installation. Samples should represent major conditions of exposed cut soils, fill soils and native undisturbed soil. Sample from the top foot for ground cover and shrubs. Sample from the expected depth for large container stock. Label each sample for location/origin, type of soil condition visibly observed and sampling depth. Laboratory report shall identify each sample with same information. All samples taken shall be split into two samples, one half will go to a qualified JULY 2014 6 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding laboratory by the Contractor (at his/her expense) and the other half will be retained by the Engineer. All samples shall be at least one pint in volume. 1-12.04 The Contractor shall submit to the Owner copies of all laboratory reports prior to proceeding with work. 1-12.05 All soil samples shall be analyzed for and include the following: 1. Organic matter content. 2. NPK (Nitrogen; Potassium; Phosphorus) 3. pH 4. EC (electrical conductivity-soluble salts) 5. Soil texture (silt, clay, sand) 6. Boron 1-12.06 Each soil analysis shall include written recommendations for soil treatments and soil amendments to be added based upon test results. Recommendations shall include 1. Volume of soils amendments 2. NPK (Nitrogen; Potassium; Phosphorus) 3. pH 4. EC (electrical conductivity-soluble salts) 5. Soil texture (silt, clay, sand) 6. Recommendations for the following: a. amendments b. leaching c. maintenance fertilizations for container plants d. improvement of soil's water retention ability. 1-12.07 The soil test(s) shall be performed by a soil testing laboratory. Approved soil-testing laboratories are indicated below: 1. Wallace Laboratories 365 Coral Circle El Segundo, CA 90245 Phone: (310) 615-0116 JULY 2014 7 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding Fax: (310) 640-6863 http://www .bettersoils.com 2. Soil & Plant Laboratory, Inc. 1594 N Main Street Orange, CA 92667 Phone: (714) 282-8777 Fax: (714) 282-8575 http://www.soilandplantlaboratory.com 3. Fruit Growers Laboratory, Inc. 853 Corporation Street Santa Paula, CA 93061-0272 Phone: (805) 659-0910 Fax: (805) 525-4172 http://www.fglinc.com 1-13. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. The term "Planting Area" shall mean all areas to be planted with seed. 1-13.01 Utilities: Prior to excavation for planting or placing of plant materials, locate all underground utility lines still in use and take proper precautions to avoid damage to such improvements. In the event of a conflict between such lines and plant locations, notify the Owner who shall arrange for the re-location of the plant material or the line. The Contractor assumes all responsibility for making any and all repairs for damages resulting from work as specified herein. 1-13.02 Safety: Adequately stake, barricade and protect all irrigation equipment, manholes, utility lines and other existing property during all phases of the soil amending and grading operations. 1-13.03 On-site soil excavation: Soil excavation shall include the stripping and staking of all acceptable soil encountered within the areas to be excavated for plant pits and planting beds. Protect all areas that are to be trucked over and upon which soil is to be temporarily stacked pending its re-use for the filling of holes, pits and beds. 1-13.04 Grading & soil preparation: Grading and soil preparation work shall be performed only during the period when optimum results shall be obtained. When the moisture content of the soil reaches a level where working it will destroy the soil structure, spreading and grading operations shall be suspended. Grading shall be resumed when the moisture content reaches the acceptable level and the desired results are likely to be obtained. JULY 2014 8 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding 1-13.05 Surface drainage: The Contractor shall be responsible for all surface and subsurface drainage required which may affect his or her guarantee of the trees, vines and shrubs. 1-13.06 Planting Schedule: Planting shall be performed during those periods when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted horticultural practice. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. TOPSOIL. Amended Topsoil: Topsoil shall be the existing surface soil stripped and stockpiled on site. Topsoil shall be a natural friable soil representative of productive soils in the vicinity and shall be free of admixture of subsoil and foreign matters or objects larger than one inch in any dimension, toxic substances, and any material or substance that may be harmful to plant growth. Soils shall be amended following the results of the soils test and based on approval by the Owner. 2-1.01 Imported Topsoil: Topsoil shall be Class A topsoil as defined in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. Topsoil shall be natural friable soil representative of productive soils in the vicinity and shall be free of ad?mixt~re otf s~bsoibl atnd foreigndmatters otr ~b1jects labrgter thatnh otne incbh inhanyf 1 ~ 1mens1on, ox1c su s ances, an any rna ena or su s ance a may e arm u ...,._, to plant growth. The pH range shall be amended by the addition of pH adjusters. Topsoil shall have a textural classification of sandy loam as determined by USDA soil classification key. 2-2. SOIL AMENDMENTS. Type & Quantity of soil amendments are for bidding purposes. Soils shall be amended following the results of the soils test and based on approval by the Owner. 2-2.01 Soil conditioner: GREENWAYS or approved equal. 2-2.02 Agricultural Gypsum: Gypsum shall be a commercially processed and packaged gypsum with a minimum 80% grade containing a minimum of 14% sulfur. 2-2.03 Fertilizer: 2-2.03.01 Pre-plant fertilizer: (Commercial Grade) 100% organic, slow release, non-burning fertilizer. GRO POWER PLUS (5-3-1) or approved equal. 2-2.03.02 JULY 2014 Fertilizer Tablets: Tablets shall be BEST PAKS or approved equal. 9 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding 2-3. PLANTING BACKFILL. Planting backfill shall be a thoroughly blended mixture of excavated soil from the planting pits and soil amendments at the following mixture: Soil Conditioner Amended Soil GRO POWER PLUS (5-3-1) 1 part 2 parts 1/2 part 2-4. STAKING MATERIALS. Stakes shall be of lodgepole pine. These shall be straight shafts, shaved and cut clean and bare of branches and stubs, of uniform thickness with a minimum diameter of 2 inches and free of loose knots, splits or bends. Stakes shall be no less than ten (10) feet in length. 2-5. HYDROSEEDING COMPONENTS AND ADDITIVES. 2-5.01 Water shall be free of impurities, excess chlorine and salts. The use of purified water or filters may be required when directed. General precautions should be observed when drawing water from sources other than irrigation main line. 2-5.02 The hydroseed mix for use near Diegan Coastal Sage Scrub shall adhere to the following: COASTAL SAGE SCRUB SEED MIX1 MIN.% PURITY/ LBS/ SPECIES GERMINATION ACRE Deerweed (Acmispon glaber [Lotus scoparius]) 95/80 California sagebrush (Artemisia californica) 15/60 Fascicled tarplant (Deinandra fasciculata) 20/80 California encelia (Encelia californica) 40/60 California buckwheat (Eriogonum fasciculatum) 50/20 Golden yarrow (Eriophyl/um confertiflorum) 30/70 Goldenbush (lsocoma menziesit) 40/30 Laurel sumac (Malosma laurina)2 98/70 Coast monkey flower (Mimulus aurantiacus ssp. puniceus) 2/60 Purple needlegrass (Stipa [Nassella] pulchra) 90/80 California plantain (Plantago erecta) 90/80 Black sage (Salvia mellifera) 70/50 TOTAL 1 . . .. Seed1ng w11l be done by two-step hydroseed1ng. lmtlal apphcat1on Wlllmclude seed, 500 pounds per acre of wood fiber, and mycorrhizal inoculum. Second application will include the remaining 1500 pounds per acre of wood fiber and the binder. 2Scarify before seeding. The hydroseed mix for use in non-Diegan Coastal Sage Scrub shall adhere to the following: 5 3 2 3 4 3 1 3 2 3 5 3 32 JULY 2014 10 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding GENERAL SEED MIX1 SPECIES MIN.% PURITY/ LBS/ GERMINATION ACRE Grab lotus (Acmispon micranthus [Lotus hamatus]) 90/80 3 Deerweed (Acmispon glaber [Lotus scoparius]) 95/80 3 Fascicled tarplant (Deinandra fasciculata) 20/80 2 Golden yarrow (Eriophyllum confertiflorum) 30/70 2 Peak rush rose (Helianthemum scoparium) 98/80 3 Goldfields (Lasthenia californica) 70/50 2 Miniature lupine (Lupinus bicolor) 98/85 2 Foothill needlegrass (Stipa [Nasse//a] lepida) 90/60 5 Purple needlegrass (Stipa (Nassella) pulchra} 90/80 5 California plantain (Plantago erecta} 90/80 5 TOTAL 32 1 . . .. Seed1ng w1ll be done by two-step hydroseedmg. lmtlal application Will Include seed, 500 pounds per acre of wood fiber, and mycorrhizal inoculum. Second application will include the remaining 1500 pounds per acre of wood fiber and the binder. 2-5.02.01 Seed not required to be labeled under the California Food and Agriculture Code shall be tested for purity and germination by a seed laboratory certified by the Association of Official Seed Analysts, or a seed technologist certified by the Society of Commercial seed Technologists. Seed shall have been tested for purity and germination not more than one year prior to application of ""' seed. .._,; 2-5.02.02 Deliver seed to the jobsite for each plant species in separate, sealed containers. Deliver seed in original unopened suppliers sealed containers bearing original certification labels. Label seed according to State and Federal Laws. Perform proportioning by weight and mixing of seed mixes in the field in the presence of the Owner immediately prior to application. 2-5.03 The soils stabilizing emulsion blend shall be a true emulsion consisting of two immiscible liquids and be manufactured exclusively with GRAS (Generally Regarded As Safe) materials. The soil stabilizing emulsion blend shall consist at minimum of 3 different linear anionic copolymer of acryl amide/sodium acryl ate in water-in-oil emulsions, be guaranteed to contain 30% (plus or minus 1%) active polymer and 100 ppm or less of residual acryl amide. The soil stabilizing emulsion shall be nontoxic to plant and animal life and be registered and licensed by the State of California, Department of Food and Agriculture, as an auxiliary soil amendment. 2-5.04 Wood fiber mulch shall be a fibrous, wood cellulose product produced for this purpose. It shall contain no growth or germination inhibiting substances, and shall be manufactured so that when thoroughly mixed with seed, fertilizer and water in the proportions indicated, it will form homogenous slurry which is ~. ·., capable of being sprayed. Suppliers shall certify that their products meet all ·.....,/ JULY2014 11 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding specified requirements based on laboratory and field testing. Weight specifications of this material shall refer to air dry weight of fiber material. Absolute air dry weight is based on normal standards ofT echnical Association of Pulp and Paper Industry for wood cellulose and is considered equivalent to 10 percent moisture. Each package of cellulose fiber shall be marked by manufacturer to show air dry weight content. Materials: 100% wood fiber, dark green marker dye. pH Range: 4.8% (plus or minus 2%) Moisture Content: 12% (plus or minus 3%) Wood Fiber: 97%. Organic Content: 96.2% (plus or minus .4%). Ash Content: .8% (plus or minus .4%). Water Holding Capacity: 1350% minimum. Packaging: 50 pound UV resistant bags, with UV resistant pallet cover. 2-5.05 Fertilizer: The fertilizer shall be in pelleted or granular form and shall comply with the chemical analysis specified. The fertilizer shall be thoroughly mixed and incorporated in the hydro-mulching slurry. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. SOIL CONDITIONING, FERTILIZING & ROTOTILLING. The type and quantity of soil amendments are for bidding purposes. Soil shall be amended per results of soils test. 3-1.01 After the areas have been graded, the following rates of soil amendment materials shall be evenly spread over all planting areas and shall be thoroughly scarified to an average depth of six (6) inches by rototilling a minimum of two (2) alternating passes. DO NOT ADD SOIL AMENDMENTS OR ROTOTILL SLOPE AREAS 2:1 OR GREATER. Slope areas will be hydroseeded and/or hand planted. 3-1.01.01 Soil conditioner: Apply 3 cu. yds. per 1,000 sq. ft. 3-1.01.02 Gypsum: Apply per manufacturers recommendation based on soils test. 3-1.01.03 The thoroughness and completeness of the rototilling and incorporation of the soil amendments shall be acceptable to the Owner. 3-2. DEEPWATERING. 3-2.01 Care shall be taken that the rate of application of water does not cause erosion or sluffing of soil. JULY 2014 12 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding 3-2.02 All depressions, voids, erosion scars and settled trenches generated by the deep watering shall be filled with topsoil and brought to finish grade. 3-3. FINISH GRADING. Contractor shall soil fill all planting areas with a sufficient crown to assure that water will flow as directed. 3-3.01 Finish grades shall be measured as the final water compacted and settled surface grades and shall be within plus or minus 0.1 foot of the spot elevations and grade lines indicated on the drawings. 3-3.02 Final finish grades shall insure positive drainage of the site with all surface drainage away from buildings, walls, and toward roadways, drains and catch basins. 3-3.03 Planting surfaces shall be graded with no less than one (1%) percent surface slope for positive drainage. 3-3.04 Molding and rounding of the grades shall be provided at all changes in slope. 3-3.05 All undulations and irregularities in the planting surfaces resulting from tillage, rototilling and all other operations shall be leveled and floated out before planting operations are initiated. 3-3.06 Final grades shall be acceptable to the Owner before planting operations will be allowed to begin. 3-4. HYDRO-MULCHING APPLICATION AND PLANTING SCHEDULE. 3-4.01 Hydroseeding shall consist of a slurry mix of seed, soil stabilizer, wood fiber mulch, water and other approved additives. The mix shall include additives per the results of the soils test, wood fiber mulch, soil stabilizer, seed materials as indicated on the plans and water as required to prepare a mix that shall become uniformly suspended to form a homogeneous slurry, that when hydraulically sprayed on the ground, will form a blotter like ground cover impregnated uniformly with seeds and which, after application, will allow absorption of moisture and rainfall to percolate to underlying soil. Soil stabilizer shall be blended as specified by product manufacturer for long term erosion control. 3-4.02 Refer to plans for gradient and application rates of seed, wood fiber mulch and soil stabilizer. 3-4.03 Use hydraulic hydroseeding equipment, with a built-in agitation system and sufficient operating capacity to continuously agitate, suspend and ~ homogeneously mix the slurry. Use distribution lines of sufficient size to prevent ...._j JULY 2014 13 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding stoppage and provide even distribution of slurry. Use traveling unit hydroseed equipment capable of placing slurry tank and spray nozzles within sufficient proximity of areas to be hydroseeded so as to provide uniform distribution without waste. Limit the operation of hydraulic hydroseeding equipment to access roads to prevent soil compaction or damage to seeded areas. Provide extension hoses, as necessary, to reach all areas to be hydroseeded. Damage to prepared ground surface resulting from hydroseed application shall be repaired and reseeded at the direction of the Owner. 3-4.04 Apply hydroseed within 30 days after topsoil replacement operations are complete. Perform topsoil replacement coincident with backfilling operations. 3-4.05 Mix hydroseed slurry immediately prior to hydroseed application. Do not allow slurry to remain in the tank for more than one hour before application. 3-4.06 Apply the slurry in a one step application. Using the wood fiber as a guide, spray soil with uniform visible coat of slurry in sweeping motion, allowing wood fibers to build upon each other, until complete, even coverage is achieved. 3-4.07 Apply hydroseed to all areas disturbed during construction, with the exception of permanent access roads, structures, or other areas designated for other revegetation as shown on the Plans. Designated slope areas are subject to approval by the Owner. 3-4.08 Hydroseeded areas shall be protected against foot traffic and other use immediately after hydroseeding is completed by placing warning signs and temporary twine and flagging around the areas. 3-4.09 Protection: Contractor shall protect all areas within the project area against trespassing and other damage at all times. Any slurry sprayed on paved surfaces or inside any reservoir or drainage structure, which may impede the free flow of rain or irrigation water, shall be cleaned up by the Contractor. 3-4.1 0 Reseeding: All bare spots shall be reseeded by the Contractor within thirty (30) days after the last seeding. The Owner reserves the right to extend the maintenance period if the hydroseed coverage has not been established prior to the end of the ninety (90) day maintenance period. This extended maintenance shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. End of Section JULY 2014 14 of 14 SECTION 02900 Hydroseeding SECTION 03000 CAST -IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section describes materials and methods for formwork, reinforcement, mixing, placement, curing and repairs of concrete, and the use of cementitious materials and other related products. This section includes concrete, mortar, grout, reinforcement, thrust and anchor blocks, valve support blocks, and manhole bases. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. ASTMA 185 -Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement ASTM A 615/A 615M -Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete ASTM C 150 ASTM C494 ASTM C881 CRSI SSPWC Reinforcement -Specification for Portland Cement -Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete -Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete -Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars -Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction "Green book" 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Specifications 02223, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15061, 15064, 15074, 15102, 15108, 15112, AND 16640 1.4 APPLICATIONS The following materials, referenced in other sections, shall be provided and installed in accordance with this specification for the applications noted below: A. Concrete for thrust and anchor blocks for horizontal and vertical bends, ductile-iron or steel fittings, fire hydrant bury ells, and support blocks for valves 4-inches and larger, all in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Concrete for collars, cradles, curbs, encasements, gutters, manhole bases, protection posts, sidewalks, splash pads, and other miscellaneous cast-in-place items. C. Mortar for filling and finishing the joints between manhole and vault sections and setting manhole grade rings and cover frames. Mortar may also be used for repairs of minor surface defects of no more than Y-a-inch in depth of %-inch in width on non-structural, cast-in-place items such as splash pads or concrete rings around manholes. (Note that large voids, structural concrete and pipe penetrations into vaults shall be repaired with non-shrink grout; repairs to precast manholes and vaults and cast-in-place manhole bases shall be repaired with an epoxy bonding agent and repair mortar, as outlined below). JULY2014 Page 1 of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete D. Epoxy bonding agent for bonding repair mortar to concrete on repairs to damaged surfaces to precast or cast-in-place concrete manoles and vaults. E. Repair mortar for repair to damaged surfaces of precast or cast-in-place concrete manholes and vaults. An epoxy bonding agent shall be used in conjunction with repair mortar. F. -Non-shrink grout for general purposes repair of large construction voids, pipe penetrations into vaults and grouting of base plates for equipment or structural members. G. Epoxy adhesives for grouting of anchor bolts. H. Protective epoxy coating for application to reinforcing steel with existing concrete structures exposed during construction. I. Damp-proofing for application to the exterior surfaces of concrete manholes and vaults located at or below the water table or where showing evidence of moisture or seepage, and as directed by the Engineer. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Deliver reinforcing steel to the site bundled and tagged with identification. Store on skids to keep bars clean and free of mud and debris. If contaminated, all bars shall be cleaned by wire brushing, sand blasting, or other means prior to being set in forms. ~ PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 CONCRETE A. All Portland cement concrete shall conform to the provisions of Sections 201, 202, and 303 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Greenbook). B. Class 560-C-3250 concrete, as described in the Greenbook, Section 201, shall be used for all applications unless otherwise directed by the City. The maximum water/cement ratio shall be 0.53 by weight, and the maximum slump shall be 4-inches. C. In certain circumstances, rapid-setting concrete may be required. Accelerating admixtures shall conform to ASTM C-494 and may be used in the concrete mix as permitted by the City. Calcium chloride shall not be used in concrete. 2.2 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing steel shall conform to ASTM A 615, Grade 60. B. Fabricate reinforcing steel in accordance with the current edition of the Manual of Standard Practice, published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. JULY2014 Page2of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.3 WELDED FIRE FABRIC Welded wire fabric shall conform to ASTM A 185. 2.4 TIEWIRE Tie wire shall be 16-gage minimum, black, soft annealed. 2.5 BAR SUPPORTS Bar supports in beams and slabs exposed to view after removal of forms shall be galvanized or plastic coated. Use concrete supports for reinforcing in concrete placed on grade. 2.6 FORMS A. Forms shall be accurately constructed of clean lumber. The surface of forms against which concrete is placed shall be smooth and free from irregularities, dents, sags or holes. B. Metal form systems may be used upon City approval. Include manufacturer's data for materials and installation with the request to use a metal form system. 2.7 MORTAR Cement mortar shall consist of a mixture of Portland cement, sand, and water. One part cement and two parts sand shall first be combined, and then thoroughly mixed with the required amount of water. 2.8 EPOXY BONDING AGENT The epoxy bonding agent shall be an epoxy-resin-based product intended for bonding new mortar to hardened concrete and shall conform to ASTM C 881. The bonding agent shall be selected from the Approved Materials list. 2.9 REPAIR MORTAR Repair mortar shall be a two-component, cement-based product specifically designed for structurally repairing damaged concrete surfaces. The repair mortar shall exhibit the properties of high compressive and bond strengths and low shrinkage. A medium-slump repair mortar shall be used on horizontal surfaces, and a non-sag, low-slump repair mortar shall be used on vertical or overhead surfaces. Repair mortar shall be selected from the Approved Materials list. 2.10 NON-8HRINK GROUT Non-shrink grout shall be a non-metallic cement-based product intended for filling general construction voids or grouting base plates for equipment or structural members. The non-shrink grout shall exhibit the properties of high compressive and bond strengths and zero shrinkage, and shall be capable of mixing to a variable viscosity ranging from a dry pack to a fluid consistency as required for the application. The non-shrink grout shall be selected from the Approved Materials list. JULY 2014 Page 3of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 2.11 EPOXY ADHESIVE Epoxy adhesive shall be a high-modulus epoxy-resin-based product intended for structural grouting of anchor bolts and dowels to concrete. The epoxy adhesives shall conform to ASTM C 881. A pourable, medium-viscosity epoxy shall be used on horizontal surfaces, and a heavy-bodied, non-sag epoxy gel shall be used on vertical surfaces. The epoxy adhesives shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.12 PROTECTIVE EPOXY COATING The protective epoxy coating shall be an epoxy-resin-based product exhibiting high bond strength to steel and concrete surfaces, and shall conform to ASTM C 881. The protective epoxy coating shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.13 DAMP-PROOFING FOR CONCRETE STRUCTURES Damp-proofing material shall consist of two coats of a single-component self-priming, heavy-duty cold-applied coal tar selected from the Approved Materials List. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 FORMWORK A. The Contractor shall notify the City a m1mmum of one working day in advance of intended placement of concrete to enable the City to check the form lines, grades, and other required items before placement of concrete. B. The form surfaces shall be cleaned and coated with form oil prior to installation. The form surfaces shall leave uniform form marks conforming to the general lines of the structure. C. The forms shall be braced to provide sufficient strength and rigidity to hold the concrete and to withstand the necessary fluid pressure and consolidation pressures without deflection from the prescribed lines. D. Unless otherwise indicated on the plans, all exposed sharp concrete edges shall be 3/4-inch chamfered. 3.2 REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with the current edition of Recommended Practice for Placing Reinforcing Bars, published by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. B. All reinforcing steel shall be of the required sizes and shapes and placed where shown on the drawings or as directed by the City. C. Do not straighten or re-bend reinforcing steel in a manner that will damage the material. Do not use bars with bends not shown on the drawings. All steel shall be cold bent -do not use heat. JULY2014 Page4of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete D. All bars shall be free from rust, scale, oil, or any other coating that would reduce or destroy the bond between concrete and steel. E. Position reinforcing steel in accordance with the Approved Plans and secure by using annealed wire ties or clips at intersections and support by concrete or metal supports, spacers, or metal hangers. Do not place metal clips or supports in contact with the forms. Bend tie wires away from the forms in order to provide the concrete coverage equal to that required of the bars. If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall install bars additional to those shown on the drawings for the purpose of securing reinforcement in position. F. Place reinforcement a minimum of 2-inches clear of any metal pipe, fittings, or exposed surfaces. G. The reinforcement shall be so secured in position that it will not be displaced during the placement of concrete. H. All reinforcing steel, wire mesh, and tie wire shall be completely encased in concrete. I. Reinforcing steel shall not be welded unless specifically required by the Approved Plans or otherwise directed by the Engineer. I. Secure reinforcing dowels in place prior to placing concrete. Do not press dowels into the concrete after the concrete has been placed. J. Minimum lap for all reinforcement shall be 40 bar diameters unless otherwise specified on the Approved Plans. K. Place additional reinforcement around pipe penetrations or openings 6-inches diameter or larger. Replace cut bars with a minimum of 1/2 of the number of cut bars at each side of the opening, each face, each way, same size. Lap with the uncut bars a minimum of 40 bar diameters past the opening dimension. Place one same size diagonal bar at the four diagonals of the opening at 45° to the cut bars, each face. Extend each diagonal bar a minimum of 40 bar diameters past the opening dimension. L. Wire mesh reinforcement is to be rolled flat before being placed in the form. Support and tie wire mesh to prevent movement during concrete placement. M. Extend welded wire fabric to within 2-inches of the edges of slabs. Lap splices at least 1-1/2 courses of the fabric and a minimum of 6-inches. Tie laps and splices securely at ends and at Jest every 24-inches with 16-gage black annealed steel wire. Pull the fabric into position as the concrete is placed by means of hooks, and work concrete under the steel to ensure that it is at the proper distance above the bottom of the slab. 3.3 EMBEDDED ITEMS All embedded items, including bolts, dowels and anchors, shall be held correctly in place in the forms before concrete is placed. JULY 2014 Page 5of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.4 MORTAR MIXING The quantity of water to be used in the preparation of mortar shall be only that required to produce a mixture sufficiently workable for the purpose intended. Mortar shall be used as soon as possible after mixing and shall show no visible sign of setting prior to use. Re-mixing of mortar by the addition of water after signs of setting are evident shall not be permitted. 3.5 MIXING AND PLACING CONCRETE A. All concrete shall be placed in forms before taking its initial set. B. No concrete shall be placed in water except with permission of the City. C. As the concrete is placed in forms, or in rough excavations (i.e., thrust or anchor blocks), it shall be thoroughly settled and compacted throughout the entire layer by internal vibration and tamping bars. D. All existing concrete surfaces upon which or against which new concrete is to be placed shall be roughened, thoroughly cleaned, wetted, and grouted before the new concrete is deposited. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. Immediately upon the removal of forms, voids shall be neatly filled with cement mortar, non-shrink grout, or epoxy bonding agent and repair mortar as required for the application and as directed by the City. B. The surfaces of concrete exposed to view shall be smooth and free from projections or depressions. C. Exposed surfaces of concrete not poured against forms, such as horizontal or sloping surfaces, shall be screeded to a uniform surface, steel-trowelled to density the surface, and finished to a light broom finish. 3. 7 PROTECTION AND CURING OF CONCRETE The Contractor shall protect all concrete against damage. Exposed surfaces of new concrete shall be protected from the direct rays of the sun by covering them with plastic film wrap and by keeping them damp for at least 7 days after the concrete has been placed, or by using an approved curing process. Exposed surfaces shall be protected from frost by covering with tarps for at least 5 days after pouring. JULY2014 Page 6 of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.8 REPAIRS TO DAMAGED CONCRETE SURFACES Minor surface damage to hardened cast-in-place or precast concrete may be repaired, at the discretion of the City, using the specified materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the following procedures: A. Cast-in-place or precast concrete for manholes and vaults: Remove loose or deteriorated concrete to expose a fractured aggregate surface with an edge cut to a ninety degree angle to the existing surface. Clean all debris from the area, apply a 20 mil coat of epoxy bonding agent to the prepared surface, and place repair mortar while the epoxy is still wet and tacky. On horizontal surfaces, for repair depths greater than 2-inches, add aggregate to the repair mortar as recommended by the manufacturer. On vertical or overhead surfaces, for repair depths greater than 2-inches, apply the repair mortar in successive lifts, scarifying the lifts, allowing them to harden, and applying a scrub coat of the material prior to proceeding with the next lift. Cure the material as for concrete in accordance with this specification. B. General Purpose: Remove loose and deteriorated concrete by mechanical means, sandblasting, or high-pressure water blasting. Clean all debris from the area and apply non-shrink grout in a 1/4-inch minimum thickness, at the desired consistency, ranging from a dry pack, to a fluid-poured into a formed area, according to the application. Cure the material as for concrete in accordance with this specification. 3.9 EPOXY ADHESIVES FOR ANCHOR BOLT INSTALLATION Anchor bolts grouted in place with an epoxy adhesive shall be installed using the specified materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the following general procedures: Drill the hole with a rotary percussion drill to produce a rough, unpolished hole surface. the hole shall be sized to the manufacturer's recommendations and should be approximately 1/4-inch wider than the diameter of the bolt, with a depth equal to 10 to 15 times the bolt diameter. Remove debris and dust with a stiff bristle brush and clean using compressed air. Utilizing a medium-viscosity epoxy for horizontal surfaces, and a gel-type non-sag epoxy for vertical surfaces, apply the material to fill the hole to approximately half its depth. Insert the bolt, forcing it down until the required embedment depth and projection length are attained and then twist the bolt to establish a bond. Secure the bolt firmly in place in the permanent position until the epoxy sets. 3.10 PROTECTIVE EPOXY COATING Following core drilling at existing concrete structures, clean the exposed concrete surface and ends of reinforcing steel and apply two coats of protective epoxy coating for a total dry film thickness of 10-15 mils. Allow the material to cure between coats and prior to continuing the installation through the penetration. 3.11 DAMP-PROOFING FOR THE EXTERIOR OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES Following completion of the exterior surfaces of manholes and vaults, including necessary repairs and piping penetrations into the structure, apply the specified material to prepared concrete surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The surfaces to be coated shall be fully-cured and free of laitance and contamination. The material shall be applied to all exterior surfaces below a point 12-inches above the water table or indications of seepage or moisture as directed by the Engineer. Apply two 15 mil coats, curing between coats, prior to backfill and/or immersion in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. JULY2014 Page 7 of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete 3.12 THRUST AND ANCHOR BLOCKS Concrete thrust and anchor blocks shall be poured against wetted, undisturbed soil in accordance with the Standard Drawings and as directed by the City. The concrete shall be placed so that fittings and valves will be accessible for repairs or replacement. Prior to filling the pipeline with water, the concrete for thrust and anchor blocks shall cure for the following number of days: Thrust Blocks Anchor Blocks A. Safe Soil Bearing Load: i son . Muck, peat, etc.*** Soft Clay Fine Sand Decomposed Granite {D.G.) Sandy Gravel Cemented Sandy Gravel Hard Shale Granite 3 days minimum 7 days minimum Saft P•adrtfl ~~-d OPSF 500 PSF 1,000 PSF 1,500 PSF 2,000 PSF 2,000 PSF 2,500 PSF 10,000 PSF ***In muck or peat soils, competent resistance shall be achieved by removal and replacement with ballast or sufficient stability to resist the intended thrusts. Consult the ~ project geotechnical consultant. ..,.J B. Thrust Block Placement and Sizing: Thrust blocks shall be located at all unrestrained pipe fittings and bear against firm, undisturbed soil. The thrust blocks shall be centered on the fitting so that the bearing area is exactly opposite the resultant direction of the thrust, refer to the Standard Drawings. Care shall be taken to prevent the placed thrust block concrete from eliminating maintenance access to the valve operators. All thrust block excavation location, shape, and the City prior to pouring the concrete shall verify size. The size, in sq. ft., of the thrust block can be calculated by dividing the thrust by the safe bearing load. For instance, use a 12-inch pipe, 45° end, at 200 psi test pressure with a D.G. trench the value of 11, 720# of thrust can be obtained from the upper chart and 1 ,500#/sq. ft. safe bearing load from the lower chart as follows: 11 ,720# x 2/1 ,500#/Sq. ft.= 15.6 sq. ft. or 16 sq. Therefore, for this example, the trench wall adjacent to the fitting shall be excavated to the dimensions of 4 ft. x 4 ft. or 3.5 ft. x 5 ft. or some closely approximate multipliers to achieve the minimum required 16 sq. ft. bearing area. JULY2014 Page 8of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete C. Anchor Block Placement and Sizing: For all vertical bends in pipelines (downward bends) that do not have restrained joints, the fittings shall be retained in place by means of an anchor block. The block shall be sized to withstand the thrust exerted for the particular deflection angle at the required test pressure plus 10%. (Do not rely on the restraining benefit from the soil). The City shall verify the size chosen and the reinforcing steel required. The size, in cu. ft. of the anchor block can be calculated by dividing the thrust by the unit weight of concrete (i.e., one cu. ft. or concrete weighs approximately 145#). For instance, use the same 12-inch pipe, 45° bend, at 200 psi test pressure -the value of 11, 720# of thrust can be obtained from the upper chart: 11 ,720# x 2/145# = 162 cu. ft. (plus 10%) = 178 cu. ft. or 6.6 cu. yd. Therefore, for this example, the anchor block shall be 5.5' x 5.5' x 6' or 6' x 6' x 5', or some closely approximate multipliers to achieve a minimum of 178 cu. ft. of concrete. 3.13 VALVE SUPPORT BLOCKS Valve support blocks shall be installed as described below and in accordance with the Standard Drawings: A. Support blocks below valves shall be cut into the side of the trench a minimum of 12-inches. B. Support blocks shall extend up to a height of adjoining pipe and shall have a minimum depth below the valve of 12-inches. C. Support blocks shall be installed so that the valves will be accessible for repairs. END OF SECTION JULY2014 Page 9of9 SECTION 03000 Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 03480 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULT PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers precast concrete vaults and handholes to be furnished and installed as indicated and detailed on the Drawings, complete with all fittings, specials, jointing materials, and other necessary appurtenances. Trenching, excavation, backfilling, and compacting are covered in Section 02223. 1-2. GENERAL. 1-2.01. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, the precast concrete vaults shall conform to all applicable provisions of ASTM C858 and C913. Design of the vault shall be in accordance with the latest edition of AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges and ACI 318. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Submit shop drawings and product data for all precast concrete structures, together with complete data covering all materials proposed for use, in accordance with the Submittals section. The drawings and data shall ~, include, but shall not be limited to, the following: .._, Shop drawings showing precast concrete structure geometry, details of joints, details of fittings and specials, and reinforcing. Product data for materials and products. Design calculations sealed and signed by a civil or structural engineer registered in California. Manufacturer's recommendations for shipping and handling, and installation instructions. Test reports. 1-4. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING. 1-4.01. Delivery. Precast concrete structures shall not be delivered to the site until representative concrete control cylinders have attained a strength of at least 80 percent of the specified minimum 28-day strength. Minimum 28-day concrete design strength to be 5000 psi, unless otherwise acceptable by ENGINEER. 1-4.02. Handling. Precast concrete sections shall be handled carefully and shall not be bumped or dropped. Hooks shall not be permitted to come in contact with JULY 2014 1 of 5 SECTION 03480 Precast Reinforced Concrete Vaults joint surfaces. Precast sections may be provided with lifting notches on the inside faces of walls to facilitate handling. Lifting notches shall be not more than 3 inches deep; holes extending through the wall will not be acceptable. 1-5. BASIS OF DESIGN. The precast concrete structures shall conform to the design requirements of ASTM C890, AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, ACI 318. In addition, the precast concrete structures shall be designed to resist the pavement, soil weight and at-rest lateral earth pressure, HS-20 loading, and hydrostatic uplift and lateral forces, including seismic loading, per the geotechnical report without leaking or becoming buoyant with a water elevation at 6 feet below grade. The precast concrete structure manufacturer shall design the foundation to resist all applicable loads. The CONTRACTOR shall construct the foundation as required by the manufacturer. Concrete cover requirements shall be the following with no minus tolerance: Interior surfaces, minimum, inches 1-1/2 Exterior surfaces, minimum, inches 1-1/2 PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise specified, all materials used in the manufacture of precast concrete structures, fittings, and accessories shall conform to ASTM C913. Cement Fly Ash Water-Cement Ratio, max Joints Reinforcement JULY 2014 ASTM C150, Type I or II. ASTM C618, Class F only, except loss on ignition shall not exceed 4 percent. Fly ash content shall be maximum 20-25 percent by weight of the total cementitious material. 0.40. ASTM C913. ASTM C913. 2 of 5 SECTION 03480 Precast Reinforced Concrete Vaults Non-shrinking Grout Coal Tar Coating Mastic Link Seal Grace "Supreme," L&M "Crystex," Master Builders "Masterflow 713 Grout," Sauereisen Cements "F-1 00 Level Fill Grout," Five Star Products "Five Star Grout," or approved equal. Carboline "Kop-Coat Bitumastic Super-Service Black," Tnemec "46- 465 Heavy Duty HB Tnemecol," or approved equal. Ram-Nek Flexible Plastic Gasket and Primer by K. T. Snyder Company; or equal. Calpico Model CSL Linx ; or equal. 2-2. MANUFACTURE OF PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS. The vault sections shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM C913 except as modified in this section. 2-2.01. Configurations. a. Size: As shown on the Drawings. b. The vaults shall include knockouts for pipe penetrations. 2-2.02. Curing. Concrete shall be water or steam cured. Membrane curing compound will not be acceptable. 2-2.03. Marking. Each section of the vault shall be marked in accordance with ASTM C913. Identification of specials to show the location in the line shall be plainly and permanently marked thereon. 2-2.04. Testing. All testing shall conform to ASTM C913. Copies of reports covering all tests made by the testing laboratory shall be submitted for review. All tests shall be made at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. The District reserves the right to sample and test any vault section after delivery and to reject sections represented by any sample that fails to comply with the specified requirements. 2-2.05. Manufacturers. Manufacturers shall be Jensen Precast, or equal. 2-3. VAULT HATCHES. Access hatches shall be provided and installed where indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. The hatches shall be of ~. aluminum construction, with mill finish, UNO. All surfaces of aluminum which will ..._,/ be in contact with concrete or mortar when installed shall be given a heavy coat JULY 2014 3 of5 SECTION 03480 Precast Reinforced Concrete Vaults of coal tar paint, Kop-Coat "Bitumastic Super Service Black", Tnemec "46-449 Heavy Duty Black", or equal. All paint shall be dry and hard when the coated parts are shipped, assembled, or installed. The access hatches indicated shall be Bilco "Type JD" with single leaf floor doors, or equal. All hatches shall have a channel frame with a drainage coupling unless otherwise noted. The sizes shall be as indicated on the Drawings. The %-inch thick diamond pattern aluminum plate door shall be designed to withstand an H-20 wheel loading. Doors shall be provided with hinges, spring operators, and automatic hold open arm. The orientation of access doors shall be as indicated on the Drawings. A snaplock with removable handle shall be provided for each access hatch. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. The precast concrete vaults and structures shall be inspected when delivered, and may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the wall, except a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of a joint. b. Honeycombed or open texture. c. Damaged ends, where such damage could prevent making a satisfactory joint. 3-2. INSTALLATION. Precast concrete structures shall not be installed in water, nor under unsuitable weather or trench conditions. 3-2.01. Cleaning. Foreign material shall be prevented from entering the structure during installation. No debris, tools, clothing, or other materials shall be placed therein. The interior of the structures shall be thoroughly cleaned before installation and shall be kept clean until the work has been accepted. All joint contact surfaces shall be kept clean until the joint is completed. 3-2.02. Alignment. Sections shall be laid to the lines and grades indicated on the Drawings. Batter boards, laser beam equipment, or surveying instruments shall be used to maintain alignment and grade. At least one elevation measurement shall be made on each box section. 3-2.03. Jointing. All joint preparation and jointing operations shall comply with the instructions and recommendations of the precast concrete structure manufacturer. Joints with flexible joint sealant shall be coated with the recommended adhesive, and the joint sealant shall be positioned in accordance with the manufacturer's JULY 2014 4 of 5 SECTION 03480 Precast Reinforced Concrete Vaults installation instructions. Joints shall be pulled together with sufficient force to uniformly fill and seal the annular space in the joint. Joints shall not be made when adverse weather conditions may prevent proper sealing, nor when the temperature of the pipe and sealing materials is too low to achieve proper sealing. Joints shall transfer all forces calculated to resist the loads listed in the Basis of Design paragraph. 3-3. PAINTING. Perform field painting of hatches and cover plates as specified in Section 09900, "Painting and Coatings." Apply coal tar coating to the exterior surfaces of the completed structures that will be covered below grade. 3-4. PIPING AND CONDUIT PENETRATIONS AT STRUCTURES. Install joints in pipe not closer than 3 feet from structure walls. Lay pipes entering structures on compacted bedding material. Refer to Section 02223 for definition and placement of bedding and backfill. Install a link seal to close the space between the outside diameter of pipes and conduits and the inside face of the wall opening in the precast sections. 3-5. HATCHES AND COVERS. Install hatches and covers on top of structures to positively prevent all infiltration of surface or groundwater into structures. Set frames so tops of hatches and covers are flush with surface of adjoining pavement or ground surface, unless otherwise shown or directed. Drain couplings provided with hatch frame shall be piped to drain into nearest drainage site piping system. 3-6. EARTHWORK. Perform in accordance with Section 02223. Do not bury or cover the precast concrete structures and connecting piping or conduit until it has been inspected by the ENGINEER. End of Section JULY 2014 5 of5 SECTION 03480 Precast Reinforced Concrete Vaults Section 03600 GROUT PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers procurement and installation of grout. Unless otherwise specified, only nonshrink grout shall be furnished. Epoxy grouting of anchor bolts, threaded rod anchors, and reinforcing bars is covered in the anchorage in concrete section. 1-2. SUBMITI ALS. A letter of certification indicating the types of grout to be supplied and the intended use of each type shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent damage of any kind. Materials shall be protected from moisture. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Nonshrink Grout Water Precision cementitious grout with demonstrated non-shrinking properties; L&M "Crystex", Master Builders "Masterflow 713" or "Set Grout", Sauereisen "F-100 Level Fill Grout", Sonneborn "Sonogrout 10K", Hilti "CG 200 PC", or Five Star Products "Five Star Grout". Clean and free from deleterious substances. 2-2. CEMENTITIOUS GROUT. Cementitious grout shall be furnished factory premixed so that only water is added at the jobsite. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. PREPARATION. The concrete foundation to receive nonshrink grout shall be saturated with water for at least 12 hours preceding grouting unless additional time is required by the grout manufacturer. JULY2014 1 of2 SECTION 03600 Grout 3-2. INSTALLATION. 3-2.01. Mixing. Grout shall be mixed in a mechanical mixer. No more water shall be used than is necessary to produce a flowable grout. 3-2.02. Placement. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the drawings, grout under baseplates shall be 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] thick. Grout shall be placed in strict accordance with the directions of the manufacturer so that all spaces and cavities below the baseplates are completely filled without voids. Forms shall be provided where structural components of baseplates will not confine the grout. 3-2.03. Edge Finishing. In all locations where the edge of the grout will be exposed to view, the grout shall be finished smooth after it has reached its initial set. Except where shown to be finished on a slope, the edges of grout shall be cut off flush at the baseplate. 3-2.04. Curing. Nonshrink grout shall be protected against rapid loss of moisture by covering with wet cloths or polyethylene sheets. After edge finishing is completed, the grout shall be wet cured for at least 3 days and then an acceptable membrane curing compound shall be applied. End of Section JULY2014 2 of2 SECTION 03600 Grout ·.~ Section 05500 ANCHORAGE IN CONCRETE PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the procurement and installation of anchors in concrete. It includes cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods, adhesive anchors for both threaded rods and reinforcing bars, expansion anchors, and undercut anchors. 1-2. GENERAL. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings all anchors shall be cast-in-place anchor bolts or anchor rods, with forged heads or embedded nuts and washers. Unless otherwise indicated, anchors in concrete shall have a diameter of at least 3/4 inch [19 mm]. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, anchors used in the following locations and applications shall be of the indicated materials. Anchors in other locations and applications shall be as indicated on the Drawings. Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods Other interior locations Adhesive. Expansion. and Undercut Anchors Other interior locations Carbon steel. Carbon steel. Adhesive, expansion, and undercut anchors may be used instead of cast-in- place anchors only where specifically indicated or permitted on the Drawings or with the specific acceptance by Engineer. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Data, catalog cuts, and International Code Council Evaluation Service (ICC-ES) reports indicating the manufacturer and types of adhesive anchors, expansion anchors, and undercut anchors to be supplied shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. If Contractor requests use of products other than those indicated herein, calculations prepared by a registered professional engineer using methods and procedures required by the building code may be required as part of the submittal package. 1-4. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent damage or corrosion. JULY2014 1 of 5 SECTION 05500 Anchorage in Concrete Damaged materials shall be promptly replaced. Materials shall be shipped and stored in original manufacturer's packaging. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, materials shall be as indicated below. Cast-In-Place Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods Carbon steel Galvanized steel Stainless steel Flat Washers ASTM F1554, Grade 36 with compatible nuts. ASTM F1554, Grade 36 with compatible nuts; hot-dip galvanized, ASTM F2329. Bolts, ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 or 2; nuts, ASTM F594, Alloy Group 1 or 2. ANSI B18.22.1; of the same material as anchor bolts and nuts. Expansion Anchors in Concrete Products shall be single component anchors tested in accordance with ICC AC193, and shall have an ICC ES report in compliance with the applicable building code. The anchors shall be approved for use in cracked concrete, and for resisting seismic forces. Hilti "Kwik-Bolt TZ", Powers Fasteners "Power-Stud+SD2", Simpson "Strong- Bolt2". Undercut Anchors in Concrete JULY 2014 Products shall be tested in accordance with ICC AC193, and shall have an ICC ES report in compliance with the applicable building code. Hilti "HDA Undercut Anchor'', Powers Fasteners "Atomic+ Undercut Anchor'', Simpson "T orq-Cut Anchor''. 2 of5 SECTION 05500 Anchorage in Concrete Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Threaded Rods and Nuts Reinforcing Bars Reinforcing Bars, weldable Adhesive 2-2. ANCHORS. Products shall be tested in accordance with ICC AC308, and shall have an ICC ES report in compliance with the applicable building code. The anchors shall be approved for use in cracked concrete, and for resisting seismic forces. As recommended by the adhesive manufacturer; materials as indicated on the Drawings or in this specification. ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed. ASTM A706, Grade 60, deformed. Hilti "HIT-HY 200", Powers Fasteners "PE1000+", Simpson "SET-XP". 2-2.01. Cast-in-Place Anchor Bolts and Anchor Rods. Cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods shall be delivered in time to permit setting prior to the placing of structural concrete grout. Anchor sleeves shall not be used unless acceptable to Engineer. Unless installed in sleeves, anchor bolts and anchor rods shall be provided with sufficient threads to permit a nut to be installed on the concrete side of the concrete form or the supporting template. Two nuts, a jam nut, and a washer shall be furnished for cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods indicated on the Drawings to have locknuts; two nuts and a washer shall be furnished for cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods without locknuts. 2-2.02. Adhesive. Expansion. and Undercut Anchors. When adhesive, expansion, or undercut anchors are indicated on the Drawings, only acceptable systems shall be used. Acceptable systems shall include only those systems and products specified or specifically indicated by product name on the Drawings. Alternative anchoring systems may be used only when specifically accepted by Engineer. Unless otherwise required, single nuts and washers shall be furnished for adhesive anchors, expansion anchors, and undercut anchors. Adhesive anchors shall be free of coatings that would weaken the bond with the adhesive. JULY2014 3 of5 SECTION 05500 Anchorage in Concrete PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. GENERAL. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be liberally applied to projecting, threaded portions of stainless steel anchors immediately before tightening of the nuts. 3-1.01. Compliance With Manufacturer's Instructions. Post-installed anchors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed installation instructions and all applicable requirements of the ICC-ES report for the specific anchor system. If conflicts are found between the Drawings, the manufacturer's printed installation instructions, and the ICC-ES report installation requirements, Contractor shall notify Engineer for resolution. 3-1.02. Special Inspection. Special inspection requirements for cast-in-place and post-installed anchors shall be as indicated in the Structural Tests and Special Inspections section. Anchorage work shall be performed in a manner that allows the inspections to take place without adversely impacting the schedule. 3-2. CAST -IN-PLACE ANCHOR BOLTS AND ANCHOR RODS. Cast-in-place anchor bolts and anchor rods shall be carefully positioned with templates and secured in the forms prior to placing concrete. Contractor shall verify that anchorage devices are positioned in accordance with the Drawings and with applicable equipment or structure submittal drawings. Threads, bolts, and nuts spattered with concrete grout during placement shall be cleaned prior to final installation of the bolts and nuts. Sleeves shall be filled with non-shrink grout. 3-3. ADHESIVE ANCHORS. Adhesive shall be statically mixed in the field during application. All proportioning and mixing of the components shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Anchors or bars shall be installed in holes hammer drilled into hardened concrete. Drill shall be set to rotation-only mode when drilling into hollow CMU or into brick. Diameter of holes shall be 1/16 inch [1.5 mm] larger than the outside diameter of the rod or bar unless recommended otherwise by the anchor system manufacturer. Holes shall be prepared by removing all dust and debris using procedures recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Adhesive anchors and holes shall be clean, dry, and free of grease and other foreign matter at the time of installation. The adhesive shall be placed and the rods or bars shall be set in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. Care shall be taken to ensure that all spaces and cavities are filled with adhesive, without voids. JULY 2014 4 of5 SECTION 05500 Anchorage in Concrete 3-3.01. Concrete Installation. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, reinforcing bars shall be embedded to a depth that will develop the full tensile strength of the bar, and threaded rods shall be embedded to a depth that will develop the yield strength of the rod. Adhesive anchors in concrete shall be installed under the following conditions. Minimum Age of Concrete Prior to Anchor Installation Concrete Temperature Range Moisture Condition Type of Lightweight Concrete Hole Drilling and Preparation 21 days. Maximum short-term temperature 162 F [72 C], maximum long-term temperature 110 F [43 C] Dry concrete. N/A Hammer drill only. Installation of adhesive anchors into concrete that are either horizontal or upwardly inclined shall be performed only by personnel certified by the ACI/CRSI Adhesive Anchor Installation Certification Program. 3-3.02. Masonry Installation. Not used. 3-4. EXPANSION AND UNDERCUT ANCHORS. Expansion and undercut anchors shall be installed using all procedures and accessory devices recommended by the anchor manufacturer. End of Section JULY2014 5of5 SECTION 05500 Anchorage in Concrete Section 05990 STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS METALS PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the fabrication and erection of structural and miscellaneous metal items not covered in other sections. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all work shall conform to the applicable provisions of the AISC "Steel Construction Manual" (13th edition) with the exception of the "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges"; and the Aluminum Association "Specification for Aluminum Structures". Special inspection during the fabrication and erection of structural steel, if required by the local building code, is addressed in the quality control section. Both inch-pound (English) and Sl (metric) units of measurement are specified herein; the values expressed in inch-pound units shall govern. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. Complete data, fabrication drawings, and setting or erection drawings covering all structural and miscellaneous metal items shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. All bolted connections and welds shall be properly identified on the shop drawings. Welding procedures, welding procedure qualification records and welder qualifications shall be submitted. Submittals for high strength bolts, tension control bolts and load indicator washers shall include statements from the bolt and washer manufacturers certifying satisfactory compliance with the governing standards and the specified tests. 1-3. DELIVERY, STORAGE. AND HANDLING. Materials shall be handled, transported, and delivered in a manner which will prevent bends, dents, significant coating damage, or corrosion. Damaged materials shall be promptly replaced. Structural and miscellaneous metal work shall be stored on blocking so that no metal touches the ground and water cannot collect thereon. The material shall be protected against bending under its own weight or superimposed loads. Bolting materials shall be stored indoors. Weld rod shall be stored in accordance with the supplier's instructions and AWS D1.1. ':) JULY 2014 1 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals 1-4. FABRICATOR QUALIFICATION. All fabricating plants providing structural steel shall be qualified fabricators who participate in the AISC Certification program and are designated an AISC Certified Plant, Category STD. Plant certification is not required for fabrication of miscellaneous metal which does not meet the AISC definition for structural steel found in the AISC "Steel Construction Manual" (13th edition), Part 16. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL. All structural steel shall be detailed and fabricated to facilitate compliance with OSHA 29 CFR Part 1926 subpart R and all other pertinent OSHA and local safety regulations. All field connection materials shall be furnished. 2-2. MATERIALS. Steel JULY 2014 Shapes (W, WT) Shapes (S, M, HP, C) Other Shapes (angles) Plates and Bars Sheets Pipe Round Structural Tubing Square and Rectangular Structural Tubing Checkered Plate ASTM A992. ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 Grade 50. ASTMA36. ASTMA36. ASTM A1008 CS Type B or A1011 CS Type B. ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B (Fy = 35 ksi). ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 42 ksi). ASTM A500, Grade B (Fy = 46 ksi). ASTM A786, carbon steel, skid resistant pattern as standard with the manufacturer; Inland "4-way Floor Plate" or U.S. Steel "Multigrip Floor Plate". 2 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals Bolts and Nuts Bolts, High Strength Bolts, Tension Control Type (Twist off) Bolts, unfinished Nuts, Heavy-Hex Nuts, Self-Locking Washers Flat, Hardened Lock Beveled Load Indicator Threaded Rods (Including Hanger Rods for Pipe Supports) Forged Steel Clevises and Turnbuckles Forged Steel Eyebolts and Eyenuts Forged Steel Sleeve Nuts JULY 2014 ASTM A325, Type 1; tested in accordance with Article 9.2 thereof. ASTM F1852. Equivalent to ASTM A325. ASTM A307. ASTM A563, grade and finish compatible with bolts. Prevailing torque type; IFI-1 00, Grade A. ASTM F436, Type 1. ANSI/ASME B18.21.1, helical spring type. ASTM F436. ASTM F959, compressible-washer- type direct tension indicator; type compatible with bolts tested in accordance with Article 10.2 of ASTM F959. ASTM A36. Threaded rods shall have sufficient threading to permit the maximum adjustment available. Continuously threaded rod is not acceptable for rods over 12 inches [300 mm] in length. AISI C-1035. AISI C-1030, ANSI B 18.15 Type 2 shoulder pattern unless otherwise required. AISI C-1018, Grade 2. 3 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals ""~ ~ll,;i!Jtl'd ,...~ _; .......... ~ Stainless Steel Shapes Plates Pipe Tube Checkered Plate Bolts Nuts Washers Flat Lock Threaded Rods (Including Hanger Rods for Pipe Supports) Cast Iron Aluminum JULY 2014 Sheet and Plate Rolled Sections Rod and Bar (Rolled or Drawn) Extrusions ASTM A1069 or A276, Type 316L. ASTM A240, Type 316L. ASTM A312, Grade TP316L. ASTM A269, Grade TP316L. ASTM A793, Type 316L, raised pattern A. ASTM F593, Alloy Group 1 or 2, minimum yield strength of 45 ksi. ASTM F594, Alloy Group shall match that of the bolts. Nuts shall have a minimum proof stress equal to or greater than the minimum full-size tensile strength of the bolts. ANSI/ASME B18.22.1, Type 316. ANSI/ASME B18.21.1, helical spring type, Type 316. ASTM A593, Alloy Group 1 or 2, minimum yield strength of 45 ksi. ASTM A48, Class 35B or better. ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6. ASTM B308, Alloy 6061-T6. All members shall be Aluminum Association standard shapes. ASTM B211 , Alloy 6061-T6 or 2017-T4. ASTM B221, Alloy 6063-T5 or T6. 4 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals Pipe ASTM B429, Alloy 6061-T6. Rivets ASTM B316, Alloy 6061-T6. Bolts, Aluminum ASTM F468, Alloy 2024-T4. Nuts, Aluminum ASTM F467, Alloy 6061-T6. Washers, Aluminum Flat ANSI/ASME B18.22.1, Type 6061 T- 6. Lock ANSI/ASME B 18.21.1, helical spring type, Type 6061-T6. Castings ASTM B26 or B85. Checkered Plate ASTM B632, Type 6061-T6. Brass or Bronze Plate and Strip ASTM B36. ""~ l ... ~' Casting ASTM B61 or B584. Bolts and Nuts IFI-104, Grade 462 or 464. Washers Flat ANSI/ASME B18.22.1. Lock ANSI/ASME B18.21.1, helical spring type. Silicon Bronze Sheet and Plate ASTM B96, American Brass "Everdur 1010". Castings ASTM B584, American Brass "Everdur 1000". Bolts and Nuts IFI-104, Grade 655. Washers :) Flat ANSI B18.22.1. JULY2014 5 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals Lock Weld Metal (Steel Connections) Welded Headed Studs, Concrete Anchors, and Shear Connectors Deformed Bar Anchors (DBA) Rails Crane Railroad Bird Screen Body Solder Shop Coatings Universal Primer Epoxy Enamel Galvanizing ANSI/ASME B 18.21.1, helical spring type. ANSI/AWS D1.1, Table 3.1, filler metal with minimum 70 ksi [482 MPa] tensile strength unless otherwise required. ASTM A 1 08 with a minimum 50,000 psi [344 MPa] yield strength and minimum 60,000 psi [413 MPa] tensile strength. TRW/Nelson or equal. ASTM A496 with a minimum 70,000 psi [482 MPa] yield strength and minimum 80,000 psi [551 MPa] tensile strength. TRW/Nelson division or equal. ASTM A1. ASTM A1. 2 mesh [12 mm square openings], brass or copper wire cloth, min wire dia 0.063 inch [1.6 mm]. Flux-core wire, ASTM B32, Alloy Grade 208. As indicated in protective coatings section. As indicated in protective coatings section. ASTM A 123, A 153, A385, and F2329 as applicable. 2-3. FABRICATIONS. The following fabrications shall be constructed as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. JULY 2014 6 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals 2-3.01. Structural Steel Bolted Connections. Bolt holes shall have a diameter nominally 1/16 inch [1.5 mm] larger than the nominal bolt diameter. Bolt holes for one ply of vertical diagonal bracing connections may be oversized to a diameter nominally 3/16 inch [5 mm] larger than the nominal bolt diameter. 2-4. SHOP COATING. All structural and miscellaneous metal items shall be shop coated as specified herein. The requirements for field painting are covered in the protective coatings section. Contact surfaces of structural steel slip critical bolted connections shall not be shop coated. Contact surfaces of structural steel bearing type bolted connections may be shop coated. 2-4.01. Cleaning. Surfaces shall be dry and of proper temperature when coated, and shall be free of grease, oil, dirt, dust, grit, rust, loose mill scale, weld flux, slag, weld spatter, and other objectionable substances. Articles to be galvanized shall be pickled before galvanizing. All other ferrous metal surfaces shall be cleaned by solvent, high-speed power wire brushing or by blasting to the extent recommended by the paint manufacturer and as required in the protective coatings section. 2-4.02. Edge Grinding. Sharp projections of cut or sheared edges of ferrous metals which will be submerged in operation, except for items specified to be hot- dip galvanized, shall be ground to a radius as needed to ensure satisfactory paint adherence and as required in the protective coatings section. 2-4.03. Prime Painted Steel. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all ungalvanized structural and miscellaneous steel shall be given a universal prime coat in the shop after fabrication. The dry film thickness of the universal primer shall be at least 5 mils [125 J.Jm). Steel surfaces shall be prime- coated as soon as practicable after cleaning. Steel shall not be moved or handled until the shop coat is dry and hard. 2-4.04. Galvanizing. Steel materials required to be galvanized are indicated on the Drawings. All galvanizing shall be done by the hot-dip process after fabrication. An approved zinc-rich paint shall be used to touch up minor coating damage. Materials with significant coating damage shall be regalvanized or replaced. Bolts, nuts, and washers shall be galvanized when connected materials are galvanized or where indicated on the Drawings. The use of zinc-plated bolts will not be acceptable. 2-4.05. Stainless Steel. Unless otherwise specified, all items fabricated from stainless steel shall be thoroughly cleaned and degreased after fabrication. JULY 2014 7 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals Pickling or a light blast cleaning shall produce a modest etch and remove all embedded iron and heat tint. Surfaces shall be subjected to a 24 hour water test or a ferroxyl test to detect the presence of residual embedded iron and shall be retreated as needed to remove all traces of iron contamination. Surfaces shall be adequately protected during shipping and handling to prevent contact with iron or steel objects or surfaces. 2-4.06. Aluminum. All surfaces of aluminum which will be in contact with concrete, mortar, or dissimilar metals shall be given a coat of epoxy enamel. 2-4.07. Castings. Shop coating of miscellaneous iron castings will not be required. 2-4.08. Other Surfaces. Painting of zinc coated steel or bronze surfaces will not be required. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. STRUCTURAL STEEL ERECTION. Structural steel shall be erected so that individual pieces are plumb, level, and aligned within a tolerance of 1 :500. The elevations of the top of floor and roof members shall be within 1/16 inch (1.5 mm] of the elevations indicated on the Drawings. The faces of girts and other supporting members for rigid wall panels shall be in vertical planes within a maximum variation of 1/8 inch [3 mm]. All members and parts, as erected, shall be free of warps, local deformations, and unauthorized bends. All parts shall be assembled accurately as indicated on the Drawings. Light drifting will be permitted to draw parts together, but drifting to match unfair holes will not be permitted. Any enlargement of holes necessary to make connections in the field shall be done by reaming with twist drills and only with the approval of Engineer. Enlarging holes by burning will not be permitted. Baseplates shall be set level in exact position and grouted in place. All materials shall be erected in compliance with OSHA 29 CFR, Part 1926, Subpart R, and with all other applicable OSHA and local safety regulations. 3-1.01. Inspection and Testing. Special inspection will be performed in accordance with the applicable building code. The erector shall provide access as needed to facilitate all inspections and shall provide timely notification during erection when inspection milestones are approaching. 3-2. STRUCTURAL STEEL BOLTED CONNECTIONS. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, bolted connections for structural steel, as defined in the AISC manual, shall be made with ASTM A325 high strength bolts conforming JULY 2014 8 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals to the "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts" as approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections. The method of installation, pretensioning procedures, bolting equipment and tools shall likewise conform to the above referenced standard. When assembled, all joint surfaces, including those adjacent to the bolt heads, nuts, or washers, shall be free of loose mill scale, dirt, burrs, oil, and other foreign material that would prevent solid seating of the parts. Beveled washers shall be used when the bearing faces of bolted parts have a slope of 1:20 or greater with respect to a plane perpendicular to the bolt axis. Bolt length shall be increased as needed to accommodate the beveled washers. If oversized holes are provided in an outer ply, a hardened flat washer shall be installed over each hole during bolting. Load indicator washers shall not be substituted for hardened flat washers required for oversized holes. Tightening of each connection assembly shall progress systematically from the most rigid part of the joint toward the free edges until all have been sufficiently rotated or the load indicator washers on all bolts have been closed to the average gap stipulated by the load indicator washer manufacturer. Except as otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein, bolted connections shall be bearing type with threads excluded from the shear plane. Slip critical connections shall be used in diagonal bracing connections, where oversize holes or slotted holes parallel to the direction of the load are used, and where indicated on the Drawings. Bolts in all structural steel connections, both bearing and slip critical, shall be fully pretensioned in accordance with the AISC standards unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. The calibrated wrench method of pretensioning bolts will not be acceptable. Acceptable pretensioning methods are as follows: Connection Type Acceptable Pretensioning Method Bearing Turn of the nut method and load-indicator washers are acceptable. Tension control (twist-off) type bolts may be used only if approved by Engineer. Slip-Critical Load indicator washers. 3-2.01. Turn of the Nut Method. The bolt, nut, and material shall be match marked. A wax lumber marker or paint shall be used to clearly mark the assembly. 3-2.02. Load-Indicator Washers. Load indicator washers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, as supplemented herein. To facilitate proper tightening of fastener assemblies with load indicator washers, JULY 2014 9 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals a hardened flat washer shall be installed under the turned element (bolt head or nut) and between the turned element and the load indicator washer protrusions, in all cases. Whenever possible, the load indicator washer shall be installed on the head end of the bolt. If the bolt head will not be visible for inspection of the indicator washer after installation, or if the bolt head must be turned to tighten the assembly, the load indicator washer may be installed on the nut end of the bolt. 3-2.03. Tension Control (Twist-off) Bolts. Patented tension control bolts shall be of equivalent size and strength to the indicated high strength bolts, and shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Load-indicator washers are not required on tension control bolts. 3-3. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL BOLTED CONNECTIONS. Connections for miscellaneous steel fabrications not included in the AISC definition of structural steel may be made with unfinished bolts unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings all unfinished bolts shall be snug tight. 3-4. STRUCTURAL. STAINLESS. AND MISCELLANEOUS STEEL WELDING. Welding and related operations shall conform to applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 for steel and AWS D1.6 for stainless steel. All welding shall be performed in accordance with written procedures, using only those joint details which have prequalified status. All welding shall be performed by welders qualified in accordance with the American Welding Society. All welds shall be visually inspected in accordance with AWS procedures. Welds not dimensioned on the Drawings shall be sized to develop the full strength of the least strength component of the connection. Where structural or miscellaneous steel connections are welded, all butt and miter welds shall be continuous and, where exposed to view, shall be ground smooth. Intermittent welds shall have an effective length of at least 2 inches [50 mm] and shall be spaced not more than 6 inches [150 mm] apart. Surfaces to be welded and surfaces within 2 inches [50 mm] of a weld shall be free from loose or thick scale, slag, rust, moisture, grease, paint and other foreign materials that would prevent proper welding or release objectionable fumes. Only shielded metal arc, gas metal arc, flux cored arc, submerged arc, and gas tungsten arc welding are permitted. For flux cored arc welding, only E70xx one (1) or five (5) wire electrodes with supplemental gas shielding shall be permitted. Use of electroslag or electrogas welding processes or the short-circuiting transfer mode of the gas metal arc process will not be acceptable. JULY 2014 10 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals Field welded connections shall not be substituted for field bolted connections indicated on the Drawings. Deformed bar anchors, headed studs, concrete anchors and shear connectors shall be welded with an automatic stud welding gun per the manufacturer's recommendation. Hand welding will not be acceptable. 3-5. STRUCTURAL AND MISCELLANEOUS ALUMINUM. Unless otherwise noted, all work shall conform to applicable provisions of the Aluminum Association "Specification for Aluminum Structures". 3-5.01. Connections. Connections not specifically detailed on the Drawings shall develop the full strength of the least strength member of the connections. Bolted connections shall be all-bolted bearing type, equipped with a helical spring lock washer under the stationary element (bolt head or nut) and a flat washer under the turned element. All bolts shall be fully tightened. Bolts and nuts for structural aluminum connections shall be stainless steel. Bolts and nuts for nonstructural miscellaneous aluminum assemblies shall be stainless steel or aluminum. A sufficient number of bolts shall be provided in each connection to develop the shear strength of the member. Welded connections shall be made in accordance with the American Welding ~ Society D1.2, Structural Welding Code -Aluminum. All welding shall be ,..,; performed by welders qualified in accordance with American Welding Society. Welds shall be free of porosity, cracks, holes, and flux. Welded connections shall not be substituted for bolted connections without prior approval of Engineer. 3-5.02. Erection. Structural aluminum shall be erected so that individual pieces are plumb, level, and aligned within a tolerance of 1:500. The elevation of horizontal members shall be within 1/16 inch [1.5 mm] of the elevation indicated on the Drawings. Baseplates shall be set level in exact position and grouted in place. End of Section JULY2014 11 of 11 SECTION 05990 Structural And Miscellaneous Metals SECTION 09870 TAPE COATING SYSTEM WITH MORTAR SHIELD FOR THE EXTERIOR OF STEEL WATER PIPELINES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The steel pipe shall be coated with polyethylene tapes in accordance with AWWA C214. Fittings and specials shall be coated with cold-applied polyethylene tapes in accordance with AWWA C209. A reinforced cement mortar shield shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C205. Any modifications to the aforementioned standards are as stated herein. 1.2 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE The Contractor shall refer to the following specification section(s) for additional requirements: A. Painting and Coating: 09900 B. Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating: 09902 C. Cement Mortar Lined Steel Pipe: 15061 1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer to demonstrate a minimum of five years' successful application of tape coating system on similar diameter steel water pipelines as specified herein. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. List of tape coating materials indicating manufacturer, product numbers, and thickness of materials related to tape system for joints and repairs. B. Certification of test results for each batch of liquid adhesive and each tape material specified shall be in accordance with AWWA C214. C. Tape application procedure approved by tape manufacturer. 1.5 COORDINATION WITH TAPE MANUFACTURER A. The pipe manufacturer shall require the tape material manufacturer to furnish qualified factory technical representative to visit the site for technical support at the beginning of the pipe installation as may be necessary to instruct Contractor on appropriate tape application methods in the field or to resolve problems. This visit shall be coordinated to allow City Inspection and Maintenance Staff to participate in the instruction. The Contractor shall allow time for representative to give field taping instructions to his workforce. JULY 2014 1 of9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 POLYETHYLENE TAPE COATING A. Provide polyethylene tape coating in accordance with AWWA C214 with a reinforced cement mortar shield in accordance with AWWA C205 and as specified herein. Plant and field applied liquid adhesive, polyethylene tape, and plant and field applied repair tape shall be furnished by a single manufacturer. The physical properties of tape materials shall meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C214 when tested in accordance with the methods described in Section 5.3, "Coating System Tests". B. The tape coating systems consist of an exterior polyethylene tape over the bare metal surface of steel pipe with a reinforced cement mortar coating applied over the tape system. Tape coating systems are specified for: 1. Normal plant cold-applied tape 2. Plant cold-applied tape for special sections, connections and fittings, and plant repairs of cold-applied tape 3. Field joint, field coated fittings and repair of field cold-applied tape. 2.2 LIQUID ADHESIVE A. Liquid adhesive shall consist of a mixture of suitable rubber and synthetic compounds and a solvent in accordance with AWWA C214. The liquid adhesive shall be Polyken #1 039 primer or equivalent. 2.3 STORAGE PRIMER A. Storage primer on the exposed steel at the tape cutbacks shall be Polyken #924 or equivalent. 2.4 PLANT APPLIED POLYETHYLENE TAPE SYSTEM, POL YKEN, or equivalent (80 mil) A. Liquid adhesive shall be Polyken #1 039 primer. B. Anti-corrosion inner layer tape shall be Polyken #989 (20 mil), black. C. First mechanical outer layer tape shall be Polyken #955 (30 mil), gray. D. Second mechanical outer layer tape shall be Polyken #956 (30 mil), white. E. Reinforced cement mortar shield 3/4" thick. F. Weld Stripping Tape shall be Polyken #933 (25 mil), if required. JULY 2014 2 of9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 2.5 PLANT COLD-APPLIED TAPE COATINGS FOR SPECIAL SECTIONS, CONNECTIONS AND FITTINGS, AND PLANT REPAIR COLD-APPLIED POLYETHYLENE TAPE MATERIAL A. Liquid adhesive shall be Polyken #1039 primer. B. Anti-corrosion inner layer shall be Polyken #932-50 (50 mil), black. C. Mechanical layer outer tape for plant fittings and plant repair cold-applied polyethylene tape shall be Polyken #955 (30 mil), white. D. Reinforced cement mortar shield 3/4" thick. E. Weld stripping tape shall be Polyken #933 (25 mil), if required. 2.6 FIELD JOINT, FIELD COATED FITTINGS, AND FIELD REPAIR COLD-APPLIED POLYETHYLENE TAPE A. B. c. D. PART3 Primer shall be Polyken #1 029. Joint filler tape to be Polyken #939 (125 mil), black. Field joint, field fitting, and field repair outer layer tape shall be Polyken #932, (50 mil). Mechanical layer outer tape for field joint, field fittings and field repair shall be Polyken #932-50, continue inner layer with 50% overlap. EXECUTION 3.1 POLYETHYLENE TAPE COATING A. Apply polyethylene tape coating to pipe in accordance with AWWA C214. Apply polyethylene tape coating to fittings and specials in accordance with AWWA C209. Apply the reinforced cement mortar shield in accordance with AWWA C205. Any modifications to the aforementioned standards are as stated herein. B. Certificate of Compliance: Prior to shipment of pipe, furnish a certificate of compliance stating that tape materials and work furnished hereunder will comply or have complied with the requirements of these specifications and AWWA C214 and C209. 3.2 STRAIGHT RUN PIPE APPLICATION A. For straight run pipe, plant applied conditions, the polyethylene tapes shall be a four layer system consisting of: (1) liquid adhesive; (2) corrosion prevention tape (inner layer); (3) mechanical protective tape (first outer layer); (4) mechanical protective tape (second outer layer) JULY 2014 3 of9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines B. Perform the entire coating operation by experienced workers skilled in the application of polyethylene tapes and cement mortar coating under qualified supervisors. After completion of the tape system, all handling shall be by padded equipment to prevent any damage of the tape system. Testing of tape system shall be performed per 3.5 of this section. C. All equipment for blasting and application of the tape coating system shall be of such design and condition to comply with all the requirements of AWWA C214 and these specifications. Immediately repair or replace equipment that, in the opinion of the Engineer, does not produce the required results. Include equipment and a repair procedure for correcting defective tape application for use under this specification in the steel pipe fabrication plan. Make available for review a copy of this portion of the fabrication plan, and any updates, at the location of the coating operation, and a repair procedure for correcting defective tape application. D. Remove the exterior weld bead along the entire exterior surface of the pipe. The exterior weld bead shall be flush with the exterior surface of the pipe with a tolerance of plus 1/32-inch. E. Surface preparation shall conform to AWWA C214 and the following. 1. Bare pipe shall be clean of all foreign matter such as mud, mill lacquer, wax, coal tar, asphalt, oil, grease, or any contaminants. Remove welding slag or scale from all welds by wire-brushing, hammering, or other satisfactory means. Remove welding splash globules prior to priming. 2. Prior to blast cleaning, inspect surfaces and, if required, preclean in accordance with the requirements of SSPC SP-1, Solvent Cleaning, to remove oil, grease, and all foreign deposits. Remove visible oil and grease spots by solvent wiping. Use only approved solvents that do not leave any residue. Include in the manufacturer's fabrication plan the cleaning solvent applications procedure and safety precautions. F. Blast cleaning shall conform to AWWA C214 and the following. JULY 2014 1. Blast the pipe surface using a commercially available shot grit mixture to achieve a prepared surface equal to that which is specified in SSPC SP- 6, Commercial Blast Cleaning. 2. For plant mortar lined pipe, perform blast cleaning of said exterior surfaces after the initial curing of the spun mortar lining. Perform the exterior blast cleaning in such a manner as not to endanger the mortar lining in the pipe. Completely remove corrosion and foreign substances from the exterior of the pipe in the cleaning operation, and apply liquid adhesive after completion of blast cleaning. 3. Achieve from abrasive blasting an anchor pattern profile a minimum of 1.0 mil, but not exceeding 3.0 mils. Measure the anchor pattern or profile of the blasted surface using comparator tape as specified herein. 4 of 9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 4. Inspect the blast cleaned exterior pipe surface for adequate surface preparation prior to application of the liquid adhesive. Surface comparator tapes are to be used by the manufacturer in at least eight random areas, along any given 40-foot length of pipe. The results of the surface comparator tapes are to be documented on the quality control sheet for each pipe section. 5. Coat each pipe section with liquid adhesive and tape within the same day of being blast cleaned. Do not allow blasted and/or blasted and primed pipe to sit overnight. All blasted and primed pipe must be coated by the end of the day. No coating will be permitted on pipe sections showing evidence of rust. G. Liquid adhesive application shall conform to AWWA C214 and the following. 1. Prior to liquid adhesive application, clean the pipe surface free of foreign matter such as sand, grease, oil, grit, rust particles, and dirt. 2. Apply the liquid adhesive in a uniform thin film at the coverage rate recommended by the manufacturer. Meet the recommendations of the manufacturer for the state of dryness of the liquid adhesive prior to the application of the inner layer of tape. 3. Limit the application of liquid adhesive to that length of pipe which can be taped within the same workday. Pipe coated with liquid adhesive that was not taped within the same workday shall be rejected at the discretion of the Engineer. The liquid adhesive shall be removed and the surface shall be re-primed. 4. Protect liquid adhesive coated pipe sections from moisture, dirt, sand, and other potentially contaminating materials 5. Apply storage primer to the exposed steel pipe at tape cutbacks to prevent oxidation of the cleaned metal surface. Apply minimum of 1.5 mils and maximum of 2.5 mils of storage primer to exposed steel per the manufacturer's recommendations. H. Inner layer tape application: JULY 2014 1. Apply the inner layer tape directly onto the primed surface using approved mechanical dispensing equipment to assure adequate, consistent tension on the tape as recommended by the tape manufacturer. Use rollers to apply pressure on the tape as it comes in contact with the pipe. Make necessary adjustments to mechanical application equipment to assure a uniform, tight coating. Maintain a tight, smooth, mechanically induced, wrinkle-free coating throughout the application process. 5of9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 2. The application of tension shall be such that the width of tape will be reduced between 1 ~ to 2 percent of tape width prior to the pull. Provide a pressure readout gauge and chart recorder, suitable to the Engineer, with the tape let-off machine to document the tape tension during application. 3. Apply inner layer tape at a m1mmum roll temperature of 70°F. Continuously monitor the temperature of the tape within 12 inches of the point of contact with the pipe surface. Use a chart recorder, suitable to the Engineer, to document the temperature of the tape during application. Sections where the tape application tension and temperature is not maintained within manufacturer's recommendations shall be rejected and the tape removed from the entire pipe section and reapplied. 4. Continuously electronically test the inner tape layer at 6,000 volts immediately following application of the tape by a holiday tester permanently mounted to the tape application station and equipped with an indicator light and audio buzzer, suitable to the Engineer to alert the workmen of the presence of holidays in the coating system. 5. Spirally wrap the inner layer tape over longitudinally or spirally welded pipe. Provide a 1-inch minimum tape overlap. 6. Splice each new roll by overlapping the new tape over the end of the preceding roll by at least 6 inches. Perform this end lap splice by hand or by a mechanical applicator so that the splice is wrinkle free and maintains the continuity of the inner wrap coating. Maintain the wrapping angle of the new roll parallel to that of the previous roll. 7. Provide tape cutbacks based on the joint type required, cutting the tape edge parallel to the end of the pipe. Perform cutbacks using a cutting device that is guided from the end of the pipe to insure a uniform, straight cutback. I. Mechanical outer layer tape application. JULY2014 1. Apply the first mechanical outer layer of tape over the inner layer tape using the same type of mechanical equipment used in the application of the inner layer tape. No overlap splice of the other layer coinciding with the overlap splice of the inner layer will be permitted. Provide a minimum 6-inch separation between overlap of splices. Apply two mechanical outer layers of tape as specified herein. The inner layer tape shall be electrically tested, inspected, and approved prior to the application of the first mechanical outer layer tape and the first mechanical outer layer tape shall also be visually inspected and approved prior to the application of the second mechanical outer layer tape. Ensure that both mechanical outer layer tapes are smooth, tight and wrinkle-free. 6 of9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 2. Apply mechanical outer layer tapes in accordance with the requirements for the inner layer tape, except that the minimum tape roll application temperature shall be 90°F. Monitoring for tension and temperature will be required for the mechanical outer layer tapes. The use of rollers to apply pressure on the tape is not required during application of the mechanical outer layer tapes. Holiday testing of the mechanical outer layer tapes is not required during tape application. Test the complete tape system prior to coating as specified herein. J. Apply a reinforced cement mortar shield over the outer layer of tape in accordance with AWWA C205. Cement mortar shall be per Section 15061. K. Storage primer application shall conform to AWWA C214 as modified herein: 1. Prior to storage primer application, clean the pipe surface free from foreign matter such as sand, grease, oil, grit, rust particles and dirt. 2. Apply primer only to a dry pipe surface. Whenever the ambient air temperatures are cold enough to cause gelling of the primer, the use of heaters will not be permitted to return the primer back to a fully liquid state. Use new primer at a minimum of 40°F. 3. Apply storage primer to the exposed steel pipe at tape cutbacks to prevent oxidation of the cleaned metal surface. Apply minimum of 1.5 mils and maximum of 2.5 mils of storage primer to exposed steel per the manufacturer's recommendations. Do not place storage primer on the edge of the steel plate. 3.3 FITTINGS COATED AT THE PLANT A. Coat fittings that cannot be machine coated in accordance with AWWA C209 using materials as specified herein. Weld bead preparation, surface preparation, blast cleaning and liquid adhesive shall be as specified for straight run pipe. Apply an inner layer tape of Polyken #932-50 with a 1-inch minimum tape overlap on all plant coated fittings. Apply an outer layer of cold-applied polyethylene tape as specified herein with a 55 percent overlap on all plant-coated fittings. Provide a minimum thickness of 110 mils for the total tape coat system for plant-coated fittings. B. Test all completed tape coated fittings in the presence of the Engineer with an electrical flaw detector prior to the application of the cement mortar coating. Applied voltage shall be in the range of 11 ,000 to 15,000 volts. Repair any holidays found. C. Repair cement mortar coating defects in accordance with the approved repair procedures. D. Apply cement mortar coating in accordance with AWWA C205, over the tape- coated fittings after completion of tape coating, testing and inspections. JULY 2014 7 of9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 3.4 TAPE APPLICATION TO FITTINGS, SPECIALS AND PIPE JOINTS (Field) 3.5 A. Field cold applied plastic tape coating shall be in accordance with AWWA C209, as modified herein. B. Prior to welding any fieldjoints, wrap an 18-inch strip of heat resistance material over the entire coated pipe section to avoid damage to the plant applied coating by the hot weld spatter. C. Clean the pipe surface free of mud, mill lacquer, wax, tar grease, or any foreign matter. The pipe surface shall be free of any moisture and all foreign matter prior to the application of prime. D. Pack irregularities in joint with elastameric joint filler. E. Apply primer by brush or roller (4 mil wet, 1 mil dry). F. After primer has dried, apply tape to the joint and extend a minimum of 3-inch onto adjacent tape wrap. Maintain 55 percent overlap on all field joint tape to produce a minimum thickness of 100 mils. G. Apply tape with sufficient tension to conform with the surface. The finish wrap shall produce a smooth, wrinkle-free surface. H. The tape system for pipe joints is shown in Section 2.6. INSPECTION OF TAPE COATING Test the applied tape coating in the presence of the engineer with an electrical holiday detector, as a part of the tape installation process. Repair all holidays and physical damage. If mortar shield is applied at a different location than the tape coating system, a second electrical holiday spark test shall be required after all transportation and handling to the mortar coating location confirming the integrity of the tape undercoating. Upon completion of the mortar coating process a continuity or spark test will again be preformed for the tape system. Repair any holidays and physical damage and spark test, verifying repair. 3.6 MORTAR SHIELD A. Apply mortar coating in accordance with Section 15061 cement. Mortar lined and coated steel pipe and specials, over the tape coated pipe immediately upon completion of tape wrapping, testing, and inspections. JULY 2014 8 of9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines 0 3.7 PROTECTING COATED PIPE A. The CONTRACTOR shall protect all coated surfaces from damage prior to and during the pipe installation in accordance with these specifications. B. In transporting the coated pipe, it shall rest in saddles shaped to the outside diameter of the coated pipe. The saddles shall be in contact with the bottom of the pipe along an arc of at least 60 degrees. Saddles shall be completely lined with adequate padding. No nails or any other fasteners that may damage the coating will be allowed in the installation of the padding of the saddles. C. While laying tape coated steel pipe, the pipe shall not be rolled or skidded when it is in contact with the ground at any point. Immediately before the coated pipe is lowered into the trench the CONTRACTOR shall provide a visual and holiday inspection of the coating on the entire pipe coating system. Coated pipe shall be lowered into the trench using saddled, not choked, belt slings. The use of chains, hooks, or other equipment which might damage the pipe coating will not be permitted. All other pipe handling equipment and methods shall be approved by the ENGINEER. Pipe stored alongside of the trench shall be supported on padded skids, sand bags, or rock-free sand berms. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 9of9 SECTION 09870 Tape Coating System with Mortar Shield for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines SECTION 09900 PAINTING AND COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section described the requirements for the preparation of surfaces and subsequent application of protective coatings. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment required for satisfactory completion of all items contained herein. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary safety equipment and protective clothing, as well as be responsible for proper instruction and supervision of their use. Requirements for steel storage reservoirs are specified elsewhere in the Specifications. 1.2 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE The Contractor shall refer to the following Specification section(s) for additional requirements: A. General Piping System & Appurtenances: 15000 1.3 SUBMITTALS Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with the requirements of the Submittals section and the GENERAL PROVISIONS. The following submittals are required: A. Submit a chart of the manufacturer's available colors for color selection well in advance ,J of painting operation. B. Submit manufacturer's data sheets showing the following information: JULY2014 1. Recommended surface preparation. 2. Minimum and maximum recommended dry-film thicknesses per coat for prime, intermediate, and finish coats. 3. Percent solids by volume. 4. Recommended thinners. 5. Statement verifying that the selected prime coat is recommended by the manufacturer for use with the selected intermediate and finish coats. 6. Application instructions including recommended application, equipment, humidity, and temperature limitations. 7. Curing requirements and instructions. 8. When the proposed products will be in contact with treated water in potable water treatment facilities, Contractor shall submit certifications that the proposed systems are in compliance with ANSI/NSF 61. 1 of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating C. Submit certification that all coatings conform to applicable local Air Quality Management City rules and regulations for products and application. 1.4 PAYMENT Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL All materials shall be those of current manufacture and shall meet all applicable regulations for the application and intended service. All coats of any particular coating system shall be of the same manufacturer and shall be approved by the manufacturer for the intended service. In the event that a product specified herein is no longer manufactured or does not meet current regulations, the Contractor shall provide a substitute, currently manufactured product of at least equal performance which meets all applicable regulations subject to Engineer's approval, at no additional cost. All materials shall be delivered to the Project Site in their original, unopened containers bearing the manufacturer's name, brand, and batch number. Standard products of manufacturers other than those specified will be accepted when it is proved to the satisfaction of the Engineer they are equal in composition, durability, usefulness and convenience for the purpose intended. Paint listed in the system refers to products of the following manufacturers and distributors: Ameron Corrosion Control Division, Brea, CA I.C. Devoe, Louisville, KY Engard Coating Corporation, Long Beach, CA I. DuPont de Nemours & Company, Los Angeles, CA Tnemec Company, Inc., Kansas City, MO 64141 All surfaces to be coated or painted shall be in the proper condition to receive the material specified before any coating or painting is done. No more sandblasting or surface preparation than can be coated or painted in a normal working day will be permitted. All sharp edges, burrs, and weld spatter shall be removed. All concrete and masonry surfaces shall cure 30 days prior to coating or painting. Surface preparation, prime coatings, and finish coats for the various systems are specified herein. Unless otherwise noted, all intermediate and finish coats shall be of contrasting colors. It is the intent that the coating alternates specified herein serve as a general guide for the type of coating desired. 2.2 VALVES A. Exterior Coating: Coat metal valves located above ground, in vaults or in structures the same as the adjacent piping. If the adjacent piping is not coated, then coat valves per this Specification section unless otherwise noted. Apply the specified prime coat at the place of manufacture. Apply intermediate and finish coats in the field. Finish coat shall JULY 2014 2 of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating match the color of the adjacent piping. Coat handwheels and floor stands the same as the valves. Coat the exterior of buried metal valves at the place of manufacture per this specification. B. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Prime coat shall be BarRust 231 or Devran 200 applied at 2 to 3 mils dry-film thickness. Intermediate coat shall be Devran 224H Epoxy applied at 2 to 4 mils dry-film thickness. Finish coat shall be 379 Urethane applied at 2 to 3 mils dry-film thickness. C. Interior Lining: Valves 4-inches and larger shall be coated on their interior metal surfaces excluding seating areas and bronze and stainless-steel pieces. Sandblast surfaces in accordance with SSPC-SP-10 (near white blast cleaning). Remove all protuberances which may produce pinholes in the lining. Round all sharp edges to be coated. Remove any contaminants which may prevent bonding of the lining. Coat the interior ferrous surfaces using one of the following methods: 1. Apply powdered thermosetting epoxy per the manufacturer's application recommendations to a thickness of 10 to 12 mils. 2. Apply two coats of polyamide epoxy to a dry-film thickness of 10 to 12 mils total. Follow the manufacturer's application recommendations including minimum and maximum drying time between the required coats. 3. Apply two coats of Tnemec Series 140 (for potable water) or Series 69 (for non- potable water), or equal, to a dry film thickness of 10 to 12 mils total. Follow manufacturer's application recommendations including minimum and maximum drying time between required coats. 4. Apply two coats of Devoe Bar-Rust 233H Epoxy applied to a dry-film thickness of 6 to 8 mils, each. Total dry-film thickness shall be 10 to 12 mils minimum. All epoxy lining shall be applied at the factory by the manufacturer of the valve, and shall meet current Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) content regulations. Epoxy lining for potable water valves shall also be listed by National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) for contact with potable water. Test the valve interior linings at the factory with a low-voltage holiday detector. The lining shall be holiday free. 2.3 METAL, INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR, NORMAL EXPOSURE A. General: The Contractor shall paint all exposed steelwork, non-galvanized handrails, exposed pipework, fittings, all mechanical equipment, pumps, motors, doors, door frames and window sash with this coating system. All metalwork previously given a shop prime coat approved by the Owner's Representative shall be touched up as required in the field with Tnemec Series 4 Versare Primer or equal. B. Surface Preparation: All exterior metal surfaces which are to be painted shall be commercial blast cleaned per Specification SP-6 (commercial blast cleaning) except as otherwise specified, in locations where sandblasting would damage previously coated surfaces and installed equipment, and in locations where dry sandblasting is prohibited. The above locations in which SP-6 commercial sandblasting is not possible shall be JULY2014 given a SP-3 power tool cleaning. This sandblasting shall be done not more than 8 hours ahead of the painting, subject to humidity and weather conditions between the time of sandblasting and painting operations. If any rusting or discoloration of 3of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating sandblasted surfaces occurs before painting, such rusting or discoloration shall be removed by additional sandblasting. Sandblasted surfaces shall not be left overnight before painting. C. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): Prime coat or spot prime coat as required shall be Tnemec Series 4 Versare primer applied to a dry-film thickness of 2 to 3.5 mils. Two or more finish coats of Tnemec Series 2H Tneme-Gioss enamel shall be applied to a thickness of 1.5 to 3.5 mils. Total dry-film thickness of the complete system shall be 7 mils, minimum. D. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Prime coat or spot prime as required shall be 4140 Q.D. Alkyd Primer. Two or more finish coats of Devshield 4328 Alkyd applied to a dry-film thickness of 1.5 to 2 mils, each. Total dry-film thickness of the complete system shall be 5 mils, minimum. 2.4 METAL, SUBMERGED OR INTERMITTENTLY SUBMERGED A. General: All submerged metalwork, gates, equipment, valves, exposed pipework and all other metalwork within areas which will be submerged, except as noted hereinafter, shall be painted with this coating system. B. Surface Preparation: All metal surfaces shall be field sandblasted according to SSPC- SP-10 (near white blast cleaning). C. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): Prime coat shall be Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline II applied to a dry-film thickness of 4 to 6 mils. Two finish coats of Tnemec Series 69 Epoxoline II shall be applied to a dry-film thickness of 4 to 6 mils each coat. Total try- film thickness of the complete system shall be a minimum of 12 mils. D. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Apply two coats of Bar-Rust 233H Epoxy applied to a dry- film thickness of 6 to 8 mils each coat. Total dry-film thickness of the complete system shall be a minimum of 12 mils. 2.5 METAL, SEVERE EXPOSURE TO MOISTURE OR CHEMICAL FUMES A. Surface Preparation: All metal surfaces shall be field sandblasted according to SSPC- SP-10 (near white blast cleaning). B. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): Prime coat shall be Tnemec Series 104 H.S. Epoxy to a dry-film thickness of 6 to 10 mils. One or more finish coats of Tnemec Series 104 H.S. Epoxy topcoat shall be applied. Total dry-film thickness shall be a minimum of 12 mils. C. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Prime coat shall be Catha-Coat 304V Zinc, 2 to 3 mils dry- film thickness. Intermediate coat shall be Devran 224H Epoxy applied at 4 to 6 mils dry- film thickness. Finish coat shall be Devthane 379 Urethane applied at 2 to 3 mils dry- film thickness. Total dry-film thickness shall be 8 mils minimum. 2.6 METAL, HIGH-TEMPERATURE EXPOSURE A. General: Engine mufflers, exhaust systems and other metal surfaces subjected to high temperatures shall be coated with this system. JULY 2014 4 of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating B. Surface Preparation: Surface shall be field sandblasted in accordance with SSPC-SP- 10 (near white blast cleaning). C. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): One coat of Tnemec Series 90-96 Tneme-Zinc to a minimum total dry-film thickness of 2 to 3.5 mils. D. Coating (Devoe Alternate): One coat of Catha-Coat 304V Zinc to a dry-film thickness of 2 to 4 mils. 2.7 METAL, GALVANIZED, ALUMINUM, COPPER, OR BRASS A. Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be solvent cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP-1 (solvent cleaning) and SSPC-SP-2 (hand tool cleaning). B. Coating: Pre-treatment prime coat shall be Tnemec Series 32-1215 Tneme-Grip or Sinclair 7113 Wash Primer applied at iJ mil dry-film thickness. Next, apply recommended coating or paint for the particular surface to be coated. C. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Pre-treatment prime coat shall be Devoe BarRust 231 primer applied at 3 mil dry-film thickness. Next, apply recommended coating or paint for the particular surface to be coated. 2.8 METAL, BURIED A. General: The Contractor shall coat all buried metal which includes valves, bolts, nuts, structural steel and fittings. It does not include steel storage reservoirs. B. Surface Preparation: Sandblast to SSPC-SP-6 (commercial blast cleaning) C. Coating (Tnemec Alternate): Prime none. Finish with two coats of Tnemec Series 46- 465 H.B. Tnemecol or equal at 10 to 12 mils dry-film thickness, each. Total dry-film thickness shall be 20 mils minimum. D. Coating (Devoe Alternate): Prime with Devtar 221 (5A) Epoxy applied at 8 mil dry-film thickness. Two coats of Devtar (5A) Epoxy applied at 8 mils dry-film thickness, each. Total dry-film thickness shall be 24 mils, minimum. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall arrange with the Owner's Representative so that all surface preparation may be inspected and approved prior to the application of any coatings. The Contractor is hereby notified that the Engineer will inspect the Work prior to the expiration of the warranty period and all defects in workmanship and material shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his own expense. JULY 2014 5of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating 3.2 WORKMANSHIP It is the intent of the Specifications that finishes shall be provided which meet standards for best grades of painting. Drop cloths shall be placed where required to protect floors, surfaces and equipment from spatter and dropping, not to receive paint or coatings. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect all adjacent Work and all surrounding property and improvements from any damage whatsoever as a result of the painting and coating operation. Only good, clean brushes and equipment shall be used and all brushes, buckets, and spraying equipment shall be cleaned immediately at the end of each painting period. Each coat of paint shall be of the consistency as supplied by the manufacturer, or thinned, if necessary, and applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Each coat shall be well brushed, rolled or sprayed to obtain a uniform and evenly applied finish. Work shall be free from "runs", "bridges", "shiners", or other imperfections due to faulty intervals. Particular care shall be taken to obtain a uniform unbroken coating over all bolts, threads, nuts, welds, edges and corners. Paint shall not be applied in extreme heat, in dust or smoke laden air, or in damp or humid weather, unless written permission of the Engineer is obtained. If paint is applied by spray, the air pressure used shall be within the ranges recommended by both the paint and spray equipment manufacturers. Spray painting shall be conducted under controlled conditions and the Contractor shall be fully responsible for any damage occurring from spray painting. Care shall be exercised not to damage adjacent Work during sandblasting operations. Stainless steel need not be sandblasted. Blasted surfaces shall not be left overnight before coating. All dust shall be removed from the surface following sandblasting. 3.3 APPLICATION PROCEDURES A. Surfaces to be Coated: All surfaces of materials furnished and constructed are to be painted or coated per the Specifications except as indicated below. B. Surfaces Not To Be Coated: The following surfaces shall not be coated unless otherwise noted on the Plans and shall be fully protected when adjacent areas are painted. Aluminum grating Aluminum surfaces Bearings Brass and copper tubing, submerged* Buried pipe Couplings Grease fittings Hardware Lighting fixtures Machined surfaces Metal letters Mortar-coated pipe and fittings Nameplates on machinery Pipe interior* Shafts Stainless steel Switch plates * unless specifically required on the Plans or elsewhere in the Specifications C. Protection of Surfaces Not To Be Coated: Surfaces not intended to be painted shall be removed, masked, or otherwise protected. Drop cloths shall be provided to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent surfaces. Working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be protected from damage during surface preparation and painting process. Openings in motors shall be safely masked to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors. All masking materials shall be completely removed and surfaces cleaned at completion of painting operations. JULY 2014 6of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating D. Weather Conditions: Paint shall not be applied in the rain, wind, snow, mist, and fog or when steel or metal surface temperatures are less than 5°F above the dew point. Paint shall not be applied when the relative humidity is above 80%, the air temperature is above gooF, or the temperature of metal to be painted is above 125°F. Alkyd, chlorinated rubber, inorganic zinc, silicone aluminum, or silicone acrylic paints shall not be applied if air or surface temperature is below 50°F or expected to be below 50°F within 24 hours. Epoxy, coal tar epoxy, acrylic latex, and polyurethane paints shall not be applied on an exterior or interior surface if air or surface temperature is below 50°F or expected to drop below 50°F within 24 hours. 3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: Sandblast or prepare only as much surface area as can be coated in one day. All sharp edges, burrs, and weld spatter shall be removed. Epoxy-coated pipe that has been factory coated shall not be sandblasted. B. SSPC Specifications: Wherever the words "solvent cleaning", "hand tool cleaning", "wire brushing", or "blast cleaning" or similar words are used in the Specifications or in paint manufacturer's specifications, they shall be understood to refer to the applicable SSPC (Steel Structures Paint Council, Surfaces Preparation Specifications, ANSI A 159.1) Specifications listed below: SP-1 SP-2 SP-3 SP-5 Solvent Cleaning Hand Tool Cleaning Power Tool Cleaning White Metal Blast Cleaning SP-6 Commercial Blast Cleaning SP-7 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning SP-8 Pickling SP-10 Near White Blast Cleaning Oil and grease shall be removed from aluminum and copper surfaces in accordance with SSPC SP-1 using clean cloths and cleaning solvents. Weld spatter and weld slag shall be removed from metal surfaces. Rough welds, beads, peaked corners, and sharp edges including erection lugs shall be ground smoothly in accordance with SSPC SP-2 and SSPC SP-3. Welds shall be neutralized with a chemical solvent that is compatible with the specified coating materials using clean cloths and chemical solvent. C. Abrasive Blast Cleaning: Dry abrasive blast cleaning shall be used for metal surfaces. JULY 2014 Do not recycle or reuse contaminated blast particles. Dry clean surfaces to be coated by dusting, sweeping, and vacuuming to remove residue from blasting. Apply the specified primer or touch-up coating within the period of an 8-hour working day. Do not apply coating over damp or moist surfaces. Reclean prior to application of primer or touch-up coating any blast cleaned surface not coated within said 8-hour period. Prevent damage to adjacent coatings during blast cleaning. Schedule blast cleaning and coating such that dust, dirt, blast particles, old coatings, rust, mill scale, etc., will not damage or fall upon wet or newly coated surfaces. 7of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR THE APPLICATION OF COATINGS The recommendations of the coating manufacturer shall be followed, including the selection of spray equipment, brushes, rollers, cleaners, thinners, mixing, drying time, temperature and humidity of application, and safety precautions. Coating materials shall be kept at a uniform consistency during application. Each coating shall be applied evenly, free of brush marks, sags, runs, and other evidence of poor workmanship. A different shade or tint shall be used on succeeding coating applications to indicate coverage where possible. Finished surfaces shall be free from defects or blemishes. Only thinners recommended by the coating manufacturer shall be used. If thinning is allowed, do not exceed the maximum allowable amount of thinner per gallon of coating material. Apply a brush coat of primer on welds, sharp edges, nuts, bolts, and irregular surfaces prior to the application of the primer and finish coat. The brush coat shall be done prior to and in conjunction with the spray coat application. Apply the spray coat over the brush coat. Apply primer immediately after blast cleaning and before any surface rusting occurs, or any dust, dirt, or any foreign matter has accumulated. Reclean surfaces by blast cleaning that have surface colored or become moist prior to coating application. A. Paint Mixing: Multiple-component coatings shall be prepared using all the contents of each component container as packaged by the paint manufacturer. Partial batches shall not be used. Multiple-component coatings that have been mixed beyond their pot life shall not be used. Small quantity kits for touch-up painting and for painting other small areas shall be provided. Only the components specified and furnished by the paint manufacturer shall be mixed. For reasons of color or otherwise, additional components shall not be intermixed, even within the same generic type of coating. B. Field Touch Up of Shop-Applied Prime Coats: Organic Zinc Primer: Surfaces that are shop primed with inorganic zinc primers shall receive a field touch up of organic zinc primer to cover all scratches or abraded areas. Organic zinc coating system shall have a minimum volume solids of 54% and a minimum zinc content of 14 pounds per gallon. Coating shall be of the converted epoxy, epoxy phenolic, or urethane type and shall be manufactured by the prime coat and finish coat manufacturer. Other Primers: Surfaces that are shop primed with other than organic zinc primer shall receive a field touch up of the same primer used in the original prime coat. 3.6 DRY-FILM THICKNESS TESTING AND REPAIR A. Special Instructions to the Contractor: The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner at no charge for use during execution of the Work, necessary dry-film thickness gauge and electrical flaw detection equipment. The Contractor shall perfonn the holiday (pinholes) inspection in the presence of the Owner's Representative, and the Contractor shall monitor wet film measurements throughout the application of each coat of coating. JULY 2014 8of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating B. Coating Thickness Testing: Coating thickness specified for steel surfaces shall be measured with a magnetic-type dry-film thickness gauge. Dry-film thickness gauge shall be provided as manufactured by Mikrotest or Elcometer. Each coat shall be checked for the correct dry-film thickness. Measurement shall not be made until a minimum of eight hours after application of the coating. Non-magnetic surfaces shall be checked for coating thickness by micrometer measurement of cut and removed coupons. Contractor shall repair coating at all locations where coupons are removed. C. Holiday Testing: The finish coat (except zinc primer and galvanizing) shall be tested by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer for holidays and discontinuities with an electrical holiday detector of the low-voltage, wet-sponge type. Detector shall be provided as manufactured by Tinker, Rasor, K-D Bird Dog, or approved equal. D. Repair: If the item has an improper finish, color, insufficient film thickness, or holidays, the surface shall be cleaned and top-coated with the specified paint material to obtain the specified color and coverage. Visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint shall be hand or power-sanded, feathering the edges. The areas shall then be primed and finish coated in accordance with the Specifications. Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections. 3.7 CLEANUP Upon completion of all painting and coating Work, the Contractor shall remove all surplus materials and rubbish. The Contractor shall repair all damage and shall leave the premises in a clean and orderly condition. END OF SECTION JULY2014 9of9 SECTION 09900 Painting and Coating SECTION 09902 PETROLATUM WAX TAPE COATING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This section covers the work necessary to furnish and install petrolatum wax tape coating on buried ferrous materials including pipe flanges, bolted fittings and couplings, valves and other buried pipeline appurtenances, complete, as shown or specified. 1.2 SUBMITTALS DURING CONSTRUCTION Submit manufacturer's technical product data, details, installation instructions and general product recommendations. 1.3 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION The use of a manufacturer's name and model or catalog number is for the purpose of establishing the standard of quality and general configuration desired only. Products of other manufacturers will be considered in accordance with the Contract Documents. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL Wrap all exposed surfaces of buried ferrous pipe, flanges, couplings and other pipeline appurtenances (including bolts, nuts, etc.) with petrolatum wax tape, unless another corrosion protection system (other than a factory-installed paint coating) is otherwise specified or indicated by the Contract Drawings. Exposed piping shall be wrapped only where specifically called out on the Drawings. Ductile iron pipe encased with polyethylene sheathing shall not be wrapped with this product. 2.2 PRIMER Exposed surfaces shall be prime coated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizer, and corrosion inhibitor having a paste-like consistency. The material shall have the following properties: Pour Point Flash Point Approximate Coverage Color 400-100° F 350° F minimum 1 gal/1 00 square feet Brown The primer shall be Trenton Wax-Tape Primer or equivalent. JULY 2014 1 of2 SECTION 09902 Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating 2.3 WAXTAPE Two types of petrolatum wax tape shall be available from the manufacturer: one type for buried installations and another type for above-ground installations. Buried Installations: The covering material shall be a plastic-fiber felt tape, saturated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors that is easily formable over irregular surfaces. The tape shall have the following properties: Color: Saturant Pour Point Thickness Dielectric Strength Tape Width Brown 115°-125°F 70-90 mils 170 volts/mil 6inches Wax tape shall be Wax-Tape #1 as manufactured by The Trenton Corporation (Ann Arbor, Michigan), or approved equal. 2.4 OUTER COVERING The primed and wax-tape wrapped surface shall be wrapped with a plastic tape covering consisting of three (3) layers of 50 gauge, clear, polyvinylidene chloride, high cling membranes wound together as a single sheet. The material shall have the following properties: Width Thickness Dielectric Strength Water Absorption Color 6inches 1.5 mils 2000 volts/mil Negligible Clear The outer covering shall be Trenton Poly-Ply or approved equal. 2.5 OTHER PETROLATUM WAX TAPE SYSTEM COMPONENTS Any components not listed above, but required for a complete petrolatum wax tape coating system as recommended for this application by the manufacturer shall be provided at no additional cost to Owner. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL The petrolatum wax tape system shall be installed in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 2 of2 SECTION 09902 Petrolatum Wax Tape Coating Section 11185 SUBMERSIBLE SUMP AND SEWAGE PUMPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of medium duty single-stage, submersible, end suction centrifugal pumping units and controls for clear water (sump) service as specified and as indicated on the Drawings. Each pump shall be pedestal-mounted. Piping, pipe supports, and accessories which are not an integral part of the equipment or are not specified herein are covered in other sections. Each pumping unit shall be complete with a close-coupled, submersible electric motor; controls; and all other appurtenances specified or otherwise required for proper operation. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Hydraulic considerations and definition of terms shall be as set forth in the Hydraulic Institute Standards. 1-2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall verify that each component of the system is compatible with all other parts of the system; that all piping, materials, pumps, and motor sizes are appropriate; and that all devices necessary for a properly functioning system have been provided. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the products of one manufacturer. Where several manufacturers' names have been listed in this section as possible suppliers, only the products of the first manufacturer listed have been checked for size, functions, and features. 1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. JULY 2014 1 of 6 SECTION 11185 Submersible Sump And Sewage Pumps 1-2.04. Power Supply. Power supply to equipment will be as indicated on the drawings. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete fabrication and assembly drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: Pumps Name of manufacturer. Type and model. Rotative speed. Size and type of pump discharge connection. Net weight of pump and motor only. Complete performance curves showing capacity versus head, bhp [brake kW], NPSH required, and efficiency. Seal type and manufacturer. Data on shop painting. Motors Name of manufacturer. Type and model. Type of bearings and method of lubrication. Rated size of motor, hp [kW]. Full load current. Locked rotor current. Control and Components Name of manufacturer. Type and model. Pump control sequence. Liquid level sensors with mounting details and cable lengths, and sump controls. Wiring diagrams. Power and control cable type and size. Seismic Design Requirements Confirmation of compliance with the requirements of the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. Complete drawings, details, and specifications covering the valves and their appurtenances shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. 1-3.02. Operations and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied as required in the Submittals JULY 2014 2 of6 SECTION 11185 Submersible Sump And Sewage Pumps section. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. 1-4. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING. Shipping, handling and storage shall be in accordance with the General Provisions paragraph 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, sump pumps shall be suitable for pumping clear water with minimal solids. The maximum pumped liquid temperature shall be 85°F [29°C]. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Pumping units shall be designed for the operating conditions and requirements indicated on the drawings. Pump performance shall be stable and free from cavitation and noise throughout the specified operating head range at minimum suction submergences. Minimum pump hydrostatic test pressure shall be 1.5 times the pump shutoff head. 2-3. MATERIALS. Stator Housing and Pump Casing Impeller All Wetted Assembly Fasteners Mechanical Seals Pedestal Base Pipe Protective Coatings Tape Wrap Primer JULY 2014 Cast iron Nylon Stainless steel. Carbon/Ceramic Polypropylene ANSI/AWWA C209, except single ply tape thickness shall not be less than 30 mils [760 !Jm]; Protecto Wrap "200" or T apecoat "CT". As recommended by the tape manufacturer. 3 of6 SECTION 11185 Submersible Sump And Sewage Pumps 2-4. PUMP CONSTRUCTION. Sump pumps are to be Little Giant "Model 6- CIA". 2-5. FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE. 2-6. MOTORS. 2-6.01. Motors. Motors supplied with sump pump units shall be permanently lubricated, single-phase 115 volt motor, 2-7. CHECK VALVES. Valves shall be furnished with all necessary parts and accessories indicated on the Drawings, specified, otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation and shall be the latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of valves. Check Valve Rating 150 psig [1 MPa] nonshock Type Swing check Sump Body PVC or CPVC, material shall Discharge match pipe material Trim Socket Disc PVC or CPVC, material shall ends match pipe material Seat Viton or EPDM 3 inch [75 mm] Seal Viton or EPDM and smaller End Connection Compression PVC orCPVC Temp. Limitations 0 to 140°F [-18 to 60°C] pipe Manufacturers Spears Sump Pump Swing Check Valve or equal 2-8. PVC PIPE MATERIALS. PVC pipe materials and services shall be as specified herein. Material Classification PVC. PVC -Schedule 80 PVC Pipe with Pipe Solvent Welded Joints. Sump pump discharge (water). Fittings JULY2014 4of6 ASTM D1785, Cell Classification 12454, bearing NSF seal, Schedule 80. ASTM 02467, Cell Classification 12454, bearing NSF seal. Flanges or unions shall be provided where needed to facilitate SECTION 11185 Submersible Sump And Sewage Pumps ~ .... ...~ PART 3 -EXECUTION disassembly of equipment or valves. Flanges or unions shall be joined to the pipe by a solvent weld. When acceptable to Engineer, threaded joints may be used instead of solvent welded joints in exposed interior locations for the purpose of facilitating assembly. The use of threaded joints in this system shall be held to a minimum. 3-1. INSTALLATION. Equipment and materials furnished under this section shall be installed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Pumping units shall be leveled, plumbed and aligned to fit connecting piping. Installation procedures shall be as recommended by the pump manufacturer and the Hydraulic Institute Standards. Special care shall be taken to ensure that piping stresses are not transmitted to the pump connections. All valves and accessories shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not be used unless it is repaired and re-cleaned to the original requirements. Valves shall be installed with sufficient clearance for proper operation of any external mechanisms, and with sufficient clearance to dismantle the valve for in-place maintenance. Installation shall be in accordance with the valve manufacturer's recommendations. 3-2. PROTECTIVE COATING. Steel pipe in buried locations and used for HVAC/plumbing applications will have exterior surfaces protected with a field applied tape wrap. The exterior surfaces of all fittings, couplings, specials, and other portions of buried piping not protected with plastic coating shall be tape-wrapped in the field. JULY 2014 5 of6 SECTION 11185 Submersible Sump And Sewage Pumps All surfaces to be tape-wrapped shall be thoroughly cleaned and primed in accordance with the tape manufacturer's recommendations immediately before wrapping. The tape shall be applied by two-ply (half-lap) wrapping or as needed to provide a total installed tape thickness of at least 60 mils [1.5 mm]. Joints in plastic-coated pipe shall be cleaned, primed, and tape-wrapped after installation. 3-3. INSTALLATION CHECK. An installation check by an authorized representative of the manufacturer is not required. 3-4. STARTUP AND TESTING. Startup requirements and field performance testing shall be as indicated in the Startup Requirements section. End of Section JULY 2014 6 of6 SECTION 11185 Submersible Sump And Sewage Pumps Section 13500 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of instrumentation and control system components for the pressure reducing station. The system shall be furnished as specified, complete with all software, input/output hardware, instrumentation, and all devices, accessories, appurtenances, testing, and training necessary for proper operation. The Contractor is responsible for providing, fabricating, and installing the Remote Telemetry Unit (RTU). Refer to the drawings for RTU equipment model numbers and modules. The Owner will be responsible for configuring and programming the RTU. The Contractor is responsible for providing and installing all radio hardware, with the exception of the mounting pole which will be provided by the Owner. Refer to drawings for radio make and model to be provided by the Contractor. The location for the antenna base is indicated on the drawings but is subject to final approval by the inspector. Owner will be responsible for configuring and testing the radio communications after the hardware is installed by the Contractor. 1-1.02. Associated Sections. This section also includes the equipment and services specified in the following section: SECTION 13570 PANELS, CONSOLES, AND APPURTENANCES 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. General Eauioment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. JULY 2014 1 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System 1-2.02. Drawings. The Drawings indicate locations and arrangements of equipment and may include installation details and block and one-line diagrams showing connections and interfaces with other equipment. The inpuUoutput (110) lists are attached as an appendix to this section. Principal components of the instrumentation systems shall be as indicated on the P&ID drawings and instrument device schedule attached to this section. 1-2.03. Codes. Permits and Agency Approvals. All work performed and all materials used shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code, and with applicable local regulations and ordinances. Where mandated by codes, panels, assemblies, materials, and equipment shall be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories. Contractor shall, as part of their work, arrange for and obtain all necessary permits, inspections, and approvals by the authorities having local jurisdiction of such work. This shall include any third-party inspections and testing of panels and equipment. 1-2.04. Supplier's Qualifications. Equipment and software furnished under this section and under other related sections listed in the Scope paragraph above shall be designed, coordinated, and supplied by a single manufacturer or supplier, hereinafter referred to as the System Supplier. The System Supplier shall be regularly engaged in the business of supplying computer-based monitoring, control, and data acquisition systems. The Contractor shall utilize the services of the System Supplier to coordinate all control system related items, to check-out and calibrate instruments, and to perform all testing, training, and startup activities specified to be provided. The System Supplier shall have the following minimum qualifications: • The supplier shall maintain a design office staffed with qualified technical design personnel. • The supplier shall maintain competent and experienced service personnel to service the hardware and software furnished for this project. • The supplier shall have as a minimum 5 years of experience in the design, coordination and supply of computer-based monitoring, control, and data acquisition systems. 1-2.05. Coordination. Systems supplied under this section shall be designed and coordinated by System Supplier for proper operation with related equipment and materials furnished by other suppliers under other sections of these specifications, under other contracts, and, where applicable, with related existing equipment. All equipment shall be designed and installed in full conformity with the Drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer, and the manufacturer of the related equipment. JULY 2014 2 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System 1-2.06. Related Equipment and Materials. Related equipment and materials may include, but will not be limited to, instrumentation, motor controllers, valve actuators, chemical feeders, analytical measuring devices, conduit, cable, and piping as described in other sections or furnished under other contracts. 1-2.07. Device Tag Numbering System. All devices shall be provided with permanent identification tags. The tag numbers shall agree with System Supplier's equipment drawings and shall be as close as practical to the tag numbers used on the Drawings and device schedules. All field-mounted transmitters and devices shall have stamped stainless steel identification tags. Panel, subpanel, and rack-mounted devices shall have laminated phenolic identification tags securely fastened to the device. Hand-lettered or tape labels will not be acceptable. 1-3. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. The drawings and specifications indicate the extent and general arrangement of the systems. If any departures from the Drawings or Specifications are deemed necessary by System Supplier, details of such departures and the reasons shall be submitted to Engineer for review with or before the first stage submittal. No departures shall be made without prior written acceptance from the Engineer. The specifications describe the minimum requirements for hardware and software. Where System Supplier's standard configuration includes additional items of equipment or software features not specifically described herein, such equipment or features shall be furnished as a part of the system and shall be warranted as specified herein. 1-3.01. Governing Standards. Equipment furnished under this section shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with IEEE 519, ANSI C37.90, FCC Part 15-Class A, and NEMA ICS-1-109.60. 1-3.02. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values. The System Supplier shall review the Drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings and installation requirements, and make any modifications requisite for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer. At least three feet of clear access space shall be provided in front of all instrumentation and control system components. 1-3.03. Workmanship and Materials. System Supplier shall guarantee all equip- ment against faulty or inadequate design, improper assembly or erection, defective workmanship or materials, and leakage, breakage, or other failure. Materials shall be suitable for service conditions. All equipment shall be designed, fabricated, and assembled in accordance with recognized and acceptable engineering and shop fabrication practices. JULY 2014 3 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System Individual parts shall be manufactured to standard sizes and thicknesses so that repair parts, furnished at any time, can be installed in the field. Like parts of duplicate units shall be interchangeable. Equipment shall not have been in service at any time prior to delivery, except for testing. 1-3.04. Appurtenances. Signal converters, signal boosters, amplifiers, special power supplies, special cable, special grounding, and isolation devices shall be furnished as needed for proper performance of the equipment. 1-3.05. Programming Devices. A programming or system-configuring device shall be provided for systems that contain any equipment that requires such a device for routine calibration, maintenance, and troubleshooting. The programming device shall be complete, newly purchased for this project, and shall be in like-new condition when turned over to Owner at completion of startup. 1-4. SUBMITTALS. Complete dimensional, assembly, and installation drawings, wiring and schematic diagrams; and details, specifications, and data covering the materials used and the parts, devices and accessories forming a part of the system furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the submittals section. Individual drawings and data sheets submitted at random intervals will not be accepted for review. Equipment tag numbers or identifications used on the Drawings shall be referenced where applicable. ,...~ The submittal shall include the following items: a. A detailed list of any exceptions, functional differences, or discrepancies between the system proposed by System Supplier and this specification. b. Product catalog cut sheets on all hardware and software items, clearly marked to show the model number, optional features, and intended service of each device. c. A brief, concise description of the proposed system, including major hardware and software components and personnel training. d. A block diagram or schematic drawing showing the principal items of equipment furnished, including model numbers, and their interrelationships. e. Drawings showing floor and wall space or desktop area requirements for all equipment items, including allowances for door swings and maintenance access. f. A copy of the proposed software licenses for all software associated with the system. g. Complete panel fabrication drawings and details of panel wiring, :) JULY 2014 4 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System piping, and painting. Panel and subpanel drawings shall be to scale and shall include overall dimensions, metal thickness, door swing, mounting details, weight, and front of panel arrangement to show general appearance, with spacing and mounting height of instruments and control devices. Prior to submitting panel fabrication drawings for approval, contact Tom Pagakis with CMWD at 760-802-4647 to coordinate basic panel fabrication requirements. h. Wiring and installation drawings for all interconnecting wiring between components of the system and between related equipment and the equipment furnished under this section. Wiring diagrams shall show complete circuits and indicate all connections. If panel terminal designations, inter-device connections, device features and options, or other features are modified during the fabrication or factory testing, revised drawings shall be submitted before shipment of the equipment to the site. i. Input/output listings showing point names, numbers, and addresses. Input/output identification numbers from the contract documents shall be cross-referenced in this submittal. j. Proposed lesson plans or outlines for all training courses specified herein, including schedule, instructors' qualifications and experience, and recommended prerequisites. k. Standard system engineering and user manuals describing the use of the system and application programming techniques for creating reports, graphics, database, historical records, and adding new process 1/0 nodes to the system. 1-4.01. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Complete system documentation, in the form of Operation and Maintenance Manuals, shall be submitted before the commencement of field acceptance testing. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall include complete instruction books for each item of equipment and software furnished. Where instruction booklets cover more than one specific model or range of device, product data sheets shall be included which indicate the device model number and other special features. A complete set of "as-built" wiring, fabrication, and interconnection drawings shall be included with the manuals. If field-wiring modifications are made after these drawings are submitted, the affected drawings shall be revised and resubmitted. 1-5. PREPARATION FOR SHIPMENT. All electronic equipment and instruments shall be suitably packaged to facilitate handling and to protect against damage during transit and storage. All equipment shall be boxed, crated, or otherwise completely enclosed and protected during shipment, handling, and storage. All equipment shall be protected from exposure to the elements, shall be kept dry at all times, and shall not be exposed to adverse ambient conditions. JULY 2014 5 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System Painted surfaces shall be protected against impact, abrasion, discoloration, and other damage. Painted surfaces that are damaged prior to acceptance of equipment shall be repainted to the satisfaction of Engineer. Each shipment shall include an appropriate shipping list that indicates the contents of the package, including the specific instrument tags. The shipping list shall be accessible without exposing the instruments to the atmosphere. The shipping list shall also contain any cautionary notes regarding storage of the instruments, including requirements to protect the instrument from static discharge, desensitizing chemicals (solvents, paints, etc.), or ambient atmospheric conditions. Individual instruments shall be appropriately tagged or labeled to positively identify the device. All identification shall be visible without the need to unpack the instrument from its protective packaging. Instrument shipment and storage requirements shall be coordinated with Engineer or Owner prior to shipment. System Supplier shall provide adequate storage and be ready to accept the shipment before shipping any equipment to the site. Additional shipping and storage requirements shall be as detailed in the individual instrument specifications. Components which are shipped loose due to transportation limitations shall be assembled and disassembled by the manufacturer prior to shipment to assure that all components fit together and are adequately supported. 1-6. DELIVERY. STORAGE, AND SHIPPING. Shipping, handling and storage shall be in accordance with the General Provisions paragraph 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS. All equipment furnished under each section referenced in SCOPE is a part of this section and shall be selected by System Supplier for its superior quality and intended performance. Equipment and materials used shall be subject to review. 2-1.01. Standard Products. The systems furnished shall be standard products. Where two or more units of the same type of equipment are supplied, they shall be the products of the same manufacturer; however, all components of the systems furnished hereunder need not be the products of one manufacturer unless specified herein. To the extent possible, instruments used for similar types of functions and services shall be of the same brand and model line. Similar components of dif- ferent instruments shall be the products of the same manufacturer to facilitate JULY 2014 6 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System maintenance and stocking of repair parts. Whenever possible, identical units shall be furnished. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. The design of the systems furnished hereunder shall utilize concepts, techniques and features that provide maximum reliability and ease of maintenance and repair. The systems shall include board-level devices such as light emitting diodes or other indicators to facilitate quick diagnosis and repair. Diagnostic software shall be furnished to facilitate system-level troubleshooting. Where redundant hardware is provided, the system shall be capable of performing all specified functions, without reconfiguring hardware or software, with only one device of each category in service. 2-2.01. Factory Assembly. Equipment shall be shipped completely factory assembled, except where its physical size, arrangement, configuration, or shipping and handling limitations make the shipment of completely assembled units impracticable. 2-3. POWER SUPPLY AND INSTRUMENT SIGNAL. Power supply to all control system equipment will be 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase. System Supplier shall be responsible for distribution of power among enclosures, consoles, peripherals, and other components of the system from the power supply receptacles and junction boxes indicated on the Drawings. Power distribution hardware shall include cables and branch circuit overcurrent protection installed in accordance with the electrical section. Unless otherwise indicated, power supply to the instrumentation will be unregulated 120 volts ac. Unless otherwise indicated, all transmitted electronic analog instrument signals shall be 4-20 rnA de and shall be linear with the measured variable. 2-3.01. Facility Distribution System. Equipment not indicated to be powered from an uninterruptible power source shall be suitable for being supplied from the facility distribution system and shall be capable of withstanding voltage variations of ±1 0 percent and harmonics up to the limits of IEEE 519 without affecting operation. System Supplier shall provide voltage conditioning or filtering equipment if necessary to meet the requirements specified. 2-3.02. Power Supplies. Power supplies for voltages other than those listed above shall be an integral part of the equipment furnished. Internal power supplies shall be regulated, current limiting, and self-protected. 2-3.03. Surge Withstand. All equipment shall meet all surge withstand capability tests as defined in ANSI C37.90 without damage to the equipment. JULY 2014 7 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System 2-4. SERVICE CONDITIONS AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS. The equipment provided for the instrumentation and control system shall be suitable for the service conditions specified in the attached equipment sections. All equipment shall be designed and selected to operate without degradation in performance throughout the environmental extremes specified. Equipment shall be designed to prevent the generation of electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and shall be in compliance with FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, for Class A computing devices. 2-4.01. Ambient Temperature and Elevation. All system equipment located in air conditioned rooms shall be suitable for operation in ambient temperatures from 1 ooc to 35°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 80 percent, noncondensing. All equipment located in non air conditioned indoor areas shall be suitable for an ambient temperature range of ooc to 50°C and a relative humidity of 10 to 95 percent, noncondensing. All equipment located outdoors shall be suitable for operation in an ambient temperature range -20°C to 60°C and a relative humidity of 5 to 100 percent. Heaters and air conditioning/cooling equipment shall be provided where essential to maintain equipment within its manufacturer- recommended operating ranges. All equipment and instruments shall be designed to operate at the site elevation of 52 ft. 2-4.02. Deleterious Effects. All system equipment will be installed in areas without anti-static floor construction and without any provisions for control of particulates or corrosive gases other than ordinary office-type HVAC filtering. System Supplier shall furnish any additional air cleaning equipment, anti-static chair pads, or other protective measures necessary for proper operation of the system. All input/output hardware shall meet or exceed, without false operation, all requirements of NEMA ICS-1-109.60, Electrical Noise Tests. 2-4.03. Noise Level. The equivalent "A" weighted sound level for any system equipment located in the control room, except printers, shall not exceed 35 dBA. The sound level for printers shall not exceed 65 dBA. Sound reduction enclosures shall be provided where necessary to comply with these limits. 2-4.04. Lightning Protection. In addition to other environmental protection specified herein, the entire system shall be provided with lightning protection. Lightning protection measures shall include the following. 2-4.04.01. Grounding. All major components of the system shall have a low resistance ground connection. Grounding system provisions indicated on the Drawings shall be modified as recommended by System Supplier. JULY2014 8 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System 2-4.04.02. Surge Suppressors. Surge and lightning supressors shall be non- faulting, non-interrupting, and shall protect against line-to-line and line-to-ground surges. Devices shall be solid-state metal oxide varistor (MOV) or silicon junction type, with a response time of less than 50 nanoseconds. Surge protective devices shall be applied for the following: a. All 120 VAG power connections to RTUs, PLCs, DCUs, instruments and control room equipment. Surge arresters shall be Transtector "ACP-100-HW Series", Power Integrity Corporation "ZTA Series", Phoenix Contact "Mains PlugTrab", or MCG Surge Protection "400 Series". b. All metallic pair (twisted and untwisted) conductor local area network and data highway termination points, where any part of the data highway cable is routed outside of the building envelope. Single-port protective devices shall be Phoenix Contact "PiugTrab Series", Transtector "FSP" Series", or Telematic "NP Series." 2-5. INSTALLATION TEST EQUIPMENT. All necessary testing equipment for calibration and checking of system components shall be provided by System Supplier. System Supplier shall also furnish calibration and maintenance records for all testing and calibration equipment used on the site if requested by Engineer. 2-6. PROGRAMMING DEVICES. The following programming devices shall be provided for the instruments specified in other sections: Instruments Requiring Programming Devices Pressure and level instruments PART 3-EXECUTION Quantity of Programming Devices 1 3-1. INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. The installation of equipment furnished hereunder shall be by the Contractor or their assigned subcontractors. 3-1.01. Field Wiring. Field wiring materials and installation shall be in accordance with the electrical section. 3-1.02. Instrument Installation. Instruments shall be mounted so that they can be easily read and serviced and so that all appurtenant devices can be easily operated. Installation details for some instruments are indicated on the Drawings. JULY 2014 9 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System All outdoor instrumentation shall be protected from direct sun exposure. Instruments shall be placed in locations to limit south and west sun exposure. Sunshades shall be provided on instruments that are subject to the direct sun exposure. Sunshades shall be located so the opening faces north or east where possible. Sunshades shall be provided as shown on the Drawings. 3-1.03. Salvage of Existing Equipment. Existing equipment and materials removed or replaced under this contract shall be delivered to Owner at a location designated by Owner, or shall be properly disposed of at Owner's discretion. Care shall be taken to avoid damage to equipment delivered to Owner. Any mounting brackets, enclosures, stilling wells, piping, conduits, wiring, or openings that remain after removal of equipment and support hardware shall be removed or repaired in a manner acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Transmitters or switches containing mercury shall be removed and disposed of by personnel trained in the handling of hazardous materials and using approved procedures. 3-2. SYSTEM SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION. System software shall be configured by the Owner. Configuration services shall consist of the creation of the system database, report formats, operator interface graphic and tabular display screen formats, password and security implementation, and programming ~ of control units to provide a fully functioning system. The Owner shall fully .._,.I configure the system using data provided herein or supplied by the Engineer and/or the Owner after award of the contract. 3-3. SYSTEMS CHECK. System Supplier shall provide the services of a trained and experienced field supervisor to assist the installation contractor during installation, and to calibrate, test, and advise others of the procedures for installation, adjustment, and operation. 3-3.01. Field Inspection at Delivery. The field supervisor shall inspect major equipment items within five working days of delivery, to assure that the equipment was not damaged during shipment and shall supervise or assist with unpacking, initial placement, and initial wiring of the system. 3-3.02. Field Calibration of Instruments. After each instrument has been installed, a technical representative of System Supplier shall calibrate each instrument and shall provide a written calibration report for each instrument, indicating the results and final settings. The adjustments of calibrated instruments shall be sealed or marked, insofar as possible, to discourage tampering. Instrument calibration shall be done before checkout of the system operation. A typical instrument calibration report is attached to the end of this section. JULY 2014 10 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System 3-3.03. Field Inspection Prior to Start Up. After installation and wiring connections are complete, the field supervisor, with additional System Supplier's personnel shall verify that each external connection to the system is correctly wired and field process components and devices are functioning as intended. A minimum of two working days shall be included for this task, but System Supplier shall be responsible for completing the following scope of work. 3-3.03.01. Analog Signals. Analog input signals shall be simulated at the transmitting source, and verified to be received at the proper register address in the control system. Analog outputs shall be generated at the control system, and verified to be received with the correct polarity, at the respective receiving device. 3-3.03.02. Discrete Signals. Discrete input and output signals shall be simulated and verified that they are received at the respective receiving device, and at the proper voltage. 3-3.03.03. System Check Out Report. The System Supplier shall submit a written report on the results of such tests to Engineer. Additional documentation shall be furnished as requested by Engineer to establish responsibility for corrective measures. System Supplier shall verify, in writing, to Engineer or Owner that System Supplier has successfully completed the external connection check before beginning system startup or field acceptance testing. 3-3.04. Start Up Assistance. After the field supervisor has completed the system check and submitted his report, Owner shall supply a factory-trained programmer to provide on-site start up assistance. During the startup period, these personnel shall thoroughly check all equipment, correct any deficiencies, and verify the proper operation of all components. Two working days shall be included for this task. 3-4. TESTING. The system shall be acceptance tested on site. System Supplier shall prepare a testing procedure to be approved by Owner and Engineer that shall demonstrate that the system conforms to the specifications. The testing procedure shall be submitted at least 30 days in advance of testing. Owner shall complete configuration work prior to site acceptance testing. The testing shall be conducted by System Supplier with support by the Owner. System Supplier shall notify Engineer and Owner in writing at least 14 days before the proposed testing date. 3-4.01. Site Acceptance Testing. After installation and checkout by System Supplier's personnel, the system shall be subjected to an acceptance test. JULY 2014 11 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System Site acceptance testing shall be scheduled after receipt of the System Check Out Report and System Supplier shall verify that all field signal changes are reflected in the proper address locations in the system database. The site acceptance testing shall be conducted on a complete system. The Owner will provide and install programming for Remote Telemetry Unit. The number of working days of continuous operation for the test shall be two. The operational demonstration shall confirm that the status, alarm, and process variable signals are valid and are being updated appropriately. Any errors or abnormal occurrences shall be recorded by System Supplier's field representative. System Supplier's field representative need not be continuously present during the site acceptance testing, but shall be available to respond to the site within one hour of notification. The representative shall inspect the system for faults at least once every 24 hours and shall log or record any noted problems. The log shall include a description of the problem, its apparent cause, and any corrective action taken. 3-4.01.01. Completion of Test. Successful completion of the site acceptance test, including the operational demonstration, is prerequisite to Substantial Completion as specified in the Supplementary Conditions. 3-5. TRAINING. System Supplier shall conduct training courses for personnel selected by Owner. Instrument training shall be provided. Training shall be conducted by experienced instructors who are familiar with the specific system supplied. 3-5.01. General Training Requirements. In general, System Supplier's standard training courses may be used to meet the training objectives specified. Where standard courses do not meet these objectives, additional coursework shall be developed. Clock hour requirements for each level of training are shall be as listed. A "clock hour" is defined as one hour of instruction or supervised training exercise. Training hour requirements are the number of hours of training to be provided for each student. Additional training time shall be provided if considered necessary to meet the training objectives. 3-5.01.01. Training Costs. All costs associated with the training program; excluding travel, lodging, and per diem expenses for Owner's and Engineer's personnel to attend off-site training programs; shall be the responsibility of System Supplier and shall be included in the contract price. 3-5.01.02. Lessons. Training lesson plans and other information for the second stage submittal as defined herein shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the start of training. 3-5.02. Instrument Training. Training on the calibration, maintenance, troubleshooting, and repair for the instrument devices provided under this project ~~ JULY 2014 12 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System shall be provided. Training shall also be provided for any hand-held or computer- based calibration devices and their associated software. Four hours of training for four students shall be provided at the Owner's facility. End of Section JULY 2014 13 of 13 SECTION 13500 Instrumentation and Control System INSTRUMENT NAME & SERVICE: BRAND & MODEL NO.: TAG OR LOOP NO.: INPUT/OUTPUT RANGE: ACTUAL DESIRED INPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT PROPORTIONAL BAND: RESET: POSITION OF SWITCHES, JUMPERS, ETC. COMMENTS: DATE OF CALIBRATION: CALIBRATED BY: Black & Veatch INSTRUMENT CALl BRA TION Figure 1-13500 REPORT lnttrument Dnice Sctledua. ~ ~dlo.tcrlptlon lhHt ... m. This Is an arbitrary sequential number which Is for reference only. Tag. This Is the ISA (or similar) alpha UIJ repreMntlnJ the funetlon ofthe Instrument. I)'Mem llltllevl-*'on. This is the abbrevatlon for each proceu. (refer laJend sheet) lwvNtt DHorlptlen. Thlt It tile description of the Instrument service (I.e. Filter No.1 Lou-of·Head). DevkM TYtM & atn. This Is the Instrument device type and should match the description as listed In the specification. Where appropriate, the size of the device (such as diameter of flow meters) will be Usted. Ou._... Type. This ••nerally will be '4-20 mA' or "Dry Contact'. It c01.1ld also be a serial output for smart devices (such as HART or FI.D-BUS) but only If the serial output is the primary 1/0 Interface. Outpyt Ibn •. This Is the calibrated ranee for analo1 devices or the trip poln~s) for discrete devices. Power Type. Tl\ls will typle.ally be either '2-wlre' for loop powered devices or '4-wlre' for 120 volt powered devices. lnttlll Detail. This 111 referenee to thelnatellatlon detail on the dl'awinga If applicable. P'&ID Drawktg. This it the dnlwlng numblr of the PliO wh .. the deVice Ia shown. JULY 2014 lafl SECTION 13500a lnstrumentaban Dev1ce Schedule ltMI. Thill Is an alblnry sequential runber which Is for reference only. 10 TYtM: This Is the type of 1/0 slana!, as follows: Ala Analo1lnput AO z Ana loa Outp~o~t Dl• Discrete lnpyt DO • Discrete Output PI• Pulse Input (totall:rer or accumulator type Input) Oelarlptien. TNsls the de.mptJon or the furu:Uorl (I.e. Filter No. 1 Lou-of-Head). Input/Output List~ L•ndiO.scrlptlon ShHI fllfll Dtv'-. This Is the taa number of equipment Identifier assOCiated with the 1/0 point. CentNI..,ID. This is a •equentlal number for a &Jven type within a specific controller (PLC or OCU). Ani ... D8tl (1...,.1 Type). This will typlaUv be 4·20mA, but could also be l·SVdc, serial, HART, FLD·BUS, or slmllar to Indicate the slana! type of the associated lnp~o~t or output. Anllol Data (C......._. Rtlnge). This will be the scaled value of the Input In enJineerlng units. Analog 0.. (Power). This wiH typlally be '2-wlre' for devices which are loop powered from the PLC enclosure, or '4-wlre' for devices which are powered form external DIKrete 0... (llgnM Type). This will be 120VAC, 24VDC, or similar to Indicate the sl1nal type ofthe associated Input or output. DlacNU Data (Cloud a.t.). Thla wta indlcale the state of the input or output when It Ia c:onaidered to be dosed or energized (nonnal, alarm, running, faDed, etc.). DiHrtU o.t. (Power louroe). This will Indicate the location of the power source for the wettlnl voltage on the contacts, as follows: Field • External ~ld power source. (Mav require lnterposlng relays or Isolated 1/0 module type.) local • Power originates from within the PlC or 1/0 enclosure. Dlacreta Da&li (...., Relll~). Thlt will be eilher 'Yea' or 'No' to Indicate whether the input or output requires an Interposing relay. Relays are typicaily required to isolate external voltage sources. See apeclftcationa for adcliUonal details. P&IO. This column Indicates assooialad Proceu & Instrumentation Diagram. Rem.,.., Thla column may include a aou reference to another apecification section where applicable, or to a note wNch provides additional information. Notes are appended \UUIV ...... VIUIVf'V ..... flehUlevkit t-oller!O IAnlloiiJIIn~.,.,.. AnoiolrllanP NlaiDI-Type 1 AJ PRS INlET PRESSURE PR5-PT..001 RTU 4-20mAOC IHOOPSI 2-WIRE 2 AJ PRS OUTLET PRESSURE PRS..PT.002 RTU 4-20 mAOC 0-200PSI 2-WIRE 3 AJ PRS CLA-VAL-001 POSITION PRS..ZT-001 RTU 4·20mAOC 0-100% 2-WIRE 4 Ill PRS VALVE VAULT FLOOO PRS-LSH-001 RTU 5 Ill PRS VALVE VAULT INTRUSION DETECTED PRS..ZS-001 RTU JUlY 2014 lofl 0 l) IDlii .. ISianotType ~Disltal Oose State Digital Power Source 120VAC LEVEL NORMAL RTU 120VAC NO INTRUSION DETECTED RTU iDl<llnterpRelay No No No No No P&IOOrowlng 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 1-1 Remarks SECTION 13500b 'Output List Section 13570 PANELS, CONSOLES, AND APPURTENANCES PART 1-GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. The Panels, Consoles and Appurtenances section covers the furnishing of panels, consoles, and appurtenances as indicated on the Drawings. 1-1.01. Control System. The Instrumentation and Control System section shall apply to all equipment furnished under the Panels, Consoles and Appurtenances section. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with the Drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Drawings. General dimensions and arrangements are indicated on the Drawings. System Supplier shall be responsible for coordinating the console and enclosure sizes and arrangements to accommodate the equipment provided. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Submittals shall be made as specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section. 1-4. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND SHIPPING. Delivery, storage and shipping shall be as per The Instrumentation and Control System section. PART 2 -PRODUCTS. 2-1. PANEL DESIGN AND FABRICATION FEATURES. All panels furnished shall conform to the stipulations of NEMA ICS-6-1993. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings, the following paragraphs describe general fabrication specifications for the PLC cabinets, instrument panels, consoles, enclosures, and subpanels. 2-1.01. Power Entrance. The power entrance to each panel shall be provided with a surge protection device. Refer to the Instrumentation and Controls section for surge suppression requirements. JULY 2014 1 of4 SECTION 13570 Panels, Consoles, and Appurtenances 2-1.02. Power Wiring. Power distribution wiring on the line side of panel fuses shall be minimum 12 AWG. Secondary power distribution wiring shall be minimum 14 AWG. Wiring for ac power distribution, de power distribution, intrinsically safe, and control circuits shall have different colors and shall agree with the color-coding legend on System Supplier's panel wiring diagrams. With the exception of electronic circuits, all interconnecting wiring and wiring to terminals for external connection shall be stranded copper, insulated for not less than 600 volts, with a moisture resistant and flame retardant covering rated for not less than 90°C. 2-1.03. Instrument and Control Wiring. All internal panel wiring shall be type MTW stranded copper wiring rated not less than 600 volts. Electronic analog circuits shall be twisted and shielded pairs rated not less than 300 volts. Analog circuits shall be separated from ac power circuits. Intrinsically safe circuits shall be physically separated from other circuits in accordance with applicable codes. Wires within the panel shall conform to the minimum size as shown in the table below. Type Min. Wire Size Color AC Control 16AWG Red DC Control 16AWG Blue Analog Circuits 18 AWG Twisted Pair Yellow All wiring shall be grouped or cabled and firmly supported inside the panel. Each individual wire in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be provided with identification markers at each point of termination. The wire markers shall be positioned to be readily visible for inspection and the identification numbers shall match the identification on the supplier's panel wiring drawings. Wiring shall be bundled in groups and bound with nylon cable ties or routed in Panduit or similar nonmetallic slotted ducts. Ducts shall be readily accessible within the panel, with removable covers, and with space equal to at least 40 percent of the depth of the duct remaining available for future use after completion of installation and field wiring. Sufficient space shall be provided between cable groups or ducts and terminal blocks for easy installation or removal of cables. 2-1.04. Terminal Blocks. Terminal blocks for external connections shall be suitable for 12 AWG wire and shall be rated 30 amperes at not less than 300 volts. Terminal blocks shall be fabricated complete with marking strip, covers, and pressure connectors. Terminals shall be labeled to agree with identification shown on the supplier's submittal drawings. A terminal shall be provided for each conductor of external circuits, plus one ground for each shielded cable. Not less than 8 inches of clearance shall be provided between the terminal strips and the base of vertical panels for conduit and wiring space. Not less than 25 percent spare terminals shall be provided. Each control loop or system shall be individually fused, and all fuses or circuit breakers shall be clearly labeled and located for easy maintenance. JULY 2014 2 of4 SECTION 13570 Panels, Consoles, and Appurtenances 2-1.05. Device Tag Numbering System. All devices shall be provided with permanent identification tags. The tag numbers shall agree with the Instrument Device Schedule and with the supplier's equipment drawings. All field-mounted transmitters and devices shall have stamped stainless steel identification tags. Panel, subpanel, and rack-mounted devices shall have laminated phenolic identification tags securely fastened to the device. Hand-lettered labels or tape labels will not be permitted. 2-1.06. Nameplates. Nameplates shall be provided on the face of the panel or on the individual device. Panel nameplates shall have legends and approximate dimensions as indicated on the Drawings and shall be made of laminated phenolic material having engraved letters approximately 3/16 inch [5 mm] high extending through the black face into the white layer. Nameplates shall be secured firmly to the panel. Panel face nameplates do not replace the requirement for device identification tags as specified under the Device Tag Numbering System paragraph. 2-1.07. Painting. Interior and exterior surfaces of all carbon-steel panels shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with rust inhibitive (universal) primer. The panel interior shall be painted white with the manufacturer's standard coating. All pits and blemishes in the exterior surface shall be filled. Exterior surfaces shall be painted with one or more finish coats of the manufacturer's standard coating. Finish coats shall have a dry film thickness of at least 4 mils [1 00 mm]. Color shall be ANSI 61 Graywhite. Color samples shall be submitted to Engineer for color selection. One quart [1 liter] of touch-up paint shall be furnished with the panels. 2-2. WALL-MOUNTED CABINETS. Cabinets, which contain the system components indicated on the Drawings, shall be suitable for wall mounting and shall meet the NEMA enclosure rating as indicated on the Drawings or, if applicable, in the attached equipment schedules or the referring equipment specification section. The enclosures shall be fabricated from USS 14 gage [1.9 mm thick], or heavier, carbon steel, stainless steel, or fiberglass. Cabinets shall be equipped with full size gasketed doors with hinges and a chromium- plated or stainless steel three-point latch. The door shall be lockable with a key. The cabinet shall have a hasp for accommodating a padlock. A screened vent shall be provided in the bottom of enclosures that contain pneumatic devices. All wall-mounted cabinets shall meet the requirements of the panel fabrication paragraph of this section. Outdoor cabinets shall be provided with sunshades as indicated on the Drawings. JULY 2014 3 of4 SECTION 13570 Panels, Consoles, and Appurtenances 2-3. WALL MOUNTED INSTRUMENT SUBPANELS. Instrument subpanels shall be constructed from 1/8 inch [3.2 mm] thick carbon steel and shall be reinforced and braced to form a rigid assembly. Panels designed for wall mounting shall have 1 inch [25 mm] turned back edges and a minimum 2 inch [51 mm] air space between the panel and the wall surface. All components on wall-mounted panels shall be mounted so as to be easily removable without requiring rear access to the subpanel. PART 3-EXECUTION 3-1. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. Installation requirements are specified in the Instrumentation and Control System section. In addition, equipment furnished under this section shall conform to the following manufacturing stipulations. 3-1.01. Piping. All tubing shall be run in horizontal and vertical planes and shall be rigidly supported to withstand handling and shipment. Flexible polyethylene tubing shall be used to connect devices mounted on hinged doors. 3-1.02. Wiring. All wiring shall be grouped or cabled and firmly supported inside the panel. Wiring shall be bundled in groups and routed in Panduit or similar nonmetallic slotted ducts. Ducts shall be readily accessible within the panel with removable covers and shall have a space of at least 40 percent of the depth of ~ the duct available for future use after installation is complete and all field wiring """-"' installed. Sufficient space shall be provided between cable groups or ducts and terminal blocks for easy installation or removal of cables. 3-1.03. More Than One Panel. Where signal or loop wiring must be routed to more than one panel or device, the required circuit routing shall be as indicated on the one-line diagrams. The panel fabricator shall provide such additional circuits as may be indicated on the electrical schematic Drawings. End of Section JULY 2014 4 of4 SECTION 13570 Panels, Consoles, and Appurtenances SECTION 15000 GENERAL PIPING SYSTEM AND APPURTENANCES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This Section describes the requirements and procedures for p1p1ng systems and appurtenances that apply to a number of other complimentary Specification Sections. The items are listed in this Section to avoid repetition in Sections elsewhere. This Section includes, but is not limited to: Temporary above ground piping (high line), wet taps, flexible pipe couplings, grooved and shouldered end couplings, joint restraint system, field touch up, bolts, nuts, polyethylene wrap, warning/identification tape, tracer wire, gate well and extension stems, meter boxes, abandonment and removal of existing facilities, and salvage. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings 1.4 SUBMITTALS Submit manufacturers' catalog data showing dimensions, materials of construction by ASTM reference and grade and coatings. 1.5 LINING CONTAMINATION PREVENTION Volatile organic compounds present in the linings of items in contact with potable water or recycled water shall not exceed concentrations allowed by the latest requirements of the State Office of Drinking Water and Department of Health Services. Some products and materials may also require proof of NSF certification on the lining materials to be used. 1.6 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE) High line piping, where shown on the Approved Plans or required by the City Engineer, shall be furnished, installed, disinfected, connected, maintained, and removed by the Contractor. Bacteriological sampling and testing shall be performed by a State of California Certified testing laboratory. The Contractor shall provide a submittal to the City showing pipe layout, materials, sizing, flow calculations, schedule and duration of use, and disinfection for all high line piping. The submittal shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to ordering or delivery of any materials. JULY 2014 1 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances 1. 7 PIPE TAPPING (WET TAP) All pipe tap (wet tap) connections to existing pipelines, whether for mainline extensions or service laterals, shall be performed by the Contractor under the inspection of the City. The Contractor shall provide materials and labor to excavate, pour thrust block, backfill, compact, and repair pavement as indicated in this Section. 1.8 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM Joint Restraint Systems may be used for PVC or ductile-iron pipe only with prior approval of the City Engineer. Joint restraint systems shall be used in the place of, or in conjunction with, concrete thrust blocks as directed. Restrained joint systems shall be wax tape coated and polyethylene encased. Contractor shall submit shop drawings, calculations, and catalog data for joint restraint systems. Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, may be used for PVC or ductile- iron pipe located within casings, or for PVC pipe casings, only. 1.9 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Polyethylene encasement shall be used for all ferrous metal materials that are not protected with annodes. A. Polyethylene wrap shall be used for the protection of buried valves in conjunction with wax tape. B. Polyethylene sleeves shall be used for the protection of buried ductile iron pipe and fittings. Where the use of a sleeve is not practical, the fittings may be wrapped. Additionally, all bolted connections shall be coated with wax tape in accordance with Section 09902. C. Polyethylene wrap or sleeves may also be installed around buried PVC pipe for recycled water identification. 1.10 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/identification tape shall be used to identify location of underground utilities and to act as a warning against accidental dig-ins of buried utilities. Warning/identification tape shall be used on all underground water and recycled water mains, potable and recycled water irrigation systems, sewer mains, and all related appurtenances. Warning/identification tape shall also be used on cathodic protection wiring systems and tracer wire brought into and out of access ports. 1.11 GATE WELLS Gate Wells shall be used for buried valves 4" and larger, unless otherwise indicated on the Standard Drawings. Gate well box and lid shall be used on all gate wells. JULY2014 2 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances 1.12 VALVE STEM EXTENSION Valve Stem Extensions shall be installed when the valve operating nut is more than 5' below grade. Stem extensions shall be of sufficient length to bring the operating nut to a point between 12" and 18" below the gate well lid. 1.13 METER BOXES A. Meter boxes shall be used for all water meters. B. Meter boxes shall be sized for the specific meter size or size as indicated on the Standard Drawings. 1.14 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION Facilities installed for the use of recycled water shall be identified with purple color coating, identification labels, or signs. 1.15 CURB IDENTIFICATION MARK FOR SERVICES The Contractor shall mark the location of all potable water, recycled water and sewer laterals at the curb crossing by stamping the face of the curb in 2" high letters as described below: A. Potable water laterals shall be stamped with a letter 'W". B. Recycled water laterals shall be stamped with a letter "RW". C. Sewer laterals be stamped with a letter "S". PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE) High line piping layout, materials and appurtenances shall be as indicated on the approved submittal. 2.2 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS Flexible pipe couplings shall be in accordance with the Approved Materials list and as described below: A. Steel Couplings shall have middle rings made of steel conforming to ASTM A 36/A 36M, A 53 (Type E or S), or A 512 having a minimum yield strength of 207 MPa (30,000 psi). Follower rings shall be ductile-iron per ASTM A 536, or steel per ASTM A 108, Grade 1018 or ASTM A 510, Grade 1018. Minimum middle ring length shall be 7" for pipe sized 6" through 24". B. Sleeve bolts shall be made of stainless steel per ASTM A193 and shall have a minimum yield strength of 276 MPa (40,000 psi), an ultimate yield strength of 414 MPa (60,000 psi), and shall conform to AWWA C111. JULY 2014 3 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances 2.3 GROOVED END OR SHOULDERED COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE Groove end or shouldered couplings shall be in accordance with the Approved Materials List and as described below: A. Use square-cut shouldered or grooved ends per AWWA C606. Grooved-end couplings shall be malleable iron per ASTM A 47, or ductile iron per ASTM A 536. Gaskets shall be per ASTM D 2000. B. Bolts in exposed service shall conform to ASTM A 183, 69 MPa (10,000 psi) tensile strength. 2.4 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM Joint Restraint Systems shall be ductile-iron and shall consist of a split-ring restraint with machined (not cast) serrations -on the inside diameter, a back-up ring, and connecting bolts, and shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, shall be a rubber-ring type with stainless steel locking segments vulcanized into the gasket. 2.5 FIELD TOUCH-UP APPLICATIONS All surfaces of metallic appurtenances in contact with potable water and not protected from corrosion by another system shall be shop-coated by the manufacturer. Appurtenances with damaged coatings shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer. Touch-up of damaged surfaces, when allowed by the Engineer, shall be ~ performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. ....._, 2.6 BOLTS AND NUTS Bolts and nuts shall be as indicated below. A. Cadmium-plated or zinc-plated bolts and nuts shall be used for the installation of pipelines up to 20" diameter and shall be carbon steel conforming to ASTM A307, Grade A, unless otherwise indicated on the approved drawings. Bolts shall be standard ANSI B1.1, Class A coarse threads. Nuts shall be standard ANSI B1.1, Class 2H coarse threads. B. Stainless steel bolts and nuts shall be used for the installation of pipelines 24" diameter and larger and for submerged flanges. Bolts and nuts shall be Type 316 stainless steel conforming to ASTM A 193, Grade B8M for bolts, and Grade 8M for nuts. Use lubricant for stainless steel belts and nuts. Lubricant shall be Husky Lube "0" Seal by Husk-ITT Corporation or equal C. All bolt heads and nuts shall be hexagonal, except where special shapes are required. Bolts shall be of such length that not less than 1/4" or more than 1/2" shall project past the nut in tightened position. D. Provide a washer under each nut and under each bolt head. Use washers of the same materials as the nuts. JULY 2014 4 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances 2. 7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Polyethylene encasement shall be as indicated below and shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. Polyethylene materials shall be kept out of direct sunlight exposure. A. Polyethylene sleeves shall be a minimum 0.012" thick polyethylene plastic in accordance with AWWA C105. B. Polyethylene wrap shall be a minimum 0.008" thick polyethylene plastic in accordance with AWWA C105. C. Polyethylene wrap and sleeves shall be clear for use with potable water and purple for use with recycled water. D. Polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape a minimum of 2" wide or plastic tie straps shall be used to secure polyethylene encasement. 2.8 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/identification tape shall be as indicated below and in accordance with the Approved Materials List. A. Tape shall be an inert plastic film or metallic formulated for prolonged underground use that will not degrade when exposed to alkalies, acids and other destructive substances commonly found in soil. B. Tape shall be puncture-resistant and shall have an elongation of two times its original length before parting. C. Tape shall be colored to identify the type of utility intended for identification. Printed message and tape color shall be as follows: Printed Message Caution: Waterline Buried Below Caution: Recycled Waterline Buried Below Caution: Cathodic Protection Cable Buried Below Caution: Electric Line Buried Below Tape Color Blue Purple Red Red Ink used to print messages shall be permanently fixed to tape and shall be black in color with message printed continuously throughout. D. Tape shall be minimum 0.004" thick x 6" wide with a printed message on one side. Tape used with the installation of onsite potable and recycled water irrigation systems shall be a minimum of 3" wide. JULY 2014 5 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 TEMPORARY ABOVEGROUND PIPE (HIGH LINE} A. All high line piping, fittings, and service connections shall be furnished, installed, and maintained by the Contractor, and the Contractor shall make connections to a water source designated by the City Engineer. B. All pipe, valves, fittings, hose and connections furnished by the Contractor shall be of good quality, clean, and suitable for conveying potable water in the opinion of the City Engineer. C. The high line pipe shall be installed in such a manner that it will not present a hazard to traffic and will not interfere with access to homes and driveways along its route. D. Valves shall be installed at 200' intervals or as directed by the City Engineer. The use of pressure reducing valves (PRV) may be required as directed by the City Engineer. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for disinfecting all high lines, connections, and flushing. F. Following disinfection and acceptance of the high line as a potable water system, the Contractor shall maintain continuous service through the high line piping to all consumers normally served both directly and indirectly by the pipeline. G. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove the high line piping and appurtenances. H. If progress in making repairs to the high line is inadequate, the City Engineer, may order necessary corrective measures. Corrective measures may consist of directing City personnel or another contractor to complete the work. All costs for corrective measures shall be borne by the Contractor. 3.2 CONNECTION TO EXISTING FACILITIES (WET TAPS AND CUT-IN INSTALLATIONS} The Contractor shall furnish the tapping sleeve or tee, valves and all other materials as called for in the Standard Specifications in accordance with the Approved Materials List. The Contractor shall provide all equipment and labor required for the excavation and installation of the connection including, but not limited to, backfill and pavement replacement. In certain circumstances the Contractor may be required to provide a water truck, high line, and fittings as part of the equipment for making the connections. In addition, the Contractor shall assist the City in alleviating any hardship incurred during a shutdown for connections. Emergency standby equipment or materials may be required of the Contractor by the City Engineer. Wet taps or cut-in tee and valve installations shall be performed as follows: JULY 2014 8 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances A. Prior to construction, Contractor shall pothole the existing pipe at the location of the proposed connection. The City shall inspect the pothole prior to Contractor's repair of trench. Refer to Section 01000 for protection of existing facilities. Contractor shall record the following information on as-built drawings: 1. Pipe size, outside diameter. 2. Pipe type such as ACP, PVC, Ductile-Iron or Steel. 3. Pipe class and/or pressure rating. 4. Elevation, grade, and alignment. 5. Location of collars, pipe bells, fittings or couplings, if found. Note: Collars, bells, fittings, or couplings shall not be within 18-inches of the outer dimension of the tapping saddle. 6. Potential conflicts with existing utilities. B. To facilitate the proposed connection and allow for slight adjustments in alignment, the Contractor shall leave a minimum 1 0' gap between the new pipe installation and the proposed connection point at the existing water main. The Contractor shall leave a gap longer than 1 0' if conditions warrant, or if directed by the Engineer. C. The new pipeline shall have successfully passed pressure testing in accordance with Section 15044 and disinfection and bacteriological testing in accordance with Section 15041 prior to proceeding with the connection to the existing pipeline. D. After the City Engineer has given approval to proceed with the connection, the Contractor shall schedule with the City for the wet tap or cut-in installation. 1. Shutdowns will be scheduled at the convenience of the City. Shutdowns may be scheduled for nights or weekends if required. 2. The Contractor shall give the City a minimum of 5 working days notice prior to any proposed excavation or shutdown of existing mains or services. Scheduling shall be subject to approval by the City Engineer. 3. The City may postpone or reschedule any shutdown operation if, for any reason, the City Engineer believes that the Contractor is improperly prepared with competent personnel, equipment, or materials to proceed with the connection. 4. If progress in completing the connection within the time specified is inadequate, the Engineer may order necessary corrective measures. Corrective measures may consist of directing City personnel or another contractor to complete the work. All costs for corrective measures shall be borne by the Contractor. E. Contractor may proceed with excavation only after potholing has been completed, materials have been approved and delivered, and wet tap or cut-in installation has been scheduled with approved Connection Permit. JULY 2014 9 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances 1. The Contractor shall saw-cut pavement, excavate and provide and install shoring and steel plating, when necessary, one day prior to the wet tap or cut-in installation. 2. The Contractor shall provide lights, barricades and traffic control in accordance with the agency of jurisdiction and as deemed necessary for the excavation by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall de-water existing mains in full compliance with NPDES standards where cut-in installations are required and shall be done in the presence of the Engineer and in accordance with Section 15041. Only City personnel are authorized to operate existing valves. The Contractor shall be responsible for any and all damage resulting from unauthorized operation of existing City facilities. 4. The Contractor under the inspection of the City shall perform the following work for wet taps and cut-in installations: 5. a. Wet taps: Disinfect and install and tapping saddle and tapping valve and perform tapping operations. b. Cut-ins: Cut and remove portions of existing mains, and disinfect and install tees, valves, couplings, and appurtenances required to complete the closure. The Contractor shall discard pipe and appurtenances removed from service in accordance with this Section. After the Contractor has performed tapping or cut-in operations, and the Engineer has given approval to proceed, the Contractor shall complete the installation as shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with the Standard Specifications including, but not limited to: a. Disinfecting and installing the pipe section(s) necessary to make the closure to the new system. b. Installing and setting the valve gate well(s) in accordance with the Standard Drawings. c. Installing thrust and anchor blocks in accordance with Section 03000. d. Completing all backfill and compaction of the trench in accordance with Section 02223. e. Repairing or replacing pavement as necessary. 3.3 FLEXIBLE PIPE COUPLINGS Flexible pipe couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and as described below: JULY2014 10 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances A. Use plain-end pipe with flexible couplings per AWWA C200. Provide joint harnesses per AWWA M11 for aboveground applications or where indicated on the Approved Plans. B. Flexible couplings may be used only where indicated on the drawings. C. Clean oil, scale, rust, and dirt from the pipe ends and touch-up the epoxy coating and allow time for curing before installing the coupling. Clean the gaskets before installing. D. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for installation and bolt torque using a properly calibrated torque wrench. E. Lubricate the bolt threads with graphite prior to installation. 3.4 GROOVED-END OR SHOULDERED COUPLINGS FOR DUCTILE IRON OR STEEL PIPE Grooved-end or shouldered couplings shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and as described below: A. Grooved-end or shouldered joint couplings shall be installed per AWWA C606 and the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Clean loose scale, rust, oil, grease, and dirt from the pipe or fitting groove and touch-up the epoxy coating as necessary, allowing time for curing before installing the coupling. C. Clean the gasket before installation. Apply a lubricant selected from the Approved Materials List to the gasket exterior including lips, pipe ends, and housing interiors. D. Fasten the coupling alternately and evenly until the coupling halves are seated. Follow the manufacturer's recommendation for bolt torque using a properly calibrated torque wrench. 3.5 JOINT RESTRAINT SYSTEM Joint Restraint Systems shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations and as described below: A. Length of pipe to be restrained on each side of bends, tees, reducers and other fittings shall be determined by the Private Engineer or manufacturer of the restraint device and approved by the City Engineer. B. Split ring restraint shall be installed on the spigot end of pipe, connected to a back-up ring which seats behind the bell of the adjoining pipe or fitting. C. Restraint devices can be installed prior to lowering pipe into the trench. JULY 2014 11 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances D. Splined gaskets, also known as joint restraint gaskets, shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.6 BOLTS AND NUTS A. All bolts and nuts shall be new and unused. B. Bolts and nuts shall be cleaned, if needed, by wire brushing and lubricated prior to assembly. C. Tighten nuts uniformly and progressively. D. Buried bolts and nuts shall be coated with wax tape in accordance with Section 09902 prior to being encased with polyethylene. E. All stainless steel bolts shall be coated with an anti-seize compound selected from the Approved Materials List. F. Bolts and nuts shall not be reused once tightened. Used bolts and nuts shall be discarded and removed from the job. 3. 7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT A. Polyethylene encasement shall completely encase and cover all buried metal surfaces not otherwise protected with a cathodic protection system. All bolted connections shall be coated with wax tape prior to polyethylene encasement. Pipe & Fittings: All ductile-iron pipe and fittings shall be encased with polyethylene sleeves in accordance with Method A described in AWWA C105, except that tees may be encased with polyethylene wrap in accordance with Method C described in AWWA C105. Valves: Buried valves shall have only the stem and operating nut exposed and the wrap shall be attached so that valve operation will not disturb the wra ping or break the seal. Refer to the applicable valve specification to determin other coating requirements. B. Polyethylene sleeves shall be secured with polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape or plastic tie straps at the ends and quarter points along the sleeve in a man er that will hold the sleeve securely in place during backfill. Polyethylene wrap hall be secured with polyethylene or vinyl adhesive tape in a manner that will old the wrap securely in place during backfill. 3.8 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed as described below in accordance ith the Standard Drawings. A. JULY2014 Tape shall be placed at the top of the pipe zone 12" above and centered ver the utility intended for identification. Tape used with onsite potable and r cycled water irrigation systems shall be installed at 6" above the pipe. 12 of 15 SECTI 15000 General Piping System and App enances B. Tape shall be installed with the printed side up and run continuously along the entire length of the utility intended for identification. Tape shall be installed on the main piping and all appurtenant laterals, including blowoffs, air valve assemblies, fire hydrants, and services. Tape splices shall overlap a minimum of 24" for continuous coverage. C. Tape shall be installed prior to placement of the Trench Zone Backfill. 3.9 GATE WELLS AND VALVE STEM EXTENSIONS Gate wells shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings and as described below: A. Gate wells shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings and as described below: B. The top exterior portion of the gate well lid and ring shall be coated in accordance with Section 09900. C. Valve Stem Extensions shall be installed when the valve operating nut is more than 5' below grade. Stem extensions shall be of sufficient length to bring the operating nut to a point between 12" and 18" below the gate well lid. Valve stem extensions shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.10 METER BOX INSTALLATION Meter boxes shall be installed at the elevations and locations shown on the Approved Plans and in accordance with the Standard Drawings. Near the completion of the project, a final meter box adjustment to finish grade may be required. Water meters shall not be installed until final adjustments are made to the meter box and approved by the City. 3.11 ABANDONMENT OR REMOVAL FROM SERVICE OF EXISTING FACILITIES Before excavating for new mains that are to replace existing pipes or services, the Contractor shall make provisions for the continuation and maintenance of service to customers as directed by the City Engineer. Abandonment or removal from service of existing mains, appurtenances or water services shown on the Approved Plans or as called for by the City Engineer shall be as directed by the City Engineer. Abandonment or removal from service of existing mains, appurtenances or water services shown on the Approved Plans or as called for by the City Engineer shall be as indicated below and in accordance with the Standard Drawings: A. Abandonment in place: JULY 2014 1. Existing pipe 4" and smaller shall have a short section of pipe removed and pipe ends encased in concrete. 13 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances 2. Existing pipe 6" through 14" shall be cut and plugged with concrete or shall be pressure-grouted at intervals of 200' as recommended by the Engineer. 3. Existing pipe 16" and larger shall be entirely filled by pressure-grouting or by blown sand as determined by the Engineer. 4. Existing pipe ends shall be filled with concrete. 5. All valves shall be removed with remaining pipe or fittings permanently sealed with blind flange or concrete plug. 6. Gate wells shall be cut 24" below grade and filled with 1-2 slurry sack concrete or removed and replaced with compacted backfill. 7. Water service corporation stops shall be closed. Meter boxes and curb stops shall be removed. Service laterals shall be cut back a minimum of 24-inches below the finish grade. 8. Water services to be abandoned that are connected to pipelines that will remain in service shall be abandoned in-place. B. Removal by excavation: 1. Existing pipe and appurtenances shall be removed from the ground as indicated on the Approved Plans or as directed by the City Engineer. 2. Contractor shall provide measures that allow for the removal of existing sewer mains and appurtenances with no leakage of raw sewage. Transportation of sewer mains and appurtenances removed from service shall be in waterproof trucks to prevent raw sewage from leaking on public streets. 3. Removal of asbestos-cement pipe (ACP) and sewer mains and appurtenances shall be in accordance with all applicable State and Federal requirements. Legal disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. Obtain approval from the agency having disposal jurisdiction with respect to disposal sites. 4. Backfill, compaction, and surface repair of all excavations for removal of pipe and appurtenances shall be made in accordance with the Approved Plans, Section 02223 of the Standard Specifications, and the Standard Drawings. 3.12 SALVAGE When the Contractor is required to remove existing pipe and appurtenances, or portions thereof, from the ground, such material may, at the discretion of the Engineer, be considered salvage. All materials identified as salvage are considered property of the City. JULY2014 14 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances A. The Contractor shall remove and temporarily stockpile all materials identified as salvage in a safe location that will not disrupt traffic or shall deliver salvage to the City's Field Operations Yard as directed by the City Engineer. B. The Contractor shall legally dispose of all other materials in an appropriate manner. Disposal is the responsibility of the Contractor. Obtain concurrence from the agency having disposal jurisdiction with respect to disposal sites and transportation methods. 3.13 RECONNECTIONS A. The Contractor may encounter unused service laterals or appurtenant piping connected to an existing pipeline being replaced. Laterals and appurtenance piping that will not be connected to the new pipeline shall be abandoned as described in section 3.11. B. Existing service laterals or appurtenances to be connected to new pipelines shall be installed as shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the City Engineer in accordance with the Standard Drawings. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 15 of 15 SECTION 15000 General Piping System and Appurtenances Section 15010 VALVE INSTALLATION PART 1-GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of new valves and actuators purchased by Contractor as part of this Work. Cleaning, disinfection, pressure and leakage testing, insulation, and pipe supports are covered in other sections. The following specification sections are applicable to valves to be installed: Section 15098 15099 15100 15102 15108 Title Pressure Reducing Valves Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) Butterfly Valves (BFV's) Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve and Combination Air Valve Assemblies 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment installed under this section shall be erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Any valves and actuators that are identified as being provided by others will be furnished complete for installation by Contractor. Technical specifications under which the equipment will be purchased are available. 1-2.01. Coordination. When manufacturer's field services or installation check services are provided by the valve manufacturer, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the valve manufacturer. Contractor shall give Engineer written notice at least 30 days prior to the need for manufacturer's field services. Flanged connections to valves including the bolts, nuts, and gaskets are covered in the appropriate pipe specification section. Valve ends shall match piping. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not Applicable. JULY2014 1 of 3 SECTION 15010 Valve Installation PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. All valves and accessories shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not be used unless it is repaired and re-cleaned to the original requirements by Contractor. Such material shall be segregated from the clean material and shall be inspected and approved by Owner or his representative before its use. 3-2. INSTALLATION. 3-2.01. General. Valves shall be installed with sufficient clearance for proper operation of any external mechanisms, and with sufficient clearance to dismantle the valve for in-place maintenance. Installation shall be in accordance with the valve manufacturer's recommendations. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified, all valves installed in horizontal runs of pipe having centerline elevations 4 feet 6 inches [1.3 m] or less above the finish floor shall be installed with their operating stems vertical. If adjacent piping prohibits this, the stems and operating handwheel shall be installed above the valve horizontal centerline as close to horizontal as possible. Valves installed in vertical runs of pipe shall have their operating stems oriented to facilitate the most practicable operation, as reviewed by Engineer. 3-2.02. Installation Checks. When specified in the valve sections, the valve manufacturer will provide installation checks. For installation checks, the manufacturer's field representative will inspect the valve installation immediately following installation by Contractor. The manufacturer's representatives will revisit the site as often as necessary to ensure installation satisfactory to Owner. 3-2.03. Butterfly Valves. Butterfly valves shall be installed with the shaft horizontal unless otherwise necessary for proper operation or as acceptable to Engineer. Whenever an actuator must be removed to permit installation of a valve, the actuator shall be promptly reinstalled and shall be inspected and readjusted by a representative of the valve manufacturer. 3-2.04. Check Valves. Not used. 3-2.05. Plug Valves. Not used. 3-2.06. Resilient Seated Gate Valves. 3-2.06.01. Resilient Seated Gate Valves. Valves shall be handled and installed in accordance with the recommendations set forth in the Appendices to JULY2014 2 of3 SECTION 15010 Valve Installation ANSI/AWWA C509 and C515 and with the recommendations of the manufacturer. 3-2.06.02. Double Disc Gate Valves. Not used. 3-2.07. Air Release and Combination Air Valves. The exhaust from each valve shall be piped to a suitable point acceptable to Engineer. Air release valve exhaust piping leading to a trapped floor drain shall terminate at least 6 inches [150 mm] above the floor. 3-2.08. Hydrants. Not used. 3-2.08.01. Yard Hydrants. Not used. 3-2.08.02. Fire Hydrants. Not used. 3-2.09. Valve Boxes. Valve boxes shall be set plumb. Each valve box shall be placed directly over the valve it serves, with the top of the box brought flush with the finished grade. After each valve box is placed in proper position, earth fill shall be placed and thoroughly tamped around the box. 3-3. VALVE ACTUATORS. Valve actuators and accessories shall be factory mounted on the valve, calibrated, and tested by the valve or actuator manufacturer. 3-4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3.4.01. Field Testing. After installation, all valves shall be tested in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. 3-4.01.01. Pressure Tests. Pressure testing shall be in accordance with the Pipeline Pressure and Leakage Testing section. 3-4.01.02. Leakage Tests. All valves shall be free from leaks. Each leak that is discovered within the correction period stipulated in the General Conditions shall be repaired by and at the expense of Contractor. This requirement applies whether pressure testing is required or not. 3-5. ADJUSTING. After installation, the opening and closing time shall be adjusted as needed for each pneumatic, hydraulic and electric actuated valve. End of Section JULY2014 3 of3 SECTION 15010 Valve Installation Section 15020 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING AND ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of piping and accessories as indicated on the Drawings for the following piping sections: Section Title Stainless Steel Pipe Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing, and Accessories Contractor shall furnish all necessary jointing materials, coatings, and accessories that are specified herein. Pipe supports and anchors shall be furnished by Contractor, and are covered in the Pipe Supports section. Pipe trenching and backfilling are covered in the Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting section. 1-2. GENERAL. 1-2.01. Coordination. Materials installed under this section shall be installed in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Items requiring submittals shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Materials as specified herein. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Welding and Brazing Qualifications. Not Used. 1-4.02. Tolerances. These tolerances apply to in-line items and connections for other lines. The general dimension, such as face-to-face, face or end-to-end, face-or end-to center, and center-to-center shall be 1/8 inch [3 mm]. JULY2014 1 of6 SECTION 15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation The inclination of flange face from true in any direction shall not exceed 3/64 inch per foot [4 mm per meter]. Rotation of flange bolt holes shall not exceed 1/16 inch [1.5 mm]. 1-5. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING. Shipping, handling, and storage shall be in accordance with the General Provisions paragraph 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending. Plastic pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored between 40°F and 90°F [4°C and 32°C]. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. Pipe, tubing, and fittings covered herein shall be installed in the services indicated in the various pipe sections. 2-2. MATERIALS. Threaded Fittings Anti-Seize Thread Lubricant Jet-Lube "Nikal", John Crane "Thred Gard Nickel", Never-Seez "Pure Nickel Special", or Permatex "Nickel Anti-Seize". Teflon Thread Sealer Paste type; Hercules "Real-tuff', John Crane "JC-30", or Permatex "Thread Sealant with Teflon". Teflon Thread Tape Hercules "Tape Dope" or John Crane "Thread-Tape". PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. All piping components shall be inspected for damage and cleanliness before being installed. Any material damaged or contaminated in handling on the job shall not be used unless it is repaired and recleaned to the original requirements by Contractor. Such material shall be segregated from the clean material and shall be inspected and approved by Owner or his representative before its use. JULY2014 2 of6 SECTION 15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation 3-2. PREPARATION. 3-2.01. Field Measurement. Pipe shall be cut to measurements taken at the site, not from the Drawings. All necessary provisions shall be made in laying out piping to allow for expansion and contraction. Piping shall not obstruct openings or passageways. Pipes shall be held free of contact with building construction to avoid transmission of noise resulting from expansion. 3-3. INSTALLATION. 3-3.01. General. All instruments and specialty items shall be installed according to the manufacturer's instructions and with sufficient clearance and access for ease of operation and maintenance. 3-3.02. Pipe Sleeves. Not used. 3-3.03. Pipe Joints. Pipe joints shall be carefully and neatly made in accordance with the indicated requirements. 3-3.03.01. Threaded. Pipe threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, NPT, and shall be fully and cleanly cut with sharp dies. Not more than three threads at each pipe connection shall remain exposed after installation. Ends of pipe shall be reamed after threading and before assembly to remove all burrs. Unless otherwise indicated, threaded joints shall be made up with teflon thread tape, thread sealer, or a suitable joint compound. Threaded joints in plastic piping shall be made up with teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. Threaded joints in stainless steel piping shall be made up with teflon thread sealer and teflon thread tape applied to all male threads. Threaded joints in steel piping for chlorine service shall be made up with teflon thread tape or litharge and glycerine paste applied to all male threads. 3-3.03.02. Compression. Not Used. 3-3.03.03. Flared. Not Used. 3-3.03.04. Soldered and Brazed. Not Used. 3-3.03.05. Solvent Welded. Not Used. 3-3.03.06. Epoxy and Adhesive Bonded. Not Used. 3-3.03.07. Heat Fusion Bonded. Not Used. 3-3.03.08. Flanged. Flange bolts shall be tightened sufficiently to slightly compress the gasket and effect a seal, but shall not be torqued less than the JULY2014 3of6 SECTION 15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation minimum value required by the gasket manufacturer. Flange bolts shall not be so tight as to fracture or distort the flanges. A plain washer shall be installed under the head and nut of bolts connecting plastic pipe flanges. Anti-seize thread lubricant shall be applied to the threaded portion of all stainless steel bolts during assembly. Flange bolt holes shall be oriented as follows, unless otherwise indicated on the spool drawings: Vertical flange face: Horizontal flange face: Bolt holes to straddle the vertical centerlines. Bolt holes shall be aligned with connecting pipe. Pipe sealants, thread compounds, or other coatings shall not be applied to flange gaskets unless recommended by the gasket manufacturer for the specified service and approved by Engineer. Slip-on flanges shall be welded inside and outside. There shall be a distance of approximately 1/16 to 1/8 inch [1.5 to 3 mm] between the edge of the fillet weld and the face of the flange. The seal weld shall be applied so that the flange face shall be free of weld spatter and does not require refacing. Flat-faced flanges shall be used when mating to Class 125 flanges. Full-face gaskets shall be used with flat-faced flanges and ring gaskets shall be used with raised faced flanges. 3-3.04. Pipe. Pipe shall be installed as specified, as indicated on the Drawings, or, in the absence of detail piping arrangement, in a manner acceptable to Engineer. Piping shall be installed without springing or forcing the pipe in a manner which would induce stresses in the pipe, valves, or connecting equipment. Piping shall be supported in conformance with the Pipe Supports section. Piping shall be connected to equipment by flanges or unions as specified in the various piping sections. Piping connecting to equipment shall be supported by a pipe support and not by the equipment. Water supply piping shall be provided with a shutoff valve and union at each fixture or unit of equipment, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, to permit isolation and disconnection of each item without disturbing the remainder of the system. A union shall be provided within 2 feet [600 mm] of each threaded-end valve unless there are other connections which will permit easy removal of the valve. JULY 2014 4of6 SECTION 15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation Unions shall also be provided in piping adjacent to devices or equipment which may require removal in the future and where required by the Drawings or the Specifications. Water supply piping within structures shall be arranged, and facilities provided, for complete drainage. All piping serving metering equipment shall be uniformly graded so that air traps are eliminated and complete venting is provided. Taps for pressure gauge connections on the suction and discharge of pumping units shall be provided with a nipple and a ball type shutoff valve. Drilling and tapping of pipe walls for installation of pressure gauges or switches will not be permitted. Piping adjacent to flow sensors shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the manufacturer of the flow sensor and commonly accepted design practices of the appropriate straight pipe runs both upstream and downstream. Drains required for operation are shown on the Drawings. However, vents at all high points and drains at all low points in the piping that are required for complete draining for pressure test may not be shown on these Drawings. Contractor shall add such items as found to be necessary during detail piping design and/or piping installation. 3-3.05. Reducers. Eccentric reducers shall be installed flat on the bottom for steam, condensate return and digester gas services. 3-3.06. Valves. Isolation valves provided with equipment and instruments shall be located in a manner which will allow ease of access and removal of the items to be isolated. Prior to soldering or brazing valves, teflon and elastomer seats and seals shall be removed to prevent damage. 3-4. PIPING ASSEMBLY. 3-4.01. General. Contractor shall only use labor that has been qualified by training and experience to capably perform the specified activities required to accomplish the work in a satisfactory manner Any deviations from the Specifications or piping locations shown on the Drawings require prior review and approval by Engineer. 3-5. PROTECTIVE COATING. Not used. 3-6. PRESSURE AND LEAKAGE TESTING. For pressure and leakage testing requirements see the Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure pipelines section. JULY 2014 5of6 SECTION 15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation 3-7. CLEANING. For disinfection requirements see the Disinfection of Piping section. 3-8. ACCEPTANCE. Owner reserves the right to have any section of the piping system which he suspects may be faulty cut out of the system by Contractor for inspection and testing. Should the joint prove to be sound, Owner will reimburse Contractor on a time-and-material basis as specified in the Contract. Should the joint prove to be faulty, the destructive test will continue joint by joint in all directions until sound joints are found. Costs for replacement of faulty work and/or materials shall be the responsibility of Contractor. End of Section JULY 2014 6of6 SECTION 15020 Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation :~ SECTION 15041 DISINFECTION OF PIPING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section describes requirements for disinfection by chlorination of potable and recycled water mains, services, pipe appurtenances and connections. 1.2 REFERENCED STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. A. American Water Works Association (AWWA). 8300 Standard for Hypochlorites 8301 Standard for Liquid Chlorine C651 Disinfecting Water Mains 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Specifications 15000, 15044, 15061, and 15068 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. All water mains and appurtenances taken out of service for inspection, repairs, or other activity that might lead to contamination shall be disinfected before they are returned to service. B. All new water mains and temporary high lines shall be disinfected prior to connection to the City's existing system. C. All components incorporated into a connection to the City's existing system shall be disinfected prior to installation. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. A written disinfection and dechlorination plan signed by a certified chlorinator shall be submitted to the Engineer for review and approval prior to starting disinfection or dechlorination operations. Plan for disinfection method and procedure shall include equipment used to inject the chlorine solution, gauges or scales to measure the rate at which chlorine is injected, qualifications of personnel, testing location and schedule, necessary coordination, source of water and water disposal locations. Personnel performing the disinfection shall demonstrate a minimum of five years experience in the chlorination and dechlorination of pipelines. B. Qualification of certified testing laboratory. C. Four copies of bacteriological test results to the Engineer upon completion of each test. D. Emergency Response Plan. JULY 2014 1 of 7 SECTION 15041 Disinfection of Piping 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Chlorination and dechlorination shall be performed by competent individuals knowledgeable and experienced in the operation of the necessary application and safety equipment in accordance with applicable Federal, State and Local laws and regulations. The transport, storage and handling of these materials shall be performed in accordance with Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response, CFR 49.172 Hazardous Materials Regulations, and the General Industry Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5194. 1.7 CONCURRENT DISINFECTION AND HYDROSTATIC TESTING The specified disinfection of the pipelines may be performed concurrently with the hydrostatic testing in accordance with Section 15044. In the event repairs are necessary, as indicated by the hydrostatic test, additional disinfection may be required by the Engineer in accordance with this specification. 1.8 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS Prior to connection to existing mains, disinfection and bacteriological testing shall be performed in accordance with this specification, and hydrostatic testing shall be performed per Section 15044. A City Connection Permit is required authorizing connection to an existing system shall and be given only on the basis of acceptable hydrostatic, disinfection and bacteriological test results. Connection to existing mains shall be performed in accordance with Section 15000. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 CHLORINE (GAS} A. Liquid chlorine contains 1 00-percent available chlorine and is packaged in steel containers in net weights of 68.1kg (150 lb.) or 907.2kg (1 ton). B. Liquid chlorine shall be used with appropriate gas flow chlorinators, heaters, and injectors to provide a controlled, high-concentration solution feed to the water. The chlorinators and injectors shall be the vacuum-operated type. C. Liquid chlorine shall conform to AWWA 8301. 2.2 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE (LIQUID} Sodium hypochlorite is available in liquid form in glass or plastic containers, ranging in size from 0.95 L (1 Qt.) to 18.93 L (5 Gal.). The solution contains approximately 10% to 15% available chlorine. Sodium hypochlorite shall conform to AWWA 8300. 2.3 TABLET OR GRANULAR HYPOCHLORITE Tablet or granular hypochlorite may be used if a solution container is utilized to provide a continuous feed method. JULY 2014 2 of 7 SECTION 15041 Disinfection of Piping 2.4 CHLORINE RESIDUAL TEST KIT Chlorine residual concentration shall be measured using an appropriate range, drop count titration kit or an orthotolidine indicator comparator with wide range color discs. The color disc range shall be selected to match chlorine concentration limits. Test kits shall be maintained in good working order and available for immediate test of residuals at point of sampling. Test kits manufactured by Hach Chemical or Orbeco-Hellige are acceptable. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment to complete the cleaning and disinfection. B. Disinfection of pipelines shall not proceed until all appurtenances and any necessary sample ports have been installed and the Engineer provides authorization. C. Every effort shall be made to keep the water main and its appurtenances clean and dry during the installation process. D. All piping, valves, fittings, and appurtenances which become contaminated during installation shall be cleaned, rinsed with potable water, and then sprayed or swabbed with a 5 percent sodium hypochlorite disinfecting solution prior to installation. E. Water mains under construction that become flooded by storm water, runoff, or groundwater shall be cleaned by draining and flushing with metered potable water until clear water is evident. Upon completion, the entire main shall be disinfected using a method approved by the Engineer. 3.2 METHODS A. Chlorine (Gas) JULY 2014 1. Only vacuum-operated equipment shall be used. Direct-feed chlorinators, which operate solely from gas pressure in the chlorine cylinder, shall not be permitted. The equipment shall incorporate a backflow prevention device at the point of connection to the potable water source used to fill the line being tested. 2. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at the beginning of the system to be chlorinated and shall be injected through a corporation stop, a hydrant, or other approved connection to ensure treatment of the entire system being disinfected. 3. Only a certified, licensed chlorination and testing contractor shall perform gas chlorination work. The chlorination contractor must also possess a Grade II Treatment Plant Operator Certification from the State of California if required by the Engineer. 3 of 7 SECTION 15041 Disinfection of Piping 3.3 B. Sodium Hypochlorite Solution (Liquid) 1. Sodium hypochlorite solution shall be used for cleaning and swabbing piping and appurtenances immediately prior to installation and for disinfecting all components of connections to the City's existing system. 2. Sodium hypochlorite solution may be used for the initial disinfection of newly installed water mains. The solution shall be applied at a terminus of the system to be chlorinated using an injector which can adjust the amount of solution being injected into the piping system. The solution shall be injected in the appropriate concentration to achieve the specified concentration range of chlorine throughout the entire piping system. Where pumping equipment is used in conjunction with an injector, an integral backflow prevention device shall be used and connected to the potable water supply. 3. Water trucks, pumping equipment, piping, appurtenances and all other equipment in contact with potable water shall be disinfected prior to use. 4. CLEANING Sodium hypochlorite solution may also be used to increase the total chlorine residual if the concentration from the initial chlorination of the system is found to be low. The solution shall be added to the system in sufficient amounts at appropriate locations to ensure that the disinfecting solution is present at a concentration within the specified range throughout the piping system. A. Pipelines, including all associated valves and fittings, shall be cleaned to the satisfaction of Owner and Engineer. B. Small pipelines shall be cleaned by flushing with water at the maximum velocity which can be developed, but not less than 2.5 feet per second, unless otherwise permitted by Engineer. Flushing shall continue until the pipeline is free of dirt, debris, and other foreign materials. Cleaning shall precede disinfection. C. Flushing shall be accomplished through the installed valves or fittings, blow-offs or through temporary flushing connections installed for that purpose. D. Booster pumps shall be used if needed to obtain the necessary volume or velocity of water. Pumping equipment installed under this Contract shall not be used for flushing, nor shall the flushing water be passed through them or other installed equipment; temporary bypass piping at each pump or installed equipment shall be provided as needed. 3.4 PROCEDURE FOR DISINFECTING WATER MAINS AND APPURTENANCES A. JULY 2014 The pipeline shall be filled at a rate not to exceed 1 , 135 liters per minute (300 GPM) or a velocity of 0.3m per second (1 foot per second), whichever is less. 4 of 7 SECTION 15041 Disinfection of Piping B. Disinfection shall result in a total chlorine concentration of not less than 25-mg/1. This concentration shall be evenly distributed throughout the system to be disinfected, using a continuous feed method of chlorination. C. All valves shall be operated with the disinfection solution present in the pipeline. All appurtenances such as air-vacuum relief valves, blowoffs, hydrants, backflow prevention devices, and water service laterals shall be flushed with the treated water a sufficient length of time to ensure a chlorine concentration within the specified range in all components of each appurtenance. (Note the limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.) D. The Engineer will verify the presence of the disinfection solution throughout the system by sampling and testing for acceptable chlorine concentrations at the various appurtenances and/or at the test ports provided by the Contractor. Areas of the system found to be below the specified chlorine concentration level shall receive additional flushing as noted above and/or additional disinfection solution as necessary. (Note the limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.) Addition of disinfection solution after the initial charging of the line shall be made by either the liquid chlorine (gas) method, or the sodium hypochlorite method as directed by the Engineer. E. The chlorinated water shall be retained in the system for a minimum of 24 hours. The City Engineer will test the total chlorine residual. The system shall contain a total chlorine residual of not less than 80% of the initial total chlorine residual before the 24-hour soaking period began. If the total chlorine residual has decreased more than 20%, the system shall be soaked for an additional 24-hour period. If the total chlorine residual has not deceased after this additional 24-hour period, the system shall be flushed in accordance with the procedure detailed herein. If the total chlorine residual has decreased, the system shall be flushed in accordance with the procedure detailed herein, and shall be re-disinfected. F. Following a successful retention period as determined by the City Engineer, the chlorinated water shall be flushed from the system at its extremities and at each appurtenance, using potable water from a source designated by the City Engineer. The minimum water velocity during flushing shall be 0.9 meters per second (3 feet per second) or as directed by the Engineer. Flushing shall continue until the replacement water in the new system is equal in chlorine residual to the potable source of supply as verified by the City. (Note the limitations for discharge of chlorinated water outlined below.) G. The Contractor shall contract with a State certified sampling laboratory to perform sampling, transport samples and perform bacteriological sampling and testing as specified herein. 3.5 DISCHARGE OF CHLORINATED WATER A. Indiscriminate onsite disposal or discharge to sewer systems, storm drains, drainage courses or surface waters of chlorinated water is prohibited. Contractor shall notify federal, state, and local regulatory agencies to determine if any special procedures or permits are required for disposal of neutralized or diluted chlorinated water from the final flushing of pipelines and to identify acceptable locations for disposal of the flushing water. All requirements and costs JULY 2014 5 of 7 SECTION 15041 Disinfection of Piping 3.6 associated with notification and obtaining any discharge permits shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. In locations where chlorine neutralization is required, the reducing agent shall be applied to the water as it exits the piping system. The Contractor shall monitor the chlorine residual during the discharge operations. Total residual chlorine limits in these locations, and for the discharge of chlorinated water from the testing of pipelines to surface waters of the San Diego Region are as follows: Total Residual Chlorine Effluent Limitations 30-Day Average Average Daily Maximum Instantaneous Maximum 0.002 mg/1 0.008 mg/1 0.02 mg/1 The various methods of dechlorination available can remove residual chlorine to concentrations below standard analytical methods of detection, 0.02 mg/1, which will assure compliance with the effluent limit. The Contractor will perform all necessary tests, keeping and providing records to the Engineer to ensure that the total residual chlorine effluent limitations listed above are met. C. In locations where no hazard to the environment is evident based on the joint examination described above, the chlorinated water may be broadcast for dust control on the surface of the immediate site. Care shall be exercised in broadcasting the water to prevent runoff. BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING The Contractor shall employ a State certified laboratory to perform bacteriological sampling and testing of all new system installations. The testing methodology employed by the City shall be as set forth in "Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water" (current edition). Testing requirements are as set forth in the California Domestic Water Quality and Monitoring Regulations and commensurate with current requirements for surface water testing. The testing laboratory will analyze the samples for the presence of coliform bacteria and heterotrophic-type bacteria (heterotrophic plate count). The evaluation criteria employed by the City for a passing test sample is as follows: A. Coliform bacteria: no positive sample, and B. Heterotrophic plate count (HPC): 500 colony forming units/ml or less. 3.7 REDISINFECTION If the initial disinfection fails to produce satisfactory bacteriological test results, the pipeline system shall be re-flushed and re-sampled. If the second set of samples does not produce satisfactory results, the pipeline system shall be re-chlorinated, flushed, and re-stamped. The chlorination, flushing, and sampling procedure shall continue until satisfactory results are obtained. Re-disinfection and retesting shall be at the Contractor's expense. JULY 2014 6 of 7 SECTION 15041 Disinfection of Piping 3.8 DISINFECTING TIE-INS AND CONNECTIONS Pipes, fittings, valves and all other components incorporated into connections with the City's existing system shall be spray disinfected or swabbed with a liquid chlorine solution in accordance with AWWA C651 and as specified herein. Upon connection to the main, the line shall be flushed as directed by the City Engineer. Disinfection by this method is generally limited to assemblies of 20' or less in length. Alternate methods such as "predisinfection" prior to installation in accordance with AWWA C651 may be required at the discretion of the City Engineer. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 7 of 7 SECTION 15041 Disinfection of Piping SECTION 15044-HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE PIPELINES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section describes the requirements and procedures for pressure and leakage testing of all pressure mains. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings Specifications 15000, 15041, 15061, and 15068 1.3 REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO TESTING A. Provide testing procedure submittal including testing pressure, testing schedule, test bulkhead locations, and water supply details. B. All piping, valves, fire hydrants, services, and related appurtenances shall be installed prior to testing. C. The pipe trench shall have trench zone backfill placed and compacted with a minimum of 2.5' of material over the pipe. D. All concrete anchor blocks shall be allowed to cure a sufficient time to develop a minimum strength of 13.79 MPa (2,000 psi) before testing. E. Pressure tests on exposed and aboveground piping shall be conducted only after the entire piping system has been installed and attached to pipe supports, hangers or anchors as shown on the Approved Plans. F. Steel pipelines shall not be tested before the mortar lining and coating on all pipe lengths within the line have been in place for a minimum of fourteen ( 14) days. Cement-mortar lined pipe shall not be filled with water until a minimum of eight hours has elapsed after the last joint has been mortared. 1.4 CONCURRENT HYDROSTATIC TESTING AND DISINFECTION OF PIPELINES Hydrostatic testing of pipelines shall be performed prior to or concurrently with the disinfection operations in accordance with Section 15041. In the event repairs are necessary, as indicated by the hydrostatic test, the City may require additional disinfection in accordance with Section 15041. 1.5 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MAINS Hydrostatic testing shall be performed prior to connections to existing mains. A City Connection Permit authorizing connection to the existing system shall be given only on the basis of acceptable hydrostatic, disinfection and bacteriological test results. Connection to existing mains shall be performed in accordance with Section 15000. JULY 2014 1 of4 SECTION 15044 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 WATER A. Potable water shall be used for hydrostatic testing of potable and recycled water mains. B. Potable water shall be supplied by a City-approved source. Make-up water for testing shall also be potable water. C. A chlorinated water solution, in accordance with Section 15041, shall be used to charge the line and for make-up water when hydrostatic testing and disinfection operations are combined. D. Meet all applicable state and local requirements for disposal of testing water. All requirements and costs associated with notifications and obtaining any discharge permit or approvals shall be responsibility of Contractor. 2.2 CONNECTIONS A. B. PART3 Testing water shall be supplied through a metered connection equipped with a backflow prevention device in accordance with Section 15112 at the point of connection to the potable water source used. The Contractor shall provide any temporary piping needed to deliver potable water to the piping that is to be tested. Temporary piping shall be in accordance with Section 15000. EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. All water systems shall be pre-tested to insure passage of test prior to scheduling official test with inspector. B. The Contractor shall provide the City with a minimum of 48 hours' notice prior to the requested date and time for hydrostatic tests. C. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, and equipment for testing. D. Temporary blocking during the tests will be permitted only at temporary plugs, caps or where otherwise directed by the City. E. All valves and appurtenances shall be operated during the test period. The test shall be conducted with valves in the open position. The Contractor is not permitted to operate any valves on the City's system. F. At the onset of testing, all valves, air vacuum assemblies, blowoffs, and services shall be monitored for possible leakage and repairs made, if necessary, before JULY 2014 2 of4 SECTION 15044 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines the test proceeds. The appurtenances shall be monitored through the duration of the testing. G. For pipe with porous lining, such as cement mortar, the pipe shall be filled with water and placed under a slight pressure for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours prior to the actual hydrostatic test. H. Testing shall be made before connecting the new line with the existing City pipes and mains. I. The pipeline should be filled at a rate such that the velocity of flow is less than 1 fps. J. Maximum length of pipe to be included in any one (1) test shall not exceed 2,500 linear feet or vertical elevation difference of 58 feet. 3.2 FIELD TEST PROCEDURE A. Before applying the specified test pressure, care shall be taken to release all air within the pipe and appurtenances to be tested. Air shall be released through services, fire hydrants, air release valves, or other approved locations. B. The leakage shall be considered as the total amount of water pumped into the pipeline during the test period. C. Apply and maintain the test pressure by means of a hydraulic force pump. D. Maintain the test pressure for the following duration by restoring it whenever it falls an amount of 5 psi: Pipe Diameter (inches) 18 and less 20 to 36 Greater than 36 Hours -4- 8 24 E. After the test pressure is reached, use a meter to measure the additional water added to maintain the pressure. This amount of water is the loss due to leakage in the piping system. The allowable leakage for various sizes of PVC & DIP with rubber gaskets are shown in the following table: JULY2014 TYPE OF PIPE: CLASSES: Pipe Sizes (inches) 4" 6" 8" 10" 12" 14" 16" 18" 20" 24" P.V.C. & D.I.P. 150 & 200 3 of4 Allowable Leakage Gals/4 hrs/1 000' of pipe .33 Gals .50 Gals .66 Gals .83 Gals. .99 Gals. 1.16 Gals. 1.32 Gals. 1.49 Gals. 1.66 Gals. 1.98 Gals. SECTION 15044 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines F. The allowable leakage for welded steel pipe shall be zero gallons. G. The allowable leakage for piping having threaded, brazed, or welded (including solvent welded) joints shall be zero gallons. H. Repair and retest any pipes showing leakage rates greater than that allowed in the above criteria. 3.3 TEST PRESSURE Pipe sizes in excess of 16" diameter shall be tested at a pressure based on test pressure as indicated in the pipeline schedule. Pressure shall be maintained for a duration shown in section 3.2 and shall be repumped when it falls an amount of 5 p.s.i. The test pump gauge and meter shall be connected to the water main at a location other than the highest point in the line, in order to allow release of air from the high point. Means shall be provided for accurately measuring the quantity of water pumped through a meter and pumped into the pipe immediately, during and after the test period in order to maintain or restore the initial test pressure. All pipe, fittings, valves, services and appurtenances shall be subjected to the hydrostatic test and irrespective of the measured quantity of leakage, all detectable leaks shall be repaired by the Contractor at the contractor's expense and no cost to Carlsbad Municipal Water District. If a tested system is damaged or a leak occurs after official test the entire system or portion of system will be retested as directed by Inspector. END OF SECTION JULY2014 4of4 SECTION 15044 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines Section 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL BUILDING SYSTEMS MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers general mechanical building system requirements as referenced from other sections and furnishing and installation of: Mechanical identification for the plumbing and heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. 1-2. GENERAL. Materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer. 1-2.01. Coordination. Where two or more units of the same class of materials are required, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the products of one manufacturer. 1-2.02. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.03. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable local codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations which pertain to such work. In case of a conflict between these specifications and any state law or local ordinance, the latter shall govern. 1-2.04. Metal Thickness. Metal thickness and gages specified herein are minimum requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete information, detailed specifications, and data covering materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the materials furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. JULY 2014 1 of6 SECTION 15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems Number Plates Product data on number plates. A listing of equipment to receive number plates shall be submitted. Equipment Motors Name of Manufacturer. Type and Model. Horsepower (kW) rating and service factor. Temperature rise and insulation rating. Full load rotative speed. Type of bearings and method of lubrication. Net weight. Overall dimensions. Efficiency at full, 3/4, and 1/2 loads. Full load current and power factor. Locked rotor current. 1-3.02. Samples. Samples shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. 1-4.01. Welding Qualifications. All welding procedures and welding operators shall be qualified by an independent testing laboratory in accordance with the applicable provisions of AWS Standard Qualification Procedures. All procedure and operator qualifications shall be in written form and subject to Engineer's review. Accurate records of operator and procedure qualifications shall be maintained by Contractor and made available to Engineer upon request. 1-4.02. Manufacturer's Experience. Unless the equipment manufacturer is specifically named in this section, the manufacturer shall have furnished equipment of the type and size specified which has been in successful operation for not less than the past 5 years. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. All equipment shall be designed and selected to meet the specified conditions. Where equipment is provided with special coatings, unit capacities shall be corrected to account for any efficiency losses from the selected special coating. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. 2-2.01. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values of the first manufacturer listed. Contractor shall review the contract JULY 2014 2 of6 SECTION 15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems Drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings, and installation requirements and shall make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer. 2-2.02. Elevation. Equipment shall be designed to operate at the elevation indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. All equipment furnished for sites above 2000 feet [610 m] above sea level shall be properly derated to operate and meet the specified capacities at the site conditions. 2-2.03. Eauioment Efficiencies. Unless otherwise indicated in the respective equipment paragraph, the equipment efficiency shall be in accordance with the requirements of ASHRAE Energy Standard 90.1. 2-2.04. Drive Units. Drive units shall be designed for 24 hour continuous service. 2-2.04.01. V-Belt Drives. Each V-belt drive shall include a sliding base or other suitable belt tension adjustment. V-belt drives shall have a service factor of at least 1.5 at maximum speed based on the nameplate horsepower [kW] of the drive motor unless otherwise indicated in the specific equipment paragraph. Multiple belts shall be provided in matched sets and shall be oil resistant, non- static type. External belts and drive assemblies shall be protected by a belt safety guard constructed in accordance with OSHA requirements. The guard shall be provided with a tachometer opening. Unless otherwise indicated in the specific equipment paragraph, equipment with smaller than 1 0 horsepower [7 .5 kW] motors shall have adjustable pitch sheaves and equipment with 10 horsepower [7 .5 kW] and larger motors shall have fixed sheaves. Adjustable sheaves shall be selected so that the fan speed at the specified conditions is selected at the mid-position of the sheave range. Fixed sheaves shall be replaced as necessary with sheaves of the proper size during the air system balancing to provide the required speed for the specified airflow. 2-2.04.02. Electric Motors. Motor horsepower scheduled on the Drawings are minimum motor horsepower. Larger motors shall be provided if required to meet the specified capacities for the equipment furnished. Motors furnished with equipment shall meet the following requirements. a. Premium efficient motors with a minimum efficiency of at least that specified in the Common Motor Requirements for Process Equipment section shall be provided where available as a standard option. All other motors shall meet the minimum efficiency standards required by the Energy Policy Act (EPACT) of 1992. JULY 2014 3 of6 SECTION 15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems b. Designed and applied in accordance with NEMA, ANSI, IEEE, AFBMA, and NEC for the duty service imposed by the driven equipment, such as frequent starting, intermittent overload, high inertia, mounting configuration, or service environment. c. Rated for continuous duty at 40°C ambient. d. Motors used in applications which exceed the usual service conditions as defined by NEMA, such as higher than 40°C ambient, altitude exceeding 3,300 feet [1 005 m], explosive or corrosive environments, departure from rated voltage and frequency, poor ventilation, frequent starting, or adjustable frequency drive applications, shall be properly selected with respect to their service conditions and shall not exceed specified temperature rise limits in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 for insulation class, service factor, and motor enclosure type. e. To ensure long life, motors shall have nameplate horsepower [kW] equal or greater than the maximum load imposed by the driven equipment and shall carry a service factor rating as follows: Motor Size Enclosure Service Factor Fractional hp [kW] Open 1.15 Other Than Open 1.0 Integral hp [kW] Open 1.15 Other Than Open 1.0 Motors used with adjustable frequency drives shall have a 1.15 service factor on sine wave power and a 1.0 service factor on drive power. f. Designed for full voltage starting. g. Designed to operate from an electrical system that may have a maximum of 5 percent voltage distortion according to IEEE 519. h. Totally enclosed motors shall have a continuous moisture drain that also excludes insects. i. Bearings shall be either oil or grease lubricated. j. Motor nameplates shall indicate as a minimum the manufacturer name and model number, motor horsepower, voltage, phase, frequency, speed, full load current, locked rotor current, frame size, service factor, power factor, and efficiency. k. Drip proof motors, or totally enclosed motors at Contractor's option, shall be furnished on equipment in indoor, above-grade, clean, and dry locations. I. Totally enclosed motors shall be furnished on: (1) Outdoor equipment. (2) Equipment for installation below grade. JULY 2014 4 of6 SECTION 15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems (3) Equipment operating in chemical feed and chemical handling locations. (4) Equipment operating in wet or dust-laden locations. m. Explosion proof motors shall be furnished as specified by applicable codes or as specified in other sections. n. A manufacturer's standard motor may be supplied on packaged equipment and fans in which case a redesign of the unit would be required to furnish motors of other than the manufacturer's standard design. However, in all cases, the motor types indicated are preferred and shall be furnished if offered by the manufacturer as a standard option. o. Motors used with adjustable frequency drives shall have insulation system meeting the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31. 2-3. MANUFACTURE AND FABRICATION. 2-3.01. Welding. All welds shall be continuous (seal type) on submerged or partially submerged components. 2-3.02. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. Anchor bolts, expansion anchors, nuts, and washers shall be as indicated in the Anchorage in Concrete and Masonry section unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 2-3.03. Edge Grinding. Sharp corners of cut or sheared edges which will be submerged in operation shall be dulled by at least one pass of a power grinder to improve paint adherence. 2-3.04. Surface Preparation. All iron and steel surfaces, except motors, shall be shop cleaned by sandblasting or equivalent, in strict conformance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations. All mill scale, rust, and contaminants shall be removed before shop primer is applied. 2-4. MATERIALS. 2-4.01. Mechanical Identification. Mechanical identification consisting of equipment number plates, equipment information plates, valve tags, and ductwork identification shall conform to the requirements as indicated herein. 2-4.01.01. Number Plates. Hand-lettered or tape labels will not be acceptable. Number plates for control equipment such as but not limited to thermostats, control stations, and emergency ventilation shutoff switches shall in addition to the specific device identification list the controlled equipment in parenthesis below the device number. JULY 2014 5 of6 SECTION 15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems 2-4.01.03. Valves. Valve tags shall indicate if the valve is normally open or normally closed. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section shall be installed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by the Engineer. The installation of identifying devices shall be coordinated with the application of covering materials and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. All surfaces to receive adhesive number plates shall be cleaned before installation of the identification device. End of Section JULY 2014 6 of6 SECTION 15050 Basic Mechanical Building Systems SECTION 15057 COPPER TUBING, BRASS AND BRONZE PIPE FITTINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials and installation of copper tubing, brass and bronze pipe fittings and appurtenances. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. ANSI B 1.20.1 Pipe treads, general purpose ANSI B 16.18 Case copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15061 and 15064 1.4 SERVICE LATERAL WET TAP CONNECTIONS Contractor shall perform all wet tap connections to existing pipelines in accordance with ...._..,. Section 15000. 1.5 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION Copper Tubing, Brass, and Bronze Pipe Fittings for recycled water shall be identified with purple color coating, purple polyethylene sleeve, identification labels or signs in accordance with Section 15000. 1.6 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be used for all copper tubing, except that which is bored or jacked, in accordance with Section 15000. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 COPPER TUBING Copper tubing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM B 88 Type K or ASTM B 88 M (Metric) Type A seamless copper water tube. Copper tubing up to 1" diameter shall be soft; 2" may be soft or rigid. Components shall be selected from the Approved Materials List in accordance with the Standard Drawings. JULY 2014 1 of3 SECTION 15057 Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings 2.2 BRASS PIPE, NIPPLES, AND FITTINGS Threaded nipples, brass pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM B 43, regular wall thickness. Threads shall conform to ANSI B 1.20.1. Fittings shall be flared or silver soldered pr CMWD Standard Drawings W3 and W4. 2.3 BRONZE APPURTENANCES A. Corporation stops, curb stops, meter and angle meter stops, meter flange adapters, and bronze-bodied service saddles shall be selected from the Approved Materials List in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Fittings shall be flared type or silver soldered. C. All items specified herein shall be manufactured of bronze conforming to ASTM B 62. D. Service saddles shall be the double strap type. Service saddles shall be used on all service and appurtenance connections on PVC piping. For piping materials other than PVC, service and appurtenance connections shall be performed in accordance with the Approved Drawings. 2.4 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. 2.5 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape materials shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS A. Trenching, bedding, backfilling and compacting shall be performed in accordance with CMWD Standard Drawings. Provide a minimum cover of 30" below finished street grade. B. Cut tubing true and square and remove burrs. C. Bends in soft copper tubing shall be long sweep. Shape bends with shaping tools. Form bends without flattening, buckling, or thinning the tubing wall at any point. D. Assemble copper tubing and fittings per the manufacturer's recommendation in accordance with the Standard Drawings. JULY 2014 2 of3 SECTION 15057 Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings E. Install warning/identification tape in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. F. All fittings shall be soldered or flared as shown on the Approved Plans and Standard Drawings. 3.2 SERVICE SADDLES A. Service saddles shall be located a minimum of 24" from any pipe joint or fittings. B. Service saddles for connections shall be located a minimum of 24" from other saddles. Additionally, multiple service saddles for connections that are installed on the same side of a single pipe length shall be alternately staggered between 1 Oo and 30o to prevent a weak plane in the pipe. C. The surface of the pipe shall be clean and all loose material shall be removed to provide a hard, clean surface. D. The service saddle shall be tightened in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to ensure a tight seal, using care to prevent damage or distortion of the service saddle or corporation stop due to over-tightening. E. The tap into the pipe shall ·be made in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendation. Tapping tools and shell cutters with internal teeth or double slots that will retain the coupon shall be used. 3.3 DISINFECTION AND BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING Disinfection, bacteriological testing, and flushing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15041. 3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Field hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15044. JULY 2014 END OF SECTION 3 of3 SECTION 15057 Copper Tubing, Brass and Bronze Pipe Fittings SECTION 15061 CEMENT-MORTAR LINED AND COATED STEEL PIPE AND SPECIALS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, design, fabrication, and installation of cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe and specials, 6 inches in diameter and larger. The size, service, and location of steel pipelines are covered in the Pipeline Schedule section. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. AWWAC200 AWWAC205 AWWAC206 AWWAC207 AWWAC208 AWWAC209 AWWAC210 AWWAC213 AWWAC214 AWWAC602 AWWAC604 AWS ASME M11 B18.2.1 B18.2.2 Steel Water Pipe 6-inches and Larger Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe Steel Pipe Flanges Dimensions for Fabricated Fittings Cold Applied Tape Coating for the Exterior of Special Sections, Connection and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines Coal-tar Epoxy Coating System for Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines Fusion-Bonded Epoxy Coating for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines Tape Coatings Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipeline Cement Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines in Place - 4 ln. and Larger Installation of Steel Water Pipe - 4 ln. and Larger Standard Qualification Procedure for Manual Welding Operators Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Steel Pipe -A Guide for Design and Installation Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series) Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series) 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings Specifications 02223, 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15074, 15100, 15102, 15108, and 15112, 16640. 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION Cement-mortar lined and coated steel pipe and specials shall be provided as shown on the Approved Plans. JULY 2014 1 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials 1.5 SPECIALS A special is defined as any piece of pipe other than a normal full length of straight pipe. This includes, but is not limited to, elbows, short pieces, reducers, tees, crosses, spools, sections with outlets, beveled sections and access holes. 1.6 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittals are required for the following: A. Submit Shop Drawings, material lists, manufacturer's literature and catalog cuts of, but not limited to, the following: Shop Drawings Layout Schedule Manufacturer's tests Mill Reports or Plant Test Reports Certified Affidavits of Compliance Ground Profile and Utility Locations Fabrication Details Dimensional Checks Protective Coatings Welding Rods for Field Welding Pipe Design Criteria Shipping, Handling and Storage details Shop Drawings shall be submitted and approved prior to manufacture of pipe. The layout schedule shall indicate the order of installation, the length and location of each pipe section and special, the station and elevation of the pipe invert at all changes in grade, and all data on curves and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment. ·:) B. Submit data used by the Contractor in manufacture and quality control. C. Test reports showing the physical properties of the rubber used in the gaskets shall be submitted. 1.7 PAYMENT A. Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto. B. Payment by the linear foot shall be for each diameter and for each pipe strength designation measured horizontally over the pipe centerline. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. JULY2014 Cement-mortar lined and coated steep pipe shall be inspected at the supplier's manufacturing plant by the City Engineer. Contractor shall be responsible for City Engineer's expenses, including travel, time, meals and overnight accommodations. Overnight accommodations and air travel may be required, at the discretion of the Engineer, if the manufacturing plant is more than 100 miles from the City Engineer's office. In addition to the shop hydrostatic testing performed on pipe cylinders required per AWWA C200, all welds of specials and attachments (i.e., joint rings and 2 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials nozzles) shall be tested by a dye-penetrant process. Certification of such testing shall be submitted to the City. C. Field welders shall be certified under Section IX, Part A of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code or in accordance with AWWA C206, Section 3. Welders shall present a copy of their certification to the City prior to performing any field welding. Certifications shall be dated within three (3) years of the job to be performed. D. Plainly mark each length of straight pipe and each special at the bell end to identify the proper location of the pipe item by reference to the layout schedule. E. The top of all pipe and specials shall be clearly identified by marking the top with "T.O.P." for easy identification in the field. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Delivery, storage, and handling of the pipe and specials shall be as follows: A. B. C. D. E. F. JULY2014 Pipe and fittings shall be carefully handled and shall be protected against damage to linings and coatings due to impact shocks. Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner which will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the site or elsewhere. Pipe shall be handled and stored per these requirements and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. Temporary internal bracing shall be installed in all pipe 24" and larger prior to shipment to the job site. Temporary internal bracing shall be 4" x 4" wooden struts installed in both the horizontal and vertical directions. Each set of struts shall be nailed together as a unit. Wooden wedges may be used to maintain the proper tight fit of the internal bracing. The bracing shall be located 12" in from each end of the pipe section for all pipe, and additionally at the mid-point for piping 30" and larger. Maintain internal bracing as specified under Pipe Installation. Transport pipe to the job site on padded bunks with nylon tie-down straps or padded bonding to protect the pipe. Pipes and specials shall only be handled with appropriate spreader bars and wide nylon slings. Chains or wire rope slings shall not be used. Under no circumstances shall pipe or specials be pushed or dragged along the ground. All pipe sections over 20' in length shall be lifted at the quarter points from each end. Store pipe on earth berms or timber cradles adjacent to the trench in the numerical order of installation. Place the supports at about one-quarter point from the pipe ends. Maintain plastic end caps on all pipe and specials in good condition until the pipe is ready to be installed in the trench. Periodically open the plastic end caps and spray potable water inside the pipe for moisture control. 3 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials G. Contractor-furnished pipe and fittings in which the lining has been damaged shall be replaced by and at the expense of Contractor. With the concurrence of Engineer, small and readily accessible damaged areas may be repaired as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Contractor shall repair any damage to pipe coatings and linings before the pipe is installed. 1.10 PIPE MANUFACTURER'S EXPERIENCE AND FIELD SERVICES All steel pipe, fittings, specials, bolts, gaskets, other jointing materials and appurtenances shall be fabricated, lined, coated, and furnished under the direction and management of one pipe manufacturer. The pipe manufacturer responsibilities, which shall include, at a minimum; coordinating and furnishing all pipe materials, gaskets, bolts, and other jointing materials and pipe appurtenances (except for furnishing coupled joints and other similar products by a specified manufacturer) for a complete piping system that meets the specified pipe test pressure and service conditions; certifying that all pipe, fittings, specials, and other pipe materials, gaskets, and bolts specified herein are being manufactured in full accordance with the Contract Documents; preparing and submitting all submittal information and shop drawings; and making any corrections that may be required to submittal information and shop drawings. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 PIPE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Pipe manufacturing shall be the product of one company (IS0-9001 or SPFA certified with minimum 5 years' experience) in the business of designing and manufacturing cement-mortar lined, tape wrapped and mortar coated steel pipe. All pipe, fittings, specials, coatings, linings, and appurtenances shall be fabricated at one company facility for quality control purposes, unless otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. The pipe shall consist of the following components: A welded steel cylinder with joints formed integrally with the steel cylinder or with steel joint rings welded to the ends; A centrifugally-cast cement-mortar lining; Welded bell and spigot joint, so designed that the joint will be watertight under all conditions of service; Tape wrapping of the cylinder over a dielectric coating; A dense, concentric, steel reinforced exterior cement-mortar coating. The Plans indicate the elevations and alignment of the pipeline, the nominal inside diameter of the lined pipe, and the minimum steel cylinder thickness or design pressure (adjusted to satisfy transient conditions). Design soil cover shall be as stated on the Plans or Specifications or, if none is stated, the amount of cover shall be scaled from the Plans. The pipe wall thickness shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA M11. Minimum thickness of the steel cylinder shall be as shown on the Plans and/or pipeline schedule. JULY2014 4 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials 2.2 STEEL CYLINDERS Materials used in fabricating steel cylinders shall be hot rolled carbon steel sheets conforming to the requirements of ASTM A53, Grade B, ASTM A570 Grade 36 or Grade 33, or steel plates conforming to the requirements of ASTM A36. The method of testing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A570. Full penetration welds will be required. Welds may be straight or spiral seam. The circumferential stress in the steel shall not exceed 16,500 psi at the design pressure. Remove the exterior weld bead along the entire exterior surface of the pipe. The exterior weld bead shall be flush with the exterior surface of the pipe with a tolerance of plus 1/32-inch. 2.3 CEMENT Cement for mortar lining and coating shall be Portland Cement Type II and conform to ASTM C150, unless otherwise specified. Admixtures containing chlorides shall not be used. 2.4 STEEL BAR OR WIRE REINFORCEMENT Circumferential steel bar or wire reinforcement shall conform to ASTM A615, Grade 40, "Specifications for Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement". Wire fabric reinforcing for cement-mortar coatings and linings of fittings shall conform to ASTM A 185, "Specifications for Welded Steel Wire Fabric," or ASTM A497, "Specifications for Welded Deformed Steel Wire Fabric." Spiral-wire reinforcement for cement-mortar coatings shall conform to ASTM A82. 2.5 STEEL FOR JOINT RINGS Steel for bell rings shall conform to ASTM A575, "Specification for Merchant Quality Hot Rolled Carbon Steel Bars." Steel for spigot rings shall conform to ASTM A576, "Specification for Special Quality Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Bars." 2.6 DIMENSIONS The steel pipe sizes shown on the Plans or otherwise referred to shall be the nominal inside diameter. Unless otherwise specified, the nominal diameter shown on the Plans shall be considered to be the inside diameter after lining. 2.7 MANUFACTURER'S TESTS Each steel cylinder with joint rings attached and cylinders for specials shall be hydrostatically tested to a circumferential stress of at least 22,000 psi, but not more than 25,000 psi. If leaks develop during testing, the cylinder shall be repaired by welding and retested until all leaks are eliminated. The seams in short radius bends and special fittings shall be tested by the air-soap method using air at a pressure of 5 psi or by the dye-check method. However, if the fitting is fabricated from cylinders which have been previously hydrostatically tested, no further test will be required on seams so tested. JULY 2014 5 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Hydrostatic testing of fittings to 150% of the design pressure may replace the tests described above. Any defects revealed by any of the alternate test methods shall be repaired by welding and the fitting retested until all defects have been eliminated. 2.8 FABRICATION DETAILS Each special and each length of straight pipe shall be plainly marked at the bell end to identify the design pressure and the proper location of the pipe or special by reference to layout schedule. Exposed portion of joint rings shall be protected from corrosion by the manufacturer's standard coating. The pipe shall be fitted with devices shown on the Plans to permit continuous electrical bonding of the various joints following field installation. 2.9 PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS All exposed metal surfaces shall be painted or coated as specified in Section 09870 and 09900, Painting and Coating, except where other coatings are specified elsewhere and in this section. All steel pipe and fittings shall be cement-mortar lined in accordance with AWWA C205 and C602. Linings shall be in accordance with table below. Cement mortar lining for all pipe shall be shop applied. All steel pipe and fittings for underground service shall be cement-mortar lined, taped wrapped and cement-mortar coated in accordance with AWWA C205, C209, C214 and C602 and Section 09870 unless otherwise specified on the Plans. Hold backs for coating and lining shall be per the drawings. For the following nominal inside diameters, the lining thickness and minimum cement-mortar coating thickness shall be as follows: LINING COATING Nominal Pipe Size Thickness Tolerance Thickness Tolerance (inches} {inches} {inches} {inches} {inches} -4-10 1/4 -1/32+1/32 1/2 +1/8 12-18 3/8 -1/16+1/8 5/8 +1/8 20-44 1/2 -1/16+1/8 3/4 +1/8 45-58 3/4 -1/16+1/8 1 +1/8 60 and over 3/4 -1/16+1/8 1 1/4 +1/8 All steel pipe and fittings that are exposed within a structure shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA C210 and Section 09900 Painting and Coating. JULY 2014 6 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials 2.10 STEEL PIPE AND SPECIALS Steel pipe and specials shall conform to the requirements of the AWWA C200 and C205, and AWWA M11, except as modified herein. A. Steel for fabricated cylinders shall conform to ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 283/ A 283M, Grade D, or ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 36. Other steel grades may be used only upon approval of the City Engineer. B. Cement-mortar coating shall be reinforced in accordance with AWWA C205. C. Cement mortar grout for field joints shall consist of a mixture of 1-1/2 to 2 parts sand to 1 part Type II or Type V Portland Cement with enough clean, potable water to permit packing and troweling without crumbling. The sand shall be washed, well-graded sand such that all will pass a No. 8 sieve. The quantity of water to be used in the preparation of grout shall be the minimum required to produce a mixture sufficiently workable for the purpose intended. Grout shall attain a minimum compressive strength of 12.4 MPa (1 ,800 psi) in 28 days. D. In certain circumstances, rapid-setting mortar may be required. Acceleration admixtures may be used in the mix as permitted by the City Engineer. Calcium chloride shall not be used in the mix. 2.11 PAINTING AND COATING A. Paint and coating products for exterior surfaces of all pipe and appurtenances not otherwise mortar-coated shall be in accordance with Section 09910 and the Approved Materials List. B. Paint and coating products for areas in contact with potable water such plain ends of pipe, grooved and shouldered ends of pipe and exposed inside surfaces or threaded outlets and blind flanges shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.12 BOLTS AND NUTS FOR FLANGES Bolts and nuts shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. 2.13 GASKETS A. B. JULY 2014 Rubber-ring gaskets shall comply with AWWA C200 according to the applicable joint type and pressure rating of the piping system. All gaskets shall be furnished by the pipe manufacturer. Pipe manufacturer shall submit certificates of gasket suitability certifying that the gasket materials are compatible with the joints specified and are recommended for the specified test pressure and service condtions. Flange gaskets shall comply with AWWA C207. Flange gaskets shall be 3.18mm ( 1/8") thick acrylic or aramid fibers bound with nitrile for all sizes of pipe. Gaskets 7 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials shall be full-face type with pre-punched holes or ring-type extending to the inner edge of the bolt circumference of the flange. C. In the event of encountering organic solvents or petroleum products during the course of the work, alternate gasket materials or joint treatment will be required as directed by the City Engineer. 2.14 CEMENT-MORTAR CURING The pipe shall be cured by water curing, steam curing or a combination of both. Water curing and steam curing may be used interchangeably on a time ratio basis of four hours water curing to one hour of steam curing. Where steam curing is used, the pipe shall be kept in steam maintained at a temperature of 100 F to 150 F for the specified period and, where water curing is used, the pipe shall be kept continually moist by spraying or other means for the specified periods. The pipe shall not be allowed to dry either on the inside or outside surfaces during the curing period. Where water curing is used, the pipe shall be kept continuously moist for seven days at a temperature of not less than 40 F before being moved to the trench site. Cement-mortar lining and coating of special pipe and fittings may be cured in accordance with the above provisions or by prompt application of a white-pigmented sealing compound conforming to ASTM C309. Sealing compound shall not be applied at joint ends where compound will interfere with the bond of joint mortar. 2.15 SPECIAL PIPE AND FITTINGS The manufacturer shall furnish all fittings and special pieces required for closures, curves, bends, branches, manholes, outlets, connections for mainline valves, and other appurtenances required by the Plans. The dimensions for steel pipe fittings shall conform to AWWA C208. Special fittings shall be fabricated of welded steel sheet or plate, lined and coated with cement-mortar of the same type as the adjoining pipe and applied as specified for lining and coating of specials in AWWA C205 and as modified herein. Butt welding shall be used, unless otherwise indicated on the Plans. Minimum centerline radius of an elbow or bend shall be as follows. The maximum deflection at a mitered girth seam shall be 22-1/2 degrees. Pipe Size (Inches) 30-48 51-60 Over60 Minimum Centerline Radius 2-1/2 times ID 10-feet 2 times ID The circumferential stress in the sheet or plate shall not exceed 13,500 psi at the design pressure. The minimum thickness of sheet or plate shall be as follows: JULY2014 8 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Fitting Diameter Range (Inches) 18 and under 20-24 26-36 38-45 48-54 57-60 63-72 75-84 Minimum Thickness of Sheet or Plate 10 gauge 3/16" or 7 gauge 1/4" 5/16" 3/8" 7/16" 1/2" 5/8" Outlets at special fittings shall be reinforced with collars or crotch plates. If collar reinforcement is used, the outlet diameter shall not exceed 69% of the ID of the fitting. The diameter of outlets reinforced with crotch plates may equal the fitting diameter. The effective shoulder width "W" of collars from the inside surface of the steel outlet to the outside edge of the collar measured on the surface of the cylinder shall be not less than one-third or more than one-half the ID of steel outlet. The thickness of the collar shall be not less than "T" as determined by: Pw x ID cyl. x 10 outlet T= 36,000 xW where Pw is the design pressure in pounds per square inch, and all other dimensions are in inches. Collars may be oval in shape or rectangular with well-rounded corners. Outlets 3-inches in diameter and smaller may be installed without collars. The design of crotch plates shall be based upon the paper by Swanson, Chapton, Wilkinson, King, and Nelson, originally published in June 1955 issue of the Journal of the American Water Works Association and in conformance with AWWA M-11. 2.16 TAPE WRAP AND MORTAR SHIELD Tape wrap and mortar shield for concrete mortar lined steel pipe shall be in accordance with Section 09870. 2.17 HANDLING AND SHIPMENT Pipe and special fittings shall be handled carefully, and blocking and holddowns used during shipment shall prevent movement or shifting. Both ends of pipe and fittings on trucks or rail cars shall be bulkheaded or covered in order to prevent excessive drying of the interior lining. 2.18 WATERTIGHT/DUSTTIGHT PIPE SLEEVES Watertight/Dusttight pipe sleeves shall be manufactured by PSI Thunderline/Link Seal, Insulating type with modular rubber sealing elements, nonmetallic pressure plates, and stainless steel bolts and nuts. JULY 2014 9 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL At all times when the work of installing pipe is not in progress, including worker break times, the ends of the pipe shall be closed with a vermin-proof and child-proof cap or plug. Do not permit trench water to enter the pipe. Do not place tools, clothing, or other materials in the pipe. The Contractor shall maintain the interior of the pipe in a sanitary condition free from foreign materials. 3.2 DEWATERING 3.3 The Contractor shall provide, and maintain at all times during construction, ample means and devices to promptly remove and dispose of all water from any source entering trench excavations or other parts of the work in accordance with Section 02223. Any damage caused by flooding of the trench shall be the Contractor's responsibility. Contractor shall obtain a Discharge Permit as required by the Regional Water Quality Control Board. Dewatering shall be performed by methods that will maintain a dry excavation, preservation of the final lines and grades and protection of all utilities. If flooding of the trench does occur, the Contractor shall immediately dewater and restore the trench. Damaged or altered pipeline appurtenances shall be repaired or replaced as directed by the Engineer. PIPE INSTALLATION When the work requires and the size of the pipe allows entry of personnel into the pipe, the Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State regulations for confined space entry. Work inside pipelines shall not be undertaken until all the tests and safety provisions of the Code of Federal Regulations 1910.146, and the General Industry Safety Orders of the California Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 5159 for confined space entry have been performed and the area is verified as safe to enter. Generally, the aforementioned safety provisions apply to pipe 24" and larger. Note that for pipe less than 24" diameter, more stringent safety procedures apply. The Contractor shall furnish and install all pipe, specials, fittings, closure pieces, valves, supports, bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing materials, and all other appurtenances as shown on the Approved Plans and as required to provide a complete and workable installation. Pipe installations shall be as shown on the Approved Plans and Shop Drawings in accordance with the following: A. No pipe shall be installed where the linings or coatings show cracks that may be harmful as determined by the City Engineer. Such damaged linings and coatings shall be repaired or new, undamaged pipe sections shall be provided. B. Pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced by the Contractor. JULY2014 10 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials C. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to ensure that there are no damaged portions of the pipe. The Contractor shall remove or smooth out any burrs, gouges, weld splatter, or other small defects prior to laying the pipe. D. Before placement of pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of any foreign substance which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed during any interruption to the work as noted above. E. Pipe shall be laid directly on the bedding material. All trenching, embedment, and backfilling shall conform to the Section 02223, Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling, and Compacting. No blocking will be permitted, and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the full length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of handling devices after the pipe is laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or couplings and to permit visual inspection of the joint. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations and for application of coatings on field joints. F. Installation Tolerances: Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the approved layout schedule to the proper lines and grades in accordance with the following: G. H. JULY 2014 1. Each section of pipe having a nominal diameter less than 48" shall be laid not to vary more than 0.2-ft horizontally or 0.1-ft vertically from the alignment and elevations shown on the Approved Plans. 2. Each section of pipe having nominal diameter 48" and larger shall be laid not to vary more than five percent (5%) of the pipe diameter horizontally or two and one half percent (2.5%) of the pipe diameter vertically. 3. In addition to the horizontal and vertical tolerances above, lay the pipe so that no high or low points occur along the pipeline other than those shown on the approved layout schedule. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes, the City Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, by the use of bevel adapters, or by the use of additional fittings. However, in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed seventy five percent (75%) of the maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer. No joint shall be deflected any amount that will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the finished joint. In all cases the joint opening, before finishing with the protective mortar inside the pipe, shall be the controlling factor. Pipes shall be laid uphill on grades exceeding 1 0 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill grade shall be blocked and held in place until the following pipe section has been installed to provide sufficient support to prevent movement. 11 of19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials I. Temporary internal pipe bracing shall be left in place in pipe sizes larger than 24" until pipe zone compaction has been completed. Bracing in pipe smaller than 24" may be removed immediately after the pipe has been laid into the trench. The Contractor shall employ a laboratory to monitor pipe deflection by measuring pipe inside diameter before bracing is removed and 24 hours after struts are removed. Pipe deflection shall not exceed 3 percent in 24 hours after the bracing has been removed. After the backfill has been placed, the struts shall be removed. J. Cold Weather Protection: No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation onto which frost has penetrated or at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be established that the trench will be backfilled prior to formation of ice and frost. K. Pipe and Special Protection: The openings of all pipe and specials where the pipe and specials have been mortar-lined in the shop shall be protected with suitable bulkheads to maintain a moist atmosphere and to prevent unauthorized access by persons, animals, water, or any undesirable substance. The bulkheads shall be designed to prevent drying out of the interior of the pipe. The Contractor shall introduce water into the pipe to keep the mortar moist where moisture has been lost due to damaged bulkheads. 3.4 RUBBER-RING JOINTS: SHALL ONLY BE USED AS SHOWN ON PLANS For pipe sizes smaller than 24-inches, the bell end shall be buttered with cement mortar in a manner and quantity that will completely fill the recess between the respective linings of the two joined sections of pipe. The spigot end shall then be entered into the bell end of the adjacent pipe section the distance shown on the Shop Drawings. Immediately after joining, the pipe interior shall be swabbed to remove all excess mortar by drawing a swab or squeegee through the pipe. The pipe interior shall be inspected by a closed circuit television camera, to assure quality of internal mortar. For pipe sizes 24-inches and larger, the joint recess shall be pointed from the inside with cement mortar after the backfill has been placed and compacted and the pipe permitted to take any normal settlement. The mortar shall be mixed of one part cement to one and one-half parts of sand and pointing accomplished in two or more lifts and finished off flush by troweling. Pipe shall be inspected visually by work persons within the pipe, to assure internal mortar quality. Each pipe joint shall be bonded to provide electrical continuity along the entire pipeline. The bond shall be made by the proper welding of pipe joints together as indicated on the Plans. The outside joint recess shall be grouted with cement mortar after a diaper has first been placed around the joint and tightened securely to prevent leakage while the mortar is being poured. The diaper shall be made of moisture resisting paper or heavy duty sail cloth of sufficiently close weave to prevent cement loss from the mortar. The diapers shall be hemmed on each edge and shall contain a metal strap within each hem sufficiently longer than the circumference of the pipe to allow a secure attachment of the diaper to the pipe. The diaper width will depend upon pipe size and design and shall be the width recommended by the manufacturer. Following installation of the diapers, the joints shall be poured and rodded from one side only until the mortar comes up to the top of the diaper on the opposite side. Approximately one hour subsequent to the pouring of JULY2014 12 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials the joint, the joint shall be rechecked and, if any settlement, leakage or shrinkage has taken place, the joint shall be refilled with mortar. Outside joints may be grouted before or after the placement of bedding and backfill materials if those materials are to be mechanically compacted. If bedding and backfill materials are to be hydraulically densified, grout shall be poured and allowed to set before applying water. In any case, joints shall be grouted before backfill is placed over the top of the pipe. 3.5 BUTI -STRAP CLOSURE JOINTS Butt-Strap Closure Joints: Butt-strap closure joints shall be completed in the trench after the pipe has been laid to the alignment and grade shown on the Plans. They should be field welded by full-circumferential fillet welds or one of the edges may be shop welded and the other field welded. Welding shall be done in the same manner as specified for welded joints. The interior of the joints shall be filled with stiff plastic mortar and finished off smoothly with the inside of the pipe. Clean the inside steel surfaces by wire brushing or power brushing. Wire mesh, 2" x 4" x No. 13 gauge, clean, and free from rust, shall be applied to the interior of the joints so that the wires on the 2-inch spacing run circumferentially around the pipe. The wires on the 4-inch spacing shall be crimped in such a manner that the mesh will be held 3/8-inch from the metal joint surface. The mesh shall be lapped a minimum of 8-inches and shall be securely wired in position. Pack the cement mortar into the recess of the joint and steel trowel finish to match the adjoining pipes. The joint exterior shall be coated with mortar to a minimum thickness of 1 %-inches. Immediately prior to applying mortar to the interior or exterior of the joints, a cement wash shall be applied to the metal to be coated. 3.6 FIELD WELDED JOINTS A. B. JULY 2014 Welded joints shall be completed after the pipe is in final position. Welded joints shall be a lap-welded slip joint as shown on the Plans. The minimum overlap of the assembled bell and spigot section of lap joint shall be shown on the plans. Any recess between the bell and spigot shall be caulked with a rod to facilitate the welding. Pipe of 30-inches in diameter or more may be welded from the inside. Joints shall be welded on the inside and outside where indicated on the Plans as "Double Welded Joints." Field Welding shall be in accordance with AWWA C206, M11 and AWS 01.1, except as modified herein. Welders assigned to the Work shall be qualified under the AWS standard qualification procedure, within the past three (3) years. Joints to be welded shall be cleaned, preferably prior to placing the pipe in the trench, of all loose scale, heavy rust, paint, cement, and grease. At least a 1/2-inch recess shall be provided between adjacent mortar-covered surfaces to place the weld. In all hand welding, the metal shall be deposited in successive layers and the minimum number of passes shall be 2. Preheat the joints to be welded where required in accordance with Table 1 of AWWA C206. 13 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials C. All joints shall be visually inspected and shall undergo dye testing and hydrostatic testing, in accordance with AWWA C-206 and ASTM E165. D. After the joints have been welded, the interior joint shall be grouted with cement mortar in accordance with sub-parts 3.9 and 3.10 of this Section. E. Welded joints shall be completed in the trench per AWWA C206. F. Both the bell and spigot ends shall be cleaned of foreign matter prior to welding. G. Welding electrodes shall be as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Typically, electrodes shall be E6010 for root passes and for additional passes. Do not deposit more than 1/8" of throat thickness per pass. H. Weld material shall be deposited in successive layers. Complete and clean each pass around the entire circumference of the pipe before commencing the next pass. I. The minimum number of passes in the completed weld shall be as follows: J. K. L. M. N. 0. JULY 2014 Steel Cylinder Thickness mm (inches) 6.35 or less (0.2500 or Y4") Greater than 6.35 (0.2500 or %") Field Weld Minimum Number of Passes 2 3 To minimize longitudinal stresses due to temperature variations, it is necessary to leave unwelded one joint per each 400' of pipeline. This joint shall be left unwelded until all the joints on both sides of it are welded, and it shall be welded at the coolest time of the working day. The City Engineer shall decide if and when this procedure is warranted. Tack-welding the joint may be permitted to hold the pipe in place. If the joint is to be circumferentially welded, sufficient time shall elapse to allow for an initial set of interior joint lining prior to proceeding with joint welding. Rapid-setting mortar may be used in accordance with this Section. In some cases, the City Engineer may require hand holes. Field welders shall be certified in accordance with ASME Section 9 (pipe welders) or AWS D1.1 (plate welders). Welders shall present a copy of their certification to the City Engineer prior to performing any field welding. Prior to butt-strap welding, the pipe and pipe joint shall be properly positioned in the trench using line-up clamps so that, in the finished joint, the abutting pipe sections shall not be misaligned by more than 1/16". The pipe ends shall be cut straight on joints where butt straps are used for realignment, adjustment, or deflection, and fillet welds shall be made as indicated. Inspection of Field Welded Joints: 14 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials 1. The City shall arrange for the welds to be inspected. Inspection of welds shall take place as soon as possible following the completion of the welds. 2. The Contractor shall coordinate and supply ventilation, lighting, and other equipment deemed necessary for inspection. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing safe entry into and out of the trench, safety of inspection personnel, traffic control and other safety precautions deemed necessary for the inspections. 3.7 PREVENTING FOREIGN MATTER FROM ENTERING THE PIPE At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end of the pipe shall be closed with a tight-fitting cap or plug to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the pipe. These provisions shall apply during the noon hour as well as overnight. In no event shall the pipeline be used as a drain for removing water which has infiltrated into the trench. The Contractor shall maintain the inside of the pipe free from foreign materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until its acceptance by the Owner's Representative. 3.8 HANDLING OF PIPE Refer to Section 09870 regarding handling of the concrete mortar lined and tape wrapped and mortar coated steel pipe. 3.9 INTERIOR JOINT FINISH -PIPE LESS THAN 24" Complete interior mortar joints for pipe sizes less than 24" by drawing through a tight- fitting swab or squeegee. Coat the face of the cement mortar lining at the bell with a sufficient amount of stiff cement mortar to fill the gap. Immediately after joining the pipes, draw the swab through the pipe to remove all excess mortar and expel it from the open pipe end. Do not move the pipe after the swab has been pulled past the joint. See requirements under "Field Welded Joints" for these joints requiring welding. 3.10 INTERIOR JOINT FINISH-PIPE 24" AND LARGER A. Complete interior mortar joints for pipe sizes 24" and larger by the trowel method. Prior to applying interior mortar at the joints all backfill in the area shall be completed. After cleaning the interior joint, pack cement mortar into each joint. Finish the surface with a steel trowel to a smooth finish and equal thickness to match the adjoining pipe mortar. B. Where more than a 4" joint strip of mortar is required, place galvanized welded wire mesh reinforcement in 2" x 4" pattern of No. 13 gauge over the exposed steel. Install the mesh so that the wires on the 2" spacing direction run circumferentially around the pipe. Crimp the wires on the 4" spacing to support the mesh 3/8" from the metal surface. Steel-trowel finish the interior mortar to match adjoining mortar-lined pipe sections. 3.11 EXTERIOR JOINT FINISH A. JULY 2014 The outside annular space between pipe sections shall be completely filled with grout formed by the use of polyethylene foam-lined fabric bands. The grout space shall be flushed with water prior to filling so that the surfaces of the joint to be in contact with the grout will be thoroughly moistened when the grout is poured. The joint shall be filled with grout by pouring from one side only. Grout shall be rodded with a wire or other flexible rod or vibrated so that the grout completely 15 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials fills the joint recess by moving down one side of the pipe, around the bottom of the pipe and up the opposite side. Pouring and rodding the grout shall be continued to allow completion of the filling of the entire joint recess in one operation. Care shall be taken to leave no unfilled space. Grouting of the outside joint spaces shall be kept as close behind the laying of the pipe as possible except that in no case shall grouting be closer than three joints of the pipe being laid. B. The grout bands or heavy-duty diapers shall be polyethylene foam-lined fabric with steel strapping of sufficient strength to hold the fresh mortar, resist nodding of the mortar, and allow excess water to escape. The foam plastic shall be 100 percent closed cell, chemically inert, insoluble in water and resistant to acids, alkalis and solvents. Foam Plastic shall be Dow Chemical Company, Ethafoam 222, or equal. The fabric backing shall be cut and sewn into 9" wide strips with slots for the steel strapping on the outer edges. The polyethylene foam shall be cut into strips 6" wide and slit to a thickness of 1/4" that will expose a hollow or open-cell surface on one side. The foam liner shall be attached to the fabric backing with the open or hollow cells facing towards the pipe. The foam strip shall cover the full interior circumference of the grout band with sufficient length to permit a 8" overlap of the foam at or near the top of the pipe joint. Splices to provide continuity of the material will be permitted. The polyethylene foam material shall be protected from direct sunlight. The polyethylene foam-lined grout band shall be centered over the joint space with approximately equal widths extending over each pipe end and securely attached to the pipe with the steel straps. After filling the exterior joint space with grout, the flaps shall be closed and overlapped in a manner that fully encloses ~ the grout with polyethylene foam. .....,.1 C. Following grouting, the joint shall then be wrapped with two layers of polyethylene encasement in accordance with Section 15000. 3.12 BUTT STRAP JOINTS Butt strap closure joints shall be installed where shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with AWWA C206. A. Butt straps shall be field welded to the outside plain end of the pipe along both edges with a full circumferential weld. A minimum of two weld passes shall be used. B. The interior of the joints shall be filled with a rapid-set mortar and finished off smoothly to match the pipe interior diameter. C. Clean the butt strap with a wire brush and apply a cement and water wash coat prior to applying cement mortar. D. Galvanized wire mesh, 2" x 4" x No. 13 gauge shall be installed to the exterior of the joint prior to applying the mortar coating. E. Coat the exterior of the closure assemblies with mortar to cover all steel with a minimum of 1-1/4". JULY2014 16 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials F. Seal weld the steep plug to the hand hole after the interior of the joint has been inspected and approved by the City Engineer. G. Following grouting, the joint shall then be wrapped with two layers of polyethylene encasement in accordance with Section 15000. 3.13 FLANGED CONNECTIONS Flanged connections shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C207 where indicated on the Approved Plans. A. Bolt holes shall straddle the horizontal and vertical centerlines. B. The bolts, nuts and flange faces shall be thoroughly cleaned by wire brush prior to assembly. C. Bolts and nuts shall be lubricated with a City-approved anti-seize compound. D. Nuts shall be tightened in an alternating "star" pattern to the manufacturer's recommended torque. E. Slip-on type flanges intended for field fit-up and welding shall be welded inside and outside in accordance with AWWA C207. F. Coat the exterior of exposed flanges, bolts and nuts in accordance with Section 09900. G. Pipe lengths and dimensions and drillings of flanges shall be coordinated with the lengths and flanges for valves, pumps, and other equipment to be installed in the piping. All mating flanges shall have the same diameter and drilling and shall be suitable for the pressures to which they will be subjected. H. Flange faces shall be flat and perpendicular to the pipe centerline. The rust- preventive coating on the flange faces shall be soluble and shall be removed before the joint is made. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints to avoid restraint on the opposite end of the pipe or fitting, which would prevent uniform gasket compression or would cause unnecessary stress in the flanges. The pipe or fitting shall be free to move in any direction while the flange bolts are being tightened. Bolts shall be tightened gradually in a crisscross pattern at a uniform rate, to ensure uniform compression of the gasket around the entire flange. All flange joint bolting procedures shall be in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. 3.14 FLANGED COUPLING ADAPTERS Flanged coupling adapters shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Bolts shall be tightened with a torque wrench in the presence of the City Engineer to the torque recommended by the manufacturer. JULY 2014 17 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials 3.15 WALL SLEEVES Wall sleeves shall be installed as indicated on the Drawings and shall be installed where steel pipe passes through concrete walls, unless otherwise noted. Where specified or indicated on the Drawings for sleeves detailed, one or two sets of modular casing seals shall be installed at the face of walls to seal against soil or provide a dust or water tight seal. Contractor shall coordinate the diameter of wall sleeve with the modular casing seal manufacturer. When soil may be present at wall sleeves, a set of modular casing seals shall be installed at each face of the wall. Modular casing seals shall not be used in submerged conditions unless the hydrostatic pressure is less than 20 feet and piping is less than 24 inch size. 3.16 JOINT BONDING/CATHODIC PROTECTION INSULATION Bonding of joints to provide continuity, flange insulation kits, internal epoxy linings, and other cathodic protection items and materials shall be installed where shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with the Standard Drawings and Section 16640. 3.17 WAX TAPE Wax tape shall be installed on all buried bolted connections, valves, fittings and couplings in accordance with Section 09902 and the Standard Drawings, unless the pipeline is otherwise protected with an approved cathodic protection system. 3.18 CONCRETE Where required, concrete thrust and anchor blocks shall be installed in accordance with Section 03000 and as shown on the Approved Plans. Prior to filling the pipeline with water, refer to Section 03000 for the minimum concrete curing time required. 3.19 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.20 DISINFECTION AND BACTERIOLOGICAL TESTING Disinfection, bacteriological testing, and flushing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15041. 3.21 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Field hydrostatic testing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15044. 3.22 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING A. Exterior surfaces of all pipe and appurtenances not otherwise mortar-coated shall be field painted in accordance with Section 09900. JULY2014 18 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials ':) B. Areas in contact with potable water such plain ends of pipe, grooved and shouldered ends of pipe and exposed inside surfaces of threaded outlets and blind flanges shall be coated in accordance with Section 15000. END OF SECTION JULY2014 19 of 19 SECTION 15061 Cement-Mortar Lined and Coated Steel Pipe and Specials Section 15064 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of stainless steel pipe and alloy pipe, tubing and accessories through 24" diameter for the services as indicated herein. Pipe and tubing shall be furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, unions, and other accessories specified herein. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. 1-2.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data, and catalog cuts or drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittals are required for all piping, fittings, gaskets, sleeves, and accessories, and shall include the following data: Name of Manufacturer Type and model Construction materials, thickness, and finishes Pressure and temperature ratings Pipe shall comply with ASME 831.1. 1-3. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING. Shipping, handling and storage shall be in accordance with the General Provisions paragraph 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Stainless steel pipe and alloy pipe materials shall be as specified herein. 2-1.01. Material Classification SS-1 . Not used. 2-1.02. Material Classification SS-2. Not used. 2-1.03. Material Classification SS-3. Not used. 2-1.04. Material Classification SS-4. Not used. JULY 2014 1 of2 SECTION 15064 Stainless Steel Pipe ~ 2-1.05. Material Classification SS-5. Not used. 2-1.06. Material Classification SS-6. SS-6 -Schedule 40S with Threaded Ends. Pressure Reducing Station Drain Piping 2 inch [50 mm] and smaller. PART 3-EXECUTION Pipe Fittings ASTM A312, TP316. Threaded, material to match pipe. Fittings shall conform to ANSIIASME 816.3, Class 150. 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section will be installed in accordance with the Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section. End of Section JULY2014 2 of2 SECTION 15064 Stainless Steel Pipe Section 15067 MISCELLANEOUS PLASTIC PIPE, TUBING, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of miscellaneous plastic pipe, tubing, and accessories. Pipe and tubing shall be furnished complete with all fittings, flanges, unions, jointing materials and other necessary appurtenances. 1-2. SUBMITTALS. 1-2.01. Drawings and Data. Complete specifications, data and catalog cuts or drawings shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Submittals are required for all piping, fittings, gaskets, sleeves, and accessories, and shall include the following data: Name of Manufacturer Type and model Construction materials, thickness, and finishes Pressure and temperature ratings Contractor shall obtain and submit a written statement from the gasket material manufacturer certifying that the gasket materials are compatible with the joints specified herein and are recommended for the specified field test pressures and service conditions. 1-3. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING. Shipping, handling and storage shall be in accordance with the General Provisions paragraph 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage. All materials shall be stored in a sheltered location above the ground, separated by type, and shall be supported to prevent sagging or bending. Pipe, tubing, and fittings shall be stored between 40°F and gooF [4 oc and 32°C]. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. FRP PIPE. Not used. 2-2. PVC PIPE MATERIALS. PVC pipe materials and services shall be as specified herein. 2-2.01. Material Classification PVC-1. Not used. JULY 2014 1 of3 SECTION 15067 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing and Accessories 2-2.02. Material Classification PVC-2. PVC-2 -Schedule 80 PVC Pipe with Pipe Solvent Welded Joints. ASTM 01785, Cell Classification 12454, bearing NSF seal, Schedule 80. Air Valve Piping. 2-2.03. Material Classification 2-2.04. Material Classification 2-2.05. Material Classification 2-2.06. Material Classification 2-2.07. Material Classification 2-2.08. Material Classification Fittings PVC-3. Not used. PVC-4. Not used. PVC-5. Not used. PVC-6. Not used. PVC-7. Not used. PVC-8. Not used. ASTM 02467, Cell Classification 12454, bearing NSF seal. Flanges or unions shall be provided where needed to facilitate disassembly of equipment or valves. Flanges or unions shall be joined to the pipe by a solvent weld. When acceptable to Engineer, threaded joints may be used instead of solvent welded joints in exposed interior locations for the purpose of facilitating assembly. The use of threaded joints in this system shall be held to a minimum. 2-2.09. Accessory Materials. Accessory materials for the PVC Pipe systems shall be as indicated. Flanges JULY 2014 Diameter and drilling shall conform to ANSI/ASME 816.5, Class 150. 2 of3 SECTION 15067 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing and Accessories Flange Bolts and Nuts Flat Washers Flange Gaskets Expansion Joints PART 3-EXECUTION ASTM A307, Grade B, length such that, after installation, the bolts will project 1/8 to 3/8 inch [3 to 10 mm] beyond outer face of the nut. Galvanized steel for all other systems. ANSI 818.22.1, plain. Same material as bolts and nuts. Full face, 1/8 inch [3 mm] thick, chemical- resistant elastomeric material suitable for the specified service. Edlon "Thermo-molded TFE" or Resistoflex "Style R6905" molded expansion joint. 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section will be installed in accordance with the Miscellaneous Piping and Accessories Installation section. End of Section JULY 2014 3 of3 SECTION 15067 Miscellaneous Plastic Pipe, Tubing and Accessories SECTION 15068 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (PE 3408) PIPE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section designates the requirements for the manufacture and installation of high density polyethylene pipe (PE 3408), abbreviated HOPE, to be furnished and installed by the Contractor at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Plans as here.in specified for use as a temporary high-line pipeline. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS: ASTM D 3350 ASTM F 714 ASTM D 3261 ASTM D 2321 ASTM 2837 AWWAC906 1.3 RELATED WORK DESCRIBED ELSEWHERE The Contractor shall refer to the following Specification section(s) for additional requirements: A. Trenching, Excavation, Backfilling & Compacting: 02223 B. Disinfection of Piping: 15041 C. Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure Pipelines: 15044 1.4 SUBMITTALS The Contractor shall furnish submittals in accordance with the Submittals sections. Submittals are required for the following: A. Submit Shop Drawings, material lists, manufacturer's literature and catalog cuts of, but not limited to, the following: Shop Drawings Layout Schedule Special Fitting Dimensional Checks Certification of compliance with NSF Standard No. 61 Affidavit of Compliance (ANSI/AWWA C906, Sec 6.3) Verification, including Quality Assurance Testing (ANSIIAWWA C906, Sec. 5) Shop Drawings shall be submitted and approved prior to manufacture of special fittings. The layout schedule shall indicate the order of installation, the length and location of each pipe section and special, the station and elevation of the pipe invert at all changes in grade, and all data on curves and bends for both horizontal and vertical alignment. B. Submit data used by the Contractor in manufacture and quality control. JULY 2014 1 of 5 SECTION 15068 High Density Polyethylene (PE 3408) Pipe 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall ensure that persons making heat fusion joints have received training in the Manufacturer's recommended procedure. The Contractor shall maintain records of trained personnel, and shall certify that training was received not more than 12 months before commencing construction. Certifications shall be provided to the owner through the submittal process. B. The pipe and/or fitting manufacturer's production facility shall be open by the owner or his designated agents with a reasonable advance notice. During inspection, the manufacturer shall demonstrate that it has facilities capable of manufacturing and testing the pipe and/or fittings to the standards required by this specification. 1.6 PAYMENT A. Payment for the Work in this section shall be included as part of the lump-sum or unit-price bid amount for which such Work is appurtenant thereto. B. Payment by the linear foot shall be for each diameter and for each pipe strength designation measured horizontally over the pipe centerline. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Shipping, handling, and storage shall be per the General Provisions, Section 4-2 Materials Transportation Handling and Storage. PART 2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL High Density Polyethylene Pipe (PE 3408) and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F714 shall be ofthe sizes and DR classes (DIPS Ductile Iron Pipe Size) shown in the Pipeline Schedule. HOPE shall be blue in color. The manufacturer shall have quality control facilities capable of producing and assuring the quality of the pipe and fittings required by the reference standards and these specifications. High Density Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be supplied by the same manufacturer. Pipe and fittings from different manufacturers shall not be interchanged. 2.2 PIPE MATERIAL Materials used for the manufacture of polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM F714 for PE 3408 high density polyethylene conforming to cell classification 345444C or 345444E per ASTM 0 3350; and shall be as listed in the name of the pipe and fitting manufacturer in the Plastic Pipe Institute's Recommended Hydrostatic and Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings Compounds, with a standard grade HOB rating of 1600 psi at 73° F. The Manufacturer shall provide a certification that the materials used to manufacture the pipe and fittings meets these requirements. Polyethylene pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM F 714, Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on outside diameter, and shall be so marked. Each production lot of pipe shall be tested for (from material or pipe) melt index, density,% carbon, (from pipe) dimensions and ring tensile strength. The results of these tests shall be submitted to the Owner for review. JULY2014 2 of5 SECTION 15068 High Density Polyethylene (PE 3408) Pipe 2.3 FITTINGS A. Butt Fusion Fittings: Butt Fusion Fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM 03261 and shall be manufactured by injection molding, a combination of extrusion and machining, or fabricated from HOPE pipe conforming to this specification. All fittings shall be pressure rated to provide a working pressure rating no less than that of the pipe. Fabricated fittings shall be manufactured using a McElroy Data logger to record fusion joints made producing fittings shall be maintained as part of the quality control. The fitting shall be homogenous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, voids, or other injurious defects. B. Electrofusion Fittings: Electrofusion Fittiings shall be PE3408 HOPE, Cell Classification of 345464C as determined by ASTM 03350-02 and be the same base resin as the pipe. Electrofusion fittings shall not be permitted on sections of pipe that will be subjected to forces associated with the installation process. C. Flanged and Mechanical Joint Adapters: Flanged and Mechanical Joint Adapters shall be PE 3408HDPE, Cell Classification of 345464C as determined by ASTM 03350-02 and be the same base resin as the pipe. Flanged and mechanical joint adapters shall have a manufacturing standard of ASTM 03216. All adapters shall be pressure rated to provide a working pressure rating no less than that of the pipe. Flange adapters shall be made with sufficient through-bore length to be clamped in a butt fusion joining machine without the use of a stub-end holder. D. Mechanical Restraint: Mechanical Restraint for HOPE may be provided by mechanical means separate from the mechanical joint gasket sealing gland. The restrainer shall provide wide, supportive contact around the full circumference of the pipe and be equal to the listed widths. Means of restraint shall be machined serrations on the inside surface of the restrainer equal to or greater than the listed serrations per inch and width. Loading ofthe restrainer shall be by a ductile iron follower that provides even circumferential loading over the entire restrainer. Design shall be such that restraint shall be increased with increases in line pressure. Serrated restrainer shall be ductile iron ASTM A536-80 with a ductile iron follower; bolts and nuts shall be corrosive resistant, high strength quality alloy steel. The restrainer shall have a pressure rating of, or equal to that of the pipe on which it is used or 150 PSI whichever is greater. Restrainers shall be JCM Industries, Sur-Grip or pre-approved equal. Nominal Size Restraint Serrations Width per inch 14", 16", 18" 5" 6 20", 24" 7" 6 Pipe stiffeners shall be used in conjunction with restrainers. The pipe stiffeners shall be designed to support the interior wall of the HOPE. The stiffeners shall support the pipe's end and control the "necking down" reaction to the pressure applied during normal installation. The pipe stiffeners shall be formed of 304 or 316 stainless steel to the HOPE manufacturers published average inside diameter of the specific size and DR of the HOPE. Stiffeners shall be by JCM Industries or pre- approved equal. JULY 2014 3of5 SECTION 15068 High Density Polyethylene (PE 3408) Pipe 2.4 COMPLIANCE TESTS The manufacturer's production facilities shall be open for inspection by the owner or his Authorized Representative. The manufacturer's inspection and testing shall comply with applicable ASTM standards, a list of the inspection certifications and test certifications shall be submitted prior to the shop drawing submittal for the HOPE pipe itself. The list shall be submitted as a shop drawing. In case of conflict with Manufacturer's certifications, the Contractor, the Engineer, or the Owner may request retesting by the manufacturer or have retests performed by an outside testing service. All failed retesting shall be paid for by the manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL High Density Polyethylene pipe and fittings shall be handled, assembled and installed in accordance with the applicable sections of AWWA C906 for PE 3408, ASTM D 2321, manufacturer's recommendations and as specified herein. 3.2 EXCAVATION A. Excavation and backfill, including the pipe bedding, shall conform to the provisions of Section 02223 except as herein modified. B. c. Crushed Rock and Gravel shall comply with Section 200-1.2 SSPWC. Pipe Bedding: 3/8" Crushed rock aggregate shall be used for pipe bedding and shall be compacted to obtain a relative density of 95-percent unless otherwise specified. The thickness of the pipe bedding shall be a minimum of four inches. The pipe bedding shall be placed over the full width of the trench. D. Backfill Within Pipe Zone: Crushed rock shall be placed and compacted within the pipe zone from the bottom of the pipe to one foot above top of pipe. The crushed rock shall be compacted to obtain a relative density of 95-percent unless otherwise specified. 3.3 PIPE HANDLING The manufacturer's written procedures for unloading, inspection and handling of the HOPE pipe shall be adhered to by the Contractor. A copy of these Manufacturer's written procedures shall be submitted as a shop drawing and included with the shop drawings for the pipe material. When lifting with slings, only wide fabric choker slings capable of safely carrying the load, shall be used to lift, move, or lower pipe and fittings. Wire rope or chain shall not be used. Slings shall be of sufficient capacity for the load, and shall be inspected before use. Worn or damaged equipment shall not be used. 3.4 JOINING Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be joined together or to other materials by means of flanged connections, mechanical couplings designed for joining polyethylene pipe or for joining polyethylene pipe to another material or electro fusion, as shown on the approved plans or as approved by the City Engineer. The installation instructions of the joining device manufacturer shall be strictly followed when joining by other means is performed. JULY 2014 4of5 SECTION 15068 High Density Polyethylene (PE 3408) Pipe A. Butt Fusion: Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the jobsite above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including but not limited to, temperature requirements of 400 degrees Fahrenheit, alignment, and an interfacial fusion pressure of 75 PSI. The butt fusion joining will produce a joint weld strength equal to or greater than the tensile strength of the pipe itself. All field welds shall be made with fusion equipment equipped with McElroy Data Logger. Temperature, fusion pressure and a graphic representation of the fusion cycle shall be part of the quality control records. B. Sidewall Fusion: Sidewall fusions for connections to outlet piping shall be performed in accordance with HOPE pipe and fitting manufacturer's specifications. The heating irons used for sidewall fusion shall have an inside diameter equal to the outside diameter of the HOPE pipe being fused. The size of the heating iron shall be % inch larger than the size of the outlet branch being fused. C. Mechanical: Bolted joining may be used where the butt fusion method cannot be used. Flange joining will be accomplished by using HOPE flange adapter with a ductile iron back-up ring. Mechanical joint joining will be accomplished using either a molded mechanical joint adapter or the combination of a Sur-Grip Restrainer and Pipe Stiffener as manufactured by JCM Industries, Inc. Either mechanical joint joining method will have a ductile iron mechanical joint gland. D. Other: Socket fusion, hot gas fusion, threading solvents, and epoxies may not be used to join HOPE pipe. 3.5 PREVENTING FOREIGN MATTER FROM ENTERING THE PIPE At all times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end of the pipe shall be closed with a tight-fitting cap or plug to prevent the entrance of foreign matter into the pipe. These provisions shall apply during the noon hour as well as overnight. In no event shall the pipeline be used as a drain for removing water which has infiltrated into the trench. The Contractor shall maintain the inside of the pipe free from foreign materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until its acceptance by the Engineer. 3.6 DAMAGED PIPE OR FITTINGS Sections of pipe having been discovered with cuts or gouges in excess of 1/8-inch thickness shall be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the heat fusion joining method. 3.7 TESTING A. Butt Fusion Testing On every day butt fusions are made, the first fusion of the day shall be a trial fusion. The trial fusion shall be cooled completely, then fusion test straps shall be cut. The test strap shall be 12- inch (min.) or30 times the wall thickness in length with the fusion in the center, and 1-inch (min.)or 1.5 times the wall thickness in width. Bend the test strap until the ends of the strap touch. If the fusion fails at the joint, a new trial fusion shall be made, cooled completely and tested. Butt fusion of the pipe to be Installed shall not commence until a trial fusion has passed the bent strap test. B. Pressure Testing All pipelines shall be flushed and tested in accordance with Section 15044 and the applicable provisions of AWWA C600, except as modified herein. C. Allowable Leakage There will be no leakage allowed for the butt fused portions of the pipeline. JULY 2014 END OF SECTION 5of5 SECTION 15068 High Density Polyethylene (PE 3408) Pipe SECTION 15074 BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing, and installation of blowoff assemblies. 1.2 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15057, 15061, 15064, and 15100 1.3 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Blowoff assemblies shall be installed on potable and recycled water mains. B. Blowoff assemblies shall be sized and located as shown on the Approved Plans. In general, blowoff assemblies will be installed at low points of pipelines as shown below: 1. 2" blowoff assemblies or multiple 2" blowoff assemblies will be required on pipelines 4", thru 12". 2. 4" blowoff assemblies will be required on pipeline sizes 12" thru 16". 3. 6" blowoff assembly will be required on pipeline sizes 18" and larger. 1.4 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed for blowoff assemblies in accordance with Section 15000. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL Blowoff assemblies and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.2 CONCRETE Concrete thrust or anchor blocks shall be placed as shown on the approved plans in accordance with Section 03000. 2.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification tape materials shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. 2.4 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING Field painting and coating materials shall be in accordance with Section 09900 and the Approved Materials List. JULY 2014 1 of2 SECTION 1507 4 Blow-off Assemblies PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Blowoff assemblies shall be installed at locations shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the District Engineer in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Blowoff assemblies shall be connected to water mains no closer than 24" to a bell, coupling, joint or fitting. C. Locations of blowoff assembly shall be in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.2 CONCRETE Concrete thrust or anchor blocks shall be placed as shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with Section 03000. 3.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.4 DISINFECTION OF BLOWOFF ASSEMBLIES Blowoff assemblies shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 15041 in conjunction with disinfecting the main to which it is connected. Blowoff assembly valves shall be operated and the assembly shall be flushed to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Blowoff assemblies shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 15044 in conjunction with hydrostatically testing the pipeline to which it is connected. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 2 of 2 SECTION 15074 Blow-off Assemblies Section 15098 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing of pressure reducing valves as specified herein. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished under this section shall be fabricated and assembled in full conformity with drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. Valves shall be furnished with all necessary parts and accessories indicated on the drawings, specified, otherwise required for a complete, properly operating installation and shall be the latest standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the production of valves. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials provided under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.02. Coordination. All equipment provided under this section shall be furnished by or through a single manufacturer who shall be responsible for the design, coordination, and satisfactory performance of all components over the full operating range. 1-2.03. Identification. Valves shall be identified in accordance with the Equipment and Valve Identification section. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete fabrication and assembly drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1-3.02. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied as required in the Submittals section. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition JULY2014 1 of5 SECTION 15098 Pressure Reducing Valves to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered. 1-4. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING. Shipping, handling, and storage shall be per the General Provisions, Section 4-2 Materials Transportation Handling and Storage. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. FUNCTION. The Combination Pressure Reducing & Pressure Sustaining Valve shall maintain a constant downstream pressure regardless of changing flow rate and/or inlet pressure. When the upstream pressure becomes equal to the spring setting of the pressure sustaining control, the valve throttles to maintain a constant inlet pressure. "Tying" of equipment into packages for the purpose of thwarting competition shall be considered to be in non-compliance with these specifications. Manufacturers shall price items under different subsections or sections separately. 2.2. MAIN VALVE. The valve shall be hydraulically operated, single diaphragm- actuated, globe or angle pattern. The valve shall consist of three major components: the body with seat installed, the cover with bearings installed, and the diaphragm assembly. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure from line pressure. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes are not permitted and there shall be no pistons operating the main valve or pilot controls. 2-3. MAIN VALVE BODY. No separate chambers shall be allowed between the main valve cover and body. Valve body and cover shall be of cast material. Ductile Iron is standard and other materials shall be available. No fabrication or welding shall be used in the manufacturing process. Total shipping weight shall be equal or greater in all respects to the Hytrol100-01/100-20 body. The valve shall contain a resilient, synthetic rubber disc, with a rectangular cross- section contained on three and one-half sides by a disc retainer and forming a tight seal against a single removable seat insert. No 0-ring type discs (circular, square, or quad type) shall be permitted as the seating surface. The disc guide shall be of the contoured type to permit smooth transition of flow and shall hold the disc firmly in place. The disc retainer shall be of a sturdy one-piece design capable of withstanding opening and closing shocks. It must have straight edge sides and a radius at the top edge to prevent excessive diaphragm wear as the diaphragm flexes across this surface. No hourglass-shaped disc retainers shall be permitted and noV-type or slotted type disc guides shall be used. JULY2014 2 of5 SECTION 15098 Pressure Reducing Valves The diaphragm assembly containing a non-magnetic 303 stainless steel stem of sufficient diameter to withstand high hydraulic pressures shall be fully guided at both ends by a bearing in the valve cover and an integral bearing in the valve seat. The seat shall be a solid, one-piece design and shall have a minimum of a five-degree taper on the seating surface for a positive, drip-tight shut off. No center guides shall be permitted. The stem shall be drilled and tapped in the cover end to receive and affix such accessories as may be deemed necessary. The diaphragm assembly shall be the only moving part and shall form a sealed chamber in the upper portion of the valve, separating operating pressure from line pressure. The flexible, non-wicking, FDA approved diaphragm shall consist of nylon fabric bonded with synthetic rubber compatible with the operating fluid. The center hole for the main valve stem must be sealed by the vulcanized process or a rubber grommet sealing the center stem hole from the operating pressure. The diaphragm must withstand a Mullins Burst Test of a minimum of 600 psi per layer of nylon fabric and shall be cycle tested 100,000 times to insure longevity. The diaphragm shall not be used as the seating surface. The diaphragm shall be fully supported in the valve body and cover by machined surfaces which support no less than one-half of the total surface area of the diaphragm in either the fully opened or fully closed position. The main valve seat and the stem bearing in the valve cover shall be removable. ~ The cover bearing and seat in 6" and smaller size valves shall be threaded into . .......,; the cover and body. Valve seat in 8" and larger size valves shall be retained by flat head machine screws for ease of maintenance. The lower bearing of the valve stem shall be contained concentrically within the seat and shall be exposed to the flow on all sides to avoid deposits. To insure proper alignment of the valve stem, the valve body and cover shall be machined with a locating lip. No "pinned" covers to the valve body shall be permitted. Cover bearing, disc retainer, and seat shall be made of the same material. All necessary repairs and/or modifications other than replacement of the main valve body shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline. Packing glands and/or stuffing boxes shall not be permitted and components including cast material shall be of North American manufacture. The valve manufacturer shall warrant the valve to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of three years from date of shipment, provided the valve is installed and used in accordance with all applicable instructions. Electrical components shall have a one-year warranty. The valve manufacturer shall be able to supply a complete line of equipment from 1 1/4" through 24" sizes and a complete selection of complementary equipment. The valve manufacturer shall also provide a computerized cavitation chart which show flow rate, differential pressure, percentage of valve opening, Cv factor, system velocity, and if there will be cavitation damage. JULY 2014 3 of5 SECTION 15098 Pressure Reducing Valves 2-3.01. MATERIAL SPECIFICATION. Manufacturer: Model No.: Valve Size: Valve Pattern: Main Valve Body and Cover: Main Valve Trim: Flange Pressure Class: Pressure Rating: Temperature Range: Rubber Material: Coating: Desired Options: CLA-VAL 92-01 14-inch Globe Ductile Iron Anti-Cavitation, Stainless Steel Type 316 300 lb. 400 psi 50 to 70 degrees, F Buna-N Epoxy None. 2-4. PILOT CONTROL SYSTEM. The pressure reducing pilot control shall be a direct-acting, adjustable, spring-loaded, normally open, diaphragm valve designed to permit flow when controlled pressure is less than the spring setting. The pilot control is held open by the force of the compression on the spring above the diaphragm and it closes when the delivery pressure acting on the underside of the diaphragm exceeds the spring setting. The pilot control system shall include a fixed orifice. No variable orifices shall be permitted. The pilot system shall include an opening speed control on all valves 3" and smaller on the model 92-01 and 4" and smaller on the model 692-01, as standard equipment. The pilot control shall have a second downstream sensing port which can be utilized to install a pressure gauge. The pressure sustaining pilot control shall be a direct-acting adjustable spring loaded control which opens when upstream pressure exceeds the spring setting on the pilot. The pilot control system shall include an X44A strainer & orifice assembly. A full range of spring settings shall be available in ranges of 0 to 450 psi. A direct factory representative shall be made available for start-up service, inspection and necessary adjustments. 2-4.01. LIMIT SWITCH. Two adjustable limit switches assemblies shall be mounted on the main valve, connected to the main valve stem. They shall be actuated by opening or closing of the valve and easily adjusted to operate at any point of the valve's travel. One limit switch will be used to complete the pump off cycle. One limit switch will be used to verify valve fully open. The actuating points of the limit switches shall be adjustable. JULY 2014 4of5 SECTION 15098 Pressure Reducing Valves A direct factory representative shall be made available for start-up service, inspection and necessary adjustments. 2-4.02. MATERIAL SPECIFICATION FOR PILOT CONTROL. Pressure Rating: 400 psi Trim: Stainless Steel Type 316 Rubber Material: Buna-N Synthetic Rubber Tubing and Fittings: Stainless Steel Type 316 Operating Fluids: Finished Water Solenoid Voltage: 120 Solenoid Enclosure Type: General Purpose Watertight Desired Options: None. The valve shall be a Cia Val Co. Model No. 92-01 Pressure Reducing and Pressure Sustaining Valve, as manufactured by Cia Val Co., Newport Beach, CA 92659-0325. 2-5. SHOP PAINTING. All ferrous metal surfaces of valves and accessories, both interior and exterior, shall be shop painted for corrosion protection in accordance with the following list. The valve manufacturer's standard coating will be acceptable, provided it is functionally equivalent to the specified coating and is compatible with the field painting specified in the Painting and Coatings section. Interior Surfaces Liquid Service Exterior Surfaces PART 3 -EXECUTION Epoxy (NSF certified). Universal primer with epoxy finish coat. 3-1. INSTALLATION. Materials furnished under this section will be installed in accordance with the Valve Installation section. End of Section JULY 2014 5of5 SECTION 15098 Pressure Reducing Valves Section 15098-SO 1 Pressure Reducing Valves Schedule Performance and Design Requirements Valve Tag Number CLA-VAL-001 Location Pressure Reducing Station Type of Service (1) Water Type (2) Pilot-operated Maximum Inlet Pressure (psi) 266 Minimum Inlet Pressure (psi) 230 Maximum Outlet Pressure (psi) 76 Minimum Outlet Pressure (psi) 66 Maximum Flow (gpm) 6,950 Ordinary Flow (gpm) 3,475 Minimum Controlled Flow (gpm) 1,800 JULY 2014 1 of 1 SECTION 15098-S01 Pressure Reducing Valves Schedule SECTION 15099 PROCESS VALVES, REGULATORS AND MISCELLANEOUS VALVES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing and installation of manually operated process valves such as check valves, pressure control valves, pressure reducing valves and ball valves. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. American Water Works Association AWWA C508 Standards for Swing Check Valve ASTM B62 Standards for Ball Vales 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 1.4 CMWD Standard Drawings Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15057, 15074, 15108, and 15112 SERVICE APPLICATIONS Check valves, pressure control valves, pressure reducing valves, bronze gate valves and ball valves are primarily used in the installation of potable and recycled water main appurtenances and where called for on the Approved Plans and indicated on the Standard Drawings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS The following items shall be submitted to the City for review and approval prior to ordering or delivery of valves per the Submittals section. A. The valve manufacturers catalog data showing the size to be used, valve dimensions, pressure rating and materials of construction. B. Manufacturers catalog data and proof of NSF certification on the lining materials to be used. C. Installation procedures including field adjustments as required. JULY 2014 1 of 5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves 1.6 SIZING OF VALVES Valves shall be the same size as the appurtenance in which they are to be installed with unless otherwise called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard Drawings. 1.7 VALVE ENDS Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system or appurtenance in which they are to be installed or as called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard Drawings. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Valves shall remain in factory packaging until ready for installation. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. 1.9 POLYETHYLENE WRAP Polyethylene wrap shall be used for the buried installation of valves in accordance with Section 15000. 1.10 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Valve boxes and extension stems shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 RUBBER-FLAPPER SWING CHECK VALVE A. Swing check valves and appurtenant components shall be in accordance with AWWA C508 and selected from the Approved Materials List. A submittal will be required as described in this Section. B. Rubber-flapper swing check valves shall have a heavily constructed ductile-iron body and cover. The body shall be long pattern design (not wafer), with integrally east-on end flanges. The flapper shall be Buna-N having an "0" ring seating edge and be internally reinforced with steel. C. Flapper shall be captured between the body and the body cover in a manner to permit the flapper to flex from closed to full open position during flow through the valve. Flapper shall be easily removed without need to remove valve from line. Check valves shall have full pipe size flow area. Seating surface shall be on a 45° angle requiring the flapper to travel only 35° from closed to full open position, for minimum head loss and non-slam closure. JULY 2014 2 of 5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves D. Buna-N flapper shall be high-strength coated fabric, coated both sides with 70 DURO, which creates an elastic spring effect, molded internally, to assist the flapper to close against a slight head to prevent slamming. When essential to create backflow through the check valve, as directed by the City Engineer, an external backflow device shall be furnished. E. Check valves shall be tested by the manufacturer and the test results shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to shipment to the project. Check valves must unseat at a head no greater than 24". 2.2 SMALL DIAMETER ISOLATING VALVES Provide all small diameter valves and cocks for shut-off process connections, instrumentation and other miscellaneous uses in accordance with the Approved Plans. These valves shall be of the same material and pressure rating as the adjacent process piping. Shutoff valves shall be compatible with instrumentation and other equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2.3 CORPORATION STOPS Corporation stops shall be in the ball type with a bronze body and T -Head operator. Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed or as called for on the Approved Plans or indicated on the Standard Drawings. Corporation stops shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1 ,37g KPa (200 psi). Corporation stops shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. ,...., 2.4 ANGLE METER STOPS Angle meter stops shall be the ball type with a bronze body and goo lock wing. Valve ends shall be flare style inlet and swivel meter nut for 1" and meter flange for 2" outlets. Angle meter stops shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1 ,37g KPa (200 psi). Angle meter stops shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.5 CUSTOMER METER SHUT -OFF VALVE Customer meter shut-off valves shall be the ball type with a bronze body and lever handle operator. Valve ends shall be swivel meter nut for 1" inlets and meter flange for 2" inlets. Customer meter shut-off valves shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 200 psi. The City Engineer may require the use of a customer meter shut-off valve equipped with a goo lock wing. JULY 2014 3of5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves ' 2.6 BALL VALVES Ball valves 2" and smaller shall be of bronze construction conforming to ASTM B62 and equipped with a T-Head or lever handle operator as required. Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed or as indicated on the Approved Plans or Standard Drawings. Ball valves shall be rated for a minimum pressure of 1 ,379 KPa (200 psi). Ball valves shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2. 7 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS Backflow preventers shall be in accordance with Section 15112 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.8 POL YTHYLENE WRAP Polyethylene wrap shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.9 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Valves shall be set in true alignment straddling the centerline of pipe with the valve operator in the vertical position unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans or shown on the Standard Drawings. B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable section of these specifications for the piping material and joint type being used. C. Aboveground valves shall be rigidly held in place using supports and hangers in accordance with the Approved Plans and Standard Drawings. The stem orientation of valves in elevated piping shall be as approved by the City Engineer for accessibility, except that no valves shall be installed with stems aligned below horizontal. Saddle type valve supports shall be provided. Supports shall be of rugged construction providing at least one hundred twenty degrees (120°) under support for the valve body. Valve supports shall be constructed of steel, and shall be anchored to the foundations using stainless steel anchor bolts. JULY 2014 4of5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves 3.2 POLYETHYLENE WRAP Installation of polyethylene wrap for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000. 3.3 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.4 DISINFECTION OF THE VALVES Disinfection and flushing shall be in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the progress of disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated during the disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipelines in which they are installed in accordance with Section 15044. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 5 of 5 SECTION 15099 Process Valves, Regulators and Miscellaneous Valves SECTION 15100 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV's) PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated resilient wedge gate valves (RWGV's). 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings Specifications 15000, 15041, 15044, 15057, 15061, 15064, 15074, 15108 and 15112 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Resilient wedge gate valves (RWGV's) shall be installed on potable and recycled water mains and appurtenances in accordance with the Approved Plans and the Standard Drawings. B. Resilient wedge gate valves shall be used for open/closed operations, throttling service and frequent operation after long periods of no actuation. C. In general, resilient wedge gate valves shall be used when valves are required on pipelines and appurtenances 4" through 16". D. Valves for pipelines sized 18" and larger generally require the use of butterfly valves (BFV) in accordance with Section 15102. E. All valves and valve flanges shall be of at least the same pressure class as the adjoined pipe. 1.5 SUBMITTALS The following items shall be submitted for review and approval per the Submittals section, prior to ordering or delivery of resilient wedge gate valves. A. An affidavit from the valve manufacturer stating that valves have successfully passed hydrostatic tests in accordance with AWWA C509 and manufacturer's own coatings tests. B. The valve manufacturer's catalog data showing the size to be used, valve dimensions, pressure rating and materials of construction. C. Manufacturer's drawings, details, and specifications covering the valves and their appurtenances, and proof of NSF certification for the lining materials to be used. JULY 2014 1 of5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) 1.6 SIZING OF VALVES Valves shall be the same size as the line in which they are installed unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans. 1.7 VALVE ENDS Valve ends shall be compatible with the piping system in which they are being installed in accordance with the Approved Plans or directed by the District Engineer. Flanges shall be finished to true plane surfaces within a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch. The finished face shall be normal to the longitudinal valve axis within a maximum angular variation tolerance of 0.002 inch per foot (0.017 percent) of flange diameter. Contractor shall submit a written statement confirming that valve ends are compatible with connecting pipe ends attached on both sides of the valve. 1.8 VALVE TESTING 1.9 Resilient wedge gate valves shall be hydrostatically tested and valve coatings shall be holiday detected prior to shipment to the field in accordance with the testing procedures shown in Appendix A. Valves delivered to the site prior to successful hydrostatic testing and holiday detection shall be subject to rejection. DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until valves are ready to be installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Valves shall not be stacked. 1.10 CORROSION PROTECTION Buried Valves: All bolted connections and bolted valve components (bonnets, flanges, etc.) shall be coated with Wax Tape in accordance with Section 09902 and the entire valve encased in polyethylene in accordance with Section 15000. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES (RWGV's) A. Resilient wedge gate valves and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. B. RWGV's shall be ductile-iron in accordance with AWWA C509 and C515 except as modified herein. JULY2014 2 of5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) C. Each valve shall have a smooth unobstructed waterway free from any sediment pockets. D. All RWGV's shall be leak-tight at their rated pressure. E. RWGV's shall have a non-rising low-zinc bronze or stainless steel stem, opened by turning left (counterclockwise). F. Stem seals shall be the 0-ring type incorporating a minimum of two rings as required by AWWA C509. G. Low-friction torque-reduction thrust washers or bearings shall be provided on the stem collar. H. Wedge (gate) shall be fully encapsulated with a bonded-in-place Nitrile elastomer covering. Minimum thickness of the rubber seating area shall be 1/4". I. Valves for buried applications shall be provided with a 2" square operating nut and position indicator, and valves located above ground or in structures shall be equipped with a hand wheel in accordance with AWWA C509 unless otherwise indicated on the Approved Plans. J. RWGV interior and exterior surfaces (except for the encapsulated disc) shall be coated as described below. K. All bolts and nuts used in the construction of RWGV's shall be Type 316 stainless steel. L. All bronze valve components in contact with liquid shall contain less than 16 percent zinc. All aluminum bronze components in contact with liquid shall be inhibited against dealuminization in accordance with Section 4.2.3.5.4 of ANSI/AWWA C509 and Section 4.2.3.3.4 of ANSI/AWWA C515. M. Gaskets shall be free of asbestos and corrosive ingredients. N. Position Indicators: Unless otherwise specified, each valve actuator shall be provided with a position indicator to display the position of the disc relative to the body seat opening. Each actuator for butterfly valves, except where located in manholes, buried, or submerged, shall have a valve disc position indicator mounted on the end of the valve shaft. A disc position indicator shall also be provided on each operating stand or the actuator mounted thereon. JULY 2014 When specified in the respective valve schedules, each buried valve actuator shall be equipped with a position indicator. Position indicators shall be lndico "Model 179 Valve Position Indicators" manufactured by the Mills Engineering Company, Needham Heights, Massachusetts, or "Diviner" ground level position indicator manufactured by the Henry Pratt Company, Aurora, Illinois. Each indicator assembly shall be designed for installation on the extension stem connected to the operating stem of the buried actuator mechanism and shall be mounted in the top section of the valve box beneath the valve box cover. Each indicator shall be equipped with a wrench nut. Internal gearing shall be sealed and protected from the elements. 3 of5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) 2.2 EPOXY LINING AND COATING Epoxy linings and coatings for valves shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C210, C213, and C550, with the following modifications: A. Epoxy lining and coating of valve surfaces shall be performed by the manufacturer in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. Epoxy lining and coating of valves in the field is prohibited. B. Repairs made to manufactures applied coatings shall be performed in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. The facility shall be approved by the valve manufacturer. C. Surface preparation shall be as detailed in SSPC-SP5, White-Metal Blast Cleaning. D. Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for Drinking Water Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable water. E. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be (0.010" or 10 mils. Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance AWWA C210. F. Powder epoxy coating materials shall contain one hundred percent (100%) solids, in accordance with AWWA C213. 2.3 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.4 CONCRETE Concrete used for anchor or thrust blocks shall be Class 560-C-3250 as specified in section 03000. 2.5 WAX TAPE COATING Wax Tape shall be in accordance with Section 09902 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.6 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Polyethylene encasement shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. JULY 2014 4of5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with the bolt holes straddling the vertical centerline of pipe and the operating nut in the vertical position unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans. B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the applicable section of these specifications for the piping material and joint type being used. C. Joints shall be cleaned and installed in accordance with Section 15056. 3.2 CORROSION PROTECTION Buried Valves: All bolted connections and bolted valve components (bonnets, flanges, etc.) shall be coated with Wax Tape in accordance with Section 09902 and the entire valve encased in polyethylene in accordance with Section 15000. Exposed Valves: The exterior of valves installed above ground or exposed in vaults or enclosures shall be field painted in accordance with Section 09900. 3.3 CONCRETE Concrete thrust, anchor, and support blocks shall be installed in accordance the Standard Drawings. The concrete shall be placed so that valves and valve operators will be accessible for repairs or replacement. 3.4 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.5 DISINFECTION OF VALVES Disinfection and flushing of valves shall be in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the process of disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated during the disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.6 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipeline in which they are installed in accordance with Section 15044. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 5of5 SECTION 15100 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) Q Q .... N C! C! .... .... Cl) Location N u; (in) Station 245+ 7 4 6 Station 245+ 78 6 JULY 2014 Schedule 15100-S01 Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) Schedule .... Q Q <"" ~ II) C! C! C! .... .... .... -.... -c 0 :w .!!! ii c -en 0 .5 :w ~ ..... -.~ 0 N -Cl) en a. c. "C : ~ c UJ Clean water 84 F Clean water 84 F Q Q CQ .... C! Q .... C'i ii :I c_ ~~ :i!El:' -..... 0 <"" o--Cl) ~ E a..:! Cl) ~~ -(/) NRS WN NRS WN 1 of 2 Q .... Q co; en E Cl) -0 c 0 "iij c Cl) 1< UJ Yes Yes SECTION 15100 SCHEDULE Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) Notes: (1) B4 B20 B SV20 (2) F MJ p (3) NRS OS&Y (4) WN HW Abbreviations for installation types are as follows: Buried, depth of 4 feet [1.2 m] or less Buried, depth greater than 4 feet [1.2 m] but 20 feet [6.1 m] or less Buried, depth greater than 20 feet [6.1 m], actual depth of xx feet (Bxx) Submerged or vaulted, depth 20 feet [6.1 m] or less Abbreviations for types of ends: Flanged Mechanical joint Push-on joint Abbreviations for types of stems: Non-rising stem Outside screw-and-yoke Abbreviations for types of manual actuators: Wrench nut Handwheel END OF SCHEDULE JULY 2014 2 of2 SECTION 15100 SCHEDULE Resilient Wedge Gate Valves (RWGV's) SECTION 15102 BUTTERFLY VALVES {BFV's) PART1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, testing, and installation of manually operated butterfly valves (BFV). 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. References shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. American WaterWorks Association (AWWA) ANSIIAWWA C504 Standards for Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings Specifications 03000, 09900, 09902, 15000, 15041 , 15044, 15061 and 15064 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Butterfly valves (BFV) shall be installed on potable water mains and appurtenances where shown on the Approved Plans and in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Butterfly valves shall be used for open/closed operations and throttling service and frequent operation after long periods of inactivity. C. In general, butterfly valves shall be used when valves are required on pipelines 18" and larger and where the use of a motor-operated valve is required as shown on the Approved Plans. Butterfly valves smaller than 18" shall only be used as indicated on the Approved Plans or with the prior approval of the City Engineer. D. All valves shall be of at least the same pressure class as the adjoined pipe. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals are required per the Submittals section including an affidavit from the valve manufacturer showing the following: JULY 2014 1. Actuators used were furnished and installed by the valve manufacturer. 2. Valves have successfully passed hydrostatic testing per AWWA C504 and coatings testing by the valve manufacturer. 1 of7 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFVs) B. The valve manufacturer's catalog data showing the size to be used, valve dimensions, pressure rating and materials of construction. C. Actuator manufacturer's catalog data and detail construction drawing specific to this project showing the dimensions, materials, valve shaft position, number of turns, and required torque input of the actuator to be used. D. Manufacturer's catalog data and proof of NSF certification on the lining materials to be used. 1.6 SIZING OF VALVES Valves shall be the same size as the line in which they are installed unless otherwise shown on the Approved Plans. 1.7 VALVE ENDS Valve ends shall be flanged ductile-iron unless otherwise called for on the Approved Plans or as directed by the District Engineer. Ductile-iron flanges shall generally be in accordance with AWWA C115, rated at a working pressure of 1, 724 KPa (250 psi). When Class 250 butterfly valves are shown on the Approved Plans or are otherwise required, ductile-iron flanges shall be compatible with AWWA C207, Class "F". Maximum working pressure of the flange shall be as specified in AWWA or ASME/ANSI. Flanges shall be integrally cast per AWWA C110. Flanges shall be finished to true plane surfaces within a tolerance limit of 0.005 inch. The finished face shall be normal to the longitudinal valve axis within a maximum angular variation tolerance of 0.002 inch per foot (0.017 percent) of flange diameter. Contractor shall submit a written statement confirming that valve ends are compatible with connecting pipe ends attached on both sides of the valve. 1.8 VALVE TESTING Butterfly valves shall be hydrostatically tested and coatings holiday detected prior to shipment to the field. Valves delivered to the site prior to successful hydrostatic testing and holiday detection will be subject to rejection. Certified copies of test results for tests described in Section 5 of the governing standard shall be submitted to Engineer before the valves are shipped. An affidavit of compliance with the governing standard for valves shall be provided as indicated in Section 6.3 of ANSI/AWWA C504. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Valves shall be delivered and stored in accord with AWWA C504 and AWWA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until the valve is ready to JULY2014 2of7 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) be installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Valves shall not be stacked. 1.10 CORROSION PROTECTION Buried Valves: All bolted connections and bolted valve components shall be coated with Wax Tape in accordance with Section 09902 and the entire valve encased in polyethylene in accordance with Section 15000. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 BUTTERFLY VALVES (BFV) A. Butterfly valves and appurtenant components and materials shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. B. Butterfly valves shall be short body, leak-tight closing, and rubber-seated in accordance with AWWA C504 except as modified herein. c. D. Where the static pressure of the pipeline in which the BFV is to be installed exceeds 1.03 Pa (150psi), a Class 250B butterfly valve in general conformance with AWWA C504 shall be required, rated for a flow velocity of 16 ft/s. Class 250B butterfly valves shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to ordering or delivery. Butterfly valves shall open by turning left (counterclockwise). Valve disc shall rotate ninety degrees (90°) from the full open position to the tight shut position. E. Butterfly valve interior and exterior surfaces shall be coated as described below. 2.2 MANUAL VALVE ACTUATORS A. General: JULY 2014 1. All valve actuators shall be watertight, designed for buried or submerged uses. Actuators shall be fully gasketed, sealed, and factory packed with grease. 2. As directed by the District Engineer, actuators for valves located above ground or in vaults and structures may have hand wheels or chain wheels. Minimum hand wheel diameter shall be 12"). The actuator shall be equipped with a dial indicator, which shows the position of the valve disc. The District Engineer may require the use of 2" square operating nuts in some cases. 3. Actuators for valves shall be provided with a 2" square-operating nut, position indicator, extension stem, and floor box when buried or when indicated on the Approved Plans. At least two operating keys shall ber furnished for operation of the square-operating nut valves. Square- operating nuts shall comply with Section 4.4.13 of ANSI/AWWA C500. 3 of? SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves {BFV's) 4. Actuators shall have travel stops, which can be adjusted in the field without having to remove the actuator from the valve. 5. Actuators shall be sized for opening and closing the valve at the valve's full rated working pressure and at a flow velocity of 16 ft/s. 6. Actuators shall accept a minimum of 300 foot-pounds of input torque at the full open and full closed positions without damage to the actuator or the valve. 7. Actuators equipped with 2" operator nuts shall require a maximum input torque of 150 foot-pounds to operate the valve. A maximum input torque of 80 foot-pounds shall be required to operate valves with hand wheels. 8. Actuators shall be of the same manufacturer as the valve where possible or as directed by the District Engineer. 9. Actuators shall be installed, adjusted, tested and certified by the valve manufacturer prior to shipping. 10. Actuators shall require a maximum of one hundred (100) input turns for the complete ninety-degree (90°) movement of the disc. 11. Actuators shall receive an epoxy coating on the exterior surface as described below. B. Traveling Nut Actuators: 1. Actuators for butterfly valve sizes 18" through 24" may be the manual traveling nut type. Traveling nut actuators shall not be used on valves requiring motor driven actuators or where the District has specified a worm gear type actuator. The housing of traveling-nut type actuators shall be fitted with a removable cover which shall permit inspection and maintenance of the operating mechanism without removing the actuator from the valve. 2. Actuators shall be capable of producing the below listed output torque at the closed position: Valve Size in mm (inches) 450 (18") 500 (20") 600 (24") Output Torgue Nm (foot-pounds) 3729 (2750) 3729 (2750) 6372 (4700) C. Worm Gear Type Actuators: JULY 2014 1. Actuators for butterfly valve 30" or larger shall be the worm gear type. In addition, worm gear type actuators shall be used on butterfly valves requiring motor driven actuators or where the District has specified a worm gear actuator. 4of7 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFVs) 2. Worm gear actuators shall be totally enclosed and self-locking. D. Actuator Accessories: 1. Position Indicators: Unless otherwise specified, each valve actuator shall be provided with a position indicator to display the position of the disc relative to the body seat opening. Each actuator for butterfly valves, except where located in manholes, buried, or submerged, shall have a valve disc position indicator mounted on the end of the valve shaft. A disc position indicator shall also be provided on each operating stand or the actuator mounted thereon. 2. Position Indicators for Buried Actuators: When specified in the respective valve schedules, each buried valve actuator shall be equipped with a position indicator. Position indicators shall be lndico "Model 179 Valve Position Indicators" manufactured by the Mills Engineering Company, Needham Heights, Massachusetts, or "Diviner" ground level position indicator manufactured by the Henry Pratt Company, Aurora, Illinois. Each indicator assembly shall be designed for installation on the extension stem connected to the operating stem of the buried actuator mechanism and shall be mounted in the top section of the valve box beneath the valve box cover. Each indicator shall be equipped with a wrench nut. Internal gearing shall be sealed and protected from the elements. 2.3 EPOXY LINING AND COATING Epoxy linings and coatings for valves and actuators shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C210, C213 and C550, with the following modifications: A. Epoxy lining and coating of valve surfaces shall be performed by the manufacturer in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. Epoxy lining and coating of valves in the field is prohibited. B. Repairs made to shop-applied coatings shall be performed in a facility with qualified personnel, where the environment can be controlled. The facility shall be one that is approved by the valve manufacturer. C. Surface preparation shall be as detailed in SSPC-SP5 White Metal Blast Cleaning. D. Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for Drinking Water Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable water. E. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0.010" or 10 mils). JULY2014 Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance with AWWA C210. 5of7 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) F. Powder epoxy coating materials shall contain one hundred percent (100%) solids, in accordance with AWWA 213. 2.4 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. 2.5 CONCRETE Concrete used for anchor or thrust blocks shall be Class 560-C-3250 as specified in section 03000. 2.6 WAX TAPE COATING Wax Tape shall be provided in accordance with Section 09902 and the Approved Materials List. 2. 7 POLYETHYLENE ENCASEMENT Polyethylene encasement shall be provided in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install valves with the bolt holes straddling the vertical and horizontal centerlines of pipe, with the operating nut in the vertical position, unless otherwise noted on the Approved Plans. B. Valves shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in accordance with the applicable specification for the piping material and joint type being used for the valve and the water main. C. Joints shall be cleaned and installed in accordance with Section 15061. 3.2 FLANGE INSULATING KITS Flange insulating kits shall be installed between all dissimilar metals, and where shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with Standard Drawing. 3.3 CORROSION PROTECTION Buried Valves: All bolted connections and bolted valve components shall be coated with Wax Tape in accordance with Section 09902 and the entire valve encased in polyethylene in accordance with Section 15000. Exposed Valves: The exterior of valves installed above ground or exposed in vaults or enclosures shall be field painted in accordance with Section 09900. JULY 2014 6 of? SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFVs) 3.4 CONCRETE Concrete thrust, anchor, and support blocks shall be installed as called for in the Standard Drawings. The concrete shall be placed so that valves and valve operators will be accessible for repairs or replacement. 3.5 GATE WELLS AND EXTENSION STEMS Gate wells and extension stems for buried valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.6 DISINFECTION OF THE VALVES Disinfection and flushing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15041, as part of the process of disinfecting the main pipeline. The valves shall be operated during the disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.7 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Valves shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipeline in which it is connected in accordance with Section 15044. END OF SECTION JULY2014 7 of7 SECTION 15102 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) Cl .... C! .... Tag Number V8F-001 V8F-002 V8F-003 V8F-004 JULY 2014 Cl ~ .... .~ rn (in) 14 14 14 18 .... (W) C! .... c 0 ~ ii Q. < Pressure reducing station Pressure reducing station Pressure reducing station Station 245+ 76 ~ .... a: c ... ~ o.!! &! ~~~ IV IV 820 820 Cl U) C! .... M' Iii :a 0 i 250F 250F 250F 250F Schedule 15102-801 AWWA Butterfly Valves Schedule Manual Actuators Cl co C! ..... iii E;! :I c :I E ! en ·-ell Ul ~ ~! :lea. _{Qsjl 265 265 265 265 Cl ., C! .... ~ ·c:; 0 ~ E :I E ·= :I (ftL& 7.2 7.2 7.2 4.4 Cl .... Cl t"'i iii :I c ta..-. :&~ ... 0 o-ell ta a..E! >oU 1-< HW HW WN WN 1 of 2 Cl N Cl t"'i Ul ell ~ ~ ~ -·e :::i NA NA NA NA Cl .... Cl cO Ul E ~ Ul c 0 'iii c s No No Yes Yes ... Cl N Cl cO .s ell ta > u-·-ta "CC> .E"CC(!! c.! 0 0 ... -·-:I ta =m::~ ~ ... -u a..-2< No No Yes Yes ~ cO Cl c -~ ell Q. 0 c e en -"CC - c Ul ta ~~~-()f/J No No No No ..... ;g cO Gi~ ell c -ta U)-"CCU) s ~ ta ·-.2 fti ... ... .Q ell ta Q. LLO No No No No Cl It) Cl cO :a .Q ?. ell :I e-~ No No No No Cl U) Cl cO -ell c c 0 .Q c 0 'iii c s No No No No SECTION 15102-S01 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) Notes: (2) Abbreviations for installation types are as follows: B4 Buried, depth of 4 feet [1.2 m] or less B20 Buried, depth greater than 4 feet [1.2 m] but 20 feet [6.1 m] or less Bxx Buried, depth greater than 20 feet [6.1 m], actual depth of xx feet IV In vault (3) Suffix letters define valve ends as follows: F Flanged MJ Mechanical joint (4) Abbreviations for actuator types are as follows: WN Wrench Nut HW HandWheel END OF SCHEDULE JULY 2014 2 of2 SECTION 15102-S01 Butterfly Valves (BFV's) SECTION 15108 AIR RELEASE VALVE, AIR AND VACUUM VALVE, AND COMBINATION AIR VALVE ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION This section includes the materials and installation instructions for all air release valve, air and vacuum valve, and combination air valve assemblies as required by the work and as indicated in the air valve schedule. The term "air valve" is used generically in this specification to refer to requirements common to all of the specified air release valves, air and vacuum valves, and combination air valves. Otherwise, the various types of air valves are addressed by the individual designations commonly used in AWWA and industry standards. 1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. American Water Works Association (AWWA) C512 Standards for Combination Air Valve Assemblies 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE CMWD Standard Drawings Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15057, 15061, 15064, 15100, 16640 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Combination air valves are generally installed on all potable and recycled water mains at high points and where shown on the Approved Plans and in accordance with the Standard Drawings. B. Unless otherwise directed by the District Engineer, combination air valves will be required as indicated below: 1. 2" combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 6" and 8". 2. 2" combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 10" and 12". 3. Multiple 2" and 4" combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 16" through 20". 4. 6" combination air valve assemblies shall be installed on pipeline sizes 24" through 36". C. Air release valves and air and vacuum valves shall be installed in accordance with the Approved Plans or as directed by the District Engineer. JULY 2014 1 of4 SECTION 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies D. Air release valves for working pressures below 20 psi shall be provided with soft seats. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Valves shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard, or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until the valve is ready to be installed. Valves shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Valves shall not be stacked. 1.6 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification tape shall be installed for air valve assemblies in accordance with Section 15000. 1. 7 SUBMITTALS The following items shall be submitted for review and approval per the Submittals section, prior to ordering or delivery of valves. A. Complete assembly drawings, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials used and accessories forming a part of the valves furnished. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 COMBINATION AIR VALVES A. Combination air valves and appurtenant components and materials suitable for the system pressure shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. B. Combination air valves shall comply with AWWA C512 except as modified herein. C. 2" combination air valves shall be the single-body type incorporating stainless steel internal components and National Pipe Threaded (NPT) inlet and outlet configurations. D. 4" and 6" Combination Air Valves shall be the single-body type. Valves shall incorporate stainless steel internal components, protective hood and flanged inlet. E. Internal protective epoxy coatings for clean water valves shall be provided in accordance with AWWA C550. 1. JULY 2014 Liquid epoxy lining and coating materials shall be listed in the NSF Listing for Drinking Water Additives, Standard 61, certified for use in contact with potable water. 2of4 SECTION 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies 2. The minimum dry film thickness for epoxy linings shall be 0.01". Liquid epoxy lining shall be applied in two (2) coats in accordance with AWWA C210. F. A shutoff valve shall be provided in the piping leading to each air valve. Shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller shall be ball valves in accordance with Section 15000. 2.3 ENCLOSURES Air Valve Enclosures shall be selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.4 CONCRETE Concrete used for anchor or thrust blocks and equipment pads shall be in accordance with Section 03000. 2.5 BREAK-AWAY BOLTS Combination air valves, air release valves and air and vacuum valves located above ground sized 4" and larger shall be installed with break-away bolts in accordance with the Standard Drawings and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.6 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and selected from the Approved Materials List. 2.7 FIELD PAINTING AND COATING Field painting and coating materials shall be in accordance with Section 09900 and selected from the Approved Materials List. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Air valve assemblies shall be provided as shown on the Approved Plans. Additional air valve assemblies may be required in areas of potential air entrapment, at the discretion of the District Engineer. B. Air valve assemblies shall be installed relative to street improvements in accordance with the Standard Drawings. C. Connections for the air valve assemblies shall be made within a section of the main line no closer than 24" to a bell, coupling, joint or fitting. JULY 2014 3 of 4 SECTION 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies 3.2 CONCRETE Concrete thrust or anchor blocks and equipment pads shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.4 DISINFECTION Air valve assemblies shall be disinfected in accordance with Section 15041 in conjunction with disinfecting the main to which it is connected. The assembly valves shall be operated and the assembly flushed to completely disinfect all internal parts. 3.5 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Air valve assemblies shall be hydrostatically tested in accordance with Section 15044 in conjunction with the pipeline to which they are connected. 3.6 FIELD PAINTING AND COATINGS A. JULY 2014 Field repairs to the enclosure shall not be permitted. Enclosures requiring repairs to the coating shall be returned to the supplier or coating vendor for repairs or recoating. END OF SECTION 4 of 4 SECTION 15108 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies Notes: (1) Abbreviations for types are as indicated: Air Release Valve Combination Air Valve ARV CAV ARVR VRV Air Release and Vacuum Relief Valve Vacuum Relief Valve (3) Abbreviations for inlet types are as indicated: T Threaded, ANSI/ASME 81.20.1, NPT 125F Flanged, ANSI/ASME 816.1, Class 125 250F Flanged, ANSI/ASME 816.1, Class 250 (4) Abbreviations for outlet types are as indicated: T Threaded, ANSI/ASME 81.20.1, NPT 125F Flanged, ANSI/ASME 816.1, Class 125 PH Protective hood End of Schedule JULY 2014 2 of2 SECTION 15108-801 Air Release Valve, Air and Vacuum Valve, and Combination Air Valve Assemblies SECTION 15112 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION This section includes materials, installation, and testing of reduced-pressure backflow prevention devices and check valve and double check valve assemblies. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS The publications listed below form part of this specification to the extent referenced and are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. Reference shall be made to the latest edition of said standards unless otherwise called for. State of California Department of Health Services Division of Drinking Water and Environmental Management, Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies for Service Isolation. 1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE Agencies of Jurisdiction Rules and regulations regarding "Cross Connection Control and Backflow Prevention" CMWD Standard Drawings CMWD Standard Specifications 09900, 15000, 15041, 15044, 15057, 15061, 15064 and 15100 1.4 SERVICE APPLICATION A. Reduced-pressure backflow prevention assemblies shall be provided on all commercial, industrial irrigation and multi-family water services. B. Reduced-pressure backflow prevention assemblies shall be provided on all irrigation services by potable and recycled water. C. Reduced-pressure backflow prevention assemblies shall be provided on potable water services where recycled water, well water or any other water supply is served to the same property. D. Reduce pressure backflow preventers assemblies shall be provided at all points of connections to City sources at construction sites. E. Double check detector assemblies shall be provided on all fire services. F. The City shall be the final authority as to the location, installation, and type of backflow prevention device required. JULY 2014 1 of4 SECTION 15112 Backflow Preventers 1.5 GENERAL DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS A. The Design and construction of the backflow prevention assembly shall meet the requirements called for in this specification except that any modifications specifically shown on the Approved Plans shall take precedence over these general standards. B. The nominal size of the backflow prevention device shall be equal to or greater than the size of the purchased meter. For example, a 1" meter shall have a 1" or larger backflow device. C. The assembly shall include same size valves located on either side of the backflow prevention assemblies. Four test cocks shall be appropriately located on the assembly for testing and certification. D. The nominal size of double check detector assemblies shall be as shown on the Approved Plans or as directed by the Fire Department. E. Enclosures and concrete slabs shall be provided only as shown on the Approved Plans. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Backflow prevention assemblies shall be delivered and stored in accordance with AWWA C210, AWWA C213, and AWWA C550. The port openings shall be covered with plastic, cardboard, or wood while in transit and during storage in the field. These covers shall remain in place until the backflow assembly is ready to be installed. Backflow assemblies shall not be stored in contact with bare ground. Backflow assemblies shall not be stacked. 1.7 RECYCLED WATER IDENTIFICATION Backflow prevention assemblies and enclosures for recycled water shall be identified with purple-colored coating, identification labels, or signs in accordance with Section 15000. 1.8 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed for backflow prevention assemblies in accordance with Section 15000. PART2 MATERIALS 2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTION ASSEMBLIES Backflow prevention assemblies shall be among those listed on the list of "Approved Backflow Prevention Assemblies for Service Isolation" as issued by the State of California Department of Health Services, Division of Drinking Water and Environmental Management. JULY2014 2 of4 SECTION 15112 Backflow Preventers 2.2 CONCRETE Concrete used for slabs and anchor or thrust blocks shall be in accordance with Section 03000. 2.3 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be in accordance with Section 15000 and the Approved Materials List. PART3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Installation shall comply with the latest edition of the Uniform Plumbing Code, applicable local agency and City requirements. B. Backflow prevention assemblies shall be installed in accordance with the Standard Drawings. C. Water service and fire service shut-off valves will be secured closed during installation until an approved backflow prevention device is installed and tested in compliance with this specification. D. When static pressure exceeds 1.03MPa (150psi), or when recommended by the backflow device manufacturer, a pressure-reducing valve shall be installed as shown on the Standard Drawings. 3.2 WARNING/IDENTIFICATION TAPE Warning/Identification Tape shall be installed in accordance with Section 15000 and the Standard Drawings. 3.3 CONCRETE Concrete thrust or anchor blocks and slabs shall be installed in accordance with Standard Drawings. 3.4 ENCLOSURES Enclosures shall be installed where shown on the Approved Plans in accordance with the Standard Drawings. 3.5 DISINFECTION Disinfection and flushing shall be performed in accordance with Section 15041 , as part of the process of disinfecting the main pipeline. The backflow assemblies shall be operated during the disinfection period to completely disinfect all internal parts. JULY 2014 3 of4 SECTION 15112 Backflow Preventers 3.6 HYDROSTATIC TESTING Backflow assemblies shall be hydrostatically tested in conjunction with the pipeline to which they are connected in accordance with Section 15044. 3.7 TESTING The City will inspect and initially test each backflow prevention assembly after inspection of its proper installation is complete. Required maintenance of the backflow prevention device and appurtenances and annual testing of the device shall be the private owner's responsibility. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 4of4 SECTION 15112 Backflow Preventers Section 15140 PIPE SUPPORTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of pipe hangers, brackets, supports, bracing, anchorage, and the design for the pipe support system for pipes 12 inches and smaller. Pipe supports shall be furnished complete with all necessary inserts, bolts, nuts, rods, washers, and other accessories. This section also covers the spacing of expansion joints in pipes 12 inches in diameter and smaller. Expansion joint products and materials are covered in the respective piping sections. This section covers pipe supports for the following pipe materials: Steel (other) 1-2. GENERAL. Contractor shall provide pipe supports, anchors, flexible couplings, and expansion joints for all piping systems. The Drawings indicate pipe supports, anchors, flexible couplings, and expansion joints for pipes larger than 12 inches in diameter, and in special cases for pipes that are 12 inches and smaller. Contractor shall design anchors, pipe supports, expansion joints, and flexible couplings not already shown on the Drawings, in accordance with the requirements specified herein. Contractor's design shall include pipe supports, bracing, and anchorage adjacent to expansion joints, couplings, valves, in-line devices, equipment, wyes and tees, or changes in direction as required for dismantling piping, removing valves or other in-line devices, disconnecting piping from equipment, and pipe support, in addition to supports in accordance with the maximum spacing specified herein. The pipe support system design by Contractor shall rigidly support pipe so there is no visible movement or visible sagging between supports. The system shall comply with specified piping code requirements. Contractor shall not delete or relocate the supports, expansion joints, or couplings indicated on the Drawings without written approval of Engineer. Pipe supports and expansion joints are not required in buried piping, but concrete blocking or other suitable anchorage shall be provided as indicated on the Drawings or specified in other sections. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all supports furnished under this section. If requirements in this JULY 2014 1 of8 SECTION 15140 Pipe Supports specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. Complete data, catalog information, and drawings covering fabricated pipe supports, fabricated inserts, and stainless steel, galvanized, and copper-plated and plastic-coated pipe supports shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Data shall include a listing of the intended use and general location of each item submitted. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. MATERIALS. Unless otherwise indicated, all pipe supports shall comply with ANSI/MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69. Materials of construction for fabricated steel supports are covered in the Structural and Miscellaneous Metals section. All pipe support materials shall be packaged as necessary to ensure delivery in satisfactory condition. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, pipe supports shall be fabricated of manufacturer's standard materials and provided with manufacturer's standard finish. ~- Design loads for inserts, brackets, clamps, and other support items shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended loads. Pipe supports shall be manufactured for the sizes and types of pipe to which they are applied. Strap hangers will not be acceptable. Threaded rods shall have sufficient threading to permit the maximum adjustment available in the support item. Continuously threaded rod is not acceptable for hanger rods over 12 inches [300 mm] in length. Unless accepted by Engineer, the use of supports which rely on stressed thermoplastic components to support the pipe will not be permitted. Contact between dissimilar metals, including contact between stainless steel and carbon steel, shall be prevented. Portions of pipe supports which come into contact with other metals that are dissimilar shall be rubber or vinyl coated. Supports for brass or copper pipe or tubing shall be copper plated or plastic coated. Stainless steel supports shall be AISI Type 304 or 316 stainless steel, except for stainless steel supports fabricated by welding which shall be AISI Type 304L or 316L. JULY2014 2 of8 SECTION 15140 Pipe Supports Pipe support types and application shall comply with Table 1. 2-2. WIND AND SEISMIC LOADS. Wind and seismic loads for worst case conditions of either full, partially full, or empty pipes shall be considered in the design. Seismic design requirements for products specified herein shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. APPLICATION. Concrete inserts or anchor bolts shall be used to support piping from new cast-in-place concrete. Fastening of supports to existing concrete shall be in accordance with the Anchorage in Concrete section. Anchorage shall be provided to resist thrust due to temperature changes, changes in diameter or direction, or dead-ending. Anchors shall be located as specified to force expansion and contraction movement to occur at expansion joints, loops, or elbows, and as needed to prevent excessive bending stresses and opening of mechanical couplings. Anchorage for temperature changes shall be centered between elbows and mechanical joints used as expansion joints. Anchorage for bellows type expansion joints may be located adjacent to the joint. When expansion joints are required, pipe guides shall be provided adjacent to bellows type expansion joints. Guides will not be required where mechanical couplings are permitted as expansion joints. Guides shall be located on both sides of expansion joints, except where anchors are adjacent to the joint. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, one guide shall be within four pipe diameters from the joint and a second guide within 14 pipe diameters from the first guide. Pipe supports shall allow adequate movement; pipe guides shall not be used for anchoring pipe against longitudinal forces. Pipe guides shall be provided at locations as recommended by the manufacturer. 3-2. TYPES OF SUPPORTS. The products for pipe supports shall be as indicated in Table 1 for the specified type and size of support. Where stainless steel is specified for pipe supports but is not available from the name suppliers for the model specified in Table 1, Contractor shall provide a heavier duty support that is available in stainless steel. TABLE 1-TYPES OF SUPPORTS Description and Service Hangers 2-1/2 inch [63 mm] and smaller pipe JULY2014 MSSSP 69 Type (Note 1) 3 of8 Specification SECTION 15140 Pipe Supports TABLE 1 -TYPES OF SUPPORTS MSSSP 69 T~~e Descri~tion and Service {Note 1} S~ecification Other services J-style 5 B-Line "B3690", Anvil "67", Unistrut "J Hanger", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 67. Clevis 1 B-Line "B3104", Anvil "260", or Piping Technology & Products Fig 83. 3 Through 12 inch [75 through 300 mm] pipe (Note 3) Other services Clevis 1 B-Line "B3100" or Anvil "260" for steel pipe; B-Line "B3102", Anvil "590", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 83 C. L. for cast iron pipe. Concrete Inserts, Steel ~ ... .-~ 12 inch [300 mm] and 18 Channel12 ga [2.66 mm smaller pipe thick], galv, 1-5/8 by 1-3/8 inches [41.3 by 34.9 mm], min. 8 inches [200 mm] long, anchor lugs on 4 inch [1 00 mm] centers, at least three lugs, end caps, and filler strip. Beam Clamps, Malleable Iron 21 B-Line "3050" and "3055", or Steel, 12 inch [300 mm] Anvil "133" and "134", or and smaller pipe Piping Technology & Products Fig. 130 and Fig. 130 (SP). 28,29 Anvil "292" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 140. 30 B-Line "3054", Anvil "228", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 140. Side Beam Bracket 34 B-Line "83062", Anvil "202", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 20L. '~ JULY2014 4 of8 SECTION 15140 Pipe Supports TABLE 1 -TYPES OF SUPPORTS Description and Service Wall Supports and Frames, Steel, 12 inch [300 mm] and smaller pipe (Note 2) Brackets Prefabricated channels Offset pipe clamp, 1-1/2 inch [38 mm] and smaller pipe Offset pipe clamp, 2 to 3-1/2 inch [50 to 88 mm] pipe Floor Supports, Steel or Cast Iron 6 inch [150 mm] and smaller pipe 8 through 12 inch [200 to 300 mm] pipe Pipe Alignment Guides Turnbuckles Steel Hanger Rods, Carbon Steel, Threaded Both Ends, 3/8 inch [1 0 mm] minimum size Weldless Eye Nut, steel JULY 2014 MSSSP 69 Type (Note 1) 32 33 37 (with base) 38 13 17 5of8 Specification B-Line "B3066", Anvil "195", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 76. B-Line "B3067", Anvil "199", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 76. 12 ga [2.66 mm thick], galv, 1-5/8 inches [41.3 by 41.3 mm], with suitable brackets and pipe clamps. Galv, 1-1/4 by 3/16 inch [32 by 4.7 mm] steel, with 3/8 inch [9.5 mm] bolts. Galv, 1-1/4 by 1/4 inch [32 by 6 mm] steel, with 3/8 inch [9.5 mm] bolts. B-Line "B3090", Anvil "259" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 48. B-Line "B3093", Anvil "264" or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 46. B-Line "B3281" through "B3287", Anvil "255", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 6. B-Line "B3202", Anvil "230", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 30. B-Line "B3205", Anvil "140", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 128. B-Line "B3200", Anvil "290", or Piping Technology & Products Fig. 40. SECTION 15140 Pipe Supports Table 1 Notes: 1. MSS SP-69 supports and hangers are illustrated on Figure 1-15140. 2. Pipe clamps or other devices which rely on the application of a clamping force to the supported pipe in order to maintain the clamp position or location in a prefabricated channel or track will not be acceptable for use with nonmetallic pipe or tubing. 3. Alternatively, pipe hangers for 12 inch pipe may be saddle type as indicated on the Drawings. 3-3. SUPPORT SPACINGS. Pipe supports and expansion joints shall be spaced in accordance with Tables 2, 3, 4, and 5. The types of pipes to be supported are as specified herein. Table 2 covers spacings for the standard operating conditions specified for each pipe material. Tables 3 and 4 cover PVC and FRP pipe spacings where operating conditions are in excess of the temperature and specific gravity requirements covered in Table 2. Table 5 covers PVC and FRP pipe which carries air or liquids with a specific gravity other than 1.0. Spacing in the tables is the maximum spacing considering gravity loads. Where Contractor's design includes lateral and longitudinal forces due to seismic loads, wind loads, and other forces, the spacing requirement may be less than that indicated in the tables. TABLE 2-MAXIMUM PIPE SUPPORT SPACING AT STANDARD TEMPERATURES AND SERVICES Pige Suggort Max Sgacing Tvoe of Pige feet [m] Steel, for other services 1-1/4 inch 7 [2.1] [31 mm] and smaller 1-1/2 to 4 inch 10 [3.0] [38 to 100 mm] Over4 inch 15 [4.5] [100 mm] JULY2014 Max Run Without Exgansion Joint. Loog. or Bend (Note 1} feet [m] 30 [9.1] 30 [9.1] 80 [24.4] 6of8 Exgansion Joint Max S~acing (Note 2} feet [m] 100 [30.5] 100 [30.5] 80 [24.4] Ty:~e of Exgansion Joints Note 3 Note 3 Note 6 SECTION 15140 Pipe Supports Table 2 Notes: 1. Unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer, an expansion joint shall be provided in each straight run of pipe having an overall length between loops or bends exceeding the maximum run specified herein. 2. Unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer, the spacing between expansion joints in any straight pipe run shall not exceed the maximum spacing specified herein. 3. Expansion joint fittings are specified in the respective piping sections. 4. At least two properly padded supports for each pipe section. 5. At least one support for each pipe section. 6. Expansion joints shall be mechanical couplings. 7. No expansion joints are required. 8. Supports for 5 and 10 foot [1.5 and 3 m] long pipe sections shall be located within 18 inches [460 mm] of each joint. Supports shall be positioned to maintain the piping alignment and to prevent the piping from sagging. 9 References to specific gravity refer to liquid specific gravity and are referenced to water which is assumed to have a specific gravity of 1.0. 3-3.01. Temperature Adjustments for PVC Pipe. Not used. 3-3.02. Temperature Adjustments for FRP Pipe. Not used. 3-4. INSTALLATION. 3-4.01. General. All piping shall be supported in a manner which will prevent undue stress on any valve, fitting, or piece of equipment. In addition, pipe supports shall be provided at changes in direction or elevation, and adjacent to flexible couplings. Pipe supports and hangers shall not be installed in equipment access areas. Where horizontal piping is arranged with two or more parallel lines, trapeze hangers may be used in lieu of individual hangers. Trapeze assembly shall consist of structure attachments as previously specified with rod size dependent upon total weight supported. Spacing of assemblies shall be determined by the minimum pipe size included in the group supported. Trapeze horizontal assemblies shall be structural angle or channel section of sufficient size to prevent measurable sag between rods when pipes are full. All lines shall be attached to the horizontal with intermediate pipe guides and U-bolts or one-hole clamps. Pre-engineered support equipment may be used when selected and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. No piping shall be supported from the pipe above. JULY 2014 7 of8 SECTION 15140 Pipe Supports Horizontal piping hanger support rods shall attach to steel beams with center- loading 1-clamps, or welded beam clips. Hanger support rods shall attach to concrete slabs or beams with inserts. Anchorage shall be provided to resist both lateral and longitudinal seismic forces. 3-4.02. Inserts. Reference building structural concrete Drawings for concrete inserts. When not provided as part of the building concrete structure, provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. Where concrete slabs form finished ceilings, provide inserts flush with the slab surface. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide thru-bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut recessed into and grouted flush with slab. NDE (Non-Destructive Evaluation) shall be used to locate existing reinforcing before drilling. 3-4.03. Pipe Hangers and Supports. Hanger rod sizes for copper pipe and plastic pipe shall be the size of hanger rods for steel pipe. Install hangers to provide a minimum 1/2 inch [13 mm] space between finished covering and adjacent work. A hanger shall be placed within 18 inches [450 mm] of each horizontal elbow, and on both sides of all piping accessories and valves weighing 20 lbs [9 kg] or more. Hangers shall have 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] minimum vertical adjustment. Support vertical piping at every floor using riser clamps. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Hanger and hanger components shall be sized specifically for the pipe size it is to be used on. 3-5. PLACEMENT. The maximum spacing for pipe supports and expansion joints shall be as indicated in Tables 2, 3, 4, and 5. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or acceptable to Engineer, piping shall be supported approximately 1-1/2 inches [38 mm] out from the face of walls and at least 3 inches [75 mm] below ceilings. End of Section JULY2014 8 of8 SECTION 15140 Pipe Supports e 6 ~ f$f Tr v LIGHT WELDED ADJ. STEEL CLEVIS ADJ. STEEL STEEL TURNBUCKLE TOP BEAM TOP 1-BEAM CLAMP STEEL BRACKET TYPE -1 BAND HGR TYPE-13 C-CLAMP TYPE-25 TYPE-31 TYPE-7 TYPE-19 fi MEDIUM WELDED 6 STEEL BRACKET ~ TYPE-32 ~ D HEAVY WELDED STEEL BRACKET TYPE-33 ALLOY STEEL EXTENSION PIPE ON STEEL CLEVIS SIDE I-BEAM ON CLIP PIPE CLAMP RISER CLAMP TYPE-14 CHANNEL CLAMP TYPE-26 TYPE-2 TYPE-8 TYPE-20 0 6 ~ ~ ~ ~ SIDE BEAM BRACKET CARBON OR ALLOY ADJUSTABLE SWIVEL TYPE-34 STEEL DOUBLE BOLT BAND HGR TURNBUCKLE CENTER I-BEAM SIDE I-BEAM CLAMP PIPE CLAMP TYPE-9 TYPE-15 TYPE-21 TYPE-27 TYPE-3 0 fj ~ " T £ WELDED ADJ. SWIVEL RING MALLEABLE A TT A TCHMENT STEEL I-BEAM CLAMP PIPE SLIDE & STEEL PIPE CLAMP BAND TYPE IRON SOCKET TYPE-22 W/ EYE NUT SLIDE PLATE TYPE-4 TYPE-10 TYPE-16 AS SHOWN OR TYPE-28 TYPE-35 INVERTED LESS BOLT e 6 ~ JfJ ~ ~ PIPE HANGER SPLIT PIPE W/WO STEEL WELDLESS C-CLAMP STEEL W.F. CLAMP PIPE SADDLE TYPE-5 TURMBUCKLE ADJ. EYE NUT TYPE-23 W/ EYE NUT SUPPORT TYPE-11 TYPE-17 TYPE-29 TYPE-36 6 6 lW--W-T 9 ADJ. SWIVEL PIPE RING EXTENSION SPLIT STEEL OR MALLEABLE U-BOLT MALLEABLE BEAM CLAMP PIPE STANCHION SPLIT RING TYPE OR PIPE CLAMP CONCRETE INSERT TYPE-24 W /EXTENSION PIECE SADDLE SOLID RING TYPE HINGED OR TWO BOLT TYPE-18 TYPE-30 TYPE-37 TYPE-6 TYPE-12 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Black & veat:cM PIPE SUPPORTS FIG 1-15140(A) Section 15500 VENTILATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of ventilating, (HVAC) equipment, devices, and appurtenances associated with the HVAC systems. Piping, pipe supports, valves, and accessories which are not an integral part of the equipment or are not specified herein are covered in other sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. Coordination. Contractor shall verify that each component of the system is compatible with all other parts of the system; that all piping, ductwork, materials, fans, and motor sizes are appropriate; and that all devices necessary for a properly functioning system have been provided. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are needed, they shall be the product of a single manufacturer; however, all the component parts of the system need not be the products of one manufacturer. Where several manufacturers' names have been listed in this section as possible suppliers, only the products of the first manufacturer listed have been checked for size, functions, and features. 1-2.02. General Eauioment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations shall apply to all equipment and materials furnished under this section. If requirements in this specification differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence. 1-2.04. Governing Standards. Except as modified or supplemented herein, all work covered by this section shall be performed in accordance with all applicable municipal codes and ordinances, laws, and regulations. In case of a conflict between this section and any state law or local ordinance, the latter shall govern. All work shall comply with UL safety requirements. 1-2.05. Power Supply. Power supply to equipment with motors shall be as indicated in schedules on the Drawings. Power supply for controls shall be JULY 2014 1 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation 120 volts, 60 Hz, single phase unless otherwise required for a properly operating system. 1-2.06. Metal Thickness. Metal thickness and gages specified herein are minimum requirements. Gages refer to US Standard gage. 1-2.07. Mechanical Identification. Mechanical identification shall conform to the requirements of the Basic Mechanical Building Systems Materials and Methods section. 1-3. SUBMITTALS. 1-3.01. Drawings and Data. Complete assembly and installation drawings, and wiring and schematic diagrams, together with detailed specifications and data covering materials, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the equipment furnished, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. Device tag numbers indicated on the Drawings shall be referenced on the wiring and schematic diagrams where applicable. The data and specifications for each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: Fans Name of manufacturer. Type and model. --~ Construction materials, thickness, and finishes. ,J Overall dimensions and required clearances. Net weight and load distribution. Performance curves with the specified operating point clearly identified for each unit, type, and model, with capacity in cubic feet per minute [m3/s] as the abscissa and brake horsepower, static pressure, and efficiency as the ordinate. The fan curves shall include a family of curves for at least 3 different rotative speeds on a single chart. Certified AMCA standard test code sound power output data for the fan outlet and casing when operating at the specified volume flow rate. Sound data shall list dB re 10-12 watts in each octave band, with midrange frequencies starting at 63 Hz and ending at 8,000 Hz. Where specified, information on equipment manufacturers' representatives. Equipment (not specifically listed) Name of manufacturer. Type and model. Construction materials, thickness, and finishes. Manufacturer's performance data. Overall dimensions and required clearances. Net weight and load distribution. ·~ .. Wiring diagrams. .....,; JULY2014 2 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation 1-3.02. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. Complete apparatus report sheets for all air systems shall be accurately and completely filled out in accordance with the Standard's manual. The testing and balancing results shall be submitted on the TAB report forms of the applicable standard. Copies of the final test readings and report sheets shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. A description of the standard procedures used during testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be included in the submittal. The submittal shall include a reduced set of drawings, with the air outlet devices, air inlet devices, and equipment identified to correspond with the report sheets. Test dates shall be recorded on the individual TAB report forms indicating when the actual testing was performed. The apparatus report sheets shall include the following information: 1. Title Page: a. Company name b. Company address c. Company telephone number d. Project name e. Project location f. Project Engineer g. Project Contractor h. Project altitude i. Date 2. Instrument List: a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model d. Serial number e. Range f. Calibration date 3. Air Moving Equipment: a. Unit number b. Location c. Manufacturer d. Model and serial number e. Airflow, design and actual f. Total static pressure (total external), design and actual g. Static pressure, inlet and discharge h. Total pressure i. Fan RPM, design and actual 4. Pump Data: a. Unit number b. Manufacturer c. Size/model d. Impeller JULY 2014 3 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation e. Service f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP h. Discharge pressure i. Suction pressure j. Total operating head pressure k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures I. Shut off, total head pressure 1-3.03. Operation and Maintenance Data and Manuals. Adequate operation and maintenance information shall be supplied as required in the Submittals section. Operation and maintenance manuals shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The operation and maintenance manuals shall be in addition to any instructions or parts lists packed with or attached to the equipment when delivered. 1-4. QUALITY ASSURANCE. Quality assurance shall comply with the requirements of the Basic Mechanical Building Systems Materials and Methods section. 1-5. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING. Shipping, handling, and storage shall be per the General Provisions, Section 4-2 Materials Transportation Handling and Storage. 1-6. EXTRA MATERIALS. Extra materials shall be furnished for the equipment as specified in the individual equipment paragraphs. Extra materials shall be packaged in accordance with the General Provisions paragraph 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage. Each label shall indicate manufacturer's name, equipment name, equipment designation, part nomenclature, part number, address of nearest distributor, and current list price. Extra materials shall be delivered to Owner as directed. Extra materials subject to deterioration such as ferrous metal items and electrical components shall be properly protected by lubricants or desiccants and encapsulated in hermetically sealed plastic wrapping. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2-1. SERVICE CONDITIONS. All equipment shall be designed and selected to meet the specified conditions. 2-2. PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN REQUIREMENTS. Equipment and coil ~) capacities shall be as indicated on the schedules. Where equipment is provided , JULY 2014 4 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation with special coatings, unit capacities shall be corrected to account for any efficiency losses from the selected special coating. Each fan's operating selection point on the fan curves shall be selected to the right of the peak pressure/efficiency point and below the lowest point along the fan curve to the left of the peak pressure/efficiency point. 2-2.01. Dimensional Restrictions. Layout dimensions will vary between manufacturers and the layout area indicated on the Drawings is based on typical values of the first manufacturer listed. Contractor shall review the contract Drawings, the manufacturer's layout drawings, and installation requirements and shall make any modifications required for proper installation subject to acceptance by Engineer. At least 3 feet [0.9 m] of clear access space shall be provided on all sides of the unit unless otherwise indicated. 2-2.02. Elevation. Equipment shall be designed to operate at the elevation indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. All equipment furnished for sites above 2000 feet [61 0 m] above sea level shall be properly derated to operate and meet the specified capacities at the site conditions. 2-3. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS. Acceptable manufacturers shall be as listed in the respective product description paragraphs. 2-4. MATERIALS. 2-4.01. Gas Vent Systems. Not used. 2-4.02. Packaged Air Handling Units. Not used. 2-4.03. Furnaces. Not used. 2-4.04. Makeup Air Units. Not used. 2-4.05. Heaters. Not used. 2-4.06. Fans. Fans shall be rated in accordance with AMCA standards, shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Rating Label unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, and shall be UL listed. Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with the requirements of ASH RAE 62.1. Each fan shall be complete with an electric motor and accessories required for satisfactory operation. Belt-driven fans shall be complete with a V-belt drive designed for 50 percent overload capacity, sheaves, adjustable base or rails for belt tightening, and a belt guard. Adjustable pitch sheaves shall be furnished for fans with less than 10 horsepower [7 .5 kW] motors and fixed sheaves for JULY 2014 5 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation 10 horsepower [7.5 kW] and larger motors. Adjustable sheaves shall be selected so that the fan speed at the specified conditions is at the mid-position of the sheave range. Sheaves shall be replaced with sheaves of the proper size after the air system balancing if necessary, to provide the required fan speed for the specified airflow. Fan drive motors shall be as specified in the Electrical paragraph, unless otherwise indicated. Fans shall be suitable for use with the power supply indicated on the Drawings. The external static pressure values indicated in the schedules on the Drawings are external to the complete unit. Internal fan housing and when furnished, backdraft damper and filter losses are not included. An allowance of 0.35 inch water column [87 Pa] shall be used for pleated filter losses. 2-4.06.01. Extra Materials. Extra Materials Sets of matched belts per fan 2-4.06.02. Cabinet Fans. Not used. 2-4.06.03. Duct Fans. Not used. 2-4.06.04. Power Roof Ventilators. Not used. 2-4.06.05. Propeller Fans. Not used. Quantity 1 2-4.06.06. Utility Fans. Utility fans shall be Loren Cook "CPV", Greenheck, or Penn Barry. Utility fans shall be multiblade, squirrel-cage type, with nonoverloading type blades. The fans shall be statically and dynamically balanced for quiet, vibration- free operation and shall be provided with vibration isolators. Fan housings shall be heavy gage steel, of all-welded construction and shall be factory coated with the manufacturer's standard polyester coating unless otherwise indicated on drawings. The coating shall have at least a 2 mil dry finish thickness. Fan bearings shall be of the self-aligning, ball type. 2-4.07. Roof Hoods. Not used. 2-4.08. Dampers. Not used. 2-4.09. Damper Operators. Not used. JULY 2014 6 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation 2-4.10. Air Outlet and Inlet Devices. Not used. 2-4.11. Flexible Connections. Flexible connections located indoors shall be Ventfabrics "Ventglas". Ductwork connections to the air handling equipment, and where indicated on the Drawings, shall be made using fabric connectors with sheet metal collars. The fabric shall be fire resistant, waterproof, mildew-resistant, and airtight. At least 3 inches [76 mm] of fabric shall be exposed. Flexible connections shall be in accordance with the requirements of UL and NFPA. Fabric for flexible connections protected from sunlight and the weather shall be suitable for a temperature range of -20 to 180°F [-29 to 82°C] and shall weigh at 2 least 27 ounces per square yard [915 g/m ]. 2-4.12. Fan Timers. Fan timers shall be provided as indicated on drawings. The time switch shall be of the 24-Hour type dial and shall include 96 semi- permanently attached trippers. The enclosure shall be Type 3R plastic. The time switch shall provide up to 48 ON and 48 OFF periods of 15 minutes each per day. The fan shall be set to run for a period of 30 minutes per hour. After 30 minutes, the fan shall be de-energized. The fan shall repeat this operation 24 times per day. 2-5. ELECTRICAL. Electric motors and motor controls shall conform to the Basic Mechanical Building Systems Materials and Methods section. Motor starters and controls shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical section, except for equipment specified or furnished with prewired integral starters. Disconnects for equipment shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical section, except where specified with integral disconnects. All electrical controls shall have enclosures suitable for the environment and NEMA rating as indicated on the electrical Drawings. Equipment installed outdoors shall have NEMA Type 4 enclosures. 2-6. DRIVE UNITS. Electric motors, V-belt drives, and safety guards shall be in accordance with the requirements of the Basic Mechanical Building Systems Materials and Methods section. 2-7. MANUFACTURE AND FABRICATION. Manufacture and fabrication shall comply with the requirements of the Basic Mechanical Systems Materials and Methods section. 2-8. SHOP TESTING. The equipment furnished under this section shall be tested at the factory according to the standard practice of the manufacturer. Ratings shall be based on tests made in accordance with applicable AMCA, ASHRAE, AHRI, NBS, NFPA, and UL Standards. JULY 2014 7 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation 2-9. BALANCE. All rotating parts shall be accurately machined and shall be in as nearly perfect rotational balance as practicable. Excessive vibration shall be sufficient course for rejection of the equipment. The mass of the unit and its distribution shall be such that the resonance at normal operating speeds is avoided. In any case, the maximum measured root-mean-square (rms) value as measured at any point on the equipment shall not exceed those listed in the latest ASHRAE Applications Handbook. At any operating speed, the ratio of rotative speed to the critical speed of a unit or components thereof shall be less than 0.8 or more than 1.3. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. INSPECTION. Equipment installed in facilities with limited access shall be suitable for being installed through available openings. Contractor shall field verify existing opening dimensions and other provisions for installation prior to submittal of bids. Where penetrations through existing concrete slabs are made, the Contractor shall locate and avoid damage to all rebar, embedded conduit, etc. when making new openings. Before testing and balancing the air system, doors and windows surrounding the area served by the system shall be closed. Fans shall be checked for correct rotation and rotative speed. 3-2. PREPARATION. 3-2.01. Field Measurement. Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all field dimensions, and for verifying location of all equipment relative to any existing equipment or structures. 3-2.02. Surface Preparation. All surfaces to be field painted shall be dry and free of dirt, dust, sand, grit, mud, oil, grease, rust, loose mill scale, or other objectionable substances, and shall meet the recommendations of the paint manufacturer for surface preparation. Cleaning and painting operations shall be performed in a manner which will protect freshly painted surfaces from dust or other contaminants. Oil and grease shall be completely removed by use of solvents or detergents before mechanical cleaning is started. The gloss of previously painted surfaces shall be dulled if necessary for proper adhesion of top coats. Surface finish damaged during installation shall be repaired to the satisfaction of Engineer. JULY 2014 8 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation 3-3. INSTALLATION. Equipment and materials furnished under this section shall be installed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 3-3.01. Gas Vents. Not used. 3-3.02. Packaged Air Handling Units. Not used. 3-3.03. Furnaces. Not used. 3-3.04. Makeup Air Units. Not used. 3-3.05. Heaters. Not used. 3-3.06. Fans. Where indicated on the Drawings, flexible connections shall be installed between fan inlet and outlet connections. Flexible connections shall not be in tension when the fans are operating. Where fan inlets and outlets are exposed, safety screens shall be installed over the opening. 3-4. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL. 3-4.01. Installation Check. An installation check by an authorized representative of the manufacturer is not required for equipment specified in this section. 3-4.02. Startup and Testing. After the equipment and systems have been installed, adjusted, and balanced, tests shall be conducted to demonstrate that each system is functioning as specified and to the satisfaction of Engineer. Tests shall be as indicated in the Startup Requirements section. If inspection or tests indicate defects, the defective work or material shall be replaced, and inspection and tests repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new materials. Caulking of threaded joints or holes will not be acceptable. 3-5. CLEANING. At the completion of the testing, all equipment, pipes, ductwork, valves, and fittings shall be cleaned of grease, debris, metal cuttings, and sludge. Any stoppage, discoloration, or other damage to parts of the building, its finish, or furnishings shall be repaired by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner. JULY 2014 9 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation 3-6. ADJUSTING & BALANCING. The air system shall be adjusted and balanced. All instrumentation shall be calibrated in accordance with the governing standard manual and shall be checked for accuracy before testing, adjusting, and balancing the systems. The accuracy of the instrumentation shall be not less than specified by the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard manual or the instrument manufacturer. All data, including system deficiencies encountered and corrective measures taken, shall be recorded. If a system cannot be adjusted to meet the design requirements, Contractor shall notify Engineer in writing as soon as practicable. Following final acceptance of the certified balancing reports, the testing and balancing contractor shall permanently mark the settings of all adjustment devices, including valves and dampers, and shall lock the memory stops. All ceiling tiles, belt guards, panels, and doors removed during testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be reinstalled. 3-6.01. Air Systems. Air systems shall be adjusted to the design airflows indicated on the Drawings. Airflows shall be adjusted to maintain a net positive (supply airflow greater than exhaust airflow) or negative (exhaust airflow greater ~. than supply airflow) pressure as indicated on the Drawings. Fans shall not be ...,.,.1 adjusted above the maximum safe speed as determined by the fan manufacturer. End of Section JULY 2014 10 of 10 SECTION 15500 Ventilation Section 16050 ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the furnishing and installation of all equipment and materials needed for the electrical requirements of this Contract. It also covers conduit, wiring, and terminations for electrical equipment installed under Electrical Equipment Installation section. This section covers the installation and interconnection of electrical equipment furnished under other sections, except electrical items designated to be installed under those sections. 1-2. GENERAL. Electrical apparatus on all equipment shall be installed complete and placed in readiness for proper operation. Electrical materials furnished and installed under this section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. 1-2.01. General Equipment Stipulations. The General Equipment Stipulations section shall apply to all equipment provided under this section. If requirements in this section differ from those in the General Equipment Stipulations section, the requirements specified herein shall take precedence 1-2.02. Seismic Design Requirements. Seismic design requirements for products specified herein shall be as indicated in the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 1-2.03. Coordination. Electrical work shall conform to the construction schedule and the progress of other trades. 1-2.04. Anchor Bolts and Expansion Anchors. All anchor bolts, nuts, washers, and expansion anchors shall comply with Anchorage in Concrete section, except smaller than 3/4 inch will be permitted to match NEMA standard size bolt holes on motors and electrical equipment. 1-2.05. Drawings. Supplementing this section, the Drawings indicate locations of equipment and enclosures and provide one-line and schematic diagrams regarding the connection and interaction with other equipment. JULY 2014 1 of 22 SECTION 16050 Electrical 1-3. CODES AND PERMITS. All work shall be performed and materials shall be furnished in accordance with the NEC -National Electrical Code, the NESC - National Electrical Safety Code, and the following standards where applicable: ANSI ASTM AWG Fed Spec ICEA IEEE IESNA NElS NEMA NFPA UL American National Standards Institute. American Society for Testing and Materials. American Wire Gauge. Federal Specification. Insulated Cable Engineers Association. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. Illuminating Engineering Society of North America. National Electrical Installation Standards National Electrical Manufacturers Association. National Fire Protection Association. Underwriters' Laboratories. Equipment covered by this section shall be listed by UL, or by a nationally recognized third party testing laboratory. All costs associated with obtaining the listing shall be the responsibility of Contractor. If no third-party testing laboratory ~ provides the required listing, an independent test shall be performed at ~ Contractor's expense. Before the test is conducted, Contractor shall submit a copy of the testing procedure to be used. 1-4. SEISMIC DESIGN REQUIREMENT. 1-4.01. Seismic Design Requirements. Submit confirmation of compliance with the requirements of the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 1-5. IDENTIFICATION. 1-5.01. Conduit. Conduits in manholes, handholes, building entrance pull boxes, junction boxes, and equipment shall be provided with identification tags. Identification tags shall be 19 gage stainless steel, with 1/2 inch stamped letters and numbers as indicated on the Drawings. Identification tags shall be attached to conduits with nylon tie wraps and shall be positioned to be readily visible. 1-5.02. Conductors. All conductors in power, control, and instrumentation circuits shall be identified and color coded as described herein. 1-5.02.01. Conductor Identification Number. Except for lighting and receptacle circuits, each individual conductor in power, control, and instrumentation circuits ~ shall be provided with wire identification markers at the point of termination. ....,/ JULY 2014 2 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical The wire markers shall be of the heat-shrinkable tube type, with custom typed identification numbers. The wire numbers shall be as indicated on the equipment manufacturer's drawings. The wire markers shall be positioned to be readily visible for inspection. 1-5.02.02. Conductor Color Coding. Power conductors shall be color coded as indicated below. For conductors 6 AWG and smaller, the color coding shall be the insulation finish color. For sizes larger than 6 AWG, the color coding may be by marking tape. The equipment grounding conductor shall be green or green with one or more yellow stripes if the conductor is insulated. The following color coding system shall be used: 120/240V single-phase-black, red, and white 120/208V, three-phase-black, red, blue, and white 120/240V, three-phase-black, orange, blue, and white 277/480V, three-phase-brown, orange, yellow, and gray Where 120/240 and 120/208 volt systems share the same conduit or enclosure, the neutral for either the 120/240 volt system or the 208 volt system shall be white with a permanent identifiable violet stripe. Control and instrumentation circuit conductors shall be color coded as indicated in the Cable Data Figures at the end of this section. 1-5.03. Motor Starters. Not used. 1-5.04. Control Stations. Not used. 1-5.05. Circuit Breakers. Circuit breakers shall be provided with nameplates identifying related equipment. Nameplates shall be laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch engraved letters, and shall be securely fastened to the circuit breakers. 1-5.06. Disconnect Switches. All switches shall have front cover-mounted permanent nameplates that include switch type, manufacturer's name and catalog number, and horsepower [kW] rating. An additional nameplate, engraved or etched, laminated black-over-white plastic, with 1/8 inch letters, shall be provided to identify the associated equipment. Both nameplates shall be securely fastened to the enclosure. JULY 2014 3 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical 1-5.07. Arc Flash Hazard Labels. Lighting panels, power panels, power centers, and meter socket enclosures shall be provided with permanent labels warning the risk of arc flash and shock hazard. Labels shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-1998 and shall include the following: WARNING Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Appropriate personal protection equipment (PPE) required. SEE NFPA ?OE. Equipment must be accessed by qualified personnel only. Turn off all power sources prior to working on or inside equipment. 1-6. SUBMITTALS. Complete assembly, foundation, and installation drawings, together with complete engineering data covering the materials used, parts, devices, and accessories forming a part of the work performed by the Contractor, shall be submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The drawings and data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: Drawings and data. Operating manuals. Samples. 1-6.01. Submittal Identification. Information covering all materials and .~ equipment shall be submitted for review in accordance with the Submittals ..,..,; section. Each sheet of descriptive literature submitted shall be clearly marked to identify the material or equipment as follows: a. Lamp fixture descriptive sheets shall show the fixture schedule letter, number, or symbol for which the sheet applies. b. Equipment and materials descriptive literature and drawings shall show the specification paragraph for which the equipment applies. c. Sheets or drawings covering more than the item being considered shall have all inapplicable information crossed out. d. A suitable notation shall identify equipment and materials descriptive literature not readily cross-referenced with the Drawings or Specifications. e. Schematics and connection diagrams for all electrical equipment shall be submitted for review. A manufacturer's standard connection diagram or schematic showing more than one scheme of connection will not be accepted, unless it is clearly marked to show the intended connections. JULY 2014 4 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical Contractor shall submit the name and qualifications of the Engineering and Testing Services firm proposed to perform the coordination study and the on site testing. Within 90 days after the Notice to Proceed, Contractor shall furnish a submittal for all types of cable and conduit to be provided. The submittal shall include the cable manufacturer and type, and sufficient data to indicate that the cable and conduit meet the specified requirements. In addition to the complete specifications and descriptive literature, a sample of the largest size of each type of cable shall be submitted for review before installation. Each sample shall include legible and complete surface printing of the cable identification. 1-6.02. Seismic Design Requirements. Submitted confirmation of compliance with the requirements of the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 1-7. PROTECTION AND STORAGE. During construction, the insulation on all electrical equipment shall be protected against absorption of moisture, and metallic components shall be protected against corrosion by strip heaters, lamps, or other suitable means. This protection shall be provided immediately upon receipt of the equipment and shall be maintained continuously. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2-1. POWER SERVICE ENTRANCE. Not used. 2-2. TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE. Not used. 2-3. CABLE. All cables of each type (such as lighting cable or 600 volt power cable) shall be from the same manufacturer. All types of cable shall conform to the Cable Data Figures at the end of this section and as described herein. 2-3.01. Lighting Cable. Not used. 2-3.02. 600 Volt Power Cable. Cable in power, control, indication, and alarm circuits operating at 600 volts or less, except where lighting, multiconductor control, and instrument cables are required, shall be 600 volt (Figure 2-16050 XHHW-2) power cable. JULY 2014 5 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical 2-3.03. Instrument Cable. Cable for electronic circuits to instrumentation, metering, and other signaling and control equipment shall be two-or three- conductor instrument cable twisted for magnetic noise rejection and protected from electrostatic noise by a total coverage shield. Types of instrument cables shall be (Figure 4-16050 single pair). 2.3.04. Multiconductor Control Cable. Not used. 2-3.05. Medium Voltage Power Cable. Not used. 2-3.06. Tray Cable. Not used. 2-4. CONDUIT. Conduit and raceways shall be as described in the following paragraphs: 2-4.01. Rigid Steel Conduit. Not used. 2-4.02. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC). Not used. 2-4.03. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be hot-dip galvanized steel, shall be covered with a moistureproof polyvinyl chloride jacket, and shall be UL labeled. 2-4.04. Utility (PVC) Duct. Not used. 2-4.05. Rigid Nonmetallic (PVC) Conduit. PVC conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 40, UL labeled for aboveground and underground uses, and shall conform to NEMA TC-2 and UL 651. 2-4.06. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit. The conduit shall be rigid steel. Before the PVC coating is applied, the hot-dip galvanized surfaces shall be coated with a primer to obtain a bond between the steel substrate and the coating. The PVC coating shall be bonded to the primed outer surface of the conduit. The bond on conduit and fittings shall be stronger than the tensile strength of the PVC coating. The thickness of the PVC coating shall be at least 40mils. A chemically cured two-part urethane coating, at a nominal 2 mil thickness, shall be applied to the interior of all conduit and fittings. The coating shall be sufficiently flexible to permit field bending the conduit without cracking or flaking of the coating. Every female conduit opening shall have a PVC sleeve extending one conduit diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, beyond the opening. The inside diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit before coating. The wall thickness of the sleeve shall be at least 40 mils. JULY 2014 6 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical All fittings, condulets, mounting hardware, and accessories shall be PVC-coated. All hollow conduit fittings shall be coated with the interior urethane coating described above. The screw heads on condulets shall be encapsulated by the manufacturer with a corrosion-resistant material. PVC coated rigid steel conduit shall be manufactured by Ocal, Perma-Cote, or Rob roy. 2-4.07. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT). Not used. 2-4.08. Rigid Aluminum Conduit (RAC). Not used. 2-5. WIRING DEVICES, BOXES, AND FITTINGS. Concealed conduit systems shall have flush-mounted switches and convenience outlets. Exposed conduit systems shall have surface-mounted switches and convenience outlets. 2-5.01. Conduit Boxes and Fittings. a. Galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings shall be manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or 0 Z Gedney. b. Rigid PVC device boxes and fittings shall be manufactured by Carlon or Cantex. c. Sheet steel device boxes shall be manufactured by Appleton, Raco, or Steel City. d. PVC coated device boxes shall be manufactured by Ocal, Perma-Cote, or Robroy Industries. e. Hub arrangements on threaded fittings shall be the most appropriate for the conduit arrangement to avoid unnecessary bends and fittings. 2-5.02. Device Plates. a. Device plate mounting hardware shall be countersunk and finished to match the plate. b. Device plates for ground fault interrupter receptacles indicated to be weatherproof shall be Appleton "FSK-WGFI", Eagle "966", or 0 Z Gedney "FS-1-GFCA". JULY 2014 7 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical c. Receptacle covers outdoors or otherwise indicated to be weatherproof while in-use shall be die cast aluminum and shall include a padlock eye. Covers for standard convenience outlets shall be Hubbell 'WP8M" or Thomas and Betts Red Dot "CKMUV". Covers for ground fault interrupter receptacles shall be Hubbell "WP26M" or Thomas and Betts Red Dot "CKMUV". d. Engraved device plates, where required, shall be manufactured by Leviton, or equal. e. Device plates on PVC conduit fittings shall be Carlon "E98 Series" or Cantex "513300 Series". 2-5.03. Wall Switches. Not Used. 2-5.04. Receptacles. a. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be duplex, 20 amperes, 125 volts, Eagle "GF8300V", Hubbell "GF53621" or Leviton "7899-1". 2-5.05. Special Outlets. Not used. 2-6. JUNCTION BOXES, PULL BOXES, AND WIRING GUTIERS. Indoor boxes (larger than switch, receptacle, or fixture type) and gutters shall be ~ constructed of sheet steel, shall be galvanized after fabrication, and shall be ""'llllllfl" rigidly supported by hot-dip galvanized hardware and framing materials, including nuts and bolts. Indoor boxes and gutters in corrosive areas indicated on the Drawings and outdoor boxes and gutters shall be NEMA Type 4X, ABS or stainless steel and shall be rigidly supported by PVC-coated or stainless steel framing materials. Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel. All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the manufacturer's instructions. Bolt-on junction box covers 3 feet square or larger, or heavier than 25 lbs , shall have rigid handles. Covers larger than 3 by 4 feet shall be split. Junction and pull boxes with a removable side opposite the underground conduits shall be provided over building ends of underground conduit banks. Boxes shall be sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code, including space for full size continuations of all underground conduits not originally continued. Conduit arrangement shall leave maximum space for future conduits. 2-7. LIGHTING FIXTURES. Lighting fixtures shall be furnished as described in the fixture schedule and as indicated on the Drawings. Lighting fixtures shall be ~ furnished complete with lamps. Pendant fixtures shall have swivel type box ~ JULY 2014 8 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical covers and threaded conduit pendants unless otherwise specified. Lighting fixtures shall be provided with disconnects in accordance with NEC requirements. 2-7.01. Electronic Ballasts. Electronic ballasts furnished with fluorescent type lighting fixtures shall be CBM certified as meeting requirements of ANSI C82.11 with a THO level of not more than 20 percent. 2-8. LIGHTING PANELS. Not used. 2-9. POWER PANELS. Not used. 2-10. SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES. Not used. 2-11. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MOTOR STARTERS. Not used. 2-12. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED MANUAL STARTERS. Not used. 2-13. CONTROL STATIONS. Not used. 2-14. SEPARATELY ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS. Not used. 2-15. DISCONNECT SWITCHES. Unless otherwise specified, each disconnect switch shall be 3 pole, nonfusible, 600 volts, with a continuous current rating as indicated on the Drawings. Switches located indoors shall have NEMA type enclosure designations as required by the locations where they will be installed. Switches located outdoors shall have NEMA Type 4X enclosures. Switches in chlorine rooms, or in other areas where contact with caustic substances may occur, shall have NEMA Type 4X enclosures of molded reinforced polyester. Switches shall have high conductivity copper, visible blades; nonteasible, positive, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms; and switch assembly plus operating handle as an integral part of the enclosure base. Each switch shall have a handle whose position is easily recognizable and which can be locked in the "Ofr' position with three padlocks. The "On" and "Ofr' positions shall be clearly marked. All switches shall be UL listed and horsepower [kilowatt] rated, and shall meet the latest edition of NEMA KS1. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from being opened while the operating handle is in the "On" position. 2-16. LIGHTING AND AUXILIARY POWER TRANSFORMERS. Not used. JULY 2014 9 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical 2-17. POWER CENTERS. Not used. 2-18. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS. Not used. 2-19. LIGHTING CONTACTORS. Not used. 2-20. PHOTOELECTRIC CONTROLS. Not used. 2-21. RELAY ENCLOSURES. Not used. 2-22. ALARM HORN AND BEACON. Not used. 2-23. HEAT-TRACED PIPING. Not used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING. All material, equipment, and components specified herein shall be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in compliance with NECA 1000-NElS Specification System. Where required in NECA 1000, testing and commissioning procedures shall be followed prior to energizing equipment. 3-2. ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS. Not used. 3-3. COORDINATION STUDY. Not used. 3-4. POWER AND SERVICE ENTRANCE INSTALLATION. Not used. 3-5. TELEPHONE SERVICE ENTRANCE INSTALLATION. Not used. 3-6. CABLE INSTALLATION. 3-6.01. General. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, cable shall be installed according to the following procedures, taking care to protect the cable and to avoid kinking the conductors, cutting or puncturing the jacket, contamination by oil or grease, or any other damage. Circuits to supply electric power and control to equipment and devices, communication and signal circuits as indicated on the one-line diagrams shall be installed continuous and may not be spliced unless approved by the Engineer. a. Stranded conductor cable shall be terminated by lugs or pressure type connectors. Wrapping stranded cables around screw type terminals is not acceptable. JULY 2014 10 of 22 SECTION 16050 Electrical b. Stranded conductor cable shall be spliced by crimp type connectors. Twist-on wire connectors may be used for splicing solid cable and for terminations at lighting fixtures. c. Splices may be made only at readily accessible locations. d. Cable terminations and splices shall be made as recommended by the cable manufacturer for the particular cable and service conditions. All shielded cable stress cone terminations shall be IEEE Class 1 molded rubber type. Shielded cable splices shall be tape or molded rubber type as required. Shielded cable splices and stress cone terminations shall be made by qualified splicers. Materials shall be by 3M Company, Plymouth/Bishop, or Raychem Electric Power Products. e. Cable shall not be pulled tight against bushings nor pressed heavily against enclosures. f. Cable-pulling lubricant shall be compatible with all cable jackets; shall not contain wax, grease, or silicone; and shall be Polywater "Type J". g. Where necessary to prevent heavy loading on cable connections, in vertical risers, the cable shall be supported by Kellems, or equal, woven grips. h. Spare cable ends shall be taped, coiled, and identified. i. Cables shall not be bent to a radius less than the minimum recommended by the manufacturer. j. All cables in one conduit, over 1 foot long, or with any bends, shall be pulled in or out simultaneously. k. Circuits to supply electric power and control to equipment and devices are indicated on the one-line diagrams. Conductors in designated numbers and sizes shall be installed in conduit of designated size. Circuits shall not be combined to reduce conduit requirements unless acceptable to Engineer. 3-6.02. Underground Cable Pulling Procedure. Not used. 3-6.03. Cable Insulation Test. Not used. 3-7. CONDUIT INSTALLATION. Contractor shall be responsible for routing all conduits. This shall include all conduits indicated on the one-lines, riser diagrams, and home-runs shown on the plan Drawings. Conduits shall be routed as defined in these Specifications. Where conduit routing is shown on plans, it shall be considered a general guideline and shall be field verified to avoid interferences. JULY 2014 11 of 22 SECTION 16050 Electrical Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, conduit installation and identification shall be completed according to the following procedures. 3-7.01. Installation of Interior and Exposed Exterior Conduit. This section covers the installation of conduit inside structures, above and below grade, and in exposed outdoor locations. In general, conduit inside structures shall be concealed. Large conduit and conduit stubs may be exposed unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings. No conduit shall be exposed in water chambers unless so indicated on the Drawings. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, Contractor shall be responsible for routing the conduit to meet the following installation requirements: a. Conduit installed in floor slabs and walls in non-hazardous locations shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC. b. Conduit installed in all exposed outdoor locations shall be PVC-coated rigid steel, rigidly supported by PVC-coated framing materials. Mounting hardware, which includes nuts, bolts, and anchors, shall be stainless steel. All damaged coatings shall be repaired according to the manufacturer's instructions. c. Final connections to dry type transformers, to motors without flexible cords, and to other equipment with rotating or moving parts shall be liquidtight flexible metal conduit with watertight connectors installed without sharp bends and in the minimum lengths required for the application, but not longer than 6 feet unless otherwise acceptable to Engineer. d. Exposed conduit shall be installed either parallel or perpendicular to structural members and surfaces. e. Two or more conduits in the same general routing shall be parallel, with symmetrical bends. f. Conduits shall be at least 6 inches from high temperature piping, ducts, and flues. g. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall have supports and provisions for expansion as required by NEC Article 352. h. Metallic conduit connections to sheet metal enclosures shall be securely fastened by locknuts inside and outside. i. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduit shall be secured to sheet metal device boxes using a male terminal adapter with a locknut inside or by using a box adapter inserted through the knockout and cemented into a coupling. ~ JULY2014 12of22 SECTION16050 Electrical j. Conduits that cross structural joints where structural movement is allowed shall be fitted with concretetight and watertight expansion/deflection couplings, suitable for use with metallic conduits and rigid Schedule 40 PVC conduits. The couplings shall be Appleton Type OF, Crouse-Hinds Type XD, or 0-Z Type ox. k. Conduit shall be clear of structural openings and indicated future openings. I. Conduit installed through any openings cut into non-fire rated concrete or masonry structure elements shall be neatly grouted. Conduit penetrations of fire rated structure elements shall be sealed in a manner that maintains the fire rating as indicated on the Architectural Drawings. m. Conduits shall be capped during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, trash, and water. n. Horizontal conduit shall be installed to allow at least 7 feet of headroom, except along structures, piping, and equipment or in other areas where headroom cannot be maintained. o. Conduit shall not be routed across the surface of a floor, roof, or walkway unless approved by Engineer. p. PVC-coated rigid steel conduit shall be threaded and installed as recommended by the conduit manufacturer's installation procedure using appropriate tools. q. All conduits that enter enclosures shall be terminated with acceptable fittings that will not affect the NEMA rating of the enclosure. r. Nonmetallic conduit, which turns out of concrete slabs or walls, shall be connected to a 90 degree elbow of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before it emerges. Conduits shall have PVC-coated rigid steel coupling embedded a minimum of 3 inches when emerging from slabs or walls and the coupling shall extend 2 inches from the wall. 3-7.02. Underground Conduit Installation. All excavation, backfilling, and concrete work shall conform to the respective sections of these Specifications. Underground conduit shall conform to the following requirements: a. All underground conduits shall be concrete encased unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Concrete encasement within 15 feet of building entrances, under and within 5 feet of roadways, and within 10 feet of indicated future excavations shall be reinforced as detailed on the Drawings. JULY 2014 13 of 22 SECTION 16050 Electrical b. Concrete encased conduit shall be schedule 40 PVC. Conduits shall have PVC-coated rigid steel coupling embedded a minimum of 3 inches when emerging from walls and the coupling shall extend 2 inches from the wall. All PVC joints shall be solvent welded in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer. c. Concrete encasement on exposed outdoor conduit risers shall continue to 6 inches above grade, with top crowned and edges chamfered. d. Conduit and concrete encasement installed underground for future extension shall be terminated flush at the bulkhead with a coupling and a screw plug. The termination of the duct bank shall be reinforced with bars 1 00 diameters long that shall be terminated 2 inches from the bulkhead. Matching splice bars shall be 50 bar diameters long. Each longitudinal bar shall be provided with a Lenton "Form Saver" coupler and plate or a Dayton "Superior DBR" coupler at the bulkhead. The coupler shall be threaded to accept a dowel of like diameter in the future. Threads shall be protected with screw-in plastic caps. A 1-3/4 by 3/4 inch deep horizontal shear key shall be formed in the concrete encasement above and below the embedded conduits. After concrete placement, conduit and bar connector ends shall be cleaned and coated with two coats of thixotropic coal tar. e. Underground conduits indicated not to be concrete encased shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC. f. Underground conduit bend radius shall be at least 2 feet at vertical risers and at least 3 feet elsewhere. g. Underground conduits and conduit banks shall have at least 2 feet of earth cover, except where indicated otherwise. h. Underground conduit banks through building walls shall be cast in place, or concreted into boxouts, with water stops on all sides of the boxout. Water stops are specified in the Cast-In-Place Concrete section. i. Underground nonmetallic conduits, which turn out of concrete or earth in outdoor locations, shall be connected to 90 degree elbows of PVC-coated rigid steel conduit before they emerge. j. k. JULY 2014 Conduits not encased in concrete and passing through walls, which have one side in contact with earth, shall be sealed watertight with special rubber-gasketed sleeve and joint assemblies or with sleeves and modular rubber sealing elements. Underground conduits shall be sloped to drain from buildings to manholes. 14 of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical I. Intercommunication and instrument cables shall be separated the maximum possible distance from all power wiring in pull-boxes, manholes, and handholes. 3-7.03. Sealing of Conduits. After cable has been installed and connected, conduit ends shall be sealed by forcing nonhardening sealing compound into the conduits to a depth at least equal to the conduit diameter. This method shall be used for sealing all conduits at handholes, manholes, and building entrance junction boxes, and for 1 inch and larger conduit connections to equipment. Conduits entering chlorine feed and storage rooms shall be sealed in a junction box or conduit body adjacent to the point of entrance. Conduits entering hazardous (classified) areas and submersible or explosion proof enclosures shall have Appleton "Type ESU" or Crouse-Hinds "EYS" sealing fittings with sealing compound. 3-7.04. Reuse of Existing Conduits. Existing conduits may be reused subject to the concurrence of Engineer and compliance with the following requirements: a. A wire brush shall be pulled through the conduit to remove any loose debris. 3-8. WIRING DEVICES. BOXES. AND FITTINGS INSTALLATION. Metallic and nonmetallic conduit boxes and fittings shall be installed in the following locations: 3-8.01. Conduit Boxes and Fittings. a. Galvanized or cadmium plated, threaded, malleable iron boxes and fittings shall be installed in concrete walls, ceilings, and floors; in the outdoor faces of masonry walls; and in all locations where weatherproof device covers are required. These boxes and fittings shall also be installed in exposed rigid steel and intermediate metal conduit systems. b. Galvanized or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes shall be installed in the indoor faces of masonry walls, in interior partition walls, and in joist supported ceilings. c. Rigid PVC device boxes shall be installed in exposed nonmetallic conduit systems. d. PVC coated boxes and fittings shall be installed in PVC coated conduit systems. JULY 2014 15 of 22 SECTION 16050 Electrical 3-8.02. Device Plates. Oversized plates shall be installed where standard-sized plates do not fully cover the wall opening. 3-8.03. Wall Switches. Not Used. 3-8.04. Receptacles. a. Convenience outlets outdoors and in garages; in basements, shops, storerooms, and rooms where equipment may be hosed down; shall be 4 feet above floor or grade. b. After circuits are energized, each receptacle shall be tested for correct polarity and each GFCI receptacle shall be tested for proper operation. c. Conduit and wire for convenience outlet installation is not shown on the Drawings and shall be sized, furnished, and installed by Contractor. Conductors shall be minimum 10 AWG and conduit shall be minimum 3/4 inch for convenience outlet installation. 3-8.05. Special Outlets. Not Used. 3-9. EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION. Except as otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, the following procedures shall be used in performing electrical work. 3-9.01. Setting of Equipment. All equipment, boxes, and gutters shall be installed level and plumb. Boxes, equipment enclosures, metal raceways, and similar items mounted on water-or earth-bearing walls shall be separated from the wall by at least 1/4 inch thick corrosion-resistant spacers. Where boxes, enclosures, and raceways are installed at locations where walls are not suitable or available for mounting, concrete equipment pads, framing material, and associated hardware shall be provided. 3-9.02. Sealing of Equipment. All outdoor substation, switchgear, motor control center, and similar equipment shall be permanently sealed at the base, and all openings into equipment shall be screened or sealed with concrete grout to keep out rodents and insects the size of wasps and mud daubers. Small cracks and openings shall be sealed from inside with silicone sealant, Dow-Corning "795" or General Electric "SCS 1200". 3-10. GROUNDING. 3-10.01. General. The electrical system and equipment shall be grounded in compliance with the National Electrical Code and the following requirements: JULY 2014 16 of 22 SECTION 16050 Electrical a. All ground conductors shall be at least 10 AWG soft drawn copper cable or bar, bare or green-insulated in accordance with the National Electrical Code. b. Ground cable splices and joints, ground rod connections, and equipment bonding connections shall meet the requirements of IEEE 837, and shall be exothermic weld connections or irreversible high-compression connections, Cadweld "Exothermic" or Burndy "Hyground". Mechanical connectors will not be acceptable. Cable connections to bus bars shall be made with high-compression two-hole lugs. c. Ground cable through exterior building walls shall enter within 3 feet below finished grade and shall be provided with a water stop. Unless otherwise indicated, installation of the water stop shall include filling the space between the strands with solder and soldering a 12 inch copper disc over the cable. d. Ground cable near the base of a structure shall be installed in earth and as far from the structure as the excavation permits, but not closer than 24 inches. The tops of ground rods and ground cable interconnecting ground rods shall be buried a minimum of 30 inches below grade, or below the frost line, whichever is deeper. e. All powered equipment, including lighting fixtures and receptacles, shall be grounded by a copper ground conductor in addition to the conduit connection. f. Ground connections to equipment and ground buses shall be made with copper or high conductivity copper alloy ground lugs or clamps. Connections to enclosures not provided with ground buses or ground terminals shall be made with irreversible high- compression type lugs inserted under permanent assembly bolts or under new bolts drilled and inserted through enclosures, other than explosion proof enclosures, or by grounding locknuts or bushings. Ground cable connections to anchor bolts; against gaskets, paint, or varnish; or on bolts holding removable access covers will not be acceptable. g. The grounding system shall be bonded to the station piping by connecting to the first flange inside the building, on either a suction or discharge pipe, with a copper bar or strap. The flange shall be drilled and tapped to provide a bolted connection. h. Ground conductors shall be routed as directly as possible, avoiding unnecessary bends. Ground conductor installations for equipment ground connections to the grounding system shall have turns with minimum bend radii of 12 inches. JULY 2014 17 of 22 SECTION 16050 Electrical i. Ground rods not described elsewhere shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet long, with a copper jacket bonded to a steel core. j. Test wells and covers for non-traffic areas shall be molded high density polyethylene. Test wells for traffic areas shall be precast concrete construction rated for traffic duty with concrete or cast iron covers. 3-10.02. Groundino Svstem Resistance. The grounding system design depicted on the Contract Drawings is the minimum design required for each building or structure. Each system shall comply with the maximum resistance of 5 ohms to ground. Contractor shall confirm the system grounding resistance with the results of the testing specified herein. Systems exceeding the maximum resistance specified shall be supplemented with additional grounding provisions and retested until the maximum specified resistance is achieved. 3-10.03. Grounding System Testing. The grounding system of each new building or structure and each existing building or structure indicated below, shall be tested to determine the resistance to earth. Testing shall be performed by an independent electrical or grounding system testing organization. Testing shall be completed after not less than three full days without precipitation and without any other moistening or chemical treatment of the soil. ~ 3-10.03.01. New Grounding Systems. Grounding systems of each new building . ..,.,., or structure shall be tested for resistance to earth utilizing the three-point fall of potential test as defined by IEEE 81. Testing shall be completed prior to installation of the electrical distribution equipment to ensure the grounding system is isolated from the utility grounding system and the systems of other structures. The current source probe for the test shall be placed in soil at a distance of 5 to 10 times the distance of the widest measurement across the grounding system ring or grid to ensure adequate measurements outside of the grounding system's sphere of influence. Test probe measurements shall be taken at a distance of one foot from the grounding system reference connection and at each 1 0 percent increment from the grounding system reference connection to the current source probe location. Test results shall be documented on a graphical plot with resistance in ohms on the vertical axis and distance in feet on the horizontal axis. The results shall clearly indicate a system resistance plateau which confirms a valid test procedure. 3.1 0.03.02. Existing Grounding Systems. Not used. 3.10.03.03. Grounding System Test Report. A report certified by the testing organization shall be prepared and submitted in accordance with the Submittals section. The final report shall include complete testing results for each building or structure, graphical representation of the test point results for the three-point fall of potential method, and complete observations of all site weather conditions JULY 2014 18 of 22 SECTION 16050 Electrical and other environmental conditions that may affect the test results. Final acceptance of the results reported shall be subject to the review and approval of Engineer. 3-11. LIGHTING FIXTURE INSTALLATION. The Drawings indicate the general locations and arrangements of the lighting fixtures. Fixtures in rows shall be aligned both vertically and horizontally unless otherwise specified. Fixtures shall be clear of pipes, mechanical equipment, structural openings, indicated future equipment and structural openings, and other obstructions. Conduit and wire for lighting fixture installation is not shown on the Drawings and shall be sized, furnished and installed by Contractor. Circuits to emergency lighting units, exit signs, and fixtures indicated to be night lights shall not be switched. Circuits to fluorescent lighting fixtures indicated to have emergency battery packs shall include an additional un-switched hot conductor. Conductors shall be minimum 10 AWG and conduit shall be minimum 3/4 inch for lighting fixture installation. 3-12. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR INSTALLATION. Not used. 3-13. MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING EQUIPMENT. Modifications to existing equipment shall be completed as specified herein and indicated on the Drawings. All existing facilities shall be kept in service during construction. Temporary power or relocation of existing power and control wiring, equipment, and devices shall be provided as required during construction. Coordination and timing of outages shall be as specified in other sections of these Specifications. Electrical power interruptions will only be allowed where agreed upon in advance with Owner, and scheduling at times of low demand may be required. 3-13.01. Demolition. Unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings, all cable and all exposed conduit for power and control signals of equipment indicated to be removed shall be demolished. Conduit supports and electrical equipment mounting hardware shall be removed, and holes or damage remaining shall be grouted or sealed flush. Conduit partially concealed shall be removed where exposed, and plugged with expanding grout flush with the floor or wall. Repairs shall be refinished to match the existing surrounding surfaces. Demolished equipment shall be discarded or salvaged as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in other sections of these Specifications. End of Section JULY 2014 19of22 SECTION 16050 Electrical STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCE: ICEA S-95-658 (NEMA WC 70). CONDUCTOR: Concentric-lay, uncoated copper; strand Class B. Wet/dry maximum operating temperature go•c. INSULATION: Cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene, ICEA S-95-658, Paragraph 3.6. SHIELD: None. JACKET: None. FACTORY TESTS: Cable shall meet the requirements of ICEA S-95-658. Cable Details Size Number Conductor Insulation Maximum Outside Diameter of Strands Thickness* AWGorkcmil mm' in. pm in. mm 14 2.5 7 0.030 760 0.17 4.32 12 4.0 7 0.030 760 0.19 4.83 10 6.0 7 0.030 760 0.21 5.33 8 10.0 7 0.045 1140 0.27 6.86 6 16.0 7 0.045 1140 0.31 7.87 4 25.0 7 0.045 1140 0.36 9.14 2 35.0 7 0.045 1140 0.42 10.67 1 40.0 19 0.055 1400 0.48 12.19 1/0 50.0 19 0.055 1400 0.52 13.21 2/0 70.0 19 0.055 1400 0.57 14.48 4/0 95.0 19 0.055 1400 0.68 17.27 250 120.0 37 0.065 1650 0.75 19.05 350 185.0 37 0.065 1650 0.85 21.59 500 300.0 37 0.065 1650 0.98 24.89 750 400.0 61 0.080 2030 1.22 31.00 1,000 500.0 61 0.080 2030 1.37 34.80 *The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 90 percent of the values indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, XLP, XHHW-2, conductor size, and voltage class. 600 Volt, Single Conductor Lighting/Power Cable (600-1-XLP-NONE-XHHW-2) BLACK & VEATCH Cable Data Figure 2-16050 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCE: UL 62, UL 1277. CONDUCTOR: 16 AWG (1.5 mm2), ?-strand, concentric-lay, uncoated copper. Maximum operating temperature 90"C dry, 75"C wet. INSULATION: Polyvinyl chloride, not less than 15 mils (380 pm) average thickness; 13 mils (330 pm) minimum thickness, UL 62, Type TFN. LAY: Twisted pair with 1-1/2 inch to 2-1/2 inch (38.10 mm-63.5 mm) lay. SHIELD: Cable assembly, combination aluminum-polyester tape and ?-strand, 20 AWG (0.5 mm2) minimum size, tinned copper drain wire, shield applied to achieve 100 percent cover over insulated conductors. JACKET: Conductor: Nylon, 4 mils (100 pm) minimum thickness, UL 62. Cable assembly: Black, flame-retardant polyvinyl chloride, UL 1277, applied over tape-wrapped cable core. CONDUCTOR One conductor black, one conductor white. IDENTIFICATION: FACTORY TESTS: Insulated conductors shall meet the requirements of UL 62 for Type TFN. Assembly jacket shall meet the requirements of UL 1277. Cable shall meet the vertical-tray flame test requirements of UL 1277. Cable Details Assembly Jacket Maximum Thickness• Outside Diameter in. pm in. mm Single Pair 0.045 1140 0.34 8.64 *The average thickness shall be not less than that indicated above. The minimum thickness shall be not less than 80 percent of the value indicated above. A durable marking shall be provided on the surface of the cable at intervals not exceeding 24 inches (600 mm). Marking shall include manufacturer's name, Type TC, Type TFN, conductor size, single pair, and voltage class. 600 Volt, Single Pair, Shielded Instrument Cable (600-51NGLE-PAIR-SH-INSTR) BLACK & VEATCH Cable Data Figure 4-16050 Section 16100 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1-1. SCOPE. This section covers the installation of electrical equipment. 1-2. GENERAL. Equipment specified to be installed under this section shall be erected, and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with Drawings, Specifications, engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless exceptions are noted by Engineer. The electrical equipment identified as being provided by others will be furnished complete for installation by Contractor. Technical specifications under which the equipment will be purchased are available. 1-2.01. Coordination. When manufacturer's field services are provided by the equipment manufacturer, Contractor shall coordinate the services with the equipment manufacturer. Contractor shall give Engineer written notice at least 14 days prior to the need for manufacturer's field services furnished by others. Submittals for equipment furnished under the original procurement contract will be furnished to Contractor upon completion of review by Engineer. Contractor shall review equipment submittals and coordinate with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts sole responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, and field construction criteria. 1-3. DELIVERY. STORAGE. AND HANDLING. 1-3.01. Delivery. When sills are required for electrical equipment, they shall be shipped ahead of the scheduled equipment delivery to permit installation before concrete is placed. 1-3.02. Storage. Upon delivery, all equipment and materials shall immediately be stored and protected by Contractor in accordance with the General Provisions paragraph 4-2. Materials Transportation, Handling and Storage and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, until installed in the Work. Equipment shall be protected by Contractor against damage and exposure from the elements. At no time shall the equipment be stored on earth or grass surfaces or come into contact with earth or grass. Contractor shall keep the equipment clean and dry at all times. Openings shall be plugged or capped (or otherwise sealed by packaging) during temporary storage. JULY 2014 1 of3 SECTION 16100 Electrical Equipment Installation 1-3.03. Handling. Electrical equipment shall be moved by lifting, jacking, or skidding on rollers as described in the manufacturer's instructions. Special lifting harness or apparatus shall be used when required. Lifting and jacking points shall be used when identified on the equipment. Contractor shall have required unloading equipment on site to perform unloading work on the date of equipment delivery. 1-4. ARC FLASH HAZARD LABELS. Switchgear, switchboards, motor control centers, motor control line-ups, and transfer switches shall be provided with permanent labels warning the risk of arc flash and shock hazard. Labels shall be designed in accordance with ANSI Z535.4-1998 and shall include the following information: WARNING Arc Flash and Shock Hazard Appropriate personal protection equipment (PPE) required. See NFPA 70E. Equipment must be accessed by qualified personnel only. Turn off all power sources prior to working on or inside equipment. PART 2 -PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3-1. INSTALLATION, TESTING, AND COMMISSIONING. All installation work shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. All material, equipment, and components specified to be installed according to this section shall be installed, tested, and commissioned for operation in compliance with NECA 1000 -NElS Specification System. Where required in NECA 1000, testing and commissioning procedures shall be followed prior to energizing equipment. Electrical equipment cubicles and vertical sections shall be installed plumb and level. Drawout equipment carriages, circuit breakers, and other removable components shall operate free and easy without binding or distortion. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, all indoor floor-mounted electrical equipment and control cabinets shall be installed on concrete equipment pads four inches [1 02 mm] in height. Indoor metalclad switchgear shall be bolted to steel floor channels which are installed level and flush with the top of the concrete floor or equipment pad. JULY 2014 2 of3 SECTION 16100 Electrical Equipment Installation Outdoor metalclad switchgear and interrupter gear with integral floor channels or beams shall be secured to concrete pads with anchor bolts and clips. Motor control centers with integral floor sills shall be secured to concrete floors or equipment pads with anchor bolts. Adequate bracing shall be provided for seismic forces. The bracing shall be designed to meet the requirements of the Meteorological and Seismic Design Criteria section. 3-1.01. Cleaning. All deposits of oil, grease, mud, dirt or debris shall be cleaned from the electrical equipment following installation and field wiring. A detergent water based solution, or other liquid cleaners not harmful to material or equipment finishes, shall be used as recommended by the manufacturer. End of Section JULY2014 3of3 SECTION 16100 Electrical Equipment Installation SECTION 16640 CATHODIC PROTECTION BY SACRIFICIAL ANODES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SCOPE This section includes materials, testing, and installation of corrosion protection and monitoring systems for metallic pipes including insulating flange kits, test stations, copper/copper sulfate reference electrodes, sacrificial anodes, wiring, and exothermic welds. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A. CONTRACTOR. The qualified construction firm selected by the Owner to have prime responsibility for the completion of work. B. OWNER. The Owner, as referred to in these specifications, is the City of Carlsbad. C. ENGINEER. The Engineer is the Owner's representative who is assigned to be the direct contact between the Owner and the Contractor. D. CORROSION ENGINEER. Retained by the Contractor, who is trained and experienced in cathodic protection installations and design and who is either a Registered Corrosion Engineer or a NACE Certified Cathodic Protection Specialist. 1.3 SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): C94-86 Ready-Mixed Concrete D-2220 Polyvinyl chloride Insulation for Wire and Cable D-1248 Polyethylene Plastics Molding and Extrusion Materials B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire B8 Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper Conductors B. Federal Specifications (FS) Military Specification (Mil. Spec): MIL-C-18480B Coating Compound, Bituminous, Solvent, Coal Tar Base C. Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Publications: 83-80 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires 486-76 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors D. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE): SP0169-2013 Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems E. National Association of Corrosion Engineers (NACE): JULY 2014 SP0286-2007 Electrical Isolation of Cathodically Protected Pipelines 1 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 1.4 SUBMITTALS The following information shall be submitted for approval of the ENGINEER in accordance with the Submittals section. A. Catalog Cuts: 1. High potential magnesium anodes 2. At-grade concrete test box with cast iron lid 3. Shunts 4. Wire and cable 5. Exothermic weld kits 6. Weld caps 7. Weld coating 8. Plastic warning tape 9. Insulating flange kits 10. Wax tape coating system B. As-Built Drawings. C. PART2 The CONTRACTOR shall maintain As-Built drawings showing exact locations of anodes, test stations, insulators, and wire trenching runs. Location changes from the design shall be clearly marked in red on a blue line copy of the design drawings. The As-Built drawings shall be submitted to the ENGINEER at the end of the project. The project is not considered complete until As-Built drawings are submitted. Test Results. 1. Insulator tests 2. Continuity tests 3. Anode testing and cathodic protection performance MATERIALS 2.1 GENERAL Materials and equipment shall be new and the standard product of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturing of such products. All materials and equipment shall bear evidence of safe operation approval from a nationally recognized testing laboratory. 2.2 ANODES 2.2.1 HIGH POTENTIAL MAGNESIUM ANODES A. Capacity. High potential magnesium anodes shall have a theoretical energy content of 1 000 ampere-hours per pound and have a minimum useful output of 500 ampere-hours per pound. JULY 2014 2 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes B. Chemical Composition (High Potential Magnesium). Aluminum Manganese Zinc Copper Nickel Iron Silicon Other Magnesium 0.01 percent (max) 0.5 to 1.3 percent 0.002 percent (max) 0.02 percent (max) 0.001 percent (max) 0.03 percent (max) 0.002 percent (max) 0.05 percent each (max) balance C. Open Circuit Potential. The open circuit potential of high potential magnesium anode, buried in the soil, shall be between 1.55 and 1.75 volts de versus a copper- copper sulfate reference electrode. D. Ingot Size And Weight. Anodes shall be 48-pound pre-packaged, high potential ingots with a trapezoidal cross section. Ingot length shall be 32 inches long. The total packaged weight shall be 1 05 lbs. E. Anode Construction. Anodes shall be cast magnesium with a galvanized steel core rod recessed on one end to provide access to the rod for connection of the lead wire. Silver braze the lead wire to the rod and make the connection mechanically secure. Insulate the connection to a 600-volt rating by filling the recess with epoxy and covering any exposed bare steel core or wire with heat shrinkable tubing. The insulating tubing shall extend over the lead wire insulation by not less than 1/2 inch. F. Anode Pre-Packaged Backfill Material. The anodes shall be completely encased and centered within a permeable cloth bag in a special low resistivity backfill mix with the following composition: Gypsum 75% Powdered bentonite 20% Anhydrous sodium sulfate 5% G. Backfill grains shall be such that 100 percent is capable of passing through a screen of 100 mesh. Backfill shall be firmly packed around the anode such that the ingot is approximately in the center of the backfill. The resistivity of the backfill shall be no greater than 50 ohm-em when tested wet in a soil box. Total prepackaged weight shall be approximately 1 05 pounds. 2.2.2 ZINC ANODES A. Type II Zinc Anode Electrode: Zinc anodes shall be made from 99.99% pure special high grade zinc. The anode chemical composition shall meet ASTM B418, Type II. JULY 2014 3 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes B. Chemical Composition Aluminum 0.005% Max Copper 0.002% Max Cadmium 0.003% Max Iron 0.0014% Lead 0.003 Max Zinc Remainder C. Open Circuit Potential. The open circuit potential of zinc anode, buried in the soil, shall be between 0.95 and 1.05 volts de versus a copper-copper sulfate reference electrode. D. Ingot Size And Weight. Zinc anode shall be 60-pound pre-packaged, Type II, ingots with a trapezoidal cross section. Ingot length shall be 60 inches long. The total packaged weight shall be 120 lbs. E. Anode Construction. Anodes shall be cast zinc with a galvanized steel core rod recessed on one end to provide access to the rod for connection of the lead wire. Silver braze the lead wire to the rod and make the connection mechanically secure. Insulate the connection to a 600-volt rating by filling the recess with epoxy and covering any exposed bare steel core or wire with heat shrinkable tubing. The insulating tubing shall extend over the lead wire insulation by not less than 1/2 inch. F. Anode Pre-Packaged Backfill Material. The anodes shall be completely encased and centered within a permeable cloth bag in a special low resistivity backfill mix with the following composition: Gypsum 75% Powdered bentonite 20% Anhydrous sodium sulfate 5% G. Backfill grains shall be such that 100 percent is capable of passing through a screen of 100 mesh. Backfill shall be firmly packed around the anode such that the ingot is approximately in the center of the backfill. The resistivity of the backfill shall be no greater than 50 ohm-em when tested wet in a soil box. Total prepackaged weight shall be approximately 1 05 pounds. 2.3 AT-GRADE TEST STATIONS A. Test Box. At-grade test boxes shall be round, pre-cast concrete with a cast iron lid. The dimensions shall be 14-1/4 inches O.D. by 9 inches I.D. by 12 inches high, similar to Christy G5 Utility Box with a cast iron supporting ring and lid. The lid shall be cast with the legend II CP Test II. B. Identification Tags. All test leads shall be identified with an Avery label (model 5361 ), self-adhesive covered with polyolefin clear heat shrink tubing (3mfp301 ). The label shall include: name of facility-size -pipe material; type of insulation; station number. C. JULY 2014 Concrete Pad. Test boxes mounted in unpaved areas shall be mounted in a reinforced 24-inch square by 4-inch thick concrete pad constructed of ASTM C94 ready-mix concrete. Rebar shall be No. 4 steel. 4 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes D. Test Station Enclosure: Test station enclosure and support post shall be Big Fink type with 9 terminals (minimum). The enclosure and the support post shall be orange in color. The bottom of the support post shall be cleaned and foam sealed after installation. 2.4 WIRE AND CABLE All wires shall be stranded copper with HMWPE or THWN insulation suitable for direct burial in corrosive soil and water, conforming to UL 83 and ASTM standards B3 or B8. HMWPE insulation shall conform to ASTM D1248 type 1, class c, grade 5. THWN insulation shall conform to ASTM D-2220. A. Test Leads. No. 8 AWG HMWPE. B. Anode Lead Wire. Anode lead wires shall be No. 12 AWG THWN. C. Mechanical Joint Bond Wire. No. 2 AWG HMWPE. D. All wire and copper connectors shall conform to UL 486-76. E. Wire Splicing. N0 wire splicing is permitted. 2.5 EXOTHERMIC WELD KIT Wire-to-metal connections shall be made by the exothermic "cadweld" welding process. Weld alloy shall be for steel pipe. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to determine the manufacturer's recommended weld charge size for metallic surfaces. A. Weld Caps. Royston Roybond Primer 747 and Royston Handy Cap 2 or equal. B. Weld Coating. Cold-applied fast-drying mastic consisting of bituminous resin and solvents per Mil. Spec. Mii-C-18480B such as Koppers bitumastic 50 or 505, Tnemec 40-h-413, tape-coat TC mastic or 3M Scotch Clad 244. The minimum coating thickness shall be 25 mils (0.025 inch). 2.6 INSULATING FLANGE KITS A. Gaskets: ANSI B-16.21, Type E, NEMA G10 glass with a rectangular o-ring seal for operation between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. Gaskets shall be suitable for the temperature and pressure rating of the piping system in which they are installed. B. Insulating Sleeves: 1/32-inch thick tube, full length, G 10 glass material per NEMA Ll-1 for operation between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. For installation at threaded valve flanges, half-length sleeves shall be used. C. Insulating Washers: 1/8-inch thick, full length, G1 0 glass per NEMA Ll-1 for operation between 20-deg. F and 150-deg. F. D. Steel Washers: 1/8-inch cadmium plated steel placed between the nut and insulating washer. JULY 2014 5 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes E. Coating: All buried insulating flanges shall be wax taped coated per AWWA C217. See section for "External Coating for Buried Surfaces" below. 2.7 EXTERNAL COATING FOR BURIED SURFACES A. All buried insulating flange kits, AND buried pipe sections and fitting surfaces that are not epoxy or polyurethane coated shall be wrapped with a three-layer petrolatum wax tape coating system per AWWA C217. B. Primer: All surfaces shall be prime coated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizer, inert fillers, and corrosion inhibitors having a paste-like consistency. C. Wax Tape: Covering material shall be a synthetic felt tape, saturated with a blend of petrolatum, plasticizers, and corrosion inhibitors that is formable over irregular surfaces. D. Plastic Outer Wrap: The primed and wax taped surface shall be covered with a plastic outer wrap consisting of three layers of 50-guage (1 0-mil) polyvinylidene chloride or PVC, high cling membrane wound together. 2.8 PLASTIC WARNING TAPE A. Plastic warning tape for all cable trenches shall be a minimum of 4 mils thick and 6 inches wide, inert plastic film designed for prolonged use underground, and printed with "Caution: Cathodic Protection Cable Below". 2.9 REFERENCE ELECTRODES A. Reference electrodes shall be the copper-copper-sulfate type, suitable for direct burial and designed to remain stable for at least 20 years. B. The reference electrode shall have a minimum sensing surface area of eight square inches. It shall be capable of maintaining a stable potential within plus or minus ten millivolts to that of another new reference electrode while a three microampere electrical current is applied. C. Reference electrode shall contain a barrier to inhibit migration of chloride ions from the soil into the reference electrode. D. Reference electrode lead wire shall be No. 14 AWG, stranded copper, with RHH-RHW yellow colored insulation and shall be silver soldered to the copper core of the reference electrode with the connection epoxy sealed by the manufacturer. E. Reference electrode shall be Stelth 2 Model SRE-007-CUY by Borin Manufacturing, or Staperm Model CU-1-UGPC by GMC Corrosion, or equal. PART3 CATHODIC PROTECTION INSTALLATION 3.1 GENERAL A. Standard. Cathodic protection installation shall conform to NACE SP0169-2013 "Recommended Practice, Control of External Corrosion on Underground or Submerged Metallic Piping Systems. JULY 2014 6 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes B. CONTRACTOR Qualifications. All work shall be performed by qualified, experienced personnel working under continuous, competent supervision. Qualified CONTRACTORs must demonstrate at least five years of experience with cathodic protection installations. C. Test Results. The CONTRACTOR shall submit a CORROSION ENGINEER's report including all test data, conclusions, repairs, and cathodic protection system performance. D. Notification For Testing. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least five days in advance of the anodes and test station installations. The ENGINEER or the OWNER's representative shall, at their discretion, witness the installation of anodes and cathodic protection facilities. Testing shall be as described in this specification section. 3.2 MAGNESIUM ANODES A. Inspection. All lead wires shall be inspected to ensure that the lead wire is securely connected to the anode core and that no damage has occurred to the lead wire. Lead wire failures shall require replacement of the complete anode and lead wire. B. Pre-Packaged Anode Inspection. Each anode shall be inspected to ensure that the backfill material completely surrounds the anode and that the cloth bag containing the anode and backfill material is intact. If the prepackaged anodes are supplied in a waterproof container or covering, that container or covering shall be removed before installation. The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER at least five (5) days in advance of installing the anodes. C. Location. Anodes are to be installed in augured holes as shown in the drawings. Anode positions can be adjusted slightly to avoid interference with existing structures. Alternate anode positions must be approved by the ENGINEER. D. Handling. Care shall be taken to ensure that the anode is never lifted, supported, transported, or handled by the lead wire. All anodes shall be lowered into the hole using a sling or a rope. E. Anode Hole Size and Depth. Magnesium Anodes shall be placed vertically at the bottom of a 12 feet deep augured hole, 12 inches in diameter(minimum). Zinc anode shall be placed in between the two crossing pipes 1 foot above the water pipe F. Soaking Requirements. Pre-Packaged Anodes. Once the prepackaged anodes are in the hole, 15 gallons of water shall be poured into the hole so that the anodes are completely covered with water. Allow the anodes to soak for a minimum of 30 minutes before any soil backfill is added. G. Soil Backfill. After the pre-packaged anodes are soaked, the hole is backfilled with stone-free, native soil. No voids shall exist around the anode bags and the anode lead wire shall not be damaged. The backfill shall be tamped and compacted in 18-inch lifts taking care not to damage the anode lead wire. 3.3 AT-GRADE TEST STATIONS A. Location. At-grade corrosion monitoring test boxes shall be located at the edge and directly behind the curb. All test box locations shall be approved by the ENGINEER. JULY 2014 7 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes B. Test Box Bottom. Test boxes shall be set in native soil. C. Test Lead Attachment. Test leads shall be attached to the pipe using the exothermic weld process. An 18-inch length of slack wire shall be coiled at each weld at the pipe and inside each test box. D. Concrete Pad. A 24-inch square by 4-inch thick reinforced concrete pad is required around each at-grade test station. Test boxes and concrete pad shall be flush with the top of the curb. 3.4 WIRE AND CABLE A. Test Lead Trench. Horizontal test or anode lead runs shall be placed in a 36-inch trench. B. Wire Handling. Wire leads shall not be stretched or kinked. Care shall be taken when installing wire and backfilling. If wire insulation is damaged during installation, it shall be rejected and replaced completely at the CONTRACTOR's expense. All rejected wire shall be removed from the job site at the close of each workday. C. Plastic Warning Tape. Plastic warning tape shall be installed in all wire trenches and 12 inches below finished grade. D. Splicing. Wire splices are not permitted. 3.5 WIRE-TO-PIPE CONNECTIONS A. All connections of copper wires to the pipe shall be made by the exothermic weld method. B. Weld Charge Size. It is the CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that the manufacturer's recommended weld charge size is used. C. Preparation Of Wire. Do not deform cable. Remove only enough insulation from the cable to allow for the exothermic weld. D. Preparation Of Metal. Remove all coating, dirt, grime and grease from the metal structure by wire brushing. Clean the structure to a bright, shiny surface free of all serious pits and flaws by using a file. The surface area of the structure must be absolutely dry. E. Wire Position. The wire is to be held at a 30-degree angle to the surface when welding. Only one wire shall be attached with each weld. F. Testing of All Completed Welds. After the weld has cooled, the weld shall be tested by striking the weld with a 2-lb hammer while pulling firmly on the wire. All unsound welds shall be cleaned, re-welded, and re-tested. All weld slag shall be removed. G. H. Coating Of Welds. The area to be coated shall be clean and completely dry. Apply a primer specifically intended for use with an elastomeric weld cap. Apply the weld cap and a bituminous mastic coating material to all exposed areas around the cap in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The coating shall overlap the structure coating by a minimum of 3 inches. Mortar Repair. Coating voids shall be filled with cement grout. JULY 2014 8 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 3.6 BOND WIRES A. Mechanical Joint Bond Wires. Two (2) No. 2 HMWPE bond wires are required across each non-insulating, in-line valve; a third No. 6 HMWPE bond wire is required from the valve to one outside flange as shown in the drawings. The bond wires shall be attached using the exothermic weld process. Bond wires shall have some slack wire at each weld to allow for creep when backfilling. 3.7 INSULATING FLANGE KITS A. General: Insulating flange kits shall be pre-assembled and installed as recommended by the manufacturer, and per NACE RPO 286. Moisture, soil, and other foreign matter must be fully removed and prevented from contacting any portion of mating surfaces. If foreign matter contacts any portion of these surfaces, then the entire flange shall be disassembled, cleaned, and dried before reassembly. B. Installation: Align and install insulating joints according to the manufacturer's recommendations to avoid damaging insulating materials. The manufacturer's bolt tightening sequence and torque specifications shall be followed. C. Paint Pigments: No electrically conductive pigments or paints shall be used either internally or externally on the bolts, washers, or flanges. D. Inspection: All buried insulating flanges shall be inspected, tested, and approved by the ENGINEER as described in Part 4 of this specification and prior to the application of wax tape coating. 3.8 EXTERNAL COATING A. All buried insulating flanges shall be covered with a 3-layer wax tape coating system per AWWA C217. Additionally, all in-line valves, flanges, couplings, and adapters that are not coated with a bonded dielectric coating shall be wax tape coated per AWWAC217. . B. Primer: Surfaces must be cleaned of all dirt, grime, and dust by using a wire brush and clean cloth. The surface shall be dry. Apply the primer by hand or brush. A thin coating of primer shall be applied to all surfaces and worked into all crevices. The primer shall be applied generously around bolts, nuts, and threads, and shall fully cover all exposed areas. The primer should overlap the pipe coating by a minimum of 3-inches. C. Petrolatum Saturated Tape: The wax tape can be applied immediately after the primer. Short lengths of tape shall be cut and carefully molded around each individual bolt, nut, and stud end. For long bolts (such as in couplings), short lengths of tape shall be cut and circumferentially wrapped around each individual bolt. After the bolts are covered, the tape shall be circumferentially wrapped around the flange with sufficient tension to provide continuous adhesion without stretching the tape. The tape shall be formed, by hand, into all voids and spaces. There shall be no voids or gaps under the tape. The tape shall be applied with a 1-inch minimum overlap. JULY 2014 9 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes 4.4 PIPELINE CONTINUITY THROUGH IN-LINE VALVES The CONTRACTOR's CORROSION ENGINEER shall measure the linear resistance of sections of pipe in which in-line valves or other mechanical joints have been installed. All testing shall be done by the CORROSION ENGINEER in the presence of the ENGINEER. A. Test Method. Resistance shall be measured by the linear resistance method. A direct current shall be impressed from one end of the test section to the other (typically test station to test station). A voltage drop is measured for several different current levels. The measured resistance (R) is calculated using the equation R=dV/1, where dV is the voltage drop between the test span and I is the current. The resistance shall be measured for at least four (4) different current levels. B. Acceptance. Acceptance is a comparison between the measured resistance (from the field test data) and the theoretical resistance. The theoretical resistance must consider the pipe (length and wall thickness) and the resistance of the bond wires. The measured resistance shall not exceed the theoretical resistance by more than 130%. The CONTRACTOR's CORROSION ENGINEER shall submit, within seven (7) days of the completion of the testing and in a report format, to the ENGINEER all calculations of the theoretical resistance and measured pipe resistance for each section tested. 4.5 INSULATING FLANGE KITS A. Responsibility: Insulating flanges shall be inspected and tested by the CONTRACTOR'S CORROSION ENGINEER and in the presence of the ENGINEER, prior to backfilling. Testing of the buried insulating flange kit prior to backfill will result in non-acceptance of the insulator. B. Test Method: The assembled flange shall be tested using a Gas Electronics Model 601 Insulation Checker specifically design for testing insulating flanges. The testing shall be done by a qualified CORROSION ENGINEER accepted by the ENGINEER and shall be done in accordance with NACE SP 0286. C. Acceptance: The installation of the insulating flange kit shall be considered complete when the testing device indicates no shorts or partial shorts are present. The CONTRACTOR shall provide assistance in finding any and all shorts or shorted bolts. All disassembly and reassembly necessary for acceptance shall be done at the CONTRACTOR'S expense. 4.6 CATHODIC PROTECTION PERFORMANCE The cathodic protection system shall be activated and tested by the CONTRACTOR's CORROSION ENGINEER in the presence of the ENGINEER. A. Test Method. The installed cathodic protection system testing shall include: native pipe-to-soil potentials, protected pipe-to-soil potentials, open-circuit anode potentials, and anode current output measurements. B. Acceptance. Shall be based on achieving the -850 mV criterion as outlined in NACE RP0169-96. All data shall be submitted, in a typed 8-1/2 X 11 inch report to the City's ENGINEER and the City's CORROSION ENGINEER for approval. JULY 2014 11 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes C. Compliance With Specifications. Deficiencies or om1ss1ons in materials or workmanship found by these tests shall be rectified at the CONTRACTOR's expense. Deficiencies shall include but are not limited to: broken leads, improper or unclean trenches, lack of 18-inch or slack wire in test boxes; improperly mounted test boxes; improper installation and testing of insulators; and other deficiencies associated with the workmanship, installation, and non-functioning equipment. END OF SECTION JULY 2014 12 of 12 SECTION 16640 Cathodic Protection by Sacrificial Anodes APPENDIX "A" PERTINENT CITY OF CARLSBAD & CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT STANDARD DRAWINGS ITEM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 CURB OR BERM. I ''L" PER PLAN I 3' I I ?! FIN ISHED SURFACE. m l 1 @ SAND I w .. W OR I l ilt ~ ~ tn I o!!~ 1 ~ I 1 -+---1 ~ ... ·: .~. I I ~~;1/!··:K! ~, ~~ ~ _71_~ -~11' ~ ® .·-~·:·i·.·!.l~~\~-~ I ld~- .... : .. :· ~ ·~ ~ h'll-'-------'w{·;::~;.::·/.; .. , ~ -IJ~---k ----1-.-..... ..,·;~:: n '~-~ -------------~/;;·~~·~}~.;.;·:;::-.. -' ~-------,....... ·' ·.0:. ,1 ..•.• I /~ 1. SE~~~~IFICATIONS r:~~~TI~,u!ft ' ,,: ;: '· !---45. PAINTlNG REQUIREMENTS 2. ALL BURIED NUTS AND BOLTS SHALL B WAX TAPE COATED PER SPEC. 09902 DESCRIPTION SPEC/DWG A.C.P. -RT X FL TEE. STEEL PIPE -FL TAPPED CONNECTION. W-14 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCK 560-C-3250. W-19 D.I.P. -MJ X FL TEE. FL. BOSS OUTLET ALTERNATE I DELETE THRUST BLOCK ). POLYETHYLENE WRAP. FL X FL GATE VALVE. CML&C 0.25" STEEL WELD ON PREFABRICATED CML&C WjTAPE COAT STEEL / 90· BEND 09870· 15061 VALVE BOX ASSEMBLY W-13 F X PE CML&C ST /SOWO FL COMPANION F ANGE DRILLED AND TAPPED FOR ITEM 12. THREADED PLUG. OR Sll. NIPPLE FEMALE HOSE NIPPLE & HOSE CAP. 12" VAL BOX MKD. "WATER" OR "RECYCLED WATER" W-6 FL X FL 45· D.l. BEND -REV. APPROVED DATE CARLSBAD MUNICIPAL WATER DISTRICT 6• BLOW-OFF ASSEMBLY (STEEL) -, ~T-t..L ·"-~ ?ko/~;. CITY ENGIN~R DATE STANDARD DWG. NO. w -II A APPENDIX "C" CITY OF OCEANSIDE STANDARD FIGURES